Solid Insulation - Electric Machines

Bataille
Catalogue : Motor starters solutions-Control protection components 06/07

Langue : EN
Numéro d'article : 814711 - Référence : MKTED205103EN Dernière mise à jour 03/04/2006
Date de Parution : 04-06
Date : 31/08/2006 / Heure : 09:40
Page 1
N° module,
Langue et
version
pour ce Titre module Nb
catalogue Contenu pages
Introduction - Projet 1
Page de garde
G0008 1.0.0 Explication Simply Smart 2
EN ++ Page de garde /
G0012 1.0.0 Structure documentaire cat. Solutions départs-moteurs Constituants de commande et protection puissan 2
EN ++ * Page de garde /
Sommaire général (S)
S0460 1.0.0 General contents for Motor starter solutions Control and protection components 2006-2007 2
EN ++ * Sommaire /
Index des références (R)
R0061 1.0.0 Index for Motor starter solutions Control and protection components 2006-2007 2
EN * Index /
Chapitre 1 - Démarreurs et équipements nus - Projet 1

Sommaire chapitre (S)
S0461 1.0.0 Contents chap 1 for Motor starter solutions Control and protection components 2006-2007 2
EN ++ * Sommaire /
TeSys généralités départs moteurs
24519 4.1.0 Niveaux de service des démarreurs TeSys 2
EN ++ Présentation - Description /
Guides de choix démarreurs et équipements nus
Date : 31/08/2006 / Heure : 09:40
Page 2
N° module,
Langue et
version
0248Q 3.0.0 Démarreurs et équipements nus TeSys 2
EN ++ Guide de choix /
TeSys combinés GV2
24520 6.1.0 TeSys model GV2 ++-Démarreurs automatiques combinés 6
EN ++ Caractéristiques - Performances / Références - Documents de commande /
24536 3.0.0 TeSys model GV2 ++-Démarreurs automatiques combinés 4
EN ++ Dimensions - Encombrements / Schémas /
TeSys associations
24539 4.0.0 Démarreurs directs TeSys avec disjoncteurs - 2 produits 2
EN ++ Guide d'application et tables d'association /
24540 3.0.0 Démarreurs directs TeSys avec disjoncteurs et relais de protection - 3 produits 4
24570 3.0.0 Départs directs avec integral 18, 32, 63 2
24541 4.0.0 Démarreurs directs TeSys avec fusibles NF-C ou DIN 2
24542 3.0.0 Démarreurs étoile-triangle TeSys avec disjoncteurs - 2 produits 2
24543 3.0.0 Démarreurs étoile-triangle TeSys avec disjoncteurs et relais de protection - 3 produits 2
24544 4.0.0 Démarreurs étoile-triangle TeSys avec protection par fusibles NF-C ou DIN 2
24545 3.0.0 Démarreurs directs et étoile-triangle TeSys avec protection par fusibles BS 2
TeSys LC
24546 3.0.0 TeSys model LC3, LC4-Démarreurs directs (4 à 37 kW) montés sur platine 2
EN ++ Dimensions - Encombrements / Références - Documents de commande / Schémas /
24547 4.0.0 "TeSys model LC3, LC4-Démarreurs ""étoile-triangle"" (5,5 à 132 kW) montés sur platine ou sur profi 2
EN ++ Présentation - Description / Références - Documents de commande /
24548 5.1.0 Démarreurs étoile-triangle TeSys modèle d à monter par vos soins 4
EN ++ Références - Documents de commande /
24549 4.0.0 "TeSys model LC3, LC4-Démarreurs ""étoile-triangle"" (5,5 à 132 kW) montés sur platine ou sur profi 2
LC
25015 5.0.0 "TeSys model LC3, LC4-Démarreurs ""étoile-triangle"" (90 à 375 kW)" 2
25018 3.0.0 Démarreurs étoile-triangle série F à monter par vos soins 4
25019 3.0.0 "TeSys model LC3, LC4-Démarreurs ""étoile-triangle"" (90 à 375 kW)" 2
TeSys modèle U jusqu'à 15 kW
Date : 31/08/2006 / Heure : 09:40
Page 3
N° module,
Langue et
version
0262Q 1.3.0 TeSys U-Démarreurs et équipements nus TeSys 2
24601 4.0.0 TeSys U-Démarreurs-contrôleurs 4
24605 7.0.0 TeSys U - Exemples d'applications 6
24611 6.0.0 TeSys U-Bases puissance (1 et 2 sens de marche) 2
24612 7.0.0 TeSys U - Contacts, système de précâblage, blocs limiteurs et accessoires 2
24614 5.0.0 TeSys U - Unités de contrôle 4
Atelier logiciel PowerSuite
60200 16.0. Atelier logiciel PowerSuite 4
TeSys modèle U jusqu'à 15 kW
24651 6.0.0 TeSys U - Contrôleurs 4
EN ++ Dimensions - Encombrements / Références - Documents de commande /
24617 5.0.0 TeSys U - Module de liaison parallèle 2
24615 6.0.0 TeSys U-Modules de communication AS-Interface 2
24735 3.0.0 TeSys U - Modules de communication Modbus 2
24618 2.6.0 TeSys U-Passerelles de communication LUF P 2
EN ++ Caractéristiques - Performances / Dimensions - Encombrements / Présentation - Description / Références - Documents de commande /
24620 9.0.0 TeSys U - Démarreurs-contrôleurs 6
EN ++ Caractéristiques - Performances /
24652 2.1.0 TeSys U-Contrôleurs (bases contrôle) 2
EN ++ Dimensions - Encombrements /
24621 1.4.0 TeSys U - Courbes de déclenchement et de limitation 4
EN ++ Courbes /
24622 1.1.0 TeSys U-Démarreurs-contrôleurs. Courbes selon catégorie d'emploi 2
EN ++ Courbes /
EN ++ Schémas /
EN ++ Schémas /
Intégral
Date : 31/08/2006 / Heure : 09:40
Page 4
N° module,
Langue et
version
21151 3.0.0 integral 18, 32, 63 6
EN ++ Présentation - Description / Terminologie /
21152 3.0.0 integral 18, 32, 63 4
21153 4.0.0 integral 18 8
EN ++ Caractéristiques - Performances / Guide de choix /
21162 3.0.0 Additifs pour integral 18 2
21164 3.0.0 Accessoires et bobines pour integal 18 2
21155 3.0.0 integral 18 - état des contacts 2
21156 4.0.0 integral 32 8
21165 4.0.0 Integral 32 2
21166 4.0.0 integal 32 en AC-1 2
EN ++ Guide de choix / Références - Documents de commande /
21168 3.0.0 Bobines et accessoires pour integral 32 2
21159 4.0.0 integral 63 10
21169 3.0.0 integral 63 2
21170 4.0.0 integral 63 en AC-1 2
EN ++ Guide de choix / Références - Documents de commande /
21172 3.0.0 Accessoires et bobines pour integral 63 2
21009 7.0.0 integral 18,32 et 63 4
EN ++ Dimensions - Encombrements / Installation - Mise en oeuvre /
21173 3.0.0 integral 18, 32 et 63 2
EN ++ Installation - Mise en oeuvre /
21011 8.0.0 integral 18, 32 et 63 4
EN ++ Schémas /
Date : 31/08/2006 / Heure : 09:40
Page 5
N° module,
Langue et
version
Adaptateurs LA9-Z
24581 3.0.0 TeSys Platines pour montage sur jeux de barres (Vohner) 2
Tego Power
0124Q 6.0.0 Système d'aide à l'installation pour constituants de départs-moteurs 2
15020 8.0.0 Système d'aide à l'installation pour constituants de départs-moteurs 2
Système de répartition de courant AK5
13230 5.0.0 Système de répartition de courant AK5 6
EN ++ Caractéristiques - Performances / Installation - Mise en oeuvre / Présentation - Description /
13231 4.0.0 Système de répartition de courant AK5 4
Guides de choix VVD
0605Q 6.0.0 Altivar 11...Altivar 71 - Guide de choix 2
Chapitre 2 - Démarreurs et équipements en coffret - Projet 1

EN ++ * Sommaire /
TeSys guides de choix démarreurs et équipements en coffrets
0243Q 3.0.0 Démarreurs et équipements en coffret 2
Démarreurs VARIO
23008 4.0.0 VARIO en coffret 2
Date : 31/08/2006 / Heure : 09:40
Page 6
N° module,
Langue et
version
23009 3.1.0 Additifs pour Vario en coffret 2
23010 3.0.0 VARIO en coffret 2
EN ++ Schémas /
Démarreurs GV2
24720 2.0.0 TeSys-Démarreurs et équipements en coffret 2
GV2 sécurité
21058 2.1.0 TeSys-GV2 ME en coffret de sécurité 2
TeSys démarreurs manuels à disjoncteur magnétique
24110 3.0.0 Démarreurs à commande manuelle TeSys en coffret 2
TeSys LE
24101 4.1.0 Démarreurs directs en coffret sans sectionneur 2
24102 3.0.0 Démarreurs directs en coffret sans sectionneur 2
24103 5.0.0 Démarreurs directs en coffret avec sectionneur 2
24104 3.0.0 Démarreurs directs en coffret avec sectionneur 2
24105 4.0.0 Démarreurs directs en coffret avec relais thermique triphasé 2
EN ++ Caractéristiques - Performances / Dimensions - Encombrements / Références - Documents de commande / Schémas /
24111 4.0.0 Démarreurs directs en coffret avec disjoncteur magnéto-thermique et contacteur 2
24106 3.0.0 Démarreurs étoile-triangle en coffret sans sectionneur 2
24107 3.0.0 Démarreurs étoile-triangle en coffret sans sectionneur 2
24108 3.0.0 Démarreurs étoile-triangle en coffret avec sectionneur 2
24109 3.0.0 Démarreurs étoile-triangle en coffret avec sectionneur 2
24120 2.0.0 Eléments séparés de rechange pour démarreurs en coffret 2
LE
25017 5.0.0 Démarreurs F étoile-triangle en coffret sans sectionneur 2
24034 4.0.0 Equipements AC-1 en coffret sans sectionneur 2
Date : 31/08/2006 / Heure : 09:40
Page 7
N° module,
Langue et
version
24044 3.0.0 Démarreurs et équipements en coffret sans sectionneur 2
24033 4.0.0 Equipements AC-1 en coffret avec sectionneur 2
24045 3.0.0 Démarreurs et équipements en coffret avec sectionneur 2
Démarreurs Intégral
21174 3.0.0 integral 18, 32 et 63 en coffret 2
21175 3.0.0 integral 18, 32 et 63 2
Intégral
21015 4.0.0 integral 32 et 63 en coffret (sécurité) 2
Integral 18- 32- 63
21017 4.0.0 integral 32 et 63 (sécurité) 4
EN ++ Schémas / Dimensions - Encombrements /
LG
24026 6.0.0 Démarreurs en coffret LG1, LG7 et LG8 4
24028 3.0.0 Démarreurs en coffret LG1, LG7 et LG8 2
LJ
26044 4.1.0 Démarreurs LJ7 et LJ8 2
26045 3.0.0 Démarreurs LJ7 et LJ8 2
Guides de choix VVD
0614Q 4.2.0 Altistart 48-Démarreurs progressifs 2
Guides de choix démarreurs et équipements en coffrets
0259Q 5.0.0 Démarreurs pour bus AS-i 2
Constituants dédiés
24091 3.1.0 AS-interface-Démarreurs directs-V1 6
Date : 31/08/2006 / Heure : 09:40
Page 8
N° module,
Langue et
version
24090 6.1.0 Démarreurs directs-V1 4
24084 10.1. Démarreurs directs : LF1, LF2-V1 2
24088 7.1.0 Démarreurs directs : LF7, LF8-V1 2
24089 5.1.0 Accessoires : démarreurs directs 2
24095 4.1.0 AS-interface-Démarreurs directs : LF1/LF2/LF7/LF8-V1 8
EN ++ Dimensions - Encombrements / Raccordements / Schémas /
24087 8.1.0 Accessoires : démarreurs directs 2
EN ++ Raccordements /
Interfaces pour produits génériques
24584 4.1.0 Interface TeSys AS-interface : démarreurs-V1 6
EN ++ Caractéristiques - Performances / Dimensions - Encombrements / Présentation - Description / Références - Documents de commande / Schémas /
Chapitre 3 - Disjoncteurs moteurs - Projet 1

EN ++ * Sommaire /
Guides de choix disjoncteurs-moteurs
0290Q 6.0.0 TeSys-Disjoncteurs magnéto-thermiques 2
TeSys GV2
0291Q 6.0.0 TeSys-Disjoncteurs-moteurs magnétiques 2
GV3
24509 1.0.0 TeSys-Disjoncteurs-moteurs magnéto-thermiques 6
EN ++ * Caractéristiques - Performances /
GK3
24523 5.0.0 TeSys-Disjoncteurs-moteurs magnétiques 4
24513 6.0.0 TeSys-Additifs pour disjoncteurs 6
TeSys GV2
24521 3.0.0 TeSys-Choix des disjoncteurs-moteurs 22
EN ++ Courbes /
GV3
Date : 31/08/2006 / Heure : 09:40
Page 9
N° module,
Langue et
version
24508 6.0.0 TeSys-Disjoncteurs magnéto-thermiques 6
GK3
24512 1.0.0 TeSys-Disjoncteurs magnéto-thermiques - adjonctions 10
EN ++ * Références - Documents de commande /
GV3
24538 5.0.0 TeSys-Disjoncteurs-moteurs magnéto-thermiques 8
GB2
0209Q 5.0.0 Disjoncteurs pour protection des circuit de contrôle 2
21092 3.0.0 Disjoncteurs magnéto-thermiques pour circuit de contrôle 4
EN ++ Caractéristiques - Performances / Guide de choix / Présentation - Description /
21093 4.0.0 Disjoncteurs magnéto-thermiques pour circuit de contrôle 2
Chapitre 4 - Interrupteurs-sectionneurs - Projet

EN ++ * Sommaire /
Vario
0212Q 5.0.0 VARIO et mini-VARIO 2
23011 5.0.0 VARIO et mini-VARIO 4
23007 3.0.0 Mini-VARIO pour applications standard 4
23006 3.0.0 VARIO pour hautes performances 4
23005 3.0.0 TeSys VARIO-Dispositifs de commande 6
23004 5.0.0 Mini-VARIO 2
23003 5.0.0 VARIO 2
Date : 31/08/2006 / Heure : 09:40
Page 10
N° module,
Langue et
version
GS1
0210Q 4.0.0 Constituants de protection par fusibles 2
Porte-fusibles LS1 - GK1
23041 6.0.0 Constituants de protection - Porte-fusibles 4
EN ++ Caractéristiques - Performances / Dimensions - Encombrements / Installation - Mise en oeuvre / Références - Documents de commande / Schémas /
Sectionneurs LS1 - GK1
23026 6.0.0 Constituants de protection - Sectionneurs 2
EN ++ Dimensions - Encombrements / Installation - Mise en oeuvre / Schémas /
GS1
0211Q 5.0.0 Interrupteurs-sectionneurs à fusibles (GS1) 2
23021 6.0.0 Constituants de protection - Interrupteurs-sectionneurs à fusibles de 32 à 1250 A 2
23023 7.0.0 Constituants de protection - Interrupteurs-sectionneurs à fusibles 4
23029 3.0.0 Constituants de protection - Interrupteurs-sectionneurs à fusibles UL 2
23031 5.1.0 Constituants de protection - Cartouches fusibles 4
Chapitre 5 - Contacteurs - Projet 1

EN ++ * Sommaire /
Guides de choix contacteurs et contacteurs-inverseurs
0257Q 5.0.0 Contacteurs 2
0239Q 3.0.0 TeSys model k-Contacteurs et contacteurs-inverseurs 2
TeSys modèle k
Date : 31/08/2006 / Heure : 09:40
Page 11
N° module,
Langue et
version
24401 3.0.0 TeSys model k-Contacteurs et contacteurs-inverseurs 4
24402 3.1.0 TeSys model k-Contacteurs en AC-3 et AC-4 2
24403 3.1.0 TeSys model k-Contacteurs en AC-1 2
24404 3.1.0 TeSys model k-Contacteurs-inverseurs en AC-3 et AC-4 2
24405 3.1.0 TeSys model k-Contacteurs-inverseurs en AC-1 2
24406 3.1.0 TeSys model k-Additifs et accessoires 4
24407 3.1.0 TeSys model k-Contacteurs 2
24408 3.0.0 TeSys model k-Contacteurs-inverseurs 2
Série SK
22100 3.0.0 Mini-contacteurs série SK 4
SKGC
22103 3.0.0 Mini-contacteurs type LC1 SKGC pour montage en tableau modulaire 4
TeSys modèle d
0246Q 4.0.0 TeSys model d-Contacteurs et contacteurs-inverseurs 2
0247Q 4.0.0 TeSys model d-Contacteurs et contacteurs-inverseurs basse conso. 2
24505 9.0.0 TeSys model d-Contacteurs et contacteurs-inverseurs 6
24506 6.0.0 TeSys model d-Additifs pour contacteurs 6
24501 7.1.0 TeSys model d-Contacteurs pour commande en AC-3 2
Date : 31/08/2006 / Heure : 09:40
Page 12
N° module,
Langue et
version
24502 9.0.0 TeSys model d-Contacteurs pour commande en AC-1 2
24503 7.0.0 TeSys model d-Contacteurs-inverseurs pour commande en AC-3 2
24510 6.1.0 TeSys model d-Contacteurs-inverseurs pour commande en AC-1 2
24504 6.1.0 TeSys model d-Eléments séparés pour réalisation de contacteurs-inverseurs 2
24511 12.1. TeSys d - Additifs et accessoires pour contacteurs 8
24507 6.0.0 TeSys model d-Bobines pour contacteurs 6
24531 7.1.0 TeSys - Contacteurs modèle d 4
24532 4.0.0 TeSys model d-Contacteurs 2
EN ++ Schémas /
24533 6.0.0 TeSys model d-Contacteurs-inverseurs 2
24569 3.0.0 TeSys model d-Contacteurs spécifiques pour commande de condensateurs 2
EN ++ Dimensions - Encombrements / Guide de choix / Références - Documents de commande / Schémas /
Guides de choix contacteurs et contacteurs-inverseurs
0204Q 4.0.0 Contacteurs et contacteurs-inverseurs modèles F et LC1 B 2
Série F
25007 10.0. TeSys model f-Contacteurs 8
25008 5.0.0 TeSys model f-Contacteurs 2
25012 8.0.0 TeSys model f-Contacteurs-inverseurs 6
25010 10.0. TeSys model f-Additifs et accessoires 6
25030 3.0.0 TeSys model f-Eléments séparés pour inverseurs 2
25014 7.0.0 TeSys model f - Bobines pour contacteurs 10
25011 6.0.0 TeSys model f-Contacteurs 6
25013 5.0.0 TeSys model f-Contacteurs-inverseurs 4
25031 4.0.0 TeSys model f-Inverseurs de sources grande puissance 2
Date : 31/08/2006 / Heure : 09:40
Page 13
N° module,
Langue et
version
25032 4.0.0 TeSys model f-Inverseurs de sources grande puissance 2
Retardateurs d'ouverture capacitifs
26061 4.0.0 Contacteurs - Retardateurs d'ouverture capacitifs 2
LC1-B
26100 4.0.0 Contacteurs LC1-B 2
26101 4.0.0 Contacteurs LC1-B en AC1 et AC3 2
26102 4.0.0 Accessoires, éléments de rechange pour contacteurs LC1-B 2
26105 4.0.0 Bobines pour contacteurs LC1-B 4
26103 4.0.0 Contacteurs LC1-B 2
Services et divers
X0009 3.0.0 Courant des moteurs 2
EN ++ Services et divers /
Généralités et choix
24001 4.10. Quelques définitions 2
EN ++ Terminologie /
TeSys généralités et choix
24565 3.0.0 Contacteurs pour catégorie d'emploi AC-3 4
EN ++ Courbes / Guide de choix /
24561 3.0.0 Contacteurs (choix en AC-1) 2
24566 3.0.0 Contacteurs pour catégories d'emploi AC-2 ou AC-4 4
24560 3.0.0 Contacteurs pour catégories d'emploi DC-1 à DC-5 4
24567 3.0.0 TeSys-Contacteurs pour circuits d'éclairage 6
24562 3.0.0 Contacteurs pour circuits de chauffage 2
EN ++ Guide de choix / Schémas /
24564 3.0.0 Contacteurs pour la commande de primaires de transformateurs et de condensateurs 2
24568 3.0.0 Contacteurs pour démarrage par autotransformateur 2
EN ++ Courbes / Guide d'application et tables d'association / Schémas /
24571 3.0.0 Contacteurs pour circuits rotoriques des moteurs à bagues 2
EN ++ Guide de choix / Présentation - Description /
Date : 31/08/2006 / Heure : 09:40
Page 14
N° module,
Langue et
version
24572 3.0.0 Commande à grande distance 4
Généralités et choix
24050 6.0.0 TeSys-Contacteurs pour le marché nord-américain 2
CV1-CV3-LC1B Contacteurs à composition variable
0236Q 3.10. Contacteurs à composition variable CV1, CV3 et LC1-B 2
26218 3.0.0 Contacteurs à composition variable CV 4
Contacteurs sous vide
26203 2.0.0 Contacteurs et contacteurs-inverseurs sous vide tripolaires 2
EN ++ Références - Documents de commande / Schémas /
CR1
26001 5.0.0 CR1F-Contacteurs à accrochage magnétique 6
EN ++ * Présentation - Description /
26004 5.0.0 CR1F-Eléments séparés 2
26005 6.0.0 Bobines pour contacteurs CR1F 2
26006 5.0.0 Bobines pour contacteurs CR1B 2
26007 5.0.0 CR1F-Eléments de rechange 2
GC2000
0255Q 3.0.0 Guide de choix de l'appareillage modulaire 2
20002 3.0.0 Contacteurs modulaires 2
EN ++ Installation - Mise en oeuvre / Présentation - Description /
Date : 31/08/2006 / Heure : 09:40
Page 15
N° module,
Langue et
version
20081 3.0.0 Télérupteurs modulaires, type GF 16 2
20082 3.0.0 Télérupteurs modulaires type GF 16 2
20083 3.0.0 Télérupteurs modulaires type GF 16 2
20012 3.0.0 Contacteurs modulaires pour tarification jour-nuit 2
EN ++ Installation - Mise en oeuvre / Présentation - Description /
Chapitre 6 - Relais de protection - Projet 1

EN ++ * Sommaire /
Guides de choix relais de protection
0254Q 4.0.0 Relais de protection 2
Généralités
27002 3.0.0 Constituants de protection - Protection des moteurs 2
27003 3.0.0 Constituants de protection - Protection des moteurs (suite) 2
LR.-K
22008 4.10. Relais de protection thermique série K 2
22009 5.20. Relais de protection thermique série K 2
EN ++ Dimensions - Encombrements / Installation - Mise en oeuvre / Références - Documents de commande / Schémas /
TeSys relais modèle d
Date : 31/08/2006 / Heure : 09:40
Page 16
N° module,
Langue et
version
24516 3.0.0 Relais de protection thermique modèle d 4
EN ++ Caractéristiques - Performances / Présentation - Description /
24514 5.0.0 Relais de protection thermique TeSys d 2
24515 6.2.0 Accessoires pour relais de protection thermique modèle d 2
24534 5.2.0 Relais de protection thermique modèle d 4
LR9-F
27071 5.0.0 TeSys model LR9-Relais LR9-F 4
27075 5.0.0 TeSys model LR9-Accessoires pour relais LR9-F 2
LR97D
24517 5.6.0 Relais de surcharge électroniques instantanés 6
EN ++ Caractéristiques - Performances / Courbes / Dimensions - Encombrements / Installation - Mise en oeuvre / Présentation - Description / Références - Documents de commande / Schémas /
LT6
27055 6.0.0 TeSys model LT6-Relais multifonction LT6-P (fonctions) 2
27056 6.1.0 TeSys model LT6-Relais multifonction LT6-P 6
EN ++ Caractéristiques - Performances / Courbes /
EN ++ Schémas /
LT3
0231Q 3.0.0 TeSys model LT3-Dispositifs de commande LT3 2
27064 4.0.0 TeSys model LT3-Dispositifs de commande 4
RM1-XA
Date : 31/08/2006 / Heure : 09:40
Page 17
N° module,
Langue et
version
27031 4.0.0 Relais unipolaires de protection RM1 XA 4
Chapitre 7 - Fonctions additionnelles d'automatisme - Projet 1

S0467 1.0.0 Contents chap 7 for Motor starter solutions - Control and protection components 2006-2007 2
EN ++ * Sommaire /
Contacteurs auxiliaires série K
22002 10.0. Mini-contacteurs auxiliaires série K 2
22003 9.0.0 Mini-contacteurs auxiliaires série K 4
22004 7.0.0 Mini-contacteurs auxiliaires série K 2
Contacteurs auxiliaires série SK
22200 5.0.0 Mini-contacteurs auxiliaires 2
22201 5.0.0 Mini-contacteurs auxiliaires CA2 et CA3 2
22202 5.0.0 Mini-contacteurs auxiliaires 2
TeSys contacteurs auxiliaires modèle d
24526 5.1.0 Contacteurs auxiliaires TeSys modèle d 4
24525 11.0. Contacteurs auxiliaires TeSys modèle d 4
24537 4.1.0 Contacteurs auxiliaires TeSys modèle d 2
Zelio Time
0249Q 3.0.0 Zelio Time-Relais temporisés 2
Zelio Control RM4
0227Q 2.1.0 Relais de mesure et de contrôle 4
Chapitre 8 - Services - Projet 1

Date : 31/08/2006 / Heure : 09:40
Page 18
N° module,
Langue et
version
S0477 1.0.0 "Contents chapter 8 cat ""Motor starter solutions - Control and protection components"" 2005." 2
EN ++ * Sommaire /
Services et divers
X0009 3.0.0 Courant des moteurs 2
X0002 3.1.0 Traitement de protection du matériel 2
X0008 5.1.0 Normes et certifications de produits (généralités) 2
X0004 4.0.0 Degrés de protection procurés par les enveloppes 2
Page de lancement (L)
L0005 2.0.0 Page de lancement TEST 2
EN ++ * Générique
Page de garde
G0003 2.0.0 Introduction à TE.com + Essentiel (3ème de couv.) 2
EN ++ Page de garde /
Couverture
C0074 1.0.0 Couv. catalogue Solutions départs-moteurs 2006-2007 2
EN ++ * Couverture /
288 Total nombre de modules Total nombre de pages 892
Sommaire 0
1 - TeSys motor starters -
open version
b Levels of services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/2
Selection guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .page 1/4

1
Combination automatic motor starters
b D.O.L. starters, type 1 coordination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/6
b D.O.L. starters, type 2 coordination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/10
Combination starters for customer assembly

b D.O.L. starters
v With circuit-breaker and overload protection built into the circuit-breaker . .page 1/16
v With circuit-breaker and overload protection by separate thermal
overload relay. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/18
v With integral 18, 32, 63 contactor breakers with overload protection
by separate module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/22
v With fuse protection (NF C or DIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/24
v With fuse protection (BS fuses) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/32
b Star-delta starters
v With circuit-breaker and overload protection built into the circuit-

breaker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/26
v With circuit-breaker and overload protection by separate overload
relay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/28
v With fuse protection (NF C or DIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/30
v With fuse protection (BS fuses) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/33
D.O.L. starters, plate mounted, for motor control

b 4 to 37 kW, with isolating device, pre-assembled . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/34
Star-delta starters for motor control

b 5.5 to 132 kW, without isolating device, pre-assembled . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/37
b 7.5 to 132 kW, without mechanical interlock, for customer assembly . . page 1/39
b 90 to 375 kW,
v Without isolating device, pre-assembled . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/45

v On chassis for customer assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/47
TeSys U starter-controllers
Selection guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .page 1/52
b TeSys U starter-controllers
v Presentation and application examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/54

v Non-reversing and reversing power bases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/64
v Add-on contact blocks and auxiliary contact modules . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/66
v Power connection pre-wired system, limiter blocks and accessories . page 1/67
v Standard and advanced control units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/69
v Multifunction control units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/70
v Function modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/71
b PowerSuite software workshop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/72
b TeSys U controllers
v Control bases and control units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/76
b Parallel wiring module and pre-wired coil connection components . . . . page 1/80
1/0
b AS-Interface communication modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/82
b Modbus communication modules and pre-wired coil connection

components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/84 1
b Communication gateways LUF P . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/86
integral 18, 32 and 63 contactor breakers

and reversing contactor breakers
b General, terminology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .page 1/116
b Equipment selection for starters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/122
b Contactor breakers and reversing contactor breakers integral 18 . . . . . . page 1/126
Adaptators for use with busbar system

b With 40 mm and 60 mm pitch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/200
TeSys Quickfit installation system for motor starter

components
Selection guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/212
b Power circuit pre-wiring components. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/219
b Control-command pre-wiring components. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/221
Pre-assembled panel busbar system AK5

b Busbar systems, removable power sockets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/234
b Component mounting plates, extension plates, control terminal

blocks, accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/235
b Variable speed drives for asynchronous motors
1/1
General 1
TeSys motor starters 1
Levels of service
Type 1 and type 2 coordination according to the standard

The standard defines tests at different levels of current; the purpose of these tests is
1 to place the equipment in extreme conditions.
The standard defines 2 types of coordination, according to the condition of the
components after testing:
type 1,
type 2.
To determine the type of coordination, the standard requires that the behaviour of the
equipment be tested under overload and short-circuit conditions for 3 fault current
values, covering overload and short-circuit conditions.
Type 1 coordination
Type 1 coordination requires that in a short-circuit condition, the contactor or starter
must not present any danger to personnel or installations and must not be able to
resume operation without repair or the replacement of parts.
Type 2 coordination
Type 2 coordination requires that In a short-circuit condition, the contactor or starter
must not present any danger to personnel or installations and must subsequently
be able to resume operation. The risk of contact welding is permissible; in this case,
the manufacturer must indicate measures to be taken regarding maintenance of the
equipment.
Type 2 coordination increases reliability of operation.
t
Current values
Overload zone Low-level Short-circuit zone Current “Ico” (overload I < 10 In)
short-circuit zone The thermal overload relay associated with the contactor provides protection against
this type of fault, up to a value Ico (see curve) defined by the manufacturer.
Standard IEC 60947-4-1 specifies the 2 current values to be used for checking
coordination between the thermal overload relay and the short-circuit protection
device:
1 2 b at 0.75 Ico only the thermal overload relay must trip,
4 b at 1.25 Ico the short-circuit protection device must operate.
5
Current “r” (low level short-circuit 10 < I < 50 In)
The main cause of this type of fault is the deterioration of insulating materials.
Standard IEC 60947-4-1 defines an intermediate short-circuit current “r”. This test
current makes it possible to check whether the protection device is providing
protection against low-level short-circuits.
7
Operational current Ie (AC-3) (A) Current “r” (kA)
3 6 Ie y 16 1
1 10 50 a k In
16 < Ie y 63 3
In Ir Iq
0,75 Ico 1,25 Ico 63 < Ie y 125 5
Ico
125 < Ie y 315 10
1 Thermal overload relay curve. 315 < Ie y 630 18
2 Fuse. 630 < Ie y 1000 30
3 Tripping of thermal overload relay only.
4 Thermal limit of the circuit-breaker. Current “Iq” (short-circuit > current “r”)
5 Thermal overload relay limit. This type of fault corresponds to a dead short and is relatively rare. It can be caused
6 Current broken by the SCPD (1). by a connection error during maintenance work. Short-circuit protection is provided
7 Circuit breaker magnetic trip. by fast operating devices.
Standard IEC 60947-4-1 defines a current “Iq”. The coordination tables supplied by
Schneider Electric are based on a current “Iq” that is generally u 50 kA.
(1) SCPD: short-circuit protection device.
1/2
General (continued) 1
TeSys motor starters 1
Levels of service
Selection
No coordination Considerable risks to both persons and

equipment.
1
Not authorised by standards:
v NF C 15-100 and IEC 60364-1, article 133-1
(installation regulations),
v EN/IEC 60204-1, article 7
(electrical equipment in machines),
v IEC 60947-4-1, article 8.2.5. (starters)
Type 1 coordination The most frequently used solution.

b Equipment costs are lower.
b Reliability of operation is not a requirement.
b Before restarting, it may be necessary to repair the
motor starter.
Consequences:
v significant amount of machine downtime,
v skilled maintenance personnel required to repair,
check, obtain supplies.
Example: air conditioning in commercial premises.
Type 2 coordination This solution ensures reliability of operation.
Consequences:
v reduced machine downtime,
v reduced maintenance after a short-circuit.
Example: escalators.
Total coordination With this solution, no damage or misadjustment is

permissible and reliability of operation is
guaranteed.
Consequences:
v immediate return to service,
v no special precautions required.
Examples: smoke extraction, fire-fighting pumps.
1/3
Selection guide 1
TeSys motor starters - open
version 1
Applications Pre-assembled starters
1 Small machines starting under full load: D.O.L. starters Machines starting
under no-load:
star-delta starters
Starter type D.O.L. starters with circuit-breaker D.O.L. starters with Soft start units or
fuse protection star-delta starters to
be used in association
with a circuit-breaker
or fuses
Level of service Type 1 coordination Type 2 coordination – –
Power at 400 V Up to 5.5 kW Up to 37 kW Up to 37 kW Up to 132 kW
Type of components Combination automatic motor starter Fuse carrier + plate 3 contactors (line, star
with overload protection built into the circuit-breaker mounted contactor and delta, mounted on
plate, rail or chassis)
Pages 1/6 and 1/7 1/8 and 1/9 1/10 and 1/11 1/34 1/37
1/4
1
1
Starters for customer assembly
Small machines starting under full load: D.O.L. starters

Machines starting under no-load: star-delta starters
1
D.O.L. or star-delta starters with circuit-breakers D.O.L. or star-delta starters with fuses
Total coordination Type 1 and type 2 coordination – –
Up to 30 kW Up to 110 kW Up to 315 kW Up to 355 kW
Contactor-breaker Thermal magnetic Thermal-magnetic Fuse carrier Switch-disconnector-fuse

circuit-breaker circuit-breaker + contactor(s) + contactor(s)
+ contactor(s) + contactor(s) + thermal overload relay + thermal overload relay
+ thermal overload relay
1/22 and 1/23 1/16 and 1/17 1/18 and 1/19 1/24 1/25, 1/31
1/26 and 1/27 1/28 and 1/29 1/30 1/32 and 1/33
1/5
References 1
version 1

with overload protection built into the circuit-breaker
D.O.L. starters, non-reversing, from 0.37 to 5.5 kW at 400/415 V, type 1 coordination
1 This pre-assembled combination comprises:

b 1 motor circuit-breaker type GV2 ME,
b 1 3-pole contactor,
b 1 combination block GV2 AF01.
Characteristics
Starter type GV2 ME06K1 ME07K1 ME08K1 ME10K1 ME14K1 ME16K1
Breaking Conforming to 400/415 V kA 50 50 50 50 50 15
capacity (lq) IEC 60947-4-1
(1) 440 V kA 50 50 50 50 15 8
500 V kA 50 50 50 50 10 (4 kW) 6
6 (5.5 kW)
References
D.O.L. starters, non-reversing
Standard power ratings Setting Fixed For customer assembly Pre-assembled Weight
of 3-phase motors range of magnetic
50-60 Hz in AC-3 thermal tripping
400/ 440 V 500 V trips current Motor Contactor Basic reference,
415 V 13 Irth circuit-breaker Reference to to be completed
Reference be completed by adding the
(3) voltage code
(2)
kW kW kW A A kg
0.37 0.37 0.37 1…1.6 22.5 GV2 ME06 LC1 K06 GV2 ME06K1pp 0.460
0.55 0.55 0.55
– – 0.75
0.75 0.75 – 1.6…2.5 33.5 GV2 ME07 LC1 K06 GV2 ME07K1pp 0.460
– 1.1 1.1
1.1 – 1.5 2.5…4 51 GV2 ME08 LC1 K06 GV2 ME08K1pp 0.460
1.5 1.5 2.2
2.2 2.2 – 4…6.3 78 GV2 ME10 LC1 K06 GV2 ME10K1pp 0.460
– 3 3
GV2 ME10K1pp 3 – 4 6…10 138 GV2 ME14 LC1 K09 GV2 ME14K1pp 0.460
4 4 5.5
5.5 5.5 7.5 9…14 170 GV2 ME16 LC1 K12 GV2 ME16K1pp 0.460
Add-on blocks
Description Sold in Unit Weight
lots of reference kg
Combination block between circuit-breaker and contactor 10 GV2 AF01 0.020
(1) The breaking performance of circuit-breakers GV2 ME can be increased by adding a current limiter GV1 L3, see page 3/9.
(2) Standard control circuit voltages (for other voltages, please consult your Regional Sales Office).
Volts 24 110 220/230 230 230/240 380/400
a 50/60 Hz B7 F7 M7 P7 U7 Q7
c (4) BW3 – – – – –
(3) Please consult your Regional Sales Office.
(4) Coil: low consumption (1.5 W), wide range (0.7…1.3 Uc) with integral suppression device as standard.
Dimensions : Schemes :
page 1/12 page 1/14
1/6
References 1
version 1

D.O.L. starters, reversing, from 0.37 to 5.5 kW at 400/415 V, type 1 coordination
This pre-assembled combination comprises:

1
b 1 3-pole reversing contactor,
Characteristics
Starter type GV2 ME06K2 ME07K2 ME08K2 ME10K2 ME14K2 ME16K2
Breaking Conforming to 400/415 V kA 50 50 50 50 50 15
(1) 440 V kA 50 50 50 50 15 8
500 V kA 50 50 50 50 10 (4 kW) 6
6 (5.5 kW)
References
D.O.L. starters, reversing
(3) voltage code
(2)
kW kW kW A A kg
0.37 0.37 0.37 1…1.6 22.5 GV2 ME06 LC2 K06 GV2 ME06K2pp 0.460
0.55 0.55 0.55
– – 0.75
0.75 0.75 – 1.6…2.5 33.5 GV2 ME07 LC2 K06 GV2 ME07K2pp 0.460
– 1.1 1.1
1.1 – 1.5 2.5…4 51 GV2 ME08 LC2 K06 GV2 ME08K2pp 0.460
GV2 ME10K2 pp 1.5 1.5 2.2
2.2 2.2 – 4…6.3 78 GV2 ME10 LC2 K06 GV2 ME10K2pp 0.460
– 3 3
3 – 4 6…10 138 GV2 ME14 LC2 K09 GV2 ME14K2pp 0.460

4 4 5.5
5.5 5.5 7.5 9…14 170 GV2 ME16 LC2 K12 GV2 ME16K2pp 0.460
Add-on blocks
Combination block between circuit-breaker and contactor 10 GV2 AF01 0.020
Volts 24 110 220/230 230 230/240 380/400
a 50/60 Hz B7 F7 M7 P7 U7 Q7
c (4) BW3 – – – – –
(4) Coil: low consumption (1.5 W), wide range (0.7…1.3 Uc) with integral suppression device as standard.
page 1/12 page 1/14
1/7
References 1
version 1

D.O.L. starters, non-reversing, from 0.06 to 37 kW at 400/415 V, type 1 coordination

b 1 motor circuit-breaker type GV2 ME or GV3 ME,
b 1 combination block GV2 AF3 (for GV2 DM) or 3 power connections (for GV3 DM).
Characteristics
Starter type GV2/GV3 DM DM DM DM DM DM DM DM DM DM DM DM
102 to 114 116 120 121 122 132 138 140 150 163 180
DM
110
Breaking Conforming to 400/415 V kA 50 50 15 15 15 15 10 35 35 35 35 35
capacity (lq) IEC 60947-4-1 440 V kA 50 15 8 8 6 6 6 25 25 25 25 10
(1)
500 V kA 50 6 6 6 4 4 4 8 8 8 8 4
References
(2) voltage code
(2)
kW kW kW A A kg
0.06 0.06 – 0.16…0.25 2.4 GV2 ME02 LC1 D09pp GV2 DM102pp (3) 0.596
0.09 0.09 – 0.25…0.40 5 GV2 ME03 LC1 D09pp GV2 DM103pp (3) 0.596
– 0.12
0.12 – – 0.40…0.63 8 GV2 ME04 LC1 D09pp GV2 DM104pp (3) 0.596
0.18 0.18 –
0.25 0.25 – 0.63…1 13 GV2 ME05 LC1 D09pp GV2 DM105pp (3) 0.596
0.37 0.37 –
– – 0.37 1…1.6 22.5 GV2 ME06 LC1 D09pp GV2 DM106pp (3) 0.596
0.55 0.55 0.55
– – 0.75
0.75 0.75 – 1.6…2.5 33.5 GV2 ME07 LC1 D09pp GV2 DM107pp (3) 0.596
– 1.1 1.1
GV2 DM102pp
1.1 – 1.5 2.5…4 51 GV2 ME08 LC1 D09pp GV2 DM108pp (3) 0.596
1.5 1.5 2.2
2.2 2.2 – 4…6.3 78 GV2 ME10 LC1 D09pp GV2 DM110pp (3) 0.596
– 3 3
3 – 4 6…10 138 GV2 ME14 LC1 D09pp GV2 DM114pp (3) 0.596
4 4 5.5
5.5 5.5 7.5 9…14 170 GV2 ME16 LC1 D12pp GV2 DM116pp 0.601
7.5 7.5 – 13…18 223 GV2 ME20 LC1 D18pp GV2 DM120pp 0.606
– 9 9
9 11 11 17…23 327 GV2 ME21 LC1 D25pp GV2 DM121pp 0.646
11 – 15 20…25 327 GV2 ME22 LC1 D25pp GV2 DM122pp 0.646
15 15 18.5 24…32 416 GV2 ME32 LC1 D32pp GV2 DM132pp 0.651
18.5 18.5 18.5 25…40 520 – – GV3 DM138pp 1.965
18.5 22 22 25…40 520 – – GV3 DM140pp 2.917
22 25 30 40…63 819 – – GV3 DM150pp 2.917
30 30 37 40…63 819 – – GV3 DM163pp 2.917
37 45 55 56…80 1040 – – GV3 DM180pp 3.044
Add-on blocks
Description Mounting Sold in Unit Weight
of GV2 lots of reference kg
Combination block between 5 rail 10 GV2 AF3 0.016
circuit-breaker and contactor Mounting plate 10 GV2 AF4 0.016
LAD 311
Volts 24 220 230
a 50/60 Hz B7 M7 P7
c (4) BD – –
(3) Type 2 coordination also possible, see page 1/17.
(4) Only available for GV2 DM. Coil with integral suppression device as standard.
pages 1/12 and 1/13 page 1/14
1/8
References 1
version 1

D.O.L. starters, reversing, from 0.06 to 15 kW at 400/415 V, type 1 coordination

1
Characteristics
Starter type GV2 DM202 to DM214 DM216 DM220 DM221 DM222 DM232
DM210
Breaking Conforming to 400/415 V kA 50 50 15 15 15 15 10
(1) 440 V kA 50 15 8 8 6 6 6
500 V kA 50 10 6 6 4 4 4
References
D.O.L. starters, reversing (3)
(4) voltage code
(2)
kW kW kW A A kg
0.06 0.06 – 0.16…0.25 2.4 GV2 ME02 LC2 D09pp GV2 DM202pp 0.963
0.09 0.09 – 0.25…0.40 5 GV2 ME03 LC2 D09pp GV2 DM203pp 0.963
– 0.12
0.12 – – 0.40…0.63 8 GV2 ME04 LC2 D09pp GV2 DM204pp 0.963
0.18 0.18 –
0.25 0.25 – 0.63…1 13 GV2 ME05 LC2 D09pp GV2 DM205pp 0.963
0.37 0.37 –
– – 0.37 1…1.6 22.5 GV2 ME06 LC2 D09pp GV2 DM206pp 0.963
0.55 0.55 0.55
– – 0.75
GV2 DM202pp 0.75 0.75 – 1.6…2.5 33.5 GV2 ME07 LC2 D09pp GV2 DM207pp 0.963
– 1.1 1.1
1.1 – 1.5 2.5…4 51 GV2 ME08 LC2 D09pp GV2 DM208pp 0.963
1.5 1.5 2.2
2.2 2.2 – 4…6.3 78 GV2 ME10 LC2 D09pp GV2 DM210pp 0.963
– 3 3
4 4 5.5
5.5 5.5 7.5 9…14 170 GV2 ME16 LC2 D12pp GV2 DM216pp 0.973
7.5 7.5 – 13…18 223 GV2 ME20 LC2 D18pp GV2 DM220pp 0.983
– 9 9
9 11 11 17…23 327 GV2 ME21 LC2 D25pp GV2 DM221pp 1.063
15 15 18.5 24…32 416 GV2 ME32 LC2 D32pp GV2 DM232pp 1.073
Add-on blocks
LAD 311
Volts 24 220 230
a 50/60 Hz B7 M7 P7
c (5) BD – –
(3) Type 2 coordination also possible, see page 1/19.
(4) See page 5/58.
(5) Coil with integral suppression device as standard.
page 1/12 page 1/15
1/9
References 1
version 1

D.O.L. starters, non-reversing, from 0.06 to 15 kW at 400/415 V, type 2 coordination

b 1 motor circuit-breaker type GV2 P,
Characteristics
Starter type GV2 DP102 to DP114 DP116 DP120 DP121 DP122 DP132
DP110
(1) 440 V kA 130 130 50 20 20 20 20
500 V kA 130 50 42 10 10 10 10
References
(3) voltage code
(2)
kW kW kW A A kg
0.06 0.06 – 0.16…0.25 2.4 GV2 P02 LC1 D09pp GV2 DP102pp 0.686
– 0.09 – 0.25…0.40 5 GV2 P03 LC1 D09pp GV2 DP103pp 0.686

0.09 0.12
0.12 – – 0.40…0.63 8 GV2 P04 LC1 D09pp GV2 DP104pp 0.686
0.18 0.18 –
0.25 0.25 – 0.63…1 13 GV2 P05 LC1 D09pp GV2 DP105pp 0.686
0.37 0.37 –
– – 0.37 1…1.6 22.5 GV2 P06 LC1 D09pp GV2 DP106pp 0.686
0.55 0.55 0.55
– – 0.75
0.75 0.75 – 1.6…2.5 33.5 GV2 P07 LC1 D09pp GV2 DP107pp 0.686
GV2 DP102pp – 1.1 1.1
1.1 – 1.5 2.5…4 51 GV2 P08 LC1 D09pp GV2 DP108pp 0.696
1.5 1.5 2.2
2.2 2.2 – 4…6.3 78 GV2 P10 LC1 D09pp GV2 DP110pp 0.736
– 3 3
3 – 4 6…10 138 GV2 P14 LC1 D09pp GV2 DP114pp 0.736
4 4 5.5
5.5 5.5 7.5 9…14 170 GV2 P16 LC1 D25pp GV2 DP116pp 0.741
– 7.5 9
7.5 9 – 13…18 223 GV2 P20 LC1 D25pp GV2 DP120pp 0.736
9 11 11 17…23 327 GV2 P21 LC1 D25pp GV2 DP121pp 0.741
11 – 15 20…25 327 GV2 P22 LC1 D25pp GV2 DP122pp 0.741
15 15 18.5 24…32 416 GV2 P32 LC1 D32pp GV2 DP132pp 0.741
Add-on blocks
LAD 311
(1) The breaking performance of circuit-breakers GV2 P can be increased by adding a current limiter GV1 L3, see page 3/9.
Volts 24 220 230
a 50/60 Hz B7 M7 P7
c (4) BD – –
(3) See page 5/58.
page 1/13 page 1/15
1/10
References 1
version 1

D.O.L. starters, reversing, from 0.06 to 15 kW at 400/415 V, type 2 coordination

b 1 motor circuit-breaker type GV2 P,
1
Characteristics
Starter type GV2 DP202 to DP214 DP216 DP220 DP221 DP222 DP232
DP210
(1) 440 V kA 130 130 50 20 20 20 20
500 V kA 130 50 42 10 10 10 10
References
D.O.L. starters, reversing
(3) voltage code
(2)
kW kW kW A A kg
0.06 0.06 – 0.16…0.25 2.4 GV2 P02 LC2 D09pp GV2 DP202pp 1.053
– 0.09 – 0.25…0.40 5 GV2 P03 LC2 D09pp GV2 DP203pp 1.053

0.09 0.12
0.12 – – 0.40…0.63 8 GV2 P04 LC2 D09pp GV2 DP204pp 1.053
0.18 0.18 –
0.25 0.25 – 0.63…1 13 GV2 P05 LC2 D09pp GV2 DP205pp 1.053
0.37 0.37 –
– – 0.37 1…1.6 22.5 GV2 P06 LC2 D09pp GV2 DP206pp 1.053
0.55 0.55 0.55
– – 0.75
GV2 DP202pp 0.75 0.75 – 1.6…2.5 33.5 GV2 P07 LC2 D09pp GV2 DP207pp 1.053
– 1.1 1.1
1.1 – 1.5 2.5…4 51 GV2 P08 LC2 D09pp GV2 DP208pp 1.073
1.5 1.5 2.2
2.2 2.2 – 4…6.3 78 GV2 P10 LC2 D09pp GV2 DP210pp 1.153
– 3 3
3 – 4 6…10 138 GV2 P14 LC2 D09pp GV2 DP214pp 1.153
4 4 5.5
5.5 5.5 7.5 9…14 170 GV2 P16 LC2 D25pp GV2 DP216pp 1.163
– 7.5 9
7.5 9 – 13…18 223 GV2 P20 LC2 D25pp GV2 DP220pp 1.153
9 11 11 17…23 327 GV2 P21 LC2 D25pp GV2 DP221pp 1.163
11 – 15 20…25 327 GV2 P22 LC2 D25pp GV2 DP222pp 1.163
15 15 18.5 24…32 416 GV2 P32 LC2 D32pp GV2 DP232pp 1.163
Add-on blocks
LAD 311
Volts 24 220 230
a 50/60 Hz B7 M7 P7
c (4) BD – –
(3) See page 5/58.
page 1/13 page 1/15
1/11
Dimensions, TeSys motor starters - open
mounting 1
version 1
GV2 MEppKppp
On mounting rail AM1 DE200 GV2 MEppK1pp GV2 MEppK2pp
152
152
11 66 45 90
87
GV2 DMppppp
On mounting rail AM1 DE200 With adapter plate LAD 311 GV2 DM1pppp GV2 DM2pppp
1
b
b
125 ± 3
234
c1 45 90
c
c1
c
d1
d
GV2 DMp02pp to DMp21pp to GV2 DMp02pp to DMp21pp to

DMp20pp DMp32pp DMp20pp DMp32pp
b 176.4 186.8 c 135.6 141.9
c 99.6 105.9 c1 130.1 136.4
c1 94.1 100.4 d 112.5 112.5
d1 107 107
References :
pages 1/6 to 1/11
1/12
Dimensions, TeSys motor starters - open
mounting (continued) 1 version 1
GV2 DPppppp
On mounting rail AM1 DE200 With adapter plate LAD 311 GV2 DP1pppp GV2 DP2pppp
1
1
b
125 ± 3
234
c1 45 90
c
d1
d c1
c
GV2 DPp02pp to DPp10pp to GV2 DPp02pp to DPp10pp to

DPp08pp DPp32pp DPp08pp DPp32pp
b 176.4 186.8 c 141.6 147.9
c 105.6 111.9 c1 136.5 142.4
c1 100.1 106.4
d 100.5 100.5
d1 95 95
GV3 DMppp
On mounting rail AM1 DE200 Screw fixing
125
125
266
283
283
c1 80 4 x Ø4
c
GV3 DM138 DM140, DM180

150,
163
c 147 149 156
c1 137 139 146
References :
pages 1/6 to 1/11
1/13
1
A2 A1 A2 A1
1/14
T1/2 1/L1 2/T1 1/L1 T1/2 1/L1 2/T1 1/L1
References :
T2/4 3/L2 4/T2 3/L2 T2/4 3/L2 4/T2 3/L2
pages 1/6 to 1/11

T3/6 5/L3 6/T3 5/L3 T3/6 5/L3 6/T3 5/L3
GV2 MEppK1pp
14 13/NO 14 13/NO
Schemes
22 21/NC
GV2 DM1pppp, GV3 DM1pppp

1
A2 A1
A2 A1
2 1 L1 2/T1 1/L1 T1/2 1/L1 2/T1 1/L1
4 3 L2 4/T2 3/L2 T2/4 3/L2 4/T2 3/L2
6 5 L3 6/T3 5/L3 T3/6 5/L3 6/T3 5/L3
GV2 DM2pppp
GV2 MEppK2pp
version
14 13/NO 14 13/NO
22 21/NC
U 2 1 T1/2 1/L1
V 4 3 T2/4 3/L2
W 6 5 T3/6 5/L3
14 13/NO 14 13/NO
22 21/NC A2 A1
A2 A1
1
Schemes (continued) 1
version 1
GV2 DP1pppp GV2 DP2pppp
1
1/L1
3/L2
5/L3
1/L1
3/L2
5/L3
1/L1 2/T1
3/L2 4/T2
5/L3 6/T3
L1 2/T1
L2 4/T2
L3 6/T3
13/NO
21/NC
A1
A2
13/NO
13/NO
22
14
21/NC
21/NC
T1/2
T2/4
T3/6
3
5
5
1
1
A1
A1
A2
A2
22
22
6
14
6
14
2
W
U
Mechanical interlock with integral electrical contacts

Control circuit a Control circuit c
A1
A1
A2
A2
A1
A1
01
02
02
01
01
01
— KM1 — KM2
A1
A1
02
— KM1 — KM2 — KM1 — KM2

02
A2
A2
A2
A2
References :
pages 1/6 to 1/11
1/15
Combination starters TeSys motor starters - open version 1
for customer assembly 1

D.O.L. starters with circuit-breaker
and overload protection built into the circuit-breaker
0.06 to 110 kW at 400/415 V: type 1 coordination

Standard power ratings of 3-phase Circuit-breaker Contactor
1 motors 50/60 Hz in category AC-3
400/415 V 440 V 500 V
Reference Setting
range of
Reference (2)
P Ie Iq (1) P Ie Iq (1) P Ie Iq (1) thermal trips

kW A kA kW A kA kW A kA A
0.06 0.22 50 0.06 0.19 50 – – – GV2 ME02 0.16…0.25 LC1 K06 or LC1 D09
0.09 0.28 50
0.09 0.36 50 0.12 0.37 50 – – – GV2 ME03 0.25…0.40 LC1 K06 or LC1 D09
0.12 0.42 50 – – – – – –
0.18 0.6 50 0.18 0.55 50 – – – GV2 ME04 0.40…0.63 LC1 K06 or LC1 D09
0.25 0.88 50 0.25 0.76 50
0.37 0.98 50 0.37 0.99 50 GV2 ME05 0.63…1 LC1 K06 or LC1 D09
– – – – – – 0.37 1 50
0.55 1.5 50 0.55 1.36 50 0.55 1.21 50 GV2 ME06 1…1.6 LC1 K06 or LC1 D09
– – – – – – 0.75 1.5 50 GV2 ME06 1…1.6 LC1 K06 or LC1 D09
0.75 2 50 0.75 1.68 50 – – –

– – – 1.1 2.37 50 1.1 2 50 GV2 ME07 1.6….2.5 LC1 K06 or LC1 D09
1.1 2.5 50 – – – 1.5 2.6 50
1.5 3.5 50 1.5 3.06 50 2.2 3.8 50 GV2 ME08 2.5…4 LC1 K06 or LC1 D09
2.2 5 50 2.2 4.42 50 – – –
– – – 3 5.77 50 3 5 50 GV2 ME10 4…6.3 LC1 K06 or LC1 D09
3 6.5 50 – – – 4 6.5 10
4 8.4 50 4 7.9 15 5.5 9 10 GV2 ME14 6…10 LC1 K09 or LC1 D09
5.5 11 15 5.5 10.4 8 7.5 12 6 GV2 ME16 9…14 LC1 K12 or LC1 D12
7.5 14.8 15 7.5 13.7 8 9 13.9 6

– – – 9 16.9 8 – – – GV2 ME20 13…18 LC1 D18
9 18.1 15 11 20.1 6 11 18.4 4 GV2 ME21 17…23 LC1 D25
11 21 15 – – – 15 23 4 GV2 ME22 20…25 LC1 D25
15 28.5 10 15 26.5 6 18.5 28.5 4 GV2 ME32 24…32 LC1 D32
18.5 35 35 18.5 32.8 25 18.5 28.5 8 GV3 ME40 25…40 LC1 D38
– – – 22 39 25 22 33 8 GV3 ME40 25…40 LC1 D40
22 42 35 – – – 30 45 8 GV3 ME63 40…63 LC1 D50
30 57 35 30 51.5 25 37 55 8 GV3 ME63 40…63 LC1 D65
– – – 37 64 10 45 65 4 GV3 ME80 56…80 LC1 D65
– – – 37 64 25 45 65 18 GV7 RE80 48…80 LC1 D65
37 69 15 45 76 10 55 80 4 GV3 ME80 56…80 LC1 D80
37 69 25 45 76 25 55 80 18 GV7 RE80 48…80 LC1 D80
45 81 25 – – – – – – GV7 RE100 60…100 LC1 D95
– – – 50 90 25 – – – GV7 RE100 60…100 LC1 D115
55 100 25 – – – 75 105 30 GV7 RE150 90…150 LC1 D115
75 135 35 75 125 35 90 129 30 GV7 RE150 90…150 LC1 D150
– – – 90 146 35 – – – GV7 RE150 90…150 LC1 F185
90 165 35 – – – 110 156 30 GV7 RE220 132…220 LC1 F185
– – – – – – 132 187 30
– – – 110 178 35 160 220 30 GV7 RE220 132…220 LC1 F265
110 200 35 132 215 35 – – – GV7 RE220 132…220 LC1 F225
(2) For reversing operation, replace the prefix LC1 with LC2.
1/16
for customer assembly D.O.L. starters with circuit-breaker

(continued) 1

Standard power ratings of 3-phase Circuit-breaker Contactor
motors 50/60 Hz in category AC-3
400/415 V 440 V 500 V
Reference (2) Setting
range of
Reference (3) 1
P Ie Iq (1) P Ie Iq (1) P Ie Iq (1) thermal trips
kW A kA kW A kA kW A kA A
0.06 0.22 130 0.06 0.19 130 – – – GV2 P02 or GV2 ME02 0.16…0.25 LC1 D09
– – – 0.09 0.28 130 – – –
0.09 0.36 130 0.12 0.37 130 – – – GV2 P03 or GV2 ME03 0.25…0.4 LC1 D09
0.12 0.42 130 – – – – – –
0.18 0.6 130 0.18 0.55 130 – – – GV2 P04 or GV2 ME04 0.4…0.63 LC1 D09
0.25 0.88 130 0.25 0.76 130 – – –
0.37 0.98 130 0.37 0.99 130 – – – GV2 P05 or GV2 ME05 0.63…1 LC1 D09
– – – – – – 0.37 1 130
0.55 1.5 130 0.55 1.36 130 0.55 1.21 130 GV2 P06 or GV2 ME06 1…1.6 LC1 D09
– – – – – – 0.75 1.5 130 GV2 P06 or GV2 ME06 1…1.6 LC1 D09
0.75 2 130 0.75 1.68 130 – – –
– – – 1.1 2.37 130 1.1 2 130 GV2 P07 or GV2 ME07 1.6…2.5 LC1 D09
1.1 2.5 130 – – – 1.5 2.6 130
1.5 3.5 130 1.5 3.06 130 2.2 3.8 130 GV2 P08 or GV2 ME08 2.5…4 LC1 D09
– – – – – – – – –
2.2 5 130 – – – – – – GV2 P10 or GV2 ME10 4…6.3 LC1 D09
– – – 2.2 4.42 50 – – –
– – – 3 5.77 50 3 5 50 GV2 ME10 4…6.3 LC1 D09
– – – 2.2 4.42 130 – – –
– – – 3 5.77 130 3 5 130 GV2 P10 4…6.3 LC1 D09
3 6.5 130 – – – – – –
4 8.4 130 – – – – – – GV2 P14 or GV2 ME14 6…10 LC1 D09
– – – 4 7.9 15 4 6.5 10
– – – – – – 5.5 9 10 GV2 ME14 6…10 LC1 D09
– – – – – – 4 6.5 50
– – – 4 7.9 130 5.5 9 50 GV2 P14 6…10 LC1 D12
5.5 11 130 5.5 10.4 50 7.5 12 42
– – – 7.5 13.7 50 9 13.9 42 GV2 P16 or GV2 ME16 9…14 LC1 D25
7.5 14.8 50 9 16.9 20 – – – GV2 P20 or GV2 ME20 13…18 LC1 D25
9 18.1 50 11 20.1 20 11 18.4 10 GV2 P21 or GV2 ME21 17…23 LC1 D25
11 21 50 – – – – – – GV2 P22 or GV2 ME22 20…25 LC1 D25
– – – – – – 15 23 10 GV2 P22 20…25 LC1 D32
15 28.5 35 15 26.5 25 18.5 28.5 10 GV2 P32 or GV2 ME32 25…40 LC1 D32
15 28.5 70 15 26.5 65 18.5 28.5 50 GV7 RS40 25…40 LC1 D40
18.5 35 70 18.5 32.8 65 22 33 50 GV7 RS40 25…40 LC1 D40
– – – 22 39 65 – – – GV7 RS40 25…40 LC1 D80
– – – – – – 30 45 50 GV7 RS50 30…50 LC1 D80
– – – – – – 37 55 50 GV7 RS80 48…80 LC1 D80
22 42 70 – – – – – – GV7 RS50 30…50 LC1 D80
30 57 70 30 51.5 65 – – – GV7 RS80 48…80 LC1 D80
37 69 70 37 64 65 – – – GV7 RS80 48…80 LC1 D80
– – – 45 76 65 – – – GV7 RS80 48…80 LC1 D80
– – – – – – 45 65 50 GV7 RS80 48…80 LC1 D115
– – – – – – 55 80 50 GV7 RS80 48…80 LC1 D115
45 81 70 – – – – – –
– – – 55 90 65 – – – GV7 RS100 60…100 LC1 D115
55 100 70 75 125 65 – – –
75 135 70 90 146 65 90 129 50 GV7 RS150 90…150 LC1 D150
90 165 70 110 178 65 110 156 50 GV7 RS220 132…220 LC1 F185
110 200 70 132 215 65 – – – GV7 RS220 132…220 LC1 F225
– – – – – – 132 187 50
– – – – – – 160 220 50 GV7 RS220 132…220 LC1 F265
(2) Combinations with circuit-breaker GV2 ME are type 2 coordinated only at 400/415 V and 440 V.
1/17

D.O.L. starters with circuit-breaker and overload
protection by separate thermal overload relay

Standard power ratings of 3-phase Circuit-breaker Contactor Thermal overload relay
400/415 V 440 V 500 V Reference Rating Irm (1) Reference (2) Reference Setting
P Ie Iq P Ie Iq P Ie Iq range
kW A kA kW A kA kW A kA A A A
0.06 0.22 50 0.06 0.19 50 – – – GV2 LE03 0.4 5 LC1 K06 LR2 K0302 0.16…0.23
– – – 0.09 0.28 50 – – – GV2 LE03 0.4 5 LC1 K06 LR2 K0303 0.23…0.36
0.09 0.36 50 0.12 0.37 50 – – – GV2 LE03 0.4 5 LC1 K06 LR2 K0304 0.36…0.54
0.12 0.42 50 – – – GV2 LE04 0.63 8 LC1 K06 LR2 K0304 0.36…0.54
0.18 0.6 50 0.18 0.55 50 – – – GV2 LE04 0.63 8 LC1 K06 LR2 K0305 0.54…0.8
– – – 0.25 0.76 50 – – – GV2 LE05 1 13 LC1 K06 LR2 K0305 0.54…0.8
0.25 0.88 50 – – – – – –
0.37 1 50 0.37 1 50 0.37 1 50 GV2 LE05 1 13 LC1 K06 LR2 K0306 0.8…1.2
0.55 1.5 50 0.55 1.36 50 0.55 1.21 50

– – – – – – 0.75 1.5 50 GV2 LE06 1.6 22.5 LC1 K06 LR2 K0307 1.2…1.8
– – – 0.75 1.68 50 – – – GV2 LE07 2.5 33.5 LC1 K06 LR2 K0307 1.2…1.8
0.75 2 50 – – – – – –
1.1 2.5 50 1.1 2.37 50 1.1 2 50 GV2 LE07 2.5 33.5 LC1 K06 LR2 K0308 1.8…2.6
1.5 3.5 50 1.5 3.06 50 1.5 2.6 50 GV2 LE08 4 51 LC1 K06 LR2 K0310 2.6…3.7
– – – – – – 2.2 3.8 50 GV2 LE08 4 51 LC1 K06 LR2 K0312 3.7…5.5
2.2 5 50 2.2 4.4 50 3 5 50 GV2 LE10 6.3 78 LC1 K06 LR2 K0312 3.7…5.5
– – – 3 5.77 50 – – – GV2 LE10 6.3 78 LC1 K06 LR2 K0314 5.5…8
– – – 4 7.9 15 – – – GV2 LE14 10 138 LC1 K09 LR2 K0314 5.5…8
3 6.5 50 – – – 4 6.5 10 GV2 LE14 10 138 LC1 K09 LR2 K0314 5.5…8
4 8.4 50 – – – – – – GV2 LE14 10 138 LC1 K09 LR2 K0316 8…11.5
5.5 11 15 5.5 10.4 8 7.5 12 6 GV2 LE16 14 170 LC1 K12 LR2 K0321 10…14
– – – 7.5 13.7 8 9 13.9 6 GV2 LE16 14 170 LC1 D18 LRD 21 12…18
7.5 14.8 15 9 16.9 8 – – – GV2 LE20 18 223 LC1 D18 LRD 21 12…18
9 18.1 15 – – – 11 18.4 4 GV2 LE22 25 327 LC1 D25 LRD 22 16…24
11 21 15 11 20.1 6 15 23 4 GV2 LE22 25 327 LC1 D25 LRD 22 16…24
15 28.5 10 15 26.5 6 18.5 26.5 4 GV2 LE32 32 416 LC1 D32 LRD 32 23…32
18.5 35 70 18.5 32.5 65 – – – NS80HMA 50 500 LC1 D38 LRD 35 30…38
– – – – – – 22 33 25 NS80HMA 50 450 LC1 D40 LRD 3355 30…40
– – – 22 39 65 – – – NS80HMA 50 650 LC1 D40 LRD 3357 37…50
(1) Irm: setting current of the magnetic trip.

1/18
for customer assembly D.O.L. starters with circuit-breaker and overload

(continued) 1
0.06 to 250 kW at 400/415 V: type 1 coordination (continued)

1
22 42 70 – – – 30 40 25 NS80HMA 50 650 LC1 D50 LRD 3357 37…50
30 57 70 30 51.5 65 – – – NS80HMA 50 880 LC1 D65 LRD 3359 48…65
– – – 37 64 65 37 55 25 NS80HMA 80 960 LC1 D65 LRD 3359 48…65
– – – – – – 45 65 25 NS80HMA 80 960 LC1 D80 LRD 3361 55…70
37 69 70 45 76 65 55 80 25 NS80HMA 80 1040 LC1 D80 LRD 3363 63…80
45 81 (3) – – – – – – NS100pMA (3) 100 1300 LC1 D95 LRD 3365 80…104
– – – – – – 50 90 (3) NS100pMA (3) 100 1200 LC1 D115 LRD 4365 80…104
– – – – – – 75 105 (3) NS160pMA (3) 150 1500 LC1 D115 LRD 4367 95…120
55 100 (3) – – – – – – NS160pMA (3) 150 1350 LC1 D115 LRD 4367 95…120
75 135 (3) 75 125 (3) 90 129 (3) NS160pMA (3) 150 1800 LC1 D150 LRD 4369 110…140
– – – 90 146 (3) – – – NS160pMA (3) 150 1950 LC1 F185 LR9 F5371 132…220
90 165 (3) – – – 110 156 (3) NS250pMA (3) 220 2200 LC1 F185 LR9 F5371 132…220
110 200 (3) – – – – – – NS250pMA (3) 220 2640 LC1 F225 LR9 F5371 132…220
– – – 110 178 (3) – – – NS250pMA (3) 220 2420 LC1 F225 LR9 F5371 132…220
– – – – – – 132 187 (3) NS250pMA (3) 220 2640 LC1 F265 LR9 F5371 132…220
– – – 132 215 (3) – – – NS250pMA (3) 220 2860 LC1 F265 LR9 F5371 132…220
132 240 (3) – – – – – – NS400pMA (3) 320 3200 LC1 F265 LR9 F7375 200…330
– – – – – – 160 220 (3) NS400pMA (3) 320 2860 LC1 F265 LR9 F7375 200…330
– – – 160 256 (3) – – – NS400pMA (3) 320 3520 LC1 F330 LR9 F7375 200…330
160 285 (3) 200 321 (3) – – – NS400pMA (3) 320 4160 LC1 F330 LR9 F7375 200…330
– – – – – – 200 281 (3) NS400pMA (3) 320 3840 LC1 F330 LR9 F7375 200…330
– – – – – – 220 310 (3) NS400pMA (3) 320 4160 LC1 F400 LR9 F7379 300…500
200 352 (3) 220 353 (3) – – – NS630pMA (3) 500 5000 LC1 F400 LR9 F7379 300…500
– – – 250 401 (3) – – – NS630pMA (3) 500 5550 LC1 F400 LR9 F7379 300…500
– – – – – – 250 360 (3) NS630pMA (3) 500 5000 LC1 F400 LR9 F7379 300…500
220 388 (3) – – – – – – NS630pMA (3) 500 5500 LC1 F400 LR9 F7379 300…500
250 437 (3) 280 470 (3) 315 445 (3) NS630pMA (3) 500 6000 LC1 F500 LR9 F7379 300…500
– – – – – – 355 500 (3) NS630pMA (3) 500 6500 LC1 F500 LR9 F7381 380…630

(3) Products marketed under the Merlin Gerin brand. Reference to be completed by replacing the p with the breaking performance code:
Breaking performance Iq (kA) NS100pMA NS160pMA and NS250pMA NS400pMA and NS630pMA
400/415 V 25 70 36 70 70 130
440 V 25 65 35 65 65 130
500 V 18 50 30 50 50 70
660/690 V 8 10 8 10 20 35
Code N H N H H L
1/19

(continued) 1

0.06 0.22 130 0.06 0.19 130 – – – GV2 L03 or LE03 0.4 5 LC1 D09 LRD 02 0.16…0.25
0.09 0.36 130 0.09 0.28 130 – – –

– – – 0.12 0.37 130 – – – GV2 L03 or LE03 0.4 5 LC1 D09 LRD 03 0.25…0.40
0.12 0.42 130 – – – – – –

0.18 0.6 130 0.18 0.55 130 – – – GV2 L04 or LE04 0.63 8 LC1 D09 LRD 04 0.4…0.63
0.25 0.88 130 0.25 0.76 130 – – –

0.37 0.98 130 0.37 0.99 130 – – – GV2 L05 or LE05 1 13 LC1 D09 LRD 05 0.63…1
– – – – – – 0.37 1 130 GV2 L05 or LE05 1 13 LC1 D09 LRD 06 1…1.7
0.55 1.6 130 – – – 0.55 1.21 130

– – – 0.55 1.36 130 0.75 1.5 130 GV2 L06 or LE06 1.6 22.5 LC1 D09 LRD 06 1…1.7
0.75 2 130 0.75 1.68 130 1.1 2 130 GV2 L07 or LE07 2.5 33.5 LC1 D09 LRD 07 1.6…2.5
1.1 2.5 130 1.1 2.37 130 1.5 2.6 130

1.5 3.5 130 – – – 2.2 3.8 130 GV2 L08 or LE08 4 51 LC1 D09 LRD 08 2.5…4
– – – 1.5 3.06 130 – – – GV2 L08 or LE08 4 51 LC1 D09 LRD 10 4…6
2.2 5 130 – – – – – –
– – – – – – 3 5 13 GV2 L10 or LE10 6.3 78 LC1 D09 LRD 10 4…6
– – – 2.2 4.42 50 – – –
– – – 3 5.77 50 3 5 50 GV2 LE10 6.3 78 LC1 D09 LRD 10 4…6
– – – 2.2 4.42 130 – – –

– – – 3 5.77 130 3 5 130 GV2 L10 6.3 78 LC1 D09 LRD 10 4…6
3 6.5 130 – – – – – – GV2 L14 or LE14 10 10 LC1 D09 LRD 12 5.5…8
– – – – – – 4 6.5 10 GV2 LE14 10 138 LC1 D12 LRD 12 5.5…8
– – – – – – 4 6.5 50 GV2 L14 10 138 LC1 D12 LRD 12 5.5…8
4 8.4 130 – – – – – – GV2 L14 or LE14 10 138 LC1 D09 LRD 14 7…10
– – – 4 7.9 15 – – – GV2 LE14 10 138 LC1 D09 LRD 14 7…10
– – – 4 7.9 130 – – – GV2 L14 10 138 LC1 D09 LRD 14 7…10
– – – – – – 5.5 9 10 GV2 LE14 10 138 LC1 D09 LRD 14 7…10
– – – – – – 5.5 9 50 GV2 L14 10 138 LC1 D09 LRD 14 7…10
5.5 11 130 5.5 10.4 50 7.5 12 42 GV2 L16 14 170 LC1 D25 LRD 16 9…13
– – – 7.5 13.7 50 – – – GV2 L16 14 170 LC1 D25 LRD 21 12…18
7.5 14.8 50 9 16.9 20 9 13.9 42 GV2 L20 18 223 LC1 D25 LRD 21 12…18
9 18.1 50 – – – – – –
11 21 50 11 20.1 20 – – – GV2 L22 25 327 LC1 D25 LRD 22 16…24
– – – – – – 11 18.4 10
– – – – – – 15 23 10 GV2 L22 25 327 LC1 D32 LRD 22 16…24
15 28.5 50 15 26.5 20 18.5 28.5 10 GV2 L32 32 416 LC1 D40 LRD 3353 23…32
– – – – – – 22 33 25 NS80HMA 50 450 LC1 D40 LRD 3353 23…32

1/20

(continued) 1
0.06 to 250 kW at 400/415 V: type 2 coordination (continued)

1
18.5 35 70 18.5 32.5 65 – – – NS80HMA 50 550 LC1 D40 LRD 3355 30…40
22 42 70 22 39 65 30 45 25 NS80HMA 50 650 LC1 D50 LRD 3357 37…50
– – – 30 51.5 65 – – –
30 57 70 37 64 65 37 55 25 NS80HMA 80 880 LC1 D65 LRD 3359 48…65
– – – – – – 37 55 (3) NS100pMA (3) 100 880 LC1 D80 LRD 3359 48…65
– – – – – – 45 65 (3) NS100pMA (3) 100 960 LC1 D80 LRD 3361 55…70
37 69 70 45 76 65 – – – NS80HMA 80 1000 LC1 D80 LRD 3363 63…80
– – – – – – 55 80 (3) NS100pMA (3) 100 1040 LC1 D80 LRD 3363 63…80
45 81 (3) 55 90 (3) – – – NS100pMA (3) 100 1300 LC1 D115 LR9 D5367 60…100
55 100 (3) – – – – – – NS160pMA (3) 150 1500 LC1 D115 LR9 D5369 90…150
– – – – – – 75 105 (3) NS160pMA (3) 150 1050 LC1 D115 LR9 D5369 90…150
75 135 (3) 75 125 (3) – – – NS160pMA (3) 150 1950 LC1 D150 LR9 D5369 90…150
– – – 90 146 (3) – – – NS160pMA (3) 150 1950 LC1 D150 LR9 D5369 90…150
– – – – – – 90 129 (3) NS160pMA (3) 150 1200 LC1 D150 LR9 D5369 90…150
90 165 (3) 110 178 (3) – – – NS250pMA (3) 220 2420 LC1 F185 LR9 F5371 132…220
– – – – – – 110 156 (3) NS250pMA (3) 220 1540 LC1 F185 LR9 F5371 132…220
110 200 (3) – – – – – – NS250pMA (3) 220 2860 LC1 F225 LR9 F5371 132…220
– – – 132 215 (3) 132 187 (3) NS250pMA (3) 220 2200 LC1 F265 LR9 F5371 132…220
132 240 (3) 160 256 (3) – – – NS400pMA (3) 320 3520 LC1 F265 LR9 F7375 200…330
– – – – – – 160 220 (3) NS400pMA (3) 320 2200 LC1 F265 LR9 F7375 200…330
160 285 (3) – – – – – – NS400pMA (3) 320 4000 LC1 F330 LR9 F7375 200…330
– – – 200 321 (3) – – – NS400pMA (3) 320 4000 LC1 F330 LR9 F7379 300…500
– – – – – – 200 281 (3) NS400pMA (3) 320 3500 LC1 F400 LR9 F7375 200…330
– – – – – – 220 310 (3) NS400pMA (3) 320 3500 LC1 F400 LR9 F7379 300…500
– – – 220 353 (3) – – –

200 352 (3) 250 401 (3) – – – NS630pMA (3) 500 5500 LC1 F400 LR9 F7379 300…500
– – – – – – 250 360 (3)

– – – – – – 315 445 (3) NS630pMA (3) 500 4500 LC1 F500 LR9 F7379 300…500
220 388 (3) – – – – – –

250 437 (3) – – – – – – NS630pMA (3) 500 6250 LC1 F500 LR9 F7379 300…500
– – – – – – 355 500 (3) NS630pMA (3) 500 5000 LC1 F630 LR9 F7381 380…630

Breaking performance Iq (kA) NS100pMA NS160pMA and NS250pMA NS400pMA and NS630pMA
400/415 V 25 70 36 70 70 130
440 V 25 65 35 65 65 130
500 V 18 50 30 50 50 70
660/690 V 8 10 8 10 20 35
Code N H N H H L
1/21

D.O.L. starters with integral 18, 32 and 63 contactor
breakers with overload protection by separate module
0.06 to 4 kW at 400/415 V: (total coordination)

Standard power ratings of 3-phase Contactor breaker Protection module
400/415 V 440 V 500 V Without control With control Reference Setting range
test function test function
P Ie Iq P Ie Iq P Ie Iq Reference Reference Thermal (2) Magnetic (3)
kW A kA kW A kA kW A kA A A
0.06 0.22 70 0.06 0.19 70 – – – LD1 LB030 – LB1 LB03P02 0.16…0.25 3.8
0.09 0.36 70 0.09 0.28 70 – – – LD1 LB030 LB1 LB03P03 0.25…0.4 6

or LD1 LC030 LD4 LC130 LB1 LC03M03 0.25…0.4 2.4…4.8
– – – 0.12 0.37 70 – – – LD1 LB030 LB1 LB03P03 0.25…0.4 6

LD1 LC030 LD4 LC130 LB1 LC03M03 0.25…0.4 2.4…4.8
0.12 0.42 70 0.18 0.55 70 – – – LD1 LB030 LB1 LB03P04 0.4…0.63 9.5
or LD1 LC030 LD4 LC130 LB1 LC03M04 0.4…0.63 3.8…7.6
0.18 0.6 70 – – – – – – LD1 LB030 LB1 LB03P04 0.4…0.63 9.5

LD1 LC030 LD4 LC130 LB1 LC03M04 0.4…0.63 3.8…7.6
0.25 0.88 70 0.25 0.76 70 0.37 1 70 LD1 LB030 LB1 LB03P05 0.63…1 15
or LD1 LC030 LD4 LC130 LB1 LC03M05 0.63…1 6…12
0.37 1 70 0.37 1 70 0.55 1.21 70 LD1 LB030 LB1 LB03P06 1…1.6 24

or LD1 LC030 LD4 LC130 LB1 LC03M06 1…1.6 9.5…19
0.55 1.5 70 0.55 1.36 70 0.75 1.5 70 LD1 LB030 LB1 LB03P06 1…1.6 24
or LD1 LC030 LD4 LC130 LB1 LC03M06 1…1.6 9.5…19
0.75 2 70 0.75 1.68 70 1.1 2 70 LD1 LB030 LB1 LB03P07 1.6…2.5 37.5
LD1 LC030 LD4 LC130 LB1 LC03M07 1.6…2.5 15…30
– – – 1.1 2.37 70 – – – LD1 LB030 LB1 LB03P07 1.6…2.5 37.5

or LD1 LC030 LD4 LC130 LB1 LC03M07 1.6…2.5 15…30
1.1 2.5 70 – – – 1.5 2.6 70 LD1 LB030 LB1 LB03P08 2.5…4 60

1.5 3.5 70 1.5 3.06 70 2.2 3.8 70 LD1 LB030 LB1 LB03P08 2.5…4 60
LD1 LC030 LD4 LC130 LB1 LC03M08 2.5…4 24…48
2.2 5 70 2.2 4.42 (1) 3 5 15 LD1 LB030 LB1 LB03P10 4…6 90

or LD1 LC030 LD4 LC130 LB1 LC03M10 4…6.3 38…76
– – – 3 5.77 (1) – – – LD1 LB030 LB1 LB03P10 4…6 90

or LD1 LC030 LD4 LC130 LB1 LC03M10 4…6.3 38…76
3 6.5 70 4 7.9 (1) 4 6.5 15 LD1 LB030 LB1 LB03P13 6…10 150
4 8.4 70 – – – 5.5 9 15 LD1 LB030 LB1 LB03P13 6…10 150

(1) Iq = 40 kA for LD1 LB; Iq = 70 kA for LDp LC.

(2) Irth min. to Irth max.
(3) For LB1 LB, the magnetic protection is fixed, set at 15 Irth max. For LB1 LC, the magnetic protection is adjustable from 6 to 12 Irth max.
1/22
for customer assembly D.O.L. starters with integral 18, 32 and 63 contactor
breakers with overload protection by separate module
(continued) 1
5.5 to 30 kW at 400/415 V: (total coordination)

Standard power ratings of 3-phase Contactor breaker Protection module
400/415 V 440 V 500 V Without control With control Reference Setting range
1
test function test function
P Ie Iq P Ie Iq P Ie Iq Reference Reference Thermal (3) Magnetic (4)
kW A kA kW A kA kW A kA A A
5.5 11 70 5.5 10.4 (1) 7.5 12 (2) LD1 LB030 LB1 LB03P17 10…16 240
or LD1 LC030 LD4 LC130 LB1 LC03M17 10…16 95…190
7.5 14.8 70 7.5 13.7 (1) – – – LD1 LB030 LB1 LB03P17 10…16 240
– – – – – – 9 13.9 (2) LD1 LB030 LB1 LB03P21 12…18 270

9 18.1 70 9 16.9 (1) – – – LD1 LB030 LB1 LB03P21 12…18 270

11 21 70 11 20.1 70 11 18.4 20 LD1 LC030 LD4 LC130 LB1 LC03M22 16…25 150…300
– – – – – – 15 23 20 LD1 LC030 LD4 LC130 LB1 LC03M22 16…25 150…300
15 28.5 70 15 26.5 30 18.5 28.5 15 LD1 LC030 LD4 LC130 LB1 LC03M53 23…32 190…380
18.5 35 70 18.5 32.8 70 22 33 35 LD1 LD030 LD4 LD130 LB1 LD03M55 28…40 240…480
– – – 22 39 70 – – – LD1 LD030 LD4 LD130 LB1 LD03M55 28…40 240…480
22 42 70 – – – 30 45 35 LD1 LD030 LD4 LD130 LB1 LD03M57 35…50 300…600
30 57 70 30 51.5 40 37 55 35 LD1 LD030 LD4 LD130 LB1 LD03M61 45…63 380…760
– – – 33 58.5 40 – – – LD1 LD030 LD4 LD130 LB1 LD03M61 45…63 380…760

(3) Irth min. to Irth max.
(4) For LB1 LB, the magnetic protection is fixed, set at 15 Irth max. For LB1 LC and LB1 LD, the magnetic protection is adjustable from 6 to 12 Irth max.
1/23

D.O.L. starters with fuse protection
(NF C or DIN fuses)

Standard power ratings of 3-phase Fuse carrier (1) aM fuses Contactor Thermal overload relay
1 motors 50-60 Hz in category AC-3
400/415 V 440 V 500 V
(basic block)
Reference Size Rating Reference (2) Reference Setting
P Ie P Ie P Ie range
kW A kW A kW A A A
0.06 0.22 0.06 0.19 – – LS1 D32 10 x 38 2 LC1 K06 LR2 K0302 0.16…0.23
– – 0.09 0.28 – – LS1 D32 10 x 38 2 LC1 K06 LR2 K0303 0.23…0.36
0.09 0.36 – – – –
0.12 0.42 0.12 0.37 – – LS1 D32 10 x 38 2 LC1 K06 LR2 K0304 0.36…0.54
0.18 0.6 0.18 0.55 – –

– – 0.25 0.76 – – LS1 D32 10 x 38 2 LC1 K06 LR2 K0305 0.54…0.8
0.25 0.88 – – – –
0.37 1 0.37 1 0.37 1 LS1 D32 10 x 38 2 LC1 K06 LR2 K0306 0.8…1.2
0.55 1.5 0.55 1.36 0.55 1.21

– – 0.75 1.68 0.75 1.5 LS1 D32 10 x 38 2 LC1 K06 LR2 K0307 1.2…1.8
0.75 2 – – 1.1 2
1.1 2.5 1.1 2.37 1.5 2.6 LS1 D32 10 x 38 4 LC1 K06 LR2 K0308 1.8…2.6
1.5 3.5 1.5 3.06 – – LS1 D32 10 x 38 4 LC1 K06 LR2 K0310 2.6…3.7
2.2 5 – – 2.2 3.8

– – – – 3 5 LS1 D32 10 x 38 6 LC1 K06 LR2 K0312 3.7…5.5
– – 2.2 4.42 – – LS1 D32 10 x 38 8 LC1 K06 LR2 K0312 3.7…5.5
3 6.5 3 5.77 4 6.5 LS1 D32 10 x 38 8 LC1 K09 LR2 K0314 5.5…8
4 8.4 4 7.9 5.5 9 LS1 D32 10 x 38 12 LC1 K09 LR2 K0316 8…11.5
5.5 11 5.5 10.4 7.5 12 LS1 D32 10 x 38 16 LC1 K12 LR2 K0321 10…14
7.5 14.8 7.5 13.7 9 13.9 LS1 D32 10 x 38 16 LC1 D18 LRD 21 12…18
– – 9 16.9 – – LS1 D32 10 x 38 20 LC1 D25 LRD 21 12…18
9 18.1 – – 11 18.4
11 21 11 20.1 15 23 GK1 EK 14 x 51 25 LC1 D25 LRD 22 16…24
15 28.5 15 26.5 18.5 28.5 GK1 EK 14 x 51 32 LC1 D32 LRD 32 23…32
18.5 35 32.8 22 33 GK1 EK 14 x 51 40 LC1 D40 LRD 3355 30…40

18.5
22 42 22 39 30 45 GK1 FK 22 x 58 50 LC1 D50 LRD 3357 37…50
– – 30 51.5 – – GK1 FK 22 x 58 80 LC1 D50 LRD 3359 48…65
– – – – 37 55 GK1 FK 22 x 58 80 LC1 D65 LRD 3359 48…65
30 57 37 64 – – GK1 FK 22 x 58 80 LC1 D65 LRD 3361 55…70
– – – – 45 65 GK1 FK 22 x 58 80 LC1 D80 LRD 3361 55…70
37 (3) 69 45 76 – – GK1 FK 22 x 58 100 LC1 D80 LRD 3363 63…80
45 81 – – 55 80 GK1 FK 22 x 58 100 LC1 D95 LRD 3365 80…93
– – 55 90 – – GK1 FK 22 x 58 125 LC1 D115 LRD 4365 80…104
55 100 – – 75 105 GK1 FK 22 x 58 125 LC1 D115 LRD 4367 95…120
(1) For breaking under load, add a rotary switch disconnector.

(3) 400 V maximum.
1/24
for customer assembly D.O.L. starters with fuse protection

(NF C or DIN fuses)
(continued) 1

Standard power ratings of 3-phase Switch- aM fuses Contactor Thermal overload relay
400/415 V 440 V 500 V
disconnector-fuse
Reference Size Rating Reference (1) Reference Setting
1
kW A kW A kW A A A
0.06 0.22 0.06 0.19 – – GS1 DD 10 x 38 2 LC1 D09 LRD 02 0.16…0.25
– – 0.09 0.28 – – GS1 DD 10 x 38 2 LC1 D09 LRD 03 0.25…0.4
0.09 0.36 – – – –
0.12 0.42 0.12 0.37 – – GS1 DD 10 x 38 2 LC1 D09 LRD 0 0.4…0.63
0.18 0.6 0.18 0.55 – –
– – 0.25 0.76 – – GS1 DD 10 x 38 2 LC1 D09 LRD 05 0.63…1
0.25 0.88 – – 0.37 1
0.37 1 0.37 1 0.55 1.21
0.55 1.5 0.55 1.36 0.75 1.5 GS1 DD 10 x 38 2 LC1 D09 LRD 06 1…1.7
0.75 2 0.75 1.68 – –
– – 1.1 2.37 1.1 2 GS1 DD 10 x 38 4 LC1 D09 LRD 07 1.6…2.5
1.1 2.5 – – 1.5 2.6
1.5 3.5 1.5 3.06 2.2 3.8 GS1 DD 10 x 38 4 LC1 D09 LRD 08 2.5…4
2.2 5 2.2 4.42 3 5 GS1 DD 10 x 38 6 LC1 D09 LRD 10 4…6
3 6.5 3 5.77 4 6 GS1 DD 10 x 38 8 LC1 D09 LRD 12 5.5…8
4 8.4 4 7.9 5.5 9 GS1 DD 10 x 38 10 LC1 D09 LRD 14 7…10
5.5 11 5.5 10.4 7.5 12 GS1 DD 10 x 38 16 LC1 D12 LRD 16 9…13
7.5 14.8 7.5 13.7 9 13.9 GS1 DD 10 x 38 16 LC1 D18 LRD 21 12…18
– – 9 16.9 – – GS1 F 14 x 51 20 LC1 D25 LRD 21 12…18
9 18.1 11 20.1 11 18.4
11 21 – – 15 23 GS1 F 14 x 51 25 LC1 D25 LRD 22 16…24
15 28.5 15 26.5 18.5 28.5 GS1 F 14 x 51 3 LC1 D32 LRD 32 23…32
18.5 35 18.5 32.8 22 33 GS1 F 14 x 51 40 LC1 D40 LRD 3355 30…40
22 42 22 39 30 45 GS1 J 22 x 58 50 LC1 D50 LRD 3357 37…50
– – 30 51.5 – – GS1 J 22 x 58 80 LC1 D50 LRD 3359 48…65
– – – – 37 55 GS1 J 22 x 58 80 LC1 D65 LRD 3359 48…65
30 57 37 64 – – GS1 J 22 x 58 80 LC1 D65 LRD 3361 55…70
– – – – 45 65 GS1 J 22 x 58 80 LC1 D95 LRD 3361 55…70
37 69 45 76 – – GS1 J 22 x 58 100 LC1 D80 LRD 3363 63…80
– – – – 55 80 GS1 J 22 x 58 100 LC1 D115 LR9 D5367 60…100
45 81 – – – – GS1 J 22 x 58 100 LC1 D95 LRD 3365 80…93
55 100 55 90 75 105 GS1 L T0 125 LC1 D150 LR9 D5369 90…150
75 135 75 125 90 129 GS1 L T0 160 LC1 D150 LR9 D5369 90…150
90 165 90 146 110 156 GS1 N T1 200 LC1 F185 LR9 F5371 132…220
110 200 110 178 132 187 GS1 N T1 250 LC1 F225 LR9 F5371 132…220
132 240 132 215 160 220 GS1 QQ T2 315 LC1 F265 LR9 F7375 200…330
– – 160 256 – – GS1 QQ T2 315 LC1 F330 LR9 F7375 200…330
160 285 200 321 200 281 GS1 QQ T2 400 LC1 F330 LR9 F7375 200…330
– – – – 220 310 GS1 QQ T2 400 LC1 F400 LR9 F7375 200…330
200 352 – – – –
220 388 220 353 250 360 GS1 S T3 500 LC1 F400 LR9 F7379 300…500
250 437 250 401 – – GS1 S T3 500 LC1 F500 LR9 F7379 300…500
– – – – 315 445
– – – – 355 500 GS1 S T3 630 LC1 F500 LR9 F7381 380…630
315 555 315 505 – – GS1 S T3 630 LC1 F630 LR9 F7381 380…630
– – 355 549 – –
– – 400 611 400 540 GS1 V T4 800 LC1 F630 LR9 F7381 380…630
(1) For reversing operation. replace the prefix LC1 with LC2.
1/25

Star-delta starters with circuit-breaker

Maximum operating rate: LC3 K: 12 starts/hour; LC3 D: 30 starts/hour.
1 Maximum starting time: 30 seconds.
Standard power ratings of 3-phase Circuit-breaker Star-delta contactors

400/415 V 440 V Reference Setting range Reference (2)
P Ie IrD (1) Iq (2) P Ie IrD (1) Iq (2) of thermal trips
kW A A kA kW A A kA A
1.5 3.5 2 50 1.5 3.06 1.8 50 GV2 ME08 2.5…4 LC3 K06
2.2 5 2.9 50 2.2 4.42 2.6 50

– – – – 3 5.77 3.3 50 GV2 ME10 4…6.3 LC3 K06
3 6.5 3.8 50 – – – –
4 8.4 4.9 50 4 7.9 4.6 15 GV2 ME14 6…10 LC3 K06
5.5 11 6.4 15 5.5 10.4 6 8 GV2 ME16 9…14 LC3 K06
7.5 14.8 8.6 15 7.5 13.7 7.9 8 GV2 ME20 13…18 LC3 K09
– – – – 9 16.9 9.8 8 GV2 ME20 13…18 LC3 D12A
9 18.1 10 15 11 20.1 12 6 GV2 ME21 17…23 LC3 D12A
11 21 12 15 – – – – GV2 ME22 20…25 LC3 D12A
15 28.5 17 10 15 26.5 15 6 GV2 ME32 24…32 LC3 D18A
18.5 35 20 35 18.5 32.8 19 25 GV3 ME40 25…40 LC3 D18A
– – – – 22 39 23 25 GV3 ME40 25…40 LC3 D18A
22 42 24 35 30 51.5 30 10 GV3 ME63 40…63 LC3 D32A
– – – – 30 51.5 30 25 GV7 RE80 48…80 LC3 D32A
30 57 33 35 – – – – GV3 ME63 40…63 LC3 D32A
30 57 33 25 – – – – GV7 RE80 48…80 LC3 D32A
37 69 40 15 37 64 37 10 GV3 ME80 56…80 LC3 D40
37 69 40 25 37 64 37 25 GV7 RE80 48…80 LC3 D40
– – – – 45 76 44 10 GV3 ME80 56…80 LC3 D50
– – – – 45 76 44 25 GV7 RE80 48…80 LC3 D50
45 81 47 25 – – – –
55 100 58 25 55 90 52 25 GV7 RE100 60…100 LC3 D50
75 135 78 35 75 125 72 35 GV7 RE150 90…150 LC3 D80
– – – – 90 146 84 35 GV7 RE150 90…150 LC3 D115
90 165 95 35
110 200 115 35 110 178 103 35 GV7 RE220 132…220 LC3 D115
– – – – 132 215 124 35 GV7 RE220 132…220 LC3 D150
(1) IrD: current in the motor windings in delta connection.

1/26
Combination starters for TeSys motor starters - open version 1
customer assembly Star-delta starters with circuit-breaker

(continued) 1

Maximum operating rate: LC1 D: 30 starts/hour; LC1 F: 12 starts/hour.
Maximum starting time: LC1 D: 30 seconds; LC1 F: 20 seconds. 1
Standard power ratings of 3-phase Circuit-breaker Star-delta contactors
400/415 V 440 V Reference Setting range Reference
P Ie Iq P Ie Iq (1) of thermal trips
kW A kA kW A kA A
1.5 3.5 130 1.5 3.06 130 GV2 P08 2.5…4 3 x LC1 D09
2.2 5 130 2.2 4.42 130 GV2 P10 4…6.3 3 x LC1 D18
– – – 3 5.77 130 GV2 P10 4...6.3 3 x LC1 D18
3 6.5 130 – – – GV2 P14 6…10 3 x LC1 D18
4 8.4 130 4 7.9 130 GV2 P14 6…10 3 x LC1 D18
5.5 11 130 5.5 10.4 50 GV2 P16 9…14 3 x LC1 D25
– – – 7.5 13.7 50 GV2 P16 9…14 3 x LC1 D25
7.5 14.8 50 9 16.9 20 GV2 P20 13…18 3 x LC1 D25
9 18.1 50 11 20.1 20 GV2 P21 17…23 3 x LC1 D25
11 21 50 – – – GV2 P22 20…25 3 x LC1 D25
15 28.5 70 15 26.5 65 GV7 RS40 25…40 3 x LC1 D80
18.5 35 70 18.5 32.8 65 GV7 RS40 25…40 3 x LC1 D80
– – – 22 39 65 GV7 RS40 25…40 3 x LC1 D80
22 42 70 – – – GV7 RS50 30…50 3 x LC1 D80
30 57 70 30 51.5 65 GV7 RS80 48…80 3 x LC1 D80
37 69 70 37 64 65 GV7 RS80 48…80 3 x LC1 D80
– – – 45 76 65 GV7 RS80 48…80 3 x LC1 D80
45 81 70 – – – GV7 RS100 60…100 3 x LC1 D115
55 100 70 55 90 65 GV7 RS100 60…100 3 x LC1 D115
75 135 70 75 125 65 GV7 RS150 90…150 3 x LC1 D150
– – – 90 146 65 GV7 RS150 90…150 3 x LC1 D150
90 165 70 110 178 65 GV7 RS220 132…220 3 x LC1 F185
110 200 70 132 215 65 GV7 RS220 132…220 3 x LC1 F225
1/27

Star-delta starters with circuit-breaker and overload

Maximum operating rate: LC3 K and LC3 F: 12 starts/hour; LC3 D: 30 starts/hour.
1 Maximum starting time: LC3 K and LC3 D: 30 seconds; LC3 F: 20 seconds.
Standard power ratings of 3-phase Circuit-breaker Star-delta Thermal overload relay

motors 50/60 Hz in category AC-3 contactors
400/415 V 440 V Reference Rating Irm (2) Reference Reference Setting
P Ie IrD (1) Iq P Ie IrD (1) Iq range
kW A A kA kW A A kA A A A
– – – – 1.5 3.06 1.8 50
1.5 3.5 2 50 2.2 4.42 3 50 GV2 LE08 4 51 LC3 K06 LR2 K0308 1.8…2.6
2.2 5 3 50 3 5.77 3 50 GV2 LE10 6.3 78 LC3 K06 LR2 K0310 2.6…3.7
3 6.5 4 50 – – – – GV2 LE14 10 138 LC3 K06 LR2 K0312 3.7…5.5
– – – – 4 7.9 5 50 GV2 LE10 6.3 78 LC3 K06 LR2 K0312 3.7…5.5
4 8.4 5 50 – – – – GV2 LE14 10 138 LC3 K06 LR2 K0312 3.7…5.5
– – – – 5.5 10.4 6 15 GV2 LE14 10 138 LC3 K06 LR2 K0314 5.5…8
5.5 11 6 15 – – – – GV2 LE16 14 170 LC3 K06 LR2 K0314 5.5…8
– – – – 7.5 13.7 8 8 GV2 LE16 14 170 LC3 K09 LR2 K0316 8…11.5
7.5 14.8 9 15 – – – – GV2 LE20 18 223 LC3 K09 LR2 K0316 8…11.5
– – – – 9 16.9 1 8 GV2 LE16 14 170 LC3 D12A LRD 16 9…13
9 18.1 10 15 – – – – GV2 LE22 25 327 LC3 K12 LR2 K0316 8…11.5
– – – – 11 20.1 12 8 GV2 LE20 18 223 LC3 K12 LR2 K0321 10…14
11 21 12 15 – – – – GV2 LE22 25 327 LC3 K12 LR2 K0321 10…14
– – – – 15 26.5 15 6 GV2 LE22 25 327 LC3 D18A LRD 21 12…18
15 28.5 16 10 – – – – GV2 LE32 32 384 LC3 D18A LRD 21 12…18
18.5 35 20 70 18.5 32.8 19 65 NS80HMA 50 350 LC3 D18A LRD 22 16…24
– – – – 22 39 23 65 NS80HMA 50 400 LC3 D18A LRD 22 16…24
22 42 24 70 – – – – NS80HMA 50 400 LC3 D32A LRD 32 23…32
– – – – 30 51.5 30 65 NS80HMA 80 560 LC3 D32A LRD 32 23…32
30 57 33 70 – – – – NS80HMA 80 560 LC3 D32A LRD 35 30…38
– – – – 37 64 37 65 NS80HMA 80 560 LC3 D40 LRD 3355 30…40
– – – – 45 76 44 65 NS80HMA 80 640 LC3 D40 LRD 3357 37…50
– – – – 55 90 52 65 NS80HMA 80 800 LC3 D50 LRD 3359 48…65
37 69 40 70 – – – – NS80HMA 80 640 LC3 D40 LRD 3359 48…65
– – – – 75 125 72 (3) NS160pMA (3) 150 1200 LC3 D80 LRD 3363 63…80
45 81 47 (3) – – – – NS100pMA (3) 100 800 LC3 D50 LRD 3357 37…50
55 100 58 (3) – – – – NS100pMA (3) 100 1200 LC3 D50 LRD 3361 55…70
75 135 78 (3) – – – – NS160pMA (3) 150 1200 LC3 D80 LRD 3363 63…80
– – – – 90 146 85 (3) NS160pMA (3) 150 1200 LC3 D115 LRD 4365 80…104
90 165 96 (3) 110 178 103 (3) NS250pMA (3) 220 1760 LC3 D115 LRD 4365 80…104
– – – – 132 215 125 (3) NS250pMA (3) 220 1760 LC3 D150 LRD 4369 110…140
110 200 116 (3) – – – – NS250pMA (3) 220 1760 LC3 D115 LRD 4369 110…140
– – – – 160 256 148 (3) NS400pMA (3) 320 2240 LC3 D150 LR9 D5369 90…150
– – – – 200 321 186 (3) NS630pMA (3) 500 3150 LC3 F225 LR9 F5371 132…220
132 240 139 (3) – – – – NS400pMA (3) 320 2240 LC3 D150 LRD 4369 110…140
160 285 165 (3) – – – – NS400pMA (3) 320 2560 LC3 F185 LR9 F5371 132…220
200 352 204 (3) 220 353 204 (3) NS630pMA (3) 500 3150 LC3 F225 LR9 F5371 132…220
220 388 225 (3) 250 401 233 (3) NS630pMA (3) 500 3500 LC3 F265 LR9 F7375 200…330
280 480 278 (3) – – – – NS630pMA (3) 500 4000 LC3 F330 LR9 F7375 200…330
– – – – 315 505 295 (3) C801p+STR35ME 800 4000 LC3 F330 LR9 F7375 200…330
315 555 322 (3) 355 518 300 (3) C801p+STR35ME 800 4500 LC3 F330 LR9 F7375 200…330
– – – 375 575 334 (3) C801p+STR35ME 800 5000 LC3 F400 LR9 F7379 300…500
Breaking performance NS100pMA NS160pMA NS400pMA C801p
Iq (kA) NS250pMA NS630pMA +STR35ME
400/415 V 25 70 36 70 70 130 70 150
440 V 25 65 35 65 65 130 65 100
Code E S E S H L H L
1/28
for customer assembly Star-delta starters with circuit-breaker and

overload protection by separate thermal overload relay
(continued) 1

Standard power ratings of 3-phase Circuit-breaker Star-delta Thermal overload relay
motors 50/60 Hz in category AC-3 contactors
400/415 V 440 V Reference Rating Irm (1) Reference Reference Setting
P Ie Iq P Ie Iq range
kW A kA kW A kA A A A
1.5 3.5 130 1.5 3.06 130 GV2 L08 4 51 3 x LC1 D18 LRD 08 2.5…4
2.2 5 130 2.2 4.42 130

3 6.5 130 3 5.77 130 GV2 L10 6.3 78 3 x LC1 D18 LRD 10 4…6
– – – 4 7.9 20 GV2 L14 10 138 3 x LC1 D18 LRD 14 7…10
4 8.4 130 – – – GV2 L14 10 138 3 x LC1 D18 LRD 16 9…13
5.5 11 50 5.5 10.4 20 GV2 L16 14 170 3 x LC1 D25 LRD 16 9…13
7.5 14.8 50 7.5 13.7 20 GV2 L20 18 223 3 x LC1 D25 LRD 21 12…18
– – – 9 16.9 20 GV2 L22 25 327 3 x LC1 D25 LRD 21 12…18
9 18.1 50 – – –
11 21 50 11 20.1 20 GV2 L22 25 327 3 x LC1 D25 LRD 22 16…24
15 28.5 70 15 26.5 65 NS80HMA 50 300 3 x LC1 D40 LRD 3353 23…32
18.5 35 70 18.5 32.8 65 NS80HMA 50 350 3 x LC1 D50 LRD 3355 30…40
22 42 70 22 39 65 NS80HMA 50 400 3 x LC1 D50 LRD 3357 37…50
30 57 70 30 51.5 65
– – – 37 64 65 NS80HMA 80 560 3 x LC1 D65 LRD 3359 48…65
37 69 70 45 76 65 NS80HMA 80 640 3 x LC1 D80 LRD 3363 63…80
45 81 (2) 55 90 (2) NS100pMA (2) 100 800 3 x LC1 D115 LR9 D5367 60…100
55 100 (2) – – – NS160pMA (2) 150 1200 3 x LC1 D115 LR9 D5369 90…150
– – – 75 125 (2) NS160pMA (2) 150 1200 3 x LC1 D150 LR9 D5369 90…150
75 135 (2) 90 146 (2) NS160pMA (2) 150 1200 3 x LC1 D150 LR9 D5369 90…150
90 165 (2) 110 178 (2) NS250pMA (2) 220 1760 3 x LC1 F185 LR9 F5371 132…220
110 200 (2) – – – NS250pMA (2) 220 1760 3 x LC1 F225 LR9 F5371 132…220
– – – 132 215 (2) NS250pMA (2) 220 1760 3 x LC1 F225 LR9 F7375 200…330
132 240 (2) 160 256 (2) NS400pMA (2) 320 2240 3 x LC1 F265 LR9 F7375 200…330
160 285 (2) – – – NS400pMA (2) 320 2560 3 x LC1 F330 LR9 F7375 200…330
– – – 200 321 (2) NS400pMA (2) 320 2880 3 x LC1 F330 LR9 F7379 300…500
200 352 (2) 220 353 (2) NS630pMA (2) 500 3150 3 x LC1 F400 LR9 F7379 300…500
220 388 (2) 250 401 (2) NS630pMA (2) 500 3500 3 x LC1 F400 LR9 F7379 300…500
250 437 (2) – – – NS630pMA (2) 500 4000 3 x LC1 F500 LR9 F7379 300…500

Breaking performance NS100pMA NS160pMA NS400pMA
Iq (kA) NS250pMA NS630pMA
400/415 V 25 70 36 70 70 130
440 V 25 65 35 65 65 130
Code E S E S H L
1/29

Star-delta starters with fuse protection
(NF C or DIN fuses)

Maximum operating rate: LC3 K and LC3 F: 12 starts/hour; LC3 D: 30 starts/hour.
1 Maximum starting time: LC3 K and LC3 D: 30 seconds; LC3 F: 20 seconds.
Standard power ratings of 3-phase Fuse carrier aM fuses Star-delta Thermal overload relay
motors 50/60 Hz in category AC-3 (basic block) contactors
400/415 V 440 V Reference Size Rating Reference Reference Setting
P Ie IrD (1) Iq P Ie IrD (1) Iq range
kW A A kA kW A A kA A A
1.5 3.5 2 50 1.5 3.06 2 50 LS1 D32 10 x 38 4 LC3 K06 LR2 K0308 1.8…2.6
2.2 5 3 50 – – – – LS1 D32 10 x 38 6 LC3 K06 LR2 K0310 2.6…3.7
– – – – 2.2 4.42 3 50
– – – – 3 5.77 3 50 LS1 D32 10 x 38 8 LC3 K06 LR2 K0310 2.6…3.7
3 6.5 4 50 – – – – LS1 D32 10 x 38 8 LC3 K06 LR2 K0312 3.7…5.5
4 8.4 5 50 4 7.9 5 50 LS1 D32 10 x 38 12 LC3 K06 LR2 K0312 3.7…5.5
5.5 11 6 50 5.5 10.4 6 50 LS1 D32 10 x 38 16 LC3 K06 LR2 K0314 5.5…8
7.5 14.8 9 50 7.5 13.7 8 50 LS1 D32 10 x 38 16 LC3 K09 LR2 K0316 8…11.5
9 18.1 10 100 9 16.9 10 50 LS1 D32 10 x 38 20 LC3 D12A LRD 16 9…13
11 21 12 100 11 20.1 12 100 GK1 EK 14 x 51 25 LC3 D12A LRD 16 9…13
15 28.5 16 100 15 26.5 15 100 GK1 EK 14 x 51 32 LC3 D18A LRD 21 12…18
18.5 35 20 100 18.5 32.8 19 100 GK1 EK 14 x 51 40 LC3 D18A LRD 22 16…24
– – – – 22 39 23 100 GK1 FK 22 x 58 50 LC3 D18A LRD 22 16…24
22 42 24 100 – – – – GK1 FK 22 x 58 50 LC3 D32A LRD 32 23…32
– – – – 30 51.5 30 100 GK1 FK 22 x 58 63 LC3 D32A LRD 32 23…32
30 57 33 100 37 64 37 100 GK1 FK 22 x 58 80 LC3 D40 LRD 3355 30…40
37 69 40 100 – – – – GK1 FK 22 x 58 80 LC3 D40 LRD 3357 37…50
– – – – 45 76 44 100 GK1 FK 22 x 58 80 LC3 D50 LRD 3357 37…50
45 81 47 100 – – – – GK1 FK 22 x 58 100 LC3 D50 LRD 3357 37…50
– – – – 55 90 52 100 GS1 K 22 x 58 100 LC3 D50 LRD 3359 48…65
55 100 58 100 – – – – GS1 K 22 x 58 125 LC3 D50 LRD 3361 55…70
75 135 78 100 75 125 72 100 GS1 L T0 160 LC3 D80 LRD 3363 63…80
– – – – 90 146 84 100 GS1 L T0 160 LC3 D115 LRD 4365 80…104
90 165 95 100 – – – – GS1 N T1 200 LC3 D115 LRD 4367 95…120
110 200 115 100 110 178 103 100 GS1 N T1 200 LC3 D115 LRD 4367 95…120
132 240 139 100 132 215 124 100 GS1 QQ T2 250 LC3 D150 LRD 4369 110…140
160 285 165 100 160 256 148 100 GS1 QQ T2 315 LC3 F185 LR9 F5371 132…220
– – – – 200 321 185 100 GS1 QQ T2 400 LC3 F225 LR9 F5369 132…220
220 388 225 100 – – – – GS1 QQ T2 400 LC3 F265 LR9 F7375 200…330
– – – – 250 401 233 100 GS1 S T3 500 LC3 F265 LR9 F7375 200…330
280 480 278 100 – – – – GS1 S T3 500 LC3 F330 LR9 F7375 200…330
– – – – 315 505 293 100

315 555 322 100 355 518 300 100 GS1 S T3 630 LC3 F330 LR9 F7375 200…330
– – – – 375 575 334 100 GS1 S T3 630 LC3 F400 LR9 F7379 300…500
1/30

Star-delta starters with fuse protection
(NF C or DIN fuses)

Standard power ratings of 3-phase Switch- aM fuses Star-delta Thermal overload relay
motors 50/60 Hz in category AC-3 disconnector-fuse contactors
400/415 V 440 V Reference Size Rating Reference Reference Setting
kW A kA kW A kA A A
1.5 3.5 50 1.5 3.06 50 GS1 DD 10 x 38 4 3 x LC1 D09 LRD 08 2.5…4
2.2 5 50 2.2 4.42 50 GS1 DD 10 x 38 6 3 x LC1 D09 LRD 10 4…6
3 6.5 50 3 5.77 50 GS1 DD 10 x 38 8 3 x LC1 D09 LRD 12 5.5…8
4 8.4 50 4 7.9 50 GS1 DD 10 x 38 10 3 x LC1 D09 LRD 14 7…10
5.5 11 50 5.5 10.4 50 GS1 DD 10 x 38 16 3 x LC1 D12 LRD 16 9…13
7.5 14.8 50 7.5 13.7 50 GS1 DD 10 x 38 16 3 x LC1 D18 LRD 21 12…18
9 18.1 100 9 16.9 100

11 21 100 11 20.1 100 GS1 F 14 x 51 25 3 x LC1 D25 LRD 22 16…24
15 28.5 100 15 26.5 100 GS1 F 14 x 51 32 3 x LC1 D32 LRD 32 23…32
18.5 35 100 18.5 32.8 100 GS1 F 14 x 51 40 3 x LC1 D40 LRD 3355 30…40
22 42 100 22 39 100 GS1 F 22 x 58 50 3 x LC1 D50 LRD 3357 37…50
30 57 100 30 51.5 100 GS1 J 22 x 58 80 3 x LC1 D65 LRD 3361 55…70
37 69 100 37 64 100 GS1 J 22 x 58 80 3 x LC1 D80 LRD 3363 63…80
– – – 45 76 100 GS1 J 22 x 58 80 3 x LC1 D80 LRD 3365 80…93
45 81 100 – – – GS1 J 22 x 58 100 3 x LC1 D115 LR9 D5367 60…100
– – – 55 90 100 GS1 L T0 125 3 x LC1 D115 LR9 D5369 90…150
55 100 100 – – – GS1 L T0 125 3 x LC1 D150 LR9 D5369 90…150
– – – 75 125 100 GS1 L T0 160 3 x LC1 D150 LR9 D5369 90…150
75 135 100 – – – GS1 L T0 160 3 x LC1 F185 LR9 D5369 90…150
90 165 100 90 146 100 GS1 N T1 200 3 x LC1 F185 LR9 F5371 132…220
110 200 100 110 178 100 GS1 N T1 250 3 x LC1 F225 LR9 F5371 132…220
132 240 100 132 215 100 GS1 QQ T2 315 3 x LC1 F265 LR9 F7375 200…330
160 285 100 160 256 100 GS1 QQ T2 315 3 x LC1 F330 LR9 F7375 200…330
– – – 200 321 100 GS1 QQ T2 400 3 x LC1 F330 LR9 F7379 300…500
200 352 100 220 353 100

220 388 100 250 401 100 GS1 S T3 500 3 x LC1 F400 LR9 F7379 300…500
250 437 100 – – – GS1 S T3 500 3 x LC1 F500 LR9 F7379 300…500
315 555 100 315 505 100 GS1 S T3 630 3 x LC1 F630 LR9 F7381 380…630
– – – 355 549 100

– – – 400 611 100 GS1 V T4 800 3 x LC1 F630 LR9 F7381 380…630
355 605 100 – – – GS1 V T4 800 3 x LC1 F780 LR9 F7381 380…630
1/31

D.O.L. starters with fuse protection (BS fuses)
0.06 to 375 kW at 415 V: type 2 coordination

Standard power ratings of 3-phase Switch- BS fuses Contactor Thermal overload relay
1 motors 50/60 Hz in category AC-3 disconnector-
fuse
415 V 440 V 500 V Reference Size Rating Reference (1) Reference Setting
kW A kW A A kA A A
0.06 0.22 0.06 0.19 – – GS1 DDB A1 NIT 2 LC1 D09 LRD 02 0.16…0.25
– – 0.09 0.28 – – GS1 DDB A1 NIT 2 LC1 D09 LRD 03 0.25…0.4
0.09 0.36 – – – –
0.12 .42 0.12 0.37 – – GS1 DDB A1 NIT 2 LC1 D09 LRD 04 0.4…0.63
0.18 0.6 0.18 0.55 – – GS1 DDB A1 NIT 2 LC1 D09 LRD 05 0.63…1
– – 0.25 0.76 – – GS1 DDB A1 NIT 4 LC1 D09 LRD 05 0.63…1
0.25 0.88 0.37 1 0.37 1
0.37 1 0.55 1.36 0.55 1.2
0.55 1.5 0.75 1.68 0.75 1.5 GS1 DDB A1 NIT 6 LC1 D09 LRD 06 1…1.7
0.75 2 – – – – GS1 DDB A1 NIT 10 LC1 D09 LRD 07 1.6…2.5
– – – – 1.5 2.6 GS1 DDB A1 NIT 10 LC1 D09 LRD 08 2.5…4
1.5 3.5 1.5 3.06 2.2 3.8 GS1 DDB A1 NIT 16 LC1 D09 LRD 08 2.5…4
2.2 5 2.2 4.42 3 5 GS1 DDB A1 NIT 16 LC1 D09 LRD 10 4…6
3 6.5 3 5.77 4 6.5 GS1 DDB A1 NIT 20 LC1 D09 LRD 12 5.5…8
4 8.4 4 7.9 5.5 9 GS1 DDB A1 NIT 20 LC1 D09 LRD 14 7…10
5.5 11 5.5 10.4 7.5 12 GS1 DDB A1 NIT 20M25 LC1 D12 LRD 16 9…13
7.5 14 7.5 13.7 9 13.9 GS1 DDB A1 NIT 20M32 LC1 D18 LRD 21 12…18
9 18.1 9 16.9 – – GS1 GB A2 TIA 32M35 LC1 D18 LRD 21 12…18
11 21 11 20 11 18.4
– – – – 15 23 GS1 GB A2 TIA 32M50 LC1 D25 LRD 22 16…24
15 28.5 15 26.5 – – GS1 GB A2 TIA 32M63 LC1 D32 LRD 32 23…32
– – – – 22 33 GS1 GB A3 TIS 63M80 LC1 D40 LRD 3355 30…40
22 42 22 39 30 45 GS1 GB A3 TIS 63M100 LC1 D50 LRD 3357 37…50
– – 30 51.5 – – GS1 GB A3 TIS 63M100 LC1 D50 LRD 3359 48…65
30 57 – – – – GS1 GB A3 TIS 63M100 LC1 D65 LRD 3359 48…65
– – 45 76 45 65 GS1 LLB A4 TCP 100M125 LC1 D80 LRD 3363 63…80
45 81 – – 55 80 GS1 LLB A4 TCP 100M125 LC1 D95 LRD 3365 80…93
55 100 – – – – GS1 LLB A4 TCP 100M160 LC1 D115 LR9 D5369 90…150
– – 55 90 – – GS1 LLB A4 TCP 100M160 LC1 D115 LR9 D5367 60…100
– – – – 80 116 GS1 LB B2 TF 200 LC1 D150 LR9 D5369 90…150
80 138 80 132 – – GS1 LB B2 TF 200M250 LC1 D150 LR9 D5369 90…150
– – – – 100 143
– – – – 110 156 GS1 LB B2 TF 200M250 LC1 F185 LR9 F5371 132…220
100 182 100 162 – – GS1 MMB B2 TF 200M250 LC1 F185 LR9 F5371 132…220
110 196 110 178 – – GS1 MMB B2 TF 200M315 LC1 F225 LR9 F5371 132…220
– – – – 140 200 GS1 NB B3 TKF 315M355 LC1 F265 LR9 F5371 132…220
140 250 140 226 160 220 GS1 NB B3 TKF 315M355 LC1 F265 LR9 F7375 200…330
160 285 160 256 – – GS1 QQB B4 TKF 315M355 LC1 F330 LR9 F7375 200…330
– – – – 220 310 GS1 QQB B4 TMF 400 LC1 F400 LR9 F7379 300…500
220 388 220 353 257 362 GS1 QQB B4 TMF 400M450 LC1 F400 LR9 F7379 300…500
– – – – 270 380 GS1 SB C2 TTM 500 LC1 F500 LR9 F7379 300…500
257 450 257 412 – –
270 460 270 433 – – GS1 SB C2 TTM 500 LC1 F500 LR9 F7381 380…630
375 610 375 577 375 508
– – – – 425 556 GS1 SB C2 TTM 630 LC1 F630 LR9 F7381 380…630
1/32
for customer assembly Star-delta starters with fuse protection

(BS fuses)
(continued) 1
1.5 to 375 kW at 415 V: type 2 coordination

Standard power ratings of 3-phase Switch- BS fuses Contactor Thermal overload relay
motors 50/60 Hz in category AC-3 disconnector-
fuse
415 V 440 V Reference Size Rating Reference Reference Setting
kW A kA kW A kA A A
1.5 3.5 50 1.5 3.06 50 GS1 DDB A1 NIT 16 3 x LC1 D09 LRD 08 2.5…4
2.2 5 50 2.2 4.42 50 GS1 DDB A1 NIT 16 3 x LC1 D09 LRD 10 4…6
3 6.5 50 3 5.77 50 GS1 DDB A1 NIT 20 3 x LC1 D09 LRD 12 5.5…8
4 8.4 50 4 7.9 50 GS1 DDB A1 NIT 20 3 x LC1 D09 LRD 14 7…10
5.5 11 50 5.5 10.4 50 GS1 DDB A1 NIT 20M25 3 x LC1 D12 LRD 16 9…13
7.5 14.8 50 7.5 13.7 50 GS1 DDB A1 NIT 20M32 3 x LC1 D18 LRD 21 12…18
9 18.1 50 9 16.9 50 GS1 GB A2 TIA 32M35 3 x LC1 D18 LRD 21 12…18
11 21 50 11 20.1 50 GS1 GB A2 TIA 32M50 3 x LC1 D25 LRD 22 16…24
15 28.5 50 15 26.5 50 GS1 GB A2 TIA 32M63 3 x LC1 D32 LRD 32 23…32
22 42 50 22 39 50 GS1 GB A3 TIS 63M80 3 x LC1 D40 LRD 3355 30…40
– – – 30 51.5 50 GS1 GB A3 TIS 63M100 3 x LC1 D50 LRD 3359 48…65
30 57 50 – – – GS1 GB A3 TIS 63M100 3 x LC1 D65 LRD 3359 48…65
45 81 50 45 76 50 GS1 LLB A4 TCP 100M125 3 x LC1 D80 LRD 3363 63…80
55 100 80 55 90 80 GS1 LLB A4 TCP 100M160 3 x LC1 D115 LR9 D5369 90…150
80 138 80 80 132 80 GS1 LB B2 TF 200M250 3 x LC1 D150 LR9 D5369 90…150
100 182 80 100 162 80 GS1 MMB B2 TF 200M250 3 x LC1 F185 LR9 F5371 132…220
110 196 80 110 178 80 GS1 MMB B2 TF 200M315 3 x LC1 F225 LR9 F5371 132…220
140 250 80 140 226 80 GS1 NB B3 TFK 315M355 3 x LC1 F265 LR9 F7375 200…330
160 285 80 160 256 80 GS1 QQB B3 TFK 315M355 3 x LC1 F330 LR9 F7375 200…330
220 388 80 220 353 80 GS1 QQB B4 TMF 400M450 3 x LC1 F400 LR9 F7379 300…500
257 450 80 257 412 80

270 460 80 270 433 80 GS1 SB C2 TTM 500 3 x LC1 F500 LR9 F7379 300…500
375 610 80 375 577 80 GS1 SB C2 TTM 630 3 x LC1 F630 LR9 F7381 380…630
1/33
References 1
TeSys motor starters - open version 1

4 to 37 kW, (1), with isolating device, pre-assembled
References
Utilisation category AC-3 Fuses to be Basic reference, Weight
1 Standard power ratings
of 3-phase motors
Opera-
tional
fitted by the
customer
to be completed by
adding the voltage code (2)
50/60 Hz current
220 V 380 V 660 V 440 V up Size Type
230 V 400 V 415 V 440 V 500 V 690 V to aM
kW kW kW kW kW kW A A kg
2.2 4 4 4 5.5 – 9 10 x 38 12 LC4 D09App 0.870
106558_1
3 5.5 5.5 5.5 7.5 – 12 10 x 38 16 LC4 D12App 0.870
4 7.5 9 9 10 – 18 10 x 38 20 LC4 D18App 1.150
5.5 11 11 11 15 – 25 10 x 38 25 LC4 D25App 1.580
7.5 15 15 15 18.5 18.5 32 14 x 51 32 LC4 D32App 2.630
11 18.5 22 22 22 30 40 14 x 51 40 LC4 D40pp 2.930
LC4 D09App 15 22 25 30 30 33 50 22 x 58 63 LC4 D50pp 3.200
18.5 30 37 37 37 37 65 22 x 58 80 LC4 D65pp 3.340
22 37 45 45 55 45 80 22 x 58 80 LC4 D80pp 3.650
Specifications
Pre-wired power and control circuit connections.
3-pole isolating device
(1) Thermal overload relay to be ordered separately (see pages 24514/2 and 24514/3).
(2) Standard control circuit voltages.
Volts 24 42 48 110 220 230 240 380 400 415 440

50/60 Hz B7 D7 E7 F7 M7 P7 U7 Q7 V7 N7 R7
For other voltages, please consult your Regional Sales Office.
page 1/35 page 1/35
1/34
Dimensions, TeSys motor starters - open version 1
schemes 1
4 to 37 kW, with isolating device, pre-assembled
Dimensions
D.O.L. starters, plate mounted, pre-assembled
LC4 D09A…D25A 1
98 LC4 D09A…D18A D25A
79 b 218 221
c1 without cover or add-on blocks 94 100
with cover, without add-on blocks 96 102
33
63
with LAD N or C (2 or 4 contacts) 127 133
with LA6 DK10 139 145
110 with LAD T, R, S 147 153
50
173
with LAD T, R, S and sealing cover 151 157

b
c1 = 55 =
= 71 =
86
LC4 D32A
LC4 D32A
c1 without cover or add-on blocks 100
with cover, without add-on blocks 102
with LAD N or C (2 or 4 contacts) 133
124
110
with LA6 DK10 145

with LAD T, R, S 153
with LAD T, R, S and sealing cover 157
36
c1 88
= 90 =
165
LC4 D40…D80
LC4 D40…D65 D80

a 281 311
=
b 143 143
=
b1 45 48
100/110
c 130 140
60
b
c1 without cover or add-on blocks 124 135

with cover, without add-on blocks 129 140
=
with LA1 DN (1 contact) 149 160

=
with LAD N or C (2 or 4 contacts) 157 168

b1
with LA6 DK 169 180

with LAD T, R, S 177 188
c = G =
with LAD T, R, S and sealing cover 181 192
c1 a
c2 100 178
c2 G 263 293
Scheme
D.O.L. starters
LC4 D09A to D80
1/L1
5/L3
3/L2
– Q1
4
2
6
1
– KM1
2
References :
page 1/34
1/35
Presentation 1
Start-delta starters for motor control
Star-delta starting
Current
1 7 This method of starting is applicable to

motors on which all 6 stator terminals
6 are accessible and whose delta
connection voltage corresponds to the
5 mains voltage.
1
4 Star-delta starting should be used for
motors starting on no-load or having a
3 low load torque and gradual build-up:
- the starting torque in star connection is
2
2
reduced to one third of the direct starting
torque, i.e. about 50% of the rated
1
torque.
- the starting current in star connection
0
0 0,25 0,50 0,75 1 is about 1.8 to 2.6 times the rated
Speed current.
1 Starting in direct delta connection
The transition from star to delta
2 Starting in star connection
connection must occur when the
machine has run up to speed. A too
rapid build-up in load torque would
Current
cause the stabilised run-up speed to be
2,5
too low and would therefore eliminate
any advantage in this method of
2 starting: this is the case with certain
machines whose load torque depends
1
on the machine speed (a characteristic
1,5
of centrifugal machines, for example).
(1) All star-delta starters are supplied with a

1
special LAD S2 or LA2 KT2p time delay
2
relay which imposes a delay on the
0,5 delta contactor during the transition
3 period in order to allow the star
contactor sufficient breaking time.
0
0 0,25 0,50 0,75 1
Speed For ratings D115 and D150, this
1 Starting in direct delta connection function is performed by a time delay
2 Starting in star connection auxiliary contact block LAD T2 and a
3 Resistive torque of the machine control relay.
(1) Motor manufacturers generally specify machine load torques.

Example: maximum resistive torque on completion of star-delta start (expressed as a
proportion of the rated torque).
1/36
References 1

5.5 to 132 kW, (1), without isolating device,
pre-assembled
Plate mounted starters

Maximum operating rate: 30 starts/hour. Maximum starting time: 30 seconds.
Standard power ratings
of squirrel cage motors
Auxiliary contacts available
on each contactor
Star delta
mechanical
Basic reference,
to be completed by
Weight 1
Mains voltage - interlock adding the voltage code (2)
delta connection line delta star
220/ 380/ KM2 KM3 KM1
230 V 400 V 415 V 440 V
kW kW kW kW kg
DF522669
4 7.5 7.5 7.5 – – – – (3) – 1 With LC3 D09App 1.530
5.5 11 11 11 – – – – (3) – 1 With LC3 D12App 1.530
11 18.5 22 22 – – – – (3) – 1 With LC3 D18App 1.730
15 25 30 30 – – – – (3) – 1 With LC3 D32App 2.030
18.5 37 37 37 – 1 1 – (3) – 1 Without LC3 D40pp 4.360

LC3 D32App
With LC3 D40ppA64 4.500
30 55 59 59 – 1 1 – (3) – – (3) Without LC3 D50pp 4.360

37 75 75 75 – 1 1 – (3) – – (3) Without LC3 D80pp 5.200

63 110 110 110 – 1 1 – (3) – – (3) Without LC3 D115pp (4) 11.800
With LC3 D115ppA64 (4) 12.100
75 132 132 147 – 1 1 – (3) – 1 (3) Without LC3 D150pp (4) 12.100
With LC3 D150ppA64 (4) 12.100
Rail mounted starters (35 mm 7 rail)

Standard power ratings Auxiliary contacts Star delta Basic reference, Weight
of squirrel cage motors available on each contactor mechanical to be completed by
220/ 380/ KM2 KM3 KM1
230 V 400 V 415 V 440 V
kW kW kW kW kg
3 5.5 5.5 5.5 – – – – – 1 With LC3 K06pp 0.740
4 7.5 7.5 7.5 – – – – – 1 With LC3 K09pp 0.740
Maximum operating rate: 30 starts/hour. Maximum starting time: 30 seconds

4 7.5 7.5 7.5 – – – – (3) – 1 With LC3 D090App 1.530
5.5 11 11 11 – – – – (3) – 1 With LC3 D120App 1.530
11 18.5 22 22 – – – – (3) – 1 With LC3 D180App 1.730
15 25 30 30 – – – – (3) – 1 With LC3 D320App 2.030
(1) Protection must be provided by the addition of a thermal overload relay, to be ordered separately. Select appropriate overload
relay for setting at 0.58 of the full load rated motor current (see pages 6/16 and 6/17).
(2) Standard control circuit voltages:
Volts a 50/60 Hz 24 36 42 48 110 220 230 240 380 400 415 440
Star-delta starters LC3 K06 and K09
Code B7 C7 D7 E7 F7 M7 P7 U7 – – – –
Star-delta starters LC3 D09A...D150, LC3 D090A…D320A
Code B7 – D7 E7 F7 M7 P7 U7 Q7 V7 N7 R7
(3) One auxiliary contact block type LAD N can also be fitted, see page 5/69.
(4) These starters consist of contactors LC1 D115 or D150 without connectors.
1/37
1
1
a
1
KM2
1b
1c
KM1
KM3
KM1
KM3
KM2
1b
a 2 1c 1a
1/38
References 1
Star-delta starters, for motor control, 7.5 to 132 kW (1),

without mechanical interlock, for customer assembly
(on plate or on mounting rail) (2)
Starters for direct combination with a circuit-breaker

Maximum operating rate: 30 starts/hour. Maximum starting time: 30 seconds
Standard power
ratings of squirrel
Thermal-magnetic
motor
Contactors
(basic references, to be completed
1
cage motors (3) circuit-breaker by adding the voltage code) (4)
Mains voltage-
delta connection
400/
415 V 440 V line delta star
kW kW KM2 KM3 KM1
7.5 7.5 GV2 ME20 LC1 D09pp LC1 D09pp LC1 D09pp
– 9 GV2 ME20 LC1 D12pp LC1 D12pp LC1 D09pp
9 11 GV2 ME21 LC1 D12pp LC1 D12pp LC1 D09pp
11 – GV2 ME22 LC1 D12pp LC1 D12pp LC1 D09pp
15 15 GV2 ME32 LC1 D18pp LC1 D18pp LC1 D09pp
Separate component
Description Illustration Reference Weight
item no. kg
Mounting kit comprising: a LAD 912GV 0.130
power circuit connections and
1 time delay contact block LAD S2
Starters for mounting separately from upstream protection
Standard power ratings Contactors Separate
of squirrel cage motors (3) (basic references, to be completed components
Mains voltage - delta connection by adding the voltage code) (4) (see below)
220/ 380/
230 V 400 V 415 V 440 V line delta star
kW kW kW kW KM2 KM3 KM1 Component
types
4 7.5 7.5 7.5 LC1 D09pp LC1 D09pp LC1 D09pp D09
5.5 11 11 11 LC1 D18pp (6) LC1 D12pp LC1 D09pp D12
11 18.5 22 22 LC1 D25pp (7) LC1 D25pp (7) LC1 D09pp D18
15 25 30 30 LC1 D32pp LC1 D32pp LC1 D18pp D32
18.5 37 37 37 LC1 D40pp LC1 D40pp LC1 D40pp D40
63 110 110 110 LC1 D115pp LC1 D115pp LC1 D80pp D115 (5)
75 132 132 147 LC1 D150pp LC1 D150pp LC1 D115pp D150 (5)
Separate components
Description Illustration For components Reference Weight
item no. type (5) kg
Mounting kit comprising: D09 and D12 LAD 91217 0.180
- 1 time delay contact block LAD S2 1a
(D09…D80) (3), D18 and D32 LAD 93217 0.310
- power circuit connections (D09…D80), 1b
- screws and clamps for fixing contactors
D40 and D50 LA9 D5017 0.380
to the plate (D40…D80). 1c
D80 LA9 D8017 0.680
Equipment mounting plates 2 D09, D12, D18 LA9 D12974 0.150

D32 LA9 D32974 0.180
D40 and D50 LA9 D40973 0.300
D80 LA9 D80973 0.300
(1) Protection must be provided by the addition of a thermal overload relay, to be ordered separately.
Select appropriate overload relay for setting at 0.58 of the full load rated motor current, see pages 5/118 and 5/119.
(2) For mounting, assembly and cabling: please refer to installation instructions supplied with the equipment.
(3) See comments on page 1/36.
(4) See page 5/58.
(5) For D115 and D150 components, see illustration and separate parts on pages 1/40 and 1/41.
(6) A D12 component is adequate for the application, but use of a D18 is recommended.
(connection capacity, correct use of power connection kit and connections).
(7) A D18 component is adequate for the application, but use of a D25 is recommended.
(connection capacity, correct use of power connection kit and connections).
Illustrations : Dimensions : Schemes :

page 1/38 pages 1/42 and 1/43 page 1/43
1/39
1
1
13 7 9 12 11 10 3
14
4 5 8
1/40
References (continued) 1
Star-delta starters, for motor control, 7.5 to 132 kW (1),

without mechanical interlock, for customer assembly
(on plate or mounting rail) (2)
Starters for mounting separately from upstream protection

Separate components (continued)
Description Illustration For
item no. use on
No. Sold in
lots of
Unit
reference
Weight
kg
1
Instantaneous 1 D115 1 1 LAD N10 0.020
auxiliary contact (star)
blocks 1 N/O
Control relay 3 D115, D150 1 1 CAD 32pp (3) 0.320
Time delay 4 D115, D150 1 1 LAD T2 0.060

auxiliary
contact blocks
Lead sealing kit 5 D115, D150 1 1 LA9 D901 0.005
for time delay
auxiliary
contact blocks
Thermal magnetic 6 D115, D150 2 6 GB2 CB05 0.060
circuit-breaker for
control circuit
(200…415 V)
Set of 3 7 D115, D150 1 1 LA9 FG980 0.200
connectors for
wider terminations
(optional)
Set of power 8 D115 1 1 LA9 D11517 0.800
connections with
fixing accessories D150 1 1 LA9 D15017 1.050
Spare volt free 9 D115, D150 1 10 DZ3 HA3 0.007

terminals
2 10 DZ3 GA3 0.006
Lug-connector 10 D115, D150 1 10 AB1 BC9535 0.236

terminal block
End stop 11 D115, D150 3 100 AB1 AB8M35 0.005
Mounting rail 12 D115, D150 1 10 AM1 ED021 0.210

5 35 mm
Pre-slotted 13 D115, D150 1 1 AM3 PA65 1.950
mounting plate
Screw with 14 D115, D150 12 100 AF1 VA618 0.006
captive washer
2 100 AF1 VA410 0.002
(1) Protection must be provided by the addition of a thermal overload relay, to be ordered
separately. Select appropriate overload relay for setting at 0.58 of the full load rated motor
current, see pages 6/16 and 6/17.
(2) For mounting, assembly and cabling: please refer to installation instructions supplied with the
equipment.
(3) See page 24525/3.

1/41
Dimensions 1
Star-delta starters
Dimensions
Star-delta starters
1 Plate mounted, pre-assembled Pre-assembled:
LC3 K LC3 D09A…D32A
For customer assembly: 3 x LC1 D with components D09 to D32
KM3 KM1
110
124
110
KM2
110
b
94 150 c 4 = 90 =
175 a
On starters LC3 D09A to D18A, a connection block is mounted on the upper LC3 D09A D12A D18A D32A
part of contactor KM2, increasing the overall height of the product by 6.5 mm. a 143 143 144 165
b 26.5 26.5 26.5 32.5
c with LAD S 139 139 139 145
with LAD S and sealing cover 143 143 143 149
Pre-assembled: LC3 D40, D50 Pre-assembled: LC3 D80

For customer assembly: 3 x LC1 D with components D09 or D50 For customer assembly: 3 x LC1 D with components D80
=
=
=
=
100/110
100/110
143
60
143
60
=
=
=
=
47
45
175 (1) = 263 = 183 (1) = 293 =

281 311
(1) + 4 mm with sealing cover (1) + 4 mm with sealing cover

Pre-assembled: LC3 D115, D150
For customer assembly: 3 x LC1 D with components D115 or D150
H
b
c G
a
a b c G H
LC3 D115 or 3 x LC1 D with components D115 450 555 205 425 525
LC3 D150 or 3 x LC1 D with components D150 450 555 205 425 525
References : Schemes :
pages 1/36 to 1/41 pages 1/43
1/42
Dimensions (continued), TeSys motor starters - open version 1
schemes 1
Star-delta starters
Dimensions (continued)
Star-delta starters (continued)
On mounting rail AM1 DP, pre-assembled
1
LC3 D090A à D320A
2xØ7
KM3 KM1
KM2
b
LC3 D090A à D180A D320A

c 160 b 153 137
c with LAD S 139 145
175
with LAD S and sealing cover 143 149
Schemes
LC3 K, LC3 D09A to D80 LC3 K LC3 D
LC3 D090A to D320A
L1
L2
L3
KM3/5 KM3/5
95
95
O
3
3
5
5
1
21 96
96
– KM2 – KM3 – KM1
14
O
6
6
2
13 22
I – KM2 (2)
13
13
– KM1
W1
U1
V1
(1) 54 53 l – KM2
1
14
13 14
6
2
22
21
– KM3 – KM1 – KM1

21
2
22
W1
U1
55 14
V1
W2
U2
V2
68
– KM2 – KM2
15
21 56
21 67
T
A1 16
W2
U2
V2
– KM3 – KM1
A1
A1
A1
A1 22
A1 22
T – KM1 – KM3 – KM2
A1
A2
A2
A2
A2
KM2/1 (N) N
Y – KM1 – KM2 – KM3
L
A2
A2
A2
KM3/1
Note: LC3 D09A to D18A: Mechanical interlock between KM3 and KM1.
LC3 D115 and D150

L1
L2
L3
6
2
– F1
95
W1
U1
V1
– F1
21 96
3
3
5
5
1
– KM2 – KM3 – KM1 O

22
W2
(2)
U2
V2
6
6
2
153
67
13
– KM1 – KM2
l
184 154
68
14
W1
Recommended
U1
V1
172
cabling for reversal – KM1

1
55 183
of motor rotation – KM1

171
(standard motor,
viewed from shaft – KM2
2
end).
W2
161 56
U2
V2
153
13
– KM3 – KM2 – KA1

A1 162
A1 14
A1154
A1
– F2 – KM1 – KM2 – KA1 – KM3

A2
A2
A2
A2
Y L
(1) Recommended cabling for reversal of motor rotation (standard motor, viewed from shaft end).
(2) Remote control.
References :
pages 1/36 to 1/41
1/43
Presentation 1
Motor starters - open version 1
Start-delta starters for motor control
Star-delta starting
Current
1 7 This method of starting is applicable to

motors on which all 6 stator terminals
6 are accessible and whose delta
connection voltage corresponds to the
5 mains voltage.
1
4 Star-delta starting should be used for
motors starting on no-load or having a
3 low load torque and gradual build-up:
- the starting torque in star connection is
2 reduced to one third of the direct starting
2
torque, i.e. about 50% of the rated
1
torque.
- the starting current in star connection
0
0 0,25 0,50 0,75 1
is about 1.8 to 2.6 times the rated
Speed current.
The transition from star to delta
connection must occur when the
machine has run up to speed. A too
rapid build-up in load torque would
Current
cause the stabilised run-up speed to be
2,5
too low and would therefore eliminate
any advantage in this method of
2 starting: this is the case with certain
machines whose load torque depends
1
on the machine speed (a characteristic
1,5
of centrifugal machines, for example).
(1) Switching from star to delta connection

1
must be completed within a minimum
2
time.
0,5 This function is performed by a control
3 relay and a time delay auxiliary contact
block.
0
0 0,25 0,50 0,75 1
Speed

3 Resistive torque of the machine
(1) Motor manufacturers generally specify machine load torques.

Example: maximum resistive torque on completion of star-delta start (expressed as a
proportion of the rated torque).
1/44
References 1
Star-delta starters for motor control,

90 to 375 kW (1), without isolating device,
pre-assembled
Pre-assembled starters
Maximum operating rate: 12 starts/hour.
Maximum starting time:
LC3 Fppppp: 20 seconds,
1
LC3 FpppppA64: 30 seconds (3 identical contactors).
Composition of starters without mechanical interlock, see pages 1/47 and 1/49.
Star-delta starters
Standard power ratings Auxiliary contacts available Star delta Basic reference, Weight
of squirrel cage motors on each contactor mechanical to be completed by
220/ 380/ KM2 KM3 KM1
230 V 400 V 415 V 440 V
(3)
kW kW kW kW kg
90 160 160 185 1 2 2 1 1 1 Without LC3 F185pp 16.500
813202
With LC3 F185ppA64 16.625
100 200 200 220 1 2 2 1 1 1 Without LC3 F225pp 16.500
110 220 220 250 1 2 2 1 1 1 Without LC3 F265pp 27.300
LC3 FpppppA64 160 280 280 315 1 2 2 1 1 1 Without LC3 F330pp 37.000
185 315 355 375 1 2 2 1 1 1 Without LC3 F400pp 37.000
relay for setting at 0.58 of the full load rated motor current, see pages 6/28 and 6/29.
Volts a 50/60 Hz 48 110 115 220/230 230 240 380/400 400 415
Code E7 F7 FE7 M7 P7 U7 Q7 V7 N7
(3) One auxiliary contact block type LAD N can be fitted.
Presentation : Dimensions : Schemes :

page 1/44 page 1/50 page 1/51
1/45
1
1
* * * * 6 5 2
*
1
KM1
KM3
KM2 1
1 3 4
* *
*
*
∗ See page 1/48
1/46
References 1

90 to 375 kW, (1), for customer assembly
(on chassis)
Contactors
Maximum operating rate: 12 starts/hour. Maximum starting time: 20 seconds (3)
Contactors (2) Separate
components
1
220/ 380/ line delta star (see below)
230 V 400 V 415 V 440 V
kW kW kW kW KM2 KM3 KM1 Component types
90 160 160 185 LC1 F185pp LC1 F185pp LC1 D150pp F185
100 200 200 220 LC1 F225pp LC1 F225pp LC1 F185pp F225
Separate components (4)

Description Illustration For No. Sold in Unit Weight
item no. use on lots of reference kg
Instantaneous auxiliary 1 F185 to F400 3 1 LAD N22 0.050
contact blocks
2 N/O + 2 N/C
Control relay 2 F185 to F400 1 1 CAD 32 0.580
Time delay auxiliary 3 F185 to F400 1 1 LAD T2 0.060

contact blocks
Sealing cover 4 F185 to F400 1 1 LA9 D901 0.005
Thermal magnetic circuit- 5 F185 to F400 2 6 GB2 CB10 0.050

breaker for 5 A control circuit
Sets of 3 connectors 6 F185 1 1 LA9 FG980 0.200
for wider terminations
(optional) F225 to F400 1 1 LA9 FJ980 0.490
Sets of power connections 7 F185 1 1 LA9 F18517 0.800
F225 1 1 LA9 F22510 1.400
F265 1 1 LA9 FH610 1.400
F330 and F400 1 1 LA9 FJ610 1.500
Set of 3 busbars for 8 F185 to F400 1 1 LA7 Fppp (Selected according to size
thermal overload of thermal overload relay) see pages 6/28
connections and 6/29.
(2) Contactors supplied with coil. Complete the reference by adding the control circuit voltage code.
Standard control circuit voltages (for other voltages, please consult your Regional Sales Office):
LC1 D150
Volts 48 110 115 120 220 230 240 380 400 415
50/60 Hz E7 F7 FE7 G7 M7 P7 U7 Q7 V7 N7
LC1 F185 and F225

Volts 48 110 115 120 220 230 240 380 400 415
50 Hz (coil LX1) E5 F5 FE5 – M5 P5 U5 Q5 V5 N5
60 Hz (coil LX1) E6 F6 – G6 M6 – U6 Q6 – –
LC1 F185 to F400

Volts 48 110 115 120 220 230 240 380 400 415
40… 400 Hz (5) E7 (6) F7 FE7 G7 M7 P7 U7 Q7 V7 N7
Standard voltages, see page 5/102.
For other voltages between 24 and 660 V, see pages 5/118 to 5/125.
(3) For longer starting times, please consult your Regional Sales Office.
(4) Other separate components, see page 1/49.
(5) Coil LX1: LC1 F265, F330 and F400. Coil LX9: LC1F185 and F225.
(6) Except for LC1 F400.
Presentation : Illustrations : Dimensions : Schemes :

page 1/44 page 1/46 page 1/50 page 1/51
1/47
1
1
14 12 10 17 * * *
1
15
*
9
*
*
KM1
KM3
KM2 *
*
*
16 13
* * *
17
11
∗ See page 1/46
1/48

90 to 375 kW, (1), for customer assembly
(on chassis)
Separate components (continued from page 1/47)

Description Illustration For No. Sold in Unit Weight
Spare volt free terminals

item no.
9
use on
F185 3
lots of
10
reference
DZ3 GA3
kg
0.006
1
F225…F400 3 10 DZ3 HA3 0.007
Neutral terminals 10 F185 1 10 AB1 BC9535 0.236

with stop and spare
volt free terminal 2 100 AB1 AB8P35 0.006
(for control circuit)
1 10 DZ3 HA3 0.007
F225 and F265 1 10 AB1 BC15035 0.277
2 100 AB1 AB8M35 0.007
1 10 DZ3 JA3 0.010
F330 and F400 1 10 AB1 BC24035 0.287
2 100 AB1 AB8M35 0.007
1 10 DZ3 JA3 0.010
Reducer bracket 11 F400 2 1 LA9 F100 0.100
Mounting rails (2) 12 F185…F400 1 10 AM1 DE200 0.900
13 F185…F400 1 4 AM1 EC200 2.980
Uprights (2) 14 F115…F400 2 4 AM1 EC200 2.980
1/4 turn sliding clip nuts 15 F185…F400 2 10 AF1 CD061 0.020

and corresponding bolts
for rails AM1 DE 100 AF1 VA618 0.006

for rails AM1 DE 10 AF1 VC820 0.024

for equipment fixing 100 AF1 VA618 0.006
F400 8 10 AF1 CD061 0.020
10 AF1 CD081 0.020
100 AF1 VA618 0.006
10 AF1 VC820 0.024
4 – 25 x H6 screws with washers
Enclosures: – F185…F225 1 1 ACM GV763 19.090

metal, grey RAL 7032
F265 1 1 ACM GV973 33.310
F330 and F400 1 1 ACM GV1084 54.000
Fixing lugs – – 4 4 AE3 FX122 0.080

adjustable for enclosure ACM
(2) Supplied in 2 m lengths. See page 1/50 for cutting to length.
Presentation : Illustrations : Dimensions : Schemes :

1/49
Dimensions 1
Star-delta starters
Dimensions
Chassis mounted starters
1 Pre-assembled: LC3 F185 to LC3 F400
For customer assembly: 2 x LC1 Fppp and 1 x LC1 D150 or 3 x LC1 Fppp
F1 F2
K4
K3
KM2 KM3 KM1
H
b
K2
K1
K
c a
a b c G H K K1 K2 K3 K4
LC3 F185 or 2 x LC1 Fppp + 1 x LC1 D 565 675 235 525 625 160 110 80 110 80
with components F185
LC3 F225 or 3 x LC1 Fppp with components F225 565 675 235 525 625 160 110 80 110 80
Presentation : References :
page 1/44 pages 1/45, 1/47 and 1/49
1/50
Schemes 1
Star-delta starters
Schemes
Star-delta starters
LC3 F185 to F400 1
L1
L2
L3
Recommended cabling for reversal of motor rotation
6
2
4
(standard motor, viewed from shaft end).
W1
U1
V1
3
3
5
5
1
– KM2 – KM3 – KM1
W2
U2
V2
6
6
2
4
W1
U1
V1
5
2
6
W2
U2
V2
– F1
95
– F1
96
21
O
Remote
13 22
control
153
67
l
– KM1 – KM2
14
184 154
68
172
– KM1 – KM1
183
171
55
– KM2
13
53
56
– KM2 – KA1
61
14
54
– KM3
62
A1
A1
A1
A1
– KM1 – KM2 – KA1 – KM3

– F2
A2
A2
A2
A2
Presentation : References :
page 1/44 pages 1/45, 1/47 and 1/49
1/51
Selection guide 1
Function performed Function not performed

Selectable overload class
1 Detection of overtorque, no-load running, long starting times

Earth fault protection (equipment protection only)
Protection against phase imbalance

Protection against phase loss
Fault differentiation With contact block
Reset on thermal overload Manual or Manual Manual or automatic Manual

automatic
Alarms (thermal overload, overcurrent, ...)
Indication of motor load
Protection function parameter entry

"Log" function, monitoring
Remote motor starter status and commands via serial or

parallel link
Motor starter management via serial link (status, Modbus port

commands, selection and parameter entry for alarms, built-in
log, monitoring)
Isolation function
Protection against overloads and short-circuits
Power at 400 V With circuit-breaker 0.06…75 kW 30…450 kW 0.06…450 kW 0.06…110 kW

With fuses 0.06…75 kW 30…450 kW 0.06…450 kW
Magnetic Magnetic Magnetic Thermal magnetic

circuit-breaker circuit-breaker circuit-breaker circuit-breaker
or fuses or fuses or fuses
Contactor Contactor Contactor Contactor
Thermal Electronic thermal Multifunction

overload relay overload relay protection relay
1/52
1
1
With function module Indication on front panel,

processing by communication
Manual Remote or automatic with function module Reset parameters can be set to manual or
automatic

Indication on front panel, processing by

communication
With communication With AS-Interface or With AS-Interface or Modbus communication module

module or control Modbus communication (indication of motor load and thermal overload alarm only with Modbus communication module)
splitter box module
(1) (1) (1)
With Modbus communication module
0.06…11 kW 0.06…15 kW 0.06…15 kW 16.5…450 kW 0.06…15 kW 16.5…450 kW

0.06…450 kW 0.06…450 kW
Quickfit solution Starter-controller with Starter-controller with Magnetic Starter-controller with Magnetic
standard control unit advanced control unit circuit-breaker or fuses multifunction control unit circuit-breaker or fuses
Contactor Contactor
Controller with Controller with

advanced control unit multifunction control unit
(1) Parallel wiring module
1/53
Presentation 1
Presentation
521288
The TeSys U starter controller is a D.O.L. starter (1) which performs the following functions:
1 b protection and control of single-phase or 3-phase motors:

v breaking function,
v overload and short-circuit protection,
v thermal overload protection and power switching,
b control of the application:
v protection function alarms,
6
v application monitoring (running time, number of faults, motor current values, ...),
v logs (last 5 faults saved, together with motor parameter values).
These functions can be added by selecting control units and function modules which simply clip
into the power base. The product can therefore be customised at the last moment. Setting-up
accessories simplify or completely eliminate wiring between components.
2 Basic starter-controller
Consists of a power base and a control unit.
Power base 1
Is independent of the control voltage and of the motor power.
It incorporates the breaking function with a breaking capacity of 50 kA at 400 V, total coordination
(continuity of service) and the switching function.
b 2 ratings are available: 0…12 A and 0…32 A.
b Non-reversing (LUB) and reversing (LU2B).
1 Control units 2
These must be selected according to the control voltage, the power of the motor to be protected
3 and the type of protection required.
b Standard control unit (LUCA): satisfies the basic protection requirements for motor starters:
thermal overload and short-circuit (for details see page 1/55).
b Advanced control unit (LUCB, LUCC or LUCD): allows additional advanced functions such
as alarm, fault differentiation, … (for details see page 1/56).
b Multifunction control unit (LUCM): suitable for the most sophisticated control and protection
4 requirements (for details see page 1/57).
The control units are interchangeable without rewiring and without using tools. They have a wide
range of adjustment (range of 4) and low heat dissipation.
Control options
5 Function modules can be used to increase the functions of the starter-controller.
8
Function modules 3
Must be used with advanced control units.
4 types are available:
7 b thermal overload alarm (LUF W10),
b thermal fault and manual reset (LUF DH11),
b thermal fault and automatic or remote reset (LUF DA01 and LUF DA10),
b indication of motor load (LUF V), which can also be used with the multifunction control unit.
All alarm and fault information processed by these modules is available on digital contacts.
Communication modules 3
The information processed is exchanged:
b via a parallel bus:
v parallel wiring module (LUF C00),
b via a serial bus:
v AS-Interface modules (ASILUF C5 and ASILUF C51),
v Modbus modules (LUL C031, LUL C032 and LUL C033).
They must be used in conjunction with a c 24 V control unit and require a c 24 V control
voltage. Connection to other protocols such as FIPIO, Profibus-DP and DeviceNet is possible
via gateway modules (LUFP).
Auxiliary contact modules (LUFN) 3
3 possible configurations 2 N/O, 1 N/O + 1 N/C or 2 N/C.
Add-on contact blocks 4
Indicate the following status of power base: ready, fault and pole status.
Power options
Reverser block 5
Allows a non-reversing power base to be converted to reversing operation.
The reverser block (LU2M) is mounted directly beneath the power base without modifying the
width of the product (45 mm). The reverser block LU6M is mounted separately from the power
base when the height available is limited.
Limiter-disconnector LUA LB 6
This unit is mounted directly on the power base. It allows the breaking capacity to be increased
up to 130 kA at 400 V.
Setting-up accessories
Plug-in terminal blocks 7
The control terminal blocks are of the plug-in type, so allowing wiring to be prepared away from
the machine or the replacement of products without rewiring.
Control circuit pre wiring system 8
Numerous pre-wired accessories provide simple, clip-in connections (e.g. connection of reverser
control terminals, ...
(1) For use with resistive and inductive loads. Control of d.c. or capacitive loads is not possible.
1/54
Presentation 1
with standard control unit
b Protection against overloads and short-circuits

b Protection against phase failure and phase imbalance
b
b
Protection against insulation breaks (equipment protection only)
Manual reset 1
520726
3-phase motor
Class 10
Power base Standard control unit

LUB or LU2B LUCA
Status Status and commands transmitted by the bus
Parallel bus Serial bus
Blanking cover Auxiliary contact Parallel wiring AS-Interface Modbus

LU9C 1 module module communication modules communication
LUF N LUF C00 ASILUF C5 and ASILUF C51 modules
LUL C031,
LUL C032 and
LUL C033
Status
Add-on contact Blanking cover

blocks LUA1 LU9C 2
1/55
Presentation 1
with advanced control unit

b
1 b
Manual reset (remote or automatic with a function module)
3-phase motor 3-phase motor Single-phase motor

Class 10 Class 20 Class 10
533842
Power base Advanced Advanced Advanced control

LUB or LU2B control unit LUCB control unit LUCD unit LUCC
Status Thermal Thermal Alarm Indication of Status and commands transmitted by the bus
overload overload motor load
signalling and signalling and (analogue) Parallel bus Serial bus
manual reset automatic
reset
b Thermal overload
signalling and
manual, remote or
automatic reset
b Alarm
b Indication of motor
load
Blanking cover Auxiliary Function Function Function Function Parallel AS-Interface Modbus
LU9C 1 contact module modules module module wiring communication communication
module LUF DH11 LUF DA01 LUF W10 LUF V module modules modules
LUF N and UF DA10 LUF C00 ASILUF C5 and LUL C031,
ASILUF C51 LUL C032 and
LUL C033
Status
Add-on contact Blanking cover

blocks LUA1 LU9C 2
1/56
Presentation 1
with multifunction control unit

b
b
Reset parameters can be set to manual or automatic 1
b Protection function alarm
b Indication on front panel or on remote terminal via Modbus RS 485 port
b "Log" function
b "Monitoring" function, indication of main motor parameters on front panel of the
control unit or via a remote terminal
b Fault signalling
b Overtorque, no-load running
565397
Single-phase or 3-phase motors

Class 5, 10, 15, 20, 25, 30
Power base Multifunction control unit

LUB or LU2B LUCM
Status Indication of Status and commands transmitted by the bus

motor load
(analogue)
Parallel bus Serial bus
Remote programming
and monitoring of all
functions
Blanking Aduxiliary Function Parallel AS-Interface Modbus

cover contact module wiring communication communication
LU9C 1 module LUF V module modules modules
LUF N LUF C00 ASILUF C5 and LUL C031,
ASILUF C51 LUL C032 and
LUL C033
Status
Add-on contact blocks Blanking cover

LUA1 LU9C 2
1/57
Application examples 1
520965
Application
Starting and protection of a pump.
1
Operating conditions
b Power: 4 kW at 400 V.
b In: 9 A.
b Maximum of 10 class 10 starts per hour.
b Duty class S3.
b 3-wire control:
v Start button (S2),
v Stop button (S1),
b Control circuit voltage: a 230 V.
Products used
Products used Item Quantity Reference Page
Power base 12 A with screw clamp 1 1 LUB 12 1/64
connections
Standard control unit 2 1 LUCA 12FU 1/69
Functions performed
561680
b Short-circuit protection with level of protection of 50 kA at 400 V.

b Total coordination of protection devices conforming to EN 60947-6-2 (continuity of
service) in case of a short-circuit.
b Electronic protection against thermal overloads with an adjustment range of 4.
b Load switching (2 million operating cycles in category AC-43 at In).
b Indication of motor status by N/C or N/O contact.
b Interlock between the motor starter control and the selector knob position; not
possible to start the motor when the knob is in the OFF position.
Scheme
230 V
1/L1
3/L2
5/L3
13
C.U.
14
2/T1
4/T2
6/T3
A1
–
W1
U1
V1
A2
M
3
1/58
561681
Application
Expansion of an existing installation for improved control of its operation.
1
Monitor the status of the motor and obtain alarm signalling by a digital contact in
order to improve operation of the pump and anticipate a complete stoppage due to
thermal overload.
Additional products used

Replace the standard control unit with an advanced control unit and insert a thermal
overload alarm function module.
Advanced control unit 2 1 LUCB 12FU 1/69
Alarm function module 3 1 LUF W10 1/71
Functions performed
b Alarm information is generated by the advanced control unit and is processed by
the thermal overload alarm function module to make it usable.
b The advanced control unit includes a thermal trip Test button on its front panel.
Scheme
a 230 V
1/L1
3/L2
5/L3
LUF W10 Alarms Module

13
C.U.
14
07 08
2/T1
4/T2
6/T3
To
A1
application
–
W1
U1
V1
A2
M
3a
a
Other versions The advanced control unit can provide other functions,
depending on the type of function modules used (instead of
the LUF W module described above):
- thermal fault signalling with function modules LUF DA01,
LUF DA10 or LUF DH11,
- indication of motor load with the function module LUF V2.
This module delivers a 4-20 mA, analogue signal which is
proportional to the average 3-phase current drawn by the
motor. This allows the load current to be monitored and
provides access to other application functions using this
value, or to predictive or preventive maintenance
possibilities (replacement of the motor before it breaks
down).
1/59
520969
Application
Monitoring operation of a surface pump in a water treatment plant to avoid running
1 empty, which could lead to destruction of the pump.
b In: 28.5 A.
b Duty class S1.
b Control circuit voltage: c 24 V.
b Control-command by PLC and serial link using the Modbus protocol.
Products used
Power base 32 A without connections 1 1 LUB 320 1/64
Multifunction control unit 2 1 LUCM 32BL 1/70
Modbus communication module 3 1 LUL C032 1/85
Pre-wired coil connection 4 1 LU9B N11C 1/85
Connection of communication module
output terminals to the coil terminals
Connection cable for connecting the – 1 VW3 A8 306 Rpp 1/85
communication module to the serial bus
510301
T-junction – 1 VW3 A8 306 TF03 1/85

Functions performed
b Short-circuit protection with level of protection of 50 kA at 400V.
b Load ing (1.5 million operating cycles in category AC-43 at In).
b Measurement of load current and detection of no-load running by the multifunction
control unit.
b No-load running or operation under load. To use this function, the following
parameters must be entered:
v trip: the answer yes/no enables or disables the function,
v time before tripping: the time period during which the value of the current must be
below the tripping threshold in order to cause tripping (adjustable from 1 to 200 s).
v tripping threshold: value as a % of the load current ratio in relation to the setting
current. If the ratio remains below this threshold for the time specified in the previous
parameter, the product trips (adjustable from 30 to 100 %).
b Indication of the various motor starter status and currents.
Schemes
1/L1
3/L2
5/L3
LUCM Multifunction LUL C032 Modbus Module

Control Unit
24 V 24 V
D (B)
D (A)
D (B)
D (A)
Modbus profile IEC 64915

Gnd
Gnd
c Aux COM
LO1
24 V Aux LU9B N11C

LI1
LI2
Commands (Register 704) Status (Register 455) Pre wired coil

4 5 8 4 5 8
Forward running Bit 0 Ready (available)
Reverse running Bit 1 Poles closed
Reserved Bit 2 Fault
C.U.
Reset Bit 3 Alarms
Reserved Bit 4 Tripped
Connection test Bit 5 Reserved reset enabled
+
Reserved Bit 6 A1-A2 powered c 24 V
U1 2/T1
V1 4/T2
W1 6/T3
Reserved Bit 7 Motor running

Reserved Bit 8 Motor current % (bit 0)
Reserved Bit 9 Motor current % (bit 1) Modbus
M
Reserved Bit 10 Motor current % (bit 2) 3a
Reserved Bit 11 Motor current % (bit 3) VW3 A8 306 TF03
Reserved 3-phase control Bit 12 Motor current % (bit 4)

Reserved Bit 13 Motor current % (bit 5) Other functions
Reserved Bit 14 Reserved
The multifunction control unit incorporates other control and protection functions,
Reserved Bit 15 Motor starting
such as: monitoring and control of phase current, alarm, …
Module LUL C032 also provides a programmable output and two programmable
discrete inputs.
1/60
520967
Application
Starting and control of a packing machine conveyor belt.
1
b Power: 0.37 kW at 400 V.
b In: 0.98 A.
b Duty class S1.
b Control circuit voltage: c 24 V
b Control and command by the AS-Interface cabling system.
Products used
Power base 12 A without connections 1 1 LUB 120 1/64
Standard control unit 2 1 LUCA 1XBL 1/69
AS-Interface 3 1 ASILUF C5 1/82
Communication module
Tap-off for connecting the – 1 XZ CG0142 1/83
communication module to the serial bus
Pre-wired coil connection 4 1 LU9B N11C 1/83
Connection of communication module
output terminals to the coil terminals
Functions performed
521489
b Short-circuit protection with level of protection of 50 kA at 400 V.

b Indication of motor status by N/C or N/O contact.
b Start/Stop commands and Ready, Running and Stopped motor status are
transmitted by the bus. The AS-Interface 7.D.F.O profile of the new
AS-Interface V2 protocol, implemented in the starter-controller, ensures total
compatibility with that of the LF enclosed starter range.
b Indication of module operation and communication status by 2 LEDs on the front
panel of the communication module.
b Addressing of the module is achieved using adjustment console ASI TERV2 or
console XZ MC11. Using pre-wired coil connector LU9B N11C avoids having to wire
the control connections. However, easy access to the control connector on the front
panel of the starter allows any control schemes required by the user to be included
in the line (local controls, emergency stop, safety contact, .....)
Scheme
1/L1
3/L2
5/L3
ASILUF C5 AS-Interface Module
24 V AS-i
LU9B N11C
Pre wired coil + +
C.U.
+
2/T1
4/T2
6/T3
24 V
W1
U1
V1
AS-i
M XZ CG0142
3
1/61
520971
Application
Manual control of a 2-position turntable.
1
b Power: 2.2 kW at 400 V.
b In: 6 A.
b 30 starts per hour
b Duty class S4.
b 3-wire control:
v Pushbutton for Position 1 (S1),
v Pushbutton for Position 2 (S2),
v Stop button (S5),
b Stopping at the positions is achieved by limit switches S3 and S4.
b Control circuit voltage: a 115 V.
Products used
523761
Power base reversing, 12 A with screw 1 1 LU2B 12FU 1/65

clamp connections
Standard control unit 2 1 LUCA 12FU 1/69
1
Functions performed
2
Electrical interlocking is ensured by pre-wired connector LU9M R1C (item 3)

included on base LU2B 12. The design of the reversing power block makes
mechanical interlocking unnecessary.
Scheme (manual control)

1/L1
3/L2
5/L3
LU2B Reverser Motor Controller

A3
B3
A1
B1
A2
C.U.
2/T1
4/T2
6/T3
W1
U1
V1
M
3
115 V
1/62
TeSys U controllers
520973
Application
Detection of a rock crusher blockage by monitoring the motor current.
Operating conditions 1
b In: 185 A.
b Duty class S1.
b Control circuit voltage: a 230 V
b Control-command by PLC and serial link using the Modbus protocol.
Products used
Controller 1 1 LUT M20BL 1/77
Multifunction control unit 2 1 LUCM T1BL 1/77
Modbus communication module 3 1 LUL C032 1/85
Current transformer 4 3 LUT C4001 1/77
Contactor 5 1 LC1 F185P7 –
Circuit-breaker 6 1 NS 250HMA –
Functions performed
523762

b Detection of crusher blockage by monitoring the induced overcurrent. To use the
"overtorque or jam" function, the following parameters must be entered :
6 v trip: the answer yes/no enables or disables the function,
v time before tripping: the time period during which the value of the current must be
above the tripping threshold in order to cause tripping (adjustable from 1 to 30 s).
v tripping threshold: value as a % of the load current ratio in relation to the setting
1 4 current. If the ratio remains above this threshold for the time specified in the previous
parameter, the product trips (adjustable from 100 to 800 %).
2
It is possible to set the parameter for an alarm at a preset threshold under the same
conditions as above.
5
3
Scheme
1/L1
3/L2
5/L3
– KA1 – KA1 – KA1 230 V a

LUCM T1BL LUT M20BL Controller LUL C032 Modbus Module
Multifunction Control Unit
– Q6 S2
24 V 24 V
D (B)
D (A)
D (B)
D (A)
24 V Aux c Aux COM

Gnd
S1
Gnd
LO1
LI1
LI2
L3
L2
L1
I.6
I.7
I.3
96
4 5 8 4 5 8
6/T3
2/T1
4/T2
– KA1
– T1 From S1/T1, S1/T2, S1/

S1
T3, S2/T1, S2/T2, S2/T3
– T2 – KA1
S2
S1
13
– KM1 – Q6 – Q6
– T3 To –KA1
S2
S1
A1
– KM1
S2
A2
+
5/L3
3/L2
1/L1
c 24 V
– KM1
V1 4T2
W1 6T3
U1 2T1
– KA1
Modbus
VW3 A8 306 TF03 a

M
3a
Other functions
The multifunction control unit incorporates other control and protection functions,
such as: monitoring and control of phase currents, alarm, …
Communication module LUL C032 also provides a programmable output and two
programmable inputs.
1/63
References 1
Non-reversing power bases
Two versions of control connection are available:

b connection by screw terminals, plug-in control terminal block,
520739
561330
b without connection. This version enables wiring to be prepared in advance and

1 is recommended when a communication module is required (allowing the use of
control connection prewiring accessories) or when a reverser block is to be mounted
by the customer.
Power bases for non-reversing D.O.L. starting (1)

Connection Item Rating Reference Weight
Power Control (2) ≤ 440 V 500 V 690 V
A A A kg
These bases have 2 auxiliary contacts: 1 N/O (13-14) and 1 N/C (21-22) which
indicate the closed or open position of the power poles.
A low power internal contact allows power supply to the control unit to be switched
LUB p2 LUB p20 off when the control knob is no longer in the ON position.
The power bases must be used in conjunction with a control unit, see pages 1/68
to 1/70.
Screw clamp Screw 1 + 2 + 3 12 12 9 LUB 12 0.900

520740
terminals clamp +4
terminals 32 23 21 LUB 32 0.900
Without 1+2 12 12 9 LUB 120 0.865

1 connections
2 32 23 21 LUB 320 0.865
Terminal block for power bases without connections

Connection For base Item Reference Weight
(2) kg
Screw clamp terminals LUB 120 or 320 3+4 LU9B N11 0.045
(1) Rated breaking capacity for operation on short-circuit (Ics), see table below.
For higher values, use current limiters, see page 1/67.
Volts 230 440 500 690 (3)
4
kA 50 50 10 4
3
(2) The various sub-assemblies are supplied assembled but they are easy to separate, as shown
LUB p2 in the illustration.
(3) For 690 V, use phase barrier LU9 SP0.
Other versions Power bases without built-in short-circuit protection device
(short-circuit protection by circuit-breaker or separate
fuses).
Please consult your Regional Sales Office.
Characteristics : Dimensions : Schemes :

pages 1/88 and 1/89 pages 1/102 and 1/103 pages 1/104 to 1/107
1/64
References 1
Reversing power bases
561270
Two versions of control connection are available:

b connection by screw terminals, plug-in control terminal block,
b without connection. This version enables wiring to be prepared in advance and
is recommended when a communication module is required, allowing the use of
1
control connection pre-wiring accessories.
Power bases for reversing D.O.L. starting, pre-assembled
Connection Item Rating Reference, Weight
Power Control (1) ≤ 440 V 500 V 690 V to be completed
(2)
A A A kg
These bases have two N/O common point contacts (81-82-84) which indicate non-
reversing and reversing operating status.
Screw clamp Screw 1 + 2 + 3 12 12 9 LU2B 12pp 1.270
terminals clamp + 4 + 5 32 23 21 LU2B 32pp 1.270
terminals
Without 1 + 2 + 3 12 12 9 LU2B A0pp 1.270
connections +5 32 23 21 LU2B B0pp 1.250
Power bases for reversing D.O.L. starting, for customer assembly
A reverser block should preferably be combined with a non-reversing power base
without connections to create a reversing starter-controller.
LU2B p2 The built-in N/O (13-14) and N/C (21-22) contacts are used for electrical interlocking
between the reverser block and the base; they are therefore no longer available as
output contacts.
The reverser block has two N/O common point contacts (81-82-84) which indicate
non-reversing and reversing operating status.
32 A reverser block Connection Item (1) Reference, Weight
520741
Power Control to be completed kg

1 (2)
For mounting directly Screw clamp Without 3 LU2M B0pp 0.400
beneath the power base terminals connections
For mounting separately Screw clamp Without 6 LU6M B0pp 0.425
2 from the base terminals connections
(screw or rail fixing)
Accessories
Description Item Application Reference Weight
kg
Control 4 Reversing power base without LU9 M1 0.025
terminal connections LU2B A0pp or B0pp
block Reverser block LU2M B0pp for LU9 M1 0.025
direct mounting beneath power base
Reverser block LU6M B0pp for LU9 M1 0.025
3 mounting separately from power base
7 Reverser block LU6M B0pp for LU9M R1 0.030
5 mounting separately from power base
Control circuit pre-wiring components
Description Item Reference Weight
kg
Pre-wired connector (3) 5 LU9M R1C 0.035
4 (1) The various sub-assemblies are supplied assembled but they are easy to separate, as shown
in the illustration.
(2) Select the same control voltage as that of the control unit.
LU2B p2
Standard control circuit voltages:
Volts 24 48…72 110…240
c
520826
BL – –
a B – –
c or a – ES (4) FU (5)
6 (3) For control connection between a power base and a reverser block, for direct mounting.
(4) c : 48…72 V, a : 48 V.
(5) c : 110…220 V, a : 110...240 V.
Other versions Power bases without built-in short-circuit protection device
(short-circuit protection by circuit-breaker or separate fuses).
7
LU6M + LU9 M1 + LU9M R1

pages 1/88 and 1/89 pages 1/102 and 1/103 pages 1/104 to 1/107
1/65
Presentation, TeSys motor starters - open version 1
references 1
Add-on contact blocks and auxiliary contact modules
Contact states
Product status Position of Indication N/O pole N/C pole N/O contact N/C contact
1 control
handle
on front
panel
contact contact any fault any fault N/O contact
product
ready
References of add-on contact blocks – – – LUF N11 LUA1 C20 LUA1 C11 LUA1 C20
and auxiliary contact modules 31-32 97-98 95-96 17-18
Terminal referencing or – – – LUF N02 LUA1 C200 LUA1 C110 LUA1 C200
31-32 no terminal no terminal no terminal
41-42 block block block
or – – LUF N20 LU9B N11 – – LUA1 C11
33-34 21-22 17-18
43-44
or – – LUF N11 – – – LUA1 C110
43-44 no terminal
block
or – – LU9B N11 – – – –
13-14
Off 0
OFF
Ready to operate 0
Start 1
Tripped on short-circuit TRIP I>>
Tripped on Manual reset mode TRIP 0

thermal overload
Automatic reset on thermal 0

overload fault mode
Remote reset mode 0
N/O contact in closed position. N/O contact in open position

References
Add-on contact blocks
Signalling and composition Connection Item Reference Weight
561521
kg
1 N/C fault signalling Screw clamp 1+2 LUA1 C11 0.030
contact (95-96) and 1 N/O terminals
contact (17-18) indicating Without 1 LUA1 C110 0.012
control handle in “ready” connections
position
1 N/O fault signalling Screw clamp 1+2 LUA1 C20 0.030
3 contact (97-98) and 1 N/O terminals
contact (17-18) indicating Without 1 LUA1 C200 0.012
control handle in “ready” connections
position
Auxiliary contact modules for connection by screw clamp terminals
4
Module with 2 contacts indicating the status of the starter-controller power poles
Operation: a or c 24…250 V, I th: 5 A
Composition Item Reference Weight
1
kg
2 N/O contacts (33-34 and 43-44) 3 LUF N20 0.050
2 1 N/C contact (31-32) and 1 N/O contact (43-44) 3 LUF N11 0.050
2 N/C contacts (31-32 and 41-42) 3 LUF N02 0.050
5 Accessories
Description For use on Item Reference Weight
LUB + LUA1 + LUF N kg
Screw clamp LUA1 C110 2 LU9B C11 0.022
terminal blocks LUA1 C200 2 LU9B C20 0.022
Blanking covers Location for auxiliary contact, 4 LU9C 1 0.020

communication or function module
Location for add-on contact blocks 5 LU9C 2 0.010
Characteristics : Schemes :
page 1/90 page 1/88
1/66
References 1
Power connection pre-wired system, limiter blocks
and accessories
533843
Pre-wired system for power connections up to 63 A

Description Application Pitch Item Sold in Unit Weight
8 4 1 2
Sets of 3-pole 2 tap-offs
mm
45 2
lots of
1
reference
GV2 G245
kg
0.036
1
63 A busbars 54 – 1 GV2 G254 0.038
3 3 tap-offs 45 – 1 GV2 G345 0.058
54 – 1 GV2 G354 0.060
4 tap-offs 45 1 1 GV2 G445 0.077
54 – 1 GV2 G454 0.085
5 tap-offs 54 – 1 GV2 G554 0.100
Protective For unused – 4 5 GV1 G10 0.005
end cover busbar outlets
Terminal block for Connection – 3 1 GV1 G09 0.040
supply to one or from the top
more busbar sets
533844
5 6
Pre-wired system for power connections up to 160 A
The busbar system can be screw-mounted onto any type of support.
Set of 4-pole busbars: 3-phase + neutral or 3-phase + common
Number of Item Length For mounting in Reference Weight
tap-offs at mm enclosure width
18 mm intervals mm kg
18 5 452 800 AK5 JB144 0.900
Removable 3-phase power sockets
Number of points Thermal Item Cable Sold in Unit Weight
used on the current lengths lots of reference
busbar system kg
2 16 6 200 6 AK5 PC13 (1) 0.040
32 6 250 6 AK5 PC33 (1) 0.045
1000 6 AK5 PC33L (1) 0.060
Limiter blocks and accessories
Application Item Breaking Mounting Unit Weight
capacity Iq reference
≤ 440 V 690 V
kA kA kg
533845
Limiter- 7 + 10 130 70 Direct on LUA LB1 (2) 0.310

7 disconnector (3) power base
(6)
Current limiters 8 100 35 Separate LA9 LB920 0.320
10
(3)
Limiter cartridge 10 130 70 Limiter-disconnector LUA LF1 0.135
8
Clip-in – – – On power base, LAD 90 (4) 0.001
marker holder on reverser block,
on parallel link
splitter box
Phase barrier
Phase barrier LU9 SP0 must be used:
b To build a UL 508 type E certified starter (Self Protected Starter).
561524
9 Without the phase barrier, the starter-controller is certified UL 508.

b If the starter-controller is to be used on an operational voltage of 690 V.
Description Item Application Mounting Reference Weight
kg
Phase barrier 9 LUB or LU2B 12 or 120 Direct on LU9 SP0 0.030
LUB or LU2B 32 or 320 terminals
LUA LB1 L1, L2, L3
Door interlock mechanisms
561425

kg
11 Fixing kit (5) (7) 11 + 12 LU9 AP00 0.490
Door-mounted black handle/blue front plate, IP54 13 LU9 AP11 0.150
Door-mounted red handle/yellow front plate, IP54 13 LU9 AP12 0.150
(1) The maximum permissible peak current for power sockets AK5 PCpp is 6 kA.
When used in association with power bases LUBpp, the prospective short-circuit current must
12 not exceed 7 kA
13 (2) Supplied with limiter cartridge.
(3) These devices make it possible to increase the breaking capacity of the power base.
(4) Sold in lots of 100.
(5) The fixing kit includes a shaft extension (maximum depth 508 mm).
(6) The limiter must be mounted on an LUB or LU2B power base. The limiter can therefore not
be common to several motor starters.
(7) To use the fixing kit with a D.O.L. reversing power base, only reverser block LU6 M must be
used.
Dimensions :
pages 1/102 and 1/103
1/67
Selection 1
Control units
Operating characteristics
Control units Standard Advanced Multifunction
1 Thermal overload protection
LUCA LUCB LUCC LUCD LUCM
Overcurrent protection 14.2 x the setting current 3 to 17 x the setting current
Short-circuit protection 14.2 x the max. current

Protection against phase loss
Protection against phase imbalance

Earth fault detection
(equipment protection only)
Tripping class 10 10 20 5…30
Motor type 3-phase Single-phase 3-phase Single-phase and 3-phase
Thermal overload test function

Overtorque
No-load running
Long starting times
Reset mode Manual Parameters can be set

Automatic or remote With function module or parameters can Parameters can be set
be set via the bus with a communication
module, see chart below. Parameters can be set via the bus with
a communication module (see below).
Alarm Thermal overload alarm only with Possible for each type of fault.
function module or communication Indication on front panel of the control
module, see below. unit, via remote terminal, via PC or via
PDA (1).
With communication modules to make
use of these alarms via a bus, see
below.
"Log" function Log of the last 5 trips.
Number of starts, number of trips,
number of operating hours.
"Monitoring" function Display of main motor parameters on

front panel of the control unit via
remote terminal, via PC or via PDA (1).
With function modules (2)

Thermal overload alarm With module LUF W
Thermal overload signalling and manual reset With module LUF DH11
Thermal overload signalling and automatic With modules LUF DA01 and
or remote reset LUF DA10
Indication of motor load (analogue) With module LUF V
With communication module or via Modbus port on control unit LUCM (2)
Starter status (ready, running, fault) With any communication module
Reset mode Parameters can be set via the bus
Alarm With Modbus modules LUL C031, With Modbus modules LUL C031,
LUL C032 and LUL C033 (thermal LUL C032 and LUL C033 and Modbus
Remote reset via the bus overload alarm only). port on the control unit (alarm possible
for all types of fault).
Fault signalling and differentiation

Remote programming and monitoring of all functions With Modbus modules LUL C031,
"Log" function LUL C032 and LUL C033 and Modbus
port on the control unit.
"Monitoring" function
Built-in function Function provided with accessory
(1) PDA: Personal Digital Assistant.

(2) Mounting possibilities: 1 function module or 1 communication module.
1/68
References 1
Standard and advanced control units
530655
Description
1 Extraction and locking handle
1
2
3
Test button (on advanced control unit only)
Ir adjustment dial
1
5 4 Locking of settings by sealing the transparent cover
5 Sealing of locking handle
2
Standard control units
Maximum standard power Setting Clip-in Reference Weight
ratings of 3-phase motors range mounting on to be completed
50/60 Hz power base by adding the
400/440 V 500 V 690 V Rating voltage code (1)
kW kW kW A A kg
0.09 – – 0.15…0.6 12 and 32 LUCA X6pp 0.135
4 3 0.25 – – 0.35…1.4 12 and 32 LUCA 1Xpp 0.135
LUCA pppp
LUCB pppp 1.5 2.2 3 1.25…5 12 and 32 LUCA 05pp 0.135
5.5 5.5 9 3…12 12 and 32 LUCA 12pp 0.135
520735
7.5 9 15 4.5…18 32 LUCA 18pp 0.135

15 15 18.5 8…32 32 LUCA 32pp 0.135
Advanced control units

Pressing the Test button on the front panel simulates tripping on thermal overload.
Class 10 for 3-phase motors
0.09 – – 0.15…0.6 12 and 32 LUCB X6pp 0.140
0.25 – – 0.35…1.4 12 and 32 LUCB 1Xpp 0.140
1.5 2.2 3 1.25…5 12 and 32 LUCB 05pp 0.140
5.5 5.5 9 3…12 12 and 32 LUCB 12pp 0.140
7.5 9 15 4.5…18 32 LUCB 18pp 0.140
15 15 18.5 8…32 32 LUCB 32pp 0.140
Class 10 for single-phase motors

– – – 0.15…0.6 12 and 32 LUCC X6pp 0.140
0.09 – – 0.35…1.4 12 and 32 LUCC 1Xpp 0.140
0.55 – – 1.25…5 12 and 32 LUCC 05pp 0.140
2.2 – – 3…12 12 and 32 LUCC 12pp 0.140
LUB p2 + LUCA pppp
4 – – 4.5…18 32 LUCC 18pp 0.140
7.5 – – 8…32 32 LUCC 32pp 0.140
520736
Class 20 for 3-phase motors

0.09 – – 0.15…0.6 12 and 32 LUCD X6pp 0.140
0.25 – – 0.35…1.4 12 and 32 LUCD 1Xpp 0.140
1.5 2.2 3 1.25…5 12 and 32 LUCD 05pp 0.140
5.5 5.5 9 3…12 12 and 32 LUCD 12pp 0.140
7.5 9 15 4.5…18 32 LUCD 18pp 0.140
15 15 18.5 8…32 32 LUCD 32pp 0.140

Volts 24 48…72 110…240
c BL (2), (3) – –
a B – –
c or a – ES (4) FU (5)
(2) Voltage code to be used for a starter-controller with communication module.
(3) d.c. voltage with maximum ripple of ± 10 %.
(4) c : 48…72 V, a : 48 V.
(5) c : 110…220 V, a : 110...240 V.
LUB p2 + LUCB pppp
pages 1/88 and 1/91 pages 1/104 to 1/107
1/69
References 1
Multifunction control units
530656
Description
6 1 Extraction and locking handle
1 2 Built-in display window (2 lines, 12 characters)
3 4-button keypad
1
4 c 24 V auxiliary power supply
2 5 Modbus RS485 communication port. Connection by RJ45 connector.
6 Sealing of locking handle
3 The display window 2 and keypad 3 allow:
b in configuration mode: local configuration of protection functions and alarms,
b in run mode: display of parameter values and events.
5
The Modbus communication port 5 is used to connect:
b an operator terminal,
b a PC,
b a Personal Digital Assistant (PDA).
4
LUCM ppBL Multifunction control units
Parameter entry, monitoring of parameter values and consultation of logs are carried
out:
520737
b either on the front panel, using the built-in display window/keypad,

b or via an operator terminal,
b or via a PC or a PDA with PowerSuite software,
b or remotely, via a Modbus communication bus.
Programming of the product via the keypad requires a c 24 V auxiliary power
supply.
Maximum standard power Setting Clip-in mounting Reference Weight
ratings of 3-phase motors range on power base (1)
50/60 Hz Rating
400/415 V 500 V 690 V
kW kW kW A A kg
0.09 – – 0.15…0.6 12 and 32 LUCM X6BL 0.175
0.25 – – 0.35…1.4 12 and 32 LUCM 1XBL 0.175
1.5 2.2 3 1.25…5 12 and 32 LUCM 05BL 0.175
5.5 5.5 9 3…12 12 and 32 LUCM 12BL 0.175

7.5 9 15 4.5…18 32 LUCM 18BL 0.175
15 15 18.5 8…32 32 LUCM 32BL 0.175
LUB p2 + LUCM ppBL
TeSys U user's manual (2)
Application Language Reference Weight
kg
On CD-Rom Multi-language (3) LU9 CD1 0.022
Operator terminal
This compact Magelis terminal enables the parameters of multifunction control unit
521335
LUCM to be read and modified.

It is supplied pre-configured to provide dialogue with 8 TeSys U starter-controllers
(Modbus protocol, application pages and alarm pages loaded).
Starter-controller alarm and fault management takes priority.
Language Display window Supply voltage Reference Weight
kg
Multi-language (3) 4 lines of c 24 V XBT NU400 0.150
XBT NU400 20 characters
Connecting cable (4)
Function Length Type Reference Weight
kg
Connects terminal XBT NU400 2.5 m SUB-D 25-way XBT Z938 0.200
to a multifunction control unit. female - RJ45
(1) Input voltage c 24 V with maximum ripple of ± 10 %.
(2) The CD-Rom contains user's manuals for the AS-Interface and Modbus communication
modules, multifunction control units and gateway modules, as well as the gateway
programming software.
(3) English, French, German, Italian, Spanish
(4) If a terminal is used with several control units, this cable can be connected to a Modbus hub
or to T-junctions (see page 1/85).
1/70
References 1
Function modules
Function modules
Output Item Application Reference Weight
Thermal overload signalling and manual reset

kg
1
Module LUF DH11 makes it possible to differentiate thermal overload and short-
circuit faults. (The short-circuit fault can then be signalled via add-on contact blocks
LUA1 C). The module includes two contacts for thermal overload signalling, as well
as an LED on the front panel.
To reset the motor starter, the operator must use the rotary knob on the power base.
The module can only be used with an advanced control unit and requires an
a/c 24…240 V external powr supply.
533846
4 1 N/O + 1 N/C 3 a or c 24…250 V LUF DH11 0.060
Thermal overload signalling and automatic or remote reset

These modules make it possible to differentiate thermal overload and short-circuit
faults. (The short-circuit fault can then be signalled via add-on contact blocks
LUA1 C).
3 The modules include one contact for thermal overload signalling, as well as an LED
on the front panel. A second contact (terminals Z1-Z2) must be wired in series with
terminal A1 of the motor starter. In the event of a thermal overload fault, this wiring
allows motor control to be switched off. The rotary knob on the power base will then
stay in the "ready position" .
Resetting of the motor starter is automatic after the required motor cooling time if
2 terminals X1-X2 are linked by a strap, or remote by pulsed closing of a volt-free
contact connected to terminals X1-X2.
These modules can only be used with an advanced control unit and require an
a/c 24…240 V external powr supply.
LUB p2 + LUCB pppp 1

Note : Terminals X1-X2 are not isolated from the signalling module power supply.
+
For remote resetting, use a volt-free contact specifically for each module to be reset.
LUFW 10 or LUF Vp
1 N/C 4 a or c 24…250 V LUF DA01 0.055
1 NO 4 a or c 24…250 V LUF DA10 0.055
Thermal overload alarm

Through load shedding, this module makes it possible to avoid stoppages in
510445
%
200 operation due to overload tripping.
Imminent thermal overload tripping is displayed as soon as the thermal state
exceeds the threshold of 105 % (hysteresis = 5 %).
Signalling is possible via an LED on the front panel of the module and externally by
an N/O relay output.
100
It can only be used with an advanced control unit, from which it takes its power.
1
2 1 N/O 1 a or c 24…250 V LUF W10 0.055
3 1 2.2 kW
2 4 kW
3 7.5 kW This module provides a signal which is representative of the motor load status
4 12 mA 20 mA (I average/Ir).
b I average = average value of the rms currents in the 3 phases,
b Ir = value of the setting current.
The value of the signal (4-20 mA) corresponds to a load status of 0 to 200 %
(0 to 300 % for a single-phase load).
It can be used with an advanced or multifunction control unit.
Module LUF V2 requires a c 24 V external power supply.
4 - 20 mA 2 – LUF V2 0.050
1/71
Presentation, PowerSuite software workshop 1
functions 1
534513
Presentation
1 The PowerSuite software workshop for PC is a user-friendly tool designed for setting
up control devices for the following Telemecanique brand motors:
b TeSys U controller-starters
b Altistart soft start/soft stop units
b Altivar variable speed drives.
It includes various functions designed for setup phases such as:
b Preparing configurations
b Start-up
b Maintenance.
In order to simplify the start-up and maintenance phases, the PowerSuite software
workshop can use the Bluetooth ® wireless link.
Functions (1)
PowerSuite screen on PC Preparing configurations
Installed base management
The PowerSuite software workshop can be used on its own to generate the device
configuration. It can be saved, printed and exported to office automation software.
The PowerSuite software workshop can also be used to convert:

b An Altivar 28 drive configuration to an Altivar 31 drive configuration
b An Altivar 38 drive configuration to an Altivar 61 drive configuration
b An Altivar 58 or Altivar 58F drive configuration to an Altivar 71 drive configuration.
Start-up
When the PC is connected to the device, the PowerSuite software workshop can be
533181
used to:
b Transfer the generated configuration
b Adjust
b Monitor. This option has been enhanced with new functions such as:
v The oscilloscope
v The high speed oscilloscope (minimum time base: 2 ms)
v Displaying communication parameters
b Control
b Save the final configuration.
PowerSuite screen on PC
Maintenance
View of PI regulator function parameters
In order to simplify maintenance operations, the PowerSuite software workshop can

be used to:
b Compare the configuration of a device currently being used with a saved
configuration
b Manage the user’s installed base of equipment, in particular:
v Organize the installed base into folders (electrical equipment, machinery,
workshops, etc.)
v Store maintenance messages
v Simplify Ethernet connection by storing the IP address.
533182
User interface
The PowerSuite software workshop can be used to:

b Present the device parameters arranged by function in the form of illustrated views
of diagrams or simple tables
b Customize the parameter names
b Create:
v A user menu (choice of particular parameters)
v Monitoring control panels with graphic elements (cursors, gauges)
b Perform sort operations on the parameters
b Display text in five languages (English, French, German, Italian and Spanish).
The language changes immediately and there is no need to restart the program.
PowerSuite screen on PC
Monitoring control panel (cursor, gauge)
It also has online contextual help:
b On the PowerSuite tool
b On the device functions by direct access to the user manuals.
(1) Some functions are not available for all devices. See the table of function availability,
page 1/73.
References:
page 1/74
1/72
Functions (continued) 1
PowerSuite software workshop 1
Function availability for the PowerSuite software workshop

Functions not listed in the table are available for all devices.
Function available with devices Controller-
starter
Soft start/soft Drives
stop unit
1
TeSys U ATS 48 ATV 11 ATV 31 ATV 61 ATV 71
Monitoring
Oscilloscope
High speed oscilloscope
Display of communication parameters
Control
Customization of parameter names
Creation of a user menu
Creation of monitoring control panels
Sort operation on parameters
Functions available
Functions not available
Connections (1)
Modbus communication bus
The PowerSuite software workshop can be connected directly to the device terminal
522793
PowerSuite
port or Modbus network port via the serial port on the PC.
Two types of connection are possible:

b With a single device (point-to-point connection), using a VW3 A8 106 PC serial
RS 232
XGS Z24 port connection kit
RS 485
Modbus bus b With a number of devices (multidrop connection), using the XGS Z24 interface.
Ethernet TCP/IP communication network

The PowerSuite software workshop can be connected to an Ethernet TCP/IP
network. In this case, the devices can be accessed:
b Using a VW3 A58 310 communication card for the Altivar 61 and 71 drives
ATV 31 ATV 61 ATV 71 TeSys U ATS 48 b Using a 174 CEV 300 20 Ethernet-Modbus bridge.
Modbus multidrop connection Bluetooth® wireless link

The PowerSuite software workshop can communicate via a Bluetooth ® radio link
PLC (2) with a device equipped with a Bluetooth ® - Modbus VW3 A8 114 adapter. The
522794
adapter plugs into the device terminal port or Modbus network port and has a range
PowerSuite of 10 m (class 2).
If the PC does not have Bluetooth ® technology, use the

VW3 A8 115 USB-Bluetooth® adapter.
Ethernet TCP/IP network
Remote maintenance
Bridge Using a simple Ethernet connection, the PowerSuite software workshop can be used
for remote monitoring and diagnostics.
When devices are not connected to the Ethernet network, or it is not directly accessible,
Modbus bus various remote transmission solutions may be possible (modem, teleprocessing
gateway, etc.). Please consult your Regional Sales Office.
(1) Please refer to the compatibility table on page 1/75.

(2) Please refer to our specialist “Automation platform Modicon Premium and Unity - PL7
software” and “Automation platform Modicon TSX Micro - PL7 software” catalogues.
ATV 31 ATS 48 ATV 61 ATV 71
Ethernet connection
Presentation: References:
page 1/72 page 1/74
1/73
References 1
PowerSuite software workshop

Description Composition Reference Weight
1 b 1 program for PC in English, French, German, Italian
kg
522838
PowerSuite CD-ROM VW3 A8 104 0.100

and Spanish
b Variable speed drive and starter technical manuals.
PowerSuite update b 1 program for PC in English, French, German, Italian VW3 A8 105 0.100
CD-ROM (1) and Spanish
b Variable speed drive and starter technical manuals.
Connection kit for PC serial b 1 x 3 m cable with 2 RJ45 connectors VW3 A8 106 0.350
port b 1 RS 232/RS 485 converter with one 9-way female SUB-D
for point-to-point Modbus connector and 1 RJ45 connector
connection b 1 converter for the ATV 11 drive, with one 4-way male
VW3 A8 104
connector and one RJ45 connector
b 1 RJ45/9-way male SUB-D adapter for connecting
ATV 38/58/58F drives
b 1 RJ45/9-way female SUB-D adapter for connecting
ATV 68 drives.
RS 232-RS 485 interface 1 multidrop Modbus converter for connection XGS Z24 0.105
for multidrop Modbus connection to screw terminals. Requires a 24 V
c (20...30 V), 20 mA power supply (3).
Modbus-Bluetooth® b 1 Bluetooth® adapter (10 m range, class 2) VW3 A8 114 0.155
533188
adapter (2) with 1 RJ45 connector

b 1 x 0.1 m cable with 2 RJ45 connectors
for PowerSuite
b 1 x 0.1 m cable with 1 RJ45 connector and 1 mini DIN
connector for TwidoSoft
b 1 RJ45/9-way male SUB-D adapter for connecting
VW3 A8 114 ATV 38/58/58F drives.
USB-Bluetooth® adapter This adapter is required for a PC which is not equipped VW3 A8 115 0.290
for PC with Bluetooth® technology. It is connected to a USB port on the PC.
Range of 10 m (class 2).
(1) Updates a version u V1.50 with the latest available version. For versions < V1.50, you should order the PowerSuite CD-ROM,
VW3 A8 104.
(2) Can also be used to communicate between a Twido PLC and the TwidoSoft software workshop.
(3) Please consult our “Interfaces, I/O splitter boxes and power supplies” catalogue.
Presentation: Functions:
page 1/72 pages 1/72 and 1/73
1/74
Compatibility 1
Compatibility of PowerSuite software workshop with the following devices (1)

Connection Controller- Soft start/ Drives
starter
TeSys U
soft stop unit
ATS 48 ATV 11 ATV 31 ATV 61 ATV 71
1
Modbus V1.40 V1.30 V1.40 V2.0 V2.30 V2.2
Ethernet (device equipped with an Ethernet TCP/IP card) V2.30 V2.2
Ethernet via Modbus Ethernet bridge V1.50 V2.0 V2.30 V2.2
Bluetooth ® V2.2 V2.2 V2.30 V2.2
Compatible software versions
Incompatible software versions
Hardware and software environments

The PowerSuite software workshop can operate in the following PC environments and configurations:
b Microsoft Windows® 98 SE, Microsoft Windows® 2000, Microsoft Windows® XP
b Pentium III, 800 MHz, hard disk with 300 MB available, 128 MB RAM
b SVGA or higher definition monitor
(1) Software version supplied for the latest version of drive available.
Presentation: Functions: References:

1/75
Presentation, TeSys control components 1
combinations 1
TeSys U controllers
Presentation
Above 32 A, the TeSys U controller provides a motor starter management solution
1 identical to that provided by TeSys U starter-controllers.
Used in conjunction with a short-circuit protection device and a contactor, it provides

a motor starter whose functions are the same as those of a TeSys U starter-controller
and, in particular, provides the following functions: overload protection, motor starter
control and application monitoring.
Composition
It consists of a control unit whose adjustment range is compatible with the secondary
of current transformers, plus a control base which also allows fitment of a function
module or a communication module.
It requires a c 24 V external power supply.
The secondaries of current transformers, the c 24 V power supply, the 10 inputs and
the 5 outputs are connected by screw terminal block.
Combinations providing type 2 coordination

With circuit-breaker
Standard power ratings Circuit-breaker (1) Contactor TeSys U controller Current transformers
of 3-phase motors 50-60 Hz
in category AC-3 400/415 V
P Ie Reference Rating Irm (2) Reference (3) Reference Reference
kW A A A
18,5 35 NS80HMA 50 500 LC1 D40 LUTM + LUCp 3x LUT C0501
22 42 NS80HMA 50 650 LC1 D50 LUTM + LUCp 3x LUT C1001
90 165 NS250HMA 220 2200 LC1 F185 LUTM + LUCp 3x LUT C2001
With fuses
Standard power ratings Switch aM fuses Contactor TeSys U controller Current transformers
of 3-phase motors 50-60 Hz disconnector-fuse
in category AC-3 400/415 V
P Ie Reference Size Rating Reference (3) Reference Reference
kW A A
18,5 35 GS1 F 14 x 51 40 LC1 D40 LUTM + LUCp 3x LUT C0501
22 42 GS1 J 22 x 58 50 LC1 D50 LUTM + LUCp 3x LUT C1001
55 100 GS1 L T0 125 LC1 D115 LUTM + LUCp 3x LUT C2001
75 135 GS1 L T0 160 LC1 D150 LUTM + LUCp 3x LUT C2001
90 165 GS1 N T1 200 LC1 F185 LUTM + LUCp 3x LUT C2001
110 200 GS1 N T1 250 LC1 F225 LUTM + LUCp 3x LUT C4001
132 240 GS1 QQ T2 315 LC1 F265 LUTM + LUCp 3x LUT C4001
160 285 GS1 QQ T2 400 LC1 F330 LUTM + LUCp 3x LUT C4001
200 352 GS1 S T3 500 LC1 F400 LUTM + LUCp 3x LUT C4001
(1) Product marketed under the Merlin Gerin brand.
(2) Irm: setting current of the magnetic trip
References : Characteristics : Dimensions, mounting : Schemes :

page 1/77 pages 1/94 and 1/95 page 1/78 page 1/79
1/76
References 1
TeSys control components 1
TeSys U controllers
References
Control bases (control circuit voltage c 24 V)
532083
Connection
Current transformers Control
For use
with contactor
Reference Weight 1
kg
Screw Screw LC1 Dpp LUT M10BL 0.800
LC1 Fppp LUT M20BL 0.800
Control units
Description Class For motor Setting range Reference Weight
type kg
Advanced 10 3-phase 0.35…1.05 LUCB T1BL 0.140
20 3-phase 0.35…1.05 LUCD T1BL 0.140
Multifunction 5 to 30 3-phase 0.35…1.05 LUCM T1BL 0.175
Current transformers
Operating current Reference Weight
LUT M + LUCM T1BL + LUTC pp Primary Secondary kg
30 1 LUT C0301 0.200
50 1 LUT C0501 0.200
100 1 LUT C1001 0.200
200 1 LUT C2001 0.200
400 1 LUT C4001 0.430
800 1 LUT C8001 0.600
Function modules and communication modules

The TeSys U controller is compatible with the modules listed below.
b Thermal overload alarm module LUF W10 (1), see page 1/71.
b Motor load indication module LUF V2, see page 1/71.
b Modbus communication modules LUL C032 and LUL C033, see page 1/84.
(1) Module LUF W10 is only compatible with control units LUCB T1BL and LUCD T1BL.
Presentation : Characteristics : Dimensions, mounting : Schemes :

1/77
Dimensions, TeSys control components 1
mounting 1
TeSys U controllers
Dimensions
1
163
173
114 45
Mounting
73
171
114 Ø4 30
Presentation : Characteristics : References : Schemes :

1/78
Schemes 1
TeSys U controllers
Schemes
Reversing controller LUT M
LUTM LUTM LUTM

1
S2 24 V Aux.
S1 +
I.10
L1
L2
L3
I.1
I.2
I.3
I.4
I.5
I.6
I.7
I.8
I.9
LUTM
13/NO
23/NO
96/NO
97/NC
06/NC
(1) (1)
95
98
05
3-wire control, pulsed start with maintaining contact
24 V c
24…250 V a
Any fault
– KM1 – KM2
95
96
97
98
05
06
13
23
Channel 1 Channel 2 Control unit fault

24 V c
I.5 RST
I.7 SR
I.6 SF
I.10
I.1
I.2
I.3
I.4
I.8
I.9
+
+
Reset
– Q1
AV – KM1 AR – KM2
Trip 24 V c
External fault
Stop
Control for Modbus communication modules LUL C032 and LUL C033
– KM1 – KM2
24 V c
24…250 V a Any fault
“Local”/“remote”
Man 1 Man 2
– KM1 – KM2 AU
Modbus
Stop network port
Communication
95
96
97
98
05
06
13
23
module
Any
COM
OA1
OA3
LO1
fault
LI1
LI2
Channel 1 Channel 2 Control unit fault

24 V c
I.5 RST
I.7 SR
I.6 SF
I.10
I.1
I.2
I.3
I.4
I.8
I.9
+
+
Reset – Q1
Trip – Q1 AU 24 V c
Free Free – KM1 – KM2 On “Local”/
“remote”
(1) The contacts are represented with controller powered up and not in a fault condition.
Présentation : Characteristics : References : Dimensions, mounting :

1/79
References 1
Parallel wiring module and pre-wired coil connection
components
Parallel type connection

Architecture
1
1 Parallel wiring module
LUF C00
4 2 Pre-wired coil connection
LU9B N11C
3 Connection cable LU9 Rp with
one RJ45 connector at each
end
2 2 4 Splitter box LU9 G02 for
8 motor starters with channel
1 1 connections on the PLC side
by 2 HE 10 connectors and on
To the starter-controller side by
PLC 5 3 8 RJ45 connectors.
5 Connection cable
TSX CDPppp with one HE 10
connector at each end.
Parallel wiring module
520836
The parallel wiring system makes it possible to connect starter-controllers to the PLC
I/O modules quickly and without any need for tools. It replaces traditional screw
terminal and single wire connections. It is used with the Telefast pre-wired
system (1).
The parallel wiring module provides the status and command information for each
starter-controller. It must be used with an LUB 12 or LU2B 12BL power base and a
c 24 V control unit LUCp ppBL.
6 7 Splitter box LU9 G02 distributes information from the PLC I/O modules to each of the
starter-controllers connected to it.
6 Outputs for starter commands This splitter box is optimised for use with card TSX DMZ28DTK.
7 RJ45 connector for connecting to splitter box
When used in conjunction with the Advantys STB distributed I/O solution, the
TeSys U starter-controller is ideal in decentralised automation architectures (2).
The use of dedicated parallel interface module STB EPI 2145 allows remote
connection of 4 starter-controllers.
531810
8
Each of the module’s 4 channels has:
b 2 outputs: control of starter forward and reverse running,
b 3 inputs: position of the rotary knob, fault indication and position of the poles.
Connection to the dedicated module is by means of the following cables:

b RJ45 LU9Rpp, for lengths less than 3 metres,
10 b 490 NTW 000pp, for lengths greater than 3 metres.
9
kg
Parallel wiring module 1 LUF C00 0.045
11
12 (1) Please consult our "Power Control and connection components catalogue”.
(2) Please consult our "Distributed I/O Advantys STB, the open device integration I/O system"
catalogue.
12
8 Dedicated parallel interface module

(STB EPI 2145)
9 Power base
10 c 24 V control unit (LUC B/D/C/M pp BL)
11 Parallel wiring module (LUF C00),
12 Options: add-on contact blocks, reverser blocks
1/80
References 1
Parallel wiring module and pre-wired coil connection
components
Pre-wired components simplify wiring and reduce wiring errors.

520813
Connection of communication module output terminals to the

coil terminals
1
By pre-wired connector or wire link.
b Pre-wired connector: pre-wired coil connection

The use of a power base without pre-wired connections is recommended.
Description For use with Item Reference Weight

power base kg
Pre-wired coil LUB pp 2 LU9B N11C 0.045
connection
LU2B pp 8 LU9M RC 0.030
1
b Wire link:
Allows insertion, for example, of an emergency stop control or a voltage interface.
This type of connection must be used for a reversing starter-controller assembled
2
using an LU6M reverser block for separate mounting. When reverser block LU6M
LUB + LUF C00 + LU9B and the power base are mounted side-by-side, a pre-wired connector LU9M RC may
be used.
Connection of parallel wiring module to the PLC

No tools are required to connect the parallel wiring module to the PLC. Connection
561420
is via a splitter box which allows up to 8 starter-controllers to be connected; a

maximum of 4 reversing starters per splitter box is allowed.
The splitter box requires a c 24 V power supply.
Splitter block
Connectors Item Reference Weight
PLC side Starter-controller
(16I/12O) side kg
2 x HE 10 8 x RJ45 4 LU9 G02 (1) 0.260
20-way
Connection cables to the splitter box
Connectors Item Length Reference Weight
m kg
2 x RJ45 connectors 3 0.3 LU9 R03 0.045
1 1 LU9 R10 0.065
3 LU9 R30 0.125
8
Connection cables from splitter box to PLC
Type of connection Gauge C.s.a. Length Reference Weight
PLC side Splitter
box side
AWG mm 2 m kg
HE 10 20-way HE 10 22 0.324 0.5 TSX CDP 053 0.085
20-way 1 TSX CDP 103 0.150
2 TSX CDP 203 0.280
LU2B + LUF C00 + LU9M 3 TSX CDP 303 0.410
5 TSX CDP 503 0.670
28 0.080 1 ABF H20 H100 0.080

2 ABF H20 H200 0.140
3 ABF H20 H300 0.210
Bare wires HE 10 22 0.324 3 TSX CDP 301 0.400

20-way 5 TSX CDP 501 0.660
(1) Allows "run" and "fault" status of each starter-controller to be fed back to the PLC and
transmits commands.
1/81
References 1
As-Interface communication modules
Series type connection

Architecture
1
1 Communication modules ASI LUF C5 or
ASI LUF C51
2 Tap-off XZ CG0142
3 Pre-wired coil connection LU9B N11C
3 1
c 24 V
AS-Interface
Information transmitted by the AS-Interface system

AS-Interface profiles 7.D.F.0 profile and 7.A.7.E profile
Data bits (command) Bit value =0 =1
Command D0 (O) Stop forward Forward running
4 5 Command D1 (O) Stop reverse Reverse running
Command D2 (O) Not used Not used
Command D3 (O) Not used Not used
531118
Data bits Bit value =0 =1

(status) Status D0 (I) Not ready or fault Ready
Status D1 (I) Stopped Running
Status D2 (I) Not used Not used
Status D3 (I) Not used Not used
AS-Interface communication modules

The AS-Interface communication modules make it easy to connect starter-controllers
to the AS-Interface cabling system, and therefore allow remote control and command
of these starter-controllers.
6 7 8
Module ASILUF C51 incorporates wide mounting rail.
4 Green LED: AS-Interface voltage present The various operating states of the modules (AS-Interface voltage present,
5 Red LED: AS-Interface or module fault communication fault, addressing fault,…) are indicated on the front panel by 2 LEDs
6 Outputs for starter commands (green 4 and red 5).
7 Yellow connector for connection to the AS-Interface
system Operation of the modules is continuously monitored by auto-testing, in a way that is
8 Black connector for connection to c 24 V auxiliary
totally transparent to the user.
power supply
The incorporation of AS-Interface V.2.1 functions allows diagnostics to be performed
on the modules, either remotely via the line or locally via the ASI TERV2 addressing
terminal.
The communication modules must be connected to a c 24 V auxiliary supply and

must be used in conjunction with a c 24 V control unit, LUCp ppBL.
The product is supplied with a yellow connector 6 for connection to the AS-Interface
system, a black connector 7 for connection to the c 24 V auxiliary supply and a black
connector 8 for connection of the outputs.

kg
Communication modules 1 ASI LUF C5 0.065
1 ASI LUF C51 0.065
1/82
As-Interface communication modules

531121
Connection of communication module output terminals to the 1

coil terminals

The use of a power base without pre-wired control circuit connections is
recommended.
1 Description For use with Item Reference Weight

power base kg
Pre-wired LUB pp 3 LU9B N11C 0.045
3 coil connection
LUB + ASILUF C5 + LU9B

b Wire link
Allows insertion, for example, of an Emergency stop control or a voltage interface.
531122

and the power base are mounted side-by-side, a pre-wired coil connection
LU9M RC may be used.
Connection of the communication module (1)

Achieved by using a tap-off for connection to 2 ribbon cables:
b 1 for AS-Interface (yellow).
b 1 for separate c 24 V supply (black).
1 Description Length Reference Weight

m kg
5 Tap-off 2 XZ CG0142 0.265
Consoles and cable adapters

Description Reference Weight
kg
Addressing terminal XZ MC11 0.550
Battery operated. Battery charger supplied
LU2B + ASILUF C5 + LU9M
AS-Interface V.1 and V.2.1 compatible
520899
520898
Adjustment and diagnostics console ASI TERV2 0.500

Runs on LR6 batteries
Allows addressing of AS-Interface V.2.1 interfaces
and diagnostics
Cable adapter XZ MG12 0.070
For console XZ MC11
Software set-up
AS-Interface configuration is carried out using PL7 Micro/Junior/Pro software. From
the module declaration screen, it is possible to configure all the slave devices
XZ MC11 ASI TERV2 corresponding to all the AS-Interface I/O.
Configuration is carried out by following the instructions on the screen.
561421

kg
On CD-Rom Multi-language LU9 CD1 0.022
(3)
(1) Degree of protection IP 54. Connection by 4 x 0.34 mm2 wires.
Black wire: + 24 V.
White wire: 0 V.
Blue wire: AS-Interface (–).
Brown wire: AS-Interface (+).
programming software.
(3) English, French, German, Italian, Spanish.
Configuration example with Premium TSX SAY 1000 module
1/83
References 1
Modbus communication modules and pre-wired coil
connection components
Series type connection

Architecture
1 Star topology Bus topology
4
6
2 2 2 2
1 1 1 1
To 3 3
PLC
5 5 6
1 Communication modules LUL C031, LUL C032 or LUL C033

2 Pre-wired coil connection LU9B N11C
3 Connection cable with one RJ45 connector at each end VW3 A8 306 Rpp
4 Modbus hub LU9 GC3 with channel connections to PLC and to starter-controller
with RJ45 connectors,
5 T-junction VW3 A8 306 TFpp
6 LIne terminator VW3 A8 306 R
Information carried by the bus

Depends on the type of control unit used.
Control unit Standard Advanced Multifunction
Starter status
(ready, running, fault)
Alarms (overcurrent, ...)
Thermal overload alarm
Remote reset via the bus
Fault signalling and differentiation
Remote programming and monitoring of all
functions
"Log" function
"Monitoring" function
Start and Stop commands
Functions performed
For more detailed information, please refer to User's Manual LU9 CD1, see page
opposite.
Modbus communication modules compatibility

With starter-controllers and controllers
Starter-controllers LUL C031 LUL C032 LUL C033
Controller
LUB pp / LU2Bp2
LUT M ppBL
Association possible.
With power bases

Software versions of control units LUL C031 LUL C032 LUL C033
V2.3 (1) V1.1 (1) V2.2 (1)
LUCA ppBL – Yes No Yes
LUCB ppBL – Yes No Yes
LUCM ppBL V1.04 Yes No No
V1.05 Yes No Yes
V1.06 Yes No No
V1.10 (1) Yes No Yes
(1) And higher versions.
Association not permitted.
1/84
References 1
Modbus communication modules and pre-wired coil
connection components
Modbus communication modules compatibility (continued)

With controller bases, version 1.200 (1)
Software versions
of control units
LUL C031
V2.3 (1)
LUL C032
V1.1 V1.2 (1)
LUL C033
V2.1 (1)
1
LUL C031 LUL C032, LUL C033 LUCB TppBL – No Yes Yes Yes
LUCM TppBL V2.11 (1) No No Yes Yes
(1) And higher versions.
Association not permitted.
535175
535176
Modbus communication modules

Communication modules LUL C031, LUL C032 and LUL C033 enable the TeSys U
starter-controller to be connected to the Modbus network.
They must have a c 24 V supply and must be used in conjunction with a c 24 V
control unit, LUCp ppBL.
They incorporate a 0.5 A, c 24 V discrete output for local command requirements.
Module LUL C032 and LUL C033 also have two configurable discrete inputs.
kg
Communication modules 1 LUL C031 0.080
7 Module status signalling LED 1 LUL C032 0.080
1 LUL C033 0.080
8 24 V supply connection
9 RJ45 connector for RS485 Modbus link
10 2 discrete inputs
11 1 discrete output
Connection of communication module output terminals to the
12 Outputs for starter commands coil terminals
The use of a power base without pre-wired control circuit connections is
recommended.
520810
Description For use with Item Reference Weight

power base kg
Pre-wired coil connection LUB pp 2 LU9B N11C 0.045
b Wire link:
Allows insertion, for example, of an emergency stop control or a voltage interface.
1 and the power base are mounted side-by-side, a pre-wired connector LU9M RC may
be used.
2 Connection of communication modules on the serial bus

Achieved either by means of a Modbus hub or using T-junctions.
LUB + LUL C03p + LU9B
Description Length Item Reference Weight
m kg
Modbus hub – 4 LU9 GC3 0.260
8 slaves
520811
Cables fitted with 0.3 3 VW3 A8 306 R03 0.045

2 x RJ45 connectors 1 3 VW3 A8 306 R10 0.065
3 3 VW3 A8 306 R30 0.125
T-junctions (1) 0.3 5 VW3 A8 306 TF03 0.032
1 5 VW3 A8 306 TF10 0.032
RS 485 line terminator – 6 VW3 A8 306 R 0.012

1 kg
On CD-Rom Multi-language (3) LU9 CD1 0.022
(1) Fitted with 2 RJ45 female connectors (bus side) and a 0.3 m or 1 m length cable supplied with
an RJ45 male connector (station side).
7 programming software.
(3) English, French, German, Italian, Spanish.
LU2B + LUL C03p + LU9M
1/85
description, TeSys U starter-controllers

Communication gateways LUF P
setting-up 1
Presentation
1 Communication gateways LUF P allow connection between Modbus and field buses
such as Fipio, Profibus DP or DeviceNet.
After configuration, these gateways manage information which can be accessed by

the Modbus bus and make this information available for read/write functions
(command, monitoring, configuration and adjustment) on the field buses.
An LUF P communication gateway consists of a box which can be clipped onto a

35 mm omega rail, allowing connection of up to 8 Slaves connected on the Modbus
bus.
Example of architecture
Configuration
of gateway TeSys U starter-controllers
by PC
LUF P
Fipio
Profibus DP (1)
DeviceNet Modbus
561511
1 ATS 48 ATV 31
(1) Connection kit for PowerSuite software workshop.

Description
Front panel of the product
1 LED indicating :
- communication status of the Modbus buses,
- gateway status,
- communication status of the Fipio, Profibus DP or DeviceNet bus.
2 2 Connectors for connection to Fipio, Profibus DP or DeviceNet buses.
Underside of product
561512
3 RJ45 connector for connection on the Modbus bus

4 RJ45 connector for link to a PC
5 c 24 V power supply
3
Software set-up
4
For the Fipio bus, software set-up of the gateway is performed using either PL7
Micro/Junior/Pro software or ABC Configurator software.
For the Profibus DP and DeviceNet buses, software set-up is performed using
5
ABC Configurator.
This software is included:
b in the PowerSuite software workshop for PC (see page 1/74),
b in the TeSys U user's manual.
Characteristics, references: Dimensions:

page 1/87 page 1/87
1/86
Characteristics, TeSys motor starters - open version 1
references, TeSys U starter-controllers

Communication gateways LUF P
dimensions 1
Characteristics
Bus type Fipio Profibus DP DeviceNet
Environment
Ambient air temperature
Conforming to IEC 60664
Around the device °C
Degree of pollution: 2
+ 5…+ 50
1
Degree of protection IP 20
Electromagnetic Emission Conforming to IEC 50081-2: 1993
compatibility Immunity Conforming to IEC 61000-6-2: 1999
Number of Modbus slaves which can be connected y8
Connection Modbus By RJ45 connector conforming to Schneider Electric RS485 standard
To a PC By RJ45 connector, with PowerSuite connection kit
Field bus By SUB D9 female By SUB D9 female By 5-way removable
connector connector screw connector
Supply V External supply, c 24 ± 10 %
Consumption Max. mA 280
Typical mA 100
Indication/diagnostics By LED on front panel
Services Profile FED C32 or FED C32P – –
Command 26 configurable words (1) 122 configurable words 256 configurable words
Monitoring 26 configurable words (1) 122 configurable words 256 configurable words
Configuration and adjustment By gateway mini messaging facility (PKW)
(1) If the gateway is configured using PL7 and not ABC Configurator, the I/O capacity is limited
to a total of 26 words.
References
Description For use with With bus type Reference Weight
kg
Communication TeSys U starter-controllers, Fipio/Modbus LUF P1 0.245
gateways Altistart 48, Profibus DP/Modbus LUF P7 0.245
Altivar 31
DeviceNet/Modbus LUF P9 0.245
Connection accessories
Description For use with Length Connectors Reference Weight
822631
m kg
Connection cables Modbus 3 1 RJ45 type connector and VW3 A8 306 D30 0.150
one end with stripped wires
TSX FP ACC 12 0.3 2 RJ45 type connectors VW3 A8 306 R03 0.050
1 2 RJ45 type connectors VW3 A8 306 R10 0.050
3 2 RJ45 type connectors VW3 A8 306 R30 0.150
822713
Connectors Fipio – 1 SUB-D 9 male connector TSX FP ACC12 0.040
Profibus – 1 SUB-D 9 male connector 490 NAD 911 04 –

mid line
490 NAD 911 03 Profibus – 1 SUB-D 9 male connector 490 NAD 911 03 –
line end
Documentation
Description Medium Language Reference Weight
kg
User's manual for CD-Rom Multilingual: English, French, German, Italian, LU9 CD1 0.022
TeSys U range (2) Spanish
(2) This CD-Rom contains user's manuals for AS-Interface and Modbus communication modules,
multifunction control units and gateways, as well as for the gateway programming software,
ABC Configurator.
Dimensions
=
120
=
75 27
Presentation, description: Setting-up:

page 1/86 page 1/86
1/87
Characteristics 1
Environment
Product certifications UL, CSA
1 Pending: BV, GL, LROS, DNV, ABS, RINA
Conforming to standards IEC/EN 60947-6-2, CSA C22-2 N°14, Type E

UL 508 type E: with phase barrier LU9 SP0
Rated insulation voltage (Ui) Conforming to IEC/EN 60947-1, V 690
overvoltage category III,
degree of pollution: 3
Conforming to V 600
UL508, CSA C22-2 n°14
Rated impulse Conforming to kV 6
withstand voltage (Uimp) IEC/EN 60947-6-2
Safety separation of circuits Conforming to V Between the control or auxiliary circuit and the main circuit: 400
SELV IEC/EN 60947-1 appendix N Between the control and auxiliary circuits: 400
Degree of protection Front panel outside connection IP 40

Conforming to IEC/EN 60947-1 zone
(protection against Front panel and wired terminals IP 20
direct finger contact)
Other faces IP 20
Protective treatment Conforming to IEC/EN 60068 “TH”

Conforming to IEC/EN 60068-2-30 Cycles 12
Conforming to IEC/EN 60068-2-11 h 48
Ambient air temperature Storage °C - 40…+ 85
around the device Operation °C Power bases and standard and advanced control units: - 25… + 70.
(At temperatures above 60°C and up to 70°C, for Ie = 32 A, leave a minimum gap of
9 mm between products).
Power bases and multifunction control units: - 25…+ 60.
(At temperatures above 45 °C, leave a minimum gap of 9 mm between products.
At temperatures above 55 °C up to 60 °C, leave a gap of 20 mm between products.)
Maximum operating altitude m 2000
Operating positions In relation to normal

30˚
vertical mounting plane
90˚ 90˚
30˚
Flame resistance Conforming to UL 94 V2
Conforming to IEC/EN 60695-2-12 °C 960 (parts supporting live components)
°C 650
Environmental restrictions Cadmium and silicone-free, recyclable

Shock resistance Conforming to IEC/EN60068-2-27 Power poles open: 10 gn
1/2 sine wave = 11 ms (1) Power poles closed: 15 gn
Vibration resistance Conforming to IEC/EN 60068-2-6 Power poles open: 2 gn

5…300 Hz (1) Power poles closed: 4 gn
Immunity to Conforming to IEC/EN 61000-4-2 kV In open air: 8 - Level 3

electrostatic discharge kV On contact: 8 - Level 4
Immunity to radiated high- Conforming to IEC/EN 61000-4-3 V/m 10 - Level 3

frequency disturbance
Immunity to fast Conforming to IEC/EN 61000-4-4 kV All circuits except for serial link: 4 - Level 4
transient currents kV Serial link: 2 - Level 3
Immunity to dissipated Conforming to IEC/EN 60947-6-2 Common mode Serial mode

shock waves Uc a 24…240 V, kV 2 1
Uc c 48…220 V
Uc = 24 V c Not applicable
Immunity to conducted high- Conforming to IEC/EN 61000-4-6 V 10
frequency disturbance
(1) Without modifying the contact states, in the most unfavourable direction.
References : Dimensions : Schemes :

pages 1/64 to 1/81 pages 1/102 and 1/103 pages 1/104 to 1/107
1/88
Characteristics 1
Power bases and control units
Power base and control unit type LUB 12 + LUCA LUB 32 + LUCA LUB 12 + LUB 32 + LU2M
or LUCB or LUCC or LUCB or LUCC LUCM LUCM LU6M
or LUCD or LUCD
Power circuit connection characteristics 1
Connection to Ø 4 mm screw clamp terminals
Flexible cable 1 conductor mm 2 2.5…10 2.5…10 2.5…10 2.5…10 2.5…10
without cable end 2 conductors mm 2 1.5…6 1.5…6 1.5…6 1.5…6 1.5…6
Flexible cable 1 conductor mm 2 1…6 1…6 1…6 1…6 1…6
with cable end 2 conductors mm 2 1…6 1…6 1…6 1…6 1…6
Solid cable 1 conductor mm 2 1…10 1…10 1…10 1…10 1…10
without cable end 2 conductors mm 2 1…6 1…6 1…6 1…6 1…6
Screwdriver Philips n° 2 or flat screwdriver: Ø 6 mm
Tightening torque N.m 1.9…2.5 1.9…2.5 1.9…2.5 1.9…2.5 1.9…2.5
Control circuit connection characteristics
Connection to Ø 3 mm screw clamp terminals
Flexible cable 1 conductor mm 2 0.75…1.5 0.75…1.5 0.75…1.5 0.75…1.5 0.75…1.5
without cable end 2 conductors mm 2 0.75…1.5 0.75…1.5 0.75…1.5 0.75…1.5 0.75…1.5
Flexible cable 1 conductor mm 2 0.34…1.5 0.34…1.5 0.34…1.5 0.34…1.5 0.34…1.5
with cable end 2 conductors mm 2 0.34…1.5 0.34…1.5 0.34…1.5 0.34…1.5 0.34…1.5
Solid cable 1 conductor mm 2 0.75…1.5 0.75…1.5 0.75…1.5 0.75…1.5 0.75…1.5
without cable end 2 conductors mm 2 0.75…1.5 0.75…1.5 0.75…1.5 0.75…1.5 0.75…1.5
Screwdriver Philips n° 1 or flat screwdriver: Ø 5 mm
Tightening torque N.m 0.8…1.2 0.8…1.2 0.8…1.2 0.8…1.2 0.8…1.2
Control circuit characteristics
Rated voltage a 50/60 Hz V 24…240 24…240 – – –
of control circuit c V 24…220 24…220 24 24 –
Voltage limits c 24 V (1) V 20…27 20…27 20…28 20…28 –
Operation a 24 V V 20…26.5 20…26.5 – – –
a or c 48…72 V V a 38.5…72. c 38.5…93 – – –
a 110…240 V V a 88…264 a 88…264 – – –
c 110…220 V V c 88…242 c 88…242 – – –
Drop-out c 24 V V 14.5 14.5 14.5 14.5 –
a 24 V V 14.5 14.5 – – –
a or c 48…72 V V 29 29 – – –
a 110…240 V, c 110…220 V V 55 55 – – –
Typical consumption c 24 V mA 130 220 150 200 120
I max while closing a 24 V mA 140 220 – – 2360
a or c 48…72 V mA 280 280 – – 2300
a 110…240 V, c 110…220 V mA 280 280 – – 1000
I rms sealed c 24 V mA 60 80 70 75 120
a 24 V mA 70 90 – – (2)
a or c 48…72 V mA 35 45 – – (2)
a 110…240 V, c 110…220 V mA 35 25 – – (2)
Heat dissipation W 2 3 1.7 1.8 –
Operating time Closing ms 24 V : 70 ; 48 V : 60 ; u 72 V : 50 75 65 –
Opening ms 35 35 35 35 –
Resistance to micro-breaks ms 3 3 3 3 –
Resistance to voltage drops IEC/EN 61000-4-11 At least 70 % of Uc for 500 ms –
Mechanical durability In millions of operating cycles 15 15 15 15 –
Maximum operating rate In operating cycles per hour 3600 3600 3600 3600 –
Main pole characteristics
Number of poles 3 3 3 3 –
Isolation function Possible Yes Yes Yes Yes –
To IEC/EN 60947-1 Padlocking 1 padlock with Ø 6.9 mm shank –
Rated thermal current A 12 32 12 32 –
Rated operating current To IEC/ In cat. AC-41 θ y 70°C: 12A θ y 70°C: 32A θ y 55°C: 12A θ y 55°C: 32A –
(Ue y 440V) EN 60947-6-2 In cat. AC-43 θ y 70°C: 12A θ y 70°C: 32A θ y 55°C: 12A θ y 55°C 32A –
Rated operating voltage V 690 (3) 690 (3) 690 (3) 690 (3) –
Frequency limits Of the operating current Hz 40…60 40…60 40…60 40…60 –
Power dissipated Operating current A 3 6 9 12 18 25 32 –
in the power circuits Power dissipated in all three poles W 0.1 0.3 0.6 1.1 2.4 4.6 7.5 –
Rated breaking capacity on short-circuit V 230 440 500 690 –
kA 50 50 10 4 –
Total breaking time ms 2 2 2 –
Thermal stress limit With Isc max on 440 V kA²s 90 120 90 120 –
(1) Voltage with maximum ripple of ± 10 %.
(2) No consumption sealed. (3) For 690 V, use phase barrier LU9 SP0.
1/89
Characteristics 1
Reversing power bases and auxiliary contacts
Specific characteristics of power bases LU2B and reverser blocks LU2M or LU6M
Duration of inrush phase a 50/60 Hz ms 25
1 Maximum Without change of direction
c ms
ms
15
75
operating time With change of direction ms 150
General characteristics of auxiliary contacts
Conventional thermal For ambient temperature θ < 70 °C A 5
current (Ith)
Frequency of the operating current Hz Up to 400
Minimum switching capacity λ = 10 -8 U min V 17
I min mA 5
Short-circuit Conforming to IEC/EN 60947-5-1 A gG fuse: 4
protection
Short-time rating Permissible for 1s A 30
500 ms A 40
100 ms A 50
Insulation resistance mΩ 10
Non-overlap time Guaranteed between ms 2 (on energisation and on de-energisation)
N/C and N/O contacts
Specific characteristics of auxiliary contacts built-into the power base
Linked contacts Conforming to IEC/EN 60947-4-1 Each power base has 1 N/O contact and 1 N/C contact which are mechanically linked
Mirror contact Conforming to draft standard The N/C contact fitted in each power base reliably represents the state of the power
IEC/EN 60947-1 contacts (safety scheme)
Rated operating voltage (Ue) V Up to a 690; c 250
Rated insulation Conforming to IEC/EN 60947-5-1 V 690
voltage (Ui) Conforming to UL, CSA V 600
Specific characteristics of auxiliary contacts in modules LUF N, of auxiliary contacts LUA1
and of reverser blocks LU2M and LU6M
Rated operating voltage (Ue) V Up to a 250; c 250
Rated insulation Conforming to IEC/EN 60947-5-1 V 250
voltage (Ui) Conforming to UL, CSA V 250
Operational power of contacts

Conforming to IEC/EN 60947-5-1
a.c. supply, categories AC-14 and AC-15 d.c. supply, category DC-13
Electrical durability (valid for up to 3600 operating cycles/hour) on an Electrical durability (valid for up to 1200 operating cycles/hour) on an inductive load
inductive load such as the coil of an electromagnet: making current such as the coil of an electromagnet, without economy resistor, the time constant
(cos ϕ 0.7) = 10 times the power broken (cos ϕ = 0.4). increasing with the load.
V 24 48 115 230 400 440 600 V 24 48 125 250

1 million VA 60 120 280 560 960 1050 1440 W 120 90 75 68
operating cycles
3 million VA 16 32 80 160 280 300 420 W 70 50 38 33
operating cycles
10 million VA 4 8 20 40 70 80 100 W 25 18 14 12
operating cycles
1 1
8 8
7 7 24 V
Millions of operating cycles
6 6
5 5 48 V
4 4 125 V
3 3
2 2 250 V
1 1
0,8 0,8
0,7 0,7
0,6 0,6
0,5 0,5
0,4 0,4
0,3 0,3
0,2 0,2
0,1 0,1
0,1 0,2 0,3 0,4 0,6 0,8 1 2 3 4 6 8 10 0,1 0,2 0,3 0,4 0,6 0,8 1 2 3 4 6 8 10
0,5 0,7 0,9 5 7 9 0,5 0,7 0,9 5 7 9
Current broken in A Current broken in A

page 1/64 pages 1/102 and 1/103 pages 1/104 to 1/107
1/90
Characteristics 1
Control units
Characteristics of standard control units LUCA

Protection Motor type 3-phase
Overload
Conforming to standard
Tripping class conforming to
IEC/EN 60947-6-2, UL 508, CSA C22-2 n°14
10
1
protection UL 508, IEC/EN 60947-6-2
Frequency limits of the operating current Hz 40…60
Temperature compensation °C - 25…+ 70
Protection against phase imbalance With
Short-circuit Tripping threshold 14.2 x Ir (setting current)
protection Tripping tolerance ± 20 %
Characteristics of advanced control units LUCB, LUCC and LUCD

Control unit type LUCB LUCC LUCD
Protection Motor type 3-phase Single-phase 3-phase
Conforming to standard IEC/EN 60947-6-2, UL 508, IEC/EN 60947-6-2, UL 508, IEC/EN 60947-6-2, UL 508,
CSA C22-2 n°14 CSA C22-2 n°14 CSA C22-2 n°14
Overload Tripping class conforming to 10 10 20
Frequency limits of the operating current Hz 40…60 40…60 40…60
Temperature compensation °C - 25…+ 70 - 25…+ 55 - 25…+ 70
Protection against phase imbalance Yes – Yes
Short-circuit Tripping threshold 14.2 x Ir max. 14.2 x Ir max. 14.2 x Ir max.
protection Tripping tolerance ± 20 % ± 20 % ± 20 %
Characteristics of multifunction control units LUCM

Protection Motor type Selectable: single-phase or 3-phase
Conforming to standard IEC/EN 60947-6-2, UL 508
Overload Tripping class conforming to 5, 10, 15, 20, 25, 30 (selectable)
Frequency limits of the operating current Hz 40…60
Communication Physical interface RS 485 multi-drop
interface for Connector RJ45 on front panel
terminal on
Protocol Modbus RTU
enclosure door
Maximum transmission speed bit/s 19 200 (self-configuration up to this value)
Maximum return time ms 200
Display Type LCD, 2 lines of 12 characters
Language version Multilanguage (English, French, German, Italian, Spanish)
Accuracy ±5%
Resolution 1 % of Ir
Auxiliary supply External type V c 24, with maximum ripple of ± 10 %.
Heat dissipation W 0.8
Configuration table for protection devices and alarms on multifunction control units LUCM
Tripping Alarm Adjustment of tripping Adjustment of time before Adjustment of alarm
threshold tripping threshold
Factory setting Factory setting Range Default value Range Default value Range Default value
Overcurrent Activated (1) – 3…17 Ir 14.2 – – – –
Overload Activated (1) Activated 0.15…32 A (2) Ir min Class: 5…30 5 10…100 % of 85 %
the thermal
state
Earth fault Activated Activated 0.2…5 Ir min 0.3 Ir min 0.1…1.2 s 0.1 s 0.2…5 Ir min 0.3 Ir min
Phase imbalance Activated Activated 10…30 % 10 % 0.2…20 s 5s 10…30 % 10 %
Torque limitation Deactivated Deactivated 1…8 Ir 2 Ir 1…30 s 5s 1…8 Ir 2 Ir
No-load running Deactivated Deactivated 0.3…1 Ir 0.5 Ir 1…200 s 10 s 0.3…1 Ir 0.5 Ir
Long starting times Deactivated Deactivated 1…8 Ir Ir 1…200 s 10 s 1…8 Ir Ir
Configuration of additional functions on multifunction control units LUCM
Factory setting Setting range
Reset Manual Manual, automatic or remote
Time before reset 120 s 1…1000 s
Type of load 3-phase motor 3-phase motor, single-phase motor
Self-cooled Self-cooled, force cooled
Language English English, French, German, Italian, Spanish
Display Average current Average current, thermal state of motor, current in phase 1 / 2 / 3, earth leakage current, phase imbalance, cause
of last 5 faults
(1) This function cannot be deactivated.
(2) The setting range depends on the rating of the control unit used.

1/91
Characteristics 1
Limiter-disconnector, current limiter, thermal overload
alarm function module and thermal overload fault
signalling modules
Characteristics of limiter-disconnector LUA LB1

Rated insulation voltage (Ui) V 690
1 conforming to standard IEC/EN 60947-1
Conventional thermal current (Ith) A 32
conforming to standard IEC/EN 60947-1
Operating threshold I rms kA 50
Breaking capacity V 440 690
kA 130 70
Mounting Directly on the upstream terminals of the starter-controller
Connection
Solid cable 1 conductor mm2 1.5…10
2 conductors mm2 1.5...6
Flexible cable without cable end 1 conductor mm2 1…10
2 conductors mm2 1…6
Flexible cable with cable end 1 conductor mm2 1...6
2 conductors mm2 1...6
Screwdriver Phillips n°2 or flat screwdriver Ø 6 mm
Tightening torque N.m 1.9…2.5
Characteristics of current limiter LA9 LB920

Operating threshold I rms A 1000
Breaking capacity V 440 690
kA 100 35
Mounting Separate
Connection
Solid cable 1 conductor mm2 1.5…25
2 conductors mm2 1.5...10
Flexible cable without cable end 1 conductor mm2 1.5…25
2 conductors mm2 2.5…10
Flexible cable with cable end 1 conductor mm2 1.5…16
2 conductors mm2 1.5…4
Screwdriver Phillips n°2 or flat screwdriver Ø 6 mm
Tightening torque N.m 2.2
Characteristics of thermal overload alarm function module LUF W10

Activation threshold Fixed at 88% of the thermal tripping state
Hysteresis between activation and switching off 5%
Indication By LED on front panel
Supply Powered by the control unit
Discrete output characteristics Type N/O contact
AC-15 230 V max; 400 VA 100 000 operating cycles
DC-13 24 V; 50 W 100 000 operating cycles
Conventional thermal current For ambient A 2
(Ith) temperature θ < 70 °C
Short-circuit protection Conforming to A gG fuse: 2
IEC/EN 60947-5-1
Characteristics of thermal overload fault signalling and reset modules
Module type LUF DH11 LUF DA01 LUF DA10
Fault signalling By LED on front panel
External power supply V a/c 24…240
Module consumption mA 7 at c 24
1.1 at a 240
Discrete outputs Type 1 N/C + 1 N/O 1 N/C 1 N/O
AC-15 230 V max; 400 VA 100 000 operating cycles
DC-13 24 V; 50 W 100 000 operating cycles
Conventional thermal current For ambient A 2

(Ith) temperature θ < 70 °C
Short-circuit protection Conforming to A gG fuse: 2
IEC/EN 60947-5-1
Reset input Conductor c.s.a. mm2 0.2 min
Length m 500 (R = 50 Ω , L = 52.8 mH, Cp = 93 pF)

page 1/67 pages 1/102 and 1/103 pages 1/104 to 1/107
1/92
Characteristics 1
Function modules and communication modules
Characteristics of motor load indication function module LUF V2

Analogue output 4 - 20 mA
Signal delivered Value of I average/Ir ratio within the range of 0 to 2 for LUCB and LUCD
Value of I average/Ir ratio within the range of 0 to 3 for LUCC
1
Load impedance Minimum kΩ –
Maximum Ω 500
Typical Ω 100
Signal characteristics Precision ±6%
with advanced control unit
Signal characteristics Precision ± 10 %
with multifunction control unit Resolution 1 % of Ir
Supply External c 24 V
Characteristics of AS-Interface communication modules ASILUF C5 and ASILUF C51
Modules type ASILUF C5 ASILUF C51
Product certification AS-Interface V2.1 n° 52901 AS-Interface V2.1 n° 52303
AS-Interface profile 7.D.F.0 7.A.7.E
Ambient air temperature °C Operation - 25…+ 70
Cycle time ms 5 10
AS-Interface supply V 29.5...31.5
Current consumption By the AS-Interface system mA Normal operation: 25
mA Fault condition: 30
On 24 V supply for the outputs mA 200
Auxiliary supply V c 24 ± 30 %
Number of outputs 2 dedicated to starter-controller coil operation
Switching capacity of the solid state outputs 0.5 A/24 V (outputs protected against short-circuits)
Indication/diagnostics By 2 LEDs on front panel
Characteristics of Modbus communication modules LUL C03p
Module type LUL C031 LUL C032 and LUL C033
Physical interface RS 485 multi-drop
Connector RJ45 on front panel
Protocol Modbus RTU
Maximum transmission speed bit/s 19 200 (self-configuration up to this value)
Maximum return time ms 30
Addressing By switches: from 0...31
Ambient air temperature °C Operation - 25…+ 55
Logic inputs Number – 2 (to be assigned according to configuration)
Supply V – c 24
Input current mA – 7
Nominal input values Voltage V c 24 (positive logic)
Current mA 7
Response time Change to state 1 ms 10 (± 30 %)
Change to state 0 ms 10 (± 30 %)
Input type Resistive
Solid state outputs Number 3, of which 2 dedicated to starter-controller coil operation
Supply V c 24
Max. current mA 500
Protection gI fuse A 1
Current consumption On 24 V supply for the outputs mA 200
Switching capacity of the solid state outputs 0.5 A/24 V
Indication/diagnostics By 3 LEDs on front panel
Connection characteristics
Module type LUF W10, LUF V2 ASILUF C5 and ASILUF C51 LUL C031 LUFC 00
DH11, DA01 Inputs and Outputs LUL C032
and DA10 24 V auxiliary LUL C033
Connectors Pitch 5.08 3.81 5.08 3.81 3.81 3.81
Flexible cable without cable end 1 conductor mm² 0.2…1.5 0.14…1 0.2…1.5 0.14…1 0.14…1 0.14…1
2 identical conductors mm² 0.2…1 0.14…0.75 0.2…1 0.14…0.75 0.14…0.75 0.14…0.75
Flexible cable Without insulated 1 conductor mm² 0.25…1.5 0.25…1 0.25…1.5 0.25…1 0.25…1 0.25…1
with cable end ferrule 2 identical conductors mm² 0.25…1 0.25…0.34 0.25…1 0.25…0.34 0.25…0.34 0.25…0.34
With 1 conductor mm² 0.25…1.5 0.25…0.5 0.25…1.5 0.25…0.5 0.25…0.5 0.25…0.5
insulated ferrule 2 identical conductors mm² 0.5…1 0.5 0.5…1 0.5 0.5 0.5
(Use a double cable end)
Solid cable without cable end 1 conductor mm² 0.2…1.5 0.14…1 0.2…1.5 0.14…1 0.14…1 0.14…1
2 identical conductors mm² 0.2…1 0.14…0.5 0.2…1 0.14…0.5 0.14…0.5 0.14…0.5
Conductor size 1 conductor AWG 24 to AWG 26 to AWG 24 to AWG 26 to AWG 26 to AWG 26 to
AWG 16 AWG 16 AWG 16 AWG 16 AWG 16 AWG 16
Tightening torque N.m 0.5…0.6 0.22…0.25 0.5…0.6 0.22…0.25 0.22…0.25 0.22…0.25
Flat screwdriver mm 3.5 2.5 3.5 2.5 2.5 2.5
1/93
Characteristics 1
TeSys U controllers
Control bases and control units
Environment
Control base and control unit type LUT M + LUCB T1BL or LUCD T1BL LUT M + LUCM T1BL or LUL C
1 Product certifications
without LUL C
UL, CSA
Pending: BV, GL, LROS, DNV, PTB
Conforming to standards IEC/EN 60947-4-1, UL 508, CSA C22-2 N°14
Rated insulation voltage Conforming to IEC/EN 60947-1, V 250

of the outputs overvoltage category III,
(Ui) degree of pollution: 3
Conforming to UL508, CSA C22-2 V 250
n°14
Rated impulse withstand Conforming to IEC/EN 60947-4-1 kV 4
voltage of the outputs
(Uimp)
Degree of protection Front panel (outside connection zone) IP 40
To IEC/EN 60947-1 Front panel and wired terminals IP 20
(protection against
Other faces IP 20
direct finger contact)
Protective treatment Conforming to IEC/EN 60068 “TH”
Conforming to IEC/EN 60068-2-30 Cycles 12

Conforming to IEC/EN 60068-2-11 h 48
around the device Operation °C - 25…+ 70 - 25…+ 60

30˚
Without derating vertical mounting plane
90˚ 90˚
30˚
Conforming to IEC/EN 60695-2-12 °C 960 (parts supporting live components)
°C 650
Shock resistance Conforming to IEC/EN60068-2-27 15 gn

1/2 sine wave = 11 ms (1)
Vibration resistance Conforming to IEC/EN 60068-2-6 4 gn
5…300 Hz (1)
Immunity to Conforming to IEC/EN 61000-4-2 kV In open air: 8 - Level 3
electrostatic discharge kV On contact: 6 - Level 3
Immunity to Conforming to IEC/EN 61000-4-3 V/m 10 - Level 3

radiated fields
Immunity to fast Conforming to IEC/EN 61000-4-4 kV CT outputs and inputs: 4 - Level 4
transient currents kV Inputs and supply: 2 - Level 3
Immunity to radio Conforming to IEC/EN 61000-4-6 V 10

electrical fields
Control base and control unit relays
Immunity to dissipated Conforming to IEC/EN 60947-4-1 Common mode Serial mode
shock waves
Output relays / power line kV 4 2
Inputs kV 2 1
Serial communication kV 2 –
(1) Without modifying the contact states, in the most unfavourable direction.

1/94
Characteristics 1
TeSys U controllers
Control bases and control units
Control supply characteristics

Operating voltage V c 20.4…28.8
Power consumption W 2 max

1
Associated protection A gG fuse, 0.5
Connection
Connectors Pitch mm 5
Flexible cable without cable end 1 conductor mm 2 0.2…2.5
2 identical mm 2 0.2…1.5
conductors
Flexible cable with cable end
Without insulated ferrule 1 conductor mm 2 0.25…2.5
2 identical mm 2 0.25…1
conductors
With insulated ferrule 1 conductor mm 2 0.25…2.5
2 identical mm 2 0.5…1.5
conductors (1)
Solid cable without cable end 1 conductor mm 2 0.2…2.5
2 identical mm 2 0.2…1
conductors
Conductor size 1 conductor AWG 24 to AWG 12
Tightening torque N.m 0.5…0.6
Flat screwdriver mm 3
Input characteristics
Operating voltage V c 24
Logic inputs Logic state 1: I u 6 mA - 16 V

Logic state 0: I y 1.5 mA - 5 V
Discrete output characteristics

Control base type LUT M10BL LUT M20BL
Type Single break volt-free contacts
Load a.c. supply C 300 B 300

d.c. supply 24 V/5 A 24 V/5 A
Permissible power in cat. AC-15 For 500 000 VA 180 500

operating cycles
Permissible power in cat. DC-13 For 500 000 W 30 30

operating cycles
Associated protection A gG fuse, 4 gG fuse, 4
For use in association with contactor (2) Control voltage c 24 V: Control voltage a 100…240 V:
LP1K, LC1 D09…D95. LC1K, LC1D, LC1 F185…F500
Control voltage c 24…240 V:

LC1K, LC1D.
Characteristics of external current transformers

Precision Class 5P
Precision limit factor 10

Maximum operating temperature °C 70
Transformer ratio 30/1 50/1 100/1 200/1 400/1 800/1

Hole diameter mm 28 22 35 32 – –
Maximum wire c.s.a. mm 2 30 x 10 30 x 10 40 x 10 65 x 32 38 x 127 53 x 127
(1) Use a double cable end.

(2) For other combinations, use an intermediate relay between the output of controller LUTM and
the contactor coil.

1/95
Curves 1
Tripping curves for control units LUCA, LUCB, LUCD

Average operating times at 20 °C according to multiples of the setting current, tolerance : ± 20 %.
1
Time (s)
1000
1
100
3
10
0,1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 10 12 14 20 30
x the setting current (Ir)
1 LUCD, 3 poles from cold state, class 20.

2 LUCA, LUCB, 3 poles from cold state, class 10.
3 LUCA, LUCB, LUCD, 3 poles from hot state.
Tripping curves for control units LUCC

Average operating times at 20 °C according to multiples of the setting current, tolerance : ± 20 %.
Time (s)
1000
1
100
2
10
0,1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 10 12 14 20 30
1 LUCC, single-phase, cold state.

2 LUCC, single-phase, hot state.
References :
page 1/69
1/96
Curves (continued) 1
Tripping curves for control units LUCM

Cold state curves
Average operating times at 20 °C according to multiples of the setting current, tolerance : ± 20 %. 1
10000
Time (s)
1000
100
10
Class 30
Class 25
Class 20
Class 15
Class 10
1 Class 5
0,1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 12 14 16 18 20 30
11 13 15 17 19
References :
page 1/70
1/97
Tripping curves for control units LUCM

Hot state curves
1 Average operating times at 20 °C according to multiples of the setting current, tolerance : ± 20 %
10000
Time (s)
1000
100
10
Class 30
Class 25
1 Class 20
Class 15
Class 10
Class 5
0,1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 12 14 16 18 20 30
11 13 15 17 19
References :
page 1/70
1/98
Current limitation on short-circuit

Ue = 460 V
1
Maximum current (kA)
100
10 2
0,1
0,1 0,2 0,4 0,6 0,8 1 2 3 4 6 8 10 20 30 40 60 80 100
Prospective Isc (kA)
1 Maximum peak current

2 32 A power base
3 12 A power base
Thermal limit on short-circuit

Ue = 460 V
Sum of I²dt (A²s) 103
1000
1
100
10
1
0,1 0,2 0,4 0,6 0,8 1 2 3 4 6 8 10 20 30 40 60 80 100
1 32 A power base
2 12 A power base
References :
pages 1/64 to 1/70
1/99
Selection guide 1
Use in category AC-41
1 LUB 12
LUB 32
10
8
6
5
4
1
0,8
0,6
0,5
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 12 32 40
Current broken in A

Ue y 440 V Ue = 690 V
LUB 12
LUB 32
LUB 12
LUB 32
10
10
8 8
6 6
5 5
4 4
3 3
2 2
1 1
0,8 0,8
0,6 0,6
0,5 0,5
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 12 32 40 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 12 21 32 40
0,75
0,55
2,2
5,5
7,5
1,5
kW
230 V
0,55
0,75
7,5
1,5
2,2
5,5
15
11
4
kW
400 V
0,75
0,55
2,2
5,5
7,5
1,5
11
15
4
kW
440 V
References :
pages 1/64 to 1/70
1/100
Selection guide 1

Ue y 440 V Ue = 690 V
1
LUB 12
LUB 32
LUB 12
LUB 32
1 1

0,8 0,8
0,6 0,6
0,5 0,5
0,4 0,4
0,3 0,3
0,2 0,2
0,1 0,1
0,08 0,08
0,06 0,06
0,05 0,05
0,04 0,04
0,03 0,03
0,02 0,02
0,01 0,01
1 2 3 5 10 20 30 50 66 100 200 1 2 3 5 10 20 30 50 60 100 200
40 60 80 170 40 54 80 126
References :
pages 1/64 to 1/70
1/101
Dimensions 1
Starter-controllers
Non-reversing Reversing
1 126
Rail mounting
126
Screw fixing
30 Ø4
Rail mounting Screw fixing
29 Ø4
X1
X2
73
163
154
233
224
120/125
X1
135 (1) 45 X2 135 (1)
Minimum electrical clearance: 45

X1 = 50 mm for Ue = 440 V and 70 mm for Ue = 500 and 690 V,
X2 = 0
(1) Maximum depth (with Modbus communication module)
Reverser block for mounting separately from power base
Rail mounting Screw fixing
Ø4
104
115
113 45 113 36
Sets of busbars and plug-in power sockets

GV2 G445 and GV2 G454 GV2 Gppp with terminal block GV1 G09 GV2 G245 and G254
a
l p l
18
GV1 G09
30
95
I
GV2 G245 (2 x 45) 89
GV2 G254 (2 x 54) 98
I P GV2 G554 GV2 G345 and G354

GV2 G445 (2 x 45) 179 45 260 l
GV2 G454 (2 x 54) 206 54
a
Number of tap-offs 5 6 7 8 I
GV2 G445 (2 x 45) 224 269 314 359 GV2 G345 (2 x 45) 134
GV2 G454 (2 x 54) 260 314 368 422 GV2 G354 (2 x 54) 152
AK5 JB144 AK5 PC13, PC33, PC33L

45,5
82
38 35,5
30
79
81
45
438
452
1/102
Dimensions 1
Limiter-disconnector LUA LB1 Current limiter LA9 LB920

Disconnector LUA LB10
1
93
2ØM4
146
103
115
154
6 51
135 (1) 45
53,5
(1) Maximum depth (with Modbus communication module).
LU9 AP00 Door cut-out
55
= =
54
= =
54
230
162
508 11,5 8 Ø7
Addressing consoles
XZ MC11 ASI TERV2
209
195
80 30 84 35
Modbus hub LU9 GC3

Splitter box LU9 G02
163
154
128 128 Ø4
45 30
1/103
Schemes 1
Starter-controllers, 12 or 32 A
With standard, advanced or multifunction control unit
1 Non-reversing Reversing
1/L1
3/L2
5/L3
1/L1
3/L2
5/L3
13/NO
14/NO
21/NC
22/NC
Control Unit Control Unit
2/T1
4/T2
6/T3
2/T1
4/T2
6/T3
A1
A2
Pre-wired
With control unit LUCC or LUCM

Connection of a single-phase motor
1 L1
5 L2
Reverser
3
2/T1
4/T2
6/T3
A3
B3
A1
B1
A2
81
84
82
13/NO
14/NO
21/NC
22/NC
Control Unit
Control terminal block
LU2B Reverser Motor Controller

U 2
V 6
A1
A2
A3
B3
A1
B1
A2
Reverser blocks
LU2M LU6M
Control terminal blocks
S1
1/L1
3/L2
5/L3
S2
S3
S1
S2
S3
LU6M Reverser Block

A3
B3
A1
B1
A2
Reverser
With pre-wired connector LU9M RC
S1
S2
S3
LU6M Reverser Block

2/T1
4/T2
6/T3
LU9M RC
81
84
82
A3
B3
A1
B1
A2
Pre-wired coil
Control terminal block Basic scheme

21
A2
13
A1
22
14
LU2M Reverser Motor Controller

LU6M
S2
S1
S3
A3
B3
A1
B1
A2
(1) S1 Start next stage

S2 Electrical interlocking
S3 Maintaining contact
B1 Forward
B3 Reverse
A3Reverse
A1Forward
B1 Maintain forward running

B3 Maintain reverse running
A1 Pulse forward running
A2
A2 Common
A3 Pulse reverse running
(1) Electronically operated bistable
electromagnet.
Add-on contact blocks Add-on contact modules

LUA1 C11 LUA1 C20 LUFN 20 LUFN 11 LUFN 02
17/NO 18/NO 17/NO 18/NO 33/NO 34/NO 43/NO 44/NO 31/NC 32/NC
95/NC 96/NC 97/NO 98/NO 43/NO 44/NO 31/NC 32/NC 41/NC 42/NC
1/104
Control units
Standard control unit LUCA Advanced control unit (LUCB, LUCC, LUCD)
Basic scheme Basic scheme 1
1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6
LUCA LUCp
Power Base Interface Power Base Interface
Sensor Sensor
L1 L1
Sensor Control Sensor Control

L2 A.S.I.C. L2 A.S.I.C.
tr tr
Sensor Sensor
L3 L3
Thermal Supply and Thermal overload

Supply and memory
Detection of overload Detection of
start sequence memory start sequence
Test
Interface module
A1
A2
A1
A2
7 8 9 10 11 12
1 and 2 Trips 1 and 2 Trips

3 and 4 Electromagnet 3 and 4 Electromagnet
5 Power base rating 5 Power base rating
6 N/C 6 N/C
7 Weight
8 Thermal status/Set
9 Reset mode/Reset
10 (lm/Ir)
11 Vc2
12 Vc1
Multifunction control unit LUCM
Control terminal block
LUCM Multifonction Control Unit

+5V
D(A)
D(B)
24 V Aux
0V
4 5 7
6 8
Basic scheme
1 2 3 4 5 6
LUCM
Power Base Interface
Sensor Display and
L1 Parameter Entry
Control ESC ENT

Sensor
L2 A.S.I.C.
D(B)
Sensor 4
D(A)
L3 5
RS485 +5V 7
RJ45
0V
Supply and Thermal 8
detection of overload
start sequence memory
Supply
24 V Aux
Interface module
A1
A2
7 8 9 10 11 12
1 and 2 Trips
3 and 4 Electromagnet
5 Power base rating
6 N/C
7 Weight
8 N/C
9 Weight
10 (lm/Ir)
11 Rx/Tx
12 Vc1
1/105
Function modules
Alarm Indication of motor load
1 LUF W10 LUFV 2
4-20 mA output
LUFW 10 Alarms Module LUFV 2 Analogue output Module
4...20 mA 24 V Aux 24 V Aux

07
08
NC
Basic scheme Basic scheme
Advanced Control Unit or Multifunction Control Unit Advanced Control Unit or Multifunction Control Unit
LUFW 10 LUFV 2
Input interface LED Supply Input interface Supply
µP - Analogue/Digital
converter
Isolation
Bistable Relay
Digital/Analogue
converter
07
08
Voltage/Current converter
4...20 mA c 24 V
100 Ω < load < 500 Ω c 30 V max and 40 mA min
1/106
Communication modules
Communication modules ASILUF C5 and ASILUF C51
Without pre-wired coil connection With pre-wired coil connection LU9B N11C 1
ASILUF C5 or ASILUF C51 AS-Interface Module ASILUF C5 or ASILUF C51 AS-Interface Module
AS-i AS-i
Com
OA1
OA3
LU9B N11C
Pre-wired coil
With pre-wired coil connection LU9M RC
ASILUF C5 or ASILUF C51 AS-Interface Module
AS-i
LU9M RC
Pre-wired coil
Basic scheme
ASILUF C5
or
Ready-Fault-Pole ASILUF C51

LED
A2SI
Output Interface
c 24 V
Com
AS-i
OA1
OA3
1/107
Communication modules (continued)

Modbus communication modules LUL C031 Modbus communication modules LUL C032 and LUL C033
1 Without pre-wired coil connection Without pre-wired coil connection
LUL C031 Modbus Module LUL C032 or LUL C033 Modbus Module
24 V 24 V
D(A)
D(A)
D(B)
D(B)
24 V Aux
c
0V
0V
Aux COM
Com
Com
Com
OA1
OA3
OA1
OA3
LO1
LO1
LI1
LI2
4 5 8
6 4 5 8
6
With pre-wired coil connection LU9B N11C With pre-wired coil connection LU9B N11C
24 V 24 V
D(A)
D(A)
D(B)
D(B)
24 V Aux c
0V
0V
Aux COM
Com
LO1
LO1
LI1
LI2
LU9B N11C LU9B N11C
Pre-wired coil 4 5 8
6 Pre wired coil 4 5 8
6
With pre-wired coil connection LU9M RC With pre-wired coil connection LU9M RC
24 V 24 V
D(A)
D(A)
D(B)
D(B)
24 V Aux
0V
0V
c Aux COM
Com
LO1
LO1
LI1
LI2
LU9M RC LU9M RC
Pre wired coil 4 5 8 Pre wired coil 4 5 8
Basic scheme Basic scheme
Advanced Control Unit or Multifunction Control Unit Advanced Control Unit or Multifunction Control Unit Controller
x6
LULC 031 LULC 032
Control unit interface or
Input interface Controller
interface LULC 033
Ready-Fault-Pole Address Ready-Fault-Pole

LED Address LED
D(B) D(B)
4 4
D(A) D(A)
RS485 5 Modbus RS485 5 Modbus
RJ45 0V RJ45
0V 8
8
AL1 AL1
Supply Supply
Output Interface AL2 Output Interface I/O interface AL2
24 V 24 V
Com
Com
Com
OA1
OA3
c
LO1
COM
OA1
OA3
LO1
LI1
LI2
24 V 24 V Aux Aux
1/108

Parallel wiring modules
Without pre-wired coil connection With pre-wired coil connection LU9M RC 1
LUF C00 Parallel bus Module LUF C00 Parallel bus Module
Com
OA1
OA3
Link // RJ45 LU9M RC Link // RJ45

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Pre-wired coil 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
With pre-wired coil connection LU9B N11C
LUF C00 Parallel bus Module
Link // RJ45
LU9B N11C
Pre-wired coil 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Basic scheme
LUF C00
Poles
Ready-
Fault
Com
OA3
OA1
RJ45
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 Forward running
2 Reverse running
3 Output common
4 Knob in position
5 Pole state
6 Reserved
7 Fault
8 Input common
1/109

Wiring hub and splitter box
1 Modbus hub LU9G C3 Parallel wiring splitter box LU9 G02
X1 LU9 GC3 X1 LU9 G02

N/C Forward running
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
N/C Reverse running
N/C Output common Colours of
D (B) – N/C
D (A) + RJ 45 Pole state RJ 45 TSX CDPppp
N/C N/C X9 connection cable
N/C Fault Fault X1 wires (4)
20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 1110 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
0V Input common Fault X2 1 White
X2 Fault X3 2 Brown
X2
Fault X4 3 Green
X9 Fault X5 4 Yellow
N/C Fault X6 5 Grey
RJ 45
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
RJ 45
N/C Fault X7 6 Pink
N/C Fault X8 7 Blue
D (B) – Pole state X1 8 Red
X3 X3
RJ 45 D (A) + (2) Pole state X2 9 Black
N/C Pole state X3 10 Violet
24 V (1) Pole state X4 11 Grey-pink
RJ 45 RJ 45 Pole state X5 12 Red-blue
0V
Pole state X6 13 White-green
Pole state X7 14 Brown-green
X4 X4 Pole state X8 15 White-yellow
+ 24 V Aux 16 Yellow-brown
- 24 V Aux 17 White-grey
RJ 45 RJ 45 + 24 V Aux 18 Grey-brown
- 24 V Aux 19 White-pink
20 Pink-brown
X5 X5
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
Forward running
N/C X10
RJ 45 X10 Output common Forward running X1
20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 1110 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
N/C Forward running X2

Pole state RJ 45
Forward running X3
X6 RJ 45 N/C Forward running X4
Fault Forward running X5
Input common Forward running X6
RJ 45 X6 Forward running X7
Forward running X8
Reverse running X1
X7 RJ 45 (3) Reverse running X2
Reverse running X3
Reverse running X4
RJ 45 X7 N/C
N/C
N/C
Shielding
X8 RJ 45 N/C
+ c 24 V
- c 24 V
RJ 45 + c 24 V
X8
- c 24 V
RJ 45
c 24 V 24 V Aux
Shielding
Shielding
D (A) +
Outputs
D (B) –
Inputs
Com
Com
0V
0V
(1) Not connected on connectors X1 to X8. Only present on RJ45 IN and OUT connectors.
(2) 20-way HE 10 input connector.
(3) 20-way HE 10 output connector.
(4) Correspondence between wire colours and HE 10 connector pin numbers.
Gateways
LUF P1 LUF P7 LUF P9
LUF P1 Gateway Fip I/O - Modbus LUF P7 Gateway Profibus - Modbus LUF P9 Gateway DeviceNet - Modbus
24 V Aux 24 V Aux 24 V Aux

D(A)
D(A)
D(A)
D(B)
D(B)
D(B)
0V
0V
0v
X2 Fip I/O X1 X2 Profibus X1 X2 DeviceNet X1

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 4 5 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 4 5 8 1 2 3 4 5 4 5 8
1/110
Data profile under AS-Interface

Control unit present in the product Standard Advanced Multifunction
Status D0
D1
Ready (available)
Poles closed (running)
1
Commands D0 Forward running
D1 Reverse running
Register addresses accessible under Modbus

Control unit present in the product Standard Advanced Multifunction
Marking Register 0…Register 99 Words…Bits Commercial reference, serial number, software version
Log Register 100…Register 450 Words…Bits Fault log, Operating log, Log of last 5 trips
Status Register 451…Register 464 Words…Bits Alarm signalling (bits), Fault signalling (bits)
Values Register 465…Register 473 Words Irms phase 1, phase 2, phase 3. Motor load, thermal status
Earth leakage current.
Phase imbalance and phase failure
Register 474…Register 599 Words…Bits Reserved
Configuration Register 600…Register 699 Words…Bits Protection and alarm thresholds, fallback mode and reset mode
Commands Register 700…Register 714 Words…Bits Commands
Status and Register 452 Bit 0 Short-circuit fault

values Bit 1 Overcurrent fault
Bit 2 Thermal overload fault
Register 455 Bit 0 Ready (available)
Bit 1 Poles closed
Bit 2 Fault
Bit 3 Alarms
Bit 4 Tripped ("TRIP" position)
Bit 5 Fault acknowledgement allowed
Bit 6 Reserved
Bit 7 Motor running
Bit 8 Motor current % (bit 0)
Bit 14 Reserved
Bit 15 Motor starting
Register 461 Bit 3 Thermal overload alarm
Register 465 Word Thermal status value
Register 466 Word Motor load value (Im/Ir)
Configuration Register 602 Bit 0 Manual reset on thermal overload fault

Bit 1 Remote reset on thermal overload fault
Bit 2 Automatic reset on thermal overload fault
Register 682 Value 0 Fallback mode validation
Value 1 Outputs OA1 and OA3 unchanged
Value 2 Outputs OA1 and OA3 forced to 0
Value 3 Outputs OA1 and OA3 unchanged,
signalling existence of communication failure
Value 4 Outputs OA1 forced to 1 and OA3 unchanged
Value 5 Outputs OA3 forced to 1 and OA1 unchanged
Commands Register 700 Bit 0 LO1 output command

Register 704 Bit 0 OA1 output command
Bit 1 OA3 output command
Bit 2 Reserved
Bit 3 Fault acknowledgement
Bit 4 Reserved
Bit 5 Trip test
Bit 6…15 Reserved
Data accessible
1/111
Basic schemes 1
Non-reversing
Non-reversing starter-controllers LUB
1
1/L1
3/L2
5/L3
Control Unit
U1 2/T1
V1 4/T2
W1 6/T3
M
3a
2-wire control via 2-position switch 3-wire control, pulsed start with Connection of a motor load indicator
maintaining contact module LUFV 2
A1 A2 A1 A2 Analogue output Module

LUFV 2
Start
Stop 4...20 mA 24 V Aux 24 V Aux
13 14
NC
Connection of thermal overload fault signalling modules LUF DA10

Automatic reset Remote reset
– V1 – V1
07
08
07
08
LUF DA10 Automatic or remote reset LUF DA10 Automatic or remote reset
24…230 V 24…230 V
X1
X2
Z1
Z2
X1
X2
Z1
Z2
A2 A1 A2 A1
– QF1 – QF1 – S2
– S1 – S1
Control via Modbus communication module Control via Modbus communication modules LUL C032 and LUL C033
LUL C031
Without pre-wired coil connection Without pre-wired coil connection
LULC 031 Modbus Module LUL C032 or LUL C033 Modbus Module
24 V Aux 24 V 24 V
GND
GND
D(A)
D(A)
D(B)
D(B)
c Aux COM
Com
Com
Com
OA1
OA3
OA1
OA3
LO1
LO1
LI1
LI2
4 5 8
6 4 5 8
6
– S1 – S2
Modbus Modbus
A2 A1 A2 A1
1/112
Basic schemes (continued) 1
Non-reversing
Non-reversing starter controllers LUB (continued)

Control via communication modules ASILUF C5 and ASILUF C51
Without pre-wired coil connection Without pre-wired coil connection
With local control
1
AS-Interface AS-Interface
Com
OA1
OA3
Com
OA1
OA3
AS-Interface line AS-Interface line
Adjustment
A2 A1
Normal
A2 A1
With pre-wired coil connection LU9B N11C Without pre-wired coil connection
With local control
AS-Interface AS-Interface
Com
OA1
OA3
LU9B N11C
Pre wired coil
AS-Interface line AS-Interface line

A2 A1
Adjustment
Normal
Without pre-wired coil connection

With multifunction control unit LUCM
ASILUF C5 or ASILUF C51 AS-Interface Module
AS-Interface
Com
OA1
OA3
A2 A1 AS-Interface line
LUCM Multifonction Control Unit

RJ45
GND
D(A)
D(B)
24 V Aux
4 5 8
6
Bus Modbus
RS 485
1/113
Reversing
Reversing starter-controllers LU2B

2-wire control via 3-position 3-wire control, pulsed start with maintaining contact
1 switch
1/L1
3/L2
5/L3
LU2B Reverser Motor Controller LU2B Reverser Motor Controller
A3
B3
A1
B1
A2
A3
B3
A1
B1
A2
Start forward
running
Control Unit
Stop forward Stop

running and forward Start reverse
forward running
2/T1
4/T2
6/T3
reverse running running running

Stop
reverse running
Stop reverse
running
U1 2/T1
V1 4/T2
W1 6/T3
M
3
Control via communication modules ASILUF C5 3-wire control, pulsed start with maintaining contact and limit switches
and ASILUF C51
With pre-wired coil connection LU9M RC
With multifunction control unit LUCM
ASILUF C5 or ASILUF C51 AS-Interface Module LU2B Reverser Motor Controller
AS-Interface
LU9M RC
A3
B3
A1
B1
A2
Pre wired coil
Limit switch Stop forward Start forward

AS-Interface line forward running running running
Stop forward
running and
LUCM Multifonction Control Unit reverse
running Limit switch Stop reverse Start reverse
GND
D(A)
D(B)
24 V Aux reverse running running running
4 5 8
6
Bus Modbus
RS 485
Control via communication modules ASILUF C5

and ASILUF C51
Without pre-wired coil connection
With running direction pilot lights and limit switches
LU2B Reverser ASILUF C5/C51 AS-Interface Module

Motor
Controller AS-Interface
Com
OA1
OA3
A3
B3
A1
B1
A2
AS-Interface line
53 54 81 84
82
1/114
Reversing
Reversing starter controllers LU2B (continued)

Control via Modbus communication module LUL C031 Control via Modbus communication modules LUL C032 and
Without pre-wired coil connection. With local control

LUL C033
Without pre-wired coil connection. With local control
1
LU2B Reverser LULC 031 Modbus Module LU2B Reverser LULC 032 or LUL C033 Modbus Module
Motor Motor
Controller Controller 24 V 24 V
GND
GND
D(A)
D(B)
D(A)
D(B)
24 V Aux c Aux COM
Com
Com
Com
OA1
OA3
OA1
OA3
LO1
LO1
LI1
LI2
A3
B3
A1
B1
A2
A3
B3
A1
B1
A2
4 5 8
6 4 5 8
6
Modbus Modbus
Start forward
Adjustment
running Start forward
Adjustment
running
NOrmal
Normal
Start reverse
running Start reverse
running
Reversing starter-controllers LUB + LU6M

1/L1
3/L2
5/L3
Control Unit
2/T1
4/T2
6/T3
1/L1
3/L2
5/L3
U1 2/T1
4/T2
W1 6/T3
V1
M
3
3-wire control, pulsed start with maintaining contact 2-wire control via 3-position switch
A1 A2
A1 A2
13 14
21 22
21 22
S1
S2
S3
S1
S2
S3
LU6M Reverser Block LU6M Reverser Block

A3
B3
A1
B1
A2
A3
B3
A1
B1
A2
Stop forward
running and Stop forward Start forward
reverse running running running
S5 S6 S8
Stop reverse Start reverse

running running forward running
S7 S9 Stop
reverse running
1/115
General 1

integral: a high performance concept integral 18, 32 and 63 contactor breakers combine all the functions of a power
for reliability of operation switching assembly up to 63 A in a single compact device, with performance
1 equivalent to that of the best separate specialist devices.
534529
They conform to the main standards currently in force, in particular IEC 60947-1,
IEC 60947-2, IEC 60947-3, IEC 60947-4-1 and IEC 60947-6-2 (welding of power
poles impossible), as well as to international approvals UL, CSA…, and the
European directives.
The integral range ensures reliability of operation up to 63 A. In addition to safety of

operation, integral has numerous other functions: increased protection,
communication, remote control, fault identification, isolation, padlocking.
Functions performed by integral units The equipment in a power switching circuit must perform 4 main functions:
b power switching,
b isolation,
b overload protection,
b short-circuit protection.
These functions are traditionally performed by separate devices which must be
combined to form a motor starter assembly, the most common being:
v fuses + contactor + thermal overload relay,
v circuit breaker + contactor + thermal overload relay.
Power switching
Contactor (for automatic and remote control)
b Operational power for use in category AC-43:
534530
v up to 30 kW at 400/415 V 50 Hz,
v up to 33 kW at 440/415 V 50 Hz.
b Electrical life in number of operating cycles, in category AC-43, at 415 V and at

rated power:
v 2 million for integral 18,
v 1.5 million for integral 32,
v 1.2 million for integral 63.
b Mechanical life in number of operating cycles:

v 5 million for integral 63.
Reversing pairs
534531
Two 3-pole contactors, horizontally mounted:

b mechanically and electrically interlocked for integral 18,
b mechanically interlocked for integral 32 and 63.
Can be fitted with the same protection modules as integral contactor breakers.
References integral 18 : References integral 32 : References integral 63 : Dimensions, schemes :

pages 1/134 to 1/141 pages 1/152 to 1/163 pages 1/176 to 1/187 pages 1/190 to 1/199
1/116

Functions performed by integral units Isolation

(continued)
Isolation conforming to IEC 60947 1
integral 18, 32 and 63 contactor breakers provide isolation and padlocking functions
conforming to standards IEC 60947.
In addition, integral 32 and 63 “LD4” contactor breakers and “LD5” reversing
contactor breakers incorporate specific poles for control testing and padlocking.
Overload protection
Thermal-magnetic protection module (for protection against overload and
overcurrent)
534529
A range of interchangeable modules allows the equipment to be adapted to suit:

b the rated operational current (rating and settings),
b the application:
v motors,
v frequent starting motors,
v distribution circuits.
Short-circuit protection
High breaking capacity current limiting circuit breaker
534530
For short-circuit protection.
High breaking capacity with short-circuit limited by ultra-fast tripping.
Possibility of increasing the breaking capacity of the integral unit by adding a current
limiter (LA9 LB920).
The current limiter is fitted upstream of the integral unit.

Several integral units may be fitted downstream of the current limiter
(Ith = 63 A, Ie = 32 A).
Signalling and attachments These devices provide comprehensive local signalling:

b pole position indicator,
b different signalling for “overload” and “short-circuit”.
534531
They also allow dialogue with the automated control system by means of numerous
add-on blocks:
b auxiliary contact and signalling blocks,
b remote electrical reset device for integral 32 and 63,
b undervoltage and shunt trips for integral 32 and 63,
b control circuit switching,
b etc.
Simple fixing and cabling methods integral 18 and 32 contactor breakers and reversing contactor breakers clip directly
onto 35 mm 7 rails.
integral 63 contractor breakers and reversing contactor breakers fit onto 75 mm 7
rails using a separate mounting plate.
integral units can also be mounted on:
b panels,
b pre-slotted mounting plates type AM1 P,
b 2 x 35 mm 7 rails using sliding clip nuts,
b CMD prefabricated plug-in busbar trunking (providing an economical assembly,
combining safety and simplicity of use),
b AK5 panel busbar systems.

1/117
Terminology 1

Terminology Altitude
The rarefied atmosphere at high altitude reduces the dielectric strength of the air and
1 hence the rated operational voltage of the contactor breaker. It also reduces the
cooling effect of the air and hence the rated operational current of the contactor
breaker (unless the temperature drops at the same time).
No derating is necessary up to 3000 m.
Derating factors to be applied above this altitude for main pole operational voltage
and current (a.c. supply) are as follows:
Altitude 3500 m 4000 m 4500 m 5000 m
Rated operational voltage 0.90 0.80 0.70 0.60
Rated operational current 0.92 0.90 0.88 0.86

The temperature of the air surrounding the device, measured near to the device. The
operating characteristics are given:
b with no restriction for temperatures between - 5 and + 55 °C.
b with restrictions, if necessary, for temperatures between - 50 and + 70 °C.
Rated operational current (Ie)

This is defined taking into account the rated operational voltage, operating rate and
duty, utilisation category and air temperature around the device.
Conventional rated thermal current (Ith) (1)

The current Ith which a closed contactor breaker can sustain for a minimum of 8
hours without its temperature rise exceeding the limits given in the standards.
Short time rating

The current which a closed contactor breaker can sustain for a short time, after a
period of no load, without dangerous overheating.
Rated operational voltage (Ue)

This is the voltage value which, in conjunction with the rated operational current,
determines the use of the contactor breaker or starter, and on which the
corresponding tests and the utilisation category are based. For 3-phase circuits, it is
expressed as the voltage between phases.
Apart from exceptional cases such as rotor short-circuiting, the rated operational
voltage Ue is less than or equal to the rated insulation voltage Ui.
Rated control circuit voltage (Uc)

The rated value of the control circuit voltage, on which the operating characteristics
are based. For a.c. applications, the values are given for a near sinusoidal wave form
(less than 5% total harmonic distortion).
Rated insulation voltage (Ui)

This is the voltage value used to define the insulation characteristics of a device and
referred to in dielectric tests determining leakage paths and creepage distances. As
the specifications are not identical for all standards, the rated values given for each
of them are not necessarily the same.
Rated impulse withstand voltage (Uimp)

This is the highest peak value of an impulse voltage, of prescribed form and polarity,
which the device is able to withstand without failure under specified test conditions,
and to which isolation clearance values are referred.
The rated impulse withstand voltage of a device must be equal to or higher than the
values stated for the transient overvoltages appearing in the circuit in which the
device is fitted.
Note: these definitions are based on extracts from standard IEC 60947.
(1) Conventional free air thermal current, conforming to IEC standards.

1/118
Terminology (continued) 1

Terminology (continued) Rated operational power (expressed in kW)

The rated power of the standard motor which can be switched by the contactor
breaker, at the stated operational voltage. 1
Rated breaking capacity (Iq) (1)
This is the current value which the contactor breaker can break in accordance with
the breaking conditions specified in the IEC standard.
Rated making capacity (1)

This is the current value which the contactor breaker can make in accordance with
the making conditions specified in the IEC standard.
On-load factor (m)

t This is the ratio between the time the current flows (t) and the duration of the cycle (T):
t
m = ---
T
T
Cycle duration: duration of current flow + time at zero current.
Pole impedance
The impedance of one pole is the sum of the impedance of all the circuit components
between the input terminal and the output terminal.
The impedance comprises a resistive component (R) and an inductive component

X = Lω). The total impedance therefore depends on the frequency and is normally
given for 50 Hz. The average value is given for the pole at its rated operational current.
Electrical durability
This is the average number of on-load operating cycles which the main pole contacts
can perform without maintenance. The electrical durability depends on the utilisation
category, the rated operational current and the rated operational voltage.
Mechanical durability
This is the average number of no-load operating cycles (i.e. with zero current flow
through the main poles) which the contactor breaker can perform without mechanical
failure.
Coordination
The coordination of protection devices involves combining, in a selective way, a
short-circuit protection device (fuses or magnetic circuit-breakers) with a contactor
and an overload protection device. Its objective is to break any abnormal current, in
plenty of time, without any danger to personnel, whilst providing adequate protection
of the equipment against an overload or short-circuit current.
Type 1 - IEC 60947-4-1

In a short-circuit condition, the contactor or starter must not present any danger to
personnel or installations and may not be able to resume operation without repair or
the replacement of parts.
Type 2 - IEC 60947-4-1
In a short-circuit condition, the contactor or starter must not present any danger to
personnel or installations and must be able to resume operation. The risk of contact
welding is permissible if they can be easily separated.
Total, ensuring reliability of operation - IEC 60947-6-2
In the event of a short-circuit, no damage or risk of welding is permissible on the
equipment constituting the motor starter. Operation can be resumed without any
maintenance.
Note: these definitions are based on extracts from standard IEC 60947.
(1) For a.c. applications, the breaking and making capacities are expressed by the rms value of
the symmetrical component of the short-circuit current. Taking into account the maximum
asymmetry which may exist in the circuit, the contacts therefore have to withstand a peak
asymmetrical current which may be twice the rms symmetrical component.

1/119

Definition The standard utilisation categories define the current values which the contactor
breaker must be able to make or break. These values depend on:
b the type of load being switched: squirrel cage or slip ring motor, resistors,
1 b the conditions under which making or breaking takes place: motor stalled, starting
or running, reversing, plugging.
Reminder of standards IEC 60947 b IEC 60947-1: general rules,
b IEC 60947-2: circuit breakers,
b IEC 60947-3: isolating devices,
b IEC 60947-4-1: contactors and motor starters,
b IEC 60947-5-1: control and signalling units,
b IEC 60947-6-2: control and protection devices,
Standards for contactor breakers IEC 60947-4-1
Standard IEC 60947-4-1: covers contactors and electromechanical motor starters. It
concerns:
b types of equipment with main contacts designed for connection to circuits whose
rated operational voltage does not exceed 1000 V for a.c. applications or 1500 V for
d.c. applications,
b contactors used in conjunction with overload and/or short-circuit protection
devices,
b motor starters used in conjunction with separate short-circuit protection devices
and/or with separate short-circuit protection devices and built-in overload protection
devices,
b contactors and combination motor starters which incorporate their own short-
circuit protection device.
IEC 60947-6-2
Standard IEC 60947-6: covers multi-function equipment.
It concerns connection, power switching and protection devices (or equipment) with
main contacts designed for connection to circuits whose rated operational voltage is
less than or equal to 1000 V for a.c. applications, or 1500 V for d.c. applications.
Such devices are designed to perform both the power switching function and the
protection of remotely controlled circuits function; they can also perform other
functions, such as isolation.
After short-circuit (Isc) tests, the products must be able to make and break the
currents corresponding to the specified utilisation categories, and to the
number of operating cycles specified in the standard, without failing. This
series of tests is completed by temperature rise tests.
Standard IEC 947-6-2 specifies that, in the event of a short-circuit, no damage
or risk of contact welding is permissible on the devices constituting the motor
starter.
The integral contactor breaker, through its design, ensures reliability of
operation. After eliminating the fault, operation can be resumed instantly
without any maintenance work on the product, other than resetting.
Utilisation categories for a.c. applications
Category AC-1
This category applies to all types of a.c. device (load) with a power factor equal to or
greater than 0.95 (cos ϕ y 0.95). Non inductive or slightly inductive loads.
Application examples: heating, distribution.
Category AC-2
This category applies to starting, plugging and inching of slip ring motors.
b On closing, the contactor breaker makes the starting current, which is about 2.5
times the rated current of the motor.
b On opening, it must break the starting current, at a voltage less than or equal to
the mains supply voltage.
Category AC-3
This category applies to squirrel cage motors with breaking while motor running.
b On closing the contactor breaker makes the starting current, which is about 5 to 7
b On opening, it breaks the rated current drawn by the motor; at this point, the
voltage at the contactor breaker terminals is about 20% of the mains supply voltage.
Breaking is light.
Application examples: all standard squirrel cage motors (lifts, escalators, conveyor belts, bucket
elevators, compressors, pumps, mixers, air conditioning units, etc.).

1/120

Standards for contactor breakers Utilisation categories for a.c. applications (continued)
(continued) Category AC-4
This category covers starting, plug braking and inching of squirrel cage motors.
On closing, the contactor breaker makes a current peak which may be as high as 5
1
to 7 times the rated motor current. On opening, it breaks this same current at a
voltage which is higher, the lower the motor speed. This voltage can be the same as
the mains voltage. Breaking is severe.
Application examples: printing machines, wire drawing machines, hoisting equipment, metallurgy
industry.
Category AC-41
This category applies to all types of a.c. device (load) with a power factor equal to or
greater than 0.95 (cos ϕ y 0.95). Non inductive or slightly inductive loads.
Category AC-42
This category applies to starting, plugging and inching of slip ring motors.
b On closing, the contactor breaker makes the starting current, which is about 2.5
b On opening, it must break the starting current, at a voltage less than or equal to
the mains supply voltage.
Category AC-43
This category applies to squirrel cage motors with breaking while motor running;
inching or occasional reversing of limited duration are permissible if the number of
operating cycles does not exceed 5 per minute, or 10 within a 10 minute period.
b On closing the contactor breaker makes the starting current, which is about 5 to 7
b On opening, it breaks the rated current drawn by the motor; at this point, the
voltage at the contactor breaker terminals is about 20% of the mains supply voltage.
Breaking is light.
Application examples: all standard squirrel cage motors: lifts, escalators, conveyor belts, bucket
elevators, compressors, pumps, mixers, air conditioning units, etc.).
Category AC-44
This category covers applications with plug braking and inching of squirrel cage or
slip ring motors.
On closing, the contactor breaker makes a current peak which may be as high as 5
to 7 times the rated motor current. On opening, it breaks this same current at a
voltage which is higher, the lower the motor speed. This voltage can be the same as
the mains voltage. Breaking is severe.
Application examples: printing machines, wire drawing machines, hoisting equipment, metallurgy
industry.
Tripping classes of protection modules
The creation of thermal tripping classes allows better adaptation of the thermal
protection to suit different motor and application technologies (short or long starting
times). Conforming to IEC 60947-4-1 and IEC 60947-6-2.
Class 10 A 10 20 30
Tripping time at 7.2 Ir (1) 2…10 s 4…10 s 6…20 s 9…30 s
Standards for auxiliary contacts IEC 60947-5
Standard IEC 60947-5-1: covers switching devices and components for control
circuits.
It concerns electromechanical devices for control circuits.
Utilisation categories for a.c. applications
Category AC-14 (2)
This category applies to the switching of electromagnetic loads whose power drawn
with the electromagnet closed is less than 72 VA.
Application example: switching the operating coil of contactors and relays.
Category AC-15 (2)
This category applies to the switching of electromagnetic loads whose power drawn
with the electromagnet closed is greater than 72 VA.
Application example: switching the operating coil of contactors.
Utilisation categories for d.c. applications
Category DC-13 (3)
This category applies to the switching of electromagnetic loads for which the time
taken to reach 95 % of the steady state current (T = 0.95) is equal to 6 times the
power P drawn by the load (with P y 50 W).
Application example: switching the operating coil of contactor breakers.
(1) Ir = protection module setting current.
(2) Replaces category AC-11.
(3) Replaces category DC-11.

1/121
Equipment selection Motor starters - open version 1
for starters 1
When designing an installation, it is essential to take into account precise criteria for
determining the conductor c.s.a. and selecting equipment.
In particular:
1 b permissible currents for the conductors,
b maximum voltage drops,
b short-circuit protection,
b protection against indirect contact.
The latter three criteria must be taken into account when selecting the integral unit.
The principle behind the rules described below is, on the whole, common to all
European publications. However, the calculations and values concerning protection
against indirect contact are based on French standard NF C 15-100, and it is up to
the user to check the regulations in force in the country concerned.
Cable protection against overload

To achieve this, the thermal setting value Irth selected must be greater than the
current drawn I B and less than or equal to the permissible current Iz in the cable to
be protected.
IB < Irth y Iz
Short-circuit protection
Breaking capacity rule
Check that the breaking capacity (BC) of the integral unit is equal to or greater than
the prospective short-circuit current (Isc max) at the point where it is to be installed.
BC u Isc max
Breaking time rule

2 conditions must be fulfilled:
b The short-circuit current at the end of the circuit, Isc min, must be greater than or
equal to the minimum current required for magnetic tripping of the device,
b The short-circuit current at the start of the circuit, Isc max, must be such that:
I2sc max t m y I2oto I2oto = permissible thermal stress limit for the circuit,
tm = operating time of the integral unit or of the short-circuit
protection device.
These 2 checks need only be made when modules with a low rating are used.
Example: for a 6.3/10 A module, a cable c.s.a. u 2.5 mm2 is required to withstand
Isc max = 50 kA.
Protection against indirect contact in TN schemes

TN multiple earthed neutral scheme
PEN B B'
C C'
TNC scheme
b Neutral is connected to earth.

b The earths are connected to neutral.
b Any phase/earth insulation fault causes a short-circuit.
b As contact voltage is dangerous, breaking must occur at the first fault.
b The PE conductor and the neutral conductor may be:
v combined (TNC scheme),
v separate (TNS scheme).
General : References integral 18 : References integral 32 : References integral 63 : Dimensions, schemes :

pages 1/116 to 1/121 pages 1/134 to 1/141 pages 1/152 to 1/163 pages 1/176 to 1/187 pages 1/190 to 1/199
1/122
Equipment selection Motor starters - open version 1
for starters 1
Protection against indirect contact in TN schemes (continued)

b Protection against indirect contact (TN schemes), for dead shorts only, requires
that the following 2 conditions be fulfilled simultaneously:
v The fault current Id must be greater than or equal to the minimum current required
1
for magnetic tripping of the integral unit, i.e. 1.12 µ Irth max.
Uo c = coefficient taking into account the upstream part of the

Id = c.q. ___
Zb fault loop impedance assumed to be equal to 0.8, unless
otherwise indicated.
q = coefficient dependent on the earth connection scheme
and equal to 1 in the TN scheme.
Uo = phase-neutral voltage in volts.
Zb = fault loop impedance in mΩ/m such that:
Zb ≠ R (fault loop resistance).
L Lc L = length of the fault loop equal to twice the length Lc of the
R = ρ __ = 2 ρ ___
S S circuit.
S = Sph, c.s.a of the phase conductors = SPE = c.s.a. of the
protective conductors.
ρ = resistivity of the copper = 0.0225.
µ = ratio between the magnetic tripping current and the
maximum setting current of the instantaneous thermal
tripping device.
v The contact voltage (UL) for a dead short is at most equal to the value determined
by the safety curve for the operating time tm of the integral unit in its magnetic tripping
zone.
This condition is generally fulfilled for power supplies of 230/415 V.
(In fact, for UL = 50 V, a tm y 500 ms would be required and for U L = 25 V,
a tm y 110 ms would be required).
The first condition allows us to calculate the maximum length of the circuit to provide
protection against indirect contact in the TN scheme.
For the TN scheme:
c.q.Uo.Sph
L y __________
2ρ.1.µ Irth
0.8 x Uo x Sph
i.e. L max = _______________________
2 x 0.0225 x 1.2 µ Irth max
Maximum length of 230/415 V circuits with TN scheme

C.s.a. Irth max. µ=3 µ=6 µ = 12 µ = 15
mm 2 A m m m m
1.5 10 180 90 45 36
16 112 56 28 22
2.5 10 298 149 75 60
16 186 93 47 37
25 118 59 32 –
32 92 46 23 –
4 16 296 148 74 60
25 190 95 48 –
32 148 74 37 –
40 118 59 30 –
6 25 284 142 71 –
32 222 111 56 –
40 178 89 45 –
50 142 71 36 –
10 32 370 185 93 –
40 296 148 74 –
50 236 118 59 –
63 188 94 47 –
16 32 590 295 148 –
40 472 236 118 –
50 378 189 95 –
63 300 150 75 –
25 32 922 461 281 –
40 738 369 185 –
50 590 295 148 –
63 468 234 117 –

1/123
Selection according to Motor starters - open version 1
utilisation category and integral 18, 32 and 63 contactor breakers

required electrical and reversing contactor breakers
durability 1
Selection for a temperature θ y 40 °C

Rated operational voltage V 220/240 400/415 440 480/525 600/690
1 Rated operational currents (according to the rated operational voltage)
integral 18 A 18 18 18 18 18
integral 32 A 32 32 32 32 32
integral 63 A 63 63 63 63 63
Rated operational powers (for standard motors)

integral 18 kW 4 9 9 11 15
integral 32 kW 7.5 15 15 18.5 25
integral 63 kW 15 33 33 37 55
Control and protection of motors at Ue y 415 V
b in utilisation categories AC2, AC3 conforming to IEC 60947-4-1,
b in utilisation categories AC2, AC3 conforming to IEC 60947-6-2.
integral 18 integral 32 and 63
Millions of operating cycles Millions of operating cycles

20 20
10 2 1 10 (32 A)
8 8
6 6 (63 A)
5 5
4 4
2 1 1
2 2
1,5 1,5
1 1
0,8 0,8
0,6 0,6
0,4 0,4
0,2 0,2
0,1 0,1
0,08 0,08
0,06 0,06
0,04 0,04
0,02 0,02
0,01 0,01
1 2 3 4 5 67 9 20 40 60 100 200 1 2 3 45 79 20 40 60 80 150 200
1,5 8 10 18 45 80 150 300 1,5 6 8 10 32 63 100160 300
1 Not having previously broken a short-circuit current

2 Having broken a short-circuit current 10 times at 30 Ie (most common values of
short-circuit current during operation)
Current
breaking
limit
AC-3 AC-2
AC-43 AC-42

1/124
Selection according to Motor starters - open version 1
utilisation category and integral 18, 32 and 63 contactor breakers

required electrical
durability 1
a.c. supply, utilisation categories AC-1, AC-3, AC-41, AC-43

Rated operational currents (according to ambient temperature)
integral 18
With cable c.s.a.
4 mm2 A
θ y 40 °C
18
θ y 55 °C
16
θ y 70 °C
14
1
integral 32 6 mm2 A 32 28 25
integral 63 16 mm2 A 63 55 50
a.c. supply, utilisation categories AC-1, AC-41

Maximum operating rates in operating cycles/hour
On-load On-load
factor 85 % factor 25 %
Operation Operation Operation
at Ie max at 0.5 Ie at Ie max
integral 18 Operating cycles/h 600 1200 900
Electrical durability Ue y 415 V

20
(18 A) (32 A)
10
8
6 (63 A)
5
4
2
1,5
1
0,8
0,6
0,4
0,2
0,1
0,08
0,06
0,04
0,02
0,01
3 4 5 6 7 8 10 20 32 40 63 80 100
9 18 60
Current broken in A
Note: for use in category AC-44, please consult your Regional Sales Office.

1/125
Characteristics 1
Contactor breakers
and reversing contactor breakers integral 18
Type integral 18
Number of poles 3
1 Rated operational In AC-43 A 18

current (Ie)
Rated operational V 690
voltage (Ue)
Electrical durability In AC-43 at 415V 2 million operating cycles
Mechanical durability at Uc 10 million operating cycles
Maximum operating rate a 1200 operating cycles/hour
at ambient temperature y 55 °C c with converter 600 operating cycles/hour
Environment
Conforming to standards IEC: 60947-1, 60947-2, 60947-3, 60947-4-1, 60947-6-2
VDE: 0100, 0110, 0113, 0170, 0171, 471, 0660
EN 60 947-1, 60 947-2, 60 947-3, 60 947-4-1, 60 947-6-2
NEN, NBN
Product certifications ASE, ASEFA, ASTA, CSA DEMKO, DNV
NEMKO, RINA, SEMKO, SETI, UL
Protective treatment “TH”
Ambient air temperature a Operation °C - 20…+ 60
around the device Storage °C - 40…+ 80
c Operation °C - 25…+ 50
(1) Storage °C - 25…+ 70
Vibration resistance 5…100 Hz Energised state: 3 gn
Permissible acceleration De-energised state: 3 gn
Shock resistance Impulse duration: 11 ms Energised state: 8 gn
Degree of protection Conforming to IEC 60144 IP 20B
and 60529
Conforming to VDE 0106 Protection against direct finger contact
Flame resistance Conforming to IEC 60295-2-1, NF C 20-455 and decree of 22-12-81
(JO 27 NC of 1st and 2/2/1982)
Conforming to UL 94 - V0 and NF T 51-072
Maximum operating altitude Without derating m 3000
Operating positions In relation to normal From fixing plane From main axis
(without derating) vertical mounting plane (fore-aft tilt) (left-right tilt)

Rated control circuit voltage a 50 Hz V 21…660
(Uc) a 60 Hz V 21…600
c with converter V 24
Voltage limits Operation 0.85…1.1 Uc
at θ y 55 °C Drop-out 0.25…0.7 Uc
Average consumption a Inrush VA 75 (50 Hz). 90 (60 Hz)
at 20 °C and at Uc Sealed VA 8 (50 Hz). 9 (60 Hz)
c (1) Inrush W 100
Sealed W 1.5
Heat dissipation W 2.5 (50 Hz). 2.8 (60 Hz)
Operating time (2) a 50/60 Hz "C" ms 9…25
at 20 °C and at Uc “O” ms 7…25
c with "C" ms 15…20
converter “O” ms 20…25
(1) With converter.
(2) The closing time "C" is measured from the moment the coil supply is switched on to initial
contact of the main poles.
The opening time "O" is measured from the moment the coil supply is switched off to the
moment the main poles separate.
General : Selection : References : Dimensions and schemes :

1/126
Characteristics (continued) 1
Contactor breakers
Type integral 18
Pole characteristics
Conventional thermal
current (Ith)
θ y 40 °C A 18 1
Frequency limits Hz 40…60
of the operational current
Rated impulse Conforming to IEC 60947-4 kV 6 in enclosure
withstand voltage (Uimp)
Rated insulation voltage (Ui) Conforming to IEC 60947-1 V 690
Heat dissipation in the power Operational current A 0.16 0.25 0.4 0.6 1 1.6 2.5 4 6 10 16 18
circuits of the contactor breaker Power per pole, hot state W 2.3 2.3 2.3 2.3 2.3 2.3 2.3 2.4 2.9 3.2 3.8 3.8
and its protection module
Rated making capacity
I rms Conforming to IEC 60947-4 A 15 x Ith (above this value, the breaker trips)
I peak Conforming to IEC 60947-2 kA 105
Rated breaking capacity
Conforming to Operational voltage V 220/240 380/415 440 480/525 600/690
IEC 60947-2 Value of cos ϕ 0.25 0.25 0.25 0.3 0.5
Icu (O-t-CO) (1) kA rms 50 50 40 10 4
Ics (O-t CO-t-CO) (1) kA rms 50 50 50 10 5
Conforming to Icu = Ics kA eff 50 50 25 7.5 2
IEC 60947-6-2 O-t-CO-t-rCO (1)
ensuring reliability
of operation
Total breaking time ms 2.5
Thermal limit With Isc max. A2s 100 x 103
at 415 V, 50 Hz
Cabling Maximum c.s.a. Minimum c.s.a. American Wire Gauge
AWG
Flexible cable mm 2 2x6 2 x 1.5 2 x AWG 16 to
without cable end 2 x AWG 10
Flexible cable mm 2 2 x 4 or 1 x 6 2x1
with cable end
Solid cable mm 2 2x6 2 x 1.5
Characteristics of thermal-magnetic or magnetic only protection modules

Module type LB1 LB03Ppp
Protection Standard motors
Conforming to standards IEC 60947-6-1, IEC 60947-6-2
Number of poles 3
Number of protected poles 3
Rated operational voltage V 690
Maximum continuous A 0.16…18
current
Thermal protection Setting range A 0.1/0.16…12/18
(Irth min./Irth max.)
Protection against With
phase imbalance
Tripping class 10
Magnetic protection Instantaneous trip current Fixed at 15 Irth max
conforming to IEC 60947-1/2/4/6-2 setting range
Tripping tolerance ± 20 %
Characteristics of versions without control test function, with padlocking facility
Conforming to standards IEC 60947
Mechanical durability Operating cycles 10 000
Padlocking 1 padlock, Ø 5 shank
(1) O: breaking short-circuit current,
t: time
CO: closing on short-circuit, breaking short-circuit current (manual)
rCO: closing on short-circuit, breaking short-circuit current (remote control).

1/127
Contactor breakers
Add-on current limiter and auxiliary contacts
Add-on current limiter LA9 LB920

Rated insulation voltage (Ui) Conforming to IEC 60947-1 V 690 (50/60 Hz)
1 Rated operational voltage (Uc)
Conventional thermal current (Ith)
V
A
690 (50/60 Hz)
63
Operational thermal current (Ie) A 32
Operating threshold rms current A 1000 (non adjustable threshold)
Cabling Solid cable mm2 1 x 1.5 to 25 conductor, or 2 x 1.5 to 10 identical conductors
Flexible cable mm2 1 x 1.5 to 25 conductor or 2 x 1.5 to 10 conductors
without cable end
with cable end
Tightening torque Nm 2.2
Instantaneous auxiliary contacts LA1 LB0pp

Rated insulation voltage (Ui) Conforming to V 690
IEC 60947-5-1
Switching capacity With U u 17 V mVA 600
and I u 10 mA
Rated a category Voltage V 48 110/127 220/240 380/415 440
operational AC-15 (1) 1 million operating cycles VA 300 500 600 520 500
power
1.5 million operating cycles VA 160 300 330 300 280
Making capacity a category AC-15 VA 1500 3500 6000 7500 7000
Rated c category Voltage V 24 48 110 220 440
operational DC-13 (2) 1 million operating cycles W 120 90 75 68 61
power
1.5 million operating cycles W 70 50 38 33 28
Making capacity c category DC-13 W 800 700 400 260 220
Cabling mm2 Maximum c.s.a.: 2 x 2.5 Minimum c.s.a.: 2 x 1
Signalling contacts LA1 LB001
IEC 60947-5-1
Operational power a Voltage V – – 110/127 220
for 200 000 operating cycles Resistive load VA – – 600 750
Lamp load (3) VA – – 90 125
Inductive load (4) VA – – 875 500
Motor (5) VA – – 160 200
c Voltage V 24 48 110/125 200
Resistive load W 100 100 50 50
Lamp load (3) W 50 50 6 7.5
Inductive load (4) W 75 75 50 50
Motor (5) W 75 75 6 7.5
Cabling mm2 Maximum c.s.a.: 2 x 2.5 - Minimum c.s.a.: 2 x 1
(1) Electrical durability on an inductive load such as the coil of an electromagnet: making current
(cos ϕ 0.7) = 10 times the power broken (cos ϕ 0.4).
(2) Electrical durability on an inductive load such as the coil of an electromagnet, the time
constant increasing with the load.
(3) Lamp load: peak current = 10 times the rated current.
(4) Inductive load: cos ϕ 0.4 for a.c. operation; time constant 7 ms for d.c. operation.
(5) Motor: peak current = 6 times the rated current.

1/128
Characteristics 1
Contactor breakers
Electronic serial timer modules
Type LA4 DT (On-delay) LA4 DR (Off-delay)

Environment
Conforming to standards
Product certifications
IEC 60255-5
UL, CSA
IEC 60255-5
UL, CSA
1
Protective treatment “TH” “TH”
Degree of protection Conforming to VDE 0106 Protection against direct finger contact Protection against direct finger contact
Ambient air temperature Storage °C - 40…+ 80 - 40…+ 80
For operation at Uc °C - 25…+ 70 - 25…+ 70
Rated insulation voltage (Ui) Conforming to IEC 60947-1 V 250 250
and VDE 0110 (group C)

Built-in protection On input By varistor By varistor
Contactor breaker By varistor By bidirectional peak limiting diode
coil suppression
Rated control circuit voltage (Uc) V a or c 24…250 a 24…250
Voltage limits 0.8…1.1 Uc 0.8…1.1 Uc
Control type By mechanical contact only By mechanical contact only
(connecting cable < 10 m)
Cabling Flexible or solid cable, mm 2 Minimum c.s.a.: 1 x 1 Minimum c.s.a.: 1 x 1
with or without cable end Maximum c.s.a.: 2 x 2.5 Maximum c.s.a.: 2 x 2.5
Time delay characteristics

Timing ranges s 0.1…2 - 1.5…30 - 25…500 0.1…2 - 1.5…30 - 25…500
Repeat accuracy 0…40 °C ± 3 % (10 ms minimum) ± 3 % (10 ms minimum)
Reset time During time delay period ms 100 225
After time delay period ms 50 –
Immunity to microbreaks During time delay period ms 10 20
After time delay period ms 2 –
Minimum control pulse duration ms – 40
Time delay signalling By LED Illuminates during time delay period Illuminates during time delay period
Switching characteristics (solid state type)

Maximum power dissipated W 2 3.5
Leakage current mA < 5 <5
Residual voltage V 3.3 3.3
Overvoltage protection 3 kV; 0.5 joule 3 kV; 0.5 joule
Electrical durability Millions of operating cycles 30 30
Operating diagrams
Electronic on-delay timer LA4 DT Electronic off-delay timer LA4 DR
Uc supply 1 Uc supply 1
(A1 - A2) 0 (A1 - A2) 0
Time delay output1 Operator 1

Contactor breaker0 (A1 - A2) 0
coil t
Time delay output 1
Red LED Contactor breaker coil 0
t
Red LED

1/129
Characteristics 1
Contactor breakers
Interface modules and converters
Type Interface modules Converters

Used for control By a programmable controller, with a.c. control of the electromagnet By a programmable
1 of the integral 18 controller, with d.c. control

of the electromagnet
Control on d.c. supply
around the device
Storage °C - 40…+ 80 - 40…+ 80
Operation °C - 25…+ 55 - 25…+ 50
Rated insulation voltage (Ui) V 250 conforming to IEC 60158-1 and 60947-1 and VDE 0110 (group C) –
Protection against Conforming to VDE 0106 Conforming to VDE 0106
direct finger contact
Cabling Min. mm 2 1x1 1x1
Max. mm 2 2 x 2.5 2 x 2.5
Operating limits – 0.8...1.1 Uc (2)
Protection Of the input and against reverse polarity: by diode Against reverse polarity
(by diode) and against
overvoltage
Module or converter type LA4 DFB LA4 DFE LA4 DLB LA4 DLE LA4 DWB LA4 LB080BD
Technology Relay Relay + override Solid state Solid state
Schemes
E1 +
E2 –
E1 +
E2 –
E1 +
E2 –
E1
+ A1
E3
_ (0V) E2
A2
A1
A2
A1
A2
A2
A1
K K K
Indication of input state By built-in LED –
Input signals Voltage V c 24 c 48 c 24 c 48 c 5…24 c 24

(logic side) (E1-E2) (E1-E2) (E1-E2) (E1-E2) (E1-E2) (E2-E3)
Current mA 25 15 25 15 8.5 for 5 V 10
15 for 24 V
State “0” For U V < 2.4 < 4.8 < 2.4 < 4.8 < 2.4 <7
guaranteed For I mA <2 < 1.3 <2 < 1.3 <2 <5
State “1” For U V 17 < U < 30 33 < U < 60 17 < U < 30 33 < U < 60 5 < U < 30 U > 14
guaranteed
Supply voltage V a 24…250 c 24
(A1-A2) (E1-E2) (2)
Electrical durability 10 10 3 3 20 2
in millions of operating cycles
Immunity to microbreaks ms 4 4 4 4 1 –
Average consumption W 0.6 0.6 0.6 0.6 0.4 Inrush:100
at 20 °C Sealed:1.5
Operating time Pull-in ms 15…30 15…30 15…30 15…30 – 30
at 20 °C Drop-out ms 20…35 20…35 20…35 20…35 – 15
and at Uc (1)
(1) The operating times depend on the type of electromagnet driving the contactor breaker and its control method. The closing time “C” is measured from the moment
the integral coil supply is switched on to initial contact of the main poles. The opening time "O" is measured from the moment the coil supply is switched off to
the moment the main poles separate.
(2) Warning: for supply from rectified a.c., the 2 following conditions must be met: the power supply must exceed 150 VA and the maximum ripple must be y 14 %.

1/130
Characteristics 1
Contactor breakers
Breaking capacity of integral 18 contactor breakers, ensuring reliability of operation,

according to the operational voltage and protection module fitted.
Breaking capacity without current limiter

1
Protection module Operational voltage
Reference Irth 220/240 V 400/415 V 440 V 480/525 V 600/690 V
min max
A A kA kA kA kA kA
LB1 LB03P01 0.1 0.16 u 130 u 130 u 130 u 130 u 130
LB1 LB03P02 0.16 0.25 u 130 u 130 u 130 u 130 u 130
LB1 LB03P03 0.25 0.4 u 130 u 130 u 130 u 130 u 130
LB1 LB03P04 0.4 0.63 u 130 u 130 u 130 u 130 u 130
LB1 LB03P05 0.63 1 u 130 u 130 u 130 u 130 u 130
LB1 LB03P06 1 1.6 u 130 u 130 u 130 u 130 u 130
LB1 LB03P07 1.6 2.5 u 130 u 130 u 130 u 130 u 50
LB1 LB03P08 2.5 4 u 130 u 130 u 130 u 130 u 50
LB1 LB03P10 4 6 u 130 u 130 50 50 5
LB1 LB03P13 6 10 50 50 50 10 5
LB1 LB03P17 10 16 50 50 25 7.5 2
LB1 LB03P21 12 18 50 50 25 7.5 2
Breaking capacity with current limiter LA9 LB920

Reference Irth 220/240 V 400/415 V 440 V 480/525 V 600/690 V
min max
A A kA kA kA kA kA
LB1 LB03P01 0.1 0.16 u 130 u 130 u 130 u 130 u 130
LB1 LB03P02 0.16 0.25 u 130 u 130 u 130 u 130 u 130
LB1 LB03P03 0.25 0.4 u 130 u 130 u 130 u 130 u 130
LB1 LB03P04 0.4 0.63 u 130 u 130 u 130 u 130 u 130
LB1 LB03P05 0.63 1 u 130 u 130 u 130 u 130 u 130
LB1 LB03P06 1 1.6 u 130 u 130 u 130 u 130 u 130
LB1 LB03P07 1.6 2.5 u 130 u 130 u 130 u 130 50
LB1 LB03P08 2.5 4 u 130 u 130 u 130 u 130 50
LB1 LB03P10 4 6 u 130 u 130 65 65 50
LB1 LB03P13 6 10 65 65 65 65 42
LB1 LB03P17 10 16 65 65 65 65 42
LB1 LB03P21 12 18 65 65 65 65 42

1/131
Selection of protection Motor starters - open version 1
module according to the Contactor breakers

tripping characteristics 1
Motor protection
By thermal-magnetic modules (1) LB1 LB03P
1 Time
300 (1) Thermal protection: the average operating times shown in these curves are
min 0,16 0,4 1 2,5 6 12 18
0,25 4 for an ambient air temperature of 20 °C, without prior current flow (cold state).
100 0,1 0,63 1,6 10 16
P01
min P02
The average operating times after prolonged current flow (hot state) can be
P03 calculated by applying the coefficient 0.5.
P04
P05
P06
P07
P08
10 P10
P13
min P17
P21
1 min
10 s
0,15 3,75 9,45 24 60 150 240

2,4 6 15 37,5 90 180 270
0,1 s
0,01 s
0,1 0,2 0,4 0,6 1 2 4 6 10 20 40 60 100 200 400 600 1000

Current in A
Current limitation and thermal limit on short-circuit

3-phase 400/415 V, 50 Hz
Current limitation on short-circuit Maximum thermal limit on short-circuit
Maximum peak current in kA Thermal limit in kA2s in the magnetic operating zone
100
8
5
80 100
,2
=0
60 80 7
40 60 6
,3
=0
20 40
5
,5
=0
10 8
8 7 20
6 6
,7
=0
4 5
ϕ
10 4
s
co
2 4 8
6
1 3
0,8 4
0,6
3
0,4 2
2
0,2
2
1
0,1 1
0,1 0,2 0,4 0,6 1 2 4 6 8 10 20 50
100 200 1 2 4 6 8 10 20 50 100 200
130 130
Prospective rms short-circuit current in kA Prospective rms short-circuit current in kA
1 0.63…1 A 5 4…6 A
2 1…1.6 A 6 6…10 A
3 1.6…2.5 A 7 10…16 A
4 2.5…4 A 8 12…18 A

1/132

Current limitation and thermal limit on short-circuit (continued)

3-phase 480/525 V, 50 Hz
Current limitation on short-circuit Maximum thermal limit on short-circuit 1
Thermal limit in kA2s in the
Maximum peak current in kA magnetic operating zone
100
5
80 100
,2
=0 8
60 80
7
40 60 6
,3
5
=0
20 40
,5
=0
10
8 20
6
8 7
6 5 4
,7
=0
4
ϕ
10
s
co
4 8
2
6
1 3 3
0,8 4
0,6
0,4 2
2 2
0,2 1
0,1 1
0,1 0,2 0,4 0,6 1 2 4 6 8 10 20 50100 200 1 2 4 6 8 10 20 50 100 200
130 130
1 0.63…1 A 5 4…6 A
2 1…1.6 A 6 6…10 A
3 1.6…2.5 A 7 10…16 A
4 2.5…4 A 8 12…18 A

1/133
References 1
Contactor breakers
for control and protection of motors
(for customer assembly)
3-pole contactor breakers without protection module (1)

Without control test function, with padlocking facility
1 Standard power ratings of
3-phase motors in category AC-43
Operational Breaking
current
Basic reference (3)
capacity (Iq) to be completed by adding
Weight
220 V 400 V 480 V 600 V for the control voltage code (2)
240 V 415 V 440 V 525 V 690 V Ue y 415 V
kW kW kW kW kW A kA kg
Black knob
4 9 9 9 15 18 50 LD1 LB030p 0.650
3-pole reversing contactor breakers without protection module (1)
Standard power ratings of Operational Breaking Basic reference (3) Weight
3-phase motors in category AC-43 current capacity (Iq) to be completed by adding
220 V 400 V 480 V 600 V for the control voltage code (2)
240 V 415 V 440 V 525 V 690 V Ue y 415 V
LD1 LB030p kW kW kW kW kW A kA kg
Black knob (VDE 013)
4 9 9 9 15 18 50 LD5 LB130p 1.600
Thermal-magnetic protection modules (compensated and differential for normal starting motors) (5)
Fixed magnetic protection, set at 15 Irth max
Standard power ratings of 3-phase Thermal Reference Weight
motors 50/60 Hz in category AC-43 setting
220 V 400 V 480 V 600 V range
240 V 415 V 440 V 525 V 690 V (Irth min./Irth max.)
kW kW kW kW kW A kg
g g g g g 0.1…0.16 LB1 LB03P01 0.250
g 0.06 g g g 0.16…0.25 LB1 LB03P02 0.250
0.06 0.09 g g g 0.25…0.4 LB1 LB03P03 0.250
g 0.12 g g 0.37 0.4…0.63 LB1 LB03P04 0.250
0.18
0.09 0.25 0.37 0.37 0.55 0.63…1 LB1 LB03P05 0.250
0.12
0.18 0.37 0.55 0.75 1.1 1…1.6 LB1 LB03P06 0.250
0.25 0.55
0.37 0.75 1.1 1.1 1.5 1.6…2.5 LB1 LB03P07 0.250
0.55 1.1 1.5 2.2 3 2.5…4 LB1 LB03P08 0.250
0.75 1.5
1.1 2.2 2.2 3.7 4 4…6 LB1 LB03P10 0.250
1.5 3 4 5.5 7.5 6…10 LB1 LB03P13 0.250
2.2 4
3 5.5 7.5 10 11 10…16 LB1 LB03P17 0.250
LD5 LB130p
7.5
4 9 9 11 15 12…18 LB1 LB03P21 0.250
g : There are no standard power ratings for these motors.
(1) For the unit to function, it must be fitted with a protection module, to be ordered separately, see above.
Volts 24 36 42 48 110 120 220 230 240 380 415 440 480 500 600 660
400
50 Hz LDp LB B – D E F – M P/PU7 U Q N R – S – Y
60 Hz LDp LB BC CC – D K FC LC MC MC/PU7 – – Q N – S Q
c (4) LDp LB BD – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –
(3) UL 508 “type E” approved version (SPCD) at 347/600 V, as standard.
(4) For use on c, the unit is supplied with 1 or 2 converters, including coil suppression device (2 converters for reversing contactor
LB1 LB03P06 breakers).
(5) Protection modules UL and CSA approved.
General : Selection : Characteristics : Dimensions and schemes :

1/134
References 1
Contactor breakers
(pre-assembled) Control circuit voltage: 220 V, 50 Hz
3-pole contactor breakers with thermal-magnetic protection module

Standard power ratings of 3-phase Thermal Breaking Reference Weight
220 V 400 V 440 V 480 V 600 V
setting range
(Irth min
capacity (Iq)
for
1
240 V 415 V 525 V 690 V to Irth max) Ue y 415 V
0.09 0.25 0.37 0.37 0.55 0.63…1 u 130 LD3 LB130M05 0.900
0.12
0.18 0.37 0.55 0.75 1.1 1…1.6 u 130 LD3 LB130M06 0.900
0.25 0.55
0.37 0.75 1.1 1.1 1.5 1.6…2.5 u 130 LD3 LB130M07 0.900
0.55 1.1 1.5 2.2 3 2.5…4 u 130 LD3 LB130M08 0.900

0.75 1.5
LD3 LB130Mpp
1.1 2.2 2.2 3.7 4 4…6 u 130 LD3 LB130M10 0.900
1.5 3 4 5.5 7.5 6…10 50 LD3 LB130M13 0.900

2.2 4
3 5.5 7.5 10 11 10…16 50 LD3 LB1130M17 0.900

7.5

1/135
References 1
Contactor breakers
Add-on blocks
AUTO
+
TRIP.
AUTO
+
TRIP.
LD5 LB + LB1-LB
LA1 LB001
LA1 LB021
LA1 LB001
LA1 LB015
LA1 LB0311
LA1 LB0211
AUTO
+
TRIP.
LA1 LB034 O
LD1 LB + LB1 LB
LD3 LB
LA1 LB031
LA1 LB0341
1/136
References 1
Contactor breakers
Add-on blocks
Current limiter (IP 20)

For
use on
Function Reference Weight
kg
1
LD1 or Increases the breaking capacity of the integral unit LA9 LB920 0.320
LD5
For
mounting,
see page
1/192
Instantaneous auxiliary contact blocks (IP 20)
For Type and Composition Reference Weight
use on number kg
of blocks
LA9 LB920 per unit
LD1 or 1 block of 5 contacts comprising: LA1 LB015 0.100

LD5 b 3 signalling contacts 2 1
Mounted “contactor state” 1 1
on RH side b 2 signalling contacts “tripped”
LD1 1 block of 2 signalling contacts 2 – LA1 LB031 0.100
Mounted “control knob in any position
on LH side other than "Auto"
1 block of 2 signalling contacts 1 1 LA1 LB0311 0.100
“control knob in any position
other than "Auto"
1 block of 4 contacts comprising: LA1 LB034 0.100
b 2 signalling contacts “control 2 –
knob in any position other
than Auto" 1 1
b 2 signalling contacts
“tripped on short-circuit”
b 2 signalling contacts 1 1
other than Auto" 1 1
“tripped on short-circuit”
LD5 1 block of 5 contacts comprising: LA1 LB021 0.100
Mounted b 3 signalling contacts 2 1
on LH side “contactor state” 2 –
other than Auto”
b 3 signalling contacts 2 1
“contactor state” 1 1
other than Auto”
Signalling contact block (IP 10)
use on number kg
of blocks
per unit
LD1 or 1 block comprising – 1 LA1 LB001 0.035

LD5 1 signalling contact
Mounted “contactor state”
on RH side
or LH side
Test device
Application Reference Weight
kg
LA9 LB398 For control circuits 1 LA9 LB398 0.010

1/137
References 1
Contactor breakers
Add-on blocks
AUTO
+
TRIP.
AUTO
+
TRIP.
AUTO
+
TRIP.
1/138
References 1
Contactor breakers
Accessories and spare parts
Interface modules (1)

Mounting Type Control Operational Reference Weight
voltage c voltage
50/60 Hz
1
V V kg
On top Solid state 5…24 24…250 LA4 DWB 0.045
of the Relay 24 24…250 LA4 DFB 0.050
integral output 48 24…250 LA4 DFE 0.050
unit
Relay 24 24…250 LA4 DLB 0.045
output 48 24…250 LA4 DLE 0.045
(with
override)
Electronic serial timer modules
Mounting Type Time Operational Reference Weight
delay voltage
50/60 Hz (2)
s V kg
On top On-delay 0.1…2 24…250 LA4 DT0U 0.040
of the 15…30 24…250 LA4 DT2U 0.040
integral
25…500 24…250 LA4 DT4U 0.040
unit
Off-delay 0.1…2 24…250 LA4 DR0U 0.040
15…30 24…250 LA4 DR2U 0.050
25…500 24…250 LA4 DR4U 0.050
Suppressor modules
Mounting Type Operational Reference Weight
voltage
50/60 Hz
V kg
On top RC circuit (3) 24…48 LA4 DA2E 0.018
of the (resistor-capacitor) 50…127 LA4 DA2G 0.018
integral Screw connections
110…250 LA4 DA2U 0.018
unit to coil of integral unit
Varistor (peak limiting) 24…48 LA4 DE2E 0.018
Screw connections 50…127 LA4 DE2G 0.018
to coil of integral unit
110…250 LA4 DE2U 0.018
Clip-on RC circuit (3) y 250 LA9 D09982 0.010
(resistor-capacitor)
Auto-Man-Stop control modules
Mounting Type Operational Reference Weight
voltage
50/60 Hz
V kg
On top Automatic-Manual-Stop 24…100 LA4 DMK 0.040
of the 100…250 LA4 DMU 0.040
integral
unit
Replacement voltage converters (1)
For c control circuit operation
Mounting For Opera- Consumption Description Reference (5) Weight
use on tional Inrush Sealed
integral voltage
c (4)
V W W kg
On top LDp 24 (6) 100 1,5 Coil LX LB024 0.065
of the LBpppBD Converter LA1 LB080BD 0.045
integral
unit
(1) For reversing contactor breakers, order 2 interface modules or 2 voltage converters.
(2) For use on 24 V, the integral unit must be fitted with a 21 V coil (see page 1/141).
(3) An RC circuit provides effective protection for circuits highly sensitive to high frequency
interference. Voltage limited to 3 Uc max. and oscillating frequency limited to 400 Hz max.
Slight increase in drop-out time (1.2 to 2 times the normal time).
(4) When used on rectified single-phase or 3-phase supply, the peak to peak ripple voltage must
be equal to or less than 0.14 of the average voltage.
Operating limits 0.8 to 1.1 Uc for an ambient temperature y 40 °C.
(5) It is essential that the voltage converter be associated with the specific coil indicated.
(6) The 24 V converter can be operated by “low level input”. In this case, the control circuit voltage
must be the same as the supply voltage (24 V).

1/139
References 1
Contactor breakers and

reversing contactor breakers integral 18
Accessories
Protection accessories
Description For Sold in Unit Weight
1 Sealing cover
use on
Protection module
lots of
1
reference
LA1 LB090
kg
0.010
Protective end cover Protection of 5 GV1 G10 0.005
unused busbars
Mounting accessory
Description For Mounting Reference Weight
use on on kg
LA1 LB090 Mounting plate LD1, LD3, LD5 2 x 32 mm LA9 LC010 0.150
4 rails
Cabling accessories
Description For use on Pitch Reference Weight
mm kg
Terminal blocks, Cable entry – GV1 G09 0.040
63 A, 3-pole from above
for incoming supply to Cable entry – LA9 LB960 0.110
one or more busbar sets from below
GV1 G09 Busbar sets, Supply to 2 or more 57 LA9 LB930 0.037

63 A, 3-pole integral units
72 GV2 G272 0.050
Supply to 4 or more 72 GV2 G472 0.085

integral units
Supply to 72 LA9 LB940 0.050
1 current limiter
on LH side
1 current limiter
on RH side
Flush mounting accessories
Recessed terminals Auxiliary contact 2 LA9 LB910 0.001
associated with
flush mounted
integral 18
Blanking plate integral 18 10 GA1 C6 0.001
LA9 LB960 Locking accessories

Control knob Fixing on front face, 1 LA9 LB390 0.160
locking kit 3 padlocks, Ø 6 mm
shank max.
(padlocks to be
ordered separately)
Door interlock mechanisms (IP 54)
Type For Colour Reference Weight
of knob kg
Adjustable LD1, LD3, LD5 Red LA9 LB330 0.400
LA9 LB930 from 0 to 185 mm
with extension Black LA9 LB331 0.400
(control knob mounted
on plate or door)
LA9 LB390

1/140
References 1

Coils (replacement parts)
a.c. operation
Rated control Average Inductance Voltage Reference Weight
circuit voltages
Uc Uc
resistance
at 20 °C
of closed
circuit
code (1)
1
50 Hz 60 Hz ± 10 %
V V Ω H kg
– 21 3.27 0.14 JV LX1 LB019 0.065
21 24 4.07 0.18 BC LX1 LB021 0.065
24 – 5.17 0.23 B LX1 LB024 0.065
– 36 8.96 0.40 CC LX1 LB032 0.065
LX1 LB ppp 42 48 16.41 0.72 D LX1 LB042 0.065
48 – 21.13 0.95 E LX1 LB048 0.065
– 110 87.04 4 K LX1 LB100 0.065
– 115/120 102.22 4.4 FC LX1 LB105 0.065
110 – 109 5 F LX1 LB110 0.065
127 – 137 6.6 G LX1 LB127 0.065
– 220 353 16 LC LX1 LB200 0.065
– 230/240 379 17.5 MC LX1 LB210 0.065
220 – 448 20 M LX1 LB220 0.065
230 – 463 22 P LX1 LB230 0.065
230 240 463 22 PU7 LX1 LB234 0.065
240 – 493 24 U LX1 LB240 0.065
380/400 440 1389 60 Q LX1 LB380 0.065
415 460/480 1491 70 N LX1 LB415 0.065
440 – 1779 80 R LX1 LB440 0.065
500 575/600 3312 102 S LX1 LB500 0.065
660 – 3554 180 Y LX1 LB660 0.065
Consumption at 50 Hz: inrush (cos ϕ: 0.55) 75 VA; sealed (cos ϕ: 0.28) 8 VA.
Consumption at 60 Hz: inrush (cos ϕ: 0.55) 90 VA; sealed (cos ϕ: 0.30) 9 VA.
d.c. operation
The integral 18 can operate on a d.c. supply when fitted with a standard coil and a corresponding
voltage converter: see page 1/139.
(1) Coil voltage reference code, used to complete the basic reference when ordering an integral
unit.

1/141
Operation 1
Contactor breakers integral 18

Auxiliary contact states according to the positions
of the control knob
LD1 Auxiliary contact actuators
1
1/L1
3/L2
5/L3
Auto +0 Auto +0 Auto +0 Auto +0

A1
A2
Auxiliary contacts
LA1 LB015 LA1 LB001 LA1 LB031 LA1 LB0311 LA1 LB034 LA1 LB0341
2/T1
4/T2
6/T3
15
17
15
17
15
17
05
07
17
15
05
07
41
13
23
31
95
97
Contact open
16
18
16
18
16
18
06
08
18
16
06
08
42
14
24
32
96
98
Contact closed
Off
13 23 31 95 97 41 15 17 15 17 15 17 05 07 17 15 05 07
14 24 32 96 98 42 16 18 16 18 16 18 06 08 18 16 06 08
On, contactor open

AUTO
13 23 31 95 97 41 15 17 15 17 15 17 05 07 17 15 05 07
14 24 32 96 98 42 16 18 16 18 16 18 06 08 18 16 06 08
On, contactor closed

AUTO
13 23 31 95 97 41 15 17 15 17 15 17 05 07 17 15 05 07
14 24 32 96 98 42 16 18 16 18 16 18 06 08 18 16 06 08
Tripped on overload
TRIP. + 15 17 05 07 17 15 05 07
13 23 31 95 97 41 15 17 15 17
14 24 32 96 98 42 16 18 16 18 16 18 06 08 18 16 06 08
Tripped on short-circuit
TRIP. + 15 17 17 15
13 23 31 95 97 41 15 17 15 17 05 07 05 07
14 24 32 96 98 42 16 18 16 18 16 18 06 08 18 16 06 08
Off after short-circuit
TRIP. + 13 23 31 95 97 41 15 17 15 17 15 17 05 07 17 15 05 07
14 24 32 96 98 42 16 18 16 18 16 18 06 08 18 16 06 08
Manual reset
TRIP. + 95 97 15 17 05 07 17 15 05 07
13 23 31 41 15 17 15 17
RESET 14 24 32 96 98 42 16 18 16 18 16 18 06 08 18 16 06 08
General : Characteristics : References : Dimensions :

pages 1/116 to 1/121 pages 1/126 to 1/133 pages 1/134 to 1/141 pages 1/190 and 1/191
1/142
Operation 1
Reversing contactor breakers integral 18

Auxiliary contact states according to the positions
of the control knob

1/L1
3/L2
5/L3
Auto +0 Auto +0
1
A1
A1
A2
A2
II I
Auxiliary contacts
LA1 LB015 LA1 LB001 LA1 LB021 LA1 LB0211 LA1 LB001 On the
integral
6/T3
2/T1
4/T2
13
23
31
41
95
97
41
13
23
31
15
17
13
23
31
17
15
05
07
Contact open
14
24
32
42
96
98
42
14
24
32
16
18
14
24
32
18
16
06
08
Contact closed
Off
13 23 31 95 97 41 13 23 31 15 17 13 23 31 17 15 41 05 07
14 24 32 96 98 42 14 24 32 16 18 14 24 32 18 16 42 06 08
On, contactors open

AUTO
13 23 31 95 97 41 13 23 31 15 17 13 23 31 17 15 41 05 07
14 24 32 96 98 42 14 24 32 16 18 14 24 32 18 16 42 06 08
On, closed
AUTO
13 23 31 95 97 41 13 23 31 15 17 13 23 31 17 15 41 05 07
14 24 32 96 98 42 14 24 32 16 18 14 24 32 18 16 42 06 08
On, closed
AUTO 95 97 05 07
13 23 31 41 13 23 31 15 17 13 23 31 17 15 41
14 24 32 96 98 42 14 24 32 16 18 14 24 32 18 16 42 06 08
Tripped on overload
D clench
TRIP. + 13 23 31 95 97 41 13 23 31 15 17 13 23 31 17 15 41 05 07
14 24 32 96 98 42 14 24 32 16 18 14 24 32 18 16 42 06 08
TRIP. + 13 23 31 95 97 41 13 23 31 15 17 13 23 31 17 15 41 05 07
14 24 32 96 98 42 14 24 32 16 18 14 24 32 18 16 42 06 08

D clench
13 23 31 95 97 41 13 23 31 15 17 13 23 31 17 15 41 05 07
TRIP. +
14 24 32 96 98 42 14 24 32 16 18 14 24 32 18 16 42 06 08
Manual reset
D clench
TRIP. + 13 23 31 95 97 41 13 23 31 15 17 13 23 31 17 15 41 05 07
R arm. 14 24 32 96 98 42 14 24 32 16 18 14 24 32 18 16 42 06 08
RESET

1/143
Characteristics 1
Contactor breakers
Type integral 32
Number of poles 3
1 Rated operational current (Ie) In AC-43

A
V
32
690
Electrical durability In AC-43 at 415V 1.5 million operating cycles
Environment
VDE: 0100, 0110, 0113, 0170, 0171, 471, 0660
BS: 5424, 4752, 4941
NEN, NBN
Product certifications ASE, ASEFA, ASTA, BV, CSA DEMKO, DNV, GL
NEMKO, NNK, ÖVE, PTB, RINA, SCC, SEMKO, SETI, UL, USSR, LROS
(1) Storage °C - 25…+ 70
Degree of protection Conforming to IEC 60144 IP 20B
and 60529
(JO 27 NC of 1st and 2/2/1982)
Operating positions In relation to normal From fixing plane From main axis
(without derating) vertical mounting plane (fore-aft tilt) (left-right tilt)

(Uc) a 60 Hz V 21…600
c with converter V 24, 48, 110
Average consumption a Inrush VA 160 (50 Hz), 185 (60 Hz)
at 20 °C and at Uc Sealed VA 12 (50 Hz or 60 Hz)
c (1) Inrush W 250 for 50 ms
Sealed W 4
Heat dissipation W 4 (50 Hz), 5 (60 Hz)
(1) With converter.


1/144
Characteristics 1
Contactor breakers
Type integral 32
Frequency limits of the operational
θ y 40 °C A
Hz
32
40…60
1
current
Rated impulse Conforming to IEC 60947-4 kV 8
Heat dissipation in the power Operational current A 1.6 2.5 4 6.3 10 16 25 32
circuits of the contactor breaker Power per pole, hot state W 1.6 1.8 1.8 2 2 3.4 4.8 6
I rms Conforming to IEC 60947-4 A 12 x Ith (above this value, the breaker trips)
Conforming to Operational voltage V 220/240 380/415 440 480/525 600/690
IEC 60947-2 Value of cos ϕ 0.25 0.25 0.25 0.3 0.8
Icu (O-t-CO) (1) kA rms 50 50 50 (2) 20 5 (cos ϕ 0.7)
Ics (O-t CO-t-CO) (1) kA rms 50 50 35 (2) 20 5
Conforming to Icu = Ics kA rms 50 50 50 15 4
IEC 60947-6-2 ensuring O-t-CO-t-rCO (1)
reliability of operation
Total breaking time ms 4
at 415 V, 50 Hz
Cabling Maximum c.s.a. Minimum c.s.a.
without cable end
with cable end
Solid cable mm 2 1 x 10 or 2 x 6 1x1
Tightening torque N.m 2

Module type LB1 LC03M LB6 LC03M LB1 LCppL
Protection Standard motors Frequent starting Distribution circuits
Conforming to standards IEC 60947-4 type 2 (Iq = 50 kA)
NF C 63-650 NF C 63-650 NF C 63-120
Number of poles 3 3 3 4 4
Number of protected poles 3 3 3 3 4
Rated operational voltage V 690 690 690
Max. continuous current A 0.4…32 0.4…32 10…32
Thermal protection Setting range (Irth min./Irth max.) A 0.25/0.40…23/32 – 6.3/10…23/32
Temperature compensation °C - 20…+ 60 20…+ 60 20…+ 60
Protection against With Without Without
phase imbalance
Tripping class 10 – –
Magnetic protection Instantaneous 6…12 Irth max (Usual 6…12 Irth max 3…6 Irth max
conforming to IEC 60947-1/2/4/6-2 trip current setting range setting 9…10 Irth max)
Tripping tolerance ± 20 % ± 20 % ± 20 %

Padlocking 1, 2 or 3 padlocks, shank Ø 8 mm max and Ø 5 mm min.
Characteristics of versions with control test function and padlocking facility

Conforming to standards IEC 60947, NF C 63-130, VDE 0660, VDE 0113
Padlocking 1, 2 or 3 padlocks, shank Ø 8 mm max and Ø 5 mm min. When flush mounting,
interlocking of the enclosure or cabinet door is possible.
(1) O: breaking short-circuit current,

t: time
CO: closing on short-circuit, breaking short-circuit current (manual)
rCO: closing on short-circuit, breaking short-circuit current (remote control)
(2) Conforming to BS 4752 36 kA cycle P2, 50 kA cycle P1.

1/145
Contactor breakers
Add-on current limiter LA9 LB920

1 Rated insulation voltage (Ui) Conforming to IEC 60947-1 V 690 (50/60 Hz)
Rated operational voltage (Uc) V 690 (50/60 Hz)
Operational thermal current (Ie) A 32
Operating threshold rms current A 1000 (non adjustable threshold)
Cabling Solid cable mm2 1 x 1.5 to 25 conductor, or 2 x 1.5 to 10 identical conductors
without cable end
with cable end
Tightening torque Nm 2.2
Instantaneous auxiliary contacts

IEC 60947-5-1
Switching capacity With U u 17 V mVA 600
and I u 10 mA
power
power
Cabling mm2 Maximum c.s.a.: 2 x 2.5 . Minimum c.s.a.: 2 x 1
Signalling contacts
IEC 60947-5-1
Lamp load (3) VA – – 90 125
Motor (5) VA – – 160 200
c Voltage V 24 48 110/125 200
Lamp load (3) W 50 50 6 7.5
Motor (5) W 75 75 6 7.5
Cabling mm2 Maximum c.s.a.: 2 x 2.5 - Minimum c.s.a.: 2 x 1
Isolating auxiliary contacts

Rated insulation voltage (Ui) a.c. supply V 690
Conforming to IEC 60947 and d.c. supply V 125
NF C 63-130
Cabling mm2 Maximum c.s.a.: 2 x 1.5 or 1 x 2.5

1/146
Characteristics 1
Contactor breakers

Used for control
of the integral 32
By a programmable controller, with a.c. control of the
electromagnet
By a programmable controller, with d.c. control of the
electromagnet
1
Control on d.c. supply
around the device
Storage °C - 25…+ 70 - 25…+ 70
Operation °C - 25…+ 50 - 25…+ 50
Isolation kV rms voltage between inputs and outputs: 2.5 Common negative terminal
Max. mm 2 2 x 2.5 2 x 2.5
Operating limits 0.85...10.1 Uc 0.8...1.1 Uc (2)
Protection Against reverse polarity (by diode) Against reverse polarity (by diode)
and against overvoltage and against overvoltage
Module or converter type LA1 LC LA1 LC

580BD 580ED 180BD 080BD 080ED 080FD
Schemes
LA1 LC580pD LA1 LC180BD LA1 LC080BD LA1 LC080FD
LA1 LC080ED
A1 A1
+ E1 + E1 + E1
A1 + E1
A1
– E2 – E2 (0V) E3 (0V)
A2 A2
– A2 – A2
E2 E2
Indication of input state By LED –

Input signals Voltage V c 24 c 48 c 5…24 c 24 (1) c 48 (1) –
(logic side) (E1-E2) (E1-E2) (E1-E2) (E3-E2) (E3-E2)
Current mA 30 20 15…24 V 20 10 –
8.5…5 V
State “0” For U V < 2.4 < 4.8 < 2.5 <7 <14 –
guaranteed For I mA <2 <2 <2 <5 < 2.5 –
State “1” For U V > 20.4 > 40.8 >4 > 14 > 28 –
guaranteed
Supply voltage V a 24…240 a 24…240 a 24…240 c 24 (2) c 48 (2) c 110
(A1-A2) (A1-A2) (A1-A2) (E1-E2) (E1-E2) (E1-E2)
Electrical durability 5 1
Average Inrush 50 Hz VA 160 –
consumption 60 Hz VA 185 –
at 20 °C
c W – 250
Sealed 50/60 Hz VA 12 –
c W – 4
Operating time Pull-in ms 15…30 15…30 10…35 30
at 20 °C Drop-out ms 22…35 20…35 8…30 15
and at Uc
(1) For direct control by external contact: connect E1-E3.

1/147
Characteristics 1
Contactor breakers
Tripping and reset devices, coil suppressor module
Environment
Conforming to standards IEC 60337-1
1 Protective treatment
Ambient air temperature Storage °C
“TH”
- 40…+ 80
around the device Operation °C - 25…+ 55
Permissible for °C - 25…+ 70
operation at Uc
Protection against Conforming to VDE 0106
Tripping devices
Type LA1 LC070p, LA1 LC072p LA1 LC071p
Pull-in voltage Uc 0.8…1.1 0.7…1.1
Drop-out voltage Uc 0.35…0.7 –
Average consumption Inrush VA 8 8
Sealed VA 4 4
Minimum pulse time ms – 10
Reset devices
Type LA1 LC052p
Consumption VA 9
Duration of a reset cycle s 9
Minimum impulse duration s 0.5
Mechanical durability Operating cycles u 10 000
Suppressor module LA9 D09982

Type of protection RC (resistor-capacitor)
Connection scheme
Operational voltage V y 250

1/148
Characteristics 1
Contactor breakers
Breaking capacity of integral 32 contactor breakers, ensuring reliability of operation,

according to the operational voltage and protection module fitted.
Breaking capacity without current limiter

1
Reference Irth 220/240 V 400/415 V 440 V 500 V 600/690 V
min max
A A kA kA kA kA kA
LBp LC03M03 0.25 0.4 u 130 u 130 u 130 u 130 u 130
LBp LC03M04 0.4 0.63 u 130 u 130 u 130 u 130 u 130
LBp LC03M05 0.63 1 u 130 u 130 u 130 u 130 u 130
LBp LC03M06 1 1.6 u 130 u 130 u 130 u 130 u 130
LBp LC03M07 1.6 2.5 u 130 u 130 u 130 u 130 u 130
LBp LC03M08 2.5 4 u 130 u 130 u 130 u 130 u 130
LBp LC03M10 4 6.3 u 130 u 130 u 130 u 130 15
LBp LC03M13 6.3 10 u 130 u 130 u 130 u 130 10
LBp LC03M17 10 16 u 130 u 130 50 15 4
LBp LC03M22 16 25 50 50 50 15 4
LBp LC03M53 23 32 50 50 50 50 4
Breaking capacity with current limiter LA9 LB920

min max
A A kA kA kA kA kA
LBp LC03M03 0.25 0.4 u 130 u 130 u 130 u 130 u 130
LBp LC03M04 0.4 0.63 u 130 u 130 u 130 u 130 u 130
LBp LC03M05 0.63 1 u 130 u 130 u 130 u 130 u 130
LBp LC03M06 1 1.6 u 130 u 130 u 130 u 130 u 130
LBp LC03M07 1.6 2.5 u 130 u 130 u 130 u 130 u 130
LBp LC03M08 2.5 4 u 130 u 130 u 130 u 130 u 130
LBp LC03M10 4 6.3 u 130 u 130 u 130 u 130 42
LBp LC03M13 6.3 10 u 130 u 130 u 130 u 130 42
LBp LC03M17 10 16 u 130 u 130 65 65 42
LBp LC03M22 16 25 65 65 65 65 42/20 (1)
LBp LC03M53 23 32 65 65 65 65 42/20 (1)
(1) 42 kA for 600 V - 20 kA for 690 V

1/149

Motor protection
1 Standard motors Frequent starting motors
By thermal-magnetic modules (1) LB1 LC03M By magnetic modules LB6 LC03M
Time Time
300 300
min min
0,25 0,40 0,63 1 1,6 2,5 4 6,3 10 16 23 25 32 irth
100 100
min min
M03
M04
M05
10 M06 10
min min
M07
M08
M10
1 min M13 1 min
M17
M22
10 s M53 10 s
M06 M08 M13 M22
M07 M10 M17 M53

1s 1s
2,4 4,8 7,6 12 19 30 48 76 120 190 380 9,5 15 24 38 60 95 150190
3,8 6 9,5 15 24 38 60 95 150 300 19 30 48 76 120 190 300380
0,1 s 0,1 s
0,01 s 0,01 s
0,1 0,2 0,4 0,6 1 2 4 6 10 20 40 60 100 200 400 600 0,8 1 2 4 6 10 20 40 60 100 200 400 600 1000
Current in A Current in A
Distribution circuit protection

By thermal-magnetic modules (1) LB1 LCppL
Time
300
min
6,3 10 16 23 32 irth
100 25
min
10
min L13
L17
L22
L53
1 min
10 s
1s
30 48 75 95
60 95 150190
0,1 s
,01 s
0,8 1 2 4 6 10 20 40 60 100 200 400 600 1000

Current in A
(1) Thermal protection: the average operating times shown in the above curves
are for an ambient air temperature of 20 °C, without prior current flow (cold
state). The average operating times after prolonged current flow (hot state)
can be calculated by applying the coefficient 0.5.

1/150


3-phase 400/415 V, 50 Hz 1
Maximum peak current in kA Thermal limit I2t in kA 2s in the short-circuit protection zone
100
8(1)
100 7
5
80
,2 6
=0
60 80
40 60 5
,3
=0
20 40
8 (1) 4
,5
=0
10 7
8 6 20
6 5
3
,7
=0
4 4
ϕ
s
10
co
3
2 8
2
6 2
1
0,8 4
0,6
1
0,4
2
0,2
0,1 1
0,1 0,2 0,4 0,6 1 2 4 6 8 10 20 50 100 200 1 2 4 6 8 10 15 20 50 100 200
1 1…1.6 A 4 4…6.3 A 7 16…25 A For 1 to 1.6 A ratings, the thermal limit is less than 1x103A2s.
2 1.6…2.5 A 5 6.3…10 A 8 23…32 A
3 2.5…4 A 6 10…16 A
(1) Associated thermal protection rating. The breaking capacity is unlimited on contactor breakers fitted with modules:
- up to a rating of 10…16 A at 220-380-415 V,
- up to a rating of 6.3…10 A at 440-500 V.
3-phase 480/525 V, 50 Hz
Maximum peak current in kA Thermal limit I2t in kA 2s in the short-circuit protection zone
8 (1)
100
80 100 7
60 80 6
40 60 5
,3
=0
20 40
4
,5
=0
8 (1)
10 7
8 6 20
6 5
,7
=0
4 4 3
sϕ
3
co
10
2 3 8
2 6
1
0,8 4 2
0,6 1
0,4
2
0,2
0,1 1
0,1 0,2 0,4 0,6 1 2 4 6 8 10 15 20 50 100 200 1 2 4 6 8 10 20 50 100 200
1 1…1.6 A 4 4…6.3 A 7 16…25 A For 1 to 1.6 A ratings, the thermal limit is less than 1x103A2s.
2 1.6…2.5 A 5 6.3…10 A 8 23…32 A
3 2.5…4 A 6 10…16 A
(1) Associated thermal protection rating. The breaking capacity is unlimited on contactor breakers fitted with modules:
- up to a rating of 10…16 A at 220-380-415 V,
- up to a rating of 6.3…10 A at 440-500 V.

1/151
References 1


1 Standard power ratings of 3-phase
current
Basic reference (3)
capacity (Iq) To be completed by adding
Weight
220 V 400 V for Ue the control circuit voltage code (2)

240 V 415 V 440 V 500 V 660 V y 415 V
Black knob (CNOMO, VDE 0113)
7.5 15 15 18.5 25 32 50 LD1 LC030p 1.430
LD1 LC030 p With control test function and padlocking facility

Standard power ratings of 3-phase Operational Breaking Basic reference (3) Weight
motors 50/60 Hz in category AC-43 current capacity (Iq) To be completed by adding
240 V 415 V 440 V 500 V 660 V y 415 V
Black knob (CNOMO. VDE 0113)
7.5 15 15 18.5 25 32 50 LD4 LC130p 1.450
Red knob on yellow background (CNOMO) Emergency Stop

7.5 15 15 18.5 25 32 50 LD4 LC030p 1.450
LD4 LC130 p

With control test function and padlocking facility
Standard power ratings of 3-phase Operational Breaking Basic reference (3) Weight
motors 50/60 Hz in category AC-43 current capacity (Iq) To be completed by adding
240 V 415 V 440 V 500 V 660 V y 415 V
7.5 15 15 18.5 25 32 50 LD5 LC130p (5) 2.800
LD4 LC030 p
7.5 15 15 18.5 25 32 50 LD5 LC030p (5) 2.800
(1) For the unit to function, it must be fitted with a protection module, to be ordered separately, see page opposite.
(2) Standard control circuit voltages (for other voltages, please consult your Regional Sales Office):
Volts 24 36 42 48 110 120 220 230 240 380 415 440 480 500 600 660
400
50 Hz B – D E F – M M U Q N N – S – Y
60 Hz BC CC – D FC FC MC MC/PU7 MC – – Q Q – S –
c (4) BD – – ED FD – – – – – – – – – – –
LD5 LC030 p
(3) Variant: UL 508 approved version (starter) at 600 V, to order, add suffix H51 to the reference.
Example: LD1 LC030MH51
(4) For use on c, the unit is supplied with 1 or 2 converters, including coil suppression device (2 converters for reversing contactor
breakers).
(5) It is essential to provide electrical locking for reversing contactor breakers integral 32.

1/152
References 1

Adjustable magnetic protection from 6 to 12 Irth max. (2)
of 3-phase motors
Thermal
setting
Magnetic
protection
Reference Weight 1
50/60 Hz in category AC-43 range
220 V 400 V 480 V 600 V (Irth min to
LB1 LC03Mpp
240 V 415 V 440 V 525 V 690 V Irth max)
kW kW kW kW kW A A kg
0.06 g g g g 0.25…0.4 2.4…4.8 LB1 LC03M03 0.400
g g g g g 0.4…0.63 3.8…7.6 LB1 LC03M04 0.400
0.09 g 0.37 0.37 0.55 0.63…1 6…12 LB1 LC03M05 0.400

0.12
0.18 g 0.55 0.75 1.1 1…1.6 9.5…19 LB1 LC03M06 0.400
0.25
0.37 1.1 1.1 1.1 1.5 1.6…2.5 15…30 LB1 LC03M07 0.400
0.55 1.5 1.5 2.2 3 2.5…4 24…48 LB1 LC03M08 0.400

0.75
1.1 2.2 2.2 3.7 4 4…6.3 38…76 LB1 LC03M10 0.400
1.5 4 4 5.5 7.5 6.3…10 60…120 LB1 LC03M13 0.400

2.2
3 7.5 7.5 10 11 10…16 95…190 LB1 LC03M17 0.400
4
5.5 11 11 15 18.5 16…25 150…300 LB1 LC03M22 0.400
7.5 15 15 18.5 25 23…32 190…380 LB1 LC03M53 0.400
Magnetic only protection modules (for frequent starting motors)

Standard power ratings Magnetic Reference Weight
of 3-phase motors protection
50/60 Hz in category AC-43
220 V 400 V 480 V 600 V
240 V 415 V 440 V 525 V 690 V
kW kW kW kW kW A kg
0.18 g 0.55 0.75 1.1 9.5…19 LB6 LC03M06 0.400
0.25
0.37 1.1 1.1 1.1 1.5 15…30 LB6 LC03M07 0.400
0.55 1.5 1.5 2.2 3 24…48 LB6 LC03M08 0.400

0.75
LB6 LB03Mpp 1.1 2.2 2.2 3.7 4 38…76 LB6 LC03M10 0.400
1.5 4 4 5.5 7.5 60…120 LB6 LC03M13 0.400

2.2
3 7.5 7.5 10 11 95…190 LB6 LC03M17 0.400
4
5.5 11 11 15 18.5 150…300 LB6 LC03M22 0.400
7.5 15 15 18.5 25 190…380 LB6 LC03M53 0.400

g There are no standard power ratings for these motors.
(2) To order PTB approved versions, add suffix H8 to the reference. Example: LB1 LC03M03H8.

1/153
Selection 1

for control and protection of resistive circuits
in category AC-1
Selecting the type of contactor breaker and protection module

Neutral point Type of Equipment Combination
1 connection circuit scheme contactor breaker + protection module
Neutral TNC 3-pole + PEN LD1 LC030p + LB1 LC03Lpp

connection (neutral and
PE combined) LD4 LC130p + LB1 LC03Lpp
LD4 LC030p + LB1 LC03Lpp
PEN
TNS 3-pole LD1 LC030p + LB1 LC03Lpp

(neutral and
PE separated) LD4 LC130p + LB1 LC03Lpp
3-pole + N LD1 LC040p + LB1 LC04Lpp
N LD1 LC040p + LB1 LC05Lpp
Note:
- the PEN conductor must not be isolated,
- all live conductors must be isolated. Neutral protection optional.

1/154
References 1

in category AC-1
3 and 4-pole contactor breakers without protection module (1)

Rated
thermal
Maximum
operational
Maximum Breaking
operational capacity (Iq)
Number
of
Basic reference.
To be completed by adding
Weight 1
current I th current AC-1 voltage for poles the control circuit voltage code (2)
θ y 40 °C θ y 40 °C Ue y 415 V
A A V kA kg
32 32 690 50 3 LD1 LC030p 1.430
4 LD1 LC040p 1.750

Rated Maximum Maximum Breaking Number Basic reference. Weight
thermal operational operational capacity (Iq) of To be completed by adding
current I th current AC-1 voltage for poles the control circuit voltage code (2)
LD1 LC030p θ y 40 °C θ y 40 °C Ue y 415 V
A A V kA kg
Black knob on blue background (CNOMO, VDE 0113)
32 32 690 50 3 LD4 LC130p 1.450
4 LD4 LC140p 1.780

32 32 690 50 3 LD4 LC030p 1.450
4 LD4 LC040p 1.780
Protection modules (for customer assembly)

Thermal-magnetic (compensated)
Thermal Magnetic Number Number of Reference Weight
setting range setting range of protected
(Irth min to Irth max) (3…6 Irth max) poles poles
A A kg
6.3…10 30…60 3 3 LB1 LC03L13 0.400
4 4 LB1 LC04L13 0.500
3 LB1 LC05L13 0.500
10…16 48…95 3 3 LB1 LC03L17 0.400
4 4 LB1 LC04L17 0.500
LD4 LC030p 3 LB1 LC05L17 0.500
16…25 75…150 3 3 LB1 LC03L22 0.400
4 4 LB1 LC04L22 0.500
3 LB1 LC05L22 0.500
23…32 95…190 3 3 LB1 LC03L53 0.400
4 4 LB1 LC04L53 0.500

LB1 LC03Lpp
3 LB1 LC05L53 0.500
(1) For the unit to function, it must be fitted with a protection module, to be ordered separately.
Volts 24 36 42 48 110 120 220 230 240 380 415 440 480 500 600 660
400
50 Hz B – D E F – M M U Q N N – S – Y
60 Hz BC CC – D FC FC MC MC MC – – Q Q – S –
c (3) BD – – ED FD – – – – – – – – – – –
(3) For use on d.c., the unit is supplied with a converter, including coil suppression device.

1/155
References 1

Add-on blocks
AUTO
+
TRIP.
Off
O
T
RESE
AUTO
+
TRIP.
Off
O
T
RESE
AUTO
+
TRIP.
Off
O
T
RESE
LA1 LC030
(LD4)
LA1 LC030
(LD4)
1/156
References 1

Add-on blocks
Current limiter (IP 20)

For Function Reference Weight
use on
LD1 or Increases the breaking capacity of the integral unit LA9 LB920
kg
0.320
1
LD5
For
mounting
see page
1/192
Instantaneous auxiliary contact blocks (IP 20) (1)
use on number kg
of blocks
LA9 LB920 per unit
N/O N/C C/O
LD1, LD4 1 block of 6 contacts comprising: LA1 LC010 0.280
or LD5 b 3 signalling contacts 2 1 –
Mounted "contactor state” – – 1
on RH side b 1 signalling contact “control
knob in any position
other than Auto" – – 1
b 1 signalling contact
"tripped on short-circuit"
b 1 signalling contact “tripped” – – 1
1 block of 5 contacts comprising: LA1 LC012 0.220

b 3 signalling contacts 2 1 –
“contactor state” 1 – –
"tripped on short-circuit" 1 – –
b 1 signalling contact “tripped”

“contactor state” 1 1 –
b 1 signalling contact “tripped”,
selectable+ by the user
1 block of 3 signalling contacts 2 1 – LA1 LC020 0.100

“contactor state”
LD4 1 control circuit isolating block 1 – – LA1 LC030 0.035

Mounted (1 or 2 blocks per unit)
on LH side
LD5 1 block of 3 signalling contacts 2 1 – LA1 LB021 0.100
on LH side
1 control circuit isolating block 2 – – LA1 LC031 0.100
comprising 2 contacts
Complementary block with one instantaneous auxiliary contact

(IP 10) (1)
use on number kg
of blocks
per unit
N/O N/C C/O
LD1, LD4 1 block comprising – 1 – LA1 LC001 0.035
or LD5 1 signalling contact
Mounted on LH or RH side
(1) UL and CSA approved.
General : Selection : Characteristics: Dimensions and schemes :

1/157
References 1

Accessories
AUTO
+
TRIP.
Off
O
T
RESE
1/158
References 1

Accessories
Electrical tripping and reset devices

For Type and Basic reference Weight
use on number per unit To be completed by adding
the control voltage code (1)
kg
1
LD1, LD4 1 undervoltage trip Time delay 0.2 s LA1 LC070p 0.150
or LD5
fitted with an Instantaneous LA1 LC072p 0.150
LA1 LC010 or
LA1 LC012 block
or 1 shunt trip Instantaneous LA1 LC071p 0.150
LD1, LD4 1 remote electrical 24 V 50/60 Hz LA1 LC052B 0.320

or LD5 reset device
fitted with an 42 V 50 Hz LA1 LC052E 0.320
LA1 LC010 or 48 V 50/60 Hz
LA1 LC012 block
100/127 V LA1 LC052F 0.320
50/60 Hz
200/240 V LA1 LC052M 0.320

50/60 Hz
Volts 24 48 110 120 220/230 240 380/400 415 440
50 Hz B E F – M U Q N N
60 Hz B E F F M M Q – N

1/159
References 1

Accessories
AUTO
+
TRIP.
Off
O
T
RESE
AUTO
+
TRIP.
Off
O
T
RESE
AUTO
+
TRIP.
Off
O
T
RESE
1/160
References 1

Accessories

Mounting Type Control voltage Operational voltage Reference Weight
c
V
50/60 Hz
V kg
1
On top of the Solid state 5…24 24…240 LA1 LC180BD 0.110
integral unit
Relay output 24 24…240 LA1 LC580BD 0.110
48 24…240 LA1 LC580ED 0.110
Replacement coils and voltage converters (1)

Mounting For use Operational Consumption Description Reference (3) Weight
on integral voltage Inrush Sealed
c (2)
V W W kg
On top of the LDp LCpppBD 24 (4) 250 4 Coil LX1 LC0249 0.120
integral unit
Converter LA1 LC080BD 0.150
LDp LCpppED 48 (4) 250 4 Coil LX1 LC0489 0.120
Converter LA1 LC080ED 0.150
LDp LCpppFD 110 250 4 Coil LX1 LC1109 0.120
Converter LA1 LC080FD 0.150
Suppressor module
Mounting Type Operational voltage Reference Weight
50/60 Hz
V kg
Clip-on RC circuit (Resistor-Capacitor) (5) y 250 LA9 D09982 0.010
(2) When used on rectified single-phase or 3-phase supply, the peak to peak ripple voltage must be equal to or less than 0.14 of
the average voltage.
(4) 24 V and 48 V converters can be operated by “Low level input”. In this case, the control circuit voltage must be the same as the
supply voltage (24 or 48 V).
(5) An RC circuit provides effective protection for circuits highly sensitive to high frequency interference. Voltage limited to 3 Uc
max. and oscillating frequency limited to 400 Hz max.

1/161
References 1

Accessories
1 Power terminal
use on
Upstream power
lots of
5
reference
LA9 LC701
kg
0.050
protection shrouds terminals (L1, L2, L3)
Sealing covers Protection module 1 LA1 LC090 0.010
Mounting accessories
LA9 LC701 use on on kg
Mounting plates LD1, LD4, LD5 2 x 32 mm LA9 LC010 0.150
4 rails
1 x 75 mm LA9 LC012 0.450

7 rail or
2 x 32 mm
4 rails
Height compensation integral 32 Panel or LA9 LC011 0.200

plate (raises its front face mounting
to the same height plate
LA1 LC090 as the integral 63) LA9 LD010
Separate component
Description For Reference Weight
use on kg
Kit for For converting a black, LA9 LC393 0.100
lockable knob (LD1) non-padlockable control knob
to a padlockable knob

Type For Colour Unit Weight
use on of knob reference kg
Adjustable LD1 Red LA9 LC330 0.400
from 0 to 185 mm
(control knob mounted Black LA9 LC331 0.400
on plate or door)
LD4, LD5 Red LA9 LC530 0.400
Black LA9 LC531 0.400

1/162
References 1

a.c. operation
circuit voltages
Uc 50 Hz Uc 60 Hz
resistance at of closed
20 °C ± 10 % circuit
code (1)
1
V V Ω H kg
– 24 1.125 0.107 BC LX1 LC020 0.120
24 – 1.78 0.142 B LX1 LC024 0.120
– 36 2.92 0.24 CC LX1 LC030 0.120
42 48 5.56 0.45 D LX1 LC042 0.120
48 – 7.10 0.59 E LX1 LC048 0.120

LX1 LCppp
– 110/120 29.51 2.43 FC LX1 LC100 0.120
110 – 37.15 3.12 F LX1 LC110 0.120
127 – 54.28 4.19 G LX1 LC127 0.120
– 220/240 117.4 9.7 MC LX1 LC190 0.120
220/230 – 168.2 13 M LX1 LC220 0.120
230 240 168.72 13 PU7 LX1 LC234 0.120
240 – 203 15.4 U LX1 LC240 0.120
380/400 440/480 515.1 39 Q LX1 LC380 0.120
415/440 – 581.8 46 N LX1 LC415 0.120
500 550/600 741.2 59 S LX1 LC500 0.120
660 – 1603 117 Y LX1 LC660 0.120
Consumption at 50 Hz: inrush (cos ϕ: 0.55) 150 to 200 VA; sealed (cos ϕ : 0.28) 10 to 16 VA.
Consumption at 60 Hz: inrush (cos ϕ: 0.55) 170 to 230 VA; sealed (cos ϕ : 0.30) 12 to 18 VA.
d.c. operation
The integral 32 can operate on a d.c. supply when fitted with a special coil and corresponding
(1) Coil voltage reference code. Used to complete the basic reference when ordering an integral
unit.

1/163
Operation 1

Auxiliary contact states
according to the positions of the control knob
LD1 LD4 Auxiliary contact actuators

1/L1
3/L2
5/L3
1/L1
3/L2
5/L3
1 Auto +0
A1
A1
A2
A2
U U U
Auxiliary contacts
LA1 LC010 LA1 LC012 LA1 LC025 LA1 LA1 LA1
LC001 LC020 LC030
2/T1
4/T2
6/T3
2/T1
4/T2
6/T3
(53)
08
98
96
98
63
13
23
31
16
18
06
08
13
23
31
13
23
31
13
23
31
41
96
98
Contact open
Contact closed ou
(54)
05
95
95
64
14
24
32
15
05
14
24
32
14
24
32
14
24
32
42
95
95
LD1 LD4
Off + control test function
13 23 31 16 18 06 08 96 98 13 23 31 08 98 13 23 31 96 98 41 13 23 31 53
14 24 32 15 05 95 14 24 32 05 95 14 24 32 95 95 42 14 24 32 54
Off
13 23 31 16 18 06 08 96 98 13 23 31 08 98 13 23 31 96 98 41 13 23 31 53
14 24 32 15 05 95 14 24 32 05 95 14 24 32 95 95 42 14 24 32 54
On, contactor open

AUTO AUTO 13 23 31 16 18 06 08 96 98 13 23 31 08 98 13 23 31 96 98 41 13 23 31 53
14 24 32 15 05 95 14 24 32 05 95 14 24 32 95 95 42 14 24 32 54

AUTO AUTO 13 23 31 96 98 13 23 31 08 98 13 23 31 96 98 41 13 23 31
16 18 06 08 53
14 24 32 15 05 95 14 24 32 05 95 14 24 32 95 95 42 14 24 32 54
Off after overload

TRIP. + TRIP. +
13 23 31 16 18 06 08 96 98 13 23 31 08 98 13 23 31 96 98 41 13 23 31 53
14 24 32 15 05 95 14 24 32 05 95 14 24 32 95 95 42 14 24 32 54
Tripped on overload
TRIP. + TRIP. + 13 23 31 16 18 06 08 96 98 13 23 31 08 98 13 23 31 96 98 41 13 23 31 53
14 24 32 15 05 95 14 24 32 05 95 14 24 32 95 95 42 14 24 32 54
TRIP. + TRIP. + 13 23 31 16 18 06 08 96 98 13 23 31 08 98 13 23 31 96 98 41 13 23 31 53
14 24 32 15 05 95 14 24 32 05 95 14 24 32 95 95 42 14 24 32 54

TRIP. + TRIP. + 13 23 31
13 23 31 16 18 06 08 96 98 13 23 31 08 98 13 23 31 96 98 41 53
14 24 32 15 05 95 14 24 32 05 95 14 24 32 95 95 42 14 24 32 54
Manual reset
TRIP. + TRIP. + 13 23 31 16 18 06 08 96 98 13 23 31 08 98 13 23 31 96 98 41 13 23 31 53
14 24 32 15 05 95 14 24 32 05 95 14 24 32 95 95 42 14 24 32 54
RESET RESET

1/164
Operation 1


1/L1
3/L2
5/L3
Auto +0
ou
1
A1
A1
A2
A2
U U U
Auxiliary contacts
LA1 LC010 LA1 LC012 LA1 LC025 LA1 LA1 LA1 LA1
LC020 LC001 LC021 LC031
2/T1
4/T2
6/T3
13
23
31
96
98
13
23
31
96
98
13
23
31
41
06
08
13
23
31
08
13
23
31
53
63
16
18
98
ou
Contact open
14
24
32
95
14
24
32
95
95
14
24
32
42
05
14
24
32
05
14
24
32
54
64
15
95
Contact closed

13 23 31 16 18 06 96 98 13 23 31 08 98 13 23 31 96 98 13 23 31 41 13 23 31 53 63
08
14 24 32 15 05 95 14 24 32 05 95 14 24 32 95 95 14 24 32 42 14 24 32 54 64
Off
13 23 31 16 18 06 96 98 13 23 31 08 98 13 23 31 96 98 13 23 31 41 13 23 31 53 63
08
14 24 32 15 05 95 14 24 32 05 95 14 24 32 95 95 14 24 32 42 14 24 32 54 64
On, reversing contactor open

AUTO 13 23 31 16 18 06 96 98 13 23 31 08 98 13 23 31 96 98 13 23 31 41 13 23 31 53 63
08
14 24 32 15 05 95 14 24 32 05 95 14 24 32 95 95 14 24 32 42 14 24 32 54 64
On, closed
AUTO 13 23 31 16 18 06 96 98 13 23 31 08 98 13 23 31 96 98 13 23 31 41 13 23 31 53 63
08
14 24 32 15 05 95 14 24 32 05 95 14 24 32 95 95 14 24 32 42 14 24 32 54 64
On, closed
AUTO 13 23 31 16 18 06 96 98 13 23 31 08 98 13 23 31 96 98 13 23 31 41 13 23 31 53 63
08
14 24 32 15 05 95 14 24 32 05 95 14 24 32 95 95 14 24 32 42 14 24 32 54 64
Tripped on overload
13 23 31 16 18 06 96 98 13 23 31 08 98 13 23 31 96 98 13 23 31 41 13 23 31 53 63
TRIP. +
08
14 24 32 15 05 95 14 24 32 05 95 14 24 32 95 95 14 24 32 42 14 24 32 54 64
Off after overload

TRIP. +
13 23 31 16 18 06 96 98 13 23 31 08 98 13 23 31 96 98 13 23 31 41 13 23 31 53 63
08
14 24 32 15 05 95 14 24 32 05 95 14 24 32 95 95 14 24 32 42 14 24 32 54 64
TRIP. + 13 23 31 16 18 06 96 98 13 23 31 08 98 13 23 31 96 98 13 23 31 41 13 23 31 53 63
08
14 24 32 15 05 95 14 24 32 05 95 14 24 32 95 95 14 24 32 42 14 24 32 54 64

TRIP. + 13 23 31 16 18 06 96 98 13 23 31 08 98 13 23 31 96 98 13 23 31 41 13 23 31 53 63
08
14 24 32 15 05 95 14 24 32 05 95 14 24 32 95 95 14 24 32 42 14 24 32 54 64
Manual reset
TRIP. + 13 23 31 16 18 06 08 96 98 13 23 31 08 98 13 23 31 96 98 13 23 31 41 13 23 31 53 63
14 24 32 15 05 95 14 24 32 05 95 14 24 32 95 95 14 24 32 42 14 24 32 54 64
RESET

1/165
Characteristics 1
Contactor breakers
Type integral 63
Number of poles 3
1 Rated operational current (Ie) In AC-3

A
V
63
690
Electrical durability In AC-3 at 400 V 1.2 million operating cycles
Environment
Conforming to standards IEC: 158-1, 204-1, 204-2, 364, 947-1/2 and 4
UTE: NF C 63-110, C 63-120, C 63-130, C 63-650, C 79-100, C 20-040
VDE: 0100, 0110, 0113, 0170, 0171, 471, 0660
BS: 5424, 4752, 4941
NEN, NBN
Product certifications ASE, ASEFA, ASTA, BV, CSA, DEMKO, DNV, GL
NEMKO, NKK, ÖVE, RINA, SCC, SETI, UL, USSR, LROS
(1) Storage °C - 25…+ 70
Degree of protection Conforming to IEC 60144 & 60529 IP 20B
(JO 27 NC of 1st and 2/2/1982)
Operating positions In relation to normal From main axis
(without derating) vertical mounting plane (left-right tilt)

(Uc) a 60 Hz V 24…600
c with converter V 24, 48, 110
Average consumption a Inrush VA 375 (50 Hz), 450 (60 Hz)
at 20 °C and at Uc Sealed VA 25 (50 Hz or 60 Hz)
c (1) Inrush W 300 for 50 ms
Sealed W 8
Heat dissipation W 8 (50 Hz), 11 (60 Hz)
(1) With converter.


1/166
Characteristics 1
Contactor breakers
Type integral 63
Frequency limits
θ y 40 °C A
Hz
63
40…60
1
Heat dissipation in the power Operational current A 25 32 40 50 63
circuits of the contactor breaker Power per pole, hot state W 4.4 5 5.8 7 9
I rms Conforming to IEC 60947-4 A 12 or 15 x Ith (above this value. the breaker trips)
conforming to Operational voltage V 220/240 380/415 440 480/525 600/690
IEC 60947-2 Value of cos ϕ 0.25 0.25 0.25 0.25 0.5
Cycle P1 (O-t-CO) Icu (1) kA rms 50 50 50 35 10
Cycle P2 (O-t CO-t-CO) Ics (1) kA rms 50 50 50 35 10
conforming to IEC Icu = Ics kA rms 50 50 50 30 10
60947-6-2 ensuring
reliability of operation
Total breaking time ms 4
Electrical durability in AC-3 Prospective rms kA 3 10 25 35 50
at Ie max and at 415 V short-circuit current at
after 1 cycle O-CO-r-CO at Isc terminals of a new device
Millions of operating cycles 1 0.9 0.6 0.5 0.2
at 415 V, 50 Hz
Cabling Maximum c.s.a. Minimum c.s.a.
without cable end
Flexible cable mm 2 2 x 25 1x6
with cable end
Solid cable mm 2 1 x 50 1x6
Module type LB1 LD03P LB1 LD03M LB6 LD03M LB1 LD03L
Protection Standard motors Standard motors Frequent starting Distribution circuits
Conforming to standards NF C 63-650 NF C 63-650 NF C 63-650 NF C 63-120
Number of poles 3 3 3 3
Number of protected poles 3 3 3 3
Rated operational voltage V 690 690 690 690
Max. continuous current A 13…63 13…63 13…63 13…63
Thermal protection Setting range (Irth min./Irth max.) A 10/13…45/63 10/13…45/63 – 10/13…45/63
Temperature compensation °C - 20…+ 60 20…+ 60 20…+ 60 20…+ 60
Protection against With With Without Without
phase imbalance
Tripping class 20 20 – –
Magnetic protection Instantaneous trip current Fixed at 15 Irth max 6…12 Irth max 6…12 Irth max 3…6 Irth max
conforming to setting range (usual setting
IEC 60947-1/2/4/6-2 9…10 Irth maxi)
Tripping tolerance ± 20 % ± 20 % ± 20 % ± 20 %
Padlocking By 1, 2 or 3 padlocks, Ø 8 mm shank
Padlocking 1, 2 or 3 padlocks, shank Ø 8 mm max and Ø 5 mm min. When flush mounting,
(1) O: breaking short-circuit current (open),
t: time
CO: closing on short-circuit, breaking short-circuit current (closed-open)

1/167
Contactor breakers

1 Rated insulation voltage (Ui) Conforming to
IEC 60947-5-1
V 690
Switching capacity With U u 17 V and I u 10 mA mVA 600

power
power
Cabling mm2 Maximum c.s.a.: 2 x 2.5
Minimum c.s.a.: 2 x 1
Signalling contacts
IEC 60947-5-1
Lamp load (3) VA – – 90 125
Motor (5) VA – – 160 200
c Voltage V 24 48 110/125 200
Lamp load (3) W 50 50 6 7.5
Motor (5) W 75 75 6 7.5
Cabling mm2 Maximum c.s.a.: 2 x 2.5
Minimum c.s.a.: 2 x 1
Isolating auxiliary contacts

Rated insulation voltage (Ui) a.c. supply V 690
Conforming to IEC 60947 d.c. supply V 125
and NF C 63-130
Cabling mm2 Maximum c.s.a.: 2 x 1.5 or 1 x 2.5

1/168
Characteristics 1
Contactor breakers

Used for control By a programmable controller, By a programmable controller,
of the integral 32 with a.c. control of the electromagnet with d.c. control of the electromagnet
Control on d.c. supply 1
around the device
Storage °C - 25…+ 70 - 25…+ 70
Operation °C - 25…+ 50 - 25…+ 50
Isolation kV rms voltage between inputs and outputs: 2.5 Common negative terminal
Max. mm 2 2 x 2.5 2 x 2.5
Operating limits 0.85...10.1 Uc 0.8...1.1 Uc (2)
Protection Against reverse polarity (by diode) Against reverse polarity (by diode)
and against overvoltage and against overvoltage
Module or converter type LA1 LC LA1 LC

580BD 580ED 180BD 080BD 080ED 080FD
Schemes
LA1 LCp580pD LA1 Lp180BD LA1 Lp080BD LA1 Lp080FD
LA1 Lp080ED
A1 A1
+ E1 + E1 + E1
A1 + E1
A1
– E2 – E2 (0V) E3 (0V)
A2 A2
– A2 – A2
E2 E2
Indication of input state By LED – –

Input signals Voltage V c 24 c 48 c 5…24 c 24 c 48 c 5…24 c 24 (1) c 48 (1) – c 24 (1) c 48 (1) –
(logic side) (E1-E2) (E1-E2) (E1-E2) (E1-E2) (E1-E2) (E1-E2) (E3-E2) (E3-E2) (E3-E2) (E3-E2)
Current mA 30 20 15…24 V 50 25 15…24 V 20 10 – 20 10 –
8.5…5 V 8.5…5 V
State “0” For U V < 2.4 < 4.8 < 2.5 < 2.4 < 4.8 < 2.5 <7 < 14 – <7 <14 –
guaranteed For I mA <2 <2 <2 <2 <2 <2 <5 < 2.5 – <5 < 2.5 –
State “1” For U V > 20.4 > 40.8 >4 > 20.4 >4 >4 > 14 > 28 – > 14 > 28 –
guaranteed
Supply voltage V a a a a a a c c c c c c
24…240 24…240 24…240 24…240 24…240 24…240 24 (2) 48 (2) 110 (2) 24 (2) 48 (2) 110 (2)
(A1-A2) (A1-A2) (A1-A2) (A1-A2) (A1-A2) (A1-A2) (E1-E2) (E1-E2) (E1-E2) (E1-E2) (E1-E2) (E1-E2)
Electrical durability 5 1
Average Inrush 50 Hz VA 160 160 160 375 375 375 – – – – – –
consumption 60 Hz VA 185 185 185 450 450 450 – – – – – –
c W – – – – – – 250 250 250 300 300 300
Sealed 50/60 Hz VA 12 12 12 25 25 25 – – – – – –
c W – – – – – – 4 4 4 8 8 8
Operating time Pull-in ms 15…30 15…30 10…35 20…40 20…40 10…45 30 30 30 35 35 35
at 20 °C Drop-out ms 22…35 22…35 8…30 25…45 25…45 8…30 15 15 15 20 20 20
and at Uc
(1) For direct control by external contact: connect E1-E3.


1/169
Characteristics 1
Contactor breakers
Tripping and reset devices, coil suppressor module
Environment
1 Protective treatment
Ambient air temperature Storage °C
“TH”
- 40…+ 80
Permissible for °C - 25…+ 70
operation at Uc
Protection against Conforming to VDE 0106
Tripping devices
Type LA1 LC070p, LC072p LA1 LC071p
Pull-in voltage Uc 0.8…1.1 0.7…1.1
Drop-out voltage Uc 0.35…0.7 –
Average consumption Inrush VA 8 8
Sealed VA 4 4
Minimum pulse time ms – 10
Reset devices
Type LA1 LC052p
Consumption VA 9
Duration of a reset cycle s 9
Minimum pulse duration s 0.5
Suppressor module LA9 D09982

Type of protection RC (resistor-capacitor)
Connection scheme
Operational voltage V y 250

1/170
Characteristics 1
Contactor breakers
Breaking capacity of integral 63 contactor breakers, according to the operational

voltage and protection module fitted.
Breaking capacity
1
min max
A A kA kA kA kA kA
LBp LD03p16 10 13 u 130 u 130 u 130 u 130 10
LBp LD03p21 13 18 u 130 u 130 u 130 u 130 10
LBp LD03p22 18 25 u 130 u 130 50 35 10
LBp LD03p53 23 32 u 130 50 50 35 10
LBp LD03p55 28 40 u 130 50 50 30 10
LBp LD03p57 35 50 u 130 50 50 30 10
LBp LD03p61 45 63 u 130 50 50 30 10

1/171

Motor protection (normal starting)

1 By thermal-magnetic modules LB1 LD03P (1)
Time
300
min
23 28 35 45 63
100 10 13 18 25 32 40 50 irth
min P16
P21
P22
P53
P55
10 P57
min P61
40 s
1 min
10 s
1s
195 375 600 945
270 480 750
0,1 s
0,01 s
6 10 15 20 30 40 54 60 100 200 400 600 1000 2000
Current in A
By thermal-magnetic modules LB1 LD03M (1)
Time
300
min
23 28 35 45 63
100 10 13 18 25 32 40 50 irth
min M16
M21
M22
M53
M55
10 M57
Thermal zone
min M61
1 min
10 s
1s
Magnetic zone
78 156 240 480

108 190 300 600
150 216 380 760
0,1 s
0,01 s
6 10 20 40 60 100 200 400 600 1000 2000
Current in A
(1) Thermal protection: the average operating times shown in the above curves are for an
ambient air temperature of 20 °C, without prior current flow (cold state). The average
operating times after prolonged current flow (hot state) can be calculated by applying the
coefficient 0.5.

1/172

Motor protection (frequent starting)

By magnetic modules LB6 LD03M
Time
1
300
min
100
min
10
Thermal zone
min
1 min
10 s
Magnetic zone
1s
78 156 240 480
108 190 300 600
150 216 380 760
0,1 s
0,01 s
6 10 20 40 60 80 100 110 200 400 600 1000 2000
Current in A
Distribution circuit protection

By thermal-magnetic modules LB1 LD03L
Time
300
min 25 32 40 50
18 23 28 35 45 63 irth
100
min
L22
L53
L55
10 L57
min
L61
1 min
10 s
1s
75 150
95 190
120 240
150 300
0,1 s 190 380
0,01 s
6 10 20 40 60 100 200 400 600 1000 2000
Current in A

1/173


3-phase 400/415 V, 50 Hz
1 Current limitation on short-circuit
Maximum peak current in kA
100
25
80 0,
60 =
40 3
0,
=
20
5
0, 1 (1)
=
10
8
6
7
0,
4 =
ϕ
3
c os
2
1
0,8
0,6
0,4
0,2
0,1
0,1 0,2 0,4 0,3 1 2 4 6 8 10 15 20 50 100 200
Prospective rms short-circuit current in kA
1 18 to 25 A up to 45 to 63 A
Maximum thermal limit on short-circuit

Thermal limit I2t in kA 2s in the
short-circuit protection zone
1000
800
600
400
(1)
1
200
100
80
60
40
20
10
1 2 4 6 8 10 15 20 50 100 200
1 18 to 25 A up to 45 to 63 A
(1) LB1 LD03p22 to LD06p61: rating of associated thermal overload module.

1/174
module according to the Contactor breakers and

Current limitation and thermal limit on short-circuit (continued)

3-phase 480/500 V, 50 Hz
Current limitation on short-circuit 1
Maximum peak current in kA
100
80 25
0,
60 =
40 3
0,
=
20 5
0, 1 (1)
=
10
8 7
6 0,
=
ϕ
4 c os
3
2
1
0,8
0,6
0,4
0,2
0,1
0,1 0,2 0,4 0,3 1 2 4 6 8 10 15 20 35 50 100 200
1 18 to 25 A up to 45 to 63 A
Current limitation on short-circuit

Thermal limit I2t in kA 2s in the
short-circuit protection zone
1000
800
600
400
(1)
1
200
100
80
60
40
20
10
1 2 4 6 8 10 15 20 35 50 100 200
1 18 to 25 A up to 45 to 63 A
(1) LB1 LD03 p22 to LD03p61: rating of associated thermal overload module.

1/175
References 1


1 Standard power ratings of
3-phase motors 50/60 Hz in AC-43
current
Basic reference (3)
capacity (Iq) To be completed by adding
Weight
220 V 400 V for the control circuit voltage code (2)

240 V 415 V 440 V 500 V 660 V Ue y 415 V
Black knob
15 30 33 37 55 63 50 LD1 LD030p 3.700
33

LD1 LD030 p Standard power ratings of Operational Breaking Basic reference (3) Weight
3-phase motors 50/60 Hz in AC-43 current capacity (Iq) To be completed by adding
240 V 415 V 440 V 500 V 660 V Ue y 415 V
15 30 33 37 55 63 50 LD4 LD130p 3.800
33

15 30 33 37 55 63 50 LD4 LD030p 3.800
33

Standard power ratings of Operational Breaking Basic reference (3) Weight
3-phase motors 50/60 Hz in AC-43 current capacity (Iq) To be completed by adding
240 V 415 V 440 V 500 V 660 V Ue y 415 V
15 30 33 37 55 63 50 LD5 LD130p 7.600
33

15 30 33 37 55 63 50 LD5 LD030p 7.600
33
Volts 24 36 42 48 110 120 220 230 240 380 415 440 480 500 600 660
400
LD5 LC030 p
50 Hz B – D E F – M M U Q N N – S – Y
60 Hz BC CC – CE K FC LC MC MC – – UX Q – S –
c (4) BD – – ED FD – – – – – – – – – – –
(3) Variant: UL 508 “type E” approved version (SPCD) at 347/600 V; to order, add suffix H5 to the reference.
Example: LD1 LD030MH5.
(4) For use on d.c., the unit is supplied with 1 or 2 converters, including coil suppression devices (2 converters for reversing
contactor breakers).

1/176
References 1

Fixed magnetic protection, set at 15 Irth max, for mounting on integral 63
of 3-phase motors
Thermal
setting range
Magnetic
protection
Reference Weight 1
50/60 Hz in category AC-43 (Irth min to Irth max)
220 V 400 V 480 V 600 V
240 V 415 V 440 V 525 V 690 V
LB1 LD03Mpp kW kW kW kW kW A A kg
3 5.5 5.5 7.5 10 10…13 – LB1 LD03P16 0.780
4 9 9 11 15 13…18 – LB1 LD03P21 0.780
5.5 11 11 15 18.5 18…25 – LB1 LD03P22 0.780
7.5 15 15 18.5 22 23…32 – LB1 LD03P53 0.780
9 22 22 25 33 28…40 – LB1 LD03P55 0.780
11 25 25 33 45 35…50 – LB1 LD03P57 0.780
15 33 33 40 55 45…63 – LB1 LD03P61 0.780
Adjustable magnetic protection from 6 to 12 Irth max, for mounting on integral 63

Standard power ratings Thermal Magnetic Reference Weight
of 3-phase motors setting range protection
50/60 Hz in category AC-43 (Irth min to Irth max)
220 V 400 V 480 V 600 V
240 V 415 V 440 V 525 V 690 V
3 5.5 5.5 7.5 10 10…13 78…156 LB1 LD03M16 0.780
4 9 9 11 15 13…18 108…216 LB1 LD03M21 0.780
5.5 11 11 15 18.5 18…25 150…300 LB1 LD03M22 0.780
7.5 22 22 25 33 23…32 190…380 LB1 LD03M53 0.780
9 22 22 25 33 28…40 240…480 LB1 LD03M55 0.780
11 25 25 33 45 35…50 300…600 LB1 LD03M57 0.780
15 33 33 40 55 45…63 380…760 LB1 LD03M61 0.780
Magnetic only protection modules (for frequent starting motors)

Standard power ratings Magnetic protection Reference Weight
of 3-phase motors
220 V 400 V 480 V 600 V
240 V 415 V 440 V 525 V 690 V
LB6 LD03Mpp kW kW kW kW kW A kg
3 5.5 5.5 7.5 10 78…156 LB6 LD03M16 0.780
4 9 9 11 15 108…216 LB6 LD03M21 0.780
5.5 11 11 15 18.5 150…300 LB6 LD03M22 0.780
7.5 22 22 25 33 190…380 LB6 LD03M53 0.780
9 22 22 25 33 240…480 LB6 LD03M55 0.780
11 25 25 33 45 300…600 LB6 LD03M57 0.780
15 33 33 40 55 380…760 LB6 LD03M61 0.780

1/177
Selection 1

in category AC-1
Selecting the type of contactor breaker and protection module

Neutral point Type of Equipment Combination
1 connection
Neutral TNC
circuit
3-pole + PEN
scheme contactor breaker + protection module
LD1 LD030p + LB1 LD03Lpp
PE combined) LD4 LD130p + LB1 LD03Lpp
LD4 LD030p + LB1 LD03Lpp
PEN
Note: the PEN conductor must not be isolated,

Neutral point Type of Equipment scheme Combination
connection circuit contactor breaker + protection module
Neutral TNS 3-pole LD1 LC030p + LB1 LC03Lpp
PE separated) LD4 LC130p + LB1 LC03Lpp
Note: all live conductors must be isolated. Neutral protection optional.

1/178
References 1

in category AC-1

Rated
thermal
Maximum
operational
Maximum Breaking Number
operational capacity (Iq) of poles
Basic reference.
To be completed by adding
Weight 1
current I th current AC-1 voltage for the control voltage code (2)
θ y 40 °C θ y 40 °C Ue y 415 V
A A V kA kg
Black knob
63 63 690 50 3 LD1 LC030p 3.700

Rated Maximum Maximum Breaking Number Basic reference. Weight
thermal operational operational capacity (Iq) of poles To be completed by adding
current I th current AC-1 voltage for the control voltage code (2)
θ y 40 °C θ y 40 °C Ue y 415 V
A A V kA kg
LD1 LD030p
63 63 690 50 3 LD4 LD130p 3.800
Red knob on yellow background (CNOMO. VDE 0113) Emergency Stop

63 63 690 50 3 LD4 LD030p 3.800

setting range setting range of poles protected
(Irth min./Irth max.) (3…6 Irth max) poles
A A kg
10…13 39…78 3 3 LB1 LD03L16 0.780
13…18 54…108 3 3 LB1 LD03L21 0.780
18…25 75…150 3 3 LB1 LD03L22 0.780

LB1 LD03Lpp
23…32 95…190 3 3 LB1 LD03L53 0.780
28…40 120…240 3 3 LB1 LD03L55 0.780
35…50 150…300 3 3 LB1 LD03L57 0.780
45…63 190…380 3 3 LB1 LD03L61 0.780
Volts 24 36 42 48 110 120 220 230 240 380 415 440 480 500 600 660
400
50 Hz B – D E F – M M U Q N N – S – Y
60 Hz BC CC – CE K FC LC MC MC – – UX Q – S –
c (3) BD – – ED FD – – – – – – – – – – –

1/179
References 1

Add-on blocks
AUTO
+
TRIP.
Off
O
T
RESE
AUTO
+
TRIP.
T
RESE
AUTO
+
TRIP.
Off
O
T
RESE
1/180
References 1

Add-on blocks
Instantaneous auxiliary contact blocks (IP 20) (1)

For Type and number Composition Reference Weight
use on of blocks per unit kg
1
N/O N/C C/O
LD1, LD4 1 block of 6 contacts comprising: LA1 LC010 0.280
or LD5 b 3 signalling contacts 2 1 –
Mounted “contactor state” – – 1
on RH side b 1 signalling contact
“control knob in any
position other than Auto" – – 1
tripped on short-circuit
b 1 signalling contact “tripped” – – 1

“contactor state” 1 – –
tripped on short-circuit 1 – –
b 1 signalling contact “tripped”

“contactor state” 1 1 –
b 1 signalling contact “tripped”,
selectable by the user
1 block of 3 signalling contacts 2 1 – LA1 LC020 0.100


Mounted (1 or 2 blocks per unit)
on LH side
LD5 1 block of 3 signalling contacts 2 1 – LA1 LB021 0.100
on LH side
1 control circuit isolating block 2 – – LA1 LC031 0.100
comprising 2 contacts
Complementary block with one instantaneous auxiliary contact

(IP 10) (1)
N/O N/C C/O
LD1, LD4 1 block comprising 1 signalling – 1 – LA1 LC001 0.035
or LD5 contact “contactor state”
Mounted on LH or RH side
(1) UL and CSA approved.

1/181
References 1

Accessories
AUTO
+
TRIP.
Off
O
T
RESE
1/182
References 1

Accessories
Electrical tripping and reset devices

For Type and number Basic reference. Weight
use on of devices per unit To be completed by adding
the control voltage code (1)
kg
1
LD1, LD4 1 undervoltage trip Time delay 0.2 s LA1 LC070p 0.150
or LD5
fitted with an Instantaneous LA1 LC072p 0.150
LA1 LC010 or
LA1 LC012
block
LD1, LD4 1 remote electrical 24 V 50/60 Hz LA1 LC052B 0.320

or LD5 reset device
fitted with an 42 V 50 Hz LA1 LC052E 0.320
LA1 LC010 or 48 V 50/60 Hz
LA1 LC012
add-on block
100/127 V LA1 LC052F 0.320
50/60 Hz
200/240 V LA1 LC052M 0.320

50/60 Hz
Volts 24 48 110 120 220/230 240 380/400 415 440

1/183
References 1

Accessories
AUTO
+
TRIP.
Off
O
T
RESE
AUTO
+
TRIP.
T
RESE
AUTO
+
TRIP.
Off
O
T
RESE
1/184
References 1
Contactor breakers

Mounting Type Control Operational Reference Weight
voltage
c
voltage
50/60 Hz
1
V V kg
On top of the Solid state 5…24 24…240 LA1 LD180BD 0.110
integral unit
Relay output 24 24…240 LA1 LD580BD 0.110
48 24…240 LA1 LD580ED 0.110
Replacement coils and voltage converters (1)

Mounting For use Operational Consumption Description Reference (3) Weight
on integral voltage Inrush Sealed
c (2)
V W W kg
On top of the LDp LDpppBD 24 (4) 300 8 Coil LX1 LD0249 0.300
integral unit
Converter LA1 LD080BD 0.150
LDp LDpppED 48 (4) 300 8 Coil LX1 LD0489 0.300
Converter LA1 LD080ED 0.150
LDp LDpppFD 110 300 8 Coil LX1 LD01109 0.300
Converter LA1 LD080FD 0.150
Suppressor module
Mounting Type Operational voltage Reference Weight
50/60 Hz
V kg
Clip-on RC circuit (Resistor-Capacitor) (5) y 250 LA9 D09982 0.010
(2) When used on rectified single-phase or 3-phase supply, the peak to peak ripple voltage must be equal to or less than 0.14 of
the average voltage.
(4) 24 V and 48 V converters can be operated by “Low level input”. In this case, the control circuit voltage must be the same as the
supply voltage (24 or 48 V).
(5) An RC circuit provides effective protection for circuits highly sensitive to high frequency interference. Voltage limited to 3 Uc
max. and oscillating frequency limited to 400 Hz max.

1/185
References 1

Accessories
1 Power terminal
use on
Upstream power 5
lots of reference
LA9 LD701
kg
0.050
protection shroud terminals (L1, L2, L3)
Sealing cover Protection module 1 LA1 LC090 0.010
use on on kg
LA1 LC090 Mounting plate LD1, LD4, LD5 1 x 75 mm LA9 LD010 0.450
7 rail or
2 x 32 mm
4 rails

Type For Colour Unit Weight
use on of knob reference kg
Adjustable LD1 Red LA9 LC330 0.400
from 0 to 185 mm
with extension Black LA9 LC331 0.400
(control knob mounted
on plate or door)
LD4, LD5 Red LA9 LC530 0.400
LA9 LD010

1/186
References 1

a.c. operation
circuit voltages
Uc 50 Hz Uc 60 Hz
resistance at of closed
code (1)
1
V V Ω H kg
– 24 0.213 0.045 BC LX1 LD020 0.300
24 – 0.323 0.071 B LX1 LD024 0.300
– 36 0.503 0.106 CC LX1 LD030 0.300
– 48 0.845 0.19 CE LX1 LD040 0.300
42 – 0.987 0.22 D LX1 LD042 0.300
48 – 1.26 0.29 E LX1 LD048 0.300
– 110 4.88 1 K LX1 LD090 0.300
– 115/120 5.89 1.18 FC LX1 LD100 0.300

LX1 LDppp
110 – 6.48 1.48 F LX1 LD110 0.300
127 – 9.80 2.13 G LX1 LD127 0.300
– 220 19.82 4.2 LC LX1 LD180 0.300
– 230/240 23.24 4.5 MC LX1 LD190 0.300
220/230 – 30.51 6.7 M LX1 LD220 0.300
240 – 37.66 7.9 U LX1 LD240 0.300
– 440 80.46 16.7 UX LX1 LD360 0.300
380/400 460/480 93.63 20 Q LX1 LD380 0.300
415/440 – 116.46 23.7 N LX1 LD415 0.300
500 575/600 152.18 31 S LX1 LD500 0.300
660 – 290.80 60 Y LX1 LD660 0.300
Consumption at 50 Hz: inrush (cos ϕ: 0.55) 350 to 400 VA; sealed (cos ϕ: 0.28) 20 to 30 VA.
Consumption at 60 Hz: inrush (cos ϕ: 0.55) 420 to 500 VA; sealed (cos ϕ: 0.30) 24 to 36 VA.
d.c. operation
The integral 63 can operate on a d.c. supply when fitted with a special coil and corresponding
(1) Coil voltage reference code, used to complete the basic reference when ordering an integral
unit.

1/187
Operation 1

LD1 LD4 Auxiliary contact actuators

1/L1
3/L2
5/L3
1/L1
3/L2
5/L3
1 Auto +0
A1
A1
A2
A2
U U U
Auxiliary contacts
LA1 LC010 LA1 LC012 LA1 LC025 LA1 LA1 LA1
LC001 LC020 LC030
2/T1
4/T2
6/T3
2/T1
4/T2
6/T3
(53)
08
98
96
98
63
13
23
31
16
18
06
08
13
23
31
13
23
31
13
23
31
41
96
98
Contact open
ou
(54)
Contact closed
05
95
95
64
14
24
32
15
05
14
24
32
14
24
32
14
24
32
42
95
95
LD1 LD4
13 23 31 16 18 0608 96 98 13 23 31 08 98 13 23 31 96 98 41 13 23 31 53
14 24 32 15 05 95 14 24 32 05 95 14 24 32 95 95 42 14 24 32 54
Off
13 23 31 16 18 0608 96 98 13 23 31 08 98 13 23 31 96 98 41 13 23 31 53
14 24 32 15 05 95 14 24 32 05 95 14 24 32 95 95 42 14 24 32 54
On, contactor open

AUTO AUTO 13 23 31 16 18 0608 96 98 13 23 31 08 98 13 23 31 96 98 41 13 23 31 53
14 24 32 15 05 95 14 24 32 05 95 14 24 32 95 95 42 14 24 32 54

AUTO AUTO 13 23 31 96 98 13 23 31 08 98 13 23 31 96 98 41 13 23 31
16 18 0608 53
14 24 32 15 05 95 14 24 32 05 95 14 24 32 95 95 42 14 24 32 54
Off after overload

TRIP. + TRIP. +
13 23 31 16 18 0608 96 98 13 23 31 08 98 13 23 31 96 98 41 13 23 31 53
14 24 32 15 05 95 14 24 32 05 95 14 24 32 95 95 42 14 24 32 54
Tripped on overload
TRIP. + TRIP. + 13 23 31 16 18 0608 96 98 13 23 31 08 98 13 23 31 96 98 41 13 23 31 53
14 24 32 15 05 95 14 24 32 05 95 14 24 32 95 95 42 14 24 32 54
TRIP. + TRIP. + 13 23 31 16 18 0608 96 98 13 23 31 08 98 13 23 31 96 98 41 13 23 31 53
14 24 32 15 05 95 14 24 32 05 95 14 24 32 95 95 42 14 24 32 54

TRIP. + TRIP. + 13 23 31
13 23 31 16 18 0608 96 98 13 23 31 08 98 13 23 31 96 98 41 53
14 24 32 15 05 95 14 24 32 05 95 14 24 32 95 95 42 14 24 32 54
Manual reset
TRIP. + TRIP. + 13 23 31 16 18 0608 96 98 13 23 31 08 98 13 23 31 96 98 41 13 23 31 53
14 24 32 15 05 95 14 24 32 05 95 14 24 32 95 95 42 14 24 32 54
RESET RESET

1/188
Operation 1


1/L1
3/L2
5/L3
Auto +0
ou
1
A1
A1
A2
A2
U U U
Auxiliary contacts
LA1 LC010 LA1 LC012 LA1 LC025 LA1 LA1 LA1 LA1
LC020 LC001 LC021 LC031
13
23
31
96
98
13
23
31
96
98
13
23
31
41
06
08
13
23
31
08
13
23
31
53
63
16
18
98
2/T1
4/T2
6/T3
ou
Contact open
14
24
32
95
14
24
32
95
95
14
24
32
42
05
14
24
32
05
14
24
32
54
64
15
95
Contact closed

13 23 31 16 18 06 96 98 13 23 31 08 98 13 23 31 96 98 13 23 31 41 13 23 31 53 63
08
14 24 32 15 05 95 14 24 32 05 95 14 24 32 95 95 14 24 32 42 14 24 32 54 64
Off
13 23 31 16 18 06 96 98 13 23 31 08 98 13 23 31 96 98 13 23 31 41 13 23 31 53 63
08
14 24 32 15 05 95 14 24 32 05 95 14 24 32 95 95 14 24 32 42 14 24 32 54 64
On, reversing contactor open

AUTO 13 23 31 16 18 06 96 98 13 23 31 08 98 13 23 31 96 98 13 23 31 41 13 23 31 53 63
08
14 24 32 15 05 95 14 24 32 05 95 14 24 32 95 95 14 24 32 42 14 24 32 54 64
On, closed
AUTO 13 23 31 16 18 06 96 98 13 23 31 08 98 13 23 31 96 98 13 23 31 41 13 23 31 53 63
08
14 24 32 15 05 95 14 24 32 05 95 14 24 32 95 95 14 24 32 42 14 24 32 54 64
On, closed
AUTO 13 23 31 16 18 06 96 98 13 23 31 08 98 13 23 31 96 98 13 23 31 41 13 23 31 53 63
08
14 24 32 15 05 95 14 24 32 05 95 14 24 32 95 95 14 24 32 42 14 24 32 54 64
Tripped on overload
13 23 31 16 18 06 96 98 13 23 31 08 98 13 23 31 96 98 13 23 31 41 13 23 31 53 63
TRIP. +
08
14 24 32 15 05 95 14 24 32 05 95 14 24 32 95 95 14 24 32 42 14 24 32 54 64
Off after overload

TRIP. +
13 23 31 16 18 06 96 98 13 23 31 08 98 13 23 31 96 98 13 23 31 41 13 23 31 53 63
08
14 24 32 15 05 95 14 24 32 05 95 14 24 32 95 95 14 24 32 42 14 24 32 54 64
TRIP. + 13 23 31 16 18 06 96 98 13 23 31 08 98 13 23 31 96 98 13 23 31 41 13 23 31 53 63
08
14 24 32 15 05 95 14 24 32 05 95 14 24 32 95 95 14 24 32 42 14 24 32 54 64

TRIP. + 13 23 31 16 18 06 96 98 13 23 31 08 98 13 23 31 96 98 13 23 31 41 13 23 31 53 63
08
14 24 32 15 05 95 14 24 32 05 95 14 24 32 95 95 14 24 32 42 14 24 32 54 64
Manual reset
TRIP. + 13 23 31 16 18 06 08 96 98 13 23 31 08 98 13 23 31 96 98 13 23 31 41 13 23 31 53 63
14 24 32 15 05 95 14 24 32 05 95 14 24 32 95 95 14 24 32 42 14 24 32 54 64
RESET

1/189
Dimensions 1

Contactor breakers and reversing contactor breakers integral 18

Control circuit: a.c. Control circuit: d.c.
1 LD1 LB030
+ LBp LB03P
LD5 LB130
+ LBp LB03P
LDp LBp30 + LBp LB03P + LA1 LB080
LD3 LB
LA1 LB080
97,5
78,5
148,5
167,5
135
135
135
45
45
45
70
70
109,5 36 4,5
=
=
45 109,5 36 4,5
123 45 90 4,5 123 45
139 99 139

LDp LCp30 LDp LCp40 LDp LCpp0 + LBp LC0p + LA1 LC080
+ LBp LC03 + LB1 LC0p LDp LCp30 LDp LCp40
LA1 LC080 LA1 LC080
68,5 45 74,5
68,5 45 74,5
100
100
99
99
160
188
160
188
89
89
88
88
109 = 19 = = 38 = 109 = 19 = = 38 =
8
8
123 = = 52 33 123 = = 52 33
155 66 85 155 66 85

LDp LDp30 + LBp LD03 LDp LDp30 + LBp LD03 + LA1 LD080
LA1 LD080
121,5
97,5
104,5
128,5
210
243
45
250
210
45
121,5
100,5
121,5
100,5
146 = 28 =
16,5
146 = 28 =
16,5
158,5 = =
158,5 = =
192 90
192 90
Reversing contactor breakers integral 32 Reversing contactor breakers integral 63

LD5 LCp30 + LBp LC03M LD5 LDp30 + LBp LD03M
68,5 45 68,5
93
94
129,5
153,5
182
160
275
88
89
210
45
121,5
109 = 85 =
8
100,5
123 33
155 132
148 45
16,5
160,5 59 63 59
194 181
General : References integral 18 : References integral 32 : References integral 63 : Schemes :

1/190
Dimensions, Motor starters - open version 1
mounting 1
Current limiter Add-on blocks

LA9 LB920 For mounting on contactor breakers integral 18
LA1 LB015
LA1 LB001
LA1 LB031
LA1 LB0311
LA1 LB034
LA1 LB0341
LA1 LB080BD
LA4 D
1
2∅M4
b
146
103
115
LA1 LB001
LA1 LB015
6 51 12 11 12 12
53,5
b
LA1 LB080BD 19
LA4 DA, DE, DF, DT 12
LA4 DL, DM, DR, DW 19
Add-on blocks
For mounting on contactor breakers integral 32 and 63
LA1 LC012 LA1 LC010 LA1 LC052 LA1 LC020 LA1 LC030 LA1 LC025
LA1 LC001 LA1 LC07p (1 or 2) LA LC001
LA1 LC010
LA1 LC001 LA1 LC001
LA1 LC070
LA1 LC012 LA1 LC071 LA1 LC025
LA1 LC072
13 11 26 51 12 9 9 12 11
Add-on blocks
For mounting on reversing contactor breakers integral 18
LA1 LB015 LA1 LB080BD
LA1 LB021, LB0211, LA1 LB001 LA4 D
LA1 LB001
LA1 LB021, LB0211
b
LA1 LB001
LA1 LB015
11 12 12 11
b
LA1 LB080BD 19
LA4 DA, DE, DF, DT 12
LA4 DL, DM, DR, DW 19
Add-on blocks
For mounting on reversing contactor breakers integral 32 and 63
LA1 LC021, LC 025 LA1 LC031 LA1 LC012 LA1 LC010 LA1 LC052 LA1 LC020
LA1 LC001 LA1 LC001 LA1 LC07pp
LA1 LC001 LA1 LC031 LA1 LC001

LA1 LC021 LA1 LC025 LA1 LC021 LA1 LC012
LA1 LC010
LA1 LC070
LA1 LC071
LA1 LC072
11 13 12 26 13 11 26 51 12

1/191
Mounting 1

integral 18
On 35 mm 6 rail On 32 mm 4 rails, at 145 mm centres On pre-slotted mounting plate AM1 P
1
78,5
DZ5 ME8
148,5
145
135
135
70
139 (AM1 DE200) 45

10 139 15 36
139 AF1 EA4 36
integral 18 with current limiter LA9 LB920 Several integral 18 units with current limiter LA9 LB920
LH side Upstream
LA9 LB930
100 mini
integral 32
On 35 mm 6 rail On 32 mm 4 rails, at 170 mm centres On pre-slotted mounting plate AM1 P
93
182
160
170
160
DZ5 ME8
89
155 (AM1 DE200) a

10 155 15 G 155 AF1 EA4 G
a G G
LD1 LCp30 66 LD1 LCp30 19 LD1 LCp30 19
integral 32 with current limiter LA9 LB920
LH side Upstream
100 mini
integral 63
On 75 mm 6 rail, with mounting plate LA9 LD010 On 32 mm 4 rails, at 220 mm centres On pre-slotted mounting plate AM1 P
137,5
266
210
210
210
220
LA9 LD010 DZ5 ME9

128,5
c 33 G 4xØM5 c 15 G c AF1 EA5 G

75
a b c G c G c G
LD1 266 137.5 192 28 LD1 192 28 LD1 192 28
LD4 266 137.5 192 28 LD4 192 28 LD4 192 28
LD5 282 153.5 194 63 LD5 194 63 LD5 194 63

1/192
Mounting 1

integral 18
With mounting plate LA9 LC010
On 32 mm 4 rails, at 120 mm centres
120
1
110
139 36
integral 32
With mounting plate LA9 LC010 With mounting plate LA9 LC012 With mounting plate LA9 LC012
On 32 mm 4 rails, at 120 mm centres On 35 mm 6 rail On 32 mm 4 rails, at 120 mm centres
LA9 LC012 LA9 LC012
DZ5 ME5
110
120
50
110
206
110
160
120
155 36
96
36
19 40
155 33 155 31
75
With height compensation plate LA9 LC011 (1)

With mounting plate LA9 LD010
On 75 mm 6 rail On pre-slotted mounting plate AM1 P
LA9 LD010 LA9 LC011 4xM5,5
LA9 LC011
160
208
160
210
155 155 37 28
37 33 28
75
(1) For raising the front face of the integral 32 to the same height as that of the integral 63.
integral 63
With mounting plate LA9 LD010
On 32 mm 4 rails, at 120 mm centres
LA9 LD010
DZ5 ME5
G
110
120
68
40
c 31
c G
LD1 192 78
LD4 192 78
LD5 194 94

1/193
Mounting 1

integral 18 (contactor breakers and reversing contactor breakers)

Flush mounting Minimum electrical
1 clearance
20
a
(2)
==
46
a a1 a2
(1)
1
LD1 LB030 46 – –
a1
LD5 LB130 100 – –
a2
LA1 LB0pp – 13.5 –
20
2 2 x LA1 LB0pp – – 27
(1) Centre of operating handle.

(2) Fixing centre.

clearance
4 (1) a a1 a2
20
LD1 LC030 66 – –
a LD4 LCp30 66 – –
(3)
LD1 LC040 85 – –
LD4 LCp40 85 – –
==
46
LD5 LCp30 122 – –

(2)
1
LA1 LC010 – 13 –
a1
LA1 LC012 – 13 –
20
a2
LA1 LC010 + LA1 LC052p – – 51
LA1 LC012 + LA1 LC052p – – 51
(1) Maximum door thickness for interlocking by LD4 and LD5.

(3) Fixing centre.

clearance
4 (1)
30
a
a a1 a2
(3)
LD1 LD030 90 – –
LD4 LDp30 90 – –
==
46
LD5 LDp30 181 – –

(2)
1
LA1 LC010 – 13 –
a1
LA1 LC012 – 13 –
a2
LA1 LC010 + LA1 LC052p – – 51
LA1 LC012 + LA1 LC052p – – 51
30
(1) Maximum door thickness for interlocking by LD4 and LD5.

(3) Fixing centre.
References integral 18 : References integral 32 : References integral 63 :

pages 1/134 to 1/141 pages 1/152 to 1/163 pages 1/176 to 1/187
1/194
Mounting of accessories 1

integral 18
Adjustable door interlock mechanism LA9 LB33p
For mounting on LD1 LB030 + LBp LB03Ppp, LD5 LB130 + LBp LB03Ppp
LD1 LB030 + LD5 LB130 +
Door drillings 1
LBp LB03Ppp LBp LB03Ppp
= =
54
148,5
135
135
65
63,25
63,25
= =
54 180…340 36 90 54
== = =
45 99
integral 32
Adjustable door interlock mechanisms LA9 LC33p and LA9 LC53p
For mounting on LD4 LCp30 and LCp40, LD5 LCp30 Door drillings
LD4 LCp30 LD4 LCp40 LD5 LCp30
80
= =
54
182
65
80
80
80
80
= =
54
54 170…320 = 19 = = 38 = = 85 =
= = 52 33 99 33
66 85 132
integral 63
Adjustable door interlock mechanisms LA9 LC33p and LA9 LC53p
For mounting on LD4 LDp30 and LD5 LDp30 Door drillings
LD4 LDp30 LD5 LDp30
= =
54
105
105
275
243
65
= =
54
105
105
105
54 207…357 (LD4) = 28 = 45
209…359 (LD5) = = 59 63 59
90 181
References integral 18 : References integral 32 : References integral 63 :

1/195
Schemes 1

Contactor breakers integral 18 Reversing contactor breakers Current limiter LA9 LB920 +
with protection module LBp integral 18 contactor breakers integral 18
1 LD1 LB030 + LB1 LB03P, LD3 LB130Mpp
with protection module LBp
LD5 LB130 + LB1 LB03P
LD1 LB030 + LB1 LB03P
1/L1
3/L2
5/L3
1/L1
3/L2
5/L3
1/L1
3/L2
5/L3
A1
A1
A2
A2
A1
A2
1/L1
3/L2
5/L3
II I
A1
A2
6/T3
2/T1
4/T2
2/T1
4/T2
6/T3
2/T1
4/T2
6/T3
Add-on blocks
For contactor breakers LD1 and LD3 For contactor breakers LD1 and LD3 and reversing contactor breakers LD5
Mounted on LH side Mounted on RH side
Breaker
LA1 LB034 LA1 LB031 LA1 LB015 LA1 LB001
13
23
31
41
05
07
Short-circuit
signalling
14
24
32
42
06
08
Trip signalling
Auto 0
95
97
15
17
15
17
Signalling
96
98
16
18
16
18
Control knob
position
For reversing contactor breakers LD5

Mounted on LH side
Breaker
LA1 LB0341 LA1 LB0311 LA1 LB001 LA1 LB021
05
07
41
13
23
31
Short-circuit
signalling
Contacts
06
08
42
14
24
32
incorporated in unit
07
05
Auto 0 Short-circuit
15
17
15
17
signalling
Signalling
06
08
16
18
16
18
Control knob
position Auto 0
15
17
Signalling
16
18
Control knob
position
Breaker
LA1 LB001 LA1 LB0211
41
13
23
31
Contacts
42
14
24
32
incorporated in unit
07
05
Short-circuit
signalling
06
08
Auto 0
15
17
Signalling
16
18
Control knob
position
General : References : Dimensions :

1/196
Schemes 1

Contactor breakers integral 32 with protection module LBp Reversing contactor breakers
integral 32
LD1 LC0p0 + LB1 LC0pp LD4 LCpp0 + LB1 LC0pp

LD5 LCp30 + LB1 LC03M
1
1/L1
3/L2
5/L3
1/L1
3/L2
5/L3
1/L1
3/L2
5/L3
N1
N1
A1
A2
A1
A2
A1
A1
A2
A2
2/T1
4/T2
6/T3
N2
2/T1
4/T2
6/T3
N2
LB1 LC05L
2/T1
4/T2
6/T3
LB6 LC03M
LB6 LC03M
2/T1
4/T2
6/T3
2/T1
4/T2
6/T3
2/T1
4/T2
6/T3
N2
Current limiter LA9 LB920 + contactor breakers integral 32 with protection module LBp
LDp LCp30 + LB1 LC03Mpp
1/L1
3/L2
5/L3
1/L1
3/L2
5/L3
A1
A2
2/T1
4/T2
6/T3
Add-on blocks
For contactor breakers LD4 For contactor breakers LD1 or LD4 and reversing contactor breakers LD5
Isolator Breaker
(64) (63)
13
23
31
13
23
31
13
23
31
13
23
31
41
53
53
14
24
32
14
24
32
14
24
32
14
24
32
42
54
54
1 or 2 LA1 LC030 Trip signalling

96
98
98
or
98
96
For reversing contactor breakers LD5

95
95
Mounted on LH side or
95
95
Short-circuit
signalling
06
08
08
LA1 LC001 LA1 LC021

41
13
23
31
05
05
42
14
24
32
Auto +0
16
18
Isolator
LA1 LC031
15
Control knob
53
63
position
signalling
54
64

1/197
Schemes 1

Contactor breakers integral 63 with protection module LBp Reversing contactor breakers
integral 63
1 LD1 LD030 + LB1 LD03p LD4 LDp30 + LB1 LD03p
LD5 LDp30 + LB1 LD03M or LD03P
1/L1
3/L2
5/L3
1/L1
3/L2
5/L3
1/L1
3/L2
5/L3
A1
A1
A2
A2
A1
A1
A2
A2
–Q1 –Q1
2/T1
4/T2
6/T3
2/T1
4/T2
6/T3
2/T1
4/T2
6/T3
LB6 LD03M LB6 LD03M
2/T1
4/T2
6/T3
2/T1
4/T2
6/T3
Add-on blocks
For contactor breakers LD4 For contactor breakers LD1 or LD4 and reversing contactor breakers LD5
Isolator Breaker
(64) (63)
13
23
31
13
23
31
13
23
31
13
23
31
41
53
53
14
24
32
14
24
32
14
24
32
14
24
32
42
54
54
1 or 2 LA1 LC030 Trip signalling

96
98
98
or
98
96
95
95
For reversing contactor breakers LD5 or

95
95
Mounted on LH side Short-circuit

06
08
signalling
08
LA1 LC001 LA1 LC021

05
05
41
13
23
31
Auto +0
42
14
24
32
16
18
15
Isolator Control knob

LA1 LC031 position
53
63
54
64

1/198
Schemes 1

Tripping devices (1) for LD1, LD4, LD5 Remote electrical reset devices (1) for LD1 to LD5
LA1 LC071 LA1 LC070, LC072 LA1 LC052p
The use of instantaneous auxiliary 1

C1
D1 TRIP +
contact block LA1 LC020 prevents
U< RESET the use of tripping devices or electrical
reset devices
C2
D2
B4 B1
M
B2
B3
(1) For contactor breakers and reversing contactor breakers already fitted with an LA1 LC010 or LA1 LC012 instantaneous auxiliary contact block.
Interface modules
LA4 DW solid state LA4 DF relay output LA4 DL relay output (with manual override)
E1 +
E1 +
E1 +
E2 –
E2 –
E2 –
A2
A1
A2
A1
A1
A2
K K K
LA1 LC180, LD180 LA1 LC580, LD580
A1 A1
+ E1 + E1
– E2 – E2
A2 A2
Voltage converters LA1 LB080, LC080, LD080 (supplied with contactor breakers for c control circuit operation )
Switching by control contact Switching by “Low level” input
24 or 48 V 24 or 48 V
E1 E1 E1
+ A1 + A1 + A1
Supply
Low E3
E3 level +
input
– (0V) A2 – (0V) A2
– – A2
E2 E2
(0V) E2
Electronic serial timer modules Auto-Man-Stop control modules

LA4 DT On-delay LA4 DR Off-delay LA4 DMp
A1
B2
A2
A2
A1
A2
A1
(1)
B1
0 t 0 t AUTO/
MAN
I/O
A1
A2
A1
A2
A1
A2
K K
K
(1) PLC

1/199
characteristics 1
Adaptors for use with busbar systems
Presentation
Reducing the installation time of components is an important factor that also
1 increases productivity.
The comprehensive range of adaptors and mounting accessories allows this
objective to be achieved.
There are numerous advantages:
b saving of space in enclosures,
b reduced size of enclosures,
b reduced wiring time,
b increased protection of personnel against accidental direct contact (IP 20) through
the use of insulated mounting rails,
b flexibility and modularity of equipment,
b reliable operation of the equipment with easier maintenance.
Description
Power distribution is achieved by a 3-pole or 5-pole busbar system.
The adaptors clip directly onto the busbar system, providing instantaneous electrical
LA9 Z32199 connection. Busbar system pitch: 40 or 60 mm.
These adaptors allow mounting of motor starter components such as:
b GV2 ME, GV2 P or GV3 ME motor circuit-breakers,
b model k and model d contactors up to 38 A,
b integral 18, 32 and 63 contactor breakers,
They are available in different sizes to allow easy installation of varying component
combinations.
These adaptors can be used in conjunction with interface modules communicating
with an AS-Interface cabling system. This enables motor starters to be set up on an
AS-Interface cabling system, bringing all the advantages of the 2 technologies.
General characteristics
Degree of protection IP 20 with insulated mounting rail LA9 Z098pp
Temperature resistance °C 120
Rated frequency of current Hz 50/60
Rated operational current Depending on type of busbar mm 12 x 5 12 x 10 15 x 5 20 x 5 20 x 10 25 x 5 30 x 5 30 x 10
and at 35 °C A 200 360 250 320 520 400 450 630
Coefficient K to be applied °C 35 40 45 50 55 60
according to ambient temperature K 1 0.9 0.75 0.65 0.55 0.35
Rated insulation voltage V 690 conforming to IEC 60947-1 and NF C 20-040
Rated permissible With insulated busbar support LA9 Z11098 and Z11099 LA9 Z11100 and Z11101
peak current Busbar dimensions mm 12 x 5 12 x 10 12 x 5 12 x 10 20 x 10 30 x 5 30 x 10
Rated current kA 35 35 30 35 35 45 55
Maximum let-through energy A2s 1 x 108 4 x 108 1 x 108 11 x 108 11 x 108 6.2 x 108 24.8 x 108
Support fixing, by screws mm 4x6 4x5
Cabling, by connectors LA9 Z11103 LA9 Z11104 LA9 Z11105
Min. Max. Min. Max. Min. Max.
Flexible cable with cable end mm2 4 35 16 70 120 120
Multi-strand cable mm2 4 35 16 70 35 120
Solid cable mm2 4 35 – – – –
Tightening torque N.m 1x6 1 x 10 3 x 12
Characteristics of adaptors for use with busbar systems (3-phase)

Adaptor type LA9 Z 32196 32199 32343, 32344 32345 32253 32248
32228 32200 40132, 60132 32249
23229 32208 to 210 40232, 60232
32232
Degree of protection conforming to IEC 60529 IP 20
Conductor c.s.a. mm2 4 6 6 10 16 2.5
(colour: black) AWG 12 AWG 10 AWG 10 AWG 8 – AWG 22/14
Type of conductor insulation PVC 105 °C –
Permissible current A 25 32 32 63 80 15
Rated insulation voltage V 690 conforming to NF C 20-040 and IEC 60947-1 250
Rated peak current kA 6 6 6 10 10 –
Maximum let-through energy A2s 2 x 105 2 x 10 5 2 x 105 3 x 105 3 x 105 –
References : Dimensions :
pages 1/202 to 1/209 pages 1/210 and 1/211
1/200
Characteristics 1

Short-circuit resistance
Determining the spacing between busbar supports (1)

Busbar system with 40 mm pitch Busbar system with 60 mm pitch
1
Peak current Ipk (kA)
Peak current Ipk (kA)

50 70
40 60
12 x 5 and 12 x 10 30 x 10
30 50
30 x 5
20 40 12 x 10
and 20 x 10
12 x 5
10 30
0 20
200 300 400 500 600 200 300 400 500 600
Busbar support fixing centres (mm) Busbar support fixing centres (mm)
(1) Depending on the prospective short-circuit current

Current capacity of busbars
For an ambient temperature of 35°C and a busbar temperature of 65°C
C.s.a. mm2 12 x 5 15 x 5 20 x 5 25 x 5 30 x 5 12 x 10 20 x 10 30 x 10
Permissible current A 200 250 320 400 450 360 520 630
If the above climatic conditions are modified, consult the chart below to find the correction factor K 2 to be applied.
Factor K2
Ambient temperature
°C
2,2 0
5
2,1
10
2,0 15
20
1,9 25
30
1,8
35
1,7 40
45
1,6 50
55
1,5
60
1,4 65
1,3
1,2
1,1
1,0
0,9
0,8
0,7
0,6
0,5
0,4
0,3
50 55 60 65 70 75 80 85 90 95 100 105 110 115 120 125
Busbar temperature (°C)
Example: in normal operating conditions, a set of 30 x 10 tinned busbars can withstand a continuous load of 630 A.
800 A
For a load of 800 A, the correction coefficient K 2 to be applied will be 1.3 ( ). It follows that the temperature rise of the busbars will be
82.5 °C. 630 A
1/201
1
1
40 mm : LA9 Z32228
1 60 mm : LA9 Z32229
GV2 ME, GV2 P
40 mm : LA9 Z32196
GV2 ME, GV2 P
LC1, LP1, LP4 K06…K12
LC1, LP1, LP4 K06…K12
40 mm : LA9 Z32199
60 mm : LA9 Z32200
GV2 ME, GV2 P

40 mm : LA9 Z40132
60 mm : LA9 Z60132
GV2 ME, GV2 P
LC1 D09…D38
LC1 D09…D38
1/202
References 1
Adaptors for busbar systems with 40 mm pitch - non-reversing

Motor starter type Operational Width x height Sold in Unit Weight
current AC-3
440 V
of adaptor lots of reference
1
A mm kg
GV2 ME + LC1, LP1, 12 45 x 139 4 LA9 Z32196 0.788
LP4 K06…K12
or GV2 P 45 x 182 4 LA9 Z32228 0.984
GV2 ME + LC1 D09…D38 32 45 x 182 4 LA9 Z40132 0.984

or GV2 P
54 x 182 4 LA9 Z32199 1.144

current AC-3 of adaptor lots of reference
440 V
A mm kg
GV2 ME + LC1, LP1, 12 45 x 182 4 LA9 Z32229 0.984
LP4 K06…K12
or GV2 P
GV2 ME + LC1 D09…D38 32 45 x 182 4 LA9 Z60132 0.984
or GV2 P
54 x 182 4 LA9 Z32200 1.220
Characteristics : Dimensions :
pages 1/200 and 1/201 pages 1/210 and 1/211
1/203
1
1
1 60 mm : LA9 Z32210
GV2 ME, GV2 P
40 mm : LA9 Z32232
GV2 ME, GV2 P
LC2, LP2, LP5 K06…K12
LC2, LP2, LP5 K06…K12
40 mm : LA9 Z32208
60 mm : LA9 Z32209
GV2 ME, GV2 P
40 mm : LA9 Z40232
60 mm : LA9 Z60232
GV2 ME, GV2 P
LC2 D09…D38
LC2 D09…D38
1/204
Adaptors for busbar systems with 40 mm pitch - reversing

current AC-3
440 V
of adaptor lots of reference
1
A mm kg
GV2 ME + LC2, LP2, 12 90 x 139 2 LA9 Z32232 0.788
LP5 K06…K12
or GV2 P
GV2 ME + LC2 D09…D38 32 90 x 182 4 LA9 Z40232 1.884
or GV2 P
135 x 182 1 LA9 Z32208 0.638

Motor starter type Operational Width x height Sold in Unit reference Weight
current AC-3 of adaptor lots of
440 V
A mm kg
GV2 ME + LC2, LP2, 12 90 x 182 4 LA9 Z32210 1.868
LP5 K06…K12
or GV2 P
GV2 ME + LC2 D09…D38 32 90 x 182 4 LA9 Z60232 1.948
or GV2 P
135 x 182 1 LA9 Z32209 0.651
1/205
1
1
1 60 mm : LA9 Z32343
60 mm : LA9 Z32253
LD1 LB, LC, LD4 LC
GV3 ME
60 mm : LA9 Z32344
60 mm : LA9 Z32345
LD5 LB, LC
LD1 LD, LD4 LD
1/206

Motor starter type Operational current AC-3 Width x height Reference Weight
A
440 V of adaptor
mm kg
1
integral LD1 LB 18 67.5 x 182 LA9 Z32343 0.590
integral LD1, LD4 LC 32 67.5 x 182 LA9 Z32343 0.590
integral LD1, LD4 LD 63 108 x 244 LA9 Z32345 0.887
GV3 ME 80 72 x 182 LA9 Z32253 0.347

Type of starter Operational current AC-3 Width x height Reference Weight
440 V of adaptor
A mm kg
integral LD5 LB 18 135 x 182 LA9 Z32344 1.001
integral LD5 LC 32 135 x 182 LA9 Z32344 1.001
1/207
1
1
LA9 Z11099 LA9 Z11098 LA9 Z11103 LA9 Z32936 LA9 Z32ppp LA9 Z098pp
1
40 mm
LA9 Z11098 LA9 Z11099
LA9 Z11100 LA9 Z11101

LA9 Z32248
LA9 Z32249
LA9 Z91413 LA9 Z11105 LA9 Z32ppp LA9 Z098pp
LA9 Z11102
60 mm
LA9 Z11100 LA9 Z11104 LA9 Z32248

LA9 Z32249
LA9 Z11118 LA9 Z11101
LA9 Z11105
1/208
Accessories for busbar sets with 40 mm pitch

Busbar system supports (1) 3-pole

lots of
10
reference
LA9 Z11098
kg
1.040
1
3-pole + N + T 10 LA9 Z11099 1.400
Insulated rails For busbars, thickness 5 mm 10 LA9 Z09818 0.420

(length 1 m)
For busbars, thickness 10 mm 10 LA9 Z09820 0.940
Connector Capacity 35 mm 2 50 LA9 Z11103 2.300
Protective cover For connector LA9 Z11103 1 LA9 Z91413 0.160
Side module, 13.5 x 182 mm For increasing the width of the adaptor 4 LA9 Z32936 0.472
Plug-in terminal blocks Width 54 mm 1 LA9 Z32248 0.066

on LA9 Z32ppp (7-pole)
Width 45 mm 1 LA9 Z32249 0.055
Accessories for busbar sets with 60 mm pitch

Busbar system supports (1) 3-pole 10 LA9 Z11100 2.100
3-pole + N 10 LA9 Z11101 2.660
Insulated terminal shroud 3-pole 10 LA9 Z11102 0.310
4-pole 10 LA9 Z11118 0.380
Insulated rails For busbars, thickness 5 mm 10 LA9 Z09819 0.800

(length 1 m)
For busbars, thickness 10 mm 10 LA9 Z09820 0.940
Connectors Capacity 70 mm 2 25 LA9 Z11104 1.875
3-pole capacity 120 mm2 1 LA9 Z11105 (2) 0.719
Protective cover For connector LA9 Z11104 1 LA9 Z91413 0.160
Plug-in terminal blocks Width 54 mm 1 LA9 Z32248 0.066

on LA9 Z32ppp (7-pole)
Width 45 mm 1 LA9 Z32249 0.055
(1) For dimensions and rated operational current, see pages 1/200 and 1/201.
(2) Supplied complete with protective cover
1/209
Dimensions 1

Motor starter combinations for customer assembly
Dimensions
GV2 ME or P + LCp, LPp K GV2 ME or P + LCp D
1
x
x
x
e1
e1
e1
40/60 40/60
40/60 40/60
40/60 40/60
b
b
c a b
c a c a
Motor starter combinations, non-reversing

Motor starter type a b 40 mm system 60 mm system e1
c Adaptor c Adaptor
a c or reference a c or Other reference
LC(1) LC(1)
GV2 ME + LC1, LP1 or LP4 K06 to K12 45 152 125 125 LA9 Z32196 – – – – 40
GV2 P + LC1, LP1 or LP4 K06 to K12 45 152 145 145 LA9 Z32196 – – – – 40
GV2 ME + LC1, LP1 or LP4 K06 to K12 45 184 125 125 LA9 Z32228 135 135 – LA9 Z32229 40
GV2 P + LC1, LP1 or LP4 K06 to K12 45 184 145 145 LA9 Z32228 155 155 – LA9 Z32229 40
GV2 ME + LC1 D09 to D18 45 200 139 139 LA9 Z40132 149 149 – LA9 Z60132 40
GV2 P + LC1 D09 to D18 45 200 142 142 LA9 Z40132 152 152 – LA9 Z60132 40
integral 18 LD1 68 184 – – – – – 195 LA9 Z32343 33
integral 32 LD1, LD4 68 184 – – – – – 225 LA9 Z32343 33
integral 63 LD1, LD4 108 244 – – – – – 250 LA9 Z32345 50
GV3 ME 72 182 – – – – – 180 LA9 Z32253 50
(1) LC = Low Consumption
X electrical clearance Ue y 415 V Ue = 440 V Ue = 500 and 600 V

GV2 ME 40 40 40
GV2 P 40 80 120
integral 18 or 32 30 20 30
integral 63 20 20 20
GV3 ME 40 40 50
Characteristics : References :
1/210
Dimensions (continued) 1

Motor starter combinations for customer assembly
Dimensions
GV2 ME or P + LC2, LP2 K integral
1
x
x
e1
e1
40/60 40/60
60
b
60
c a
c a
Motor starter combinations, reversing

Motor starter type a b 40 mm system 60 mm system e1
c Adaptor c Adaptor
a c or reference a c or LD5 reference
LC(1) LC(1)
GV2 ME + LC2, LP2 K06 to K12 90 150 125 125 LA9 Z32232 – – – – 40
GV2 P + LC2, LP2 K06 to K12 90 150 145 145 LA9 Z32232 – – – – 40
GV2 ME + LC2, LP2 K06 to K12 90 184 – – – 135 135 – LA9 Z32210 40
GV2 P + LC2, LP2 K06 to K12 90 184 – – – 155 155 – LA9 Z32210 40
GV2 ME +LC2 D25 to D38 90 200 146 146 LA9 Z40232 156 156 – LA9 Z60232 40
GV2 ME + LP5 K06 to K12 90 150 – 125 LA9 Z32232 – – – – 40
GV2 P + LP5 K06 to K12 90 150 – 145 LA9 Z32232 – – – – 40
GV2 ME + LP5 K06 to K12 90 184 – – – – 135 – LA9 Z32210 40
GV2 P + LP5 K06 and K12 90 184 – – – – 155 – LA9 Z32210 40
integral 18 LD5 135 184 – – – – – 195 LA9 Z32344 33
integral 32 LD5 135 184 – – – – – 195 LA9 Z32344 33
(1) LC = Low Consumption
1/211
Selection guide 1
Installation system 1
TeSys Quickfit for motor starter components
Functions Assembly and connection of motor starter components with spring terminals, without
using tools
1
Product type Power circuit pre-wiring Control-command pre-wiring components
components
For contactors TeSys d
Type of starter Direct and reversing Direct Reversing
Coil control – Yes No Yes No
Use with motor starters Limited to 60 A (Ith) Limited to 8 starters (1)
Number of motor starters 1 1
Type of connection or bus –
Number of channels –
References LAD 3p LAD 9AP3pp
Pages 1/219 1/221
(1) With upstream terminal block LAD 3B1.
1/212
1
1
Communication with the processing part
1
Splitter box Parallel interface module, with Advantys STB network
interface modules
– –
– –
– –
– –
8 starters per splitter box 4 starters per module
HE 10 Modbus Plus, Fipio, CANopen, Ethernet TCP/IP, Profibus DP

INTERBUS, DeviceNet
16 inputs/12 outputs –
LU9 G02 STB EPI 2145
1/221
1/213
Presentation 1
TeSys Quickfit is a modular system which standardises and simplifies setting up of

motor starters with its pre-wired control and power circuits.
Installation of a motor starter is therefore quick, simple, safe and flexible.
1 In addition, this system:
b enables the motor starter to be customised at a later date,
b reduces maintenance time and
b optimises panel space by reducing the number of terminals and intermediate
interfaces and the amount of ducting.
System for motor starters with spring terminals,

from 0 to 25 A (up to 11 kW/400 V)
The motor starters concerned are those formed by combining:
- GV2 ME circuit-breakers, with an operating limit of 80% of maximum current at
60°C ambient temperature, up to 690 V
- 9 to 25 A model d contactors (LC1).
This range comprises pre-wiring components for:

b the power circuits,
b the control circuits.
Power circuit pre-wiring components
b a power circuit connection kit comprising, for each starter, a plate for mounting
the contactor and the circuit-breaker and two power connection modules,
b a power splitter box for 2 or 4 starters,
b an upstream terminal block for a power supply up to 60 A (16 mm2),
b an outgoing terminal block for connection of the motor power supply cables and
the earth cables (6 mm 2).
Control circuit pre-wiring components
b a control circuit connection module which plugs directly into the contactor and
the circuit-breaker on each starter. This module incorporates status and control data
for this motor starter.
b a parallel wiring module which concentrates the data of each motor starter:
v HE 10 connector, for centralised applications. Data is transmitted to the plc via the
Advantys Telefast pre-wired system.
v STB, designed for decentralised automation architectures. This module is suitable
for use in an Advantys STB configuration for connection to the plc via a field bus.
Description: Characteristics : References: Dimensions: Schemes :

pages 1/216 and 1/217 pages 1/222 and 1/223 pages 1/218 to 1/221 pages 1/224 and 1/225 pages 1/226 and 1/227
1/214
Presentation (continued) 1
Control/command
HE 10 connection
Automation
1
platform LU9 G02
TSXCDPpp
ABFH20pp
Connection on bus using Advantys STB (1)

Configuration example (for motor starter applications only):
Power supply module

Module STB PDT 3100
Connection base STB XBA 2200
Terminal block STB XTB 1130
Parallel interface module (2)
Module STB EPI 2145
Connection base STB XBA 3000
Network interface module (3)
CANopen STB NCO 1010 (4)
Fipio STB NFP 2210
Ethernet TCP/IP STB NIP 2210
InterBus STB NIB 1010 (4)
Profibus DP STB NDP 1010 (4)
2 Network interface module DeviceNet STB NDN 1010 (4)
3 Power supply module Modbus Plus STB NMP 2210
4 Parallel interface module Terminal block STB WTS 2120
1 2 3
TeSys Quickfit LAD 9AP3 pp used with modules APP1 Cpp
5 TeSys Quickfit module

6
6 Adapter plate APP 2CX
7 Splitter box LU9 G02 for eight direct motor
starters with channel connections on the 7
APP 1C module side by two HE 10
connectors (20-way) and on the TeSys
Quickfit side, by eight RJ45 connectors.
8 Connection cable APP 2AH40H060
4 5
The motor starter is connected to an APP 1Cp module 4 using an adapter plate
APP 2CX 5 and a connecting cable APP 2AH40H060 7.
Information is available on the module for each motor starter:
b 1 output: motor control,
b 2 inputs: circuit-breaker status and contactor status.
(1) Please consult our catalogue “IP 20 distributed inputs/outputs Advantys STB”.
(2) For 4 direct or 2 reversing motor starters.
(3) Reference to be selected according to the network used.
(4) Optimised version.
Description: Characteristics : References: Dimensions: Schemes :

1/215
Description 1

Components with spring terminals
1 5 6 Power components
Power kits LAD 3p
1 Each motor starter requires a power kit which consists of a plate 1 and two Quickfit
technology power connection modules 2.
The plate is used for mounting TeSys d contactors 3 (9 to 25 A, direct or reversing,
with spring terminals and fitted with a.c. or d.c. coil) and the GV2 ME circuit-breaker
4 only.
This plate is mounted on two 35 mm 7 rails or is screwed onto a base plate.
The two power connection modules 2a and 2b are identical, whatever the rating of
the contactor up to 25 A.
The upper power connection module 2a connects the power between the splitter box
and the circuit-breaker.
4 The lower power connection module 2b connects the power between the
circuit-breaker and the contactor.
2a Splitter box LAD 32p

Splitter boxes 5 are available for 2 or 4 starters.
They can be combined to create motor starters up to 60 A per power supply.
A reversing starter occupies a width equivalent to that of two direct starters.
2b Direct supply of power to the splitter boxes is possible up to 25 A (4 mm 2).
Upstream terminal block LAD 3B1

3
The upstream terminal block 6 performs two functions:
b power supply up to 60 A (16 mm2),
b power supply between two connected splitter boxes.
7 The upstream terminal block connects to the splitter box using Quickfit technology.
It is positioned on the splitter box or straddling two splitter boxes and takes up a width
equivalent to two motor starters.
Outgoing terminal block LAD 331

The outgoing terminal block 7 performs two functions:
b connection of the motor power supply cables up to 6 mm 2,
b connection of the motor earth cables.
In addition, the terminal block enables quick connection and disconnection for
maintenance, avoiding the risk of phase reversal.
The outgoing terminal block connects to the downstream spring terminals on the
contactor, using Quickfit technology.
Presentation: Characteristics : References: Dimensions: Schemes:

1/216
Description (continued) 1

Control/command components
1 Control circuit connection modules LAD 9 AP3 pp
The control circuit connection module 1 plugs directly into the control terminals on 1
the contactor and on the GV2 circuit-breaker, in the location provided for the
front-mounting block.
It is compatible with all contactor ratings up to 25 A.
Mechanical locking 2 of the system onto the top of the contactor ensures a perfect
connection, whatever the operating conditions (vibrations, knocks etc.).
These modules are available in 4 versions: for direct or reversing starter, with or
without contactor coil interface relay.
The coil control can be a.c. or d.c., up to a 250 V and c 130 V.
The version without relay is designed to control the contactor coils with no interface,
at 24 V d.c.
The version with relay has an auxiliary power supply for supply to the contactor.
Module LAD9 AP3 pp incorporates, in its lower part, several external connectors:
3 RJ45 connector, for connecting the automation system.
4 2-way connector, for connecting the contactor power supply (only on versions with
relay).
5 2-way connector, for connecting an external contact in series with the contactor coil
(supplied complete with shunt).

The parallel wiring system makes it possible to connect motor starters which
incorporate TeSys Quickfit technology to the processing unit (PLC) quickly and
without any need for tools.
The parallel wiring module provides status and command information for each motor
starter.
2 3 4 5 Control connection modules LAD9 AP3 pp are connected to the parallel wiring
modules using cables RJ45 LU9Rpp 6, which are available in different lengths.
The following information is available for each motor starter:
b 2 inputs: circuit-breaker status and contactor status,
b 1 output: contactor coil control.
1 A direct motor starter uses one RJ45 channel.
A reversing motor starter uses two RJ45 channels.
Parallel wiring splitter box LU9 G02

This module 7 enables connection of up to 8 direct or 4 reversing motor starters
directly to the I/O modules of PLCs.
It is used with the Advantys Telefast pre-wired system (1).
This splitter box is optimised for use with card TSX DMZ28DTK.
Dedicated parallel interface module STB EPI 2145 (2)

This module enables 4 direct or 2 reversing motor starters to be connected via the
Advantys STB distributed I/O solution. With STB network interface modules, motor
starters can be connected to the following communication networks: Modbus Plus,
Fipio, CANopen, Ethernet TCP/IP, Profibus DP, INTERBUS, DeviceNet
7 6
(1) Please refer to our “Interfaces, I/O splitter boxes and power supplies” catalogue.
(2) Please consult our “IP 20 distributed inputs/outputs Advantys STB” catalogue.
Presentation: Characteristics: References: Dimensions: Schemes:

1/217
1
1/218
References 1

503797
Power circuit pre-wiring components

Description Maximum Application Sold in Reference Weight
Upstream
connection c.s.a.
16 mm2 (1) Power supply of 1 or 2
lots of
1 LAD 3B1
kg
0.212
1
terminal block power splitter boxes
Description Extension by Number of starters Reference Weight
LAD 3B1 kg
Power splitter box, LAD 32p 2 LAD 322 0.120
510365
60 A 4 LAD 324 0.240
Description Kit composition Reference Weight

kg
Direct starter
LAD 324 Power connection kit 1 plate LAD 311 for GV2 ME and LAD 252 0.078
2 power connection modules LAD 341
Reversing starter
To build a reversing starter, order 2 kits LAD 252
563641
Description Maximum Application Sold in Reference Weight

connection c.s.a. lots of kg
Outgoing 6 mm2 Connection of motor cables 10 LAD 331 0.050
terminal block
Description No. of Sold in Unit Weight
starters lots of reference kg
Plate for mounting a 1 10 LAD 311 0.042
GV2 ME circuit-breaker and a contactor
Power connection module 1 10 LAD 341 0.018
(1) Cables with one end pre-crimped are available to allow fast connection. References:
LAD 252
1 set of 3 x 6 mm2 cables (length 1 m: LAD 3B061, length 2 m: LAD 3B062 and length 3 m: LAD 3B063,
1 set of 3 x 10 mm2 cables (length 1 m: LAD 3B101, length 2 m: LAD 3B102 and length 3 m: LAD 3B103,
1 set of 3 x16 mm2 (length 1 m: LAD 3B161, length 2 m: LAD 3B162 and length 3 m: LAD 3B163.
563643
LAD 331
Presentation: Description: Characteristics: Dimensions: Schemes:

pages 1/214 and 1/215 pages 1/216 and 1/217 pages 1/222 and 1/223 pages 1/224 and 1/225 pages 1/226 and 1/227
1/219
1
1/220

503847
Control-command pre-wiring components

Description TeSys d Type of coil Type of Reference Weight
Control
coil voltage
a 12... 250 V
control relay
Electromechanical
starter
Direct LAD 9AP31 r
kg
0.150
1
connection or c 5.... 130 V Reversing LAD 9AP32 r 0.200
modules
c 24 V Without relay Direct LAD 9AP3D1 r 0.140
Reversing LAD 9AP3D2 r 0.190
Parallel wiring modules (c 24 V)

Description Connectors Reference Weight
PLC side Motor starter side kg
Splitter box 2 x HE 10 8 x RJ45 LU9 G02 0.260
20-way
LAD 9AP3p
Description Connectors Reference Weight

PLC side Motor starter side kg
Advantys STB – 4 x RJ45 STB EPI 2145 0.165
parallel interface module
Connection cables
Between the control connection module and the splitter box LU9 G02 or STB EPI 2145
Connectors Length Reference Weight
m kg
2 x RJ45 connectors 0.3 LU9 R03 0.045
1 LU9 R10 0.065
3 LU9 R30 0.125
Between splitter box LU9 G02 and the PLC

Type of connection Gauge C.s.a. Length Reference Weight
PLC side Splitter box side
AWG mm 2 m kg
HE 10 HE 10 22 0.324 0.5 TSX CDP 053 0.085
20-way 20-way 1 TSX CDP 103 0.150
2 TSX CDP 203 0.280
3 TSX CDP 303 0.410
5 TSX CDP 503 0.670
28 0.080 1 ABF H20 H100 0.080

2 ABF H20 H200 0.140
3 ABF H20 H300 0.210
Bare wires HE 10 22 0.324 3 TSX CDP 301 0.400

20-way 5 TSX CDP 501 0.660
Separate components
Description Characteristics Sold in Unit Weight
lots of reference
kg
Spring terminal connections for: 2-way, 5 mm pitch 10 APE 1PRE21 0.020
b the external contact Wire c.s.a.: 0.2…2.5 mm²
b the auxiliary power supply
Self-stripping connector for: 2-way, 5 mm pitch 16 APE 1PAD21 0.020

b the external contact Wire c.s.a.: 0.75 mm²
b the auxiliary power supply
Connecting cable Connectors: 1 APP 2AH40H060 0.400

between module APP 1Cp and 1 x 30-way HE 10
splitter box LU9 G02 (length: 0.6 m) 2 x 20-way HE 10
r Available 3rd quarter 2006.
Presentation: Description: Characteristics: Dimensions: Schemes:

pages 1/214 and 1/215 pages 1/216 and 1/217 pages 1/222 and 1/223 pages 1/224 and 1/225 pages 1/226 and 1/227
1/221
Characteristics 1
Type of control connection module LAD 9AP3pp

General environment
1 Standard
Certifications
IEC 60439-1
UL, CSA (pending)
Degree of protection Conforming to IEC 60529 IP 40 (mounted assembly)
Resistance to Conforming to IEC 60695-2-1 °C 960
incandescent wire
Shock resistance Conforming to IEC 60068-2-27 11 ms and 15 gn (half sine wave)
Vibration resistance Conforming to IEC 60068-2-6 gn 2…100 Hz: 4 and 3…100 Hz: 0.7
and BV/LR
Resistance to Conforming to IEC 61000-4-2 Level 3
electrostatic discharge
Resistance to radiated fields Conforming to IEC 61000-4-3 V/m 10 (26…1000 MHz)
Immunity to Conforming to IEC 61000-4-4 Level 3
fast transient currents
Surge withstand Conforming to IEC 61000-4-5 kV 2 in common mode, 0.6 in differential mode
Wave form: 1.2/50 µs - 8/20 µs
Immunity to Conforming to IEC 61000-4-6 V 10 (0.15...80 MHz)
radio electrical fields
Ambient air temperature Operation in °C - 5…+ 60
floor-standing enclosure
Operation in °C - 5…+ 40
wall-mounted enclosure
Storage °C - 40…+ 70
Space required around For inserting cables mm > 30
mounted assembly and heat dissipation
Degree of pollution 3
Assembly fixing On 2 x 35 mm rails or with 2 x Ø 5.5 mm screws on plate for GV2 ME
Suitable wire Voltage supply Number of wires 3
c.s.a. for power Flexible cable with cable end mm² 16
Flexible cable without cable end mm² 25
Solid cable mm² 25
Voltage supply Number of wires 2
for contactor Flexible cable with cable end mm² 1.5
coil control (max)
Flexible cable without cable mm² 2.5
end (max)
Solid cable (max) mm² 2.5
3-phase power circuit characteristics

Maximum Per power Conforming to IEC 60439-1 A 60 (single power supply to one or more sub-bases or splitter boxes)
current supply
Per sub-base Conforming to IEC 60439-1 A 60
GV2 operating limit 80 % of Imax at 60° C ambient temperature (see table on opposite page)
Maximum current per starter A 25 (with an empty slot between two starters)
Insulation voltage V 750
Operational voltage V 690
U imp kV 6
Rated operational frequency Hz 50-60
Rated conditional Conforming to IEC 60439-1 kA 50
short-circuit current Isc at 415 V
Permissible Conforming to IEC 60439-1 kA 9.1 (for 70 ms)
short-time rating Icw
Contactor coil control voltage V a 12…250 (with interface relay)
V c 5…24 (without interface relay)
V c 5…130 (with interface relay)
Presentation: Description: References: Dimensions : Schemes:

1/222
Table of GV2 circuit-breaker current limitation at 60°C ambient temperature with TeSys Quickfit
Circuit-breaker reference GV2 ratings (1) Maximum current of GV2 with TeSys Quickfit
GV2 ME06
GV2 ME07
1 - 1.6 A
1.6 - 2.5 A
1.28 A
2A
1
GV2 ME08 2.5 - 4 A 3.2 A
GV2 ME10 4 - 6.3 A 5A
GV2 ME14 6 - 10 A 8A
GV2 ME16 9 - 14 A 11.2 A
GV2 ME20 13 - 18 A 14.4 A
GV2 ME21 17 - 23 A 18 A
Electromechanical relay characteristics

Type of control connection module LAD 9AP31, LAD 9AP32
Characteristics of the electromechanical relay control circuit (PLC side)
Rated voltage at Us V c 24
Energisation threshold at 40 °C V c 19.2
Drop-out voltage at 20 °C V c 2.4
Maximum operational voltage V c 30
Maximum current at Us mA 15
Drop-out current at 20 °C mA 1
Maximum power dissipated at Us W 0.36
Supply failure ms 5
Characteristics of the electromechanical relay output circuit

Contact type 1 N/O
Maximum switching voltage V a 250
V c 130
Frequency of the operating current Hz 50/60
Maximum current of the contact A 4
Other characteristics of the electromechanical relay

Maximum operating time at Us Between coil energisation ms 10
(including bounce) and closing of the contact
Between coil de-energisation ms 5
and opening of the contact
Maximum operating rate No-load Hz 10
At Ie Hz 0.5
Mechanical life In millions of operating cycles 20
Dielectric strength V 1000 (50/60 Hz) - 1 min
Rated impulse withstand voltage (Uimp) kV 2.5
Primary/secondary rated insulation voltage V 300
Maximum current 24 V - DC13 A 0.6
for 500 000 operations 230 V - AC15 A 0.9
(1) Thermal trip setting range.
Presentation: Description: References: Dimensions: Schemes :

1/223
Dimensions 1
Dimensions
Mounted assembly (TeSys Quickfit for components with spring terminals)
1 120
3
2
1
255
285
2
110 (1)
135
1 Circuit-breaker and contactor support plate

2 Power connection module
3 Power splitter box
4 Control splitter box
5 Upstream terminal block
6 Control connection module
7 Outgoing terminal block
(1) 2 starters: 90 mm, 4 starters: 180 mm, 8 starters: 360 mm.
Presentation: Description: Characteristics: References: Schemes:

pages 1/214 and 1/215 pages 1/214 and 1/215 pages 1/222 and 1/223 pages 1/218 to 1/221 pages 1/226 and 1/227
1/224
Dimensions (continued) Installation system 1
schemes 1
Dimensions
Splitter box LU9 G02 Parallel wiring module Advantys STB EPI 2145 1
75 47 70
5
42
56
120
35
35
155
28,1 (1)
(1) Dimension to be multiplied by the number of STB EPI 2145 modules present in the
10
configuration.
Schemes
Splitter box LU9 G02
X1 LU9 G02
Control contact
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
NC Colours of
Output common TSX CDPppp
NC connection
Contactor status RJ45 cable wires (4)
NC X9
Circuit-breaker status Fault X1 1 White
20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 1110 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
Input common Fault X2 2 Brown

Fault X3 3 Green
X2 4 Yellow
Fault X4
Fault X5 5 Grey
Fault X6 6 Pink
RJ45
Fault X7 7 Blue
Fault X8 8 Red
X3 Pole status X1 9 Black
Pole status X2 10 Violet
(2) 11 Grey-pink
Pole status X3
RJ45 Pole status X4 12 Red-blue
Pole status X5 13 White-green
Pole status X6 14 Brown-green
X4 Pole status X7 15 White-yellow
Pole status X8 16 Yellow-brown
+ 24 V Aux 17 White-grey
RJ45
- 24 V Aux 18 Grey-brown
+ 24 V Aux 19 White-pink
X5 - 24 V Aux 20 Pink-brown
Control contact
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
NC
Output common X10
NC Control X1
20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 1110 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
Contactor status RJ45 Control X2

NC Control X3
Circuit-breaker status Control X4
Input common
Control X5
X6 Control X6
Control X7
Control X8
RJ45
(3) Not used with TeSys
Quickfit
X7
NC
NC
RJ45
NC
NC
X8 + c 24 V
- c 24 V
+ c 24 V
RJ45 - c 24 V
c 24 V 24 V Aux
Outputs
Inputs
(2) 20-way HE 10 input connector.

Com
Com
(3) 20-way HE 10 output connector.

(4) Corresponding to colour of the HE 10 connector pin wires.
Presentation: Description: Characteristics: References: Schemes:

1/225
Wiring schemes
With relay
1 LAD9 AP31 LAD9 AP32
13
23
13
23
– Q1 – Q1
14
24
14
24
21
21
21
13
13
13
– KM1 (1)
– KM1 – KM2
(1) (1)
14
22
14
22
22
14
– KA1 (2) – KA1 (2) – KA2 (2)
Ph
Ph
Ph
N
N
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
Shunt 1 Shunt 1 Shunt 2
Q1 Thermal-magnetic motor circuit-breaker.

(1) Contactor coil.
(2) Interface relay.
Presentation: Description: Characteristics: References: Dimensions:

1/226
Wiring schemes (continued)
Without relay
LAD9 AP3D1 LAD9 AP3D2
1
13
23
13
23
– Q1 – Q1
14
24
14
24
21
21
21
13
13
13
KM1 KM1 KM2
(1) (1) (1)
22
14
22
22
14
14
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
Shunt 1 Shunt 1 Shunt 2
Q1 Thermal-magnetic motor circuit-breaker.

(1) Contactor coil.
Presentation: Description: Characteristics: References: Dimensions:

1/227
2 3 1 4 5 5
8
10
11
12
6
9
6
7
13
10 15 12 14
1/228
Presentation 1
Power distribution in control panels 1
The assembly of automated control and distribution panels requires the use of
products that are not only safe but also simple and quick to mount and cable.
1
The AK5 pre-assembled busbar system meets these criteria by incorporating
prefabricated elements which cater for 3 principal functions:
Carrying of electric current
Pre-assembled 4-pole busbar system 1, 160 A at 35 °C.
4-pole busbar systems can be used for 3-phase + Neutral or 3-phase + Common.
The busbar systems are available in 6 lengths: 344, 452, 560, 668, 992, 1100 mm.
An incoming supply terminal block 2 is located at the extreme left of the busbar
system.
"Knock-out" partitions allow connection of the power supply from above or below to
the terminal block connections 3 which are protected by a removable cover 4.
Upstream protection of the busbar system is shown on page 1/230.
Current distribution
Tap-off units 5 (factory assembled) are available in 4 versions:

b 2-pole,
b 3-pole,
b 4-pole (3-phase + Neutral),
b 4-pole (3-phase + Common).
The tap-offs clip onto the busbar system with instantaneous mechanical and
electrical connection to the busbars.
2 ratings are available: 16 and 32A.
The tap-off units ensure not only rapid mounting, but also a neat appearance for the
power distribution system and complete safety when accessing under live circuit
conditions.
Component mounting
Component mounting plates with incorporated tap-off allow mounting of and supply
of power to components. They are available in 25 A or 50 A ratings.
These mounting plates clip onto the mounting rail 11, which also supports the busbar
system, and at the same time make electrical connection via the incorporated tap-off.
2 types of mounting plate are available:

b single plate 6 (height 105 mm), with bolt-on 35 mm wide 7 rail 7, which may be
bolted on in one of two positions, allowing height adjustment of 10 mm.
b double plate 8 and 14 (height 190 mm), with two bolt-on, 35 mm wide 7 rails 9
mounted on 100 mm fixing centres; each rail may be bolted on in one of 4 positions,
allowing height adjustment in 10 mm steps. These plates are supplied with
connectors 12 to allow wiring between control and protection devices.
Single mounting plates enable the following types of distribution:

b 2-pole (Ph + N) and (Ph + Ph)
b 3-pole,
b 4-pole (3 Ph + N or 3 Ph + common).
Double mounting plates enable the following types of distribution; 2-pole (Ph + N,
Ph + Ph), 3-pole or 4-pole (3 Ph + N and 3 Ph + common).
Extension plates 10 can be bolted onto single and double mounting plates to enable
mounting of wider components. Using a side stop 15 in conjunction with these
extension plates also supports the AK5 JB busbar system when used vertically.
A control terminal block 13 comprising a support plate bolted onto the single or
double mounting plates and a 10-pole plug-in block, enables connection of the
control circuit wires (c.s.a. 1.5 mm 2 max).
Characteristics : References : Dimensions : Mounting possibilities :

pages 1/230 and 1/231 pages 1/234 and 1/235 pages 1/236 and 1/237 pages 1/232 and 1/233
1/229
Characteristics 1
Busbar system characteristics

1 Product certifications UL, CSA, DNV, LROS
Degree of protection Against access IP XXB conforming to IEC 60529

to live parts
Flame resistance Conforming to IEC 60695 °C 850 (incandescent wire)
Conforming to UL 94 V0
Number of conductors AK5 JB14p 4
Supply current a
Rated operational frequency Hz 50 or 60
Rated operational current Ambient temperature 35 °C A 160
Coefficient K to be applied °C 35 40 45 50 55 60
according to the ambient
temperature
K 1 0.96 0.92 0.88 0.83 0.78
Rated insulation voltage Conforming to IEC 60439-1 V 690
Conforming to UL and CSA V 600

Operational voltage Off-load plugging-in and unplugging, with supply switched on
Conforming to IEC 60439-1 V 400
Conforming to UL, CSA V 480

Plugging-in and unplugging, with supply switched off
Conforming to IEC 60439-1 V 690

Maximum permissible kA 25
peak current
Maximum let-through energy A2s 1 x 107
Upstream short-circuit (1) Type of protection Merlin Gerin circuit-breaker Fuses

and overload protection
NS 160 H NS 160 H aM gF
Rating A 160 160 160 160
Prospective kA 36 70 100 100

short-circuit current
Operational current A 160 160 160 160
Connection Maximum c.s.a. Minimum c.s.a.
Flexible cable with cable end mm2 70 2.5
Solid cable mm2 70 2.5
Tightening torque Nm 10
Mounting position Horizontal or vertical (2) Fixing with screws provided

(1) For conditions where conditional short-circuit current exceeds 25 kA.
(2) Using side stop AK5 BT01 on mounting plates AK5 PA.
Presentation : References : Dimensions : Mounting possibilities :

1/230
Tap-off characteristics
Type AK5
PC12
AK5
PC12PH
AK5
PC13
AK5
PC14
AK5
PC131
AK5
PC32L
AK5 AK5
PC32LPH PC33
AK5
PC34
AK5
PC331
1
PC33L PC34L
Product certifications UL, LROS, CSA, DNV
Degree of protection Against access to live parts: IP XXB conforming to IEC 60529
Polarity Phase Phase 3-phase 3-phase 3-phase Phase Phase 3-phase 3-phase 3-phase
+ + + + + + + +
Neutral Phase Neutral Common Neutral Phase Neutral Common
Conductor c.s.a. mm 2 2 x 2.5 2 x 2.5 3 x 2.5 4 x 2.5 3 x 2.5 2x4 2x4 3x4 4x4 3x4
(UL cables) 1 x 1.5 1 x 1.5
Conductor colours Black Black Black Black Black Black Black Black Black Black
Blue Blue White Blue Blue White
(Neutral) (Neutral) (Common) (Neutral) (Neutral) (Common)
Permissible current A 16 16 16 16 16 32 32 32 32 32
10 10
(Common) (Common)
Rated insulation voltage V 690 conforming to IEC 60439-1
Rated peak current kA 6
Maximum let-through energy A2s 100 000 200 000

Conductor insulation PVC 105 °C
Tap-off characteristics
Type AK5 AK5 AK5 AK5 AK5 AK5 AK5 AK5
PA211N1 PA211PH12 PA231 PA241 PA2311 PA532 PA542 PA5312
PA211N2 PA211PH13 PA232 PA242 PA2312
PA211N3 PA211PH23 PA232S PA2312S
PA212N1 PA212PH12
PA212N2 PA212PH13
PA212N3 PA212PH23
Product certifications UL, LROS, CSA, DNV
Degree of protection Against access to live parts: IP XXB conforming to IEC 60529
Polarity Ph + N Ph + Ph 3-phase 3-phase 3-phase 3-phase 3-phase 3-phase

+ Neutral + Common + Neutral + Common
Conductor c.s.a. mm 2 2x4 2x4 3x4 4x4 3x4 2 x (3 x 4) 2 x (4 x 4) 2 x (3 x 4)

(UL cables) 1 x 1.5 1 x 1.5
Permissible current A 25 25 25 25 25 50 50 50
10 10
(Common) (Common)
Rated insulation voltage V 690 conforming to IEC 60439-1
Rated peak current kA 6
Maximum let-through energy A2s 200 000
Conductor insulation PVC 105 °C

Characteristics of mounting rails AM1 DL201 and AM1 DL2017
Type Omega 7 (width 75 mm, depth 15 mm)
Material 2 mm sheet steel
Surface treatment Zinc
Presentation : References : Dimensions : Mounting possibilities :

1/231
Mounting Power distribution in control panels 1
(equipment possibilities) 1
Component mounting plates incorporating tap-off mounted on AK5 JB busbar system
Note: if the equipment is wider than the AK5 AK5 AK5 AK5 AK5 AK5 AK5 AK5 AK5 AK5
mounting plate, an extension plate can be PA211N1 PA231 PA241 PA212N1 PA212PH12 PA232 PA242 PA232S PA532 PA542
used to increase the width of the support PA211N2 PA2311 PA212N2 PA213PH13 PA2312 PA2312S PA5312
plate. PA211N3 (1) PA212N3 PA212PH23 (1) (1) (1)
(1) 3-pole + common
Mounting plate Width in mm 54 54 54 54 54 54 54 108 108 108
incorporating Height in mm 105 105 105 190 190 190 190 190 190 190
tap-off
No. of 18 mm pitches 3 3 3 3 3 3 4 6 6 6
Thermal current 25 A 25 A 25 A 25 A 25 A 25 A 25 A 25 A 50 A 50 A
Application Ph + N 3-Ph 3-Ph + Ph + N Ph + Ph 3-Ph 3-Ph + 3-Ph 3-Ph 3-Ph + N
N N
Type of starter Minimum Number of points used on the busbar system
centres
with 60 mm
ducting
Fuses, contactors and thermal overload relay
LS1 D25 170 4 4 – – – –
LS1 D25 + LA8 D254 170 – – 5 – – –
LS1 D25 + LC1 D09 to D25 and
overload relay up to LR2 D1322 320 – – – 4 – –
LS1 D25 + LC1 D09 to D25
(with 1 add-on block LA8 D) + 320 – – – 4 – – –
overload relay up to LR2 D1322
Fuses, reversing contactors + thermal overload relay
LS1 D25 + LC2 D09 to D18
(with 1 add-on block LA8 D) + 320 – – – – 6 –
LS1 D25 + LC2 D25
(with 1 add-on block LA8 D) + 320 – – – – 7 –
Optimal breaker switch
GK2 CF03 to 22 170 – 3 – – – –
GK2 CF03 to 22 170 – 5 – – – –
+ 4 blocks GK2 AX
GK3 EF40 270 – – – – – 6
GK3 EF40 + 4 blocks GK2 AX 270 – – – – – 6
Optimal breaker switch + contactor + thermal overload relay
GK2 CF03 to CF21 + LC1 D09
to D18 + overload relay up to 320 – – – 3 – –
LR2 D1322
GK2 CF03 to CF22 + LC1 D09
to D25 + overload relay up to 320 – – – 4 – –
LR2 D1322
GK2 CF03 to CF22 + 4 blocks
GK2 AX + LC1 D09 to D18 with 1 320 – – – 5 – –
block LA8 D + overload relay up
to LR2 D1322
Optimal breaker switch + reversing contactor + thermal overload relay
GK2 CF03 to CF22 + 4 blocs
GK2 AX + LC2 D09 to D18 with 320 – – – – 6 –
1 block LA8 D + overload relay
up to LR2 D1322
GK2 CF03 to CF22 + 4 blocks
GK2 AX + LC2 D25 with 1 block 320 – – – – 7 –
LA8 D + overload relay up to
LR2 D1322
Presentation : Characteristics : References : Dimensions :

1/232
Mounting Power distribution in control panels 1
(equipment possibilities) Pre-assembled panel busbar system AK5

(continued) 1
Component mounting plates incorporating tap-off mounted on AK5 JB busbar system
Note 1: if the equipment is wider than the

mounting plate, an extension plate can be
used to increase the width of the support
plate.
Note 2: for upstream protection, see AK5 AK5 AK5 AK5 AK5 AK5 AK5 AK5 AK5 AK5
page 1/230. PA211N1 PA231 PA241 PA212N1 PA212PH12 PA232 PA242 PA232S PA532 PA542
PA211N2 PA2311 PA212N2 PA213PH13 PA2312 PA2312S PA5312
(1) 3-pole + common PA211N3 (1) PA212N3 PA212PH23 (1) (1) (1)
Mounting plate Width in mm 54 54 54 54 54 54 54 108 108 108
incorporating Height in mm 105 105 105 190 190 190 190 190 190 190
tap-off
No. of 18 mm pitches 3 3 3 3 3 3 4 6 6 6
Thermal current 25 A 25 A 25 A 25 A 25 A 25 A 25 A 25 A 50 A 50 A
Application Ph + N 3 Ph 3 Ph + Ph + N Ph + Ph 3 Ph 3 Ph + 3 Ph 3 Ph 3 Ph + N
N N
Type of starter Minimum Number of points used on the busbar system
centres
with 60 mm
ducting
Motor circuit-breaker (type 1 coordination)
GV2 p06 to p22 170 – 3 – – – –
GV3 M01 to M40 270 – – – – – 6
Circuit-breaker + contactor
GV2 p06 to p16 + LC1 D09 or
D12 with 1 add-on block LA8 D 270 – – – 4 – –
GV2 p06 to p20 270 – – – 3 – –
+ LC1 D09 to D18
GV2 p06 to p22 + LC1 D09 to
D25 with 1 add-on block LA8 D 270 – – – 4 – –
GV3 M01 to M40 with GV1 App
+ LC1 D09 to D32 270 – – – – – 7
GV3 M01 to M40 + LC1 D09 to
D32 with 1 add-on block LA8 D 270 – – – – – 8
Motor circuit-breaker + reversing contactor
GV2 p06 to p20 + LC2 D09 to
D18 with or without add-on block 270 – – – – 6 –
LA8 D
GV2 p22 + LC2 D25 with 1 add- –
on block LA8 D 270 – – – – 7
Integral contactor breaker + protection module
LD1 LB030 + LB1 LB03Ppp
(integral 18) 270 – 3 – – – –
LD1 LB030 with 2 add-on blocks
LA1 LB + LB1 LB30P (integral 18) 270 – 4 – – – –
LA1 LB + LB1 LB03P (integral 18) 270 – – – – 6 –
LD1 LC030 + LB1 LC03M
(integral 32) 270 – – – – – 6
LD1 LC030 + LB1 LC03M
(integral 32) with 1 add-on block 270 – – – – – 7
LA1 LC and 1 reset device
LA1 LC052p
LD1 LC030 with 2 add-on blocks
LA1 LB + LB1 LC03M (integral 32) 270 – – – – – 6
Reversing contactor breaker integral 18 + protection module
LD5 LB130 + LB1 LB03Ppp 270 – – – – 6 –
LA1 LB + LB1 LB03P 270 – – – – 8 –
Merlin Gerin C 60 circuit-breaker for circuit protection
2369p 170 2 – – 2 2 – – – – –
2370p 170 – 3 – – – 3 – 3 3 –
2371p and 2372p 170 – – 4 – – – 4 – – 4

1/233
References 1

Busbar systems, tap-off units
Busbar systems
The busbar system can be screw-mounted onto any type of support. However, if it is to be used in conjunction with
1 component mounting plates incorporating a tap-off, it is essential that it is mounted on the AM1 DL201 rail.
When mounting tap-offs, the rated operational current of the busbar system should be taken into account: 160 A at 35 °C.
Number of Number of Length Suitable for Reference Weight
conductors tap-offs at mounting in
18 mm intervals enclosure width
mm mm kg
4 (1) 12 344 600 AK5 JB143 0.700
18 452 800 AK5 JB144 0.900
24 560 800 AK5 JB145 1.100
30 668 800 AK5 JB146 1.300
AK5 JB1● 48 992 1200 AK5 JB149 1.900
54 1100 1200 AK5 JB1410 2.100

Omega rail, width 75 mm
This rail is designed to accommodate the busbar system when it is used with AK5 PA mounting plates incorporating
tap-offs. It supports the busbar system. The plates simply clip onto the rail.
Material and Depth Length Sold in Unit Weight
surface treatment lots of reference
mm mm kg
2 mm sheet steel 15 2000 (4) 6 AM1 DL201 3.000
treated with zinc
Removable power sockets

Use Number of points Thermal Cable Sold in Unit Weight
used on the current length lots of reference
busbar system
A mm kg
Single-phase 1 16 200 6 (2) AK5 PC12 0.035
+
Neutral 32 1000 6 (2) AK5 PC32L 0.040
AK5 PC12
2-phase 1 16 200 6 (3) AK5 PC12PH 0.035
32 1000 6 (3) AK5 PC32LPH 0.040
3-phase 2 16 200 6 AK5 PC13 0.040
32 250 6 AK5 PC33 0.045
1000 6 AK5 PC33L 0.060
AK5 PC14 3-phase 2 16 200 6 AK5 PC14 0.045

+
Neutral 32 250 6 AK5 PC34 0.050
1000 6 AK5 PC34L 0.065
3-phase 2 16 200 6 AK5 PC131 0.045

+ 10 (common)
common 32 250 6 AK5 PC331 0.050
10 (common)
AK5 GF1
Accessories
Description Maximum no. C.s.a. Sold in Unit Weight
of connections lots of reference
mm 2 kg
Cable guide 4 2.5 or 4 20 AK5 GF1 0.300
(1) 4-pole: 3-phase + Neutral or 3-phase + Common.
(2) Total of 6 sockets supplied: 2 sockets (N + L1), 2 sockets (N + L2), 2 sockets (N + L3).
(3) Total of 6 sockets supplied: 2 sockets (L1 + L2), 2 sockets (L1 + L3), 2 sockets (L2 + L3).
(4) Cut and drill to suit use.
Characteristics: Dimensions: Mounting possibilities:

pages 1/230 and 1/231 pages 1/236 and 1/237 pages 1/232 and 1/233
1/234
References 1

Component mounting plates, extension plates, terminal blocks,
mounting rails, accessories
Component mounting plates incorporating tap-off

Single plate (height 105 mm)
Use No. of 18 mm
points used on
Phase Thermal
current
Number of
6 rails for
Reference Weight 1
the busbar component
system support
A kg
Single-phase 3 Ph1+N 25 1 AK5 PA211N1 0.135
+ neutral Ph2+N 25 1 AK5 PA211N2 0.135
Ph3+N 25 1 AK5 PA211N3 0.135
2-phase 3 Ph1+Ph2 25 1 AK5 PA211PH12 0.135

AK5 PA231 Ph1+Ph3 25 1 AK5 PA211PH13 0.135
Ph2+Ph3 25 1 AK5 PA211PH23 0.135
3-phase 3 – 25 1 AK5 PA231 0.140
3-phase + common 3 – 25 1 AK5 PA2311 0.145
3-phase + neutral 3 – 25 1 AK5 PA241 0.145
Double plate (height 190 mm)
Prefabricated 25 A connectors are supplied for connecting the 2 protection and control devices.
Single-phase 3 Ph1+N 25 2 AK5 PA212N1 0.135

+ neutral Ph2+N 25 2 AK5 PA212N2 0.135
Ph3+N 25 2 AK5 PA212N3 0.135
2-phase 3 Ph1+Ph2 25 2 AK5 PA212PH12 0.135
Ph1+Ph3 25 2 AK5 PA212PH13 0.135
Ph2+Ph3 25 2 AK5 PA212PH23 0.135
3-phase 3 – 25 2 AK5 PA232 0.230
6 – 25 2 AK5 PA232S 0.600
50 1 AK5 PA532 0.700
3-phase + common 3 – 25 (10 common) 2 AK5 PA2312 0.235
6 – 25 (10 common) 2 AK5 PA2312S 0.610
AK5 PA232 50 (10 common) 1 AK5 PA5312 0.710
Extension plates
These plates bolt onto the support plates, after having removed them from the rails, to be able to mount wider components.
Use Number of tap-offs Reference Weight
at 18 mm intervals kg
For mounting plates Single 4 AK5 PE17 0.100
incorporating Double 4 AK5 PE27 0.150
tap-off
Side stop (AK5 JB mounted vertically)
Use Sold in Unit Weight
For extension plate 50 AK5 BT01 0.005

Control terminal blocks
AK5 BT01 Description Thermal Sold in Unit Weight
current A lots of reference
A kg
10-pole terminal blocks, for screwing onto plate AK5 PAppp
10 10 AK5 SB1 0.065

10-pole front connecting plug-in terminal blocks which can be clipped onto 1 6 4 rails
Fixed part 10 10 AB1 DV10235U 0.047

Moving part 10 10 AB1 DVM10235U 0.021
Accessories
Description Marking Sold in Unit Weight
AK5 SB1 Strips of 0…9 25 AB1 Rp (1) 0.050
clip-in markers + 25 AB1 R12 0.050
10 identical numbers, signs – 25 AB1 R13 0.050
or capital letters per strip A…Z 25 AB1 Gp (1) 0.050
(1) Replace the p in the selected reference with the number or letter required. Example: AB1 R1 or AB1 GA.
Presentation : Characteristics : Dimensions : Mounting possibilities :

1/235
Dimensions 1
Busbar systems
AK5 JBppp
1
82
30
79
AK5 a G N° of
18 mm
81
45
points
JB143 344 330 12
JB144 452 438 18
JB145 560 546 24
G JB146 668 654 30
JB149 992 978 48
a
JB1410 1100 1086 54
Busbar feed units
AK5 JBppp Installation of AK5 JBppp busbar systems
Connection C.s.a. in mm2

min. max.
Flexible cable with or without cable end
1 x 2.5 1 x 70 (1)
2 x 2.5 2 x 35
Flexible bar
– 2 x (9 x 4)
Flexible bar
9x4 9x4
+ +
+ 1 x 2.5 1 x 35
flexible cable with or without cable end
(1) Maximum c.s.a. or connection of conductor without cable end.

Removable power sockets, 16 and 32 A Mounting plates incorporating tap-offs, 25 A Single width extension plates
AK5 PC12p, AK5 PC32Lp AK5 PA2p1, AK5 PA2311, AK5 PA211pppp AK5 PE17
45,5
38 17,5
53 (1)
53 (1)
AK5 PCp3, AK5 PC33L

AK5 PCp4, AK5 PC34L
AK5 PCp31
105
105
45,5
10
10
38 35,5 15 46 54 15 7 71
Note : It is recommended that the power sockets or the removable plates are connected as close as possible to the busbar feed unit.
(1) Can be fixed at 43 mm
Presentation : Characteristics : References : Mounting possibilities :

1/236
Mounting plates incorporating tap-off Double width extension plate

AK5 PA232, AK5 PA2312, AK5 PA242 AK5 PE27
53 (1)
53 (1)
40
190
100
10
100
190
10
10
15 46 54 15 7 71
Mounting plates incorporating tap-off

AK5 PA232S, AK5 PA2312S AK5 PA532, AK5 PA5312, AK5 PA542
53 (1)
93
10
190
190
100
63 106 63 106
Side stop Control terminal block

AK5 BT01 AK5 SB1
10 10 5
ép. 0,8
20
15,5
75
4,2
22
7
22 54
(1) Can be fixed at 43 mm
Presentation : Characteristics : References : Mounting possibilities :

1/237
Selection guide 1
Variable speed drives
for asynchronous motors 1
Applications Speed control for asynchronous motors

Application area Building (HVAC) (1) Industry
1 Type of machine Pumps and fans Simple machines Simple machines

Pumps
Power range for 50…60 Hz supply (kW) 0.75…30 0.18…2.2 0.18…15

Single phase 100…120 V (kW) – 0.18…0.75 –
Single phase 200…240 V (kW) – 0.18…2.2 0.18…2.2
Three phase 200…230 V (kW) – 0.18…2.2 –
Three phase 200…240 V (kW) 0.75…30 – 0.18…15
Three phase 380…480 V (kW) 0.75…30 – –
Three phase 380…500 V (kW) – – 0.37…15
Three phase 525…600 V (kW) – – 0.75…15
Drive Output frequency 0.5…200 Hz 0.5…200 Hz 0.5…500 Hz

Type of control Asynchronous motor Sensorless flux vector Sensorless flux vector control
control, voltage/frequency
ratio (2 or 5 points),
energy saving ratio
Synchronous motor – –
Transient overtorque 110% of the nominal motor 150…170% of the nominal 180% of the nominal motor
torque motor torque torque for 2 seconds
Functions
Number of functions 50 26 50
Number of preset speeds 7 4 16
Number of I/O Analog inputs 2 1 3
Logic inputs 3 4 6
Analog outputs 1 – 1
Logic outputs – 1 –
Relay outputs 2 1 2
Communication Embedded Modbus – Modbus and CANopen

Available as an option LON WORKS, METASYS N2, – Ethernet TCP/IP, DeviceNet,
APOGEE FLN, BACnet Fipio, Profibus DP
Cards (available as an option) – – –
IEC/EN 61800-5-1, IEC/EN 61800-3 (environments 1 and 2)

Standards and certification EN 55011, EN 55022: class A, EN 55011, EN 55022: EN 55011, EN 55022:
class B with option card, class A gr.1 and class B class A, class B with option
e, UL, CSA, C-Tick, NOM 117 e, UL, CSA, C-Tick, N998 card, e, UL, C-Tick, N998
References ATV 21 ATV 11 ATV 31
Pages Please consult the “Altivar 21 Please consult the “Soft starters and variable speed drives”
variable speed drives” catalogue
catalogue
(1) Heating Ventilation Air Conditioning
1/238
1
1
Pumps and fans Complex, modular machines, high-power machines

1
Machines requiring high-performance torque and accuracy at very low speed as well as
high dynamics
0.37…630 0.37…500
– –
0.37…5.5 0.37…5.5
– –
0.75…90 0.37…75
0.75…630 0.75…500
– –
– –
0.5…1000 Hz up to 37 kW, 0.5…500 Hz from 45 kW to 630 kW 0…1000 Hz up to 37 kW, 0…500 Hz from 45 kW to 500 kW
Sensorless flux vector control, Flux vector control with or without sensor, voltage/frequency ratio (2 or 5 points),
voltage/frequency ratio (2 or 5 points), energy saving ratio ENA System
– Vector control without speed feedback

110…120% of the nominal motor torque for 60 seconds 220% of the nominal motor torque for 2 seconds
170% for 60 seconds
> 100 > 150

8 16
2…4 2…4
6…20 6…20
1…3 1…3
0…8 0…8
2…4 2…4
Modbus and CANopen

Ethernet TCP/IP, Fipio, Modbus Plus, INTERBUS, Profibus DP, Ethernet TCP/IP, Fipio, Modbus Plus, INTERBUS, Profibus DP, Modbus/Uni-Telway, DeviceNet
Modbus/Uni-Telway, DeviceNet, LONWORKS, METASYS N2,
APOGEE FLN, BACnet
I/O extension cards, Encoder interface cards, I/O extension cards,

“Controller Inside” programmable card, “Controller Inside” programmable card
multi-pump cards
IEC/EN 61800-5-1, IEC/EN 61800-3 (environments 1 and 2, C1 to C3), EN 55011, EN 55022, IEC/EN 61000-4-2/4-3/4-4/4-5/4-6/4-11
e, UL, CSA, DNV, C-Tick, NOM 117, GOST
ATV 61 ATV 71
Please consult the “Altivar 61 variable speed drives” Please consult the “Altivar 71 variable speed drives” catalogue
catalogue
1/239
Contents 0
2 - TeSys motor starters -
enclosed version
VARIO enclosed switch disconnectors

b Pre-assembled . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 2/4
b Assembled by user . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 2/5
b Add-on modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 2/6
2
Enclosed thermal-magnetic motor circuit-breakers
b Type GV2 ME
v Standard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 2/10

v Assembly of a safety enclosure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 2/12
D.O.L. starters for motor control

b 0.55 to 30 kW
v With manual control and with magnetic circuit-breakers. . . . . . . . . . . page 2/14
b 2.2 to 45 kW
v Without isolating device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 2/16

v With isolating device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 2/20
b 0.25 to 7.5 kW
v With 3-phase thermal overload relay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 2/24
b 0.37 to 5.5 kW
v With thermal magnetic circuit-breaker and contactor . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 2/26

b 5.5 to 132 kW
b 7.5 to 75 kW
v With isolating device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 2/32
b 90 to 375 kW
D.O.L. starters for control in category AC-1

b Without isolating device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 2/40
b With isolating device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 2/44

b Enclosures and door interlock mechanisms for customer assembly . . . page 2/48
2/0
integral 32 and 63 contactor breakers and reversing
contactor breakers
b Enclosures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 2/54
b Door interlock mechanisms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 2/55
b For control and protection of motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 2/56
b For control and protection of resistive circuits in category AC-1 . . . . . . page 2/58
b Auxiliary contact blocks and accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 2/59 2

Enclosed D.O.L. starters for motor control for use on
a machine subject to the application of Machinery
Directive 98/37/CE
b Non-reversing starters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 2/62
b Reversing starters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 2/64
Soft starters for asynchronous motors

Selection guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 2/72
Enclosed D.O.L. starters for AS-Interface cabling

system
b Models LF1, LF2, LF7 and LF8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 2/76
b Models LF1 P, LF2 P . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 2/86
b Models LF1 M, LF2 M . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 2/87
b Model LF7 P . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 2/88
b Model LF8 P . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 2/89
LA9 Z modules for AS-Interface cabling system

b For D.O.L. starters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 2/102
2/1
General selection guide 2
TeSys enclosed starters 2
Applications D.O.L. starters
Type Standard starters
Standard power ratings 4…37 kW 0.06…45 kW 0.55…30 kW 0.37…5.5 kW 0.25…45 kW

of 3-phase motors in AC-3 400/415 V
Starters
Manual p p p – –
Auto – – – p p
Isolation
Switch p – – – –
Circuit-breaker – p p p –
Disconnector – – – – –
Protection
Short-circuit – p p p –
Overload – p p p p
Communication – – – – –
References
Non-reversing VpF GV2 ME GV2 LC LE1 GVME LE1 M
VCFN GV3 CE GV NGC LE1 D
VpFX
Reversing – – – – LE2 K
LE2 D
Pages 2/4 and 2/5 2/10 and 2/11 2/14 2/26 2/16, 2/17
and 2/24
2/2
2
2
Soft start units
Starters for safety applications Starters for use on Standard star-delta starters
AS-Interface line
2.2…45 kW 0.06…11 kW 0.06…9 kW 0.06…9 kW 0.06…5.5 kW 5.5…132 kW 7.5…75 kW
– p – – – – –
p – p p p p p
– – p – – – –
– p p p p – –
p – – – – – p
p p p p p – p
p p p p p p p
– – – – p – –
LE4 K GV2 ME LG1 K LG7 K LF1 M LE3 K LE6 D

LE4 D LG1 D LG7 D LF1 P LE3 D LE3 D
LJ7 K LF7 P LE3 F
LE8 K – – LG8 K LF2 M – –

LE8 D LJ8 K LF2 P
LE2 D LF8 P
2/20 and 2/21 2/12 and 2/13 2/63 2/62, 2/63, 2/68 2/86 to 2/89 2/28, 2/29 2/32 and 2/33
and 2/69 and 2/38
2/3
References 2
Enclosed starters 2
VARIO enclosed switch disconnectors,

pre-assembled
580545
Enclosed switch disconnectors for high performance applications
b Marking on operator O .
b 3-pole rotary switch disconnectors, 10 to 140 A, conforming to IEC 60947-4-1 and IEC 60204.
b Padlockable operating handle (padlocks not included).
b IP 65 degree of protection enclosures, sealable and lockable.
b Cover lockable in position “I” (ON) up to 63 A rating.
2 3-pole main and emergency stop switch disconnectors (1)

Operator lthe Power Incorpor- Possible Reference Weight
VCF 0GE
Handle Front plate AC-23 ated attach-
Dimensions at 400 V switch ments (2)
body
mm A kW kg
580546
Red, padlockable Yellow 10 4 V02 2 VCF 02GE 0.500

with up to 3 padlocks 60 x 60 16 5.5 V01 2 VCF 01GE 0.500
(Ø 4 to Ø 8 shank)
20 7.5 V0 2 VCF 0GE 0.500
25 11 V1 2 VCF 1GE 0.500
32 15 V2 2 VCF 2GE 0.500
50 22 V3 3 VCF 3GE 0.930
63 30 V4 3 VCF 4GE 0.930
Red, padlockable Yellow 100 37 V5 1 VCF 5GE 2.190

with up to 3 padlocks 90 x 90 140 45 V6 1 VCF 6GE 2.190
(Ø 4 to Ø 8 shanks)
VCF 3GE 3-pole main switch disconnectors (1)

Black, padlockable Black 10 4 V02 2 VBF 02GE 0.500
with up to 3 padlocks 60 x 60 16 5.5 V01 2 VBF 01GE 0.500
20 7.5 V0 2 VBF 0GE 0.500
25 11 V1 2 VBF 1GE 0.500
32 15 V2 2 VBF 2GE 0.500
50 22 V3 3 VBF 3GE 0.930
580547
63 30 V4 3 VBF 4GE 0.930
Black, padlockable Black 100 37 V5 4 VBF 5GE 2.190

with up to 3 padlocks 90 x 90 140 45 V6 4 VBF 6GE 2.190
Enclosed switch disconnectors for standard applications
b 3-pole rotary switch disconnectors, 10 to 32 A, conforming to IEC 60947-4-1.

b Degree of protection IP 55.
VBF 0GE
3-pole main and emergency stop switch disconnectors (1)
Operator lthe Power Incorpor- Possible Reference Weight
Handle Front plate AC-23 ated attach-
Dimensions at 400 V switch ments (2)
body
mm A kW kg
Red Padlockable, Yellow 10 4 VN 12 2 VCFN 12GE (2) 0.422
580548
either by 1 60 x 60 16 5.5 VN 20 2 VCFN 20GE (2) 0.422

(Ø 8 shank)
20 7.5 V0 0 VCFN 25GE 0.512
or by 3 padlocks
(Ø 6 shank) 25 11 V1 0 VCFN 32GE 0.512
32 15 V2 0 VCFN 40GE 0.512
(1) For characteristics of switch disconnectors, please consult your Regional Sales Office.
(2) For VCF and VBF enclosures, see page 2/6. For VCFN enclosures, see page 2/7.
VCFN 12GE
page 2/8 page 2/9
2/4
References 2
Enclosed starters 2
VARIO enclosed switch disconnectors,

assembled by the user
580549
Empty enclosures
IP 65 enclosure with red padlockable handle operator and yellow front plate
(for mounting a main or emergency stop switch disconnector)
For switch body lthe Possible attachments (1) Reference Weight
A kg
VN 12, VN 20 10…32 2 VCFX GE1 0.340
V02…V2
V02…V2 10…32 4 VCFX GE4 0.660

2
V3 50 3 VCFX GE2 0.660
VBFX GE2
IP 65 enclosure with black padlockable handle and black front plate

(for mounting a main switch disconnector)
VN 12, VN 20 10…32 2 VBFX GE1 0.340
V02…V2
V02…V2 10…32 4 VBFX GE4 0.660
V3 50 3 VBFX GE2 0.660
Switch bodies for standard applications (2)

Description Rating Reference Weight
A kg
3-pole 10 VN 12 0.110
switch disconnectors
16 VN 20 0.110
Switch bodies for high performance applications (2)

A kg
3-pole 10 V02 0.200
580550
16 V01 0.200
20 V0 0.200
25 V1 0.200
32 V2 0.200
50 V3 0.200
V0
63 V4 0.200
(1) See pages 2/6 and 2/7.

(2) For characteristics of switch disconnectors, please consult your Regional Sales Office.
2/5
References 2
Enclosed starters 2

Add-on modules
580594
580589
Add-on modules for enclosures VCF and VBF

A kg
Main pole module 10 VZ 02 0.050
(mounted in enclosure) 16 VZ 01 0.050
20 VZ 0 0.050
25 VZ 1 0.050
32 VZ 2 0.050
50 VZ 3 0.100
2 VZ 0 VZ 11
63 VZ 4 0.100
Neutral pole modules 10 to 32 VZ 11 0.050

580596
580595
with early make and 50 and 63 VZ 12 0.100

late break contacts
100 and 140 VZ 13 0.250
Earthing modules 10 to 32 VZ 14 0.050

50 and 63 VZ 15 0.100
100 and 140 VZ 16 0.250
Description Type of contacts Reference Weight

kg
VZ 15 VZ 20 Auxiliary contact block N/O + N/C (1) VZ 7 0.050
modules with N/O + N/O VZ 20 0.050
2 auxiliary contacts
Maximum number of add-on modules that can be fitted on a

switch body
1 add-on module on each side of the switch body
VZ 7 or VZ 20 + V0p + VZ 7 or VZ 20
or or
VZ 11 or VZ 12 + V0 + VZ 11 or VZ 12
or or
VZ 14 or VZ 15 + to + VZ 14 or VZ 15
or or
VZ 0p/VZ 0 to VZ 4 + V4 + VZ 0p/VZ 0 to VZ 4
2 add-on modules on each side of the switch body
VZ 0p + VZ 0p + V0p + VZ 0p + VZ 7 or VZ 20 or VZ 11 or VZ 14
VZ 0 + VZ 0 + V0 + VZ 0 + VZ 7 or VZ 20 or VZ 11 or VZ 14
Note: The add-on modules mounted next to the switch body are main pole modules.
Maximum of 3 main pole modules per switch body.
(1) Late make N/O, early break N/C contacts
Schemes :
page 2/9
2/6
Enclosed starters 2

Add-on modules
580597
Add-on modules for enclosures VCFN 12GE and 20GE

A kg
Main pole modules 10 VZN 12 0.020
16 VZN 20 0.020
Neutral pole module 10 and 16 VZN 11 0.020

with early make and
VZN 11
late break contacts
Earthing module 10 and 16 VZN 14 0.016 2
Description Type of contacts Reference Weight
580598
kg
Auxiliary contact block 1 N/O late make contact VZN 05 0.020
modules
1 N/C early break contact VZN 06 0.020

VZN 14 switch body
VZN 12 or VZN 20 + + VZN 12 or VZN 20

580599
or
VN 12
VZN 11
or
or or
VN 20 VZN 05 or VZN 06
VZN 05
or
VZN 05 or VZN 06 VZN 14
Schemes :
page 2/9
2/7
Dimensions 2
Enclosed starters 2
Dimensions
VCFN 12GE to VCFN 40GE
131
90
=
2
106 82,5
Cable glands: 2 x 16 P top and bottom.
VCF or VBF 02GE to 4GE

VCFX or VBFX GE1 to GE4
H
b
c = =
c1 a
a b c c1 H
VpF 02GE to VpF 2GE, VpFX GE1 (1) 90 146 85 131 130
VpF 3GE and VpF 4GE (2) 150 170 106 152 164
VpFX GE2 and VpFX GE4 (2) 150 170 106 152 164
(1) Cable glands: 2 x 16 P top and bottom.

(2) Cable glands: 2 x 16/21/29 P top and bottom.
VCF or VBF 5GE and 6GE =

201
280
=
126 190
191 220
2/8
Schemes 2
Enclosed starters 2
Schemes
Switch disconnectors
Enclosed or switch bodies Main pole module Neutral pole
module
1/L1
3/L2
5/L3
2
2/T1
4/T2
6/T3
Auxiliary contact blocks
VZ 7 VZ 20 VZN 05 VZN 06
13
13
23
21
13
21
14
14
24
22
14
22
References :
pages 2/5, 2/6 and 2/7
2/9
References 2

type GV2 ME and accessories, for customer assembly
Thermal-magnetic motor circuit-breakers GV2 ME

For motor circuit-breakers and accessories: see pages 24508/3. 24512/3 and 24512/
9.
Starters consisting of a GV2 ME motor circuit-breaker in an enclosure conform to
standard IEC 60947-4-1.
GV2 ME ME ME ME ME ME ME ME ME ME ME ME ME ME
01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 10 14 16 20 21 22
Ithe in 0.16 0.25 0.4 0.63 1 1.6 2.5 4 6.3 9 13 17 21 23
2 enclosure
(A)
500277_1
Enclosures for thermal-magnetic circuit-breakers GV2 ME

Type Degree of Possible number of Reference Weight
protection side-mounting auxiliary
contact blocks on GV2 ME
LH side RH side kg
Surface IP 41 1 1 GV2 MC01 0.290
mounting,
double IP 55 1 1 GV2 MC02 0.300
GV2 MC insulated with
protective
or GV2 MCK04 (1) 0.420
conductor.
Sealable cover
IP 55 for 1 1 GV2 MC03 0.300
500280_1
temperature < + 5 °C
Flush IP 41 (front face) 1 1 GV2 MP01 0.115

mounting,
with protective IP 41 (reduced – 1 GV2 MP03 0.115
conductor flush mounting)
IP 55 (front face) 1 1 GV2 MP02 0.130
IP 55 (reduced – 1 GV2 MP04 0.130

GV2 MP flush mounting)
Front plate
500278_1

kg
For direct control, IP 55 GV2 CP21 0.800
through a panel, of a
chassis mounted GV2 ME
Accessories common to all enclosures (to be ordered separately)

GV2 CP Description Sold in Unit Weight
Padlocking devices (2) 1 to 3 padlocks 1 GV2 V01 0.075
for GV2 ME operator Ø 4 to 8 mm
(padlocking is only possible
in the “O” position)
500279_1
Mushroom Spring return (2) 1 GV2 K011 0.052

head “Stop”
pushbutton Latching (2) IP 55 Key release. 1 GV2 K021 0.160
Ø 40 mm, red key n° 455
Turn to release 1 GV2 K031 0.115
1 GV2 K04 (3) 0.120
Sealing kit For enclosures IP 55 10 GV2 E01 0.012

and front plate
GV2 K011
IP 55 10 GV2 E02 0.012
for θ < + 5 °C
Neutral 100 AB1 VV635UBL 0.015

terminal
Partition 50 AB1 AC6BL 0.003
(1) Enclosure GV2 MCK04 is fitted with a GV2 K04 mushroom head “Stop” pushbutton as
standard.
(2) Supplied with IP 55 sealing kit. To be fitted with enclosure GV2 Mp01.
(3) Padlockable in “Off” position using Ø 4 to 8 mm shank padlocks.
2/10
References 2

type GV3 ME and accessories, for customer assembly

812218
For motor circuit-breakers and accessories: see pages 24508/5 and 24512/5.
GV3 ME40: operational current in enclosure limited to 30 A.
Starters consisting of a GV3 ME motor circuit-breaker in an enclosure conform to

Application Type Degree of protection Reference Weight
of enclosure kg
Motor
circuit-breaker
Surface mounting IP 55 GV3 CE01 2.000 2
up to 30 A
with or without
accessories
GV3 CE01
Enclosure accessories (to be ordered separately)
812219
Sealing For θ u 5 °C 10 GV1 EA01 0.012

membrane (1)
For θ < 5 °C (silicone) 10 GV1 EA02 0.012
IP 55 padlocking device for 1 GV1 V01 0.044

operators (when padlocked, the
motor circuit is automatically in the
Open (OFF) position)
Stop Spring return 1 GV1 K01 0.052

pushbutton
Ø 40 mm, red Latching Key release, 1 GV1 K02 0.095
GV1 V01 mushroom head key n° 455
(supplied with
Turn to 1 GV1 K03 0.052
IP 55 sealing kit)
release
530080
(1) Spare part
GV1 K01
2/11
References 2

type GV2 ME and accessories
Assembly of a safety enclosure
References
For motor circuit-breakers and accessories: see pages 24508/3, 24512/2 and 24512/
3. Starters consisting of a GV2 ME motor circuit-breaker in an enclosure conform to
GV2 ME ME ME ME ME ME ME ME ME ME ME ME ME ME
01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 10 14 16 20 21 22
Ithe in 0.16 0.25 0.4 0.63 1 1.6 2.5 4 6.3 9 13 17 21 23
2 enclosure
(A)

Type Degree of Possible number of Reference Weight
500277_1
protection side-mounting auxiliary

contact blocks on GV2 ME
LH side RH side kg
Surface IP 41 1 1 GV2 MC01 0.290
mounting,
double IP 55 1 1 GV2 MC02 0.300
insulated with
protective
or GV2 MCK04 (1) 0.420
conductor.
Sealable cover
GV2 MC IP 55 for 1 1 GV2 MC03 0.300
temperature < + 5 °C
Accessories common to all enclosures (to be ordered separately)

Padlocking devices (2) 1 to 3 padlocks Ø 4 1 GV2 V01 0.075
for GV2 ME operator (padlocking to 8 mm
is only possible in the “O” position)

500279_1
head “Stop”
pushbutton Latching (2) Key release, key n° 1 GV2 K021 0.160
Ø 40 mm, red IP 55 455
Turn to 1 GV2 K031 0.115
release
1 GV2 K04 (3) 0.120
Sealing kit For enclosures IP 55 for 10 GV2 E01 0.012

and front plate temperature
between
+ 5 °C and + 40 °C
GV2 K011
IP 55 for 10 GV2 E02 0.012
temperature
between
- 20 °C and + 40 °C
Neutral 100 AB1 VV635UBL 0.015
terminal
Partition 50 AB1 AC6BL 0.003
Assembly of a safety enclosure

(conforming to standards IEC 60974-4-1, IEC 60204 and IEC 60292)
Type of product Page Reference
Enclosure See above GV2 MCpp
Circuit-breaker 3/44 GV2 MEpp
Undervoltage trip or INRS trip (4) 3/53 GV2 Apppp
or GV2 AXppp
Latching mushroom head See above GV2 K021

“Stop” pushbutton or GV2 K031
or GV2 K04
(1) Enclosure GV2 MCK04 is fitted with a GV2 K04 mushroom head “Stop” pushbutton as
standard.
(2) Supplied with IP 55 sealing kit. To be fitted with enclosure GV2 Mp01.
(3) Padlockable in “Off” position using Ø 4 to 8 mm shank padlocks.
(4) Safety device for dangerous machines conforming to INRS and VDE 0113.
2/12
Dimensions, TeSys enclosed starters 2
mounting 2
type GV2 ME and accessories
Dimensions, mounting
Surface mounting enclosures GV2 MC0p
(1)
=
2
147
130
=
84 93 = =
(1) 4 knock-outs for 16 mm plastic cable gland or 16 mm conduit.

Surface mounting enclosure GV2 MCK04
(1)
=
147
130
=
84 93 = =
145,5
(1) 4 knock-outs for 16 mm plastic cable gland or 16 mm conduit.

Flush mounting enclosures GV2 MP0p (panel cut-out)
GV2 MP0p GV2 MGV2 MP01, MP02 GV2 MP03, MP04 Front plate GV2 CP21
71
= = = = 11,5
9,5
=
21
127
140
133
62
118
133
117
=
1...6 = 93,5 = 71 6,5 1...4 76 7,5

12 a 106,5 93 12 93
GV2 a
MP01, MP02 –
MP03, MP04 86
2/13
Characteristics, TeSys enclosed starters 2
references 2
D.O.L. starters with manual control,
with magnetic circuit-breaker, 0.55 to 30 kW
Characteristics (1)
Conforming to standards IEC 60947-4, IEC 60439-1, VDE 0660-102 and EN 60947
Degree of protection conforming to IEC 60529 GV2 LC: IP 547

GV NGC: IP 407
Operational voltage Ue GV2 LC: 690 V
GV NGC: 500 V
Material Polycarbonate (2)
References
2 Control by black rotary handle, padlockable in Off position (up to 3 padlocks with Ø 8 shank, to be ordered separately)
533740
Rating Breaking capacity Icu Magnetic Reference Weight

In conforming to IEC 60947-2 tripping
220/ 400/ 440 V 500 V current
230 V 415 V Id ± 20 %
A kA kA kA kA A kg
1.6 100 100 100 100 13 In GV2 LC0206 (3) 0.780
GV2 LC02pp 2.5 100 100 100 100 13 In GV2 LC0207 (3) 0.780
533741
4 100 100 100 100 13 In GV2 LC0208 (3) 0.780
6.3 100 100 100 100 13 In GV2 LC0210 (3) 0.780
10 100 100 20 10 13 In GV2 LC0214 (3) 0.780

GV2 LC02pp
14 100 50 20 10 13 In GV2 LC0216 (3) 0.780
18 100 50 20 10 13 In GV2 LC0220 (3) 0.780

533742
25 100 50 30 15 12 In GV NGC0225 2.450
32 100 50 30 15 12 In GV NGC0232 2.450
40 100 50 30 15 12 In GV NGC0240 2.450
50 100 50 30 15 12 In GV NGC0250 2.450
GV NGC02pp 63 100 50 30 15 12 In GV NGC0263 2.450
Variants
Starters with control by red rotary handle on yellow background
Add the letter R to the references selected above.
Example: GV2 LC0206 becomes GV2 LC0206R.
Enclosure without circuit-breaker, with rotary handle mounted on cover

533743
A kg
Black rotary handle 1.6…18 GV2 LC02 0.300
25…63 GV NGC02 0.550
Red rotary handle on yellow background 1.6…18 GV2 LC02R 0.300

25…63 GV NGC02R 0.550
GV2 LC02 (1) Circuit-breaker characteristics:

GV2 L: see pages 3/12 and 3/13.
NG 125L: product marketed under the Merlin Gerin, brand, please consult your Regional Sales Office.
(2) Avoid placing this material in contact with harsh substances (detergents, chlorine solvents, ketones, alcohol, aromatic
hydrocarbons).
(3) The following can be fitted by the customer: a GVAD or GVAM auxiliary contact block on the LH side and a GVAp trip on the
RH side.
Dimensions: Scheme:
page 2/15 page 2/15
2/14
scheme 2
D.O.L. starters with manual control,
with magnetic circuit-breaker, 0.55 to 30 kW
Dimensions
GV2 LC0206…LC0220 GV NGC0225…NGC0263
=
=
65 2
166
150
348
330
120 = =
=
173 88
167 = =
=
237 186,3
Knock-outs or blanking plugs for cable glands

Enclosure type At top At bottom
ISO ISO
GV2 LC 2 x 20 or 2 x 25 2 x 20 or 2 x 25
GV NGC 2 x 20 or 2 x 25 or 2 x 32 or 2 x 40 2 x 20 or 2 x 25 or 2 x 32 or 2 x 40
Scheme
1/L1
3/L2
5/L3
6/T3
2/T1
4/T2
References:
page 2/14
2/15
references 2
D.O.L. starters for motor control (1)
2.2 to 45 kW, without isolating device
Characteristics
Conforming to standards IEC 60947-4-1 and IEC 60439-1, VDE 0660-102, EN 60947
Degree of protection conforming to IEC 60529 IP 659: LE2 K

IP 657: LEp D09…D35
IP 557: LEp D405…D955
Ambient air temperature Operation: - 5…+ 40 °C
Operating positions Same as that of the contactors
2 Material Polycarbonate (2): LE2 K and LEp D09…D35

Sheet steel: LEp D405…D955
References
Non-reversing starters
Standard power ratings of 3-phase Maximum Basic reference, Weight
533747
motors 50-60 Hz in category AC-3 current to be completed by adding

220 V 380 V 415 V 440 V 500 V 660 V I the the voltage code (3)
230 V 400 V 690 V up to
kW kW kW kW kW kW A kg
2.2 4 4 4 5.5 5.5 9 LE1 D09pp 0.920
3 5.5 5.5 5.5 7.5 7.5 12 LE1 D12pp 0.920
LE1 D12pp 4 7.5 9 9 10 10 18 LE1 D18pp 1.015
5.5 11 11 11 15 15 25 LE1 D25pp 1.015
7.5 15 15 15 18.5 18.5 35 LE1 D35pp 4.320
11 18.5 22 22 22 30 40 LE1 D405pp 4.820
15 22 25 30 30 33 50 LE1 D505pp 4.850
18.5 30 37 37 37 37 65 LE1 D655pp 4.850
22 37 45 45 55 45 80 LE1 D805pp 5.140
25 45 45 45 55 45 95 LE1 D955pp 5.440
Reversing starters
1.5 2.2 2.2 3 – – 6 LE2 K065pp 1.080
533748
2.2 4 4 4 – – 9 LE2 K095pp 1.080

LE2 D09pp (4) 2.100
– – – – 5.5 5.5 9 LE2 D09pp 2.100
3 5.5 5.5 5.5 7.5 7.5 12 LE2 D12pp 2.100
4 7.5 9 9 10 10 18 LE2 D18pp 2.410
5.5 11 11 11 15 15 25 LE2 D25pp 2.570
7.5 15 15 15 18.5 18.5 35 LE2 D35pp 4.100
LE2 D12pp 11 18.5 22 22 22 30 40 LE2 D405pp 5.270
15 22 25 30 30 33 50 LE2 D505pp 5.470
18.5 30 37 37 37 37 65 LE2 D655pp 5.470
22 37 45 45 55 45 80 LE2 D805pp 6.700
25 45 45 45 55 45 95 LE2 D955pp 7.000
(1) Overload protection must be provided by a thermal overload relay, to be ordered separately,
see pages 6/16 and 6/17.
(2) Avoid placing this material in contact with harsh substances (detergents, chlorine solvents,
ketones, alcohol, aromatic hydrocarbons).
Volts 24 42 48 110 115 220 230 240 380 400 415 440
a 50/60 Hz
LE2 K B7 D7 E7 F7 – M7 P7 U7 Q7 V7 N7 R7
LE1, LE2 D B7 D7 E7 F7 FE7 M7 P7 U7 Q7 V7 N7 R7
Other voltages: please consult your Regional Sales Office.
(4) Selection according to the number of operating cycles, please consult your Regional Sales
Office.
page 2/18 page 2/19
2/16

Description
533749
Standard versions comprise:

b For non-reversing starters:
v 1 green Start button “I”,
v 1 red Stop/Reset button “O”.
b For reversing starters:

LE1 D12ppA04 v LE2 K:
- 1 Start button A,
- 1 Start button E,
- 1 red Stop/Reset button.
2
533750
v LE2 D09…D35:
- 1 2-position spring return selector switch “I”-“II”,
- 1 red Stop/Reset button “O”,
v LE2 D405…D955:
- 1 blue Reset button “R”.
LE1 D12ppA05 Variants (pre-assembled)

Description Application Suffix to be added to
the starter reference (2)
No pushbuttons on cover LE1 D09…D955 A04
LE2 D09…D955
533751
1 green Start button “I” LE2 D405…D955 A11

1 green Start button “II”
1 red Stop/Reset button “O”
1 blue Reset button “R” LE1 D09…D955 A05

LE2 K06 and K09
LE2 D09…D35
LE1 D12ppA09
1 3-position stay put selector LE1 D09…D35 A09

switch (“I”-“O”-“II”)
(“I”: Automatic Start; “O”: Stop;
“II”: Manual Start)
533752
1 blue Reset button “R”
1 2-position stay put selector LE1 D09…D35 A13

switch “O”-“I”
(“O”: Stop; “I”: Manual Start)
1 3-position selector switch LE1 D09…D35 A35

LE1 D12ppA13
“O”-“I” spring return to centre position
(“I”: Manual start;
“O”: Stop, stay put)
533753
1 neutral terminal LE1 D405…D955 A59

Fitted as standard on LE2 K06 and K09
LE1 and LE2 D09 to D35, LE2 D405…D955
LE1 and LE2 D405 to D955 starters
ordered with 222 V (M7), 230 V (P7)
or 240 V (U7) control supply
Mounting of an LC1 D09 or D12 contactor LE1 D09 T
in an enclosure identical to LE1 D18 (3) LE1 D12
LE1 D12ppA35
Accessory (for customer assembly)
Description Application Reference Weight
kg
Start pushbutton latching device LE1 D405…D955 LA9 D09907 0.060
for stay put operation
(Start-Stop)
(1) See previous page.

(2) Example: LE1 D09F7A04.
(3) See dimensions see page 2/18.
Other versions Possible combinations of 2 variants.

Schemes :
page 2/19
2/17
Dimensions 2

Dimensions
LE1 D09 and D12 LE1 D09 and D12ppT LE1 D405…D655
LE1 D18…D35 and LE2 D09…D35
=
=
166
150
195
201
183
312
2
c1 = =
=
88 c1 = =
=
101
c1 = 105 =
181
c1
c1 LE1 D LE2 D c1
Standard version 128.5 Standard version 153.5 160 Standard version 161
Variant A04 120 Variant A04 145 145 Variant A04 150
Variant A05 128.5 Variant A05 153.5 153.5 Variant A05 161
Variant A09 135 Variant A09 160 –
LE2 K06 and K09
19 120
150
165
146 84
175
LE1 D805, LE1 D955 and LE2 D405…D655 LE2 D805 and D955
=
=
195
287
165
307
=
=
c1 = 225 =
c1 = 165 = 367
257
c1
LE1 D LE2 D c1
Standard version 176 176 Standard version 194
Variant A04 165 165 Variant A04 190
Variant A05 176 – Variant A05 194
Variant A11 – 176

Type of enclosure At top At bottom
PG ISO PG ISO
LE1 D09 and D12 – 2 x 20 2 x 13 or 2 x 16 2 x 20
LE1 D18…D35 and LE2 D09…D35 – 2 x 20 or 2 x 25 2 x 16 or 2 x 21 2 x 20 or 2 x 25
LE2 D405 1 x 13 and 1 x 21 1 x 20 and 1 x 25 1 x 13 and 2 x 21 1 x 20 and 2 x 25
LE1 D405…D655, LE2 D505 and D655 1 x 13 and 1 x 29 1 x 20 and 1 x 32 1 x 13 and 2 x 29 1 x 20 and 2 x 32
LE1 or LE2 D805 and D955 1 x 13 and 1 x 36 1 x 20 and 1 x 40 1 x 13 and 2 x 36 1 x 20 and 2 x 40
LE2 K 2 x 13 and 2 x 16 4 x 20 2 x 13 and 2 x 16 4 x 20
2/18
Schemes 2

Schemes
LE1 D09…D955 LE1 D09…D955 Variant A04 or A05
L1
L2
L3
A A
– KM1
O
2221
O
Remote control
13
l
I – KM1
2
14
– KM1
A1
A1
– KM1 – KM1
W
U
A2
A2
B B
LE2 K06, K09 LE2 K06, K09 Variant A05

L1
L2
L3
A A
Remote
control
– KM1 – KM2
– KM1 – KM2
– KM2 – KM1
– KM2 – KM1
A1
A1
A1
A1
– KM1 – KM2 – KM1 – KM2
A2
A2
W
U
A2
A2
B B
LE2 D09…D955 LE2 D09…D35 LE2 D405…D955, LE2 D09…D955

with variants A04 or A05
L1
L2
L3
A A
R
21
O Remote
22
I II control
– S1
ll
– KM1 – KM2
– KM1 – KM2 – KM2 – KM1
– KM2 – KM1 – KM2 – KM1

A1
A1
A1
A1
– KM1 – KM2 – KM1 – KM2

A2
A2
A2
A2
W
U
B B
Connections A B
220 V, 230 V, 240 V LE2 K, LE1 and LE2 D09 and D12 L3 Neutral
LE1 and LE2 D18…D955 L3 Neutral terminal
380 V, 400 V, 415 V, 440 V All products L3 L1
Other voltages LE1 and LE2 D09…D35 Terminal 1 Terminal 2

LE2 K, LE1 and LE2 D405 and D955 Direct connection
2/19
references 2
2.2 to 45 kW, with isolating device
Characteristics
Degree of protection conforming to IEC 60529 IP 659: LEp K

IP 657: LEp D09…D35
IP 557: LEp D406…D806
Ambient air temperature Operation: - 5…+ 40 °C
2 Material Polycarbonate (2): LEp K and LEp D09…D35

Sheet steel: LEp D406…D806
References
Standard power ratings of 3-phase Maximum Fuses to be fitted Basic reference, Weight
533769
motors 50-60 Hz in category AC-3 current by the customer to be completed by

220 V 380 V 415 V 440 V 500 V 660 V I the Size Type aM adding the voltage code (3)
230 V 400 V 690 V up to
kW kW kW kW kW kW A A kg
1.5 2.2 2.2 3 – – 6 10 x 38 10 LE4 K065pp 1.450
2.2 4 4 4 – – 9 10 x 38 12 LE4 K095pp 1.450
or LE4 D09pp (4) 1.960
2.2 4 4 4 5.5 – 9 10 x 38 12 LE4 D09pp 1.960
3 5.5 5.5 5.5 7.5 – 12 10 x 38 16 LE4 D12pp 1.960
4 7.5 9 9 10 – 18 10 x 38 20 LE4 D18pp 2.200
LE4 D12pp 5.5 11 11 11 15 – 25 10 x 38 25 LE4 D25pp 2.200
7.5 15 15 15 18.5 18.5 35 14 x 51 32 LE4 D35pp 5.190
11 18.5 22 22 22 30 40 14 x 51 40 LE4 D406pp 5.770
15 22 25 30 30 33 50 22 x 58 63 LE4 D506pp 6.440
18.5 30 37 37 37 37 65 22 x 58 80 LE4 D656pp 6.670
22 37 45 45 55 45 80 22 x 58 80 LE4 D806pp (5) 7.100
Reversing starters
533770
1.5 2.2 2.2 3 – – 6 10 x 38 10 LE8 K065pp 1.600

2.2 4 4 4 – – 9 10 x 38 12 LE8 K095pp 1.600
or LE8 D09pp (4) 3.550
– – – – 5.5 – 9 10 x 38 12 LE8 D09pp 3.550
3 5.5 5.5 5.5 7.5 – 12 10 x 38 16 LE8 D12pp 3.550
4 7.5 9 9 10 – 18 10 x 38 20 LE8 D18pp 3.700
5.5 11 11 11 15 – 25 10 x 38 25 LE8 D25pp 4.670
7.5 15 15 15 18.5 18.5 35 14 x 51 32 LE8 D35pp 5.800
11 18.5 22 22 22 30 40 14 x 51 40 LE2 D406pp 14.170
LE8 D12pp 15 22 25 30 30 33 50 22 x 58 63 LE2 D506pp 14.700
18.5 30 37 37 37 37 65 22 x 58 80 LE2 D656pp 14.770
22 37 45 45 55 45 80 22 x 58 80 LE2 D806pp 16.000
(1) Overload protection must be provided by a thermal overload relay, to be ordered separately, see pages 6/16 and 6/17.
(2) Avoid placing this material in contact with harsh substances (detergents, chlorine solvents, ketones, alcohol, aromatic
hydrocarbons).
Volts 24 42 48 110 115 220 230 240 380 400 415 440
a 50/60 Hz
LEp K B7 D7 E7 F7 – M7 P7 U7 Q7 V7 N7 R7
LEp D B7 D7 E7 F7 FE7 M7 P7 U7 Q7 V7 N7 R7
(4) Selection according to dimensions and the number of operating cycles, please consult your Regional Sales Office.
(5) Supplied with 3 cable entries.
Dimensions: Schemes:
page 2/22 page 2/23
2/20

Description
533771
Standard versions comprise:

b For non-reversing starters:
v LE4 K and LE4 D09…D656
- 1 green Start button “I”,
- 1 red Stop/Reset button “O”.
v LE4 D806
- no pushbuttons on cover
b For reversing starters:

v LE8 K :
2
LE4 D12ppA04
- 1 Start button A,
- 1 Start button E,
- 1 red Stop/Reset button.
v LE8 D09…D35 :
- 1 2-position spring return selector switch “I”-“II”,
- 1 red Stop/Reset button “O”,
v LE2 D406 to D806:
- no pushbuttons on cover.
Protection Power circuit Control circuit

LE4 and LE8 K 1 3-pole isolating device None
LE4 and LE8 D09…D25 1 3-pole isolating device + 1 additional pole
LE4 and LE2 D35…D806 1 3-pole isolating device + 1 circuit-breaker GB2 CB08
533772
Variants (pre-assembled)
LE8 D09…D35

1 green Start button “II”
LE4 D12ppA05 1 red Stop/Reset button “O”

LE8 K06 and K09
LE8 D09…D35
LE2 D406…D806
1 neutral terminal LE4 K06 and K09 A59

Fitted as standard on LE4 D18…D806, LE4 D09…D806
LE8 D18…D35 and LE4 D406…D806 LE8 K06 and K09
starters ordered with 220 V (M7), LE8 D09…D35
230 V (P7) or 240 V (U7) control supply LE2 D406…D806
Accessory (for customer assembly)

kg
(Start-Stop)
(1) See previous page


page 2/22 page 2/23
2/21
Dimensions 2

Dimensions
LE4 K06 and K09, LE8 K06 and K09 LE4 D09…D35, LE8 D09…D35
31
=
150
165
348
330
19 20 84 (1)
120 175
c1
c1 = =
=
186 31
c1 c1
LE4 K LE8 K LE4 D LE8 D
Standard version 146 146 Standard version 175.5 182
Variant A05 – 139 Variant A04 167 167
(1) For LE8 only Variant A05 175.5 175.5
LE4 D406…D656 LE2 D406…D806, LE4 D806
= a-75 = 31
=
=
287
195
400 (1)
342,5
325
350
=
4xM8x25
c1 = 225 =
=
367 31
202 a-50
c1 a
a+57,5
c1
c1 a LE2 D LE4 D
Standard version 201 LE2 D406, D506, D656 300 Standard version 218 218
Variant A04 190 LE2 D806 400 Variant A05 218 218
Variant A05 201 LE4 D806 400 Variant A11 – 218
(1) + 14 mm with blanking plugs.
PG ISO PG ISO
LE4 and LE8 D09…D35 – 2 x 20 or 2 x 25 or – 2 x 20 or 2 x 25 or
2 x 32 or 2 x 40 2 x 32 or 2 x 40
LE2 D09…D35 – 2 x 20 or 2 x 25 – 2 x 20 or 2 x 25
LE2 D406 and LE4 D406 1 x 13 and 1 x 21 1 x 20 and 1 x 25 1 x 13 and 2 x 21 1 x 20 and 2 x 25
LE1 D506…D656, LE4 D506 and D656 1 x 13 and 1 x 29 1 x 20 and 1 x 32 1 x 13 and 2 x 29 1 x 20 and 2 x 32
LE2 D806 and LE4 D806 1 x 13 and 1 x 36 1 x 20 and 1 x 40 1 x 13 and 2 x 36 1 x 20 and 2 x 40
LE4 K and LE8 K 2 x 13 and 2 x 16 4 x 20 2 x 13 and 2 x 16 4 x 20
2/22
Schemes 2

Schemes
LE4 K06, K09 LE4 K06, K09 LE4 D09…D35 LE4 D406…D656 LE4 D806, LE4 D09…D656
LE4 D09…D806 with variant A04 or A05
L1
L2
L3
A A A A
Q1
– F1 – F1 Q1
– Q1 Q1 Q1
I – KM1
21
O O O
13 22
– KM1
Remote control
18
O
I – KM1 l – KM1 l
17
14
– KM1
A2
A1
A1
A2
– KM1
A1
– KM1 – KM1 – KM1
A2
B
A2
A1
B
W
U
B B
LE8 K06, K09 LE8 K06, K09 Variant A05

L1
L2
L3
A A
– Q1
R
– Q1
O
Remote control
– KM1 – KM2
– KM1 – KM2
– KM2 – KM1
– KM2 – KM1
A1
A1
A1
A1
– KM1 – KM2
– KM1 – KM2
A2
A2
A2
A2
B
B
W
U
LE8 D09…LE2 D806 LE8 D09…D35 LE2 D406…D806

L1
L2
L3
A A
Q1
Q1 – F1 Q1
– Q1
O
22 21
O
Remote control
13
I II
ll
– S1
14
2 KM1 – KM2
– KM1 – KM2 – KM2

– KM1
– KM2 – KM1 – KM2 – KM1

A1
A1
A1
A1
– KM1 – KM2 – KM1 – KM2

A2
A2
A2
A2
B B
W
U
Connections A B
220 V, 230 V, 240 V LE4 and LE8 K, LE4 and LE8 D09 and D12 L3 Neutral
LE4 D18…D806, LE8 D18…D35 and LE2 D406…D806 L3 Neutral terminal
Other voltages LE4 and LE8 D09…D35 Terminal 1 Terminal 2

LE4 and LE2 D406…D806 Direct connection
2/23
references 2
0.25 to 7.5 kW with 3-phase thermal
overload relay with 3 protected phases
Characteristics (1)
Conforming to standards IEC 60947-4-1, IEC 60439-1, VDE 0660-102 and EN 60947
Ambient air temperature Operation: - 5 to + 40 °C
Operating positions Same as for the k contactors
Material Self-extinguishing ABS
References
2
533788
Starter LE1 M, combined with short-circuit protection components, provides type 1

or type 2 coordination, depending on the type of devices used.
Standard power ratings of 3-phase Setting range Basic reference, Weight

motors 50-60 Hz in category AC-3 of thermal to be completed
220 V 240 V 380 V 415 V overload relay by adding the
230 V 400 V LR2 K (2) voltage code (3)
kW kW kW kW A kg
0.12 0.12 0.25 0.25 0.54…0.8 LE1 M35pp05 0.600
0.18 0.18 0.37 0.37 0.8…1.2 LE1 M35pp06 0.600

533789
0.25 0.25 0.55 0.55 1.2…1.8 LE1 M35pp07 0.600
0.37 0.37 1.1 0.75 1.8…2.6 LE1 M35pp08 0.600
0.55 0.55 1.5 1.5 2.6…3.7 LE1 M35pp10 0.600
1.1 0.75 2.2 2.2 3.7…5.5 LE1 M35pp12 0.600
1.5 1.1 3 3 5.5…8 LE1 M35pp14 0.600
2.2 2.2 4 4 8…11.5 LE1 M35pp16 0.600
LE1 M35pppp 3 3 5.5 5.5 10…14 LE1 M35pp21 0.600
3.7 4 7.5 7.5 12…16 LE1 M35pp22 0.600
Description
b The standard version comprises:
v 1 TeSys contactor LC1 Kpp,
v 1 TeSys thermal overload relay LR2 K,
v 1 red Stop/Reset button “O/R”,
v 1 yellow operating indicator.
b Control may be pulsed or maintained.

b An earth terminal and a neutral terminal are provided on the bottom of the
enclosure.
b For safey applications, see enclosed starters:
GV2 MC, LG1 K, LG1 D, LG7 K, LG7 D, LJ7 K, LG8 K and LJ8 K.
Variant
Starter without thermal overload relay LR2 K
Delete the last 2 digits of the starter references selected above.
Example: LE1 M35pp
Replacement part
Description Basic reference, Weight
to be completed
by adding the
voltage code (3) kg
Contactor LC1 KppA80 0.180
(1) For characteristics of TeSys k contactor, see pages 6/8 and 6/9.
For characteristics of TeSys thermal overload relay LR2 K, see pages 5/6 to 5/9.
(2) Thermal overload relay fitted as standard.
(3) The contactor coil is pre-wired between 2 phases of the power circuit.
The codes indicated below therefore correspond to the power circuit voltage.
Volts 24 220 230 240 380 400 415 440
a 50/60 Hz
Code B7 M7 P7 U7 Q7 V7 N7 R7
Example: 380/400 V 3-phase supply, 4 kW motor: LE1 M35Q716.
page 2/25 page 2/25
2/24
schemes 2
0.25 to 7.5 kW with 3-phase thermal
overload relay with 3 protected phases
Dimensions
LE1 M35 (1)
108 78
130 (5"1/8)
160

PG ISO PG ISO
LE1 M 2 x 13 to 2 x 21 2 x 20 or 2 x 25 2 x 13 to 2 x 21 2 x 20 or 2 x 25
(1) Can be mounted on machine panel or frame. Knock-outs for 4 x 13 P cable glands.
Schemes
LE1 M35 Choice of type of control built into the product
Control by latching pushbuttons Control by spring return pushbuttons
1/L1
3/L2
5/L3
L1 L2 L3
A A
A1
13
1 3 5 13 I – KM1
14
13
– KM1 I
I KM1
95
14
O/R
95
96
O
2 4 6 14 A2
A2 96
A2
4
6
2
– KM1 – H1
– KM1 – H1
A1
A1
O/R
W
B
U
B
V
Reset/OR
Connection A B
220 V, 230 V, 240 V L3 Neutral
2 4 6
M 380 V, 400 V, 415 V, 440 V L3 L1
T1 T2 T3
Other voltages Terminal 1 Terminal 2
References :
page 2/24
2/25
references 2
D.O.L. starters for motor control, 0.37 to 5.5 kW
with thermal magnetic circuit-breaker and contactor
Characteristics
Conforming to standards IEC 60947-4-1, IEC 60439-1, VDE 0660-102 and EN 60947
Operating positions Same as for the model k contactors
References
Standard power ratings of Setting Fixed Basic reference, Weight
3-phase motors 50-60 Hz range of magnetic to be completed
2
533797
in category AC-3 thermal tripping by adding the

230 V 400/ 440 V 500 V 690 V trips current voltage code (2)
415 V 13 Irth
0.18 0.37 0.37 0.37 0.75 1…1.6 22.5 LE1 GVME06Kpp 1.210
0.25 0.55 0.55 0.55 1.1
0.75
0.37 0.75 0.75 1.1 1.5 1.6…2.5 33.5 LE1 GVME07Kpp 1.210
533798
1.1
0.55 1.1 1.5 1.5 2.2 2.5…4 51 LE1 GVME08Kpp 1.210

0.75 1.5 2.2 3
1.1 2.2 2.2 3 4 4…6.3 78 LE1 GVME10Kpp 1.210

3
1.5 3 4 4 5.5 6…10 138 LE1 GVME14Kpp 1.210

2.2 4 5.5 7.5
LE1 GVMEppKpp
2.2 5.5 5.5 7.5 9 9…14 170 LE1 GVME16Kpp 1.210
3 7.5 11
Variants
Description Suffix to be added Weight
533799
to the starter
reference (3) kg
Neutral terminal A59 –

kg
Enclosure without starter, with sealing kit fitted LE1 GVMEK 0.740
(references of combination motor starters
LE1 GVMEK for customer assembly, see pages 24520/2 and 24520/3)
Accessories (to be ordered separately)
Padlocking device (4) 1 to 3 padlocks 1 GV2 V01 0.075
for GV2 ME operator (padlocking Ø 4 to 8 mm
is only possible in the “O” position)
head “Stop”
pushbutton Latching (4) Key release, 1 GV2 K021 0.160
Ø 40 mm, IP 55 key n° 455
red
Turn to release 1 GV2 K031 0.115
1 GV2 K04 (5) 0.120
Sealing kit IP 55 for 10 GV2 E01 0.012
temperature
between
+ 5°C and + 40°C
IP 55 for 10 GV2 E02 0.012
temperature
between
- 20°C and + 40°C
Volts 24 42 48 110 115 220 230 240 380 400 415 440
a 50/60 Hz
Item B7 D7 E7 F7 – M7 P7 U7 Q7 V7 N7 R7
(3) Example: LE1 GVME06KF7A59.
(4) Supplied with IP 55 sealing kit.
(5) Padlockable in position "O" using Ø 4 to 8 mm shank padlocks.
page 2/27 page 2/27
2/26
schemes 2
D.O.L. starters for motor control, 0.37 to 5.5 kW
with thermal magnetic circuit-breaker and contactor
Dimensions
LE1 GVMEK
183
201
2
86 = =
94 101

ISO ISO
LE1 GV 2 x 20 or 2 x 25 2 x 20 or 2 x 25
Schemes
LE1 GVMEK
A
L1
L2
L3
– Q1
– Q1
O
External
control
I – KM1
A1
– KM1
– KM1
A2
Connections A B
220 V, 230 V, 240 V L3 Neutral
380 V, 400 V, 415 V, 440 V L3 L1
Other voltages Terminal 1 Terminal 2
References :
page 2/26
2/27
references 2
Star-delta starters
5.5 to 132 kW, without isolating device (1)
Characteristics
Degree of protection conforming to IEC 60529 IP 659: LE3 K

IP 657: LE3 D09…D35
IP 557: LE3 D405…D150
2 Material Polycarbonate (2): LE3 K and LE3 D09…D35

Sheet steel: LE3 D405…D150
References
Maximum operating rate:
LE3 K: 12 starts/hour and LE3-D: 30 starts/hour.
Maximum starting time: 30 seconds.
LE3 D: an LAD S2 timer imposes a delay of 40 ms ± 15 ms on the delta contactor at
the moment of changeover to ensure that the star contactor has sufficient breaking
time.
533804
Standard power ratings of squirrel cage motors Basic reference, Weight

Mains voltage - delta connection to be completed by
220 V 380/400 V 415 V 440 V adding the voltage code (3)
kW kW kW kW kg
3 5.5 5.5 5.5 LE3 K065pp 1.460
4 7.5 7.5 7.5 LE3 K095pp 1.460
or LE3 D09pp (4) 3.650
5.5 11 11 11 LE3 D12pp 3.650
11 18.5 22 22 LE3 D18pp 3.750

LE3 D12pp
15 30 30 30 LE3 D35pp 5.160
18.5 37 37 37 LE3 D405pp 8.160
30 55 59 59 LE3 D505pp 8.150
37 75 75 75 LE3 D805pp 14.000
63 110 110 110 LE3 D115pp 24.500
75 132 132 147 LE3 D150pp 24.500
(1) Overload protection must be provided by a thermal overload relay, to be ordered separately.
Select appropriate overload relay for setting at 0.58 of the full load rated motor current, see
pages 6/16 and 6/17.
Volts 24 42 48 110 115 220 230 240 380 400 415 440
a 50/60 Hz
LE3 K B7 D7 E7 F7 – M7 P7 U7 – – – –
LE3 D B7 D7 E7 F7 FE7 M7 P7 U7 Q7 V7 N7 R7
(4) Selection according to dimensions and the number of operating cycles, please consult your
Regional Sales Office.
page 2/30 page 2/31
2/28
Star-delta starters
Description
533805
The standard version comprises:
b LE3 K and LE3 D09…D35:

b LE3 D405…D150:
v no pushbuttons on cover.
2
LE3 D12ppA04

533806
1 neutral terminal LE3 K065 and K095 A59

Fitted as standard on LE3 D09…D805
starters LE3 D115 and D150
Mechanical interlock LE3 D405 to D150 A64

Fitted as standard on starters
LE3 K and LE3 D09…D35
LE3 D12ppA05
(1) Example: LE3 D09F7A04

Schemes :
page 2/31
2/29
Dimensions 2
Star-delta starters
Dimensions
LE3 K065, K095 LE3 D09…D35
19 120
=
150
165
348
330
146 84
175
c1 = =
=
186
c1
Standard version 175.5
Variant A04 167
Variant A05 175.5
LE3 D405 and D505 LE3 D805…D150
= a - 75 =
=
=
195
287
b + 57,5
b - 75
b - 50
b (1)
=
c1 = 225 =
=
367
c1 a - 50
c1 + 15,5 a
a + 57,5
c1
c1 LE3 a b LE3 D805 D115, D150
Standard version 190 D805 400 400 Standard version 202 252
Variant A05 194 D1155 500 600 Variant A05 218
Variant A06 194 D1505 500 600 Variant A06 218 268
PG ISO PG ISO
LE3 D09…D35 – 2 x 20 or 2 x 25 or – 2 x 20 or 2 x 25 or
2 x 32 or 2 x 40 2 x 32 or 2 x 40
LE3 D405 1 x 29 1 x 32 1 x 29, 1 x 32,
2 x 13 and 2 x 21 2 x 20 and 2 x 25
LE3 D505 1 x 36 1 x 40 1 x 36, 1 x 40,
2 x 13 and 2 x 29 2 x 20 and 2 x 32
LE3 D805 1 x 36 1 x 40 2 x 13 and 3 x 36 2 x 20 and 3 x 40
LE3 K 2 x 13 and 2 x 16 4 x 20 2 x 13 and 2 x 16 4 x 20
2/30
Schemes 2
Star-delta starters
Schemes
LE3 K065 and K095
L1
L2
L3
W1
U1
V1
O
– KM2 – KM3 – KM1

I
– KM2
– KM1
2
W2
U2
V2
W1
U1
V1
– KM3 – KM1
Recommended
cabling for reversal
T
of motor rotation
A1
A1
A1
A1
(standard motor,
T
W2
– KM1 – KM3 – KM2

U2
V2
viewed from A2
A2
A2
A2
shaft end). B
Y
L
LE3 D09…D805 LE3 D09…D35 LE3 D405…D805

L1
L2
L3
A A
W1
U1
V1
O
– KM2 – KM3 – KM1
Remote – KM2
17
I – KM2
control
I
W2
U2
V2
18
– KM1 – KM1
W1
U1
V1
– KM2 – KM2 – KM2 – KM2

Recommended
– KM3 – KM1 – KM3 – KM1
of motor rotation
(standard motor,
A1
A1
A1
W2
A1
A1
A1
U2
V2
viewed from
– KM1 – KM2 – KM3 – KM1 – KM2 – KM3
shaft end).
A2
A2
A2
A2
A2
A2
B B
Y Y
L L
Note : in accordance with current installation regulations, short-circuit protection must be provided by fuses or a circuit-breaker.
LE3 D115 and D150

L1
L2
L3
A
W1
U1
V1
– KM2 – KM3 – KM1 Remote – KM1 – KM2

17
control
l
18
– KM1
W2
U2
V2
W1
– KM1
U1
V1
– KM2
– KM3 – KM2 – KA1

Recommended
A1
A1
A1
A1

of motor rotation
W2
U2
V2
– F2 – KM1 – KM2 – KA1 – KM3

(standard motor,
A2
A2
A2
A2
viewed from shaft B

Y
end). L
Connections A B
220 V, 230 V, 240 V LD09 and D12 L3 Neutral
LE3 D18 to D150 L3 Neutral terminal
Other voltages LE3 D09…D35 Terminal 1 Terminal 2

LE3 K and LE3 D405…D150 Direct connection
2/31
references 2
Star-delta starters (1)
7.5 to 75 kW with isolating device
Characteristics
Degree of protection conforming to IEC 60529 IP 657: LE6 D09…D18

IP 557: LE3 D326…D806
Material Polycarbonate (2): LE6 D

2 Sheet steel: LE3 D
References
Maximum starting time: 30 seconds.
An LA2 DS2 timer imposes a delay of 40 ms ± 15 ms on the delta contactor at the
moment of changeover to ensure that the star contactor has sufficient breaking time.
Standard power ratings of Fuses to be fitted Basic reference, Weight

squirrel cage motors. Mains by the customer to be completed by
533823
voltage - Delta connection Size Type adding the voltage code (3)
220 V 380 V 415 V 440 V aM
400 V
kW kW kW kW A kg
4 7.5 7.5 7.5 10 x 38 20 LE6 D09pp 3.900
5.5 11 11 11 10 x 38 25 LE6 D12pp 3.900
11 18.5 22 22 14 x 51 40 LE6 D18pp 4.850
15 30 30 30 22 x 58 63 LE3 D326pp 7.650
18.5 37 37 37 22 x 58 80 LE3 D406pp 16.900

LE6 D12pp
30 55 59 59 22 x 58 125 LE3 D506pp 17.000
37 75 75 75 0 160 LE3 D806pp 27.500
Volts 24 42 48 110 115 220 230 240 380 400 415 440
50/60 Hz B7 D7 E7 F7 FE7 M7 P7 U7 Q7 V7 N7 R7
page 2/34 page 2/35
2/32
Star-delta starters
533824
Description
The standard version comprises:
b LE6 D09…D18:
b LE3 D326…D806:
v no pushbuttons on cover
Protection
LE6 D09 and D12
Power circuit
1 3-pole isolating device
Control circuit
+ 1 additional pole
2
LE6 D18…LE3 D806 1 3-pole isolating device + 1 circuit-breaker GB2 CB08
LE6 D12ppA04 Variants (pre-assembled)

533824

1 blue Reset button “R” LE6 D09…LE3 D806 A05
1 neutral terminal LE6 D09…LE3 D806 A59
Mechanical interlock LE3 D326…D806 A64

Fitted as standard on
starters LE6 D09…D18
LE6 D12ppA05
page 2/34 page 2/35
2/33
Dimensions 2
Star-delta starters
Dimensions
LE6 D09…D18 LE3 D326
=
2
348
330
367
225
=
c1 = =
=
186 31 190 = 195 =

287 31
c1
Standard version 175.5
Variant A04 167
Variant A05 175.5
LE3 D406…D806
= a-75 = 31
=
b+57,5
b-75
b (1)
b-50
4xM8x25
=
c1
a-50
LE3 a b c1
a D406, D506 400 500 218
a+57,5 D806 500 700 269

PG ISO PG ISO
LE6 D09…D18 – 2 x 20 or 2 x 25 – 2 x 20 or 2 x 25
or 2 x 32 or 2 x 40 or 2 x 32 or 2 x 40
LE3 D326 1 x 21 1 x 32 2 x 13, 2 x 16 2 x 20, 2 x 25
and 1 x 21 and 1 x 32
LE3 D406 1 x 29 1 x 32 2 x 13, 2 x 21 2 x 20, 2 x 25
and 1 x 29 and 1 x 32
LE3 D506 1 x 36 1 x 40 2 x 13, 2 x 29 1 x 40, 2 x 20
and 1 x 36 and 2 x 32
LE3 D806 1 x 36 1 x 40 2 x 13 and 3 x 36 2 x 20 and 3 x 40
2/34
Schemes 2
Star-delta starters
Schemes
LE6 D09…D18
3/L2
5/L3
1/L1
6
2
4
A
Q1
– Q1 Q1
2
W1
U1
V1
O
2
3
3
5
5
1
l – KM2
– KM2 – KM3 – KM1 W2
U2
V2
6
6
2
2
4
2
4
– KM1
W1
U1
V1
– KM2 – KM2
1
3
5
Recommended
cabling for – KM3 – KM1
reversal of
2
4
6
W2
U2
V2
A1
A1
A1
motor rotation
(standard motor, – KM1 – KM2 – KM3
viewed from
A2
A2
A2
shaft end) B
LE3 D326…D806
6
3/L2
5/L3
4
1/L1
– F1
– Q1 Q1
2
W1
U1
V1
21
Ð S1
Remote
3
3
5
5
1
13 22
control
– KM2 – KM3 – KM1
l – KM2
W2
U2
V2
6
6
2
2
4
2
4
14
– KM1
W1
U1
V1
1
3
5
– KM2 – KM2
Recommended
cabling for
reversal of – KM3 – KM1
2
4
6
W2
motor rotation
U2
V2
A1
A1
A1
(standard motor,
viewed from – KM1 – KM2 – KM3
A2
A2
A2
shaft end)
B
Connections A B
220 V, 230 V, 240 V LE6 D09 and D12 L3 Neutral
LE6 D18…LE3 D806 L3 Neutral terminal
Other voltages LE6 D09…D18 Terminal 1 Terminal 2

LE3 D326…D806 Direct connection
2/35
References 2
Replacement parts
for starters without isolating device
500118_1
Heads for Start and Stop/Reset pushbuttons

Description For Unit Weight
use on reference kg
Flush, green “I” (1) LE1 D09...D35 ZB5 AA331 0.018
Projecting, red “O” (1) LE1 D09...D35 ZB5 AL432 0.019

ZB5 AA331
2
500120_1
Adaptation kit LE1 D09 and D12 LAD 9091 0.002

for head ZB5 AL432
LE1 D18...D35 LAD 91810 0.003
ZB5 AL432 Heads for Reset pushbuttons

Flush, blue “R”(2) LE1 D09...D35 ZB5 AA0 0.022
500117_1
+ ZBA 639 (3) 0.001
Adaptation kit for head LE1 D09 and D12 LAD 9092 0.002
ZB5 AA0 + ZBA 639
LE1 or LE2 D18...D35 LAD 91810 0.003

LAD 9091
LE3, LE6, LE4 LAD 9T4 0.004

or LE8 D09...D35
500119_1
Heads for selector switches

3-position stay put LE1 D09...D35 ZB5 AD3 0.024
ZB5 ADp
2-position stay put LE1 D09...D35 ZB5 AD2 0.024
500121_1
3-position LE1 D09...D35 ZB5 AD5 0.024

spring return to centre
Contact blocks
1 N/O spring return LE1 D09...D35 ZEN L1111 0.010
ZEN L1111
1 N/C spring return LE1 D09...D35 ZEN L1121 0.010

500122_1
Mounting for contact block LE1 D09 and D12 LAD 90909 0.008
LEp D18...D35 (4) LAD 91809 0.014
LAD 91809 (1) Remember to order adaptation kit LAD 9091 or LAD 91810, depending on size.
(2) Remember to order adaptation kit LAD 9092.
(3) Sold in lots of 10.
(4) LE1, LE2, LE3, LE4, LE6 or LE8.
2/36
Replacement parts
for starters without isolating device
Empty enclosures for D.O.L. starters without isolating device

810175
Designed Head(s) Reference Weight

for use with mounted on cover kg
LE1 D09 and D12 Without DE1 DS1A04 0.300
2
1 flush blue head “R” DE1 DS1A05 0.300
DE1 DS1A04
810176
1 flush green head “I” DE1 DS1 0.300

1 projecting red head “O”

1 switch
DE1 DS1A05
810173
LE1 D18...D35 Without DE1 DS2A04 0.500
DE1 DS1
1 flush green head “I” DE1 DS2 0.500

1 projecting red head “O”
810178

1 switch
DE1 DS1A13
2/37
References 2
Enclosed starters 2
Star-delta starters (1)

90 to 375 kW, without isolating device
Star-delta starters
533866

Maximum starting time: 20 seconds
Standard power ratings Basic reference, Weight

of squirrel cage motors to be completed by
Mains voltage - delta connection adding the voltage code
220 V 380 V 415 V 440 V (2) (3)
kW kW kW kW kg
2 90 160 160 185 LE3 F185pp 31.400
100 200 200 220 LE3 F225pp 33.000
110 220 220 250 LE3 F265pp 50.800

533867
160 280 280 315 LE3 F330pp 80.000
185 315 355 375 LE3 F400pp 82.000
Specifications
Enclosure LE3 F185…F400 Metal, degree of protection IP 559
No pushbuttons on cover LE3 F185…F400 –
Connections LE3 F185…F400 Pre-wired power and control circuit

LE3 F ppppp connections
Description For Suffix to be added
use on to the starter
reference(4)
1 green Start button “I” LE3 F185…F400 A06
Volts 48 110 220/230 230 240 380/400 400 415
50/60 Hz E7 F7 M7 P7 U7 Q7 V7 N7
For other voltages, see pages 5/118 to 5/125.
(3) LC1 F185 and F225: contactors fitted with LX9 F coils,
LC1 F265…F400: contactors fitted with LX1 F coils.
(4) Example: LE3 F185M7A06.

page 2/39 page 2/39
2/38
Dimensions, Enclosed starters 2
schemes 2
Star-delta starters
90 to 375 kW, without isolating device
Dimensions
LE3 Fppp
= a-75 =
=
b+57,5
2
b-75
b (1)
b-50
4xM8x25
=
c a-50
c1 a
a+57,5
LE3 a b (1) c c1 Knock-outs or blanking plugs for cable glands

F185, F225 600 700 303 319 Type of enclosure At top At bottom
F265 700 900 303 319 LE3 F185, F225 2 x 48 P 2 x 13 P and 4 x 48 P
F330, F400 800 1000 403 419 LE3 F265…400 – –
Schemes
LE3 Fppp
6
2
4
L1
L2
L3
– F1
KM3:5
95
– F1
W1
U1
V1
21 96
O
3
3
5
5
1
22
Remote
– KM2 – KM3 – KM1 control
53
13
W2
U2
V2
6
6
2
2
4
2
4
l – KM2
53 54
14
(13)
61
– KM1 – KM1
(14)
54
62
W1
U1
V1
Recommended
1
3
5
cabling for
55
67
13
reversal of – KM2 – KM2 – KA1

motor rotation
61 56
68
14
(standard motor,
2
4
6
viewed from
W2
U2
V2
shaft end)
– KM3
A1 62
A1
A1
A1
– F2 – KM1 – KM2 – KA1 – KM3

A2
A2
A2
A2
KM3:1
Note : in accordance with current installation regulations, each starter must be provided with short-circuit protection by fuses or a circuit-breaker.
References :
page 2/38
2/39
References 2
Enclosed starters 2
Equipment for control in utilisation

category AC-1(1) (2), without isolating device
References
Operational Minimum Fuses to be For use with relay Basic reference, Weight
current c.s.a. of fitted separately LR2 D or kit LA9 D to be completed by
up to phase (to be ordered adding the voltage code
conductors aM gG separately) (3)
A mm2 A A kg
16 2.5 – 16 LA9 D1275 (4) LE1 D123pp 0.920
533871
17.5 1.5 20 – LR2 D1321 (2) LE1 D123pp 0.920

2
24 2.5 25 – LR2 D1322 (2) LE1 D255pp 1.015
LE1 D123
32 6 – 32 LA9 D0975 (4) LE1 D255pp 1.015
50 10 – 50 – LE1 D405ppA04 4.820

(5)
57 10 63 – LR2 D3359 (2) LE1 D405pp 4.820

533872
63 16 – 63 – LE1 D655ppA04 4.850

(5)
76 16 80 – LR2 D3363 (2) LE1 D655pp 4.850
90 25 100 – LR2 D3365 (2) LE1 D805pp 5.140
100 35 – 100 – LE1 D805ppA04 5.140

LE1 D405 (5)
Specifications
Enclosure LE1 D12 Double insulated, degree of protection IP 659
LE1 D25 Double insulated, degree of protection IP 557
LE1 D40...D80 Metal, degree of protection IP 559
Control (2 pushbuttons LE1 D12…D80 1 green Start button “I”

mounted on enclosure cover) 1 red Stop/Reset button “O”
No pushbuttons on cover LE1 DpppppA04
Connections LE1 D12…D80 Pre-wired control circuit connections
(1) 3-phase 220/230 V, 240 V, 380/400 V or 415 V 50/60 Hz. 3-core or 3 Ph + N (unprotected neutral) insulated PVC cable, fixed
to walls, ceilings, in cable racks or ducting, laid singly, ambient temperature y 35 °C, conforming to NF C 15-100.
(2) Order the required LR2 D thermal overload relay separately, for use on balanced circuits only.
(3) Control circuit voltage 50/60 Hz 220/230 V (code M7) or 380/400 V (code Q7).
(4) As protection is provided by type gG fuses only, the Stop function normally provided by the thermal overload relay (where aM
type fuses are used) can be obtained by means of kit LA9 Dpp75.
(5) Equipment supplied without pushbuttons; external Start-Stop station required.
page 2/42 page 2/43
2/40
Enclosed starters 2

category AC-1(1) (2), without isolating device
No pushbuttons on cover LE1 D12 and D25 A04
1 green Start button “I” and LE1 D12 and D25 A07
2
1 red Stop button "O” with 1 N/C contact
(for distribution circuits without thermal overload relay)
1 2-position selector switch "O-I” LE1 D12 A13

(“O”: Stop; “I”: Manual Start)
Knock-outs for 4 x 16 mm plastic cable glands LE1 D12 A20

(instead of 4 x 13 mm plastic glands)
1 neutral terminal (for 3-phase + N circuits) LE1 D12…D80 A59
Accessories (for customer assembly)

use on kg
for stay put operation (Start-Stop)
Kits to provide Stop function LE1 D12 LA9 D1275 0.040

without thermal overload relay fitted
LE1 D25 LA9 D0975 0.020
Miniature control circuit fuse holder LE1 D12 LA9 D931 0.040
size 5 x 20, 4 A/250 V
Fuse supplied
LE1 D25 LA9 D941 0.025
Pilot light with neon bulb, 110 V LE1 D12 and D25 LA9 D924 0.020
red lens and locking ring
220 V LE1 D12 and D25 LA9 D925 0.020
380, 415 V LE1 D12 and D25 LA9 D926 0.020
1 front-mounting block of 2 auxiliary contacts, LE1 D12… D80 LA1 DNpp 0.030
please consult your Regional Sales Office
(1) 3-phase 220/230 V or 380/400 V 50/60 Hz. 3-core or 3 Ph + N (unprotected neutral) insulated PVC cable, fixed to walls, ceilings,
in cable racks or ducting, laid singly, ambient temperature y 35 °C, conforming to NF C 15-100.
Example: LE1 D123M7A04.
.
Schemes :
page 2/43
2/41
Dimensions 2
Enclosed starters 2
D.O.L. starters and equipment,

without isolating device
Dimensions
LE1 D123 LE1 D255
=
=
166
150
165
185
2
120 = =
=
135 = =
=
140 88
142 101
LE1 D405, D655 LE1 D805

=
=
165
307
195
312
=
=
165 = 165 =
150 = 105 =
c1 257
161 (1) 181
(1) 150 for LE1 DpppppA04 (without pushbuttons).

LE1 D123 2 x 13 P 2 x 13 P
LE1 D255 1 x 13 P and 1 x 16 P 2 x 16 P
LE1 D405 and LE1 D655 1 x 13 P and 1 x 29 P 1 x 13 P and 2 x 29 P
LE1 D805 1 x 13 P and 1 x 36 P 1 x 13 P and 2 x 36 P
2/42
Schemes 2
Enclosed starters 2

without isolating device
Schemes
D.O.L. starters and equipment for control in category AC-1
LE1 D123…D805, LE1 DpppppA04 LE1 D123
1/L1
3/L2
5/L3
KM1/5
95
– KM1
96
2
2
O
1
14
14
5
I – KM1
13
13
4
6
2
A1
N
– KM1
W
U
A2
KM1/1
LE1 D255…D805 LE1 DpppppA04, LE1 DpppppA05
KM1/5 KM1/5 95
95
21 96
96
O
Remote
18
14
control O
– KM1
13 22
l
17
13
14
l – KM1
A1
N
14
13
– KM1
A2
A1
KM1/1
N
– KM1
A2
KM1/1
2/43
References 2
Enclosed starters 2

category AC-1 (1) (2), with isolating device
References
533903
Operational Minimum Fuses to be fitted For use with relay Basic reference, Weight
current c.s.a. of by the customer LR2 D or kit LA9 D to be completed by
up to phase Size Type (to be ordered adding the voltage code
conductors separately) (3)
aM gG
A mm2 A A kg
16 2.5 10 x 38 – 16 LA9 D0975 (4) LE4 D126pp 1.960
2 LE4 D126
17.5 1.5 10 x 38 20 – LR2 D1321 (2) LE4 D126pp 1.960
20 2.5 10 x 38 – 20 LA9 D0975 (4) LE4 D256pp 2.200
22 2.5 10 x 38 25 – LR2 D1322 (2) LE4 D256pp 2.200

533904
40 10 14 x 51 – 40 – LE4 D406ppA04 (5) 5.770
45 10 14 x 51 50 – LR2 D3357 (2) LE4 D406pp 5.770
63 16 22 x 58 – 63 – LE4 D656ppA04 (5) 6.670
LE4 D406
76 16 22 x 58 80 – LR2 D3363 (2) LE4 D656pp 6.670
90 25 22 x 58 100 – LR2 D3365 (2) LE4 D806pp (5) 7.100
100 35 22 x 58 – 100 – LE4 D806pp (5) 7.100
Specifications
Enclosure LE4 D12 and D25 Double insulated, degree of protection IP 557
LE4 D40…D80 Metal, degree of protection IP 559
Control LE4 D12…D65 1 green Start button “I”

(2 pushbuttons mounted
on enclosure cover) 1 red Stop/Reset button “O”
No pushbuttons on cover LE4 Dppppp A04 –

LE4 D80
Isolating device with LE4 D12 and D25 1 3-pole isolator + 1 additional pole
external operator
LE4 D40…D80 1 3-pole isolator and 1 circuit breaker GB2 CB08
Connections LE4 D12…D80 Pre-wired power and control circuit connections
(3) Control circuit voltage 50/60 Hz 220/230 V (code M7) or 380/400 V (code Q7).
(4) As protection is provided by type gG fuses only, the Stop function normally provided by the thermal overload relay (where aM
type fuses are used) can be obtained by means of kit LA9 D0975.
(5) Equipment supplied without pushbuttons; external Start-Stop station required.
page 2/46 page 2/46
2/44
Enclosed starters 2

category AC-1 (1) (2), with isolating device
Description For use on Suffix to be added to
the starter reference(3)
No pushbuttons on cover LE4 D12 and D25 A04
1 green Start button “I” and 1 red Stop button “O” LE4 D12 and D25 A07
2
with 1 N/C contact (for distribution circuits
without thermal overload relay)
1 neutral terminal (for 3-phase + N circuits) LE4 D12…D80 A59
Accessories (for customer assembly)

use on kg
Start button latching device LE4 D12…D65 LA9 D09907 0.060
(Start-Stop)
Kit to provide Stop function LE4 D12 and D25 LA9 D0975 0.020
without thermal overload relay fitted
Miniature control circuit fuse holder LE4 D12 and D25 LA9 D941 0.025
size 5 x 20, 4 A/250 V
Fuse supplied
Pilot light with neon bulb, 110 V LE4 D12 and D25 LA9 D924 0.020
red lens and locking ring
220 V LE4 D12 and D25 LA9 D925 0.020
380, 415 V LE4 D12 and D25 LA9 D926 0.020
1 front-mounting block of 2 auxiliary contacts, LE4 D12…D80 LA1 DNpp 0.030

please consult your Regional Sales Office
(3) Example: LE4 D126M7A04.

Schemes :
page 2/47
2/45
Dimensions 2
Enclosed starters 2

with isolating device
Dimensions
LE4 D126, D256 LE4 D406, D656
=
260
2
280
H
=
c = = c = G =
=
c1 122 31 c1 (1) a 31
LE4 c c1
D126 132 139
D256 144 151 (1) c1 = c for LE4 DpppppA04 (without pushbuttons).
LE4 D806
= a-75 = 31
=
b+57,5
b-75
b (1)
b-50
4xM8x25
=
c a-50
c1 a
a+57,5

LE4 D126 2 x 13 P 2 x 13 P
LE4 D256 1 x 13 P and 1 x 16 P 2 x 16 P
2/46
Schemes 2
Enclosed starters 2

with isolating device
Schemes
D.O.L. starters and equipment for control in category AC-1
LE4 D126…D806, LE4 DpppppA04 LE4 D126 and D256
1/L1
5/L3
3/L2
Q1/2 0 9
Q1
13
Q1
– Q1
14
4
2
95
96
1
O
– KM1
18
14
2
l – KM1
17
13
1
A1
N
– KM1
4
6
2
A2
Q1/6
W
U
LE4 D406 and D656 LE4 D806, LE4 DpppppA04 and DpppppA05
Q1/2 Q1/2 13 14
– F1 Q1
13
– F1
95
Q1
14
96
95
Remote
21
control
O
96
O
22
14
13
18
14
l – KM1 l – KM1
14
13
17
13
A2
A1
N N
– KM1 – KM1
A1
A2
Q1/6 Q1/1
2/47
References 2
Enclosed starters 2

and reversing contactor breakers,
for customer assembly
Empty metal enclosures

533912
Type of For use Reference Weight

enclosure on integral kg
Degree of protection IP 54 LD1, LD3 or LD5 LB DE1 LT615 2.110
with drillings for
door interlock mechanism
(interlock not supplied), LD1 or LD4 LC DE1 LT215 2.110
for customer assembly (1)
LD5 LC DE1 LT225 2.710

2
LD1 or LD4 LD DE1 LT315 3.510

Type For use on Colour Reference Weight
enclosure of knob kg
Non-adjustable DE1 LT615 Red LA9 LB320 0.200
DE1 LT615
Black LA9 LB321 0.200
DE1 LT215 Red LA9 LC320 0.200

533912
DE1 LT225 Red LA9 LC520 0.200
DE1 LT315 Red LA9 LC320 0.200

(LD1)
DE1 LT315 Red LA9 LC520 0.200

(LD4)
Separate component
use on kg
Kit for padlockable knob For converting a black, LA9 LC393 0.100
on LD1 LC non-padlockable control knob
DE1 LT215 to a padlockable knob
(1) Enclosures supplied with drillings and fitted with removable blanking plugs, for addition of
cable glands (to be ordered separately): for number and diameters, see page 2/50.
Dimensions :
pages 2/50 and 2/51
2/48
Enclosed starters 2

and reversing contactor breakers,
Empty insulated enclosures

533913
Type of enclosure For use Reference Weight

on integral kg
Degree of protection IP 30 LD1 LB DE1 LB001 0.750
with rectangular cut-out
to suit fascia of the
contactor breaker
Degree of protection IP 54 LD1 LB DE1 LB005 0.750

with drillings for
(interlock not supplied),
2
Degree of protection IP 30 LD1 or LD4 LCp30 DE1 LC001 1.370

with rectangular cut-out
to suit fascia of the
contactor breaker
DE1 LC001
Dimensions :
pages 2/50 and 2/51
2/49
Dimensions 2
Enclosed starters 2

Enclosures
Metal enclosures, degree of protection IP 54

DE1 LT215, LT615 DE1 LT225, LT315
=
DE1 LT315
312
195
H
b
2 DE1 LT225
=
=
69 150 = 105 = 69 c = G =
181 a
DE1 a b c G H
LT225 257 307 165 165 165
LT315 287 367 190 192 225
Number of blanked-off cable entries for addition of cable glands

DE1 At Cable Ø For cable gland
top bottom min max N° Type
LT215 2 1 10 12 13 13M
1 2 14 18 21 21M
LT225 1 2 10 12 13 13M
1 2 14 18 21 21M
LT315 1 2 10 12 13 13M
1 2 24 30 36 36M
LT615 2 1 10 12 13 13M
1 2 14 18 21 21M
Insulated enclosures
DE1 LB001 DE1 LB005
104,75
201
201
183
183
8,5
145 = = 145 = =
109 109
DE1 LC001
=
123
260
280
114
183 = =
=
122
References :
pages 2/48 and 2/49
2/50
Mounting of accessories 2
Enclosed starters 2

Integral 18
Non-adjustable door interlock mechanism LA9 LB32p
For mounting on LD1 LB030 + LBp LB03Ppp and LD5 LB130 + LBp LB03Ppp Door drillings
(1)
= =
54
148,5
65
= =
54
2
54 134
(1) Thickness: 5 mm max
Integral 32
Non-adjustable door interlock mechanisms LA9 LC32p and LA9 LC52p
For mounting on LD4 LCp30 and LCp40, LD5 LCp30 Door drillings
LD4 LCp30 LD4 LCp40 LD5 LCp30
(1)
= =
54
80
182
65
= =
80
80
80
80
54
54 135 = 19 = = 38 = = 85 =
= = 52 33 99 33
66 85 132
Integral 63
Non-adjustable door interlock mechanisms LA9 LC33p and LA9 LC53p
For mounting on LD4 LDp30 and LD5 LDp30 Door drillings
LD4 LDp30 LD5 LDp30
(1)
= =
54
105
105
275
= =
243
65
54
105
105
105
54 172 (LD4) = 28 = 45
174 (LD5)
= = 59 63 59
90 181
References :
pages 2/48 and 2/49
2/51
Characteristics 2
Enclosed starters 2
integral 32 and 63 contactor breakers

Type integral 32 integral 63

Number of poles 3 and 4 3
Rated operational current (Ie) A 32 in AC-43 63 in AC-3
Rated operational voltage (Ue) V 690 690
Electrical durability, AC-43 at 415 V 1.5 million operating cycles 1.2 million operating cycles
Mechanical durability at Uc 10 million operating cycles 5 million operating cycles
Maximum operating rate a 3600 operating cycles/hour 3600 operating cycles/hour
at ambient temperature c With converter 600 operating cycles/hour 600 operating cycles/hour
y 55 °C
2 Environment
VDE: 0100, 0110, 0113, 0170, 0171, 471, 0660
BS: 5424, 4752, 4941
NEN, NBN
Product certifications ASE, ASEFA, ASTA, BV, CSA, DEMKO, DNV, GL, NEMKO, NKK, ÖVE,
RINA, SCC, SETI, UL, USSR,
LROS, PTB, SEMKO
Ambient air temperature a Operation °C - 25…+ 60 - 20…+ 60
around the device Storage °C - 40…+ 80 - 40…+ 80
c (1) Operation °C - 25…+ 50 - 25…+ 50
Storage °C - 25…+ 70 - 25…+ 70
Vibration resistance 5…100 Hz Energised state: 3 gn Energised state: 3 gn
Permissible acceleration De-energised state: 3 gn De-energised state: 3 gn
Shock resistance Impulse duration: 11 ms Energised state: 8 gn Energised state: 8 gn
Permissible acceleration De-energised state: 8 gn De-energised state: 8 gn
Degree of protection Conforming to IEC 144 and 529 IP 20B IP 20B
Conforming to VDE 0106 Protection against direct finger contact Protection against direct finger contact
Flame resistance Conforming to IEC 60295-2-1, NF C 20-455 and the requirement of 22-12-81
(JO 27 NC of 1st and 2/2/1982) and conforming to UL 94 - V0 and NF T 51-072
Maximum operating altitude Without derating m 3000 3000
(without derating) vertical mounting plane
From fixing plane From main axis From main axis

(fore-aft tilt) (left-right tilt) (left-right tilt)

Rated control a 50 Hz V 21…660 24…660
circuit voltage (Uc) a 60 Hz V 21…600 24…600
c With converter V 24, 48, 110 24, 48, 110
Voltage limits Operating 0.85…1.1 Uc 0.85…1.1 Uc
at θ y 55 °C Drop-out 0.25…0.7 Uc 0.25…0.7 Uc
Average consumption a Inrush VA 160 (50 Hz), 185 (60 Hz) 375 (50 Hz), 450 (60 Hz)
at 20 °C and at Uc Sealed VA 12 (50 or 60 Hz) 25 (50 or 60 Hz)
c (1) Inrush W 250 for 50 ms 300 for 50 ms
Sealed W 4 8
Heat dissipation a 50 Hz W 4 (50 Hz) 8 (50 Hz)
5 (60 Hz) 11 (60 Hz)
Operating time (2) a "C" ms 9…25 12…35
at 20 °C and at Uc 50/60 Hz "O" ms 7…20 7…20
c (1) "C" ms 25…35 25…40
“O” ms 10…20 15…25
(1) With converter

contact of the main poles. The opening time "O" is measured from the moment the coil supply
is switched off to the moment the main poles separate.

pages 2/54 to 2/59 page 2/60 page 2/61
2/52
Enclosed starters 2

Type integral 32 integral 63
Rated thermal current θ y 40 °C A 32 63
(Ith)
Frequency limits Hz 40…60 40…60
Rated impulse Conforming to IEC 60947-4 kV 8 8
Heat dissipation
in the power circuits of the
Operational current A 1.6 2.5 4 6.3 10 16 25 32 25 32 40 50 63
2
contactor breaker and its Power per pole, hot state W 1.6 1.8 1.8 2 2 3.4 4.8 6 4.4 5 5.8 7 9
protection module
Rated making capacity I rms conforming to IEC 60947-4 A 12 x Ith (1) 12 or 15 x Ith (1)
I peak conforming to IEC 60947-2 kA 105 105
Rated breaking capacity Operational voltage V 220/ 380/ 440 480/ 600/ 220/ 380/ 440 480/ 600/
conforming to IEC 60947-2 240 415 525 690 240 415 525 690
Value of cos ϕ 0.25 0.25 0.25 0.3 0.8 0.25 0.25 0.25 0.25 0.5
Icu (O-t CO) kA rms 50 50 50 (2) 20 5 (3) 50 50 40 35 10
Ics (O-t-CO-t-CO) kA rms 50 50 35 (2) 20 5 50 50 40 35 10
Conforming to IEC 60947-6-2 Icu = Ics (O-t-CO-t-rCO) kA rms 50 50 50 15 4 50 50 50 30 10
ensuring continuity of service O : breaking short-circuit current (open)
t : time
CO : closing on short-circuit, breaking short-circuit current (closed-open) (manual)
rCO : closing on short-circuit, breaking short-circuit current (remote control)
Total breaking time ms 4 4
Thermal stress limit With Isc max. at 415 V, 50 Hz A2s 100 x 103 300 x 103
Cabling Maximum c.s.a. Minimum c.s.a. Maximum c.s.a. Minimum c.s.a.
Flexible cable without cable end mm 2 1 x 10 or 2 x 6 1x1 1 x 50 or 2 x 35 1x6
Flexible cable with cable end mm 2 1 x 6 or 2 x 4 1x1 2 x 25 1x6
Solid cable mm 2 1 x 10 or 2 x 6 1x1 1 x 50 1x6
Tightening torque N.m 2 6

Module type LB1 LB6 LB1 LB1 LB1 LB6 LB1
LC03M LC03M LCppL LD03P LD03M LD03P LD03L
Protection Standard motors, Standard Frequent Distribution Standard Standard Frequent Distribution
frequent starting, motors starting circuits motors motors starting circuits
distribution circuits
Conforming to standards IEC 60947-4 type 2 (Iq = 50 kA) and NF C
63-650 63-650 63-120 63-650 63-650 63-650 63-120
Number of poles 3 3 3 4 4 3 3 3 3
Number of protected poles 3 3 3 4 4 3 3 3 3
Rated operational voltage V 690 690 690 690 690 690 690
Maximum continuous current A 0.4…32 0.4…32 10…32 13…63 13…63 13…63 13…63
Thermal protection Setting range A 0.25/0.40 – 6.3/10... 10/13... 10/13... – 10/13...
(Irth min./Irth max.) …23/32 23/32 45/63 45/63 45/63
Protection against With Without Without With With Without Without
phase imbalance
Tripping class 10 – – 20 20 – –
Magnetic protection Instantaneous trip current Irth 6…12 (4) 6…12 3…6 Fixed at 15 6…12 (4) 6…12 3…6
conforming to setting range max.
IEC 60947-1/2/4/6-2 Tripping tolerance ± 20 %

Padlocking 1, 2 or 3 padlocks (shank Ø 8 mm max. and Ø 5 mm min.). When flush mounting,
(1) Above this value, the breaker trips.

(2) Conforming to BS 4752: 36 kA cycle P2, 50 kA cycle P1.
(3) Cos ϕ 0.7.
(4) Usual setting range 9…10 Irth max.

2/53
References 2
Enclosed starters 2

Enclosures
Empty metal enclosures

533933
Type of enclosure For Reference Weight

use on kg
Degree of protection IP 54 (1) integral 32 LD4 DE1 LT215 2.110
with drillings for
(interlock not supplied).
For customer assembly
LD5 DE1 LT225 2.710
2
integral 63 LD4 DE1 LT315 3.510
(1) Enclosures supplied with drillings and fitted with removable blanking plugs, for addition of
cable glands (to be ordered separately): for number and diameters, see page 2/60.
DE1 LT215
Dimensions :
page 2/60
2/54
References 2
Enclosed starters 2


Type For use Colour Reference Weight
on enclosure of knob kg
Non-adjustable DE1 LT215 Red LA9 LC320 0.200
DE1 LT225 Red LA9 LC520 0.200

or
DE1 LT315
2
Dimensions :
page 2/60
2/55
References 2
Enclosed starters 2


533934
Standard power ratings of 3-phase Operational Breaking Basic reference, Weight

motors 50-60 Hz in category AC-43 current capacity to be completed by adding
220 V 400 V 440 V 500 V 660 V (Iq) for Ue the control voltage code
240 V 415 V y 415 V (2)
2 7.5 15 15 18.5 25 32 50 LD4 LC030p 1.450
LD4 LC030p
15 30 33 37 55 63 50 LD4 LD030p 3.800
33
533935

Standard power ratings of 3-phase Operational Breaking Basic reference, Weight
motors 50-60 Hz in category AC-43 current capacity to be completed by adding
220 V 400 V 440 V 500 V 660 V (Iq) for Ue the control voltage code
240 V 415 V y 415 V (2)
7.5 15 15 18.5 25 32 50 LD5 LC030p (4) 2.800
LD5 LC030p
15 30 33 37 55 63 50 LD5 LD030p (4) 7.600

33
Volts 24 36 42 48 110 120 220 230 240 380/ 415 440 480 500 600 660
400
50 Hz LDp LC, LD B – D E F – M M U Q N N – S – Y
60 Hz LDp LC BC CC – D FC FC MC MC/ MC – – Q Q – S –
PU7
LDp LD BC CC – CE K FC LC MC MC – – UX Q – S –
c (3) LDp LC, LD BD – – ED FD – – – – – – – – – – –
(3) For use on d.c., the unit is supplied with 1 or 2 converters, including coil suppression devices (2 converters for reversing
contactor breakers).
(4) It is essential to provide electrical locking for reversing contactor breakers integral 32.

pages 2/52 and 2/53 page 2/60 page 2/61
2/56
References 2
Enclosed starters 2

Motor protection modules (for customer assembly)
Thermal-magnetic protection, compensated and differential for normal starting motors

533936
Standard power ratings of 3-phase motors Thermal Magnetic Reference Weight

50-60 Hz in category AC-3 setting range setting range
220 V 400 V 440 V 480/ 600/ (Irth min. (6...12 Irth max)
240 V 415 V 525 V 690 V to Irth max.)
LB1 LC03Mpp kW kW kW kW kW A A kg
Fixed magnetic protection, set at 15 Irth max, for mounting on integral 63
3 5.5 5.5 7.5 10 10...13 – LB1 LD03P16 0.780
4 9 9 11 15 13...18 – LB1 LD03P21 0.780
5.5
7.5
11
15
11
15
15
18.5
18.5
22
18...25
23...32
–
–
LB1 LD03P22
LB1 LD03P53
0.780
0.780
2
9 22 22 25 33 28...40 – LB1 LD03P55 0.780
11 25 25 33 45 35...50 – LB1 LD03P57 0.780
15 33 33 40 55 45...63 – LB1 LD03P61 0.780
Adjustable magnetic protection from 6 to 12 Irth max. for mounting on integral 32
0.06 g g g g 0.25...0.4 2.4...4.8 LB1 LC03M03 0.400
g g g g g 0.4...0.63 3.8...7.6 LB1 LC03M04 0.400
0.09 g 0.37 0.37 0.55 0.63...1 6...12 LB1 LC03M05 0.400
0.12
0.18 g 0.55 0.75 1.1 1...1.6 9.5...19 LB1 LC03M06 0.400
0.25
0.37 1.1 1.1 1.1 1.5 1.6...2.5 15...30 LB1 LC03M07 0.400
0.55 1.5 1.5 2.2 3 2.5...4 24...48 LB1 LC03M08 0.400
0.75
1.1 2.2 2.2 3.7 4 4...6.3 38...76 LB1 LC03M10 0.400
1.5 4 4 5.5 7.5 6.3...10 60...120 LB1 LC03M13 0.400
2.2
3 7.5 7.5 10 11 10...16 95...190 LB1 LC03M17 0.400
4
5.5 11 11 15 18.5 16...25 150...300 LB1 LC03M22 0.400
7.5 15 15 18.5 25 23...32 190...380 LB1 LC03M53 0.400
3 5.5 5.5 7.5 10 10...13 78...156 LB1 LD03M16 0.780
4 9 9 11 15 13...18 108...216 LB1 LD03M21 0.780
5.5 11 11 15 18.5 18...25 150...300 LB1 LD03M22 0.780
7.5 15 15 18.5 22 23...32 190...380 LB1 LD03M53 0.780
9 22 22 25 33 28...40 240...480 LB1 LD03M55 0.780
11 25 25 33 45 35...50 300...600 LB1 LD03M57 0.780
15 33 33 40 55 45...63 380...760 LB1 LD03M61 0.780
Magnetic only protection, for frequent starting motors
533936
Standard power ratings of 3-phase motors Thermal Magnetic Reference Weight

50-60 Hz in category AC-3 setting range setting range
220 V 400 V 440 V 480/ 600/ (Irth min. (6...12 Irth max)
240 V 415 V 525 V 690 V to Irth max.)
LB6 LC03Mpp kW kW kW kW kW A A kg
Adjustable magnetic protection from 6 to 12 Irth max, for mounting on integral 32
0.18 LB6 LC03M06 0.400
0.25 g 0.55 0.75 1.1 – 9.5...19
0.37 1.1 1.1 1.1 1.5 – 15...30 LB6 LC03M07 0.400
0.55 LB6 LC03M08 0.400
0.75 1.5 1.5 2.2 3 – 24...48
1.1 2.2 2.2 3.7 4 – 38...76 LB6 LC03M10 0.400
1.5 LB6 LC03M13 0.400
2.2 4 4 5.5 7.5 – 60…120
3 LB6 LC03M17 0.400
4 7.5 7.5 10 11 – 95...190
5.5 11 11 15 18.5 – 150...300 LB6 LC03M22 0.400
7.5 15 15 18.5 25 – 190...380 LB6 LC03M53 0.400
3 5.5 5.5 7.5 10 – 78...156 LB6 LD03M16 0.780
4 9 9 11 15 – 108...216 LB6 LD03M21 0.780
5.5 11 11 15 18.5 – 150...300 LB6 LD03M22 0.780
7.5 15 15 18.5 22 – 190...380 LB6 LD03M53 0.780
9 22 22 25 33 – 240...480 LB6 LD03M55 0.780
11 25 25 33 45 – 300...600 LB6 LD03M57 0.780
15 33 33 40 55 – 380...760 LB6 LD03M61 0.780

2/57
References 2
Enclosed starters 2

in category AC-1
3 and 4-pole contactor breakers without protection module (1)

533937
Rated Maximum Maximum Breaking Number Basic reference, Weight

thermal operational operational capacity of to be completed by adding
current current voltage Iq for poles the control voltage code
Ith θ y 40 °C AC-1 θ y 40 °C Ue y 415 V (2)
A A V kA kg
2 32 32 690 50 3 LD4 LC030p 1.450
4 LD4 LC040p 1.780
63 63 690 50 3 LD4 LD030p 3.800

LD4 LC040p

setting range setting range of protected
(Irth min. to Irth max.) (3...6 Irth max) poles poles
A A kg
For integral 32
533937
6.3...10 30...60 3 3 LB1 LC03L13 0.400

4 4 LB1 LC04L13 0.500
3 LB1 LC05L13 0.500
10...16 48...95 3 3 LB1 LC03L17 0.400

LB1 LD03Lpp
4 4 LB1 LC04L17 0.500
3 LB1 LC05L17 0.500
16...25 75...150 3 3 LB1 LC03L22 0.400

4 4 LB1 LC04L22 0.500
3 LB1 LC05L22 0.500
23...32 95...190 3 3 LB1 LC03L53 0.400

4 4 LB1 LC04L53 0.500
3 LB1 LC05L53 0.500
For integral 63
10...13 39...78 3 3 LB1 LD03L16 0.780
13...18 54...108 3 3 LB1 LD03L21 0.780
18...25 75...150 3 3 LB1 LD03L22 0.780
23...32 95...190 3 3 LB1 LD03L53 0.780
28...40 120...240 3 3 LB1 LD03L55 0.780
35...50 150...300 3 3 LB1 LD03L57 0.780
45...63 190...380 3 3 LB1 LD03L61 0.780
Volts 24 36 42 48 110 120 220 230 240 380/ 415 440 480 500 600 660
400
50 Hz LDp LC, LD B – D E F – M M U Q N N – S – Y
60 Hz LDp LC BC CC – D FC FC MC MC MC – – Q Q – S –
LDp LD BC CC – CE K FC LC MC MC – – UX Q – S –
c (3) LDp LC, LD BD – – ED FD – – – – – – – – – – –

2/58
References 2
Enclosed starters 2

Auxiliary contact blocks and accessories
Instantaneous auxiliary contact blocks (IP 20)

533939

use on of blocks per unit
kg
LD4 or LD5 1 block of 6 instantaneous contacts LA1 LC010 0.280
Mounted on RH side comprising:
3 signalling contacts “contactor state” 2 1 –
integral
+
1 signalling contact “tripped on short-circuit”
1 signalling contact “tripped”
– – 1
2
LA1 LC030 1 signalling contact “control knob in any – – 1
position other than “Auto” – – 1
1 block of 5 instantaneous contacts LA1 LC012 0.220

comprising:
3 signalling contacts “contactor state” 2 1 –
1 signalling contact “tripped” 1 – –
1 signalling contact “tripped on short-circuit” 1 – –
Isolating blocks
533940

use on of blocks per unit
kg
Mounted on LH side (1 or 2 blocks per unit)
integral
+ LD5 1 control circuit isolating block 2 – – LA1 LC031 0.100
LA1 LC010 Mounted on LH side
+
LA1 LC070p Electrical tripping devices
For Type and number Function Basic reference, Weight
use on of blocks per unit to be completed by adding
the control voltage code
(1)
kg
LD4 or LD5 1 undervoltage trip Time delay LA1 LC070p 0.150
fitted with an 0.2 s
LA1 LC010 or LA1 LC012 Instantaneous LA1 LC072p 0.150
add-on block
533941
Remote electrical reset devices

For Type and number Control voltage Reference Weight
LD4 or LD5 1 remote electrical 24 V LA1 LC052B 0.320
fitted with an reset block 50/60 Hz
LA1 LC010 or LA1 LC012
add-on block 42 V 50 Hz LA1 LC052E 0.320
48 V 50/60 Hz
integral
+ 100/127 V LA1 LC052F 0.320
LA1 LC012 50/60 Hz
+
LA1 LC052p 200/240V LA1 LC052M 0.320
50/60 Hz
Volts 24 48 110 120 220/230 240 380/ 415 440
400

2/59
Dimensions, Enclosed starters 2
schemes 2
Enclosures
Dimensions
Metal enclosures, degree of protection IP 54 Insulated enclosure
DE1 LT215 DE1 LT225, LT315 DE1 LC001
= =
=
=
=
DE1 LT315
123
2x¯5,5
2
195
b
280
H
260
DE1 LT225
114
=
=
69 c = 105 =
= G =
a 183 122
=
a
Number of blanked-off cable entries

DE1 At Cable Ø For cable gland
top bottom min max N° Type
LT215 2 1 10 12 13 13M
1 2 14 18 21 21M
DE1 a b c G H LT225 1 2 10 12 13 13M
LT215 181 312 150 105 195 1 2 14 18 21 21M
LT225 257 307 165 165 165 LT315 1 2 10 12 13 13M
LT315 287 367 190 195 225 1 2 24 30 36 36M
Non-adjustable door interlock mechanism LA9 LC52p
integral 32, for mounting on LD4 LC030 and LC040, LD5 LC030 integral 63, for mounting on LD4 LD030 and LD5 LD030 Door
LD4 LC030 LD4 LC040 LD5 LC030 LD4 LD030 LD5 LD030 drillings
thickness
5 mm max
thickness
5 mm max
105
105
= =
54
275
80
243
65
182
65
= =
105
105
105
80
80
80
80
54
54 135 = 19 = = 38 = = 85 =
54 172 (LD4) = 28 = 45
= = 52 33 99 33 174 (LD5) = = 59 63 59
66 85 132
90 181
Schemes
Contactor breakers with protection module LBp
integral 32 integral 63
LD4 LC0p0 + LB1 LC0pp LB6 LC03M LD4 LD030 + LB1 LD03p LB6 LD03M
1/L1
3/L2
5/L3
1/L1
3/L2
5/L3
N1
2/T1
4/T2
6/T3
2/T1
4/T2
6/T3
A1
A2
A1
A2
– Q1
2/T1
4/T2
6/T3
2/T1
4/T2
6/T3
N2
References :
pages 2/54 to 2/59
2/60
Schemes 2
Enclosed starters 2
Schemes (continued)
Reversing contactor breakers with protection module LBp
integral 32 integral 63
LD5 LC030 + LB1 LC03M LD5 LD030 + LB1 LD03M or P
1/L1
3/L2
5/L3
1/L1
3/L2
5/L3
2
A1
A1
A2
A2
A1
A1
A2
A2
2/T1
4/T2
6/T3
2/T1
4/T2
6/T3
2/T1
4/T2
6/T3
2/T1
4/T2
6/T3
LB6 LC03M LB6 LD03M
Add-on blocks, integral 32 and 63

For contactor breaker LD4 and reversing contactor breaker LD5 For contactor breaker LD4
Mounted on RH side Mounted on LH side
Breaker LA1 LC010 LA1 LC012 LA1 LC020 LA1 LC025 LA1 LC001 LA1 LC030 Isolator
(64) (63)
53
53
13
23
31
13
23
31
13
23
31
13
23
31
41
54
14
24
32
14
24
32
14
24
32
14
24
32
42
54
Trip signalling 1 or 2 LA1 LC030

96
98
98
98
96
95
95
95
95
Short-circuit
06
08
signalling
08
05
05
Auto +0
16
18
15
Control knob
position signalling
For reversing contactor breaker LD5 Tripping devices (1) Remote electrical reset devices (1)
for LD4, LD5 for LD4, LD5
Mounted on LH side LA1 LC071 LA1 LC070, LC072 LA1 LC052p
Isolator
C1
D1
LA1 LC031 Auto

Trip +
53
63
U< RESET
C2
D2
54
64
B4 B1
M
B2
B3
(1) For contactor breakers and reversing contactor breakers already fitted with an LA1 LC010 or LA1 LC012 instantaneous auxiliary contact block.
pages 2/56 to 2/59 page 2/60
2/61
References 2
Enclosed starters 2
Enclosed D.O.L. starters for motor control

for use on a machine subject to the application
of Machinery Directive 98/37/CE (1)
Non-reversing starters (with pushbutton control of isolation)

533963
Standard power ratings Circuit-breaker Dust & damp protected starter Weight
of 3-phase motors 50-60 Hz Setting range Basic reference,
in category AC-3 of thermal trips to be completed by
220/ 400/ 440 V adding the voltage code
230 V 415 V (2) (3)
kW kW kW A kg
– 0.06 0.06 0.16…0.25 LG7 K06pp02 1.300
LG7 K06 0.06 0.09 0.12 0.25…0.40 LG7 K06pp03 1.300

2
– 0.18 0.18 0.40…0.63 LG7 K06pp04 1.300
0.12 0.25 0.37 0.63…1 LG7 K06pp05 1.300
0.25 0.55 0.55 1…1.6 LG7 K06pp06 1.300
0.37 0.75 1.1 1.6…2.5 LG7 K06pp07 1.300
0.75 1.5 1.5 2.5…4 LG7 K06pp08 1.300

533964
1.1 2.2 3 4…6.3 LG7 K06pp10 1.300
1.5 4 4 6…10 LG7 K09pp14 1.450
3 5.5 5.5 9…14 LG7 D12pp16 1.600
4 7.5 9 13…18 LG7 D18pp20 1.630
LG7 D12 with padlocking 4 9 9 17…23 LG7 D18pp21 1.630

facility fitted as standard
Specifications
Functions performed by the starter:
b isolation,
b locking of isolation fitted as standard as from LG7 K09,
b lockable Emergency Stop (1/4 turn) (3),
b pushbutton control: 1 white Start button “I” and 1 black Stop button “O”,
b degree of protection of enclosure: IP 657, double insulated.
Switching back on of power supply after tripping must be by a deliberate action.
A GV2 SNpp indicator light may be added (to be assembled by customer), please consult your Regional Sales
Office.
For supply voltages between 380 and 415 V (codes Q7, V7 or N7) the control circuit is pre-wired between phases.
For other supply voltages, the control circuit must be wired by the customer.
See page 2/65.
(1) Compliance with a harmonised European standard assumes conformity with the corresponding directive, provided that
installation, building in and/or assembly of the starter is carried out correctly by the machine manufacturer.
Harmonised European standards: EN 60947 and EN 60439.
Conformity to international standards: IEC 60947 and IEC 60439.
LG7 K
Volts a 12 24 36 42 48 110 127 220/ 230 230/ 380/ 400 400/ 440 500 660/
50/60 Hz 230 240 400 415 690
Code J7 B7 C7 D7 E7 F7 FC7 M7 P7 U7 Q7 V7 N7 R7 S7 Y7
LG7 D
Volts a 24 42 48 110 220/ 230 240 380/ 400 415 440
50/60 Hz 230 400
Code B7 D7 E7 F7 M7 P7 U7 Q7 V7 N7 R7
(3) LG7 K06: the mushroom head type Emergency Stop acts mechanically on the circuit-breaker.
LG7 K09, D12, D18: the Emergency Stop function is performed by an undervoltage trip, acting on the circuit-breaker. This
circuit-breaker is always supplied pre-wired for use on 380/415 V 50 Hz. For a 60 Hz supply, please consult your Regional
Sales Office.
Other versions Starters for voltages other than those indicated above.
page 2/66 page 2/67
2/62
Enclosed starters 2

Non-reversing starters (with rotary operator for control of isolation)

533965
Enclosure cannot be opened when energised in position “I”.

230 V 415 V (2)
kW kW kW A kg
– 0.06 0.06 0.16…0.25 LG1 K065pp02 0.970
LG1 K
0.06 0.09 0.12 0.25…0.40 LG1 K065pp03 0.970 2
– 0.18 0.18 0.40…0.63 LG1 K065pp04 0.970
0.12 0.25 0.25 0.63…1 LG1 K065pp05 0.970
0.25 0.55 0.55 1…1.6 LG1 K065pp06 0.970
0.37 0.75 1.1 1.6…2.5 LG1 K065pp07 0.970
0.75 1.5 1.5 2.5…4 LG1 K065pp08 0.970
1.1 2.2 3 4…6.3 LG1 K065pp10 0.970
1.5 4 4 6…10 LG1 K095pp14 1.120
3 5.5 5.5 9…14 LG1 D122pp16 1.270
4 7.5 9 13…18 LG1 D182pp20 1.290
4 9 9 17…23 LG1 D182pp21 1.290
Specifications
b isolation,
b locking of isolation,
b lockable Emergency Stop (red/yellow switch disconnector),
Office.
See page 2/65.
LG1 K
Volts a 12 24 36 42 48 110 127 220/ 230 230/ 380/ 400 400/ 440 500 660/
50/60 Hz 230 240 400 415 690
LG1 D
Volts a 24 42 48 110 220/ 230 240 380/ 400 415 440
50/60 Hz 230 400
Code B7 D7 E7 F7 M7 P7 U7 Q7 V7 N7 R7
page 2/66 page 2/67
2/63
Enclosed starters 2

Reversing starters
533966
(with pushbutton control of isolation)

230 V 415 V (2) (3)
kW kW kW A kg
– 0.06 0.06 0.16…0.25 LG8 K06pp02 1.640
LG8 K06
2 0.06 0.09 0.12 0.25…0.40 LG8 K06pp03 1.640
– 0.18 0.18 0.40…0.63 LG8 K06pp04 1.640
0.12 0.25 0.25 0.63…1 LG8 K06pp05 1.640
0.25 0.55 0.55 1…1.6 LG8 K06pp06 1.640
0.37 0.75 1.1 1.6…2.5 LG8 K06pp07 1.640
0.75 1.5 1.5 2.5…4 LG8 K06pp08 1.640
1.1 2.2 3 4…6.3 LG8 K06pp10 1.640

533967
1.5 4 4 6…10 LG8 K09pp14 1.640
3 5.5 5.5 9…14 LG8 K12pp16 1.640
Specifications of reversing starters

LG8 K09 with padlocking Functions performed by the starter:
facility fitted as standard b isolation,
b locking of isolation fitted as standard as from LG8 K09,
b Emergency stop (3),
b control by selector switch “1-2”, position non maintained,
Office.
See page 2/65.
Volts a 12 24 36 42 48 110 127 220/ 230 230/ 380/ 400 400/ 440 500 660/
50/60 Hz 230 240 400 415 690
LG8 K09: the Emergency Stop function is performed by an undervoltage trip, acting on the circuit-breaker. This circuit-breaker
is always supplied pre-wired for use on 380/415 V 50 Hz. For a 60 Hz supply, please consult your Regional Sales Office.
Other versions Starters for higher power ratings.

page 2/66 page 2/67
2/64
Enclosed starters 2

Variants
With Emergency Stop LG1, LG7, LG8 A04
No control pushbuttons
With Emergency Stop LG8 K06 A10

2 pushbuttons with arrows “A” and “E”
(latching)
1 Stop button “O”
Without Emergency Stop LG8 A14
2
2 pushbuttons with arrows “A” and “E”
(non latching)
Without Emergency Stop
With Emergency Stop, mushroom head LG1 A37
Without Emergency Stop LG7, LG8 A39

(when the Emergency Stop is on the machine)
With padlocking facility LG1 K06, LG7 K06 A29

(fitted as standard as from LG1 K09 or LG7 K09)
1 neutral terminal LG1, LG7, LG8 A59
Fitted as standard on starters ordered
for use on 240 V (U7) supply
Short-circuit signalling block LG7 A12
Vacuum valve for compressor LG7 D A40
Without circuit-breaker LG1, LG7, LG8 (3)
Possible combinations of variants for the selected starter type (4)

Starter type A04 A10 A12 A14 A29 A37 A39 A40 A59
LG1 K (5)
LG7 K06
LG7 K09
LG7 D12
LG8 K06
LG8 K09
Combination possible Combination not possible
(2) Example: LG7 D12M716A04.
(3) Delete the last 2 digits of the selected starter reference. Example: LG1 K065pp08 becomes LG1 K065pp.
(4) Example: LG8 K095ppA04A39A59.
LG1 K09, D12, D18: the Emergency Stop function is performed by an undervoltage trip, acting on the circuit-breaker. This
circuit-breaker is always supplied pre-wired for use on 380/415 V 50 Hz. For a 60 Hz supply, please consult your Regional
Sales Office.
2/65
Dimensions 2
Enclosed starters 2

of Machinery Directive 98/37/CE
Starters without isolator

LG1 K06, K09 LG7 K06, K09, D12, D18
LG1 D12, D18 LG8 K06, K09, K12
120 (1)
(2)
2
150
165
150
165
120 84 146 (2) 84 (3)

165 175 177 (1) 175
(1) Emergency Stop for starters < 3 kW

(2) Emergency Stop for starters u 3 kW
(3) Only for LG7

LG1 K and LG1 D 2 x 13 P and 2 x 16 P 2 x 13 P and 2 x 16 P
LG7 K and LG7 D 2 x 13 P and 2 x 16 P 2 x 13 P and 2 x 16 P
LG8 K 2 x 13 P and 2 x 16 P 2 x 13 P and 2 x 16 P
pages 2/62 to 2/65 page 2/67
2/66
Schemes 2
Enclosed starters 2

D.O.L. starters
LG1 K06, K09, D12, D18 LG1 K06, K09, D12, D18
380/400 V, code Q7 or 400/415 V, code N7
220/230 V, code M7
L3
L2
L1
– Q1 Ph
2 T3
4 T2
6 T1
KM1/1
13
13
– Q2
– KM1 – S1
14
14
11
– S2
5 5
1 1
3 3
12
– KM1
A2
U1 2
V1 4
W1 6
– KM1 A1
KM1/5
LG7 K06 LG7 K09, D12, D18 LG7 K06, K09, D12, D18
380/400 V, code Q7 or
1/L1
3/L2
5/L3
400/415 V, code N7
220/230 V, code M7
1/L1
3/L2
5/L3
D1
D2
– Q1 Ph
– Q1 KM1/1
13
13
– KM1 – S1
14
14
6
2
11
1
– F1
1
– S2
– KM1
E1
E2
12
– KM1
2
A2
U1 2
V1 4
W1 6
W1
U1
V1
– KM1
A1
KM1/5
Reversing starters
LG8 K06 LG8 K09, K12 LG8 K06, K09, K12
380/400 V, code Q7 or
400/415 V, code N7
1/L1
3/L2
5/L3
220/230 V, code M7
1/L1
3/L2
5/L3
D1
D2
– Q1
Ph
– Q1
KM2/5
11
E1
E2
– S1
21 12
2
21
2
– KM2 – KM1
1
22
22
1
– KM1 – KM2
13
13
10 02
54
54
– KM1 – KM2
2
– S2 – S2
– KM1 – KM2
2
14
14
A1 53
A1 53
W
W
U
A2
A2
KM2/1 – KM1 – KM2
pages 2/62 to 2/65 page 2/66
2/67
References 2
Enclosed starters 2

Non-reversing starters with integral transformer

533981
Compliance with a harmonised European standard assumes conformity with the corresponding directive, provided
that installation, building in and/or assembly of the starter is carried out correctly by the machine manufacturer.
Starters pre-wired for operation on a 3-phase 380 to 400 V 50 Hz supply

(with pushbutton control of isolator function)
LJ7 K Standard power ratings of 3-phase Circuit-breaker Dust and damp Weight
2 motors 50 Hz in category AC-3
380/400 V Setting range of thermal trips
protected starter
Reference (1)
kW A kg
0.06 0.16…0.25 LJ7 K06Q702 2.270
0.09 0.25…0.40 LJ7 K06Q703 2.270
0.18 0.40…0.63 LJ7 K06Q704 2.270
0.25 0.63…1 LJ7 K06Q705 2.270
0.55 1…1.6 LJ7 K06Q706 2.270
0.75 1.6…2.5 LJ7 K06Q707 2.270
1.5 2.5…4 LJ7 K06Q708 2.270
2.2 4…6.3 LJ7 K06Q710 2.270
4 6…10 LJ7 K09Q714 2.270
Specifications
b isolation,
b locking of isolation fitted as standard on LJ7 K09,
b terminal allowing connection of a volt-free contact, if required, in the control circuit,
Office.
Integral transformer: 400/24 V, 25 VA.
Variants (3)
Description For Suffix to be added to
use on the starter reference (4)
With Emergency Stop LJ7 A04
Without Emergency Stop LJ7 A39
With padlocking facility LJ7 K06 A29
(fitted as standard on LJ7 K09)
Without circuit-breaker LJ7 (5)
(1) In the reference, the voltage code Q7 (380/400 V) indicates the power supply voltage to which the starter will be connected,
it being assumed that the contactor has a a 24 V coil (see control circuit scheme).
(2) LJ7 K06 (P y 3 kW at 400 V): the mushroom head type Emergency Stop acts mechanically on the circuit-breaker.
LJ7 K09 (P > 3 kW at 400 V): the Emergency Stop function is performed by an undervoltage trip GV AX385, acting on the
circuit-breaker. This circuit-breaker is always supplied pre-wired for use on 380/400 V 50 Hz.
(3) Possible combination of variants A04, A29 and A39 on starters LJ7 K06. Example: LJ7 K06Q702A04A29A39.
Possible combination of variants A04 and A39 on starters LJ7 K09Q714A04A39.
(4) Example: LJ7 K06Q702A04.
(5) Delete the last 2 digits of the selected starter reference. Example: LJ7 K06Q702 becomes LJ7 K06Q7.
page 2/70 page 2/71
2/68
Enclosed starters 2

Reversing starters with integral transformer

533982
Compliance with a harmonised European standard assumes conformity with the corresponding directive, provided
that installation, building in and/or assembly of the starter is carried out correctly by the machine manufacturer.
Starters pre-wired for operation on a 3-phase 380 to 400 V 50 Hz supply

(with pushbutton control of isolator function)
LJ8 K Standard power ratings of 3-phase Circuit-breaker Dust and damp Weight
motors 50 Hz in category AC-3
380/400 V Setting range of thermal trips
protected starter
Reference (1)
2
kW A kg
0.06 0.16…0.25 LJ8 K06Q702 2.650
0.09 0.25…0.40 LJ8 K06Q703 2.650
0.18 0.40…0.63 LJ8 K06Q704 2.650
0.25 0.63…1 LJ8 K06Q705 2.650
0.55 1…1.6 LJ8 K06Q706 2.650
0.75 1.6…2.5 LJ8 K06Q707 2.650
1.5 2.5…4 LJ8 K06Q708 2.650
2.2 4…6.3 LJ8 K06Q710 2.650
4 6…10 LJ8 K09Q714 2.650
Specifications
b isolation,
b locking of isolation fitted as standard on LJ8 K09,
b terminal allowing connection of a volt-free contact, if required, in the control circuit,
Office.
Integral transformer: 400/24 V, 25 VA.
Variants (3)
Description For Suffix to be added to
use on the starter reference (4)
With Emergency Stop LJ8 A04
Without Emergency Stop LJ8 A39
With padlocking facility LJ8 K06 A29
(fitted as standard on LJ8 K09)
Without circuit-breaker LJ8 (5)
(1) In the reference, the voltage code Q7 (380/400 V) indicates the power supply voltage to which the starter will be connected,
it being assumed that the contactor has a a 24 V coil (see control circuit scheme).
(2) LJ8 K06 (P y 3 kW at 400 V): the mushroom head type Emergency Stop acts mechanically on the circuit-breaker.
LJ8 K09 (P > 3 kW at 400 V): the Emergency Stop function is performed by an undervoltage trip GV AX385, acting on the
circuit-breaker. This circuit-breaker is always supplied pre-wired for use on 380/400 V 50 Hz.
(3) Possible combination of variants A04, A29 and A39 on starters LJ8 K06. Example: LJ8 K06Q702A04A29A39.
Possible combination of variants A04 and A39 on starters LJ8 K09. Example : LJ8 K09Q714A04A39.
(4) Example: LJ8 K06Q702A04.
(5) Delete the last 2 digits of the selected starter reference. Example: LJ8 K06Q702 becomes LJ8 K06Q7.
page 2/70 page 2/71
2/69
Dimensions 2
Enclosed starters 2

Dimensions
LJ7 K06, LJ8 K06
120
150
165
2
177 84
175
LJ7 K09, LJ8 K09
120
150
165
146 84
175
Cut-outs or blanking plugs for cable glands at the top and at the bottom 2 x 13 P and 2 x 16 P.
References :
pages 2/68 and 2/69
2/70
Schemes 2
Enclosed starters 2

Schemes
LJ7 K06 LJ7 K09
1/L1
3/L2
5/L3
1
– KM1/1
– KM1/1
– F1 4A – F1 4A
1/L1
3/L2
5/L3
D1
D2
2
2
– Q1
2
– Q1
– T1
– X1
13 1
– T1
– X1
2
13 1
13
13
5 6
1 2
3 4
– KM1 – S1 – KM1 – S1
1 2
3 4
5 6
400/24 V 400/24 V
11 14
11 14
14
14
25 VA – F1 25 VA
– KM1 – KM1
E1
E2
U1 2
V1 4
W1 6
– S2 – S2
U1 2
V1 4
W1 6
– KM1/5
– KM1/5
A1 12
A1 12
M
– KM1 – KM1
3
A2
A2
Reversing starters
LJ8 K06
1/L1
3/L2
5/L3
11
– F1 – S1
– KM2/5
12
– Q1
21
21
– KM2 – KM1
22
22
– T1
2
6
1
23
13
10 02
54
54
– KM1 – KM2 400/24 V

25 VA – S2 – S2
– KM1 – KM2
2
24
14
53
53
– KM2/1
W
U
A1
A1
– KM1 – KM2
A2
A2
LJ8 K09
2
11
1/L1
3/L2
5/L3
D1
D2
– F1 – S1
– KM2/5
12
– Q1
21
21
– KM2 – KM1
E1
E2
22
22
– T1
2
6
1
23
13
10 02
54
54
400/24 V
– KM1 – KM2 – S2 – S2
25 VA – KM1 – KM2
2
24
14
53
53
– KM2/1
W
U
A1
A1
– KM1 – KM2
A2
A2
References :
pages 2/68 and 2/69
2/71
Selection guide 2
Soft starters
for asynchronous motors 2
Applications Starting simple machines Soft starting and deceleration of simple

machines
Power range for 50…60 Hz supply (kW) 0.37…11 0.75…75
Single phase 110…230 V (kW) 0.37…2.2 –

3-phase 200…240 V (kW) – 0.75…7.5
3-phase 200…480 V (kW) 0.37…11 –
3-phase 230…415 V (kW) – –
3-phase 208…690 V (kW) – –
3-phase 230…690 V (kW) – 7.5…75
3-phase 380…415 V (kW) – 1.5…15
3-phase 400 V (kW) – 22…45
Drive Output frequency –

Type of control –
Transient overtorque –
Functions
Number of functions 1
Number of preset speeds –
Number Analog inputs –
of I/O Logic inputs –
Analog outputs –
Logic outputs –
Relay outputs –
Communication Integrated –
Available as an option Combined with TeSys U controller-starter
Standards and certifications IEC/EN 60947-4/2

e, UL, CSA, C-Tick, CCC, GOST
References ATS 01N1ppFT ATS 01N2pppp
Pages Please consult our catalogue “Soft starters and variable speed drives”.
2/72
2
Soft starting and deceleration of pumping and ventilation machines
3…900
– –
– –
– –
3…710 –
– 3…900
– –
– –
– –
–
TCS (Torque Control System)
–
36
–
1 PTC probe
4
1
2
3
Modbus
Fipio, Profibus DP, DeviceNet, Ethernet TCP/IP
IEC/EN 60947-4-2, EMC class A and B

e, UL, CSA, DNV, C-Tick, NOM, CCC, CCIB, GOST
ATS 48pppQ ATS 48pppY
Please consult our catalogue “Soft starters and variable speed drives”.
2/73
Selection guide 2
Enclosed starters 2
Starters for AS-Interface cabling system
Applications D.O.L. starters, reversing or non-reversing
Composition Thermal-magnetic circuit-breaker Thermal-magnetic circuit-breaker

Contactor or contactor pair Low consumption contactor or contactor
AS-Interface module LA9 Z32811 pair
Electronic control device
Operator Rotary knob
Degree of protection IP 55
Enclosure Insulated
Sensor connection With With, and Without With With, and

local/line control local/line
control
Contactors Non-reversing LF7 PppD LF7 PppDA79 LF1 PppD LF1 LF1
PppDA78 PppDA79
Reversing LF8 PppD LF8 PppDA79 LF2 PppD LF2 LF2
PppDA78 PppDA79
Pages 2/88 and 2/89 2/86 and 2/87
2/74
2
2
Pushbuttons
IP 65 IP 55
Metal Insulated Metal
With With, and Without With With, and With With, and
local/line control local/line control local/line control
LF1 MPppD LF1 MPppDA79 LF1 MppD LF1 LF1 LF1 MMppD LF1 MMppDA79
MppDA78 MppDA79
LF2 MPppD LF2 MPppDA79 LF2 MppD LF2 LF2 LF2 MMppD LF2 MMppDA79
MppDA78 MppDA79
2/75
Presentation 2
Enclosed starters 2
Presentation
LF7 and LF8 starters
These are the entry level models in our range of starters which communicate on the
AS-Interface. These starters incorporate interface module LA9 Z32811 and are
subdivided according to the different power connection methods (cable gland or
Harting plug-in connectors) and Local/AS-Interface remote operating modes. These
economical devices provide a simple and effective solution for building decentralised
motor starters as near as possible to the motor.
LF1 and LF2 starters
2 These complete, intelligent starters incorporate pre-programmed functions and a
fault-management function. They are available in insulated or metal enclosures to
suit different environments. When fitted with Harting plug-in connectors (variant
A74), they drastically reduce setting-up times, thereby increasing the availability of
machines.
Decentralisation of machine starters

These enclosed starters which communicate on AS-Interface are pre-assembled
and ready-to-use with a minimum of cabling. They are designed for building
decentralised electrical installations, i.e. the starters are installed as near as possible
to the motors they are to control. The decentralisation of the starters provides
obvious advantages regarding power distribution to machines not grouped together,
for example: motors driving a conveyor system.
Traditional installation
Equipment
floor-standing
enclosure
Distribution circuit circuit-breaker
Programmable controller with its inputs/outputs
Contactor + thermal overload relay
Decentralised installation
Distribution
enclosure
AS-Interface
Power
M M M M M
Distribution circuit circuit-breaker
Programmable controller
AS-Interface starter
Power is distributed either by prefabricated trunking or by cable.

These starters incorporate all the functions necessary for the management of motors
(control, protection, isolation, etc.), and comprise:
- a thermal-magnetic circuit-breaker,
- a low consumption contactor (non reversing) or contactor pair (reversing),
- an electronic control device or, for LF7 and LF8, an AS-Interface module,
LA9 Z32811.
Designed primarily for use with 3-phase a.c. motors, they can nevertheless be used
with single-phase or d.c. motors. In these applications, the 3 phases of the internal
circuit-breaker should be wired in series (each phase sensing the same current) in
order to avoid tripping due to an assumed phase failure.
Characteristics : References : Dimensions, schemes : Connections :

2/76
Description 2
Enclosed starters 2
Connection by cable gland

1 Yellow LED, illuminated when motor running.
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
2 Red LED illuminated when there is a motor fault (overload or short-circuit) or an
internal fault in the starter, or in the event of a communication fault.
565204
565205
3 Green LED illuminated (steady light) when the AS-Interface line is powered and
13 flashing when information to the starter is being transmitted via the AS-Interface
5 12 line.
4 Knock-out for cable gland (included for auxiliary supply, power extension or output
6 6 control relay cabling, if required).
7 7 5 Disconnect rotary control knob.
Indicates “Trip” when switch-disconnector tripped.
2
6 Local/AS-Interface key switch (variant A79).
7 3-position, spring return to zero selector switch for reversing starter (LF2).
11 10 9 8 11 10 9 8 Function:
- position 1 = forward running,
- position 0 = Stop,
- position 2 = reverse running (variant A79).
Pushbutton for non-reversing starter (LF1) .
Function: Pulsed operation (variant A79).
8 Cable gland for power supply cable.
9 M12 female connector for cable connection to a sensor (supplied with protective
cap) (variants A78 and A79).
10 M12 male connector for connection to AS-Interface (1) and auxiliary supply, if
required.
11 Cable gland for motor cabling.
12 Reset pushbutton.
13 Stop pushbutton.
Connection by plug-in connectors (variant A74)

1 Yellow LED, illuminated when motor running.
1 2 3 8 4 6 5 1 2 3 8 4 14 15 5
2 Red LED illuminated when there is a motor fault (overload or short-circuit) or an
internal fault in the starter, or in the event of a communication fault.
565206
565207
3 Green LED illuminated (steady light) when the AS-Interface line is powered and
flashing when information to the starter is being transmitted via the AS-Interface
7 7 line.
4 Knock-out for cable gland (included) for auxiliary supply cabling, if required.
5 Male connector for incoming power supply to motor starter (2)
6 Disconnect rotary control knob.
Indicates “Trip” when switch-disconnector tripped.
7 Female connector for power supply to the next motor starter (2)
8 Local/AS-Interface key switch (variant A79).
13 12 11 9 10 13 12 11 9 10 9 3-position, spring return to zero selector switch for reversing starter (LF2).
Function:
- position 2 = reverse running (variant A79).
1 23 4 6 7 1 23 4 14 15 7
Pushbutton: for non-reversing starters (LF1).
Function: Pulsed operation (variant A79).
565208
565209
10 Female connector for power supply to motor (2).

11 Knock-out for cable gland (included) for output control relay.
12 M12 female connector for cable connection to a sensor (supplied with protective
cap) (variants A78 and A79).
13 M12 male connector for connection to AS-Interface (1) and auxiliary supply, if
required.
14 Stop pushbutton.
15 Reset pushbutton.
13 12 8 11 9 10 13 12 8 11 9 10 (1) Extension cables: please consult your Regional Sales Office.

(2) Harting plug-in connector to be fitted to cable (not included, see page 2/101).

2/77
Functions 2
Enclosed starters 2
Auxiliary supply
AS-Interface
c 24 V auxiliary supply
Control-command and Control-command supply
contactor supply Contactor supply
2
Power supply
LF1 and LF2 starters do not require an auxiliary supply to operate the contactors,
since that provided by the AS-Interface line (yellow cable) is sufficient. Again, this
reduces the cabling required.
However, depending on the application, it is possible to supply the contactor coils by
an external c 24 V source. Selection is made by repositioning a jumper within the
starter.
A c 24 V supply is necessary for LF7 and LF8 starters.
Prospective current consumptions are listed on page 2/85.
Motor command-control
The functions provided by this range of starters are:
- motor control and status monitoring via AS-Interface,
- D.O.L. starting (non-reversing or reversing),
- overload protection of the motor,
- short-circuit protection of the motor and its power supply cabling.
11427
Starters with rotary control knob

These starters provide the following functions:
- load break switch-disconnector with padlockable control knob,
- IP 55 degree of protection, double insulation.
Opening of the enclosure is mechanically inhibited whilst the starter is switched on

or whilst in the off position and padlocked.
The rotary control knob has 3 positions:

0: switch-disconnector opened manually,
I: switch-disconnector closed,
Trip: switch-disconnector tripped.
11429
Starters with pushbutton control

These starters provide the following functions:
- pushbutton resetting of the protection device,
- pushbutton stop,
- IP 65 degree of protection, double insulation.

2/78
Enclosed starters 2
Local control
Stop and reset functions are possible from the front of the enclosure. The stop
command is achieved by actuating the internal circuit-breaker, which provides the
switch-disconnector function.
Depending on the type of starter, stopping is controlled by either:

- a rotary control knob, or
- a stop pushbutton (black) (1).
In the event of an overload, resetting of the internal thermal-magnetic circuit-breaker

is possible after the motor has cooled down.
2
Depending on the type of starter, resetting is controlled by either:
- a rotary control knob, or
- a reset pushbutton (blue) (1).
11423
Integral local/AS-Interface control (variant A79)

This starter variant is fitted with a 2-position “local/AS-Interface” switch which,
depending on the position of the switch, allows the following functions:
b AS-Interface: the PLC controls the motor starter.
b Local: local Start/Stop commands override instructions from the PLC.
b 3-position, spring return to zero selector switch for reversing starters (LF2, LF8).
Function:
- position 2 = reverse running.
Pushbutton for non-reversing starters (LF1, LF7). Function: Pulsed operation.
Control via a control station
AS-Interface
Message 2
Message 1
Power supply
It is possible to achieve manual local start control from a pushbutton control station
connected to AS-Interface. Please consult your Regional Sales Office.
Actuation of the pushbutton is transmitted to the programmable controller

(message 1) which passes it on to the starter (message 2).
(1) Only a rotary control knob is available for starters LF7 and LF8.

2/79
Enclosed starters 2
Local signalling
Visual indication of the various operating states is provided by LEDs (3 LEDs for
LF1/LF2 and 1 LED for LF7/LF8) located on the enclosure cover.
Safety
The starter features continual self-checking to ensure correct operation.
External safety functions are not processed by the starter.
2 Emergency stop and machine safety wiring must follow standard safety practice and
be hard-wired, using electromechanical devices in the approved way. These
functions must not be handled by communication bus systems (EN 60204 § 9.2.5.4).
Protection against sudden restarting, after an accidental power supply failure, must
be provided by a safety device separate from the starter.
The starter control (rotary knob or pushbutton) does not provide the Emergency Stop
function if the machine is fitted with other actuators. The control operators on the
starter are therefore coloured black, in accordance with standard EN 60204 § 10.2.1.
Starters with rotary control knob may be padlocked in the ON position, since this
control does not provide an Emergency Stop function.
Loss of control (LF1, LF2 only)

When communication is interrupted, the starter is no longer controlled by the PLC. In
this case, it can be configured to adopt the following fallback conditions:
- motor set to stop (applications: potentially dangerous movements),
- motor set to run in direction 1 (forward) (applications: fans, pumps),
- or motor continues to run as it was immediately prior to loss of control
(application: suction grippers).
The fallback configuration is set via AS-Interface.
The default configuration is with the motor set to stop.
Output control relay (LF1, LF2 only)

This relay incorporates a C/O contact, which may be used to control an indicator
lamp, solenoid valve, etc. (24 V, 1 A), via AS-Interface.
AS-Interface

2/80
Enclosed starters 2
Starters with sensor connected

Two 3-wire PNP sensors (50 mA max) or 2-wire limit switches can be connected
directly to the starter.
The information supplied by the sensor/limit switch is fed back via AS-Interface.
In addition, for LF1 and LF2 starters only, the sensor signal can be processed locally
to achieve a Reflex motor stop. This function is selected by means of micro switches.
127 other selections are reserved for future applications.
Reflex stop (LF1, LF2 only)

There are two types of “Reflex stop” function:
2
b “Reflex stop” function n° 1
Sensor n° 1 directly controls stopping of the motor.
After a new start instruction, the motor restarts (stop instruction then start
instruction).
A Reflex stop makes it possible to achieve precise and repetitive positioning,

independently of the AS-Interface and PLC cycle times.
For reversing starters, sensor n° 1 acts on both running directions.

Sensor n° 2 does not affect Reflex operation.
Sensor 2 Sensor 1
AS-Interface
Rev Forw
Time
Instruction from AS-Interface
Motor controlled by the starter
Information from sensor 1 = component present
b “Reflex stop” function n° 2

Sensor n° 1 controls stopping of the motor when it is running in the forward direction.
Sensor n° 2 controls stopping of the motor when it is running in reverse direction.
A new start instruction (stop instruction then start instruction) causes restarting of the
motor even if a component is still detected.
Sensor n° 2 does not affect forward running. Sensor n° 1 does not affect reverse
running.

2/81
Characteristics 2
Enclosed starters 2
Environment
Starter type LF1, LF2 LF7, LF8
Conforming to standards IEC 60204-1, EN 60204-1, –
IEC 60439-1, IEC 60947-4-1,
EN 60947-4-1
UL 508, CSA C22-2 n° 14 (1)
Product certifications – AS-Interface N° 18601
Protective treatment Standard version “TC” “TH”
2 Degree of protection
conforming to IEC 60529
Starters with rotary control knob IP 55 IP 55
Starters with pushbutton control IP 65 –
conforming to IEC 60439-1

without derating vertical mounting plane
30° 30°
°
90
90
°
Flame resistance Conforming to IEC 60695-2-1 °C 960
of equipment
Shock resistance Contactor open 10 gn
(1/2 sine wave, 11 ms) Contactor closed 15 gn
conforming to IEC 60068-2-27
Vibration resistance Contactor open 2 gn
5…150 Hz Contactor closed 4 gn
Safe separation of circuits Conforming to VDE 0106 SELV (Safety Extra Low Voltage), up to 400 V
and IEC 60536
Immunity to non-dissipating Conforming to IEC 60947-1 kV 6: power 6: power

shockwave (Uimp) 2.5: AS-Interface, 24 V and sensor 2: AS-Interface, 24 V and sensor
Material and colour Insulated enclosures Polycarbonate impregnated with 20 % glass fibre, black throughout
of enclosure base Metal enclosures Sheet steel, RAL 7032 –
Material and colour Insulated enclosures Polycarbonate impregnated with 20% glass fibre, grey RAL 7032 throughout
of enclosure cover Metal enclosures Sheet steel, RAL 7032 –
Resistance to Insulated enclosures Avoid allowing this material to come into contact with: strong bases (certain
chemical agents detergents), aromatic hydrocarbons, alcohol, chlorine solvents, ketones.
Electromagnetic compatibility
Immunity to Conforming to IEC 61000-4-2 kV 8: in open air (level 3)
electrostatic discharge EN 61000-4-2 4: in indirect mode (level 2)
Immunity to Conforming to IEC 61000-4-4 kV 2: power, AS-Interface, 24 V and sensor 2: AS-Interface, 24 V and on
fast transient currents EN 61000-4-4 (level 3) inputs/outputs
Immunity to Conforming to IEC 61000-4-5 kV 4/2: power (level 4) 2: AS-Interface, 24 V and on
dissipated shock wave EN 61000-4-5 inputs/outputs
2/0.5: AS-Interface, 24 V and sensor
(level 2)
Immunity to conducted Conforming to IEC 61000-4-6 V/m 10
radio-frequency disturbance ENV 50 141
Immunity to radiated Conforming to IEC 61000-4-3 V/m 10
radio-frequency disturbance ENV 50 140 and ENV 50 204
(GSM)
Radio-conducted and ENV 55 011/CISPR11 (G1) Class B Class A
radio-radiated rejection
(1) Only for metal enclosures with letter U at the end of the reference.
Functions : References : Dimensions, schemes : Connections :

2/82
Enclosed starters 2
Connection
Starter type LF1, LF7 LF2, LF8
Min. Max. Min. Max.
Power supply Screw clamp Solid cable mm 2 1 x 1.5 2x6 1 x 1.5 2x6
cabling terminals Flexible cable mm 2 1 x 1.5 2x6 1 x 1.5 2x6
without cable end
Flexible cable mm 2 1 x 1.5 2x4 1 x 1.5 2x4
with cable end
Tightening torque (1) N.m 1.7 1.7 1.7 1.7
Cable gland
(Pg 16)
Clamping capacity mm 10 15 10 15
2
Min. Max. Min. Max.
Motor cabling Screw clamp Solid cable mm 2 1 x 1.5 2x4 1 x 1.5 1x4
terminals Flexible cable mm 2 1 x 1.5 2x4 1 x 1.5 1x4
without cable end
Flexible cable mm 2 1 x 1.5 1 x 1.5 + 1 x 2.5 1 x 1.5 1 x 2.5
with cable end
Cable gland Clamping capacity mm 10 15 10 15
(Pg 16)
Min. Max. Min. Max.
Auxiliary 24 V Terminal block Solid cable mm 2 0.5 1.5 0.5 1.5
supply and output Flexible cable mm 2 0.5 1.5 0.5 1.5
control relay without cable end
cabling
Flexible cable mm 2 0.5 1.5 0.5 1.5
with cable end
Cable gland Clamping capacity Pg 13 mm 8 13 8 13
(included) Pg 16 mm 10 15 10 15
Pole electrical characteristics

Utilisation category Conforming to IEC 60947-2 A
(circuit-breaker)
Conforming to 947-4-1 AC-3
(motor starter)
Rated operational voltage (Ue) Conforming to IEC 60947 V 415
Rated insulation voltage (Ui) Conforming to IEC 60947 V 415
Rated operational frequency Conforming to IEC 60947 Hz 50/60
Breaking capacity Conforming to 230/240 V kA > 100
(Ics and Icu) IEC 60947-2 400/415 V kA > 100
Sensitivity to phase failure Conforming to Yes
IEC 60947-4-1 § 7-2-1-5-2
Circuit-breaker characteristics (manual operation)
Mechanical durability C.O.: closing, opening C.O. 100 000
Electrical durability In category AC-3 C.O. 100 000
Service class Maximum operating rate C.O./h 25
Circuit-breaker characteristics (automatic operation)

Maximum operating rate In operating cycles 3600
per hour
Mechanical durability In millions of 30 5
operating cycles
Electrical durability In category AC-3 to 8.5 A 800 000
Other characteristics
Starters with rotary control knob Circuit-breaker type See pages 3/6 to 3/9
GV2 P
Starters with pushbutton control Circuit-breaker type See pages 3/6 to 3/9
GV2 ME - LF1, LF2 only
Non-reversing starters Contactor See pages 5/8 to 5/11
LP4 K09015BW3
Reversing starters Reversing contactor See pages 5/8 to 5/11
LP5 K09015BW3
(1) Philips n° 2 or flat screwdriver Ø 5.5.
(2) Flat screwdriver Ø 3.5.

2/83
Enclosed starters 2
Sensor inputs
Starter type LF1, LF2 (A78 and A79) LF7, LF8 (A78)
Connection M12 M12
Nominal input values Voltage V c 24 c 24

Maximum current mA 50 7
available per sensor
Sensor supply (including ripple) V 19…30 –
Input value limits At state 1 Voltage V c >12.6 –
2 At state 0
Current
Voltage
mA
V
> 4.9
c <5
–
–
Current mA < 2.1 –
Input impedance kΩ >2 –
Filtering time Typical ms 7 –

Maximum ms 9.8 –
Maximum number of sensors 2 2
Proximity sensor compatibility 2-wire/3-wire 2-wire
Isolation with respect to the AS-Interface line None –
Input type Resistive for PNP type sensor –
Output control relay (for starters LF1 and LF2 with variants A78 and A79)
Operating voltage limit a.c. supply V 24
d.c. supply V 24
Thermal current at 40 °C (Ith) A 5
Service life Resistive Millions of operating cycles 0.1 (1) in 5 A current,
on an a 24 V load load 1 (2) in 1 A current.
AC-12
Inductive Millions of operating cycles 0.5 (2) in 1 A current,
load 1 (2) in 0.5 A current,
AC-14 5 (3) in 0.25 A current.
Service life Resistive Millions of operating cycles 0.1 (1) in 5 A current,
on a c 24 V load load 0.2 (1) in 2 A current.
DC-12
Resistive Millions of operating cycles 0.5 (2) in 1 A current,
load > 1 (3) in 0.25 A current.
DC-3
Response time Latching ms < 10
Unlatching ms < 10
Contact type C/O
Built-in protection Against overloads None, a quick-blow fuse must be fitted

and short-circuits
Against a.c. or d.c. Protected against overvoltages generated by switching the coils of preactuators
inductive overloads
Isolation rms voltage between output V 1500, 50/60 Hz for 60 s
and earth or between output
and internal logic
Insulation resistance between mΩ > 1000
output terminals and AS-Interface
(1) 0.2 of an operation (C/O) per second.
(2) 0.5 of an operation (C/O) per second.
(3) 1 operation (C/O) per second.

2/84
Enclosed starters 2
Consumption
Starter type Product configured Product configured for
for supply from the supply from an
AS-Interface line auxiliary c 24 V supply
LF1 LF2 LF1 LF2 LF7 LF8
Current consumption From the De-energised 80 mA 90 mA 80 mA 90 mA 8 mA 8 mA
AS-Interface line Inrush 190 mA 200 mA 80 mA 90 mA – –
Sealed 110 mA 120 mA 80 mA 90 mA 12 mA 12 mA
With sensor Sensor consumption (50 mA max) + 15 mA (signal = 1)
Relay 25 mA
2
From the auxiliary De-energised – – 0 0 0 0
c 24 V supply Inrush – – 110 mA 110 mA 750 mA 750 mA
Energised – – 30 mA 30 mA 750 mA 750 mA
Data exchange characteristics

AS-Interface profile 7.D (3) 7F
Data bits (commands) Bit value =0 =1 For commands, please refer to the LF7 and
LF8 starter schemes on page 2/96.
Command D0 (O) Stop - forward running Start - forward running
Command D1 (O) Stop - reverse running Start - reverse running

(2)
Command D2 (O) Deactivation of Activation of
control relay control relay
Command D3 (O) Not Used Not Used
Data bits (status) Bit value =0 =1 For states, please refer to the LF7 and LF8
starter schemes on page 2/96.
Status D0 (I) Not ready or fault Ready
Status D1 (I) Stopped Running
Status D2 (I) Sensor 1 signal absent Sensor 1 signal present

(1) (1)
Status D3 (I) Sensor 2 signal absent Sensor 2 signal present
(1) (1)
Parameter bits Bit value =0 = 1 (default value) –
Parameter P0 Maintain Assume Not used

operational state fallback condition
Parameter P1 Fallback condition - Fallback condition - Not used
Start Stop
Parameter P2 Not used Not used Not used
Parameter P3 Reflex function Reflex function Not used

inhibited enabled
(1) Only applicable to starters with sensors (variants A78 and A79).
(2) Only on LF2 or LF8.
(3) Please consult the user’s guide supplied with the product.

2/85
Characteristics, Enclosed starters 2
references 2
Models LF1 P and LF2 P
Characteristics
Conforming to standards IEC 60204-1, 60439-1, 60947-4-1, EN 60204-1, 60947-4-1
UL 508, CSA C22-2 n° 14 (1)
Degree of protection Conforming to IEC 60529 IP 55
Ambient air temperature Operation - 5 to + 40 °C
Operating positions Same as for the contactors
Material LFp P: polycarbonate (2). LFp MP: sheet steel
Starters in insulated enclosures

2 Standard power ratings of 3-phase motors
Circuit-breaker
adjustment range
Starter
Reference Weight
of thermal trips
220/230 V 400/415 V
kW kW A kg
Non-reversing starters with rotary control knob, with blue handle on black background (3)
11427
– – Without LF1 P00D (4) 1.020

– 0.06 0.16…0.25 LF1 P02D 1.300
0.06 0.09 0.25…0.40 LF1 P03D 1.300
– 0.12 0.40…0.63 LF1 P04D 1.300
– 0.18
0.09 0.25 0.63…1 LF1 P05D 1.300
0.12 –
0.18 0.37 1…1.6 LF1 P06D 1.350
0.25 0.55
0.37 0.75 1.6…2.5 LF1 P07D 1.350
LF1 PppD 0.55 1.1 2.5…4 LF1 P08D 1.350
0.75 1.5
11427
1.1 2.2 4…6.3 LF1 P10D 1.350

1.5 3 6…10 LF1 P14D 1.350
– 4
2.2 5.5 9…14 LF1 P16D 1.350
3 –
Reversing starters with rotary control knob, with blue handle on black background (3)
– – Without LF2 P00D (4) 1.020
– 0.06 0.16…0.25 LF2 P02D 1.550
0.06 0.09 0.25…0.40 LF2 P03D 1.550
LF1 PppDA78 – 0.12 0.40…0.63 LF2 P04D 1.550
– 0.18
11432
0.09 0.25 0.63…1 LF2 P05D 1.550

0.12 –
0.18 0.37 1…1.6 LF2 P06D 1.600
0.25 0.55
0.37 0.75 1.6…2.5 LF2 P07D 1.600
0.55 1.1 2.5…4 LF2 P08D 1.600
0.75 1.5
1.1 2.2 4…6.3 LF2 P10D 1.600
1.5 3 6…10 LF2 P14D 1.600
– 4
LF2 PppDA79A74 2.2 5.5 9…14 LF2 P16D 1.600
3 –
Starters in metal enclosures
Add the letter M after LF1 or LF2 in the references selected above. Example: LF1 P02D becomes LF1 MP02D.
To order a starter that conforms to standards UL 508 and CSA C22-2 n° 14, add a letter M after LF1 or LF2 and the letter U
at the end of the references selected above. Example: LF1 P02D becomes LF1 MP02DU.
Metal enclosures are fitted, as standard, with connections for 2 sensors.
Description For mounting on Suffix to be added to the
starter reference (5)
With HARTING connectors (6) Insulated or metal enclosure A74
11431
With connections for 2 sensors Insulated enclosure A78

and local/AS-Interface control
With local/AS-Interface control Metal enclosure A79
(2) Avoid allowing the material to come into contact with strong bases (detergents, chlorine solvents, ketones, alcohol, aromatic
hydrocarbons).
(3) On metal enclosures only, to order an Emergency Stop rotary control knob with red handle on yellow background, add the
letter R to the end of the reference. Example: LF1 MP02DR.
(4) Supplied without circuit-breaker GV2 P.
LF2 MPppDA74A79 (5) Example: LF1 P02DA79A74.
(6) Connectors to be fitted to cables (to be ordered separately, see page 2/101).
2/86
references (continued) 2
Models LF1 M and LF2 M
Characteristics
Conforming to standards IEC 60204-1, 60439-1, 60947-4-1, EN 60204-1, 60947-4-1
UL 508, CSA C22-2 n° 14 (1)
Degree of protection Insulated enclosure IP 65
Conforming to IEC 60529 Metal enclosure IP 55
Material LFp M: polycarbonate (2). LFp MM: sheet steel

Standard power ratings of 3-phase motors Circuit-breaker Starter
2
50/60 Hz in category AC-3 Adjustment range Reference Weight
of thermal trips
220/230 V 400/415 V
kW kW A kg
Non-reversing starters with pushbutton control
11429
– – Without LF1 M00D (3) 1.000

– 0.06 0.16…0.25 LF1 M02D 1.250
0.06 0.09 0.25…0.40 LF1 M03D 1.250
– 0.12 0.40…0.63 LF1 M04D 1.250
– 0.18
0.09 0.25 0.63…1 LF1 M05D 1.250
0.12 –
0.18 0.37 1…1.6 LF1 M06D 1.300
0.25 0.55
0.37 0.75 1.6…2.5 LF1 M07D 1.300
LF1 MppD 0.55 1.1 2.5…4 LF1 M08D 1.300
0.75 1.5
11426
1.1 2.2 4…6.3 LF1 M10D 1.300

1.5 3 6…10 LF1 M14D 1.300
– 4
2.2 5.5 9…14 LF1 M16D 1.300
3 –
Reversing starters with pushbutton control
– – Without LF2 M00D (3) 1.000
– 0.06 0.16…0.25 LF2 M02D 1.500
0.06 0.09 0.25…0.40 LF2 M03D 1.500
LF1 MppDA78 – 0.12 0.40…0.63 LF2 M04D 1.500
– 0.18
11425
0.09 0.25 0.63…1 LF2 M05D 1.500

0.12 –
0.18 0.37 1…1.6 LF2 M06D 1.550
0.25 0.55
0.37 0.75 1.6…2.5 LF2 M07D 1.550
0.55 1.1 2.5…4 LF2 M08D 1.550
0.75 1.5
1.1 2.2 4…6.3 LF2 M10D 1.550
1.5 3 6…10 LF2 M14D 1.550
– 4
LF1 MppDA79 2.2 5.5 9…14 LF2 M16D 1.550
3 –
Starters in metal enclosures
Add the letter M after LF1 or LF2 in the references selected above. Example: LF1 M02D becomes LF1 MM02D.
To order a starter that conforms to standards UL 508 and CSA C22-2 n° 14, add a letter M after LF1 or LF2 and the letter U
at the end of the references selected above. Example: LF1 M02D becomes LF1 MM02DU.
Metal enclosures are fitted, as standard, with connections for 2 sensors.
Description For mounting on Suffix to be added to the
11432
With HARTING connectors (5) Insulated or metal enclosure A74

With connections for 2 sensors and Insulated enclosure A79
local/AS-Interface control
With local/AS-Interface control Metal enclosure A79
hydrocarbons).
(3) Supplied without GV2 ME motor circuit-breaker.
(4) Example: LF1 M02DA79A74.
LF2 MMppDA79A74
2/87
Model LF7 P
Characteristics
Conforming to standards –

2
Non-reversing starters with rotary control knob, with red handle on yellow background
of thermal trips
220/230 V 400/415 V
11637
kW kW A kg
– – Without LF7 P00D (2) 1.020
– 0.06 0.16…0.25 LF7 P02D 1.300
0.06 0.09 0.25…0.40 LF7 P03D 1.300
– 0.12 0.40…0.63 LF7 P04D 1.300

– 0.18
0.09 0.25 0.63…1 LF7 P05D 1.300
LF7 PppD 0.12 –
0.18 0.37 1…1.6 LF7 P06D 1.350
0.25 0.55
11633
0.37 0.75 1.6…2.5 LF7 P07D 1.350
0.55 1.1 2.5…4 LF7 P08D 1.350

0.75 1.5
1.1 2.2 4…6.3 LF7 P10D 1.350
1.5 3 6…10 LF7 P14D 1.350

– 4
2.2 5.5 9…14 LF7 P16D 1.350
LF7 PppDA74 3 –
Description Suffix to be added to the
With HARTING connectors (4) A74
With local/AS-Interface control (5) A79
hydrocarbons).
(2) Supplied without GV2 P motor circuit-breaker.
(3) Example: LF1 P02DA79A74.
(5) LF7 enclosures are fitted, as standard, with connections for 2 sensors (2-wire only).
2/88
Model LF8 P
Characteristics
Conforming to standards –

2
Reversing starters with rotary control knob, with red handle on yellow background
of thermal trips
220/230 V 400/415 V
11637
kW kW A kg
– – Without LF8 P00D (2) 1.020
– 0.06 0.16…0.25 LF8 P02D 1.550
0.06 0.09 0.25…0.40 LF8 P03D 1.550
– 0.12 0.40…0.63 LF8 P04D 1.550

– 0.18
0.09 0.25 0.63…1 LF8 P05D 1.550
LF8 PppDA78 0.12 –
0.18 0.37 1…1.6 LF8 P06D 1.600
0.25 0.55
11633
0.37 0.75 1.6…2.5 LF8 P07D 1.600
0.55 1.1 2.5…4 LF8 P08D 1.600

0.75 1.5
1.1 2.2 4…6.3 LF8 P10D 1.600
1.5 3 6…10 LF8 P14D 1.600

– 4
2.2 5.5 9…14 LF8 P16D 1.600
LF2 PppDA78A74 3 –
Description Suffix to be added to the
With HARTING connectors (4) A74
With connection for 2 sensors (2-wire only) A78
With local/AS-Interface control A79
hydrocarbons).
(2) Supplied without GV2 P motor circuit-breaker.
(3) Example: LF8 P02DA79A74.
2/89
Enclosed starters 2
Insulated enclosures LF1, LF2, LF7, LF8

Power extension (daisy-chaining) Terminal
LA9 LFF LA9 LFF
LA9 LFM LA9 LFM
LA9 LFC LA9 LFT
Metal enclosures LF1, LF2
LA9 LFM
LA9 LFMM
LA9 LFFM40
2/90
Enclosed starters 2
Accessories for insulated enclosures with variant A74

Presentation
In order to reduce setting-up times and to simplify maintenance, variant A74 LF
starters are fitted with Harting plug-in connectors. These starters are designed to
allow 2 types of connection topology.
Connection This configuration avoids having to switch off the power

using tap links supply when replacing or adding one or more starters.
LF LF Although machine availability is increased, a larger
number of power connections is required: 4 per starter.
2
Connection The number of power connections per starter is halved, but
using power continuity of service is no longer assured if any of the
extension LF LF “upstream” starters are disconnected or removed. With
(daisy- this type of installation, special precautions must be taken
chaining) because removal of a starter at the head of the power
supply line de-energises all the remaining starters on that
line. For safety reasons therefore, starters must not be
removed under load (prohibited by standard EN60204
above 3kW/400V).
The 2 connection kits and accessories shown below have been designed to facilitate setting up
of power extension configurations by the user.
Connection kit (depending on enclosure application)
Enclosure Capacity Kit contents For Reference Weight
application mounting on
mm2 kg
Power 3-pole 1 female connector IP 55 LA9 LFC 0.150
extension 1.5 or 2.5 2 male connectors and enclosures
corresponding power LF1, LF2, LF7,
sockets (1) LF8
Terminal 3-pole 1 female connector IP 55 LA9 LFT 0.110
1.5 or 2.5 1 male connector, enclosures
1 blanking plug and LF1, LF2, LF7,
corresponding power LF8
sockets (1)
Crimping contacts
Type Capacity Sold in Unit Weight
mm2 lots of reference kg
Male 1.5 100 LA9 LFM15 0.120
2.5 100 LA9 LFM25 0.120
Female 1.5 100 LA9 LFF15 0.160
2.5 100 LA9 LFF25 0.150
Accessories for metal enclosures with variant A74

Connection kit
For Kit For Reference Weight
connector contents mounting on
kg
Input 1 metal cover Metal LA9 LFFM40 0.260
2 size 16 cable glands enclosures
1 blanking plug LF1, LF2
1 female power socket (3P + earth)
4 female crimping contacts (2)
Output 1 metal cover Metal LA9 LFMM 0.060
to motor 1 size 16 cable gland enclosures
1 female power socket LF1, LF2
(3P + earth) (1)
Crimping contacts
Type Capacity Thermal Voltage Sold in Unit Weight
current lots of reference
mm2 A V kg
Male 1.5 10 400 100 LA9 LFM15 0.120
2.5 10 400 100 LA9 LFM25 0.120
(1) Crimping contacts to be ordered separately.

(2) For flexible cable, 4 mm2 maximum, Ith: 16 A, Us: 400 V.
2/91
Dimensions 2
Enclosed starters 2

Models LF1 P, LF2 P, LF7 P and LF8 P
Non-reversing and reversing starters with rotary control knob

With cable glands With HARTING plug-in connectors (A74)
LFp PppD LFp PppDA74
175 175 175 175 47

120 4x5,3 84 120 4x5,3 84
2
150
165
150
165
30
18
(1) (1)

Incorporating sensor variant (A78) Incorporating sensor variant (A78)
LFp PppDA78 LFp PppDA78A74
175 175 175 175 47

120 4x5,3 84 120 4x5,3 84
150
165
150
165
30
18
(1) (2) (1) (2)

Incorporating sensor and local/AS-Interface control variant (A79) Incorporating sensor and local/AS-Interface control variant (A79)
LFp PppDA79 LFp PppDA79A74
175 175 175 175 47

120 4x5,3 84 120 4x5,3 84
150
165
150
165
30
18
(1) (2) (1) (2)
Knock-outs for cable gland

From above 2 x Pg16 and 2 x Pg13
From below 1 x Pg16
(1) M12 male connector for connection to AS-Interface
(2) M12 female connector for connection to sensor.
pages 2/86 to 2/89 pages 2/96 to 2/99
2/92
Enclosed starters 2

Models LF1 M and LF2 M
Non-reversing and reversing starters with pushbutton control

LFp MppD LFp MppDA74
140 175 140 175 47

120 4x5,3 84 120 4x5,3 84
150
165
150
165
30
18
(1) (1)

LFp MppDA78 LFp MppDA78A74
140 175 140 175 47

120 4x5,3 84 120 4x5,3 84
150
165
150
165
30
18
(1) (2) (1) (2)

LFp MppDA79 LFp MppDA79A74
165 175 165 175 47

120 4x5,3 84 120 4x5,3 84
150
165
150
165
30
18
(1) (2) (1) (2)
Knock-outs for cable gland

From above 2 x Pg16 and 2 x Pg13
From below 1 x Pg16
pages 2/86 to 2/89 pages 2/96 to 2/99
2/93
Enclosed starters 2
Starters for AS-Interface cabling systems

Models LF1 MP and LF2 MP
Non-reversing and reversing starters with rotary control knob

LFp MPppD LFp MPppDA74
179 219 179 219 60

125 175 125 175
Ø7 Ø7
8,5
8,5
2
199
230
245
199
230
245
Ø13 (1) Ø13 (1)

LFp MPppDA78 LFp MPppDA78A74
179 219 179 219 60

125 175 125 175
8,5
8,5
Ø7 Ø7
199
230
245
199
230
245
Ø13 (1) (2) Ø13 (1) (2)

LFp MPppDA79 LFp MPppDA79A74
179 219 179 219 60

125 175 125 175
Ø7
8,5
8,5
Ø7
199
230
245
199
230
245
Ø13 (1) (2) Ø13 (1) (2)
Knock-outs for cable Standard enclosure Enclosure with variant

gland A74
From above 3 x Pg16 1 x Pg16
From below 2 x Pg16 1 x Pg16
2/94
Enclosed starters 2

Models LF1 MM and LF2 MM
Non-reversing and reversing starters with pushbutton control

LFp MMppD LFp MMppDA74
145 219 145 219 60

125 175 125 175
Ø7 Ø7
8,5
8,5
2
199
230
245
199
230
245
Ø13 (1) Ø13 (1)

LFp MMppDA78 LFp MMppDA78A74
145 219 145 219 60

125 175 125 175
Ø7 Ø7
8,5
8,5
199
230
245
199
230
245
Ø13 (1) (2) Ø13 (1) (2)

LFp MMppDA79 LFp MMppDA79A74
169 219 169 219 60

125 175 125 175
Ø7 Ø7
8,5
8,5
199
230
245
199
230
245
Ø13 (1) (2) Ø13 (1) (2)
Knock-outs for cable Standard enclosure Enclosure with variant

gland A74
From above 3 x Pg16 1 x Pg16
From below 2 x Pg16 1 x Pg16
2/95
Schemes 2
Enclosed starters 2

Models LF7 and LF8
Non-reversing starters LF7

LF7
LA9 Z32811 (7F)

1/L1
3/L2
5/L3
– X3, 1
– X3, 2
– X3, 3
– X3, 4
– X3, 5
– X3, 6
– X3, 7
OUT 1
IN +
M–
IN1
IN2
IN3
IN4
–Q
24
2 3
5
2 –Q
A1 23
22
14
1 4
– KM –Q
21
13
– KM
A2
LF7 with variant A79
24 V LA9 Z32811 (7F) AS-i +

– KM
+ – X3, 1 +
– X3, 2
– X3, 3
– X3, 4
– X3, 5
– X3, 6
– X3, 7
OUT 1
IN +
0V AS-i –
M–
IN1
IN2
IN3
IN4
– –
24 V
2/T1
4/T2
6/T3
24 V
0V 0 1
2 3
W
U
5
Local line
1 4
22
14
24
– KM –Q
21
13
–Q
A1 23
– KM
A2
Reversing starters LF8
LF8 without variant and LF8 with variant A79
24 V LA9 Z32811 (7F) AS-i +

+ +
1/L1
3/L2
5/L3
– X3, 1
– X3, 2
– X3, 3
– X3, 4
– X3, 5
– X3, 6
– X3, 7
– X3, 8
OUT 1
OUT 2
24 V
IN +
M–
0V AS-i –
IN1
IN2
IN3
IN4
– –
–Q 24 V
0V
22
22
Local line
14
– KM1 – KM2 –Q
21
21
13
II 0 I

62
62
24
–Q – KM2 – KM1
61
61
23
A1 A1
– KM1 – KM2
– KM1 – KM2
A2 A2

2/T1
4/T2
6/T3
LA9 Z32811 (7F)

– X3, 1
– X3, 2
– X3, 3
– X3, 4
– X3, 5
– X3, 6
– X3, 7
– X3, 8
OUT 1
OUT 2
IN +
M–
IN1
IN2
IN3
IN4
W
U
62
62
24
2 3
M 5 –Q – KM2 – KM1
61
61
23
A1 A1
22
22
1
14
4 – KM1 – KM2
– KM1 – KM2 –Q
21
21
13
A2 A2
2/96
Enclosed starters 2

Models LF1 and LF2
Non-reversing starters LF1
M12 AS-i
AS-i –
1/L1
3/L2
5/L3
AS-i +
24 V ext
–Q AS-i
GV2 GV2 KM 0 V ext.
24 V AS-i
AS-i –
AS-i +
GV2 open
GV2 tripped
K1 auxiliary
Local/line 2
Local/AS-I
I
Signal sensor 1
GV2
Signal sensor 2
Forward
running
– KM
– KM
Economy
2/T1
4/T2
6/T3
resistor
0 V AS-i
Output control relay

W
U
– K3 AS-i 24 V ext.
M
NO COM NC
M12 sensor
Insulated enclosure with variant A78
+ Insulated enclosure with variant A79 or metal enclosure with variant A79
Reversing starters LF2
M12 AS-i
AS-i –
1/L1
3/L2
5/L3
AS-i +
24 V ext.
AS-i
GV2 GV2 KM1 KM2 0 V ext.
24 V AS-i
AS-i –
AS-i +
GV2 open
GV2 tripped
KM1 Local/line
KM2
Local/line
GV2
Signal sensor 1
102
Signal sensor 2
Forward running
Reverse running
– KM1 – KM2
– KM1 – KM2
Economy
resistor
2/T1
4/T2
6/T3
0 V AS-i
Output control relay
– K3
W
AS-i
U
24 V ext.
NO COM NC
M
M12 sensor
Insulated enclosure with variant A78
+ Insulated enclosure with variant A79 or metal enclosure with variant A79
2/97
Recommended Enclosed starters 2
application schemes Starters for AS-Interface cabling system

Models LF1, LF2, LF7 and LF8
2
Non-reversing and reversing starters without sensor and without an auxiliary supply
2
2T1
4T2
6T3
2T1
4T2
6T3
1L1
3L2
5L3
1L1
3L2
5L3
W
W
U
U
V
V
M M
AS-Interface line
Non-reversing and reversing starters with 2 sensors, an auxiliary supply and a control relay
J5–
J5+
J2 COM
J2 NO
J2 NC
2T1
4T2
6T3
2T1
4T2
6T3
1L1
3L2
5L3
1L1
3L2
5L3
W
W
U
U
V
M M
AS-Interface line
24 V
pages 2/86 to 2/89 pages 2/92 to 2/95
2/98
Recommended Enclosed starters 2
application schemes Starters for AS-Interface cabling system

Models LF1 and LF2
(continued) 2
Connections on enclosures (LF1, LF2 only)

M12 male connector for AS-Interface and c 24 V auxiliary supply
24 V 4 – AS-i
3
AS-i + 1 2 0V
2
Sensor M12 female connector
(for starters LF1 and LF2, only applicable to starters with sensor variants A78 and A79)
Limit switch 2-wire PNP type sensor 3-wire PNP type sensor
3 4 3 4 – 3 4 –
5 Sensor 1 5 5
Sensor 1 Sensor 1
2 1 2 1 + 2 1 +
Sensor 2
+ +
Sensor 2 Sensor 2
– –
pages 2/86 to 2/89 pages 2/92 to 2/95
2/99
Connections 2
Enclosed starters 2
Starters in enclosures with cable glands
2 3
8
8
9 7 6
1 Junction box
2 Incoming power
3 Power extension
4 XZ LC1220C1: splitter block
5 XZ CR1511040Ap: extension
6 XZ CB1pp02: flat cable (black) for auxiliary supply
7 XZ CG01403D: tap link for two cables
8 XZ CB1pp01: flat cable (yellow) for AS-Interface
9 XZ CG01205D: tap link for one cable
Functions : Characteristics : References : Dimensions, schemes :

pages 2/78 to 2/81 pages 2/82 to 2/85 pages 2/87 and 2/88 pages 2/92 to 2/99
2/100
Connections (continued) 2
Enclosed starters 2
Starters in insulated enclosures with HARTING type plug-in power connectors
1 Incoming power
3
2 Power extension
1 3 Control relay (example: illuminated indicator bank)
6 XZ CB1pp02: flat cable (black) for auxiliary supply
2 7 XZ CG01403D: tap link for two cables
8
9
XZ CB1pp01: flat cable (yellow) for AS-Interface
XZ CG01205D: tap link for one cable
2
M
Configuration of HARTING connectors to be fitted on cables

(to be ordered separately)
Number and HARTING reference
4 for incoming power for power extension
female connector and motor connection
male connectors
Straight cover 1 x 09-20-003-0420 2 x 09-20-003-0420
8 Male insert – 2 x 09-12-005-3101

6-way, 400 V
8
5 Female insert 1 x 09-12-005-3001 –
6-way, 400 V
Male contacts – 8 x 09-33-000-6102
2.5 mm2
Female contacts 3 x 09-33-000-6202 –
9 7 6 2.5 mm2
Plug for the last socket – 1 x 09-20-003-5408
Starters in metal enclosures with HARTING type plug-in power connectors
1 Incoming power
2 2 Control relay (example: illuminated indicator bank)
1 5 XZ CB1pp02p: flat cable (black) for auxiliary supply
6 XZ CG1403D: tap link for two cables
7 XZ CB1pp01p: flat cable (yellow) for AS-Interface
8 XZ CG01205D: tap link for one cable
M
Configuration of HARTING connectors to be fitted on cables
(to be ordered separately)
Number and HARTING reference
for incoming power for power extension
female connector and motor connection
3 male connectors
Straight cover 1 x 09-30-006-442 (1) 2 x 09-20-003-1440
1 x 09-30-006-443 (2)
Male insert – 2 x 09-12-005-3101
6-way, 400 V
7 Female insert 1 x 09-33-006-2702 –
7 6-way, 400 V
4 Male contacts – 5 x 09-33-000-6102
2.5 mm2
Female contacts 3 x 09-33-000-6207 –
2.5 mm2
8 6 5 (1) PG21.
(2) PG29.
Functions : Characteristics : References : Dimensions, schemes :

2/101
Presentation 2
D.O.L. starters 2
Presentation
AS-interface modules LA9 Z32810 and LA9 Z32811 allow motor starters to be
monitored and controlled by AS-Interface. These products are in addition to the
“AS-Interface enclosed starter” range, LF1 and LF2, LF7 and LF8.
The module sizes offered are: 2 inputs/1 output or 4 inputs/2 outputs.
These products can be mounted in two ways:

b on 5 rail,
2 b on LA9 Zppp adapters for use with busbar systems.
565188
565189
AS-I
PWR
AS-I
PWR
Inputs/outputs are connected to a built-in, flexible terminal type connector, so

reducing installation time.
The AS-Interface line is connected to the module by the yellow connector.
The external c 24 V supply to the module outputs is connected to the black
connector. With this supply method, it is possible to make the output states subject
to external safety conditions (Emergency stop, safety overtravel, etc.).
Characteristics: References: Dimensions, scheme :

page 2/104 page 2/105 pages 2/106 and 2/107
2/102
D.O.L. starters 2
Fields of application
The various module sizes allow control of:
- non-reversing starters,
- reversing starters,
- 2-speed starters for motors with separate windings.
The outputs, supplied by the separate auxiliary voltage, can simultaneously switch a
current of 0.5 A at c 24 V and can therefore switch the following contactors:
- LP1, LP4 K06 ... K12,

2
- LC1 D09 to D32.
Composition
AS-Interface module
565190
1 AS-Interface green/red LED indicator:

- red: no communication with the Master. The outputs are switched off,
- green: communication OK, outputs OK,
- red/yellow flashing: module has no address (assign an address between 1 and 31),
- off: no power supply to AS-Interface.
1
AS-I 2 Green PWR LED:
PWR
- LED on: auxiliary power supply ON,
2 - LED off: auxiliary power supply OFF.
Characteristics: References: Dimensions, schemes:

page 2/104 page 2/105 pages 2/106 and 2/107
2/103
Characteristics 2
D.O.L. starters 2
General system environment

Interface type LA9 Z32810 LA9 Z32811
Product certifications AS-Interface N° 18701 AS-Interface N° 18601
Ambient air temperature Storage, conforming to IEC 60539 °C - 40…+ 85
2 Resistance to external
mechanical impact
1/2 sine wave, 11ms
15 gn
Vibration resistance 5…150 Hz 2 gn

conforming to 60068-2-6
Immunity to non-dissipating Conforming to IEC 60439-1 kV 2.5: AS-Interface, 24 V and on inputs/outputs
shockwave (Uimp)
Immunity to Conforming to IEC 61000-4-2 kV 8: in open air (level 3)
electrostatic discharge EN 61000-4-2 4: in indirect mode (level 2)
Immunity to Conforming to IEC 61000-4-4 kV 2: AS-Interface, 24 V and on inputs/outputs
fast transient currents EN 61000-4-4 level 4
Immunity to Conforming to IEC 61000-4-5 kV 2: AS-Interface, 24 V and on inputs/outputs
dissipated shock wave EN 61000-4-5
Immunity to conducted Conforming to IEC 61000-4-6 V/m 10
radio-frequency interference ENV 50 141
Immunity to radiated Conforming to IEC 61000-4-3 V/m 10
radio-frequency interference ENV 50 140 and ENV 50 204
(GSM)
Radio-conducted and ENV 55 011/CISPR (G1) Class A
radio-radiated rejection
AS-Interface supply V 29.5-31.6
Cabling c.s.a., AS-Interface Flexible cable mm2 2 x 0.5…0.75
Cabling c.s.a., 24 V Flexible cable mm2 2 x 0.5…0.75
Cabling c.s.a., input/output Flexible cage terminal mm2 0.08…2.5; AWG28…12
and flexible cable
Input current mA 7
Coincidence of inputs 100 %
Maximum length of wires to switching components m 0.4
Maximum current of outputs c 13/14, (24 V) A 0.5
Thermal current Ith A 2
Coincidence of outputs 100 %
Short-circuit protection By flywheel diode Yes
Outputs switched off Watchdog Yes
in event of interference
on the AS-Interface line
AS-Interface profile 3F 7F
Number of I/O 2 inputs/1 output 4 inputs/2 outputs
Current consumption On AS-Interface On/OFF mA 8…12 8…12
Data bits Status 0 1 0 1
Command D0 (O) Out 1 Off On Off On
D1 (O) Out 2 Not used Off On
D2 (O) Out 3 Not used
D3 (O) Out 4 Not used
Status D0 (I) In 1 Absent Present Absent Present
D1 (I) In 2 Absent Present Absent Present
D2 (I) In 3 Not used Absent Present
D3 (I) In 4 Not used Absent Present
Parameters P0…P3 Not used
Presentation : References : Dimensions, schemes :

pages 2/102 and 2/103 page 2/105 pages 2/106 and 2/107
2/104
References 2
D.O.L. starters 2
AS-Interface modules (1) (2)

No. of Number Number Output Current Reference Weight
channels of inputs of outputs voltage per output
V A kg
3 2 1 c 24 0.5 LA9 Z32810 0.070
6 4 2 c 24 0.5 LA9 Z32811 0.070
Accessories 2
Description Busbar Width Reference Weight
system
mm mm kg
Modules without 40 or 60 45 LA9 Z32744 0.044
electrical connection,
for use with all
LA9 Zpp adapters 54 LA9 Z32745 0.051
Module with 40 45 LA9 Z32740 0.091

PE + N polarity and
5-way connector
54 LA9 Z32741 0.098
60 45 LA9 Z32742 0.085
54 LA9 Z32743 0.092
Replacement connectors and adapter cable

Description Colour Sold in Unit Weight
Insulation Displacement Yellow 5 LA9 Z32825 0.100
Connector (IDC) for AS-Interface
Insulation Displacement Black 5 LA9 Z32826 0.100

Connector (IDC)
for auxiliary supply
Description Cable length Reference Weight
m kg
Adapter cable for connection to 0.5 XZ MG12 0.070
addressing terminal XZ MC11
(1) User's Manual to be ordered separately, please consult your Regional Sales Office.
(2) Supplied with connectors LA9 Z32825 and LA9 Z32826.
Presentation : Characteristics : Dimensions, schemes :

2/105
Dimensions, D.O.L. starters 2
mounting 2
Dimensions
LA9 Z3281p
69,5
65
2
86 45
Mounting on modules
LA9 Z32742, LA9 Z32743 LA9 Z32740, LA9 Z32741
60 mm busbar system 40 mm busbar system
Common front face view
40
80
80
115
120
125,5 30
135,5
a
LA9 a
Z32740, Z32742 45
Z32741, Z32743 54
LA9 Z32745 LA9 Z32744

40 or 60 mm busbar system
Common front face view
40
80
80
135,5 125,5
a
LA9 a
Z32745 54
Z32744 45
Presentation : Characteristics : References :

2/106
Schemes 2
D.O.L. starters 2
Schemes
D.O.L. starter, non-reversing
1 motor 2 motors
LA9 Z32810 LA9 Z32811
– X3, 1
– X3, 2
– X3, 3
– X3, 4
– X3, 5
– X3, 6
– X3, 7
– X3, 8
– X3, 1
– X3, 2
– X3, 3
– X4, 4
– X4, 2
OUT1
OUT2
OUT1
IN +
IN +
M–
M–
IN1
IN2
IN3
IN4
IN1
IN2
–Q – KM
–Q
– KM1 – KM2 – Q1 – Q2
– Q1 – Q2 2
– KM – KM1 – KM2
1/L1
3/L2
5/L3
1/L1
3/L2
5/L3
1/L1
3/L2
5/L3
–Q – Q1 – Q2
– KM – KM1 2/T1 – KM2
4/T2
6/T3
2/T1
4/T2
6/T3
2/T1
4/T2
6/T3
W
W
U
V
V
U
M M1 M2
D.O.L. starter, reversing
LA9 Z32811
– X3, 1
– X3, 2
– X3, 3
– X3, 4
– X3, 5
– X3, 6
– X3, 7
– X3, 8
OUT1
OUT2
IN +
M–
IN1
IN2
IN3
IN4
–Q – KM2 – KM1
– KM1 – KM2 –Q
– KM1 – KM2
1/L1
3/L2
5/L3
–Q
– KM1 – KM2
2/T1
4/T2
6/T3
W
U
Presentation : Characteristics : References :

2/107
Contents 0
3 - Protection components
Motor circuit-breakers
TeSys protection components for the motor

protection
Thermal-magnetic motor circuit-breakers

b General characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 3/6
b GV2 ME and GV2 P
v Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 3/8

v Curves. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 3/22
v References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 3/45
v Dimensions, mounting, schemes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 3/62
3 b GV3 ME
v Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 3/10

v Curves. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 3/26
b GV7 R

v Curves. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 3/29
b GV2 RT
v Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 3/6

v Curves. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 3/34
b Accessories
v For circuit-breakers GV2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 3/59

v For circuit-breakers GV3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 3/55
v For circuit-breakers GV7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . pages 3/57 and 3/61
Magnetic motor circuit-breakers

b GV2 LE and GV2 L

v Curves. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 3/35
b GK3

v Curves. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 3/41
b Accessories
v For circuit-breakers GV2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . pages 3/53 and 3/59

v For circuit-breakers GK3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 3/55
3/0
Thermal-magnetic circuit-breakers for the
protection of control circuits, solenoid valves
and transformers
b Thermal-magnetic circuit-breaker GB2 for the protection of industrial equipment

control circuits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 3/76

v References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 3/80
v Dimensions, schemes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 3/81
3/1
Selection guide 3
TeSys protection components 3
Applications Protection of motors
Tripping threshold on short-circuit 13 In on average
Standard motor power ratings in AC-3, 415 V Up to 15 kW Up to 37 kW
Operational current at 415 V 0.1…32 A 1…80 A
Breaking capacity at 415 V (Icu) to IEC 60947-2 10…100 kA 35…100 kA
Door interlock mechanism Without With Without
Circuit-breaker type GV2 ME GV2 P GV3 ME
Pages 3/45 and 3/46 3/45 3/47
3/2
3
3
Protection of motors with

high current peak on starting
20 In on average
7.5…110 kW Up to 11 kW
12…220 A 0.25…23 A
35 and 36 kA 70 kA 15…100 kA
With With
GV7 RE GV7 RS GV2 RT
3/48 3/49
3/3
Selection guide 3
Applications Protection of motors

Magnetic circuit-breakers provide short-circuit protection. They must be combined with
thermal overload relays to provide motor overload protection.
Tripping threshold on short-circuit 13 In on average
Standard motor power ratings in AC-3, 415 V Up to 15 kW
Operational current at 415 V 0.4…32 A
Breaking capacity at 415 V (Icu) to IEC 60947-2 10…100 kA 35…100 kA
Door interlock mechanism With
Device type GV2 LE GV2 L
Pages 3/50
3/4
3
3
6…14 In 8…13 In 6.3…12.5 In
11…37 kW 0.37…250 kW
40…80 A 1.5…500 A
35 and 50 kA 25.7 and 150 kA 35.7…150 kA 45.7…150 kA
GK3 EF NS 80 NS 100 to NS 400 and

NS 250 NS 630
3/51 Please consult the Merlin Gerin catalogue - Low Voltage Distribution
3/5
Characteristics 3
Environment
Circuit-breaker type GV2 ME GV2 P GV3 ME GV7 R
Conforming to standards IEC 60947-1, 60947-2, 60947-4-1, IEC 60947-2, IEC 60947-1,
EN 60204, UL 508, 60947-4-1, 60947-2, 60947-4-1,
CSA C22-2 n° 14, NF EN, BS EN, EN 60947-1, 60947-2,
NF C 63-650, 63-120, 79-130, DIN EN 60 947. EN 60947-4-1,
VDE 0113, 0660 NF C 63-650,
NF C 63-120, 79-130,
VDE 0113, 0660
Product certifications CSA, CEBEC, CSA, UL, PTB, CSA, UL, LROS DNV, UL
GOST, TSE, UL, EZU, GOST, TSE,
BV, GL, LROS , DNV, LROS, GL,
DNV, PTB, EZU, BV, RINA
SETI, RINA,
Protective treatment “TH” “TC” “TC”
Degree of protection Open- IP 20 IP 20 IP 405

conforming to IEC 60529 mounted with terminal shields
3 In enclosure GV2 Mp01: IP 41
GV2 Mp02: IP 55
– GV3 CE01: IP 55 –
Shock resistance 30 gn -11 ms 22 gn -20 ms 30 gn -11 ms

Vibration resistance 5 gn (5…150 Hz) 2.5 gn (0…25 Hz) 2.5 gn (25 Hz)
Ambient air temperature Storage °C - 40…+ 80 - 40…+ 80 - 40…+ 80 - 55…+ 95
Operation Open- °C - 20…+ 60 - 20…+ 60 - 20…+ 60 - 25… + 70
mounted
In enclosure °C - 20…+ 40 – - 20…+ 40 –
Temperature compensation Open- °C - 20…+ 60 - 20…+ 60 - 20…+ 60 - 25… + 55 (1)

mounted
In enclosure °C - 20…+ 40 – - 20…+ 40 –
Flame resistance °C 960 960 960

Maximum operating altitude m 2000 3000 2000
Suitable for isolation Yes – Yes

conforming to IEC 60947-1 § 7-1-6
Resistance to mechanical impact J 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5
In enclosure: 6 – – –
Sensitivity to phase failure Yes, conforming to IEC 60947-4-1 § 7-2-1-5-2
Technical characteristics
Circuit-breaker type GV2 GV2 GV2 GV3 GV3 GV3 GV7 GV7 GV7
ME P RT ME06… ME40… ME80 Rp20... Rp150 Rp220
ME25 ME63 Rp100
Utilisation category Conforming to IEC 60947-2 A A A
Conforming to IEC 60947-4-1 AC-3 AC-3 AC-3
Rated operational voltage (Ue) V 690 690 690

Rated insulation voltage Conforming to IEC 60947-2 V 690 690 750
(Ui) Conforming to CSA C22-2 n° 14, V 600 600 (B600) 600
UL 508
Rated operational frequency Hz 50/60 50/60 50/60
Rated impulse withstand voltage (U imp) kV 6 6 8
Total power dissipated per pole W 2.5 3 6 8 5 8.7 14.5
Mechanical durability C.O. 100 000 100 000 50 000 30 000 50 000 40 000 20 000
(C.O.: Closing - Opening)
Electrical durability 440 V In/2 C.O. 100 000 100 000 50 000 30 000 50 000 40 000 20 000
for AC-3 duty 440 V In C.O. – – – – 30 000 20 000 10 000
Duty class (maximum operating rate) C.O./h 25 25 25
Maximum conventional rated thermal current (Ith) A 0.16… 0.16… 0.40… 1.6… 40… 80 12… 150 220
conforming to IEC 60947-4-1 32 32 23 25 63 100
Rated duty conforming to IEC 947-4-1 Continuous duty
(1) For operation up to 70 °C, please consult your Regional Sales Office.

pages 3/44 to 3/49 pages 3/62 to 3/67 pages 3/68 and 3/69
3/6
Mounting characteristics
Operating position
Without derating, in relation to normal vertical mounting plane
Side view Front view

GV3 ME: preferably vertical
Connection characteristics
Circuit-breaker type GV2 ME GV2 P GV3 ME06…ME20 GV3 ME25…ME80
Connection to screw clamp terminals Min. Max. Min. Max. Min. Max. Min. Max.
Number of conductors and c.s.a. Solid cable mm 2 2x1 2x6 2x1 2x6 2x1 2x6 1 x 2.5 1 x 35 3
Flexible cable mm 2 2 x 1.5 2x6 2 x 1.5 2x6 2x1 2x6 1 x 2.5 2 x 16
without cable end
Flexible cable mm 2 2x1 2x4 2x1 2x4 2x1 2x4 1 x 2.5 2 x 16
with cable end
Tightening torque N.m 1.7 1.7 1.7 1.7 1.7 1.7 5 5
Connection to spring terminals Solid cable mm 2 2 x 1 (1) 2x6 – – – – – –

Number of conductors and c.s.a.
Flexible cable mm 2 2 x 1.5 (1) 2 x 4 – – – – – –
without cable end
Connection to bars,
cables with lugs or bare cables
h
d
d
e L L
Circuit-breaker type GV7 Rp20...Rp100 GV7 Rp150 GV7 Rp220

Pitch Without spreaders mm 35 35 35
With spreaders mm 45 45 45
Bars or cables with lugs e mm y6 y6 y6
L mm y 25 y 25 y 25
d mm y 10 y 10 y 10
Screws M6 M8 M8
Tightening torque N.m 10 15 15
Bare cables (copper or aluminium) Height (h) mm 20 20 20

with connectors
C.s.a. mm 2 1.5...95 1.5...95 1.5...185
(1) For cross-sections 1 to 1.5 mm2, the use of an LA9 D99 cable end reducer is recommended.

3/7
Characteristics 3

GV2 ME and GV2 P
Breaking capacity of GV2 ME and GV2 P

Circuit-breaker type GV2 ME GV2 P
01 07 08 10 14 16 20 21 32 01 07 08 10 14 16 20 21 32
to & to &
06 22 06 22
Rating A 0.1 2.5 4 6.3 10 14 18 23 32 0.1 2.5 4 6.3 10 14 18 23 32
to & to &
1.6 25 1.6 25
Breaking capacity 230/240 V Icu kA g g g g g g g 50 50 g g g g g g g g g
Ics % (1) g g g g g g g 100 100 g g g g g g g g g
400/415 V Icu kA g g g g g 15 15 15 10 g g g g g g 50 50 50
Ics % (1) g g g g g 50 50 40 50 g g g g g g 50 50 50
3 440 V Icu kA g g g 50 15 8 8 6 6 g g g g g 50 20 20 20
Ics % (1) g g g 100 100 50 50 50 50 g g g g g 75 75 75 75
500 V Icu kA g g g 50 10 6 6 4 4 g g g g 50 42 10 10 10
Ics % (1) g g g 100 100 75 75 75 75 g g g g 100 75 75 75 75
690 V Icu kA g 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 g 8 8 6 6 6 4 4 4
Ics % (1) g 75 75 75 75 75 75 75 75 g 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100
Associated fuses (if required) 230/240 V aM A g g g g g g g 80 80 g g g g g g g g g

if Isc > breaking capacity Icu
conforming to IEC 60947-2 gG A g g g g g g g 100 100 g g g g g g g g g
400/415 V aM A g g g g g 63 63 80 80 g g g g g g 100 100 100
gG A g g g g g 80 80 100 100 g g g g g g 125 125 125
440 V aM A g g g 50 50 50 50 63 63 g g g g g 50 63 80 80
gG A g g g 63 63 63 63 80 80 g g g g g 63 80 100 100
500 V aM A g g g 50 50 50 50 50 50 g g g g 50 50 50 50 50
gG A g g g 63 63 63 63 63 63 g g g g 63 63 63 63 63
690 V aM A g 16 25 32 32 40 40 40 40 g 20 25 40 40 50 50 50 50
gG A g 20 32 40 40 50 50 50 50 g 25 32 50 50 63 63 63 63
g > 100 kA.

(1) As % of Icu.
R e fe re n c e s : D im e n s io n s : S chem es :
p a g e s 3 /4 4 to 3 /4 9 p a g e s 3 /6 2 to 3 /6 7 p a g e s 3 /6 8 a n d 3 /6 9
3/8

GV2 ME and GV2 P
Breaking capacity of GV2 ME and GV2 P (used in association with current limiter GV1 L3)
Circuit-breaker type GV2 ME
01 to 06 07 08 10 14 16 20 21 22 32
Rating A 0.1 to 2.5 4 6.3 10 14 18 23 25 32
1.6
Breaking capacity 230/240 V Icu kA g g g g g g g g g g

Ics % (1) g g g g g g g g g g
400/415 V Icu kA g g g g g 100 100 100 100 100
Ics % (1) g g g g g 50 50 40 40 40
440 V Icu kA g g g g g 50 20 20 20 20
Ics % (1) g g g g g 75 75 75 75 75
500 V Icu kA g g g g 50 42 10 10 10 10
3
Ics % (1) g g g g 100 100 75 75 75 75
Circuit-breaker type GV2 P

01 to 06 07 08 10 14 16 20 21 22 32
Rating A 0.1 to 2.5 4 6.3 10 14 18 23 25 32
1.6
Breaking capacity 230/240 V Icu kA g g g g g g g g g g

400/415 V Icu kA g g g g g g g g g g
440 V Icu kA g g g g g 100 100 100 100 100
Ics % (1) g g g g g 50 50 50 50 50
500 V Icu kA g g g g 100 100 100 100 100 100
Ics % (1) g g g g 50 50 50 50 50 50
690 V (3) Icu = Ics kA g 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50

01 to 06 07 08 10 14 16 20 21 22 32
Rating A 0.1 2.5 4 6.3 10 14 18 23 25 32
to 1.6
Cable protection against thermal Minimum c.s.a. 1 mm2 p p p y 10 kA y 6 kA (2) (2) (2) (2) (2)
stress in the event of short-circuit protected
(PVC insulated copper cables) at 40 °C 1.5 mm2 p p p y 20 kA y 10 kA (2) (2) (2) (2) (2)
at Isc max.
2.5 mm2 p p p p p p p p p (2)
4…6 mm2 p p p p p p p p p p
g > 100 kA
p Cable c.s.a. protected
(1) As % of Icu
(2) Cable c.s.a. not protected
(3) With limiter LA9 LB920

3/9
Characteristics 3

GV3 ME
Breaking capacity of GV3 ME

06 & 07 08 10 14 20 25 40 63 80
Rating A 1.6 & 2.5 4 6 10 16 25 40 63 80
Breaking capacity 230/240 V Icu kA 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100
Ics % (1) 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100
400/415 V Icu kA 100 100 100 100 100 100 35 35 15
Ics % (1) 100 100 100 100 50 50 50 50 50
440 V Icu kA 100 100 100 25 25 25 25 25 10
Ics % (1) 100 100 100 100 60 60 60 60 60

3 500 V Icu kA 100 100 100 8 8 8 8 8 4
Ics % (1) 100 100 100 100 100 100 75 75 100
690 V Icu kA 100 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 2
Ics % (1) 100 100 100 100 100 100 75 75 100
Associated fuses, if required 230/240 V aM A g g g g g g g g g

if lsc > breaking capacity Icu
gG A g g g g g g g g g
400/415 V aM A g g g g g g 250 315 315
gG A g g g g g g 315 400 400
440 V aM A g g g 125 160 200 250 315 315
gG A g g g 160 200 250 315 400 400
500 V aM A g g g 80 100 125 160 200 200
gG A g g g 100 125 160 200 250 250
690 V aM A g 40 50 80 100 125 160 200 200
gG A g 50 63 100 125 160 200 250 250
g Fuse not required: breaking capacity Icn > Isc.

(1) As % of Icu.

3/10
Characteristics 3

GV7 R
Breaking capacity of GV7 R

Circuit-breaker type GV7
RE20…RE100 RS20…RS100 RE150 RS150 RE220 RS220
Rating A 12…20 to 60…100 90…150 90…150 132…220 132…220
Breaking capacity 230/240 V lcu kA 85 100 85 100 85 100

Ics % (1) 100 100 100 100 100 100
400/415 V Icu kA 36 70 35 70 35 70
Ics % (1) 100 100 100 100 100 100
440 V Icu kA 36 65 35 65 35 65
Ics % (1) 100 100 100 100 100 100
500 V Icu kA 18 50 30 50 30 50
3
Ics % (1) 100 100 100 100 100 100
690 V Icu kA 8 10 8 10 8 10
Ics % (1) 100 100 100 100 100 100
Cable protection against Minimum c.s.a. 4 mm 2 y 6 kA y 6 kA (2) (2) (2) (2)

thermal stress in the event protected
of short-circuit at 40 °C 6 mm 2 p y 25 kA (2) (2) (2) (2)
(PVC insulated copper cables) at Isc max.
10…50 mm2 p p p p p p
p Cable c.s.a. protected.

(1) As % of Icu.
(2) Cable c.s.a. not protected.

3/11
Characteristics 3

GV2 LE and GV2 L
Environment
Type GV2 LE GV2 L
Conforming to standards IEC 60947-1, 60947-2, EN 60204, NF C 63-650, NF C63-120, 79-130,
VDE 0113, 0660, UL 1077.
Product certifications UL, CSA BV, GL, LROS, DNV, RINA, UL, CSA
Shock resistance Conforming to IEC 60068-2-27 30 gn 30 gn
Vibration resistance Conforming to IEC 60068-2-6 5 gn (5 to 150 Hz) 5 gn (5 to 150 Hz)
Operation °C - 20…+ 60 - 20…+ 60
Flame resistance Conforming to IEC 60695-2-1 °C 960 960
3 Maximum operating altitude m 2000 2000
Operating position
Cabling Max. Min. Max. Min.

Number of conductors Solid cable mm2 2x6 2x1 2x6 2x1
and c.s.a.
Flexible cable without cable end mm2 2x6 2 x 1.5 2x6 2 x 1.5
Flexible cable with cable end mm2 2x4 2x1 2x4 2x1
Suitable for isolation Conforming to Yes Yes

IEC 60947-1 § 7-1-6
Tightening torque N.m 1.7 1.7
Resistance to mechanical impact J 0.5 0.5
Utilisation category Conforming to IEC 60947-2 A A
Conforming to IEC 60947-4-1 AC-3 AC-3
Rated operational Conforming to IEC 60947-2 V 690 690

voltage (Ue)
Rated insulation Conforming to IEC 60947-2 V 690 690
voltage (Ui)
Rated operational frequency Conforming to IEC 60947-2 Hz 50/60 50/60
Rated impulse withstand Conforming to IEC 60947-2 kV 6 6

voltage (U imp)
Total power dissipated per pole W 1.8 1.8
Mechanical durability C.O. 100 000 100 000

(C.O. : Closing - Opening)
Electrical durability For AC-3 duty C.O. 100 000 100 000
Duty class C.O./h 40 40

(maximum operating rate)
Rated duty Conforming to IEC 60947-4-1 Continuous duty Continuous duty

pages 3/50 and 3/51 pages 3/70 to 3/72 page 3/73
3/12

GV2 LE and GV2 L
Breaking capacity of GV2 LE and GV2 L

Type GV2 LE GV2 L
03 07 08 10 14 16 20 22 32 03 07 08 10 14 16 20 22 32
to to
06 06
Rating A 0.4 2.5 4 6,3 10 14 18 25 32 0.4 2.5 4 6,3 10 14 18 25 32
to to
1.6 1
Breaking capacity 230/240 V Icu kA g g g g g g g 50 50 g g g g g g g 50 50
Ics % (1) g g g g g g g 100 100 g g g g g g g 100 100
400/415 V Icu kA g g g g g 15 15 15 10 g g g g g 50 50 50 50
Ics % (1) g g g g g 50 50 40 50 g g g g g 50 50 50 50
440 V Icu kA g g g 50 15 8 8 6 6 g g g g 20 20 20 20 20
Ics % (1) g g g 100 100 50 50 50 50 g g g g 75 75 75 75 75

3
500 V Icu kA g g g 50 10 6 6 4 4 g g g g 10 10 10 10 10
Ics % (1) g g g 100 100 75 75 75 75 g g g g 100 75 75 75 75
690 V Icu kA g 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 g 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4
Ics % (1) g 75 75 75 75 75 75 75 75 g 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100
Associated fuses (if required) 230/240 V aM A g g g g g g g 80 80 g g g g g g g 100 100

if Isc > breaking capacity Icu
conforming to IEC 60947-2 gG A g g g g g g g 100 100 g g g g g g g 125 125
amendment 1
400/415 V aM A g g g g g 63 63 80 80 g g g g g 80 100 100 100
gG A g g g g g 80 80 100 100 g g g g g 100 125 125 125
440 V aM A g g g 50 50 50 50 63 63 g g g g 50 63 80 80 80
gG A g g g 63 63 63 63 80 80 g g g g 63 80 100 100 100
500 V aM A g g g 50 50 50 50 50 50 g g g g 50 50 50 50 50
gG A g g g 63 63 63 63 63 63 g g g g 63 63 63 63 63
690 V aM A g 16 25 32 32 40 40 40 40 g 20 25 40 40 50 50 50 50
gG A g 20 32 40 40 50 50 50 50 g 25 32 50 50 63 63 63 63
Cable protection against thermal 1 mm 2 kA p p p y 10 y 6 (2) (2) (2) (2) p p p y 10 y 6 (2) (2) (2) (2)
stress in the event of short-circuit
(PVC insulated copper cables) 1.5 mm2 kA p p p y 20 y 10 (2) (2) (2) (2) p p p y 20 y 10 (2) (2) (2) (2)
Minimum c.s.a. protected at 40 °C
and at Isc max.
2.5 mm2 p p p p p p p p (2) p p p p p p p p (2)
4…6 mm2 p p p p p p p p p p p p p p p p p p
g > 100 kA
pCable c.s.a. protected
(1) As % of Icu
(2) Cable c.s.a. not protected

3/13
Characteristics 3

GK3
Environment
Conforming to standards IEC 60947-2. EN 60-204
Protective treatment “TC”
Degree of protection Conforming to GK3 EF basic unit: IP 20

IEC 60529
Shock resistance Conforming to 22 gn for 20 ms
IEC 60068-2-27
Vibration resistance Conforming to 2.5 gn (0…25 Hz)
IEC 60068-2-6
Flame resistance Conforming to IEC Conforms for 960 °C
60695-2-1
Operation °C - 20… + 70 open-mounted
3 Maximum operating altitude m 3000
Operating position Any
Cabling Solid cable mm2 1 x 2.5 to 35 conductor

without cable end
with cable end
Suitable for isolation Yes, conforming to IEC 60947-1§7-1-6
Rated insulation Conforming to IEC 60947-2 V 750
voltage (Ui)
Rated impulse withstand Conforming to IEC 60947-2 kV 10
voltage (U imp)
Rated operational Conforming to IEC 60947-2 V 690
voltage (Ue)
Rated operational frequency Hz 50…60
Electrical durability for AC-23/400 V duty C.O. 1500

Mechanical durability C.O. 20 000
Maximum operating rate C.O./h 40
Operating threshold About 13 times the rating of the GK3 EF selected (non adjustable threshold)
of magnetic trips
Utilisation category Conforming to IEC 60947-2 A

3/14

GK3
Type GK3 EF40 GK3 EF65 GK3 EF80

Breaking capacity of the 230/240 V Icu kA 100 50 50
circuit-breaker only or of the
circuit-breaker combined with Ics % (1) 20 40 40
a thermal overload relay
400/415 V Icu kA 50 35 35
Ics % (1) 30 25 25
440 V Icu kA 30 25 25
Ics % (1) 30 30 30
500 V Icu kA 20 15 15
Ics % (1) 30 30 30
690 V Icu kA 6 6 6
3
Ics % (1) 60 50 50
Associated fuses (if required) 230/240 V aM A 160 200 200

for use with circuit-breaker only or
circuit-breaker combined with a gG A 250 315 315
thermal overload relay
if lsc > breaking capacity
400/415 V aM A 160 200 200
gG A 200 250 250
440 V aM A 160 160 160
gG A 200 250 250
500 V aM A 125 160 160
gG A 160 200 200
690 V aM A 100 125 125
gG A 125 160 160
Use of circuit-breakers without fuses Minimum cable length (in metres) limiting the maximum short-circuit current to 35 kA
maximum, so enabling breakers GK3 EF to be used without fuses
Cable c.s.a. mm 2 y 25 35 50 70 95 120
Isc (rms) 3-phase, 50 kA m 5 6 8 10 13 15

incoming (Ue = 400 V)
45 kA m 5 5 7 8 10 12
40 kA m 5 5 5 5 8 9
37 kA m 5 5 5 5 5 5
(1) As % of Icu

3/15
Characteristics 3
Thermal-magnetic and magnetic motor

circuit-breakers GV2
Auxiliary contacts
Type of contacts Instantaneous auxiliary Fault signalling Instantaneous

GV AN, GV AD GV AD, GV AM11 (1) auxiliary GV AE
Rated insulation voltage (Ui) Conforming to IEC 60947-1 V 690 690 250 (690 in relation to
(associated insulation main circuit)
coordination) Conforming to CSA C22-2 n° 14 V 600 300 300
and UL 508
Conventional Conforming to IEC 60947-5-1 A 6 2.5 2.5
thermal current (Ith)
Conforming to CSA C22-2 n° 14 A 5 1 1
and UL 508
Mechanical durability C.O. 100 000 1000 100 000
(C.O. : Closing - Opening)
Operational power and current AC-15/100 000 C.O. AC-14/1000 C.O. AC-15/100 000 C.O.
a.c. operation Rated operational voltage V 48 110 230 380 440 500 690 24 48 110 230 24 48 110 230
(Ue) 127 240 415 127 240 127 240
Operational power, VA 300 500 720 850 650 500 400 36 48 72 72 48 60 120 120
normal conditions
3 Occasional breaking and making
capacities, abnormal conditions
kVA 3 7 13 15 13 12 9 0.22 0.3 0.45 0.45 0.48 0.6 1.27 2.4
Rated operational current A 6 4.5 3.3 2.2 1.5 1 0.6 1.5 1 0.5 0.3 2 1.25 1 0.5
(Ie)
Operational power and current DC-13/100 000 C.O. DC-13/1000 C.O. DC-13/100 000 C.O.
d.c. operation Rated operational voltage V 24 48 60
110 240 – – 24 48 60 – 24 48 60 –
(Ue) (2)
Operational power, W 140 240 180 140 120 – – 24 15 9 – 24 15 9 –
normal conditions
Occasional breaking and making W 240 360 240 210 180 – – 100 50 50 – 100 50 50 –
capacities, abnormal conditions
Rated operational current A 6 5 3 1.3 0.5 – – 1 0.3 0.15 – 1 0.3 0.15 –
(Ie)
Low level switching reliability of contact GV A: number of failures for “n” million operating cycles
(17 V-5 mA): = 10-6
Minimum operational conditions V 17
d.c. operation mA 5
Short-circuit protection By GB2 CBpp circuit-breaker (rating according to operational GB2 CB06 or
current for Ue y 415 V) or by gG fuse 10 A max gG fuse, 10 A max
Cabling, screw clamp Number of conductors 1 2
terminals Solid cable mm2 1…2.5 1…2.5
Flexible cable without cable end mm2 0.75…2.5 0.75…2.5
Flexible cable with cable end mm2 0.75…1.5 0.75…1.5
Tightening torque N.m 1.4 max 1.4 max
Cabling, spring terminals GV AN only

Flexible cable without cable end mm2 0.75…2.5 0.75…2.5 – 0.75…1.5
Operation of instantaneous auxiliary contacts Operation of fault signalling contacts
0 1
Power pole
F
GV AM11
F
Change of state following tripping on
F short-circuit.
O
F
O GV AD10pp and GV AD01pp
Change of state following tripping on
F short-circuit. overload or undervoltage.
F
F
O
F
O
Contact open
Contact closed
(1) For application example of fault signalling contact and short-circuit signalling contact, see page 3/68.
(2) Add an RC circuit type LA4 D to the load terminals, see page 24511/5.
References : Dimensions, schemes :

page 3/53 pages 3/62 to 3/73
3/16
Characteristics 3

GV3 ME
Auxiliary contacts
Type of contacts Instantaneous auxiliary contacts Fault signalling contacts

GV3 A01…A07 GV3 A08 and A09
Conforming to CSA C22-2 n° 14, V 600 (B600) 600 (B600)

UL 508
Conventional rated Conforming to IEC 60947-5-1 A 6 6
Conforming to CSA C22-2 n° 14, A 5 (B600) 5 (B600)
UL 508
Mechanical durability C.O. 100 000 1000
Operational power Rated operational voltage V 48 110 220 380 440 500 690 48 110 220 380 440 500 690
and current (Ue) 127 240 415 127 240 415
conforming to IEC 60947-5-1 Operational power AC-11/100 000 C.O. AC-11/1000 C.O.
a.c. operation
VA 350 500 800 850 700 700 400 240 460 800 850 450 450 200
Occasional breaking and making kVA

capacities
4 12 20 20 15 15 10 2.4 8 12 15 12 12 8 3
Operational current (Ie) A 6 4.5 3.5 2.2 1.5 1.5 0.6 5 3.6 3.5 2.2 1 1 0.3
Operational power Rated operational voltage V 24 48 60 110 220 24 48 60 110 220

and current (Ue)
conforming to IEC 60947-5-1 Operational power DC-11/100 000 C.O. DC-11/1000 C.O.
d.c. operation
W 180 240 180 140 120 120 120 90 70 60
Occasional breaking and W 240 360 240 210 180 180 180 135 105 90
making capacities
Operational current (Ie) A 6 5 3 1.3 0.5 5 2.5 1.5 0.7 0.3
Short-circuit protection By GB2 CB08 circuit-breaker or gG fuse, 6A max
Cabling Number of conductors 1 2
Solid cable mm 2 1…2.5 1…2.5
Flexible cable without cable end mm 2 0.75…2.5 0.75…2.5
Flexible cable with cable end mm 2 0.75…2.5 0.75…1.5
Contact operation GV3 A08 and A09 change state following

0 1 tripping on short-circuit or overload
Power pole
GV3 A01, A07 O

F
F
GV3 A02
F
O
GV3 A03 F
F
F
GV3 A05 F
F
GV3 A06 F
F
Contact open
Contact closed

page 3/55 pages 3/62 to 3/73
3/17
Characteristics 3

GV7
Auxiliary contacts
Auxiliary contact characteristics

Type of contacts GV7 AE11 GV7 AB11
(associated
insulation coordination)
Conventional thermal Conforming to IEC 60947-5-1 A 6 6
current (Ith)
Mechanical durability C.O. 50 000 50 000
Operational current AC-12 or AC-15. 50 000 C.O. AC-12 or AC-15. 50 000 C.O.
conforming to IEC 60947-5-1 Rated operational V 24 48 110 230/ 380/ 440 690 24 48 110 230/ 380/ 440 690
a.c. operation voltage (Ue) 240 415 240 415
Rated operational AC-12 A 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 5 5 5 5 5 5 5
current (Ie)
AC-15 A 6 6 5 4 3 3 0.1 5 5 4 3 2.5 2.5 0.1
Operational current DC-12 or DC-14. 50 000 C.O. DC-12 or DC-14. 50 000 C.O.
3 conforming to IEC 60947-5-1
d.c. operation
Rated operational
voltage (Ue)
V 24 48 110 250 24 48 110 250
Rated operational DC-12 A 2.5 2.5 0.8 0.3 2 2 0.5 –

current (Ie)
DC-14 A 1 0.2 0.5 0.03 0.5 0.1 0.25 –
Minimum operational conditions V 17 12
d.c. operation mA 5 5
Short-circuit protection By GB2 CBpp circuit-breaker

(rating according to operational current for Ue y 415 V) or gG fuse, 10 A max.
Cabling Solid cable mm2 1 x 1.5 conductor 1 x 1.5 conductor
Flexible cable without cable end mm2 1 x 1.5 conductor 1 x 1.5 conductor
Flexible cable with cable end mm2 1 x 1.5 conductor 1 x 1.5 conductor

page 3/57 pages 3/62 to 3/73
3/18
Characteristics 3
Magnetic motor circuit-breakers GK3
Characteristics of Start-Stop and fault signalling contacts

voltage (Ui)
Rated operational Conforming to IEC 60947-1 V 500
voltage (Ue)
Conventional thermal Conforming to IEC 60947-5-1 A 6
current (Ith)
Operational power and current AC-15. 20 000 C.O.
conforming to IEC 60947-5-1 Rated operational voltage (Ue) V 48 110/127 220/240 380/415 440 500
a.c. operation
Operational power VA 360 500 800 850 700 700
Occasional breaking and VA 4000 12 000 20 000 20 000 15 000 15 000

making capacities
Rated operational current (Ie) A 6 4.5 3.5 2.2 1.5 1.5
Operational power and current DC-13. 1000 C.O.

d.c. operation
Rated operational voltage (Ue) V 24 48 60 110 220 3
Operational power W 180 240 180 140 120
Occasional breaking and W 240 280 240 210 180

making capacities
Rated operational current (Ie) A 6 5 3 1.3 0.5
Short-circuit protection Conforming to IEC 60947-5-1 By GB2 CB08 circuit-breaker or gG fuse, 6A max
Cabling Solid cable mm 2 1 x 1…4 conductor
Flexible cable without cable end mm 2 1 x 2.5 conductor
Flexible cable with cable end mm 2 1 x 1…2.5 conductor or 2 x 1…2.5 conductors

page 3/55 pages 3/62 to 3/73
3/19
Characteristics 3

Electric trips
Characteristics of electric trips

Type of circuit-breaker GV2 ME, GV2 P GV3 ME GV7 R
Type of trip GV AU GV AX (1) GV AS GV3 B GV3 D GV7 AU GV7 AS
Rated insulation voltage (Ui) Conforming to IEC 60947-1 V 690 500 690 690 690 690 690
Conforming to CSA C22-2 n° 14, V 600 – 600 600 (B600) 600 (B600) 600 600
UL 508
Operational voltage Conforming to IEC 60947-1 V 0.85…1.1 Un 0.7… 0.8…1.1 Un 0.85… 0.7…
1.1 Un 1.1 Un 1.1 Un
Drop-out voltage V 0.7…0.35 Un 0.75… 0.7…0.35 Un 0.35… 0.2…
0.2 Un 0.7 Ue 0.75 Ue
Inrush consumption a VA 12 14 12 < 10
c W 8 10.5 7 <5
Sealed consumption a VA 3.5 5 7 <5
3 c W 1.1 1.6 2.5 <5
Operating time Conforming to IEC 60947-1 From the moment the voltage reaches its operational value until opening of the
circuit-breaker.
ms 10…15 10 15 < 50
On-load factor 100 % 100 % 100 %
Cabling Number of conductors 1 or 2 1 or 2 1
Solid cable mm2 1…2.5 1…2.5 1.5
Flexible cable without cable end mm2 0.75…2.5 0.75…2.5 1.5
Flexible cable with cable end mm2 0.75…1.5 0.75…2.5 1
Tightening torque N.m 1.4 max 1.2 1.2
Mechanical durability C.O. 100 000 50 % of the mechanical durability of the

(C.O.: Closing - Opening) circuit-breaker
(1) Wiring scheme of undervoltage trip for dangerous machines (conforming to INRS) on GV2 ME
only, see page 3/68.

3/20
Characteristics 3
Thermal-magnetic and magnetic motor

circuit-breakers GV2
Accessories
Characteristics of 3-pole busbars GV2 Gppp

voltage (Ui)
Conventional thermal Conforming to IEC 60439-1 A 63
current (Ith)
Permissible peak current kA 11
( I peak)
Permissible thermal limit kA2 s 104
(I2 t)
Characteristics of terminal blocks GV2 G05 and GV1 G09

voltage (Ui)
Conventional thermal Conforming to IEC 60439-1 A 63
current (Ith)
Cabling Solid cable mm 2 1 x 1.5 to 25 conductor or 2 x 1.5 to 10 conductors

3
Flexible cable without cable end mm 2 1 x 1.5 to 25 conductor or 2 x 2.5 to 10 conductors
Flexible cable with cable end mm 2 1 x 1.5 to 16 conductor or 2 x 1.5 to 4 conductors
Tightening torque Connector N.m 2.2
Screw clamp N.m 1.7
Characteristics of current limiters (GV2 ME and GV2 P)

Type GV1 L3 LA9 LB920
Rated insulation Conforming to IEC 60947-1 V 690 690
voltage (Ui)
Conventional thermal Conforming to IEC 60947-1 A 63 63
current (Ith)
Operating threshold rms current A 1500 (non adjustable threshold) 1000 (non adjustable threshold)
Cabling 1 conductor 2 conductors 1 conductor 2 conductors
Solid cable mm 2 1.5…25 1.5…10 1.5…25 1.5…10
Flexible cable without cable end mm 2 1.5…25 2.5…10 1.5…25 1.5…10
Flexible cable with cable end mm 2 1.5…16 1.5… 4 1.5…16 1.5… 4

3/21
Curves 3

GV2 ME and GV2 P
Thermal-magnetic tripping curves for GV2 ME and GV2 P

Average operating time at 20 °C related to multiples of the setting current:
Time (s)
10 000
1000
100
3
1
10
2
3
0,1
0,01
0,001
1 1,5 10 100
1 3 poles from cold state

3 3 poles from hot state

3/22

GV2 ME and GV2 P
Current limitation on short-circuit for GV2 ME and GV2 P (3-phase 400/415 V)

Dynamic stress
I peak = f (prospective Isc) at 1.05 Ue = 435 V
Limited peak current (kA)

100
.25
=0
3
0.
2
=
3
4
3
5
0.
5
=
10
6
0.7
=
8
7
0.
=
8
9
0.
=
9
5
0.9
=
s
co
10
1
11
0,1
0,1 1 10 15 (12) 100

2 24-32 A
3 20-25 A
4 17-23 A
5 13-18 A
6 9-14 A
7 6-10 A
8 4-6.3 A
9 2.5-4 A
10 1.6-2.5 A
11 1-1.6 A
12 Limit of rated ultimate breaking capacity on short-circuit of GV2 ME (14, 18, 23 and 25 A ratings)

3/23

GV2 ME
Thermal limit on short-circuit for GV2 ME

Thermal limit in kA2s in the magnetic operating zone
Sum of I2dt = f (prospective Isc) at 1.05 Ue = 435 V
Sum of I2dt (kA2s)

100
2
1
3
4
5
3 10
10
0,1
0,01
0,1 1 10 100
1 24-32 A
2 20-25 A
3 17-23 A
4 13-18 A
5 9-14 A
6 6-10 A
7 4-6.3 A
8 2.5-4 A
9 1.6-2.5 A
10 1-1.6 A

3/24

GV2 P
Thermal limit on short-circuit for GV2 P

Sum of I 2dt = f (prospective Isc) at 1.05 Ue = 435 V
Sum of I2dt (kA2s)

100
1
2
3
4
10
3
7
0,1
0,01
0,1 1 10 100
1 24 -32 A
1 20-25 A
2 17-23 A
3 13-18 A
4 9-14 A
5 6-10 A
6 4-6.3 A
7 2.5-4 A
8 1.6-2.5 A
9 1-1.6 A

3/25
Curves 3

GV3 ME
Thermal-magnetic tripping curves

Time (s)
10 000
1000
100
3 3
10
2
4
0,1
0,01
0,001
1 10 100
1 3 poles from cold state, 1.6…16 A rating

2 3 poles from hot state, 1.6…16 A rating
3 3 poles from cold state, 25…80 A rating
4 3 poles from hot state, 25…80 A rating

3/26

GV3 ME
Current limitation on short-circuit (3-phase 400/415 V)

Dynamic stress

100
.25
=0
2
3
3
0.
=
4
3
5
0.
5
=
10 6
0.7
=
7
8
0.
=
8
9
0.
=
1 10
11
0,1
0,1 1 10 15 100

2 56-80 A
3 40-63 A
4 25-40 A
5 16-25 A
6 10-16 A
7 6-10 A
8 4-6 A
9 2.5-4 A
10 1.6-2.5 A
11 1-1.6 A

3/27

GV3 ME
Thermal limit on short-circuit

Sum of I2dt (kA2s)

100
1
2
3
3 4
5
10
6
0,1
0,1 1 10 15 100
1 56 -80 A
2 40-63 A
3 25-40 A
4 16-25 A
5 10-16 A
6 6-10 A
7 4-6 A
8 2.5-4 A
9 1.6-2.5 A

3/28
Curves 3

GV7 R
Thermal-magnetic tripping curves for GV7 R

Time (s)
10 000
5000
2000
1000
500
200
100
50
3
20
10
5
1
2
2
1
0,5
3
0,2
0,1
0,05
0,02
0,01
0,005
0,002
0,001
1 1,12 2 3 4 5 7 10 20 30 40 50 70 100
1 Cold state curve

2 Cold state curve
3 12…14 Ir
In the event of total phase failure, tripping occurs after 4 s ± 20 %

3/29

GV7 R
Current limitation on short-circuit (3-phase 400/415 V)

Dynamic stress
I peak = f (prospective Isc)
For GV7 RE only

1 GV7 RE220
2 GV7 RE150
3 GV7 RE100
100
80
70
60
50
3 40
30
20
1
2
3
10
8
7
6
5
4
2 3 4 5 6 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 100
For GV7 RS only

1 GV7 RS220
2 GV7 RS150
3 GV7 RS100
100
80
70
60
50
40
30
20
1
2
3
10
8
7
6
5
4
2 3 4 5 6 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 100

3/30

GV7 R
Thermal limit (3-phase 400/415 V)

Thermal limit
Sum of I 2dt = f (prospective Isc)
For GV7 RE only
Sum of I2dt (A 2s)

1 GV7 RE220
107 2 GV7 RE150
3 GV7 RE100
6
5x10
3x106
2x106
106
3
1
5
5x10 2
5 3
3x10
2x105
5
10
4
5x10
3x104
4
2x10
2 3 4 5 6 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 100
For GV7 RS only
Sum of I2dt (A 2s) 1 GV7 RS220

107 2 GV7 RS150
3 GV7 RS100
6
5x10
3x106
2x106
106
1
5
5x10 2
5 3
3x10
2x105
105
5x104
3x104
2x104
2 3 4 5 6 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 100

3/31

GV7 R
Current limitation on short-circuit (3-phase 690 V)

Dynamic stress
I peak = f (prospective Isc)
For GV7 RE only

1 GV7 RE220
50 2 GV7 RE150 and GV7 RE100
40
30
3 20
1
2
10
4
2 3 4 5 6 9 10 20
For GV7 RS only
Limited peak current (kA) 1 GV7 RS220

50 2 GV7 RS150 and GV7 RS100
40
30
20
1
2
10
4
2 3 4 5 6 10 20

3/32

GV7 R
Thermal limit on short-circuit (3-phase 690 V)

Thermal stress limit
Sum of I 2dt = f (prospective Isc)
For GV7 RE only
Sum of I2dt (A 2s)

1 GV7 RE220
3x106 2 GV7 RE150 and GV7 RE100
6
2x10
106 3
5 1
5x10
3x105
2x105
105
2 3 4 5 6 8 10 20
For GV7 RS only
Sum of I2dt (A 2s) 1 GV7 RS220

3x106 2 GV7 RS150 and GV7 RS100
2x106
106
1
5x105
3x105
2x105
105
2 3 4 5 6 10 20

3/33
Curves 3

GV2 RT
Thermal-magnetic tripping curves for GV2 RT

Time (s)
10 000
1000
100
3 2
1
10
3
0,1
0,01
0,001
1 10 100
k x Ir


3/34
Curves 3

GV2 L and GV2 LE
Tripping curves for GV2 L or GV2 LE combined with thermal overload relay LRD or LR2 K
Average operating time at 20 °C related to multiples of the setting current
Time (s)
10 000
1000
100
3
1
2
3
10
0,1
0,01
0,001
1 10 100


page 3/50 pages 3/70 to 3/72 page 3/73
3/35

GV2 L and GV2 LE
Current limitation on short-circuit for GV2 L and GV2 LE only (3-phase 400/415 V)
Dynamic stress

100
5
0.2
= 2
3
0.
=
3 3
4
5
0.
5
=
10 6
7
0.
=
7
8
0.
=
9
0.9
10
=
.95
=0
s
co
0,1
0,1 1 10 15 100
11

2 32 A
3 25 A
4 18 A
5 14 A
6 10 A
7 6.3 A
8 4A
9 2.5 A
10 1.6 A
11 Limit of rated ultimate breaking capacity on short-circuit of GV2 LE (14, 18, 23 and 25 A ratings).

3/36

GV2 L and GV2 LE
Current limitation on short-circuit for GV2 L and GV2 LE + thermal overload relay LRD or LR2 K (3-phase 400/415 V)
Dynamic stress

100
.25
=0
2
3
0.
=
3
3
5
4
0.
=
10 5
0.7
=
8
0.
6
=
7
9
0.
=
8
5
0.9
=
s
co
9
1
10
0,1
0,1 1 10 15 100
11

2 32 A
3 25 A
4 18 A
5 14 A
6 10 A
7 6.3 A
8 4A
9 2.5 A
10 1.6 A

3/37

GV2 L and GV2 LE
Thermal limit on short-circuit for GV2 LE only

Sum of I2dt (kA2s)

100
1 2
3
4
3 10
0,1
0,01
0,1 1 10 100
1 32 A
2 25 A
3 18 A
4 14 A
5 10 A
6 6.3 A
7 4A
8 2.5 A
9 1.6 A

3/38

GV2 L and GV2 LE
Thermal limit on short-circuit for GV2 L only

Sum of I2dt (kA2s)

100
1
2
3
4
6
10
3
7
0,1
0,01
0,1 1 10 100
1 25 A and 32 A
2 18 A
3 14 A
4 10 A
5 6.3 A
6 4A
7 2.5 A
8 1.6 A

3/39

GV2 L and GV2 LE
Thermal limit on short-circuit for GV2 L and GV2 LE + thermal overload relay LRD or LR2 K
Sum of I2dt (kA2s)

100
2
1
3
4
3 10
0,1
10
0,01
0,1 1 10 15 100
1 32 A (GV2 LE32)
2 25 A and 32 A (GV2 L32)
3 18 A
4 14 A
5 10 A
6 6.3 A
7 4A
8 2.5 A
9 1.6 A

3/40
Curves 3

GK3
Tripping curves for GK3 combined with thermal overload relay LRD 33
Average operating time at 20 °C without prior current flow
Time (s)
10 000
1000
100
A 3
1
2
3
10
0,1
0,01
0,001
1 10 100

A Thermal overload relay protection zone

B GK3 protection zone

page 3/51 page 3/72 page 2457/5
3/41

GK3
Current limitation on short-circuit for GK3 only (3-phase 400/415 V)

Dynamic stress

100
3
2
10 3
4
0,1
0,1 1 10 100

2 80 A
3 65 A
4 40 A

3/42

GK3
Thermal limit on short-circuit for GK3 only

Thermal limit in A2s
Sum of I2dt (A 2s)

1000
1
2 3
3
100
10
1
0,1 1 10 100
1 80 A
2 65 A
3 40 A

3/43
Presentation 3

GV2, GV3 and GV7
GV2 ME, GV2 P, GV3 ME and GV7 R motor circuit-breakers are 3-pole thermal-
magnetic circuit-breakers specifically designed for the control and protection of
motors, conforming to standards IEC 60947-2 and IEC 60947-4-1
I 1
O
O I
1 Connection
2 2 These circuit-breakers are designed for connection by screw clamp terminals.
4 Circuit-breaker GV2 ME can be supplied with spring terminal connections.
4
These ensure secure, permanent and durable clamping that is resistant to harsh
environments, vibration and impact and is even more effective when conductors
GV3 ME without cable ends are used. Each connection can take two independent conductors.
GV2 ME
Operation
1 Control is manual and local when the motor circuit-breaker is used on its own.
3 O 2 Control is automatic and remote when it is associated with a contactor.
3
3 2
4
1
GV2 ME and GV3 ME
Pushbutton control.
Energisation is controlled manually by operating the Start button “I” 1.
De-energisation is controlled manually by operating the Stop button “O” 2, or
automatically by the thermal-magnetic protection elements or by a voltage trip
GV2 P GV7 R
attachment.
GV2 P
Control by rotary knob.
GV7 R
Control by rocker lever.
533886
533887
Energisation is controlled manually by moving the knob or rocker lever to position “I” 1.
De-energisation is controlled manually by moving the knob or rocker lever to position “O” 2.
De-energisation due to a fault automatically places the knob or rocker lever in the
“Trip” position 3. Re-energisation is possible only after having returned the knob or
rocker switch to position “O”.
Protection of motors and personnel

Motor protection is provided by the thermal-magnetic protection elements
incorporated in the motor circuit-breaker.
GV2 ME
with screw clamp The magnetic elements (short-circuit protection) have a non-adjustable tripping
GV2 ME
connections with spring terminal
threshold, which is equal to about 13 times the maximum setting current of the
connections thermal trips.
The thermal elements (overload protection) include automatic compensation for
ambient temperature variations.
533888
533889
The rated operational current of the motor is displayed by means of a graduated

knob 4.
Personnel protection is also provided. All live parts are protected against direct finger
contact.
The addition of an undervoltage trip allows the circuit-breaker to be de-energised in

the event of an undervoltage condition. The user is therefore protected against
sudden starting of the machine when normal voltage is restored, since the Start
GV2 P
button “I” has to be pressed to restart the motor.
With the addition of a shunt trip, de-energisation of the unit can be remotely
GV3 ME
controlled.
533890
The operators on both open-mounted and enclosed motor circuit-breakers can be

locked in the Stop position “O” by up to 3 padlocks.
Because they are suitable for isolation, these circuit-breakers, in the open position,
provide an adequate isolation distance and indicate the actual position of the moving
contacts by the position of the operators.
Special features
These motor circuit-breakers are easily installed in any configuration thanks to their
GV7 R
universal fixing arrangement: screw fixing or clip-on mounting on symmetrical,
asymmetrical or combination rails.

3/44
References 3

GV2 ME and GV2 P
Thermal magnetic circuit-breakers GV2 ME and GV2 P with screw clamp terminals
533895
GV2 ME: pushbutton control, GV2 P: control by rotary knob

Standard power ratings of 3-phase motors Setting Magnetic Reference Weight
50/60 Hz in category AC-3 range tripping
400/415 V 500 V 690 V of thermal current
trips (2) Id ± 20 %
P Icu Ics (1) P Icu Ics (1) P Icu Ics (1)
kW kA % kW kA % kW kA % A A kg
– – – – – – – – – 0.1…0.16 1.5 GV2 ME01 0.260
or GV2 P01 0.350
GV2 ME 0.06 g g – – – – – – 0.16…0.25 2.4 GV2 ME02 0.260
or GV2 P02 0.350
0.09 g g – – – – – – 0.25…0.40 5 GV2 ME03 0.260
or GV2 P03 0.350
0.12 g g – – – 0.37 g g 0.40…0.63 8 GV2 ME04 0.260
or GV2 P04 0.350
533896
0.18 g g – – – – – – 0.40…0.63 8 GV2 ME04 0.260

or GV2 P04 0.350 3
0.25 g g – – – 0.55 g g 0.63…1 13 GV2 ME05 0.260
or GV2 P05 0.350
0.37 g g 0.37 g g – – – 1…1.6 22.5 GV2 ME06 0.260
or GV2 P06 0.350
0.55 g g 0.55 g g 0.75 g g 1…1.6 22.5 GV2 ME06 0.260
or GV2 P06 0.350
– – – 0.75 g g 1.1 g g 1…1.6 22.5 GV2 ME06 0.260
GV2 P
or GV2 P06 0.350
0.75 g g 1.1 g g 1.5 3 75 1.6…2.5 33.5 GV2 ME07 0.260
0.75 g g 1.1 g g 1.5 8 100 1.6…2.5 33.5 GV2 P07 0.350
1.1 g g 1.5 g g 2.2 3 75 2.5…4 51 GV2 ME08 0.260
1.1 g g 1.5 g g 2.2 8 100 2.5…4 51 GV2 P08 0.350
1.5 g g 2.2 g g 3 3 75 2.5…4 51 GV2 ME08 0.260
1.5 g g 2.2 g g 3 8 100 2.5…4 51 GV2 P08 0.350
2.2 g g 3 50 100 4 3 75 4…6.3 78 GV2 ME10 0.260
2.2 g g 3 g g 4 6 100 4…6.3 78 GV2 P10 0.350
3 g g 4 10 100 5.5 3 75 6…10 138 GV2 ME14 0.260
3 g g 4 50 100 5.5 6 100 6…10 138 GV2 P14 0.350
4 g g 5.5 10 100 7.5 3 75 6…10 138 GV2 ME14 0.260
4 g g 5.5 50 100 7.5 6 100 6…10 138 GV2 P14 0.350
5.5 15 50 7.5 6 75 9 3 75 9…14 170 GV2 ME16 0.260
5.5 g g 7.5 42 75 9 6 100 9…14 170 GV2 P16 0.350
– – – – – – 11 3 75 9…14 170 GV2 ME16 0.260
– – – – – – 11 6 100 9…14 170 GV2 P16 0.350
7.5 15 50 9 6 75 15 3 75 13…18 223 GV2 ME20 0.260
7.5 50 50 9 10 75 15 4 100 13…18 223 GV2 P20 0.350
9 15 40 11 4 75 18.5 3 75 17…23 327 GV2 ME21 0.260
9 50 50 11 10 75 18.5 4 100 17…23 327 GV2 P21 0.350
11 15 40 15 4 75 – – – 20…25 327 GV2 ME22 (3) 0.260
11 50 50 15 10 75 – – – 20…25 327 GV2 P22 0.350
15 10 50 18.5 4 75 22 3 75 24…32 416 GV2 ME32 0.260
15 35 50 18.5 10 75 22 4 100 24…32 416 GV2 P32 0.350
Thermal magnetic circuit-breakers GV2 ME with lugs

To order termal magnetic circuit-breakers with connection by lugs, add the digit 6 to the end of reference selected
above. Example: GV2 ME08 becomes GV2 ME086.
Thermal magnetic circuit-breakers GV2 ME with built-in auxiliary contact block
With instantaneous auxiliary contact block (composition, see page 3/53):
b GV AE1, add suffix AE1TQ to the motor circuit-breaker reference selected above.
Example: GV2 ME01AE1TQ.
b GV AE11, add suffix AE11TQ to the motor circuit-breaker reference selected above.
Example: GV2 ME01AE11TQ.
b GV AN11, add suffix AN11TQ to the motor circuit-breaker reference selected above.
Example: GV2 ME01AN11TQ.
These circuit-breakers with built-in contact block are sold in lots of 20 units in a single pack.
(1) As % of Icu.
(2) For use of GV2 ME in an enclosure, see page 2/10.
(3) Maximum rating which can be mounted in enclosures GV2 MC or MP, please consult your Regional Sales Office.
g > 100 kA.

pages 3/6 to 3/9 pages 3/62 to 3/64 page 3/68
3/45
References 3

GV2 ME
Thermal magnetic circuit-breakers GV2 ME with spring terminal connections

533897
(1)
Pushbutton control
50-60 Hz in category AC-3 range tripping
400/415 V 500 V of thermal current
trips Id ± 20 %
P Icu Ics (2) P Icu Ics (2)
kW kA % kW kA % A A kg
– – – – – – 0.1…0.16 1.5 GV2 ME013 0.280
0.06 g g – – – 0.16…0.25 2.4 GV2 ME023 0.280

GV2 MEpp3
0.09 g g – – – 0.25…0.40 5 GV2 ME033 0.280
0.12 g g – – – 0.40…0.63 8 GV2 ME043 0.280

3 0.18 g g
0.25 g g 0.37 g g 0.63…1 13 GV2 ME053 0.280

0.37 g g
0.37 g g 0.37 g g 1…1.6 22.5 GV2 ME063 0.280

0.55 g g 0.55 g g
0.75 g g
0.75 g g 1.1 g g 1.6…2.5 33.5 GV2 ME073 0.280
1.1 g g 1.5 g g 2.5…4 51 GV2 ME083 0.280

1.5 g g 2.2 g g
2.2 g g 3 50 100 4…6.3 78 GV2 ME103 0.280
3 g g 4 10 100 6…10 138 GV2 ME143 0.280

4 g g 5.5 10 100
5.5 15 50 7.5 6 75 9…14 170 GV2 ME163 0.280
7.5 15 50 9 6 75 13…18 223 GV2 ME203 0.280
9 15 40 11 4 75 17…23 327 GV2 ME213 0.260

11 15 40
11 15 40 15 4 75 20…25 327 GV2 ME223 0.260
Contact blocks
Description Mounting Maximum Type of Sold in Unit Weight
number contacts lots of reference kg
Instantaneous Front 1 N/O + N/C 10 GV AE113 0.030
auxiliary contacts
N/O + N/O 10 GV AE203 0.030
LH side 2 N/O + N/C 1 GV AN113 0.060
N/O + N/O 1 GV AN203 0,060
Accessory
Description Application Sold in Unit Weight
LA9 D99 Cable end reducer For connection of conductors 20 LA9 D99 –
from 1 to 1.5 mm2
(1) For connection of conductors from 1 to 1.5 mm 2, the use of an LA9 D99 cable end reducer is recommended.
(2) As % of Icu.
g > 100 kA.

3/46
References 3

GV3 ME
Thermal magnetic circuit-breakers GV3 ME with screw clamp terminals

533899
Pushbutton control
Standard power ratings of 3-phase motors Setting Reference Weight
400/415 V 500 V 660/690 V of thermal
trips
kW kA % kW kA % kW kA % A kg
0.37 100 100 0.37 100 100 0.75 100 100 1…1.6 GV3 ME06 0.600
0.55 100 100 0.55 100 100 1.1 100 100
0.75 100 100
0.75 100 100 1.1 100 100 1.5 100 100 1.6…2.5 GV3 ME07 0.600
GV3 ME20 1.1 100 100 1.5 100 100 2.2 4 100 2.5…4 GV3 ME08 0.600
1.5 100 100 2.2 100 100 3 4 100
2.2 100 100 3 100 100 4 4 100 4…6 GV3 ME10 0.600
3
3 100 100 4 8 100 5.5 4 100 6…10 GV3 ME14 0.600
4 100 100 5.5 8 100 7.5 4 100
7.5 100 50 9 8 100 9 4 100 10…16 GV3 ME20 0.600

11 4 100
9 100 50 11 8 100 15 4 100 16…25 GV3 ME25 0.600

11 100 50 15 8 100 18.5 4 100
15 35 50 18.5 8 75 22 4 75 25…40 GV3 ME40 (2) 0.700

18.5 35 50 22 8 75 30 4 75
22 35 50 30 8 75 37 4 75 40…63 GV3 ME63 (2) 0.700

30 35 50 37 8 75 45 4 75
37 15 50 45 4 100 55 2 100 56…80 GV3 ME80 (2) 0.700
(1) As % of Icu.
(2) Recommended for use in association with a contactor.

3/47
References 3

GV7 R
Thermal magnetic circuit-breakers GV7 R with screw clamp terminals

533900
Control by rocker lever

Standard power ratings of 3-phase motors Setting Reference Weight
400/415 V 500 V 660/690 V of thermal
trips
kW kA % kW kA % kW kA % A kg
7.5 36 100 9 18 100 11 8 100 12…20 GV7 RE20 2.010
9 36 100 11 18 100 15 8 100
7.5 70 100 9 50 100 11 10 100 12…20 GV7 RS20 2.010

GV7 RE
9 70 100 11 50 100 15 10 100
9 36 100 11 18 100 15 8 100 15…25 GV7 RE25 2.010

11 36 100 15 18 100 18.5 8 100
9 70 100 11 50 100 15 10 100 15…25 GV7 RS25 2.010

3
533901
11 70 100 15 50 100 18.5 10 100
18.5 36 100 18.5 18 100 22 8 100 25…40 GV7 RE40 2.010

22 18 100
18.5 70 100 18.5 50 100 22 10 100 25…40 GV7 RS40 2.010
22 36 100 30 18 100 30 8 100 30…50 GV7 RE50 2.015
22 70 100 30 50 100 30 10 100 30…50 GV7 RS50 2.015

GV7 RS
37 36 100 45 18 100 55 8 100 48…80 GV7 RE80 2.040

55 18 100
37 70 100 45 50 100 55 10 100 48…80 GV7 RS80 2.040

55 50 100
45 36 100 – 18 100 75 8 100 60…100 GV7 RE100 2.040
45 70 100 – 50 100 75 10 100 60…100 GV7 RS100 2.040
55 35 100 75 30 100 90 8 100 90…150 GV7 RE150 2.020

75 35 100 90 30 100 110 8 100
55 70 100 75 50 100 90 10 100 90…150 GV7 RS150 2.020

75 70 100 90 50 100 110 10 100
90 35 100 110 30 100 160 8 100 132…220 GV7 RE220 2.350

110 35 100 132 30 100 200 8 100
160 30 100
90 70 100 110 50 100 160 10 100 132…220 GV7 RS220 2.350
110 70 100 132 50 100 200 10 100
160 50 100
(1) As % of Icu.

3/48
References 3
Thermal-magnetic circuit-breakers
GV2 RT
For motors with high current peak on starting

533902

50-60 Hz in category AC-3 range tripping
220/ 400/ 440 V 500 V 690 V of thermal current
230 V 415 V trips Id ± 20 %
0.06 0.09 0.09 – – 0.25…0.40 8 GV2 RT03 0.350
0.12
GV2 RT – 0.12 0.18 – 0.37 0.40…0.63 13 GV2 RT04 0.350
0.18
0.09 0.25 0.25 0.37 0.55 0.63…1 22 GV2 RT05 0.350
0.12 0.37 0.37
0.18 0.37 0.37 0.37 0.75 1…1.6 33 GV2 RT06 0.350
0.25 0.55 0.55 0.55 1.1
0.75
0.37 0.75 0.75 1.1 1.5 1.6…2.5 51 GV2 RT07 0.350
0.55 1.1
1.1
1.5 1.5 2.2 2.5…4 78 GV2 RT08 0.350
3
0.75 1.5 2.2 3
1.1 2.2 2.2 3 4 4…6.3 138 GV2 RT10 0.350
3
1.5 3 4 4 5.5 6…10 200 GV2 RT14 0.350
2.2 4 5.5 7.5
2.2 5.5 5.5 7.5 9 9…14 280 GV2 RT16 0.350
3 7.5 11
4 7.5 7.5 9 15 13…18 400 GV2 RT20 0.350
9
5.5 9 11 11 18.5 17…23 400 GV2 RT21 0.350
11
For primaries of 3-phase transformers

Standard power ratings Setting range Magnetic Reference Weight
of thermal tripping current
230/240 V 400/415 V 440 V 500 V 690 V trips Id ± 20 %
– – – – – 0.25…0.40 8 GV2 RT03 0.350
– – – – – 0.40…0.63 13 GV2 RT04 0.350
– – 0.63 0.63 1 0.63…1 22 GV2 RT05 0.350
0.4 0.63 1 1 – 1…1.6 33 GV2 RT06 0.350
0.63 1 – 1.6 1.6 1.6…2.5 51 GV2 RT07 0.350

2
1 1.6 1.6 2 2.5 2.5…4 78 GV2 RT08 0.350
2 2 2.5
1.6 2.5 2.5 4 4 4…6.3 138 GV2 RT10 0.350
2 4 5
6.3
2.5 4 5 5 – 6…10 200 GV2 RT14 0.350
5 6.3
4 6.3 6.3 – 10 9…14 280 GV2 RT16 0.350
12.5
5 10 10 10 10 13…18 400 GV2 RT20 0.350
6.3 12.5
Accessory (1)
kg
Padlockable external operator (IP 54) GV2 AP03 0.280
black handle, blue legend plate
(1) Other accessories such as mounting, cabling and marking accessories are identical to those used for GV2 ME motor circuit-
breakers, see page 3/59.

3/49
References 3

GV2 LE and GV2 L
Magnetic circuit-breakers GV2 LE and GV2 L with screw clamp terminals

534101
GV2 LE: control by rocker lever, GV2 L: control by rotary knob

Standard power ratings Magnetic Tripping Use in Reference Weight
of 3-phase motors protection current association
50/60 Hz in category AC-3 rating Id ± 20 % with
400/415 V 500 V 690 V thermal
overload
relay
kW kA kW kA kW kA A A kg
0.06 g g – – – – – – 0.4 5 LR2 K0302 GV2 LE03 0.330
0.09 g g – – – – – – 0.4 5 LR2 K0304 GV2 LE03 0.330
or LRD 03 GV2 L03 0.330
0.12 g g – – – 0.37 g g 0.63 8 LR2 K0304 GV2 LE04 0.330
GV2 LE or LRD 04 GV2 L04 0.330
0.18 g g – – – – – – 0.63 8 LR2 K0305 GV2 LE04 0.330
or LRD 04 GV2 L04 0.330
0.55 g g
3 – – – – – – 1 13
or
LR2 K0305
LRD 05
GV2 LE05
GV2 L05
0.330
0.330
0.25 g g – – – – – – 1 13 LR2 K0306 GV2 LE05 0.330
534102
or LRD 05 GV2 L05 0.330

– – – – – – 0.75 g g 1 13 LR2 K0306 GV2 LE05 0.330
or LRD 06 GV2 L05 0.330
0.37 g g 0.37 g g – – – 1 13 LR2 K0306 GV2 LE05 0.330
or LRD 05 GV2 L05 0.330
0.55 g g 0.55 g g 1.1 g g 1.6 22.5 LR2 K0307 GV2 LE06 0.330
or LRD 06 GV2 L06 0.330
– – – 0.75 g g – – – 1.6 22.5 LR2 K0307 GV2 LE06 0.330
or LRD 06 GV2 L06 0.330
0.75 g g 1.1 g g 1.5 3 75 2.5 33.5 LR2 K0308 GV2 LE07 0.330
GV2 L 0.75 g g 1.1 g g 1.5 4 100 2.5 33.5 LRD 07 GV2 L07 0.330
1.1 g g – – – – – – 2.5 33.5 LR2 K0308 GV2 LE07 0.330
or LRD 08 GV2 L07 0.330
1.5 g g 1.5 g g 3 3 75 4 51 LR2 K0310 GV2 LE08 0.330
1.5 g g 1.5 g g 3 4 100 4 51 LRD 08 GV2 L08 0.330
– – – 2.2 g g – – – 4 51 LR2 K0312 GV2 LE08 0.330
or LRD 08 GV2 L08 0.330
2.2 g g 3 50 100 4 3 75 6.3 78 LR2 K0312 GV2 LE10 0.330
2.2 g g 3 g g 4 4 100 6.3 78 LRD 10 GV2 L10 0.330
3 g g 4 10 100 5.5 3 75 10 138 LR2 K0314 GV2 LE14 0.330
3 g g 4 10 100 5.5 4 100 10 138 LRD 12 GV2 L14 0.330
4 g g 5.5 10 100 – – – 10 138 LR2 K0316 GV2 LE14 0.330
or LRD 14 GV2 L14 0.330
– – – – – – 7.5 3 75 10 138 LRD 14 GV2 LE14 0.330
– – – – – – 7.5 4 100 10 138 LRD 14 GV2 L14 0.330
– – – – – – 9 3 75 14 170 LRD 16 GV2 LE16 0.330
– – – – – – 9 4 100 14 170 LRD 16 GV2 L16 0.330
5.5 15 50 7.5 6 75 11 3 75 14 170 LR2 K0321 GV2 LE16 0.330
5.5 50 50 7.5 10 75 11 4 100 14 170 LRD 16 GV2 L16 0.330
7.5 15 50 9 6 75 15 3 75 18 223 LRD 21 GV2 LE20 0.330
7.5 50 50 9 10 75 15 4 100 18 223 LRD 21 GV2 L20 0.330
9 15 40 11 4 75 18.5 3 75 25 327 LRD 22 GV2 LE22 0.330
9 50 50 11 10 75 18.5 4 100 25 327 LRD 22 GV2 L22 0.330
11 15 40 15 4 75 – – – 25 327 LRD 22 GV2 LE22 0.330
11 50 50 15 10 75 – – – 25 327 LRD 22 GV2 L22 0.330
15 10 50 18.5 4 75 22 3 75 32 416 LRD 32 GV2 LE32 0.330
15 35 50 18.5 10 75 22 4 100 32 416 LRD 32 GV2 L32 0.330
(1) As % of Icu.
g > 100 kA.

3/50
References 3

GK3
Magnetic circuit-breakers GK3 with screw clamp connections

534103
Control by rotary knob

Standard power ratings Associated equipment Circuit-breaker
of 3-phase motors Contactor Thermal Short-circuit
50-60 Hz in category AC-3 minimum overload protection
400/415 V 500 V 690 V size relay
P Icu Ics (1) P Icu Ics (1) P Icu Ics (1) Reference Reference Rating (1) Reference Weight
kW kA kW kA kW kA A kg
15 50 30 18.5 20 30 – – – LC1 D32 LRD 32 40 GK3 EF40 0.710
– – – – – – 22 6 60 LC1 D40 LRD 3353 40 GK3 EF40 0.710

GK3 EF
18.5 50 30 22 20 30 30 6 60 LC1 D40 LRD 3355 40 GK3 EF40 0.710
22 35 25 30 15 30 – – – LC1 D50 LRD 3357 65 GK3 EF65 0.790

3
– – – – – – 37 6 50 LC1 D65 LRD 3357 65 GK3 EF65 0.790
30 35 25 37 15 30 – – – LC1 D65 LRD 3359 65 GK3 EF65 0.790
30 35 25 37 15 30 – – – LC1 D65 LRD 3361 65 GK3 EF65 0.790
– – – – – – 45 6 50 LC1 D80 LRD 3359 65 GK3 EF65 0.790
37 35 25 45 15 30 – – – LC1 D80 LRD 3361 80 GK3 EF80 0.795
37 35 25 55 15 30 – – – LC1 D80 LRD 3363 80 GK3 EF80 0.795
(1) Associated current limiter or fuses, where required. See characteristics page 3/15.

3/51
3
3
GV1 L3
GV2 AK00
3 GV AX
GV2 ME
GV AD
GV AM11
GV AU
GV2 P
GV AM11
GV AS
GV2 L
GV AE11, AE20
GV AN
GV AN
GV AE1
GV2 LE GV AE1
3/52
References 3
Thermal-magnetic and magnetic motor circuit-

breakers GV2 with screw clamp connections
Accessories
Contact blocks
Description Mounting Maximum Type of Sold in Unit Weight
number contacts lots of reference kg
Instantaneous Front (1) 1 N/O or N/C (2) 10 GV AE1 0.015
auxiliary contacts N/O + N/C 10 GV AE11 0.020
N/O + N/O 10 GV AE20 0.020
Side (LH) 2 N/O + N/C 1 GV AN11 0.050
N/O + N/O 1 GV AN20 0.050
Fault signalling contact + Side (3) 1 N/O (fault) + N/O 1 GV AD1010 0.055
instantaneous (LH) + N/C 1 GV AD1001 0.055
auxiliary contact
N/C (fault) + N/O 1 GV AD0110 0.055
+ N/C 1 GV AD0101 0.055
Short-circuit Side 1 C/O common point 1 GV AM11 0.045
signalling contact (LH)
Electric trips
Mounting Voltage Reference Weight
kg
3
Undervoltage or shunt trips (4)
Side 24 V 50 Hz GV Ap025 0.105
(1 block on RH side 60 Hz GV Ap026 0.105
of circuit-breaker)
48 V 50 Hz GV Ap055 0.105
60 Hz GV Ap056 0.105
100 V 50 Hz GV Ap107 0.105
100…110 V 60 Hz GV Ap107 0.105
110…115 V 50 Hz GV Ap115 0.105
60 Hz GV Ap116 0.105
120…127 V 50 Hz GV Ap125 0.105
127 V 60 Hz GV Ap115 0.105
200 V 50 Hz GV Ap207 0.105
200…220 V 60 Hz GV Ap207 0.105
220…240 V 50 Hz GV Ap225 0.105
60 Hz GV Ap226 0.105
380…400 V 50 Hz GV Ap385 0.105
60 Hz GV Ap386 0.105
415…440 V 50 Hz GV Ap415 0.105
415 V 60 Hz GV Ap416 0.105
440 V 60 Hz GV Ap385 0.105
480 V 60 Hz GV Ap415 0.105
500 V 50 Hz GV Ap505 0.105
600 V 60 Hz GV Ap505 0.105
Undervoltage trip, INRS (can only be mounted on GV2 ME)

Safety device for dangerous machines conforming to INRS and VDE 0113
Side 110…115 V 50 Hz GV AX115 0.110
(1 block on RH side 60 Hz GV AX116 0.110
of circuit-breaker GV2 ME)
127 V 60 Hz GV AX115 0.110
220…240 V 50 Hz GV AX225 0.110
60 Hz GV AX226 0.110
380…400 V 50 Hz GV AX385 0.110
60 Hz GV AX386 0.110
415…440 V 50 Hz GV AX415 0.110
440 V 60 Hz GV AX385 0.110

Description Mounting Maximum Reference Weight
number kg
Visible isolation block (5) Front (1) 1 GV2 AK00 0.150
Limiters At top 1 GV1 L3 0.130
(GV2 ME and GV2 P)
Independent 1 LA9 LB920 0.320
(1) Mounting of a GV AE contact block or a GV2 AK00 visible isolation block on GV2 P and GV2 L
(2) Choice of N/C or N/O contact operation, depending on which way round the reversible block is mounted.
(3) The GV AD is always mounted next to the circuit-breaker.
(4) To order an undervoltage trip: replace the dot (p) in the reference with a U, example: GV AU025.
LA9 LB920 To order a shunt trip: replace the dot (p) in the reference with an S, example: GV AS025.
(5) Visible isolation of the 3 poles upstream of circuit-breaker GV2 P and GV2 L.
Characteristics : Dimensions, schemes :

pages 3/16, 3/20 and 3/21 pages 3/62 to 3/73
3/53
3
3
GV3 A01...A07
GV3 A08
GV3 A09
3/54
References 3
Motor circuit-breakers, thermal-magnetic

GV3 ME and magnetic GK3
with screw clamp connections
Accessories
For thermal-magnetic motor circuit-breakers GV3 ME

Contact blocks
Description Type of standard Reference Weight
early break contacts kg
Instantaneous auxiliary N/C + N/O GV3 A01 0.060
contact blocks N/O + N/O GV3 A02 0.060
(1 per circuit-breaker)
N/C + N/O + N/O GV3 A03 0.070
N/O + N/O + N/O GV3 A05 0.070
N/O + N/O + 2 volt-free terminals GV3 A06 0.070
N/C + N/O + 2 volt-free terminals GV3 A07 0.070
Fault signalling contacts (1) N/C GV3 A08 0.030

N/O GV3 A09 0.030
Electric trips
Description Voltages Reference Weight
50 Hz 60 Hz kg 3
Udervoltage trips (1) 110, 120, 127 V 120, 127 V GV3 B11 0.070
220, 240 V 277 V GV3 B22 0.070
380, 415 V 440 V, 480 V GV3 B38 0.070
Shunt trips (1) 110, 120, 127 V 120, 127 V GV3 D11 0.070
220, 240 V 277 V GV3 D22 0.070
380, 415 V 440 V, 480 V GV3 D38 0.070
Accessory
Padlocking device, for locking the start button 5 GV1 V02 0.010
(on open-mounted product)
For magnetic circuit-breakers GK3

Contact blocks
Description Composition Reference Weight
kg
Auxiliary contact blocks for On-Off signalling N/O GK2 AX10 0.025
and “control circuit test” function N/O + N/O GK2 AX20 0.031
(1 or 2 blocks per device)
N/C + N/O GK2 AX50 0.031
mounted on RH side of GK3 EF
Instantaneous fault signalling contact blocks N/O GK2 AX12 0.025

(1 or 2 blocks per device) N/O + N/O GK2 AX22 0.031
mounted on LH side of GK3 EF
N/C + N/O GK2 AX52 0.031
Accessories
kg
Padlocking device for padlocking the operator, using up to 3 padlocks GK3 AV01 0.020
(padlocks not supplied)
External operator for mounting on the enclosure door. GK3 AP03 0.300
Red Ø 40 pushbutton on yellow plate. Can be locked in position "O" by means of up to
3 padlocks, with door locked in position "I" and door locked in position "O" when padlocked.
(1) 1 voltage trip OR 1 fault signalling contact to be fitted inside the motor circuit-breaker.
Other versions 24 to 690 V, 50 or 60 Hz voltage trips for circuit-breakers GV3 ME.

Characteristics : Dimensions, schemes :

3/55
3
3
4
3
3 1
2
GV7 AE11, AB11
GV7 RE, RS
GV7 AU, AS
3/56
References 3

GV7 R with screw clamp connections
Accessories
Add-on auxiliary contacts

They allow remote indication of the circuit-breaker contact states. They can be used for signalling, electrical
locking, relaying, etc. Two versions are available: standard and low level. They include a terminal block and the
auxiliary circuits leave the circuit-breaker through a hole provided for this purpose.
They perform the following functions, depending on where they are located in the circuit-breaker:
Location Function Application

1 and/or 4 C/O contact Indicates the position of the circuit-breaker poles
2 Trip indication Indicates that the circuit-breaker has tripped due to an
overload, a short-circuit, a differential fault or the operation of a
voltage trip (undervoltage or shunt trip) or of the “push to trip”
test button. It resets when the circuit-breaker is reset.
3 Electrical fault indication Indicates that the circuit-breaker has tripped due to an
overload, a short-circuit or a differential fault. It resets when the
circuit-breaker is reset.
Type Reference Weight
Standard GV7 AE11

kg
0.015
3
Low level GV7 AB11 0.015
Fault discrimination devices

They make it possible to:
b either differentiate a thermal fault from a magnetic fault,
b or open the contactor only in the event of a thermal fault.
Voltage Reference Weight

kg
a 24...48 and c 24…72 V GV7 AD111 (1) 0.100
z 110…240 V GV7 AD112 (1) 0.100
Electric trips
These allow the circuit-breaker to be tripped via an electrical control signal.
b Undervoltage trip GV7 AU

v Trips the circuit-breaker when the control voltage drops below the tripping threshold, which is between 0.35 and
0.7 times the rated voltage.
v Circuit-breaker closing is only possible if the voltage exceeds 0.85 times the rated voltage.
Circuit-breaker tripping by a GV7 AU trip meets the requirements of IEC 60947-2.
b Shunt trip GV7 AS

Trips the circuit-breaker when the control voltage rises above 0.7 times the rated voltage.
b Operation (GV7 AU or GV7 AS)

v When the circuit-breaker has been tripped by a GV7 AU or AS, it must be reset either locally or by remote
control. (For remote control, please consult your Regional Sales Office).
v Tripping has priority over manual closing: if a tripping instruction is present, manual action does not result in
closing, even temporarily, of the contacts.
v Durability: 50 % of the mechanical durability of the circuit-breaker.
Type Voltage Reference Weight

kg
Undervoltage trip 48 V, 50/60 Hz GV7 AU055 (1) 0.105
110…130 V, 50/60 Hz GV7 AU107 (1) 0.110
200…240 V, 50/60 Hz GV7 AU207 (1) 0.110
380…440 V, 50/60 Hz GV7 AU387 (1) 0.105
525 V, 50 Hz GV7 AU525 (1) 0.100
Shunt trip 48 V, 50/60 Hz GV7 AS055 (1) 0.105

110…130 V, 50/60 Hz GV7 AS107 (1) 0.110
200…240 V, 50/60 Hz GV7 AS207 (1) 0.110
380…440 V, 50/60 Hz GV7 AS387 (1) 0.105
525 V, 50 Hz GV7 AS525 (1) 0.100
(1) For mounting of a GV7 AD or a GV7 AU or AS.

pages 3/16, 3/20 and 3/21 pages 3/65 to 3/67 page 3/69
3/57
3
3
.
TRIP
T
RESE
3/58
References 3
Thermal-magnetic and magnetic

motor circuit-breakers GV2
with screw clamp connections
Accessories
Accessories
Adapter plates For mounting a GV2 ME or 10 GV2 AF02 0.021
GV2 LE by screw fixing
For mounting a GV2 ME or GV2 P 1 LAD 311 0.040
and contactor LC1 D09…D38
with front faces aligned
Height compensation plate 7.5 mm 10 GV1 F03 0.003
Combination blocks Between GV2 and contactor 10 GV2 AF01 0.020

LC1 K or LP1 K
Between GV2 and contactor 10 GV2 AF3 0.016
LC1 D09…D38
Between GV2 mounted on LAD 311 10 GV2 AF4 0.016
and contactor LC1 D09…D38 3
Motor starter adapter plate With 3-pole connection for mounting a GV2 1 GK2 AF01 0.120
and a contactor LC1 D09…D25
Description Application Pitch Reference Weight

mm kg
Sets of 3-pole busbars 2 tap-offs 45 GV2 G245 0.036
63 A 54 GV2 G254 0.038
72 GV2 G272 0.042
3 tap-offs 45 GV2 G345 0.058
54 GV2 G354 0.060
4 tap-offs 45 GV2 G445 0.077
54 GV2 G454 0.085
72 GV2 G472 0.094
5 tap-offs 54 GV2 G554 0.100

Protective end cover For unused busbar outlets 5 GV1 G10 0.005
Terminal block Connection from the top 1 GV1 G09 0.040

for supply to one or more Can be fitted with current limiter GV1 L3 1 GV2 G05 0.115
GV2 G busbar sets (GV2 ME and GV2 P)
Cover for terminal block For mounting in modular panels 10 LA9 E07 0.005
Flexible 3-pole connection Centre distance between mounting rails: 10 GV1 G02 0.013
for connecting a GV2 to a 100…120 mm
contactor LC1-D09…D25
Set of connections For connecting GV2 ME to a printed circuit board 10 GV2 GA01 0.045
upstream/downstream
Clip-in marker holders For GV2 P, GV2 L, GV2 LE 100 LA9 D92 0.001
(supplied with and GV2 RT (8 x 22 mm)
each circuit-breaker)
Padlockable external operators

kg
For GV2 P and GV2 L Padlocking in “On” and “Off” position GV2 AP01 0.200
(150 to 290 mm) Black handle, blue legend plate, IP 54
Padlocking in “Off” position GV2 AP02 0.200
Red handle, yellow legend plate, IP 54
For GV2 LE Padlocking in “On” and “Off” position GV2 AP03 0.280
Black handle, blue legend plate, IP 54
Padlocking device
kg
For all GV2 devices For use with up to 4 padlocks (not supplied), GV2 V03 0.092
Ø 6 mm shank max.
Dimensions :
pages 3/62 to 3/72
3/59
3
3
ON
O
ON OFF
GV7 AP04
O
OFF
ON
GV7 AP01, AP02
3 GV7 RE, RS O
OFF
ON
GV7 AP03
ON
O
OFF
ON
O
OFF
O
OFF
GV7 AP05
GV7 AC04
GV7 AC01
GV7 V01
GV7 RE, RS GV7 AC04
GV7 AC03 GV7 AC01
3/60
References 3

GV7 R with screw clamp connections
Accessories
Cabling accessories
Description Application For Sold in Unit Weight
contactor lots of reference
kg
Clip-on connectors Up to 150 A, 1.5…95 mm2 – 3 GV7 AC021 0.300
for GV7 R
Up to 220 A, 1.5…185 mm2 – 3 GV7 AC022 0.350
Spreader To increase the pitch to 45 mm – 1 GV7 AC03 0.180

3-pole (1)
Terminal shields Supplied with – 1 GV7 AC01 0.125

IP 405 (1) sealing accessory
Phase barriers Safety accessories used when – 2 GV7 AC04 0.075

fitting of shields is impossible
Insulating screens Ensure insulation between the – 2 GV7 AC05 0.075
connections and the backplate
Kit for combination Allowing link between the LC1 F115…F185 1 GV7 AC06 0.550 3
with contactor (2) circuit-breaker and the contactor.
The cover provides protection LC1 F225 and F265 1 GV7 AC07 0.550
against direct finger contact.
LC1 D115 and 1 GV7 AC08 0.550
D150
Direct rotary handle
Replaces the circuit-breaker front cover; secured by screws. It includes a device for locking the circuit-breaker in
the "O" (Off) position by means of up to 3 padlocks with a shank diameter of 5 to 8 mm (padlocks not supplied). A
conversion accessory allows the direct rotary handle to be mounted on the enclosure door. In this case, the door
cannot be opened if the circuit-breaker is in the “ON” position. Circuit-breaker closing is inhibited if the enclosure
door is open.
Description Type Degree of protection Reference Weight

kg
Direct rotary handle Black handle, black legend plate IP 40 GV7 AP03 0.205
Red handle, yellow legend plate IP 40 GV7 AP04 0.205
Adapter plate (3) Four mounting direct rotary IP 43 GV7 AP05 0.100
handle on enclosure door
Extended rotary handle

Allows a circuit-breaker installed in the back of an enclosure to be operated from the front of the enclosure.
It comprises:
b a unit which replaces the circuit-breaker front cover; secured by screws,
b an assembly (handle and front plate) to be fitted on the enclosure door,
b an extension shaft which must be adjusted (distance between the mounting surface and the door: 185 mm
minimum, 600 mm maximum). It includes a device for locking the circuit-breaker in the "O" (Off) position by means
of up to 3 padlocks with a shank diameter of 5 to 8 mm (padlocks not supplied). This prevents the enclosure door
from being opened.
Description Type Degree of protection Reference Weight

kg
Extended rotary handle Black handle, black legend plate IP 55 GV7 AP01 0.775
Red handle, yellow legend plate IP 55 GV7 AP02 0.775
Locking device
Allows circuit-breakers not fitted with a rotary handle to be locked in the "O" (Off) position by means of up to 3
padlocks with a shank diameter of 5 to 8 mm (padlocks not supplied).

kg
Locking device For circuit-breaker not fitted with a rotary handle GV7 V01 0.100
(1) Terminal shields cannot be used together with spreaders.

(2) The kit comprises links, a protective shield and a depth adjustable metal bracket for the breaker.
(3) This conversion accessory makes it impossible to open the door if the device is closed and prevents the device from being
closed if the door is open.
pages 3/65 to 3/67 page 3/69
3/61
Dimensions, TeSys protection components 3
mounting 3
GV2 ME and GV2 P
GV2 ME GV AX GV AD, AM, AN, AU, GV AE

AS, AX
Block GV AD, AM, AN

11 67,2 15
X1
Block GV AU, AS, AX
10
=
45
b
46 44,5 16 9,3 9,3 18

X1
15,7 81(1)
3 GV2 MEpp
GV2 MEpp3
89
101
(1) Maximum
X1 Electrical clearance = 40 mm for Ue y 690 V
GV2 P GV AD, AM, AN, AU, AS GV2 AK00
Block GV AD, AM, AN 14 98

X1
Block GV AU, AS
32
=
89
45
61
=
26 50 44,5 9,3 9,3 18

X2
15 82 81(1) 44,5
(1) Maximum
X1 Electrical clearance = 40 mm for Ue y 415 V, or 80 mm for Ue = 440 V,
or 120 mm for Ue = 500 and 690 V
X2 = 40 mm
Mounting of GV2 ME
On 35 mm 5 rail On panel with adapter AM1 PA On pre-slotted mounting On mounting rails DZ5
plate GV2 AF02 plate MB201
4,2 AF1 EA4 15 35

=
50/60
50/60
50
60
=
35
c 80
35 DZ5 ME8
c = 78.5 on AM1 DP200 (35 x 7.5) GV2 AF02 DZ5 MB201
c = 86 on AM1 DE200, ED200 (35 x 15)
Mounting of GV2 P
On rail AM1 DE200, On panel On pre-slotted mounting Adapter plate GK2 AF01
ED200 (35 x 15) plate AM1 PA
AF1 EA4
5
35
55
105 ±5
44,5
135
45
84
84
45
44,5
35
106 13,5 13,5 24 9,5 54
Characteristics : References : Schemes :

3/62
mounting (continued) 3
GV2 ME and GV2 P
GV2 AF01 GV2 AF3

Combination GV2 ME + k contactor Combination GV2 ME + TeSys d contactor Combination GV2 P + TeSys d contactor
152
b
b
79 45
c1 45 c1 45
c
c
d1
3
d
GV2 ME + LC1 D09…D18 LC1 D25 & D32 GV2 P + LC1 D09…D18 LC1 D25 & D32
b 176.4 186.8 b 177.4 187.8
c1 88.65 94.95 c1 88.6 94.95
c 94.15 100.45 c 94.1 100.45
d1 91 91
d 96.8 96.8
GV2 AF4 + LAD 31 GV2 ME + GV1 L3 (current limiter)
Combination GV2 ME + TeSys d contactor Combination GV2 P + TeSys d contactor
X1
40
129
b
b
45
89
X1
77 44,5
c1 45 c1 45 X1 = 10 mm for Ue = 230 V
c c or 30 mm for 230 V < Ue y 690 V
d1
7.5 mm height compensation plate
GV1 F03
d
39
GV2-ME + LC2 D09…D18 LC2 D25 and D32 GV2 P + LC2 D09…D18 LC2 D25 & D32
b 188.6 199 b 169.1 199.5
c1 92.7 99 c1 116.8 116.8 13 35
c 98.2 104.5 c 122.3 122.3
d1 98.3 98.3
d 103.8 103.8
Mounting of external operator GV2 AP01 or GV2 AP02 for GV2 P
Door cut-out
=
7
54
65
= =
1,5...5 54
53 135…284 5,2
= =

3/63
GV2 ME, GV2 P, GV2 RT
Sets of busbars GV2 G445, GV2 G454, GV2 G472, with terminal block GV2 G05
a l p
3 l p GV2 G445 (4 x 45 mm) 179 45
GV2 G454 (4 x 54 mm) 206 54
GV2 G472 (4 x 72 mm) 260 72
18
63
a
Number of tap-offs 5 6 7 8
GV2 G445 224 269 314 359
GV2 G454 260 314 368 422
45 GV2 G472 332 404 476 548
Sets of busbars GV2 Gppp with terminal block GV1 G09 Sets of busbars GV2 G245, GV2 G254, GV2 G272
GV1 G09 l l
3 GV2 G245 (2 x 45 mm) 89
30
GV2 G254 (2 x 54 mm) 98

GV2 G272 (2 x 72 mm) 116
Sets of busbars GV2 G554 Sets of busbars GV2 G345 and GV2 G354
260 l l
GV2 G345 (3 x 45 mm) 134
GV2 G354 (3 x 54 mm) 152
Dimensions of GV2 RT Mounting of external operator GV2 AP03
12,5 66 12,3
X1
13
65
89
45
=
X1
7,5 16 44 44,5 1,5...5

53 133…282 6 = =
X1 Electrical clearance = 40 mm for Ue < 690 V

Mounting of GV2 RT
On 35 mm 7 rail On panel with adapter On pre-slotted mounting On mounting rails DZ5 MB
plate GV2 AF02 plate AM1 PA
4,2 AF1 EA4 15 35

44,5
50/60
50/60
50
60
44,5
35
c 84,5
35 DZ5 ME8
c = 80 on AM1 DP200 (35 x 7.5) GV2 AF02 DZ5 MB201
c = 88 on AM1 DE200, ED200 (35 x 15)

pages 3/6 to 3/21 pages 3/49 and 3/59 page 3/68
3/64
mounting 3
GV3 ME and GV7 R
Motor circuit-breakers GV3 ME Mounting on rail AM1 DE200 or AM1 ED201
4,5
17,3
X1
(1)
100…110
120
22 77,5 5,5 70,4 122,5

X1
113
X1 Electrical clearance (ISC max) (1) Block GV3 A01…A07

40 mm for Ue < 500 V, 50 mm for Ue < 690 V
Mounting
On panel On pre-slotted mounting plate AM1 PA
3
=
100…110
100…110
=
113 20 20 21,2
113 20 AF1 EA4
61,2
Motor circuit-breakers GV7 R Motor circuit-breakers with terminal shields or phase barriers
GV7 R + GV7 AC01 or AC04
35
=
= =
=
=
=
=
=
357
321
161
161
125
=
=
=
=
=
81 = =
=
86 105 (2)
111 (1) 81 (3)
(1) 126 for GV7 Rp220 (3) Terminal shields: GV7 AC01
(2) Phase barriers: GV7 AC04
Combination of GV7 R and LC1 F with kit GV7 AC0p Minimum electrical clearance
c a a b c
x2
GV7 R + LC1 F115 or 119 334 181

F150 + GV7 AC06
GV7 R + LC1 F185 + 119 338 188
GV7 AC06 x1 x1
GV7 R + LC1 F225 + 131 358 188
GV7 AC07
GV7 R + LC1 F265 + 131 364 215
GV7 AC07
Minimum distance between 2 circuit-breakers
x2
mounted side-by-side = 0
b
x1 x2
Painted or 0 30
insulated metal plate,
insulation or insulated bar
Bare U y 440 V 5 35
metal 440 V < U < 600 V 10 35
plate
U u 600 V 20 35

3/65
Mounting 3

GV7 R
Panel mounting Mounting on 2 mounting rails DZ5 MB201
DZ5 ME5
=
125
135
125
=
35 35 35 15 35
Flush-mounting
3 1 circuit-breaker GV7 R n circuit-breakers GV7 R
side-by-side
47
=
76
108
108
29
=
88 == 83 = =
29 108
Combination of GV7 R and LC1 F with kit GV7 AC0p
G
H
E
E G H
GV7 R+ LC1 F115 + GV7 AC06 44 85 120
GV7 R+ LC1 F150 + GV7 AC06 46 85 120
GV7 R+ LC1 F165 + GV7 AC06 48 85 120
GV7 R+ LC1 F225 + GV7 AC07 57 85 120
GV7 R+ LC1 F265 + GV7 AC07 60 85 120

3/66
GV7
Spreaders GV7 AC03 Cabling

Smooth terminals Connectors
114 Z
45 45 a
10,5
Z Z
19
41
30
70
70
X X
a
GV7 Rp40…Rp150 19.5
GV7 Rp220 21.5
Direct rotary handle GV7 AP03, GV7 AP04

Flush-mounting
3
47
45
73
76
29
28
121 55 36 89 = =
155 91 97
Direct rotary handle GV7 AP03 or GV7 AP04 with conversion accessory GV7 AP05
Front face cut-out Enclosure viewed from top
e 9,25
h
=
59
120
100
9
41
Door cut-outs require a minimum distance between the centre

of the circuit-breaker and the door hinge point ∆ u 100 + (h x 5).
125 ±2 69 51 = =
120 100
e = 1 to 3 max
Extended rotary handle GV7 AP01, GV7 AP02
9,25
60
I
=
75
9
=
60
l = =
75
l: 185 min, 600 max

The shaft of the extended rotary handle GV7 AP01 or GV7 AP022 must be cut to length: l – 126 mm.

3/67
Schemes 3

GV2 ME, GV2 P and GV2 RT
GV2 MEpp and GV2 RT GV2 Ppp

1/L1
3/L2
5/L3
1/L1
3/L2
5/L3
2/T1
4/T2
6/T3
2/T1
4/T2
6/T3
Current limiter Front mounting add-on contact blocks
GV1 L3 GV AE1 GV AE11 GV AE20
3 or
1/L1
3/L2
5/L3
11
21
13
13
13
23
12
14
22
14
14
24
Side mounting add-on contact blocks
Instantaneous auxiliary contacts and fault signalling contacts
GV AD0110 GV AD0101 GV AD1010 GV AD1001
53
95
95
51
97
51
97
53
98
52
96
96
52
54
98
54
Instantaneous auxiliary contacts Short-circuit signalling contacts

GV AN11 GV AN20 GV AM11
(61)
(73)
(63)
(73)
31
43
08
06
33
43
(74)
(62)
(74)
(64)
44
32
05
44
34
Voltage trips
GV AUppp GV ASppp GV AXppp
D1
D2
D1
C1
D2
C2
E1
E2
Use of fault signalling contact and Connection of undervoltage trip for dangerous machines
short-circuit signalling contact (conforming to INRS) on GV2 ME only
GV AM11 GV AD10pp 10Agl max

1/L1
3/L2
5/L3
D1
D2
Short-circuit
signalling
Trip signalling E2
N/C or N/O
Start-Stop contact
2/T1
4/T2
6/T3
E1
Characteristics : References : Dimensions :

3/68
Schemes 3

GV3 ME and GV7 R
Motor circuit-breakers Auxiliary contact blocks

GV3 ME GV3 A01 GV3 A02 GV3 A03 GV3 A05 GV3 A06 GV3 A07
23
31
13
21
13
23
13
23
31
13
23
33
13
23
33
13
1/L1
3/L2
5/L3
24
32
14
22
14
24
14
24
32
14
24
34
14
24
34
14
6/T3
2/T1
4/T2
Fault signalling contacts Voltage trips

GV3 A08 GV3 A09 GV3 B GV3 D
3
D1
C1
97
95
U
D2
C2
98
96
Motor circuit-breakers Add-on auxiliary contacts according to their location (1)

GV7 R GV7 AE11, GV7 AB11
Location 1 Location 2 Location 3 Location 4
1/L1
3/L2
5/L3
C/O contact Trip indication Electrical fault C/O contact

indication
14
12
94
92
84
82
24
22
11
91
81
21
6/T3
2/T1
4/T2
A self-adhesive label, supplied with the contact, can be affixed to the front face of the circuit-
breaker to allow personalised marking according to the function of the contact or contacts.
(1) See pages 3/18 and 3/57.
Electric trips
GV7 AUppp GV7 ASppp GV7 AD111, AD112
D1
C1
97
50 ms
D4
C2
98
Recommended application schemes GV7 AD111, AD112

Fault indication Contactor opening on overload
97
97
50 ms 50 ms Reset
13
– KA1
14
98
98
21
23
Reset – KA1
A1 22
24
A1
B1
– KA1 Overload fault – KA1 – KM1

A2
A2
Associated components Associated components

KA1: CA2 KN or CAD N KA1: CAD N + LA6 DK10 or RHK
KM1: LC1 D or LC1 F

3/69
mounting 3
GV2 L and GV2 LE
GV2 L GV AD, AM, AN, AU, AS GV2 AK00
Block GV AD, AM, AN 14 98

Block GV AU, AS
X1
32
=
89
45
61
=
26 50 44,5 9,3 9,3 18

X2
15 82 81 (1) 44,5
X1 Electrical clearance = 40 mm for Ue y 415 V, or 80 mm (1) Maximum

for Ue = 440 V, or 120 mm for Ue = 500 and 690 V.
3 X2 = 40 mm.
Mounting of GV2 L Adapter plate GK2 AF01
On rail AM1 DE200, On panel On pre-slotted mounting
AM1 ED200 (35 x 15) plate AM1 PA
AF1 EA4
35
5
Ø5,5
55
105±5
44,5
135
45
84
84
45
44,5
35
106 13,5 13,5 24 9,5 54
7.5 mm height compensation plate GV1 F03

39
13 35
GV2 LE GV AD, AM, AN, AU, AS GV AE
Block GV AD, AM, AN

15
X1
Block GV AU, AS
10
=
89
45
=
7,5 16 44 44,5 9,3 9,3 18

X1
12,5 66 81 (1)
X1 Electrical clearance = 40 mm for Ue y 690 V. (1) Maximum

Mounting of GV2 LE
On 35 mm 7 rail On panel with adapter plate GV2 AF02 On pre-slotted plate AM1 PA On rails DZ5 MB201
AF1 EA4 15 35
44,5
50/60
44,5
50/60
50
60
4,2
c 84,5
35
35 DZ5 ME8
c = 80 on AM1 DP200
(35 x 7.5) and 88 on GV2 AF02 DZ5 MB201
AM1 DE200, ED200 (35 x 15)

3/70
GV2 L and GV2 LE
Mounting of external operator GV2 AP01 or GV2 AP02 for GV2 L
7
65
1,5...5
53 135…284 6 5,2
= =
Mounting of external operator GV2 AP03 for GV2 LE
12,3
3
13
65
1,5...5
53 133…282 6 = =
Door cut-out
4xØ3,5 Ø43
=
54
=
= =
54
Sets of busbars GV2 G445, GV2 G454, GV2 G472, with terminal block GV2 G05
a
3 l p
18
63
45
l p
GV2 G445 (4 x 45 mm) 179 45
GV2 G454 (4 x 54 mm) 206 54
GV2 G472 (4 x 72 mm) 260 72
a
Number of tap-offs 5 6 7 8
GV2 G445 224 269 314 359
GV2 G454 260 314 368 422
GV2 G472 332 404 476 548

3/71
mounting 3
GV2 L, GV2 LE and GK3
Sets of busbars GV2 Gppp with terminal block GV1 G09 Sets of busbars GV2 G245, GV2 G254, GV2 GR272
GV1 G09 l
30
l
GV2 G245 (2 x 45 mm) 89
GV2 G254 (2 x 54 mm) 98
GV2 G272 (2 x 72 mm) 116
Set of busbars GV2 G554 Sets of busbars GV2 G345 and GV2 G354
260 l
3
l
GV2 G345 (3 x 45 mm) 134
GV2 G354 (3 x 54 mm) 152
GK3 EF GK3 EF + 4 GK2 AX
105 38 28
X1
=
120
80
45
Number of GK2 AX
=
0 1 2 3 4
a 66 74.8 83.5 92.5 101
X1
15 70 4,5 a
X1 Electrical clearance, 40 mm for Ue y 690 V.

Mounting
On mounting rail AM1 EDpp or AM1 Dpppp On panel
=
105
4xØ4,5
=
115,5 115,5 = 20 =
Mounting of external operator GK3 AP03 Door cut-out
4xØ3,5 Ø43
65
120
=
54
=
1,5…5 = =
53 (1) 54
(1) 150 min, 305 max. with operating shaft, 97 without operating shaft

3/72
Schemes 3

GV2 L, GV2 LE and GK3
GV2 Lpp GV2 LEpp

1/L1
3/L2
5/L3
1/L1
3/L2
5/L3
6/T3
2/T1
4/T2
6/T3
2/T1
4/T2
Front mounting add-on contact blocks
GV AE1 GV AE11 GV AE20
OR
21
13
13
23
11
13
3
22
14
14
24
12
14

Instantaneous auxiliary contacts and fault signalling contacts
GV AD0110 GV AD0101 GV AD1010 GV AD1001
53
95
95
51
97
53
97
51
96
96
52
54
98
54
98
52
Instantaneous auxiliary contacts Short-circuit signalling contacts

GV AN11 GV AN20 GV AM11
(61)
(73)
(63)
(73)
31
43
08
06
33
43
(74)
(62)
(74)
(64)
44
32
05
44
34
Voltage trips
GV AUppp GV ASppp
D1
C1
D2
C2
Motor circuit-breakers GK3 EF

1
–Q
2
Start-Stop signalling contact blocks

GK2 AX10 GK2 AX20 GK2 AX50
21
13
13
13
23
14
22
14
14
24
Fault signalling contact blocks

GK2 AX12 GK2 AX22 GK2 AX52
97
05
97
97
07
06
98
98
08
98

3/73
Selection guide 3
Protection components 3
Thermal-magnetic circuit-breakers
for the protection of control circuits,
solenoid valves and transformers
Applications Protection of industrial equipment control circuits and of single-phase loads
Tripping threshold on short-circuit 5…7 In 12…16 In
Operational current 0.5 and 1 A 0.5…20 A
Maximum operational voltage 415 V 250 V
Number of poles 1 1 + neutral
Breaking capacity (Icu) conforming to IEC 60947-2 50 kA at 415 V 1.5…50 kA at 415 V 1.5…50 kA at 250 V
Device type GB2 CS GB2 CB GB2 CD
Pages 3/81 3/80 3/80
3/74
3
3
Protection of transformers
Single-phase y 5000 VA/415 V 3-phase y 10 kVA/415 V

Primary Secondary
About 20 In
0.25…23 A
415 V 690 V
2 1 + neutral 3
1.5…50 kA at 415 V 1.5…50 kA at 250 V 15…100 kA at 415 V
GB2 DB GB2 DB GB2 CD GV2 RT
3/80 3/80 3/80 3/49
3/75
Presentation, selection 3
Thermal-magnetic circuit-breakers GB2 for the

protection of industrial equipment control circuits
Presentation
GB2 thermal-magnetic circuit-breakers protect and isolate the control circuits of
industrial equipment with contactor coils, transformers.…
They protect and isolate single-phase auxiliary circuits such as solenoid valves,
electro-brakes, battery chargers, supplied from the control circuit voltage.
GB2 CB, GB2 CD, GB2 DB

12 ratings are available, from 0.5 to 20 A, in single-pole (GB2 CB), single-pole +
neutral (GB2 CD) and 2-pole (GB2 DB) versions.
They have a magnetic tripping threshold set at between 12 and 16 In to withstand the
current peaks generated by many industrial components.
GB2 CS
2 ratings are available, 0.5 and 1 A, in single-pole version.
The magnetic tripping threshold is set between 5 and 7 In.
3 Functions, installation
Clip-on fixing onto all types of 35 mm 5 rails, on 4 rails and on Telequick
mounting plates.
Upstream and downstream marking by means of AB1 clip-in markers.
Clear indication of “I” and “O” positions on the operator.
Tamper-proof device which requires no special maintenance (fixed magnetic and
thermal tripping thresholds).
Selection for the protection of circuits supplied by transformers

Single-phase transformers.
Magnetising peak: 20 In.
Operation of magnetic trips: 13 In.
Power Primary (1) Secondary

VA 220/240 V 380/415 V 24 V 48 V 110 V 220 V
40 GB2 DB05 GB2 DB05 GB2 CD07 GB2 CD06 GB2 CD05 GB2 CD05
630 GB2 DB10 GB2 DB08 – GB2 CD21 GB2 CD12 GB2 CD08
1000 GB2 DB14 GB2 DB09 – – GB2 CD16 GB2 CD10
1600 GB2 DB20 GB2 DB14 – – – GB2 CD14
2000 GB2 DB21 GB2 DB14 – – GB2 CD22 GB2 CD16
2500 GB2 DB22 GB2 DB20 – – – GB2 CD20
3000 GB2 DB22 GB2 DB20 – – – GB2 CD21
4000 – GB2 DB21 – – – GB2 CD22
5000 – GB2 DB22 – – – –
(1) If the breaking capacity of the GB2 is insufficient, use a GV2 RT with 2 poles connected in
series, see page 3/49.
Characteristics : References : Dimensions : Schemes :

pages 3/77 to 3/79 pages 3/80 and 3/81 page 3/81 page 3/81
3/76
Characteristics 3

Circuit-breaker type GB2 CB GB2 CD GB2 DB GB2 CS

Environment
Conforming to standards IEC 60947-1, 947-2, EN 60947-1, 60947-2
Product certifications CSA, NEMKO, UL NEMKO, UL – –
Shock resistance Conforming to IEC 60068-2-27 22 gn for 20 ms
Vibration resistance Conforming to IEC 60068-2-6 5 gn (5…110 Hz)
Operating position In relation to normal

GB2 CB,CD, CS GB2 DB
Cabling Minimum c.s.a. Maximum c.s.a.

Solid cable mm 2 1 x 0.75 1 x 6 or 2 x 4
Flexible cable with cable end mm 2 1 x 0.75 1 x 4 or 2 x 2.5
Utilisation category Conforming to IEC 60947-2 A A A A
Rated operational voltage Conforming to IEC 60947-2 V 415 (1) 250 415 415 (1)
(Ue) Conforming to CSA C22-2 Nr 14 V 277 – 277 –
and UL 1077
Rated operational frequency Conforming to IEC 60947-2 Hz 50/60 50/60 50/60 50/60
Rated impulse withstand Conforming to IEC 60947-2 kV 4 4 4 4
voltage (U imp)
Total power dissipated per pole W 2 2 2 1.9
Mechanical and C.O.: Closing - Opening C.O. 8000 8000 8000 8000
electrical durability
Operational current According to the permissible °C - 20 - 10 0 + 10 + 20 + 30 + 40 + 50 + 60
correction coefficient ambient temperature
(a or c) Correction coefficient 1.2 1.15 1.1 1.05 1 0.95 0.90 0.85 0.80
Tripping threshold Of the magnetic trips 12…16 In 12…16 In 12…16 In 5…7 In
(1) One GB2 circuit-breaker on each live conductor.
Tripping curves
Average operating time at 20 °C without prior current flow (cold state)
GB2 CB, GB2 CD, GB2 DB GB2 CS
120 120
60 60
Minutes
Minutes
20 20
10 10
5 5
2 2
1 1
20 20
Seconds
Seconds
10 10
5 5
2 2
1 1
500 500
200 200
Milliseconds
Milliseconds
100 100
50 50
20 20
10 10
5 5
2 2
1 1
1,05 2 3 4 5 6 8 100 x In 1,05 2 3 4 5 6 8 100 x In
1,5 10 1,5 10
Presentation, selection : References : Dimensions : Schemes :

3/77

Circuit-breaker type GB2

CB05 CB06 CB07 CB08 CB09 CB10 CB12 CB14 CB16 CB20 CB21 CB22
Rating A 0.5 1 2 3 4 5 6 8 10 12 16 20
Breaking capacity 110 V Icu kA 50 50 15 10 6 3 3 3 2 2 2 2

conforming to IEC 60947-2 Ics % (1) 100 50 50 50 50 75 75 75 75 75 75 75
a 50/60 Hz
230/240 V Icu kA 50 50 15 3 3 2 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5
Ics % (1) 25 25 25 50 50 75 75 75 75 75 75 75
400/415 V Icu kA 50 50 15 3 3 2 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5

Ics % (1) 25 25 25 50 50 75 75 75 75 75 75 75
Associated fuses, if required 110 V aM A g g 20 25 25 40 40 50 50 63 63 63

if Isc > breaking capacity Icu gG A g g 25 32 32 50 50 63 63 80 80 80
230/240 V aM A g g 16 20 20 32 32 40 40 50 50 50
3 gG A g g 25 32 32 40 40 50 50 63 63 63
400/415 V aM A g g 16 20 20 32 32 40 40 50 50 50
gG A g g 25 32 32 40 40 50 50 63 63 63

CD05 CD06 CD07 CD08 CD09 CD10 CD12 CD14 CD16 CD20 CD21 CD22
Rating A 0.5 1 2 3 4 5 6 8 10 12 16 20
Breaking capacity 110 V Icu kA 50 50 15 10 6 3 3 3 2 2 2 2

a 50/60 Hz
230/ 240 V Icu kA 50 50 15 3 3 2 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5
Ics % (1) 25 25 25 50 50 75 75 75 75 75 75 75

if lsc > breaking capacity Icu gG A g g 25 32 32 50 50 63 63 80 80 80
230/240 V aM A g g 16 20 20 32 32 40 40 50 50 50
gG A g g 25 32 32 40 40 50 50 63 63 63

DB05 DB06 DB07 DB08 DB09 DB10 DB12 DB14 DB16 DB20 DB21 DB22
Rating A 0.5 1 2 3 4 5 6 8 10 12 16 20
Breaking capacity 110 V lcu kA 50 50 15 10 6 3 3 3 2 2 2 2

a 50/60 Hz
230/240 V lcu kA 50 50 15 3 3 2 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5
Ics % (1) 25 25 25 50 50 75 75 75 75 75 75 75
400/415 V lcu kA 50 50 15 3 3 2 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 75

Ics % (1) 25 25 25 50 50 75 75 75 75 75 1.5 75

if lsc > breaking capacity Icu gG A g g 25 32 32 50 50 63 63 80 80 80
230/240 V aM A g g 16 20 20 32 32 40 40 50 50 50
gG A g g 25 32 32 40 40 50 50 63 63 63
400/415 V aM A g g 16 20 20 32 32 40 40 50 50 50
gG A g g 25 32 32 40 40 50 50 63 63 63
(1) As % of Icu.
g Fuse not required. Breaking capacity Icu > lsc.

3/78


pp05 pp06 pp07 pp08 pp09 pp10 pp12 pp14 pp16 pp20 pp21 pp22
Breaking capacity (lcu) 24 V kA 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5
conforming to IEC 60947-2 48 V kA 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 – – – –
c
Operational current DC-12 24 V A 0.5 1 2 3 4 5 6 8 10 12 16 20
conforming to IEC 60947-5-1 48 V A 0.5 1 2 3 4 5 6 8 10 12 16 20
c
DC-13 24 V A 0.5 1 2 3 4 5 6 8 10 12 16 20
48 V A 0.5 1 2 3 4 5 6 8 – – – –

CS05 CS06
Rating A 0.5 1
Breaking capacity 110 V lcu kA 50 50

conforming to IEC 60947-2 lcs % (1) 100 100
a 50/60 Hz
230/240 V lcu kA 50 50
3
lcs % (1) 25 25
400/415 V lcu kA 50 50
(2) lcs % (1) 25 25
Breaking capacity (lcu) 24 V kA 1.5 1.5

conforming to IEC 60947-2 48 V kA 1 1
c
Operational current DC-12 24 V A 0.5 1
conforming to IEC 60947-5-1 48 V A 0.5 1
c
DC-13 24 V A 0.5 1
48 V A 0.5 1
Maximum With contactors Operational voltage V 48 110 230 48 110 230

permissible LCp D09 …D18
line length for C.s.a. 060 mm2 m (3) 31 365 6 85 230
star-delta starting
0.75 mm2 m (3) 39 460 8 110 290
(length of cable
containing 2 or 1 mm2 m (3) 52 610 10 145 380
more conductors) 1.5 mm2 m (3) 78 910 15 220 570
2.5 mm2 m (3) 130 1520 26 360 950
4 mm2 m (3) 200 2400 41 580 1500
With contactors Operational voltage V 48 110 230 48 110 230

LCp D25…D32
C.s.a. 0.60 mm2 m (3) (3) 230 (3) 56 230
0.75 mm2 m (3) (3) 290 (3) 70 290
1 mm2 m (3) (3) 390 (3) 95 380
1.5 mm2 m (3) (3) 580 (3) 140 570
2.5 mm2 m (3) (3) 970 (3) 230 950
4 mm2 m (3) (3) 1500 (3) 375 1500
With contactors Operational voltage V 48 110 230 48 110 230

LCp D40…D80
C.s.a. 0.60 mm2 m (3) (3) 46 (3) 13 100
0.75 mm2 m (3) (3) 60 (3) 17 130
1 mm2 m (3) (3) 80 (3) 22 170
1.5 mm2 m (3) (3) 120 (3) 34 250
2.5 mm2 m (3) (3) 190 (3) 56 420
4 mm2 m (3) (3) 310 (3) 90 680
(1) As % of Icu.
(2) One GB2 CS circuit-breaker on each live conductor.
(3) Use relays.

3/79
References 3

Circuit-breakers with magnetic tripping threshold: 12 to 16 In

534268
Single-pole
Conventional Magnetic Sold in Unit Weight
rated thermal tripping current lots of reference
current Ith (1) Id ± 20 %
A A kg
0.5 6.6 6 GB2 CB05 0.060
1 14 6 GB2 CB06 0.060
2 26 6 GB2 CB07 0.060
3 40 6 GB2 CB08 0.060
4 52 6 GB2 CB09 0.060
5 66 6 GB2 CB10 0.060
6 83 6 GB2 CB12 0.060
8 108 6 GB2 CB14 0.060
10 138 6 GB2 CB16 0.060
GB2 CBpp
12 165 6 GB2 CB20 0.060
3 16
20
220
270
6
6
GB2 CB21
GB2 CB22
0.060
0.060
Single-pole + neutral
534269

A A kg
0.5 6.6 6 GB2 CD05 0.070
1 14 6 GB2 CD06 0.070
2 26 6 GB2 CD07 0.070
3 40 6 GB2 CD08 0.070
4 52 6 GB2 CD09 0.070
5 66 6 GB2 CD10 0.070
6 83 6 GB2 CD12 0.070
8 108 6 GB2 CD14 0.070
10 138 6 GB2 CD16 0.070
12 165 6 GB2 CD20 0.070
GB2 CDpp 16 220 6 GB2 CD21 0.070
20 270 6 GB2 CD22 0.070
2-pole
534270

A A kg
0.5 6.6 3 GB2 DB05 0.115
1 14 3 GB2 DB06 0.115
2 26 3 GB2 DB07 0.115
3 40 3 GB2 DB08 0.115
4 50 3 GB2 DB09 0.115
5 66 3 GB2 DB10 0.115
6 83 3 GB2 DB12 0.115
8 108 3 GB2 DB14 0.115
10 138 3 GB2 DB16 0.115
12 165 3 GB2 DB20 0.115
GB2 DBpp 16 220 3 GB2 DB21 0.115
20 270 3 GB2 DB22 0.115
(1) Conforming to IEC 60947-1.
Presentation, selection : Characteristics : Dimensions : Schemes :

page 3/76 pages 3/77 to 3/79 page 3/81 page 3/81
3/80
References (continued), Protection components 3
dimensions, Thermal-magnetic circuit-breakers GB2 for the

schemes 3
Circuit-breakers with magnetic tripping threshold: 5 to 7 In

Single-pole
534271

A A kg
0.5 3.3 6 GB2 CS05 0.055
1 6 6 GB2 CS06 0.055
GB2 CSpp
3
(1) Conforming to IEC 60947-1.
Accessories for circuit-breakers GB2 CB, DB and CS

lots of reference
kg
Busbar set for supply to 1 GB2 G210 0.100
10 GB2 DB or
20 GB2 CB or GB2 CS with 2 connectors
Supply connector 10 GB2 G01 –
Dimensions
GB2 CBpp, GB2 CDpp, GB2 CSpp GB2 DBpp
74
74
82 15 85 30
82 85
75 78
79 82
67 70
Marking: up to twelve AB1 R clip-in markers.
Schemes
GB2 CBpp GB2 CDpp GB2 DBpp GB2 CSpp
3/L2 (13)
1/L1
3/L2
1/L1
1/L1
1/L1
4/T2 (14)
2/T1
2/T1
2/T1
2/T1
4/T2
Presentation, selection : Characteristics :

3/81
Contents 0
Fuse protection
Mini-VARIO switch disconnectors for standard

applications
b Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 4/4
b Complete units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 4/8
b Switch bodies and add-on modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 4/9
b Operators and accessories. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . pages 4/11 and 4/17
b Dimensions, mounting, schemes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 4/22
VARIO switch disconnectors for high performance

applications
b Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 4/4
b Complete units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 4/12
b Switch bodies, add-on modules and auxiliary contacts . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 4/14

4 b Operators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 4/17
Fuse carriers for the protection of control circuits

or transformers
b Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 4/28
b References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 4/29
Fuse carriers for motor protection

b Operators and accessories. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 4/35
Switch-disconnector-fuses for motor or variable

speed drive protection
b Auxiliary and signalling contacts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 4/51
b Operators and accessories. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 4/53
b Dimensions, schemes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 4/58
b Switch-disconnector-fuses for the North American market, conforming

to UL and CSA standards, 30 to 800 A. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 4/64
4/0
Cartridge fuses for protection of equipment with
current peaks
b Type aM. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 4/66
b Type gG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 4/68
4/1
Selection guide 4
Mini-VARIO and VARIO switch disconnectors
Applications Mini-Vario and Vario rotary switch disconnectors from 12 to 175 A are suitable for on-
load making and breaking of resistive or mixed resistive and inductive circuits where
frequent operation is required. They can also be used for direct switching of motors in
utilisation categories AC-3 and DC-3 specific to motors.
Vario switch disconnectors are suitable for isolator applications with fully visible
breaking (since the handle cannot indicate the “open” position unless all the contacts
are actually open and separated by the appropriate isolating distance) and it is possible
to padlock the handles in the open position.
4
Switch type Mini-VARIO for standard applications VARIO for high performance applications
Thermal current 12 A 20 A 12 A 20 A 25 A
Operational current 8.1 A 11 A 8.1 A 11 A 14.5 A

AC-23 A at 400 Volts
Number of poles 3…5 3…6
Number of auxiliary contacts 1 or 2 1…4
Switch fixing Screw fixing, 1 or 4 holes

From the front Fixing: 1 x Ø 22.5 hole or 4 x Ø 5.5 screws
From the back Clip-on mounting on 7 rail Clip-on mounting on 7 rail or screw fixing
Reversible terminal blocks Yes
Door mounting, direct operator Yes
Mounting at back of enclosure, Yes

indirect operator with door interlock
Enclosure reference VpDN 12 VpDN 20 VpD 02 VpD 01 VpD 0

VpF 02 VpF 01 VpF 0
Product reference VCFN 12GE VCFN 20GE VpF 02GE VpF 01GE VpF 0GE
Pages 2/4 and 4/8 4/12 and 4/13
4/2
4
4
Mini-Vario and Vario rotary switch disconnectors from 12 to 175 A are suitable for on-load making and breaking of resistive or mixed resistive and
inductive circuits where frequent operation is required.
They can also be used for direct switching of motors in utilisation categories AC-3 and DC-3 specific to motors.
Vario switch disconnectors are suitable for isolator applications with fully visible breaking (since the handle cannot indicate the “open” position unless
all the contacts are actually open and separated by the appropriate isolating distance) and it is possible to padlock the handles in the open position.
4
VARIO for high performance applications
32 A 40 A 63 A 80 A 125 A 175 A
21.8 A 29 A 41.5 A 57 A 68.5 A 83 A
3…6 3 + N + PE
1…4
Screw fixing, 1 or 4 holes

Fixing: 1 x Ø 22.5 hole or 4 x Ø 5.5 screws Fixing 4 x Ø 5.5 screws
Clip-on mounting on 7 rail or screw fixing Screw fixing
Yes
Yes
Yes
VpD 1 VpD 2 VpF 3 VpF 4 VpF 5 VpF 6

VpF 1 VpF 2
VpF 1GE VpF 2GE VpF 3GE VpF 4GE VpF 5GE VpF 6GE
2/4 and 4/8 and 4/13
4/3
Characteristics Safety solutions using Preventa 0
Characteristics
Environment
Switch type (bare type) VN 12 V02 VN 20 V01 V0 VVD 0 V1 VVD 1
VZN 12 VZ 02 VZN 20 VZ 01 VZ 0 VVE 0 VZ 1 VVE 1
Product certifications UL, CSA, GL
Degree of protection IP 20 conforming to IEC 60529

with protection shroud
Ambient air temperature °C - 20…+ 50
Flame resistance °C 960 conforming to IEC 60695-2-1
Shock resistance gn 15 30 15 30
1/2 sine wave = 11ms conforming to IEC60068-2-27
Vibration resistance gn 5 1
10…150 Hz conforming to IEC 60068-2-6
Electrical characteristics, a.c. operation

4 VZN 12 VZ 02 VZN 20 VZ 01 VZ 0 VVE 0 VZ 1 VVE 1
Rated operational voltage (Ue) V 690
Rated impulse withstand voltage (Uimp) kV 6 8 6 8
Conventional thermal currents in free air (lth) A 12 20 25 32

and rated uninterrupted (lu)
Conventional thermal current in enclosure (lthe) A 10 16 20 25
Rated operational AC-21A/22A 230…690 V A 12 20 25 32

power and current
AC-23A 230 V A/kW 10.6/3 14/4 19.7/5.5
240 V A/kW 10.6/3 14/4 19.9/5.5 18.9/5.5
400 V A/kW 8.1/4 11/5.5 14.5/7.5 21.8/11
415 V A/kW 8.1/4 11/5.5 14/7.5 21/11
500 V A/kW 8.9/5.5 11.9/7.5 16.7/11
690 V A/kW 8.6/7.5 12.3/11 17.5/15
Rated AC -3 230/240 V kW 1.5 3 4

operational power
400/415 V kW 3 4 5.5 7.5
500 V kW 4 5.5 7.5
690 V kW 4 5.5 7.5 11
Intermittent duty class 30
Characteristics Rated making capacity A/ 120 200 250 320

in normal operating AC-21A/22A/23A (I rms) 400 V
conditions
Rated breaking capacity A/ 120 200 250
AC-21A/22A/23A (I rms) 400 V
Short-circuit Permissible rms short time rating (Icw) A/ 140 300 140 300 384
characteristics 400V/1 s
Rated making capacity under kA/ 0.5 1 0.5 1

short-circuit conditions (Icm) I peak 400 V
Rated conditional kA/ 6 10 6 10

short-circuit current (I rms) 400 V
with aM/gG fuses
A 12 20 25 35
4/4
0
Characteristics
Environment
V2 VVD 2 V3 VVD 3 V4 VVD 4 V5 V6 VZ7 VZN 05
VZ 2 VVE 2 VZ 3 VVE 3 VZ 4 VVE 4 VZ2 0 VZN 06
IEC 60947-3 IEC 60947-5
UL, CSA, GL
“TC”
IP 20 conforming to IEC 60529
- 20…+ 50
960 conforming to IEC 60695-2-1
30 –
1 –

VZ 2 VVE 2 VZ 3 VVE 3 VZ 4 VVE 4 VZ2 0 VZN 06 4
690
8 6
40 63 80 125 175 12 6
32 50 63 100 140 10 4
40 63 80 125 160 le/AC-15
25.8/7.5 50.3/15 61.2/18.5 71.9/22 96.6/30 6A
24.8/7.5 48.2/15 58.5/18.5 68/22 92.7/30 6A
29/15 41.5/22 57/30 68.5/37 83/45 4A
28/15 40/22 55/30 66/37 80/45 4A
28.5/18.5 44/30 54/37 64.5/45 79/55 2A
17.5/15 25/22 33/30 42/37 49/45 1A
5.5 11 15 22 30 –
11 18.5 22 30 37 –
15 22 30 37 45 –
11 18.5 30 37 –
30 –
400 630 800 1250 1750 –
320 500 640 1000 1400 –
480 756 960 1500 2100 –
1 2.1 2.8 –
10 1
50 63 80 125 200 16 1.6
4/5
Characteristics (continued) Safety solutions using Preventa 0
Characteristics
Electrical characteristics, d.c. operation
Rated 24 V 1 contact A 12 20 25 32
operational current 2 contacts A 12 20 25 32
DC-1 (L/R = 1ms)
3 contacts A 12 20 25 32
48 V 1 contact A 12 20 25 32
2 contacts A 12 20 25 32
3 contacts A 12 20 25 32
60 V 1 contact A 12 20 25 32
2 contacts A 12 20 25 32
3 contacts A 12 20 25 32
110 V 1 contact A 1.5 2 9 10

2 contacts A 8 10 12 16
3 contacts A 12 20 25 32
220 V 1 contact A 1.5 2 2.5 3

2 contacts A 7 8 10 12
3 contacts A 10 14 16 20
4 250 V 1 contact A 0.6 0.7 0.8 1

3 contacts A 8 10 12 16
Rated 24 V 1 contact A 12 20 25 32
operational current 2 contacts A 12 20 25 32
DC-2 to DC-5
3 contacts A 12 20 25 32
(L/R = 1ms)
48 V 1 contact A 12 20 25 32
2 contacts A 12 20 25 32
3 contacts A 12 20 25 32
60 V 1 contact A 10 14 16 20
2 contacts A 12 20 25 32
3 contacts A 12 20 25 32
110 V 1 contact A 1.5 2 2.5 3

3 contacts A 12 20 25 32
220 V 1 contact A 0.4 0.5 0.5 0.8

2 contacts A 1.4 1.5 1.5 2
250 V 1 contact A 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.8

2 contacts A 0.4 0.6 0.8 1
3 contacts A 1.2 2.4 1.6 2
Mechanical durability 0.05 0.1 0.05 0.1
(millions of operating cycles)
Electrical durability in cat. AC-21 0.05 0.1 0.05 0.1
(millions of operating cycles)
Electrical durability in cat. DC-1 to 5 30 000

(operating cycles)
Suitable for isolation Yes
Cabling Flexible cable + cable end mm2 4 6 4 6
Solid cable mm2 4 10 4 10
Tightening torque N.m 0.7 2.1 0.7 2.1
4/6
0

40 63 80 125 175 8 (le/DC-11)
40 63 80 125 175 –
40 63 80 125 175 –
40 63 80 125 175 8 (le/DC-11)

40 63 80 125 175 –
40 63 80 125 175 –
35 40 50 60 70 4 (le/DC-11)
40 63 80 125 175 –
40 63 80 125 175 –
12 20 25 30 12 2 (le/DC-11)
20 63 80 125 175 –
40 63 80 125 175 –
4 6 8 12 15 1 (le/DC-11)
14 25 30 40 50 –
25 30 40 80 100 –
2 4 5 3 10 0.8 (le/DC-11) 4
12 20 25 30 40 –
20 30 40 50 61 –
40 63 80 125 175 –
40 63 80 125 175 –
40 63 80 125 175 –
40 63 80 125 175 –
40 63 80 125 175 –
40 63 80 125 175 –
25 40 50 60 70 –
40 63 80 125 175 –
40 63 80 125 175 –
5 6 8 10 12 –
8 10 20 22 24 –
40 50 63 70 80 –
1 1.5 2 2.2 2.4 –

3 4 6 7 8 –
7 10 15 16 13 –
1 1.2 1.5 1.6 1.8 –

2 3 6 7 8 –
6 8 10 12 14 –

0.1 0.03 0.1 0.05
0.1 0.03 0.1 (AC-15) 0.05
30 000 30 000 (DC-11)
Yes –
6 16 70 2 x 0.75…1.5
10 25 95 2 x 1…2.5
2.1 4 22.6 0.7
4/7
References 4
Mini-VARIO switch disconnectors

for standard applications
Complete units
b 3-pole rotary switch disconnectors, 12 to 20 A

b Marking on operator .
b Padlockable operating handle (padlocks not supplied).
Main and Emergency stop switch disconnectors

for door mounting
Operator lth Reference Weight
Handle Front plate Fixing
mm mm A kg
580541
Red, padlockable Yellow Ø 22.5 12 VCDN 12 0.177

with up to 3 padlocks 60 x 60
(Ø 4 to Ø 8)
20 VCDN 20 0.177
Main and Emergency stop switch disconnectors for mounting

at back of an enclosure (1)
VCDN 20
mm mm A kg
Red, padlockable Yellow Ø 22.5 12 VCCDN 12 0.334
4 (Ø 4 to Ø 8)
20 VCCDN 20 0.334
580542
Main switch disconnectors for door mounting

mm mm A kg
Black, padlockable Black Ø 22.5 12 VBDN 12 0.177
(Ø 4 to Ø 8)
20 VBDN 20 0.177
VCCDN 20
(1) Switches supplied with a shaft extension VZN 17 and a door interlock plate KZ 32 (see page
4/11)
580543
VBDN 20

4/8

Switch bodies, add-on modules
812801
Switch bodies
A kg
3-pole switch disconnectors 12 VN 12 0.110
20 VN 20 0.110
Add-on modules
VN 20
A kg
Main pole modules 12 VZN 12 0.020
580586
20 VZN 20 0.020
Neutral pole module 12 and 20 VZN 11 0.020

with early make and
late break contacts
VZN 11 Earthing module 12 and 20 VZN 14 0.016
Auxiliary contact block 1 N/O late make contact VZN 05 0.020 4

580587
modules
1 N/C early break contact VZN 06 0.020
Input terminal For add-on pole modules or VZN 26 0.004

protection shrouds auxiliary contact block modules
(single-pole shroud)
For switch bodies VZN 08 0.007

VZN 14 (3-pole shroud)
Maximum number of add-on modules that can be fitted on

a switch body
580588
VZN 12 or VZN 20 + + VZN 12 or VZN 20
VN 12 or
or or VZN 11 + VZN 14
VN 20 or
VZN 05
VZN 05 or VZN 06 VZN 05 or VZN 06

812805
VZN 26
812806
VZN 08

4/9
Presentation 4

Operators and accessories
KCC 1YZ
VZN 14
VZN pp
VZN pp VN 12, VN 20
VZN 17, VZN 30
4
KCD 1PZ
KZ 32, KZ 83
KAD 1PZ
4/10
References 4


b Operator fixing by 1 Ø 22.5 hole; for other operators see pages 4/17 and 4/19.
b For other accessories and empty enclosures, see pages 4/20, 4/21 and 2/5.
Operators for main and Emergency stop

Handle Front plate Reference Weight
mm kg
Red, padlockable Yellow KCC 1YZ 0.050
with 1 padlock 45 x 45
(Ø 4 to Ø 6)
Red, padlockable Yellow KCD 1PZ 0.084

(Ø 4 to Ø 8)
Operators for main switch disconnectors

Handle Front plate Reference Weight
mm kg
Black, padlockable Black KAD 1PZ 0.084
with up to 3 padlocks
(Ø 4 to Ø 8)
60 x 60
4
Accessories for door interlocking
For rear fixing switch disconnectors mounted at the back of an enclosure, in
addition to a direct operator
Description Front Distance Sold in Unit Weight
plate enclosure lots of reference
back/door
mm mm kg
Shaft extensions – 300…330 1 VZN 17 0.100
400…430 1 VZN 30 0.130
Door interlock plate 45 x 45 or – 5 KZ 32 0.170

60 x 60
Plate for door mounting 45 x 45 or – 5 KZ 83 0.205

60 x 60

4/11
References 4
VARIO switch disconnectors

for high performance applications
Complete units

580529

for door mounting
Handle Front plate Fixing Rating Reference Weight
mm A kg
VCF 0
Red, Yellow Ø 22.5 12 VCD 02 0.215
padlockable 60 x 60 20 VCD 01 0.215
with up to
25 VCD 0 0.215
3 padlocks
(Ø 4 to Ø 8) 32 VCD 1 0.215
40 VCD 2 0.215
580530
4 screws 12 VCF 02 0.250

20 VCF 01 0.250
25 VCF 0 0.250
32 VCF 1 0.250
40 VCF 2 0.250
63 VCF 3 0.560
80 VCF 4 0.560
4 Red, long,
padlockable
Yellow
90 x 90
4 screws 125
175
VCF 5
VCF 6
1.200
1.200
with up to
3 padlocks
(Ø 4 to Ø 8)

VCF 5
for mounting at back of an enclosure (1)
mm A kg
Red, Yellow Ø 22.5 12 VCCD 02 0.392
padlockable 60 x 60 20 VCCD 01 0.392
with up to
25 VCCD 0 0.392
3 padlocks
(Ø 4 to Ø 8) 32 VCCD 1 0.392
40 VCCD 2 0.392
4 screws 12 VCCF 02 0.527

20 VCCF 01 0.527
580531
25 VCCF 0 0.527
32 VCCF 1 0.527
40 VCCF 2 0.527
63 VCCF 3 0.440
80 VCCF 4 0.680
Red, long, Yellow 4 screws 125 VCCF 5 1.320

padlockable 90 x 90 175 VCCF 6 1.320
with up to
3 padlocks
(Ø 4 to Ø 8)
VCCF 0 (1) Unit supplied with a shaft extension VZN 17 and a door interlock plate KZ 32 or KZ 74 (see
page 4/20).

4/12

Complete units

Main switch disconnectors for door mounting

mm A kg
580532
Black, Black Ø 22.5 12 VBD 02 0.215

padlockable 60 x 60 20 VBD 01 0.215
with up to
25 VBD 0 0.215
3 padlocks
(Ø 4 to Ø 8) 32 VBD 1 0.215
40 VBD 2 0.215
4 screws 12 VBF 02 0.250

20 VBF 01 0.250
25 VBF 0 0.250
VBD 0 32 VBF 1 0.250
40 VBF 2 0.250
63 VBF 3 0.560
80 VBF 4 0.560
Red, long, Black 4 screws 125 VBF 5 1.200

padlockable 90 x 90
4
580533
175 VBF 6 1.200

with up to
3 padlocks
(Ø 4 to Ø 8)

For mounting in an enclosure or for modular distribution boards
Handle Front plate Rating Reference Weight
mm A kg
Red, Yellow 25 VVE 0 0.250
VBF 4 padlockable 45 x 45 32 VVE 1 0.250
with 1 padlock
40 VVE 2 0.250
(Ø 4 to Ø 6)
63 VVE 3 0.530
80 VVE 4 0.530
580534
Main switch disconnectors

For mounting in an enclosure or for modular distribution boards
Handle Front plate Rating Reference Weight
mm A kg
Black, not Black 25 VVD 0 0.250
padlockable 45 x 45 32 VVD 1 0.250
40 VVD 2 0.250
63 VVD 3 0.560
80 VVD 4 0.560
VVE 1

4/13

Switch bodies, add-on modules, auxiliary contacts
Switch bodies
580535

A kg
3-pole switch disconnectors 12 V02 0.200
(1)
20 V01 0.200
25 V0 0.200
32 V1 0.200
V0
40 V2 0.200
63 V3 0.500
80 V4 0.500
580536
125 V5 0.900
175 V6 0.900
Add-on modules
A kg
4 Main pole modules 12 VZ 02 0.050
20 VZ 01 0.050
25 VZ 0 0.050
V5 32 VZ 1 0.050
40 VZ 2 0.050
63 VZ 3 0.100
580538
580537
80 VZ 4 0.100
Neutral pole modules with 12 to 40 VZ 11 0.050

early make and late break
contacts (1) 63 to 80 VZ 12 0.100
125 and 175 VZ 13 0.250
Earthing modules 12 to 40 VZ 14 0.050

VZ 0 VZ 11
63 and 80 VZ 15 0.100
125 and 175 VZ 16 0.250

580539
580540
Auxiliary contact block modules

Description Type Reference Weight
kg
Auxiliary contact block N/O + N/C (2) VZ 7 0.050
modules with
2 auxiliary contacts N/O + N/O VZ 20 0.050
(1) Protection shrouds are available if required: see page 4/20.

(2) Late make N/O, early break N/C contacts
VZ 15 VZ 20

4/14

Switch bodies, add-on modules, auxiliary contacts

switch body
1 add-on module on each side of the switch body
VZ 7 or VZ 20 + V0p + VZ 7 or VZ 20 VZ 7 + + VZ 7
or or or or
V5
VZ 11 or VZ 12 + V0 + VZ 11 or VZ 12 VZ 20 + + VZ 20
or
or or or or
to
VZ 14 or VZ 15 + + VZ 14 or VZ 15 VZ 13 + + VZ 13
V6
or or or or
V4
VZ 0p/VZ 0 to VZ 4 + + VZ 0p/VZ 0 to VZ 16 + + VZ 16
VZ 4
2 add-on modules on each side of the switch body
VZ 0p + VZ 0p + V0p + VZ 0p + VZ 7 or VZ 20 or VZ 11 or VZ 14
4
Nota : The add-on modules mounted next to the switch body are main pole modules. Maximum
of 3 main pole modules per switch body.

4/15
Presentation 4

Operators, handles and front plates
KAp 1BZ
VN 12, VN 20
KCp 1LZ
V02…V2
KCp 1YZ
VZN 17, VZN 30
KZ 32, KZ 83 KBp 1PZ
KDp 1PZ
KAp 1PZ
V3, V4
KCp 1PZ
4
VZ 18, VZ 31
KAF 2PZ
KCF 2PZ
KZ 81
V5, V6
KBF 2PZ
VZ 18, VZ 31
KDF 2PZ
KZ 74
KBF 3PZ
KDF 3PZ
KAF 3PZ
KCF 3PZ
4/16
References 4

Handles and front plates for main and Emergency stop

For Operator Reference Weight
switch Handle Front plate
body
Dimensions Fixing
mm kg
VN 12, VN 20 Red, Yellow Ø 22.5 KCC 1YZ 0.050
V02…V2 padlockable 45 x 45
with 1 padlock 4 screws KCE 1YZ 0.040
(Ø 4 to Ø 6)
Red, Yellow Ø 22.5 KCD 1PZ 0.082

padlockable 60 x 60
with up to 4 screws KCF 1PZ 0.075
3 padlocks
(Ø 4 to Ø 8)
V3 and V4 Red, Yellow 4 screws KCF 2PZ 0.070

padlockable 60 x 60
with up to
3 padlocks
(Ø 4 to Ø 8) 4
V5 and V6 Red, long, Yellow 4 screws KCF 3PZ (1) 0.160
padlockable 90 x 90
with up to
3 padlocks
(Ø 4 to Ø 8)
Handles and front plates for main switch disconnectors

body
Dimensions Fixing
mm kg
VN 12, VN 20 Black, Black Ø 22.5 KAD 1PZ 0.082
V02…V2 padlockable 60 x 60
with up to 3 4 screws KAF 1PZ 0.075
padlocks
(Ø 4 to Ø 8)
V3 and V4 Black, Black 4 screws KAF 2PZ 0.070

padlockable 60 x 60
with up to
3 padlocks
(Ø 4 to Ø 8)
V5 and V6 Black, long, Black 4 screws KAF 3PZ (1) 0.160

padlockable 90 x 90
with up to
3 padlocks
(Ø 4 to Ø 8)
(1) For door mounting of 63 and 80 A switch disconnectors, adapter plate KZ 106 must be
ordered separately (see page 4/20).

4/17

KAp 1BZ
VN 12, VN 20 KCp 1LZ
V02…V2
KCp 1YZ
VZN 17, VZN 30
KZ 32, KZ 83 KBp 1PZ
KDp 1PZ
KAp 1PZ
V3, V4
KCp 1PZ
4
VZ 18, VZ 31
KAF 2PZ
KCF 2PZ
KZ 81
V5, V6
KBF 2PZ
VZ 18, VZ 31
KDF 2PZ
KZ 74
KBF 3PZ
KDF 3PZ
KAF 3PZ
KCF 3PZ
4/18

Handles and front plates for Emergency stop

body
Dimensions Fixing
mm kg
VN 12, VN 20 Red, Yellow Ø 22.5 KCC 1LZ 0.050
V02…V2 not 45 x 45
padlockable 4 screws KCE 1LZ 0.040
Yellow Ø 22.5 KDD 1PZ 0.082

60 x 60
4 screws KDF 1PZ 0.075
V3 and V4 Red, Yellow 4 screws KDF 2PZ 0.070

long, not 60 x 60
padlockable
V5 and V6 Red, Yellow 4 screws KDF 3PZ (1) 0.160

long, not 90 x 90
padlockable
Handles and front plates for switch disconnectors

4
body
Dimensions Fixing
mm kg
VN 12, VN 20 Black, Black Ø 22.5 KAC 1BZ 0.050
V02…V2 not 45 x 45
padlockable 4 screws KAE 1BZ 0.040
Black Ø 22.5 KBD 1PZ 0.055

60 x 60
4 screws KBF 1PZ 0.045
V3 and V4 Black, Black 4 screws KBF 2PZ 0.070

not 60 x 60
padlockable
V5 and V6 Black, Black 4 screws KBF 3PZ (1) 0.160

not 90 x 90
padlockable
(1) For door mounting of 63 and 80 A switch disconnectors, adapter plate KZ 106 must be
ordered separately (see next page).

4/19

Accessories
Input terminal protection shrouds

use on kg
580583
For switch bodies V02…V2 VZ 8 0.015

(3-pole shroud)
V3 and V4 VZ 9 0.020
VZ 8 V5 and V6 VZ 10 0.060
For add-on pole modules VZ 02…VZ 2, VZ 11, VZ 14 VZ 26 0.005

(single-pole shroud)
580584
VZ 3, VZ 4, VZ 12, VZ 15 VZ 27 0.007
VZ 13, VZ 16 VZ 28 0.020
VZ 26 For contact blocks – VZ 29 0.005

with 2 auxiliary contacts
Components for door interlocking

For rear fixing switch disconnectors mounted at the back of an enclosure, in
addition to a direct operator
Description For Distance Sold in Unit Weight
use on enc.back/door lots of reference
mm kg
4 Shaft
extensions
VN 12, VN 20 300…330
V02…V2
1 VZN 17 (1) 0.100
400…430 1 VZN 30 (1) 0.130
V02…V2 300…330 1 VZ 17 0.075
400…430 1 VZ 30 0.125
580526
V3 and V4 300…320 1 VZ 18 0.170
400…420 1 VZ 31 0.215
VZ 18
V5 and V6 330…350 1 VZ 18 0.170
430…450 1 VZ 31 0.215
Door VN 12, VN 20 – 5 KZ 32 0.177

580585
interlock plates V02…V2

V3…V6 – 5 KZ 74 0.020
Description For Front plate Sold in Unit Weight

use on dimensions lots of reference
mm kg
Plates for VN 12, VN 20 45 x 45 or 5 KZ 83 0.205
KZ 32 door mounting V02…V2 60 x 60
of handles with
4 screw fixing V3…V6 60 x 60 or 5 KZ 81 0.010
90 x 90
580527
Adapter plate V3 and V4 90 x 90 5 KZ 106 0.075

for switch
disconnectors
(1) Can be used with V02 to V2 switches.
KZ 81

4/20

Accessories
Accessories for operators

Description For Front plate Sold in Unit Weight
use on dimensions lots of reference
mm kg
Legend Front plate 45 x 45 5 KZ 13 0.060
holder with
812783
silver coloured
blank legend 60 x 60 5 KZ 15 0.065
plate
90 x 90 5 KZ 103 0.070
Legend Front plate 45 x 45 20 KZ 14 0.060

holders
without
KZ 15 legend plate 60 x 60 10 KZ 16 0.065
90 x 90 5 KZ 101 0.070
Silver KZ 14 – 20 KZ 76 0.020
coloured
580528
blank legend
plates for
engraving by
customer
KZ 16 – 10 KZ 77 0.010
4
KZ 101 – 5 KZ 100 0.005
KZ 67
Seals VN 12, VN 20 45 x 45 5 KZ 65 0.037
V02…V2 60 x 60 5 KZ 66 0.033
V3 and V4 60 x 60 5 KZ 62 0.033
V3…V6 90 x 90 5 KZ 67 0.064
812785
Tightening For operators – 5 Z01 0.050

tool with Ø 22.5
fixing
Z01

4/21
Dimensions, Protection components 4
mounting 4
Mini-VARIO switch disconnectors, 12 and 20 A
Dimensions
Switch bodies VN 12, VN 20 Add-on modules VZN 12, VZN 20 Add-on modules VZN 11, VZN 14 VZN 05
and VZN 06
46,5
45,5
45,5
62 48 39 12 39 12
56
Mounting
Switch disconnector mounted on enclosure door
VN 12, VN 20
Single hole fixing
1,5...6 3
4
12,7
22,5
44 74,5
VN 12, VN 20
4 screw fixing
45 x 45 front plate 60 x 60 front plate
1,5...6
Ø13
48
36
44 62,5 36 48

pages 4/4 to 4/7 pages 4/8 and 4/9 pages 4/23 and 4/25
4/22
Mounting (continued), Protection components 4
schemes 4
Mini-VARIO switch disconnectors, 12 and 20 A
Mounting (continued)
Switch disconnector mounted at back of enclosure with shaft extension VZN 17 or VZN 30 (clip-on mounting on 6 rail)
VN 12, VN 20
Single hole fixing 4 screw fixing
1,5...6 1,5...6
e e
Shaft extension Distance (e)

enclosure back/door
mm
VN 12, VN 20 VZN 17 300…330
VZN 30 400…430
Schemes
4
Switch body Main pole module Neutral pole module Auxiliary contact blocks
VN 12, VN 20 VZN 12, VZN 20 VZN 11 VZN 05 VZN 06
1/L1
3/L2
5/L3
13
21
14
22
2/T1
4/T2
6/T3
4/23
mounting 4
VARIO switch disconnectors,12 to 175 A
Dimensions
Switch bodies VOp, V0 to V2 Switch bodies V3 to V6
60 55
=
H
b
74
=
c G
a
a b c G H Ø
V3, V4 60 83 65 48 48 5.5
V5, V6 90 125 90 68 68 5.5
Add-on modules VZ 02 to VZ 4 and VZ 11 to VZ 16 Add-on modules VZ 7, VZ 20
c a
48,5 20
4
65
b
a b c
VZ 02 and VZ 01, 60 83 65
VZ 0 to VZ 2, VZ 11, VZ 14
VZ 3, VZ 4, VZ 12, VZ 15 90 125 90
VZ 13, VZ 16 30 125 63
Mounting
Switch disconnector mounted on enclosure door
Single hole fixing 4 screw fixing 4 screw fixing 4 screw fixing
V0p, V0 to V4 V0p, V0 to V4 45 x 45 front plate 60 x 60 front plate
V0p, V0 to V2 V0p, V0 to V4
1,5...6 1,5...6 1,5...6
3
12,7
48
36
22,5 36 48
44 72 44 c 37 c
c
V0p, V0 to V2 60
V3, V4 65
V5 and V6. 4 screw fixing

90 x 90 front plate
1,5...6
68
94
68
65 90

4/24
Mounting (continued), Protection components 4
schemes 4
VARIO switch disconnectors, 12 to 175 A
Mounting (continued)
Switch disconnector mounted at back of enclosure
4 screw fixing Single hole fixing V5 and V6 with shaft extension
V0p, V0 to V2 with shaft V3 to V4 with shaft extension VZ 18 or VZ 31
extension VZ 17 or VZ 30 VZ 18 or VZ 31
(clip-on mounting on 6 rail
possible for V0p to V2)
1,5...6 1,5...6 1,5...6
100
60
94
e e G e 30
Shaft extension Distance (e) Ø G Shaft Distance (e)

enc.back/door extension enc.back/door
mm mm
V02 and V01 VZ 17 300…330 2 x 4.2 15 V5 and V6 VZ 18 300…350
V0 to V2
V3 and V4
VZ
VZ
30
18
400…430
300…320
2
2
x 4.2
x5
15
20
VZ 31 430…450 4
VZ 31 400…420 2 x5 20
Switch disconnectors for modular distribution boards

VVp 0 to VVp 2 VVp 3 to VVp 4
45
45
74
83
5,5 45 5,5 60
68 72
106 110
Schemes
Switch body Main pole module Neutral pole module Auxiliary contact blocks
V02 and V01 VZ 02 and VZ 01 VZ 11 to VZ 13 VZ 7 VZ 20
V0 to V6 VZ 0 to VZ 4
1/L1
3/L2
5/L3
13
21
13
23
14
22
14
24
2/T1
4/T2
6/T3

4/25
Selection guide 4
Fuse protection
Applications Protection of control circuits or transformers
Breaking under load –
Fuse type NF C or DIN

4
Cartridge fuses 1…125 A
Device type Fuse carriers
References DF6, GK1 C, D, E, F
Pages 4/29
4/26
4
4
Motor protection Protection of motors or variable speed drives
Yes, only if combined with a contactor Yes
NF C or DIN NF C, DIN, BS or UL
4
1…125 A 1…1250 A
Fuse carriers Switch-disconnector-fuses
LS1, GK1 E, GK1 F (without fuses) GS1
4/34 4/40 and 4/41
4/27
Characteristics 4
Fuse carriers
Fuse carrier type DF6 AB08 GK1 C DF6 AB10 GK1 D GK1 E GK1 F
Environment
Conforming to standards NF C 61-201 – NF C 61-201 – – –
IEC 60947-3
Ambient air temperature °C - 50…+70

for operation with tubular links without derating
Maximum tilt ± 23°
in relation to normal vertical mounting plane
Fuse size 8.5 x 31.5 8.5 x 31.5 10 x 38 10 x 38 14 x 51 22 x 58
Rated operational voltage V 480 480 690 690 690 690

with tubular links, a.c. supply
Maximum continuous current
(for ambient air temperature y 40 °C) (1)
With tubular links A 20 20 32 32 50 125
With aM cartridge fuses A 10 10 25 25 50 125
4 With gG cartridge fuses A 20 20 30 30 40 100
Permissible short-circuit current

(with tubular links)
Maximum peak value kA 8 8 8 8 8 8
(dynamic stress)
Short-time rating kA 4 4 4 4 4 4
(rms value cos ϕ = 0.35)
Duration ms 100 100 100 100 100 100
Cabling
Maximum c.s.a. (without cable end)
Number of conductors 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2
Flexible cable mm2 10 6 10 6 10 6 10 6 25 10 35 16
Solid cable mm2 10 6 10 6 10 6 10 6 25 10 50 25
Tightening torque Nm 1.2 1.2 1.2 1.2 2 2
(1) For use in an installation with ambient temperature > 40 °C, apply a derating coefficient
equivalent to 120 – ambient temperature
-----------------------------------------------------------------------
80
References : Dimensions, mounting : Schemes :

4/28
References 4
Fuse carriers
Fuse carriers
533517
533518
(1)
Rated Size of Composition Sold in Unit Weight
thermal cartridge fuse lots of reference
current or link
A kg
20 8.5 x 31.5 1P 12 DF6 AB08 0.070
1N 12 DF6 N10 0.080
DF6 N10 GK1 CF 3 P + N (2) 6 GK1 CC 0.152
2P 6 GK1 CD 0.142
3P 4 GK1 CF 0.213
3 P + N (2) 3 GK1 CH 0.294
533520
533519
32 10 x 38 1P 12 DF6 AB10 0.070

1N 12 DF6 N10 0.080
3 P + N (2) 6 GK1 DC 0.152
2P 6 GK1 DD 0.142
3P 4 GK1 DF 0.213
GK1 DN 3 P + N (2) 3 GK1 DH 0.294
DF6 AB10
50 14 x 51 1P 12 GK1 EB 0.130
1N 12 GK1 EN 0.140
3 P + N (2) 6 GK1 EC 0.273
533521
533522
2P 6 GK1 ED 0.263
3P
3 P + N (2)
4
3
GK1
GK1
EF
EH
0.394
0.536
4
125 22 x 58 1P 12 GK1 FB 0.230
1N 12 GK1 FN 0.250
3 P + N (2) 6 GK1 FC 0.480
GK1 EN GK1 EF 2P 6 GK1 FD 0.460
3P 4 GK1 FF 0.690
3 P + N (2) 3 GK1 FH 0.940
Blown fuse indicators (neon)

For use on Operational Sold in Unit Weight
fuse carriers voltage lots of reference
V kg
GK1 AS
DF6, GK1 C, D and E 80…400 10 GK1 AS 0.003
Fuse carrier assembly strips (3)

Fuse carriers to be assembled Sold in Unit Weight
Type Number lots of reference kg
DF6 2 10 GK1 AP2 0.002
GK1 APp
3 10 GK1 AP3 0.003
4 10 GK1 AP4 0.004
GK1 E 2 10 GK1 AP3 0.004

3 10 GK1 AP5 0.004
4 10 GK1 AP6 0.006
GK1 F 2 10 GK1 AP4 0.004

3 10 GK1 AP6 0.006
4 10 GK1 AP9 0.007
(1) Each pole can be marked. A groove is provided on the control lever for this purpose.
Marking by means of AR1 Mp01 markers using positioning tool AT1 PA3.
(2) N: neutral pole fitted with a locked tubular link as standard.
Detail of assembly clip (3) Strips are supplied with all the clips needed for assembling the fuse carriers together.
mounting

4/29
mounting 4
Fuse carriers
Modular fuse carriers 20 A and 32 A
Mounting on rail AM1 DP200
DF6 AB, DF6 N10 GK1 pC, GK1 pD GK1 pF GK1 pH
36,5
81
38 17,5 2x17,5 3x17,5 4x17,5

a 7,5
a
1 pole 60.5
2, 3, 4 poles 64
Modular fuse carriers 50 A

Mounting on rail AM1 DP200
GK1 EB, GK1 EN GK1 EC, GK1 ED GK1 EF GK1 EH
4
40,5
95
45 1,5x17,5 3x17,5 4,5x17,5 6x17,5

2
a 7,5
a
1 pole 78.5
2, 3, 4 poles 82

Mounting on rail AM1 ED
GK1 FB, GK1 FN GK1 FC, GK1 FD GK1 FF GK1 FH
4
47
120
44 6 2x17,5 4x17,5 6x17,5 8x17,5

4
a 15
a
GK1 FB, FN 78.5
GK1 FC, FD, 82
GK1 FF, FH

4/30
Mounting, Protection components 4
schemes 4
Fuse carriers
Mounting
Mounting on pre-slotted plate AM1PA
GK1 FB, FN GK1 FC, FD, FF, FH
AF1 EA4 a AF1 EA4
100/110
100/110
50 26 a
88 a1
GK1 FC FD FF FH
a 35 35 70 105
a1 61 61 96 131
Schemes
4
Modular fuse carriers
DF6 ABp DF6 N GK1 pC GK1 pD
N
3
2
GK1 pF GK1 pH GK1 pB GK1 pN

N
1
5
2

4/31
Selection 4
Fuse carriers
Operation: safety
The fuse carrier performs two basic functions:
b it isolates the downstream circuit by means of a visible break and wide opening
contacts,
b it holds the cartridge fuses designed to protect the installation against short-
circuits.
The type of cartridge fuse needed to protect the circuit must be determined before
selecting the fuse carrier.
Cartridge fuse selection (type, rating, size)

Type
Application b Motor protection.
b Transformer protection.
Solution b aM type fuses. These fuses are designed to withstand high
current peaks of a very short duration. They must be
combined with a thermal overload relay coupled with a
contactor.
Application b Lighting circuit protection.
b Supply line protection.
b Furnace protection.
Solution b gG type fuses, which are more widely used but whose
limiting capacity is weaker than that of aM type fuses.
Rating
4 gG fuses
aM fuses
See standard NF C 15-100.
Table 53 A paragraph 532-2-1 and table 52 C
paragraph 523-1.
Motors Motors Cartridge fuses Fuse carrier
3 x 220 V 3 x 400 V type aM
P in P in Size Rating
kW A kW A A
9 32 15 28.5 10 x 38 32 LS1 D32
11 39 22 44 14 x 51 50 GK1 EK
22 75 37 73 22 x 58 80 GK1 FK
30 103 55 105 22 x 58 125 GK1 FK
Size
Use the “fuse characteristics” table opposite to select the
correct fuse size according to:
b the nominal current of the circuit to be protected,
b the operational voltage.
Fuse carrier selection

Application Isolation of a circuit for safety reasons only.
Solution The fuse carrier may be fitted with links.
The maximum permissible current is indicated in the “pole
characteristics” table opposite.
Application Isolation of a circuit and its protection against short-circuits.
Solution Select a fuse carrier according to:
b the type of cartridge fuse required,
b the maximum permissible current in the fuse carrier poles
(see “pole characteristics” table opposite). If the
operational current is greater than the maximum
permissible current in the poles of the fuse carrier
corresponding to the cartridge fuse size selected, select
the fuse carrier the next size up.
The safety provided by using a fuse carrier can be increased
by adding a padlocking device with up to three padlocks.
Recommendations for use

The fuse carrier conforms to utilisation category AC-21A/22A of standard
IEC 60947-3. It is therefore recommended that the fuse carrier early break auxiliary
contacts always be inserted in the coil circuit of the contactor with which it is in series.
If the fuse carrier is not associated with a contactor, it is essential to ensure that it will
be operated off-load.

4/32
Characteristics 4
Fuse carriers
Fuse carrier type LS1 D32 LS1 D323 GK1 Ep GK1 Fp

Environment
Conforming to standards NF EN 60947-3 p p p
IEC 60947-3 p p p
Product certifications BV, UR – –
Protective treatment “TH” “TC” “TC”
Ambient air temperature °C - 50…+ 70 - 50…+ 70 - 50…+ 70

for operation with links without derating
Maximum tilt ± 23° ± 23° ± 23°
in relation to normal vertical mounting plane
Fuse size 10 x 38 10 x 38 14 x 51 22 x 58
Rated operational voltage V 690 690 690 690

with links. a.c. supply
Maximum continuous current at
ambient temperature y 40 °C (1) (Min. cable Ø/Ie)
With tubular links mm 2/A 6/32 or 4/25 4/25 or 2.5/16 10/50 or 6/40 35/125 or 25/100
or 2.5/16
With aM fuses mm 2/A 6/32 or 4/22 4/25 or 2.5/20 10/50 or 6/35 35/125 or 25/100
With gG fuses
or 2.5/20
mm 2/A 4/25 or 2.5/20 2.5/20 or 1.5/16 10/40 or 6/32 25/100 or 16/80
4
or 1.5/16
Early break contact characteristics
Rated operational voltage V a 250. c 60 a 250. c 60 a 500. c 440 a 500. c 220
Conventional thermal current A 2.5 2.5 6 6
Cartridge fuse characteristics

Fuse size 10 x 38 10 x 38 14 x 51 22 x 58
Type aM a 400 V A 32 (2) 25 50 125

a 500 V A 20 20 40 80
a 660 V A – – 25 50
Type gG a 400 V A 25 (2) 25 40 100

a 500 V A 25 25 40 80
a 660 V A – – 25 50
Maximum power dissipated by fuse W 3 3 8.5 18
Cabling
Connection by screw clamp terminals or connectors
Number and c.s.a. of conductors Min. Max. Min. Max. Min. Max. Min. Max.
Solid cable mm 2 2x1 2x6 – – 1 x 2.5 1 x 25 1 x 16 1 x 70
Flexible cable without cable end mm 2 2 x 1.5 2x6 – – 1 x 2.5 1 x 25 1 x 16 1 x 50
Flexible cable with cable end mm 2 2x1 2x4 – – 1 x 2.5 1 x 16 1 x 16 1 x 25
Connection Screw clamp – – Connector Connector

terminals
Tightening torque Nm 1.7 – – 2 2
Connection by spring terminals

Number and c.s.a. of conductors Min. Max. Min. Max. Min. Max. Min. Max.
Solid cable mm 2 – – 2 x 1 (3) 2 x 4 – – – –
Flexible cable without cable end mm 2 – – 2 x 1.5 2x4 – – – –
(3)
(1) For use in an installation with ambient temperature > 55 °C, apply a derating coefficient
equivalent to 120 – ambient temperature
-------------------------------------------------------------------------
80
(2) These values are for fuse carriers mounted side by side with a gap of 10 mm between them
or mounted with sets of busbars GV2 p54. If mounted side by side without a gap, use the
following fuse sizes: aM fuse: 25 A and gG fuse: 20 A.
(3) For cross-sections 1 to 1.5 mm2, the use of an LA9 D99 cable end reducer is recommended.
Selection : References : Dimensions : Schemes :

4/33
References 4
Fuse carriers
500504_1
3-pole basic blocks

Rating Cartridge Number of Single-phase Reference Weight
fuse early break protection (3)
size contacts (1) device (2) kg
Connection by spring terminals
25 A 10 x 38 – (4) Without LS1 D323 0.270

32 A 10 x 38 – (4) Without LS1 D32 0.300
50 A 14 x 51 1 Without GK1 EK 0.430
With GK1 EV 0.470

LS1 D323
2 Without GK1 ES 0.470
500503_1
With GK1 EW 0.510
125 A 22 x 58 1 Without GK1 FK 0.860
With GK1 FV 0.900
2 Without GK1 FS 0.900
4 With GK1 FW 0.940
4-pole basic blocks

LS1 D32
32 A 10 x 38 – (4) Without LS1 D32 0.300
812882
+ LA8 D324 (5)

50 A 14 x 51 1 Without GK1 EM 0.570
With GK1 EY 0.600
2 Without GK1 ET 0.610
With GK1 EX 0.650
125 A 22 x 58 1 Without GK1 FM 1.090

GK1 FK
With GK1 FY 1.130
500503_1
500505_1
2 Without GK1 FT 1.130
With GK1 FX 1.160
Fuse carriers for the North American market

25 and 30 A basic blocks: please consult your Regional Sales Office.
(1) With 1 or 2 early break contacts to be inserted in the contactor control circuit.
(2) Fuse carriers with single-phase protection device must be fitted with striker fuses.
(3) LS1 D: clips directly onto a 35 mm 5 rail or screw fixing.
GK1: clips directly onto a 35 mm 5 rail or Telequick mounting plate.
LS1 D32 + LA8 D324 (4) Addition of add-on contact block, see page 4/35.
(5) Can be mounted on left-hand or right-hand side of the basic block.
Selection : Characteristics : Dimensions : Schemes :

4/34
References 4
Fuse carriers

Description For Mounting Maximum Type of Sold in Unit Weight
use on number contacts lots of reference kg
Instantaneous LS1 D32 Front 1 N/O + N/C 10 GV AE11 0.020
auxiliary contacts
(early break contacts) N/O + N/O 10 GV AE20 0.020
LS1 D323 Front 1 N/O + N/C 10 GV AE113 0.030
N/O + N/O 10 GV AE203 0.030
Operators
For fuse carrier For Reference Weight
810886
Rating Number of poles mounting on kg

Side handles
125 A 3 or 4 Right-hand side GK1 AP07 0.300
Left-hand side GK1 AP08 0.300
Front handles (1)

32 - 50 - 125 A Fitted as standard –
GK1 FK + GK1 AP07 External handles

32 A 3 or 4 Right-hand side LS1 D32005 (2) 0.200
4
Left-hand side LS1 D32006 0.200
Padlocking devices (3)

For fuse carrier Reference Weight
Rating Number of poles Single-phase
protection device kg
32 A 3 or 4 Without integral –
50 A 3 Without GK1 AV07 0.100
With GK1 AV08 0.110
4 Without GK1 AV08 0.110
With GK1 AV09 0.070
Links
Tubular links
For fuse carrier Sold in Unit Weight
Rating Number of poles lots of reference kg
32 A 3 or 4 10 DK1 CB92 (4) 0.007
50 A 3 or 4 10 DK1 EB92 (5) 0.012
125 A 3 or 4 10 DK1 FA92 (5) 0.020
(1) Fitted as standard on 32, 50 and 125 A fuse carriers type GK1.
(2) Reference LS1 D32005 replaces reference DK1 FB005.
(3) For the 125 A rating, use side handles GK1 AP07 or GK1 AP08.
(4) For use on a neutral circuit, the tubular link can be interlocked with special device LA8 D25906 (sold in lots of 10).
(5) 50 and 125 A fuse carriers type GK1 are fitted with an interlocked neutral tubular link as standard.

4/35
4
4
4/36
References 4
Accessories
Accessories for LS1 D32 (screw clamp terminals)

Plate for mounting LS1 D32 and contactor 1 LAD 311 0.040
LC1 D09...D38
Combination blocks Between LS1 D32 and 10 GV2 AF01 0.020
contactor LC1 K or LP1 K
Between LS1 D32 and 10 GV2 AF3 0.016
contactor LC1 D09...D38
Between LS1 D32 mounted 10 GV2 AF4 0.016
on LAD 311 and contactor
LC1 D09...D38
Description Application Pitch Reference Weight

mm kg
Sets of 3-pole 2 tap-offs 45 GV2 G245 0.036
63 A busbars
54 GV2 G254 0.038
72 GV2 G272 0.042
3 tap-offs 45 GV2 G345 0.058
54 GV2 G354 0.060
4 tap-offs 45 GV2 G445 0.077

4
54 GV2 G454 0.085
72 GV2 G472 0.094
5 tap-offs 54 GV2 G554 0.100

Protective end cover For unused busbar outlets 5 GV1 G10 0.005
Terminal blocks For supply to one or more 1 GV1 G09 0.040
Connection from the top GV2 G busbar sets
Cover for terminal block For mounting in modular panels 10 LA9 E07 0.005
Padlocking device For use with up to 4 padlocks 1 GV2 V03 0.092
(not supplied)
Ø 6 mm shank max
Accessories for LS1 D323 (spring terminals)
kg
Plate for mounting LS1 D323 and contactor LC1 D09...D38 LAD 311 0.040
Description Extension by Number Reference Weight

of starters kg
Power splitter box, 63 A LAD 32p 2 LAD 322 0.120
3 LAD 323 0.180
4 LAD 324 0.240
Description Kit contents Reference Weight

kg
Assembly and 1 LAD 311 plate for mounting LS1 D323 LAD 352 0.078
power connection kit 2 LAD 341 power connection modules
for LS1 D323 and - between LS1 D323 and power splitter box
LC1 D093...D323 - between LS1 D323 and contactor
Description Maximum Application Sold in Unit Weight

capacity lots of reference kg
Upstream 16 mm2 Power supply to 1 or 2 1 LAD 3B1 0.212
terminal block power splitter boxes
Downstream 16 mm2 Connection of motor cables 1 LAD 331 0.050
terminal block
Cable end – For connection of conductors 20 LAD 99 –
reducer from 1 to 1.5 mm2
4/37
mounting 4
Fuse carriers
LS1 D32 LS1 D32 + LA8 D324

Mounting on rail AM1 DP200 Panel Mounting Mounting of 4th pole
mounting on rail
AM1 DP200
On left-hand side On right-hand side
14,2
87
87
89
89
84
22,5 45 40 17,5 45 45 17,5
2xØ5
51,5 57
22,5
38,5 68,3
GK1 EK, EM, ES, ET, EV, EW, EX, EY GK1 E + GK1 AV (padlocking device)
Mounting on rail AM1 DP200 Mounting on
pre-slotted
plate AM 1P
40,5
20,5
45
95
4
8
29,5
53 45 4,5 4,5
45 a1
2
45
98
82 7,5 7,5 a 7,5 82
a: with single-phase protection device. External operator GK1 AP05 right-hand, GK1 AP06 left-hand
a1: without single-phase protection device. Panel cut-out
5
70
GK1 a a1
15 15
3P 4P 3P 4P
EK – – 88 –
EM – – – 114 8
70
ES – – 97 – 13 30
ET – – – 123 f
110
EV 106 – – –
EW 115 – – – External operator, RH or LH side f
EX – 141 – – GK1 EK, EM, ES, ET 29…114
EY – 132 – – GK1 EV, EW, EX, EY 29…114
GK1 Fp + GK1 AP07 (internal right-hand control)
Mounting on rail AM1 DE or ED Mounting on pre-slotted plate AM1PA
a AF1 EA4
4
GK1 a a1
3P 4P 3P 4P
47
Fp 70 105 96 131
100/110
120
44 6 a1 55 35
4
44 a
82 15 7,5 a (1)
82 a1
(1) Padlocking device (up to 3 padlocks)
Internal or external control GK1 AP07 RH, AP08LH
Panel cut-out (for external control)
5
GK1 a a1
= = 12,5
55
3P 4P 3P 4P
FK – – 121 –
FM – – – 156
8
55
FS – – 136 – == ==
25 30
FT – – – 171 8,5
110 f
FV 136 – – –
FW 151 – – – External operator, RH or LH side f
FX – 186 – – GK1 FK, FM, FS, FT 35…114
FY – 171 – – GK1 FV, FW, FX, FY 35…114
Selection : Characteristics : References : Schemes :

page 4/32 page 4/33 pages 4/34 and 4/35 page 4/39
4/38
Schemes 4
Fuse carriers
Fuse carriers without single-phase protection device

3-pole
LS1 D32, D323 LS1 D32, D323 + GV AE11p LS1 D32, D323 + GV AE20p GK1 EK
13
23
13
13
21
1
5
1
14
24
14
2
14
22
2
4-pole
GK1 ES GK1 FK GK1 FS LS1 D32 + LA8 D324
13
23
5
1
7
12
14
11
22
24
21
11
2
6
12
14
2
14
24
8
3-pole + Neutral
GK1 EM GK1 ET GK1 FM GK1 FT
13
13
23
N
N
1
5
4
11
12
14
2
14
14
24
12
14
11
22
24
21
2
6
Fuse carriers with single-phase protection device
3-pole
GK1 EV GK1 EW GK1 FV GK1 FW
13
13
23
1
5
1
12
14
11
22
24
21
2
14
14
24
6
96
96
12
14
11
2
96
98
98
98
96
98
95
95
95
95
3-pole + Neutral
GK1 EY GK1 EX
13
13
23
N
N
1
5
2
14
14
24
96
96
98
98
95
95
GK1 FY GK1 FX
N
N
5
1
12
14
11
22
24
21
12
14
11
96
98
2
6
96
98
95
95
Selection : Characteristics : References : Dimensions :

4/39
Selection guide 4
Switch-disconnector-fuses, 32 to 1250 A
Applications GS1 switch-disconnector-fuses provide on-load breaking and making, safe isolation and
They are used, in particular, on the incoming supply for control panels, for protecting and switching
They provide simultaneous disconnection, together with all the other associated functions such as
Their compact design means that they can also be fitted in small automation system equipment to
Fuse type NF C or DIN
Rated thermal current (Ith) 32 A 50 A 63 A 100 A 125 A 160 A 250 A 400 A 630 A 1250 A
4
Number of poles 3 3 or 4
3 + Nc
Fuse size 10 x 38 14 x 51 T000 22 x 58 22 x 58 T0 T1 T2 T3 T4

T00 T00
Internal operator, packlockable Front Side Side or front
External operator, padlockable and lockable Side or front
Rated operational voltage (Ue) 690 V
Rated operational current (Ie) at 400 V, AC-23A 32 A 50 A 63 A 100 A 125 A 160 A 250 A 400 A 630 A 1250 A
Rated breaking capacity at 400 V, AC-23B 256 A 400 A 500 A 800 A 1000 A 1280 A 2000 A 3200 A 5040 A 10 000 A
Rated making capacity at 400 V, AC-23B 320 A 500 A 630 A 1000 A 1250 A 1600 A 2500 A 4000 A 6300 A 12 500 A
Rated rms conditional short circuit current 100 kA 100 kA 100 kA 100 kA 100 kA 100 kA 100 kA 100 kA 100 kA 100 kA
at 400 V, with gG (gI) fuses
Switch-disconnector-fuse type references GS1 GS1 GS1 GS1 GS1 GS1 GS1 GS1 GS1 GS1
DD F G J K L N QQ S V
or KK or LL
Pages 4/48 and 4/49
4/40
4
4
overcurrent protection.
off main circuits (including Emergency stop).
padlocking and interlocking.
provide disconnect and protection functions on the incoming supply of equipment, generators or starters, including motors.
BS
32 A 63 A 100 A 160 A 200 A 250 A 315 A 400 A 630 A 800 A 1250 A

4
A1 A2-A3 A4 Ø y 31 A4-B1-B2 B1-B2 B1...B3 B1...B3 B1...B4 C1-C2 C1...C3 D1

mm
Front Side Side or front
Side or front
32 A 63 A 100 A 160 A 200 A 250 A 315 A 400 A 630 A 800 A 1000 A
256 A 500 A 800 A 1280 A 1600 A 2000 A 2520 A 3200 A 5040 A 6400 A 10,000 A
320 A 630 A 1000 A 1600 A 2000 A 2500 A 3150 A 4000 A 6300 A 8000 A 8000 A
100 kA 100 kA 100 kA 80 kA 100 kA 80 kA 80 kA 80 kA 100 kA 100 kA 100 kA
GS1 GS1 GS1 GS1 GS1 GS1 GS1 GS1 GS1 GS1 GS1
DDB GB JB LB MMB NB PPB QQB SB TB VB
or LLB
4/50
4/41
General 4
Functions Breaking
Functions b Quick break and quick tripping mechanism.
b Breaking mechanism independent of fuses.
b Utilisation categories AC-23/690 V and DC-23/500 V.
Isolation
b Upstream and downstream breaking of fuses.
Up to 630 A: NFC/DIN, up to 800 A: BS
Upstream breaking of fuses for 1250 A.
b GS1 AN auxiliary contacts.
b Contacts forced open in the event of welding.
b Visible isolation distance between the open contacts.
Protection
4 b Addition of gG (gl) fuses.
b Addition of aM fuses (associated with thermal overload relays).
b Addition of quick-blow fuses.
b “Blown fuse” detection device.
b Conditional short-circuit withstand voltage of 100 kA for all ratings.
b Handles with padlocking facility.

b Interlocking of handles by means of lock.
b Door interlock in “I” position.
b Fuse covers fitted as standard on all ratings.
b IPXXB terminal blocks fitted as standard up to 63 A, available as an option on

other ratings.
Information and testing

b Up to 10 auxiliary contacts.
b Test facility with auxiliary contacts GS1 ANT and handles GS1 AHT.
Product overview NF C and DIN fuses BS fuses

pages 4/44 to 4/47 pages 4/48 to 4/57 pages 4/58 to 4/62 page 4/63
4/42
4
4
v Opening and closing independent of operator speed. v On-load making and breaking of resistive, inductive or mixed
v Quality and durability of mechanical and electrical lives. resistive and inductive circuits.
v Durable performance in severe duty applications. v Direct switching of motors.
v Double break isolation of the power circuit and safe replacement of v Total isolation of power and control circuits to ensure safety of
fuses. persons and equipment.
v Control circuit isolation. –
v Fully apparent break (up to 315 A rating). “Open” position cannot v Safe opening and clear indication of “Open” state of switch-
be indicated unless all contacts are actually open. disconnector.
v Visible break (400 to 1250 A ratings). –
– v Protection of distribution circuits and power switching circuits 4

without significant current peak.
v Type 2 coordination (Iq > 50 kA) for motor starters consisting of v Protection of motors.
fuses, contactor, relay.
– v Protection of electronic variable speed controllers and soft starters.
– v Protection against single-phasing.
v Equivalence between the breaking capacity of the fuses and the v Use in installations where very high short-circuit currents can
ability of the switch-disconnector-fuse to withstand this maximum develop.
capacity.
– –
v Protection against accidental contact. v Protection of persons.
– –
v Early break, “Open” and “Closed” position signalling, and “blown v Use in automation systems.
fuse” signalling.
Accessories
Handles Contacts
v Internal or external. v Addition of up to 8 auxiliary contacts GS1 AN suitable for isolation.
v Mounted on right-hand side. Reversibility of these contacts to convert an N/C contact into an N/O
v Mounted on left-hand side. contact and vice versa.
v Mounted on front with door interlock.
v Padlockable with up to 3 padlocks. v Control circuit test facility, off-load, with auxiliary contacts GS1 ANT
v Lockable. used in conjunction with handles GS1 AHT.
v Black / Black or Yellow / Red.
v Two auxiliary early break and “O” and “I” position signalling
contacts.
v Auxiliary “blown fuse” signalling contacts.

4/43
Characteristics 4
for use with NF C or DIN fuses
Type GS1 DD GS1 F GS1 G GS1 J

Environment
Conforming to standards Switch-disconnector-fuses IEC 60947-3 and 5, NF C 63-130, VDE 0660, NBN 63408
Circuit-breakers IEC 60269-1 and 2, NFC 63-210 and 63-211, VDE 0636-1, DIN 43620
Product certifications ASEFA/LOVAG, KEMA, LROS, CEBEC
Flame resistance Body °C 960 960
conforming to IEC 60695-2-1 Fuse cover °C – 850
Rated thermal current at 40 °C (Ith) A 32 50 63 100
Fuse size 10 x 38 14 x 51 T000 22 x 58
Rated insulation voltage (Ui) V 690 750 750 750
Rated impulse withstand voltage (Uimp) kV 8 8 8 8
Rated operational power Cat. AC-23A/B (1) a 400 V kW 15 25 33 55
a 500 V kW 18.5 (2) 33 45 75
a 690 V kW 25 (2) 45 55 90
Rated operational current (Ie) Cat. AC-23A/B (1) a 400 V A 32 50 63 100
a 500 V A 32 (2) 50 63 100
a 690 V A 32 (2) 50 63 100
Cat. DC-23A/B (1) c 500 V (3) A 20 40 40 80
Short-circuit withstand I rms with protection by kA 100 100 100 100
4 gG (gl) fuses
Short-circuit making capacity I rms with protection by kA 100 100 100 100
gG (gl) fuses
Fuse ratings A 32 50 63 100
Rated breaking capacity I rms at 400 V Cat. AC-23B A 256 400 500 800
Rated making capacity I rms at 400 V Cat. AC-23B A 320 500 630 1000
Mechanical durability Number of operating cycles 30 000 10 000 10 000 10 000
Electrical durability Number of operating cycles 1500/300 1500 1500 1500
Cat. AC/DC-23A/B (1)
Cabling Cable c.s.a. min/max mm2 2.5/16 6/25 10/25 25/95
Bars min c.s.a./max width mm – – – –
Tightening torque N.m 3 3.2 3.2 12
GS1 AMp11 and GS1 AM1 to AM4 early break and signalling contact characteristics
Rated thermal current at 40 °C (Ith) A 16
Rated operational current (Ie) Cat. AC-15 A 127 V 5; 230 V: 4; 400 /415 V: 3; 440 V: 2
Cat. DC-13 A 24 V: 12; 48 V: 2; 110 V: 0.6; 220 V: 0.4
Durability Number of operating cycles Mechanical: 1 000 000; electrical Cat. AC-15: 30 000
Fuse protection gG A 6 max
Cabling mm Faston connectors: 1 x 6.35 or 2 x 2.8
GS1 AN and GS1 ANT signalling contact characteristics (4)

Rated operational current (Ie) Cat. AC-15 A 230 V 10; 400/415 V: 8; 440 V: 6
Cat. DC-13 A 48 V: 4; 110 V: 1.2; 220 V: 1
Durability Number of operating cycles Mechanical: 30 000; electrical Cat. AC-15: 10 000
Protection by fuses gG A 16 max
Cabling Cable c.s.a. min/max mm2 Min: 1.5; max: 16
(1) Category “A” frequent operating cycles, category “B” infrequent operating cycles.
(2) With tubular links.
(3) 2 poles in series per phase.
(4) Cannot be used on GS1 DD.
General : References : Dimensions : Schemes :

pages 4/42 and 4/43 pages 4/48 to 4/57 pages 4/58 to 4/62 page 4/63
4/44
4
4
GS1 K GS1 KK GS1 L GS1 LL GS1 N GS1 QQ GS1 S GS1 V
IEC 60947-3 and 5, NF C 63-130, VDE 0660, NBN 63408

IEC 60269-1 and 2, NFC 63-210 and 63-211, VDE 0636-1, DIN 43620
ASEFA/LOVAG, KEMA, LROS, CEBEC
“TH”
960
850
125 125 160 160 250 400 630 1250

22 x 58 T00 T0 T00 T1 T2 T3 T4
750 750 750 750 750 750 1000 1000
8 8 8 8 8 8 12 12
63 63 90 90 132 220 355 710
90 90 110 110 160 220 355 670/710
90 90 110 110 220 220/295 295/400 600/750
125 125 160 160 250 400 630 1250
125 125 160 160 250 315/315 500 900/1000
100 100 125 125 250 250/315 315/400 630/800
100 100 125/80 125/80 160 200/315 400/630 800/1000
100 100 100 100 100 100/50 100 100
100 100 100 100 100 100/50 100 100 4

125 125 160 160 250 315/400 630 1250
1000 1000 1280 1280 2000 3200 5040 10 000
1250 1250 1600 1600 2500 4000 6300 12 500
10 000 10 000 10 000 10 000 10 000 10 000 5000 5000
1000 1000 1000/200 1000/200 1000/200 1000/200 1000/200 500/100
35/95 35/95 50/95 50/95 95/240 185/240 2 x 150 / 2 x 300 – / 4 x 185

– – – – – – /45 2 x 30 x 5 / 63 2 x 60 x 5 / 100
12 12 12 12 25 25 44 44
16
127 V: 5; 230 V: 4; 400 /415 V: 3; 440 V: 2
24 V: 12; 48 V: 2; 110 V: 0.6; 220 V: 0.4
Mechanical: 1 000 000; electrical Cat. AC-15: 30 000
6 max
Faston connectors: 1 x 6.35 or 2 x 2.8
20
230 V: 10; 400 /415 V: 8; 440 V: 6
48 V: 4; 110 V: 1.2; 220 V: 1
Mechanical: 30 000; electrical Cat. AC-15: 10 000
16 max
Min: 1.5; Max: 16

4/45
Characteristics 4
for use with BS fuses
Type GS1 DDB GS1 GB GS1 JB

Environment
Conforming to standards Switch-disconnector-fuses IEC 60947-3 and 5, NF C 63-130, VDE 0660, NBN 63408
Circuit-breakers IEC 60269-1 and 2, NFC 63-210 and 63-211, VDE 0636-1, DIN 43620
Product certifications ASEFA/LOVAG, KEMA, pending: LROS
Flame resistance Body °C 960
conforming to IEC 60695-2-1 Fuse cover °C – 850
Rated thermal current at 40 °C (Ith) A 32 63 100
Fuse size A1 A2-A3 A4 Ø y 31 mm
Rated insulation voltage (Ui) V 690 750 750
Rated impulse withstand voltage (Uimp) kV 8 8 8
Rated operational power Cat. AC-23A/B (1) a 400 V kW 15 30 51
a 500 V kW 18.5 40 63
a 690 V kW 25 55 90
Rated operational current (Ie) Cat. AC-23A/B (1) a 400 V A 32 63 100
a 500 V A 32 63 100
a 690 V A 32 63 100
Cat. DC-23A/B (1) c 500 V (2) A 20 40 100
Short-circuit withstand I rms with protection by BS fuses kA 80 100 100
4 Short-circuit making capacity I rms with protection by BS fuses

Fuse ratings
kA
A
80
32
100
63
100
100
Rated breaking capacity I rms at 400 V Cat. AC-23B A 256 500 800
Rated making capacity I rms at 400 V Cat. AC-23B A 320 630 1000
Mechanical durability Number of operating cycles 30 000 10 000 10 000
Electrical durability Number of operating cycles 1500/300 1500/300 1500/300
Cat. AC/DC-23A/B (1)
Cabling Cable c.s.a. min/max mm2 2.5/16 10/25 25/95
Bars min c.s.a./max width mm – – –
Tightening torque N.m 3 3.2 12
GS1 AMp11 and GS1 AM1 to AM4 early break and signalling contact characteristics
Rated operational current (Ie) Cat. AC-15 A 127 V 5; 230 V: 4; 400 /415 V: 3; 440 V: 2
Cat. DC-13 A 24 V: 12; 48 V: 2; 110 V: 0.6; 220 V: 0.4
Durability Number of operating cycles Mechanical: 1 000 000; electrical Cat. AC-15: 30 000
Cabling mm Faston connectors: 1 x 6.35 or 2 x 2.8
GS1 AN and GS1 ANT signalling contact characteristics

Rated operational current (Ie) Cat. AC-15 A 230 V 10; 400/415 V: 8; 440 V: 6
Cat. DC-13 A 48 V: 4; 110 V: 1.2; 220 V: 1
Durability Number of operating cycles Mechanical: 30 000; electrical Cat. AC-15: 10 000
Cabling Cable c.s.a. min/max mm2 Min: 1.5; max: 16
(1) Category “A” frequent operating cycles, category “B” infrequent operating cycles.
(2) 2 poles in series per phase.
(3) Fit switch-disconnector-fuses GS1 LB with B1 or B2 fuses and GS1 LLB with A4 fuses.

4/46
4
4
GS1 LB or LLB (1) GS1 MMB GS1 NB GS1 PPB GS1 QQB GS1 SB GS1 TB GS1 VB
IEC 60947-3 and 5, NF C 63-130, VDE 0660, NBN 63408

IEC 60269-1 and 2, NFC 63-210 and 63-211, VDE 0636-1, DIN 43620
ASEFA/LOVAG, KEMA, pending: LROS
“TH”
960
850
160 200 250 315 400 630 800 1250

A4, B1-B2 (3) B1-B2 B1...B3 B1...B3 B1...B4 C1-C2 C1...C3 D1
750 750 750 750 1000 1000 1000 1000
8 8 8 8 12 12 12 12
80 100 132 132 220 355 450 560
110 140 160 160 400 355 450 560
110 150 220 220 220/295 295/400 600/750 600
160 200 250 250 400 630 800 1000
160 200 250 250 315 500 630 800
125 160 250 250 250/315 315/400 630/800 630
125 125 160 160 200/315 400/630 800 800/1000
80 80 80 80 80 – – –
80
160
80
200
80
250
55
315
80/50
400
100
630
100
800
100
1250
4
1280 1600 2000 2000 3200 5040 6400 10 000
1600 2000 2500 2500 4000 6300 8000 8000
10 000 10 000 10 000 10 000 8000 6000 6000 6000
1000/200 1000/200 1000/200 1000/200 1000/200 1000/200 500/100 500/100
50/95 50/95 95/240 95/240 185/240 2 x 150 / 2 x 300 – – / 4 x 185

– – – – – / 40 2 x 30 x 5 / 63 2 x 60 x 5 / 63 2 x 60 x 5 / 100
12 12 25 25 25 44 44 44
16
127 V: 5; 230 V: 4; 400 /415 V: 3; 440 V: 2
24 V: 12; 48 V: 2; 110 V: 0.6; 220 V: 0.4
Mechanical: 1 000 000; electrical Cat. AC-15: 30 000
6 max
Faston connectors: 1 x 6.35 or 2 x 2.8
20
230 V: 10; 400 /415 V: 8; 440 V: 6
48 V: 4; 110 V: 1.2; 220 V: 1
Mechanical: 30 000; electrical Cat. AC-15: 10 000
16 max
Min: 1.5; max: 16

4/47
References 4
Switch-disconnector-fuse switch bodies for use with NF C or DIN fuses

532783
Switch rating Fuse size Number of poles Reference Weight

A kg
For external operators mounted on RH or LH side, and front-mounted internal or external operators
32 10 x 38 3 GS1 DD3 0.510
3 + Nc (1) GS1 DD4 0.540
GS1 DD3
For internal or external operators mounted on right-hand side
50 14 x 51 3 GS1 FD3 0.900
4 GS1 FD4 1.100
63 Size 000 (2) 3 GS1 GD3 1.100
4 GS1 GD4 1.400
100 22 x 58 3 GS1 JD3 1.700
4 GS1 JD4 2.100
532783
125 22 x 58 3 GS1 KD3 1.700

4 GS1 KD4 2.100
Size 00 3 GS1 KKD3 1.700
4 GS1 KKD4 2.100
160 Size 0 3 GS1 LD3 2.200
GS1 FD3 4 GS1 LD4 2.800
Size 00 3 GS1 LLD3 1.700
4 GS1 LLD4 2.100
4 250 Size 1 3
4
GS1 ND3
GS1 ND4
3.500
4.500
400 Size 2 3 GS1 QQD3 4.700
4 GS1 QQD4 6.600
630 Size 3 3 GS1 SD3 16.500
532785
4 GS1 SD4 20.500

1250 Size 4 3 GS1 VD3 27.500
4 GS1 VD4 34.500
For external operators mounted on left-hand side

50 14 x 51 3 GS1 FG3 0.900
4 GS1 FG4 1.100
GS1 ND4
63 Size 000 (2) 3 GS1 GG3 1.100
4 GS1 GG4 1.400
100 22 x 58 3 GS1 JG3 1.700
4 GS1 JG4 2.100
125 22 x 58 3 GS1 KG3 1.700
4 GS1 KG4 2.100
Size 00 3 GS1 KKG3 1.700
532786
4 GS1 KKG4 2.100

160 Size 0 3 GS1 LG3 2.200
4 GS1 LG4 2.800
Size 00 3 GS1 LLG3 1.700
4 GS1 LLG4 2.100
250 Size 1 3 GS1 NG3 3.500
4 GS1 NG4 4.500
400 Size 2 3 GS1 QQG3 4.700
GS1 KKG3 4 GS1 QQG4 6.600
(1) Nc = Switched neutral.

(2) Compact fuses for German market.
General : Characteristics : Dimensions : Schemes :

4/48
Switch-disconnector-fuse switch bodies for use with NF C or DIN fuses

532787

A kg
For front-mounted external operators
50 14 x 51 3 GS1 F3 1.200
4 GS1 F4 1.400
GS1 K4 63 Size 000 (1) 3 GS1 G3 1.400
4 GS1 G4 1.700
100 22 x 58 3 GS1 J3 2.000
4 GS1 J4 2.400
125 22 x 58 3 GS1 K3 2.000
4 GS1 K4 2.400
Size 00 3 GS1 KK3 2.000
4 GS1 KK4 2.400
160 Size 0 3 GS1 L3 2.500
4 GS1 L4 3.100
Size 00 3 GS1 LL3 2.000
4 GS1 LL4 2.400
250 Size 1 3 GS1 N3 3.800
4 GS1 N4 4.800
400 Size 2 3 GS1 QQ3 4.500
4 GS1 QQ4 6.800
For front-mounted internal and external operators 4

630 Size 3 3 GS1 S3 16.500
4 GS1 S4 20.500
1250 Size 4 3 GS1 V3 27.500
4 GS1 V4 34.500
(1) Compact fuses for German market.

4/49
References 4
for use with BS fuses
Switch-disconnector-fuse switch bodies for use with BS fuses

532788

A kg
For external operators mounted on RH or LH side, and front-mounted internal or external operators
32 A1 3 GS1 DDB3 0.510
3 + Nc (1) GS1 DDB4 0.540
For internal or external operators mounted on right-hand side

63 A2-A3 3 GS1 GBR3 1.100
GS1 DDB3 4 GS1 GBR4 1.400
100 A4 Ø y 31 mm 3 GS1 JBR3 1.700
4 GS1 JBR4 2.100
160 A4 3 GS1 LLBR3 2.200
4 GS1 LLBR4 2.900
B1-B2 3 GS1 LBR3 2.200
4 GS1 LBR4 2.900
200 B1-B2 3 GS1 MMBR3 2.200
4 GS1 MMBR4 2.900
250 B1...B3 3 GS1 NBR3 3.500
532789
4 GS1 NBR4 4.500

315 B1...B3 3 GS1 PPBR3 3.500
4 GS1 PPBR4 4.500
4 400 B1...B4 3
4
GS1 QQBR3
GS1 QQBR4
4.700
6.600
630 C1-C2 3 GS1 SBR3 17.500
4 GS1 SBR4 21.500
GS1 NBR3 800 C1...C3 3 GS1 TBR3 22.000
3+N GS1 TBR4 26.500
1250 D1 3 GS1 VBR3 27.500
4 GS1 VBR4 34.500

32 A1 3 GS1 DB3 1.200
4 GS1 DB4 1.400
63 A2-A3 3 GS1 GB3 1.400
4 GS1 GB4 1.700
532790
100 A4 Ø y 31 mm 3 GS1 JB3 2.000

4 GS1 JB4 2.400
160 A4 3 GS1 LLB3 2.200
4 GS1 LLB4 2.900
B1-B2 3 GS1 LB3 2.500
4 GS1 LB4 3.200
GS1 GB3 200 B1-B2 3 GS1 MMB3 2.500
4 GS1 MMB4 3.200
250 B1...B3 3 GS1 NB3 3.800
4 GS1 NB4 4.800
315 B1...B3 3 GS1 PPB3 3.800
4 GS1 PPB4 4.800
400 B1...B4 3 GS1 QQB3 4.500
4 GS1 QQB4 6.800
For front-mounted internal or external operators

630 C1-C2 3 GS1 SB3 17.500
4 GS1 SB4 21.500
800 C1...C3 3 GS1 TB3 22.000
3+N GS1 TB4 26.500
1250 D1 3 GS1 VB3 27.500
4 GS1 VB4 34.500
(1) Nc = Switched neutral.

4/50
References 4
Auxiliary and signalling contacts
Auxiliary early break and/or O and I position signalling contacts

532791
Switch rating Type of contact Mounting Reference Weight

A kg
32 1 N/O Front (1) GS1 AM110 0.015
1 N/C Front (1) GS1 AM101 0.015
1 C/O Side (2) GS1 AM111 0.060
2 C/O Side (2) GS1 AM211 0.070
GS1 AM1pp
Auxiliary early break and O and I position signalling contacts
Switch rating Type of contact Reference Weight
A kg
50...400 1 C/O GS1 AM1 (3) 0.030
630...1250 1 C/O GS1 AM3 0.030
50...400 2 C/O GS1 AM2 (3) 0.050
532792
630...1250 2 C/O GS1 AM4 0.050
Auxiliary O and I position signalling contacts (4)

Switch rating Type of contact Reference Weight
A kg
Standard contacts
50...400 1 N/C + 1 N/O GS1 AN11 (5) 0.100
2 N/C + 2 N/O GS1 AN22 (5) 0.200
GS1 AM1p11
Contacts with test facility (6)
4
50...400 1 N/C + 1 N/O GS1 ANT11 0.100
2 N/C + 2 N/O GS1 ANT22 0.200
Auxiliary “blown fuse” signalling contacts for use with NF C and DIN fuses (7)
Type of contact Switch rating Fuse size Number of poles Reference Weight
A kg
532793
1st C/O 50 14 x 51 3 GS1 AF1 0.030

4 GS1 AF1 0.030
100 and 125 22 x 58 3 GS1 AF23 0.040
4 GS1 AF24 0.050
160 T0 3 GS1 AF33 0.050
4 GS1 AF34 0.060
250 and 400 T1 and T2 3 GS1 AF43 0.060
4 GS1 AF44 0.060
630 T3 3 GS1 AF63 0.070
GS1 AM1
4 GS1 AF64 0.070
1250 T4 3 GS1 AF73 0.070
4 GS1 AF74 0.070
532794
2nd C/O 50...400 – 3 GS1 AF 0.020

4 GS1 AF 0.020
630...1250 – 3 GS1 AFF 0.020
4 GS1 AFF 0.020
(1) For use with front or side-mounted external operator.

(2) For use only with front-mounted internal operator.
(3) Except for switch-disconnector-fuses with operator mounted on left-hand side.
(4) Reversible add-on attachments for converting an N/C contact to an N/O contact and vice versa.
(5) For switch-disconnector-fuses with external operator mounted on left-hand side, add suffix G to the reference.
Example: GS1 AN11G.
GS1 ANp (6) Provides Test function only with handles GS1 AHT ppp.
(7) BS fuses are not available with striker.

4/51
4
4
GS1 AH310...340
GS1 AH210...240
50...400A
GS1 AH01, AH02

4
GS1 AH250
GS1 AH260
630...1250A
GS1 AH030
(1) See page 4/56
4/52
References 4
Side-mounted operators
Side-mounted operators
Switch rating Type of operator Colour of handle/front plate Reference Weight
A kg
Handles for internal operators mounted on right-hand side, padlockable
50 and 63 – Black/– GS1 AH01 0.050
100...400 – Black/– GS1 AH02 0.090
630...1250 Lockable (1) in "O" position Black/– GS1 AH030 0.300
Handles for external operators mounted on right-hand side, padlockable, IP 65

32 – Black/Black GS1 AH101 0.160
Red/Yellow GS1 AH102 0.160
50 and 63 Lockable (2) in "O" position Black/Black GS1 AH210 0.320
100...400 Lockable (2) in "O" position Black/Black GS1 AH230 0.350
630...1250 Lockable (1) or (3) in "O" position Black/Black GS1 AH250 0.600
Handles for external operators mounted on left-hand side, padlockable, IP 65 (4)

50 and 63 Lockable (2) in "O" position Black/Black GS1 AH310 0.320
100...400 Lockable(2) in "O" position

Red/Yellow
Black/Black
GS1
GS1
AH320
AH330
0.320
0.350 4
(1) Lockable with device GS1 AX11 to be ordered separately.

(4) For switch-disconnector-fuses with NF C and DIN fuses.

4/53
4
4
32A
GS1 AH103
GS1 AH101
4
50...400A
GS1 AH110...140
GS1 AH150...160
630...1250A
GS1 AH040
(1) See page 4/56
4/54
References 4
Front-mounted operators
Front-mounted operators
Switch rating Type of operator Colour of handle/front plate Reference Weight
A kg
Handles for front-mounted internal operators, padlockable
32 – Black/– GS1 AH103 0.045
630...1250 Lockable (1) or (2) in "O" position Black/– GS1 AH040 0.600
Handles for front-mounted external operators, padlockable, IP 65.

Door interlock in “I” position (4)
50 and 63 Lockable(3) in "O" position Black/Black GS1 AH110 0.320
100...400 Lockable(3) in "O" position Black/Black GS1 AH130 0.350
630...1250 Lockable(1) in "O" position Black/Black GS1 AH150 0.700
Handles for front-mounted external operators, padlockable, with test facility IP 65.
Door interlock in “I” position (4)
50 and 63 Lockable(3) in "O" position Black/Black GS1 AHT110 0.320
Red/Yellow GS1 AHT120 0.320
100...400 Lockable(3) in "O" position Black/Black GS1 AHT130 0.350 4

(4) Door interlock can be overridden with a tool on ratings up to 400 A.

4/55
References 4
Accessories
Shaft extensions for external operators

532797
Switch rating Operator Shaft Reference Weight

Type length cross section
A mm mm kg
32 Side or front-mounted 200 5x5 GS1 AE9 0.105
50…400 Side-mounted 200 10 x 10 GS1 AE1 0.050
Front-mounted 320 10 x 10 GS1 AE2 0.200
630...1250 Side-mounted 200 15 x 15 GS1 AE5 0.500
Front-mounted 200 15 x 15 GS1 AE6 0.450
GS1 AXpp
Kits for handle locking devices
Switch rating Type of operator Key description Reference Weight
A kg
50...400 External Ronis EL11AP GS1 AX31 0.400
Side or front-mounted
630...1250 Internal or external Ronis 1104 GS1 AX11 0.020
Side or front-mounted
Internal Ronis EL11AP GS1 AX21 0.200
Front-mounted
Cage terminals for connection of bare cables (without lug)
Switch rating Number of poles Reference Weight
A kg
100...160 3 GS1 AW33 0.070
4 4 GS1 AW34 0.090
250 3 GS1 AW43 0.013
4 GS1 AW44 0.017

4/56
Accessories
Terminal covers for upstream or downstream connector plates

A kg
50 and 63 3 or 4 (1) –
100...160 3 GS1 AP33 0.100
4 GS1 AP34 0.100
200…400 3 GS1 AP43 0.250
4 GS1 AP44 0.300
630 3 GS1 AP63 0.400
4 GS1 AP64 0.500
Terminal covers for upstream connector plates

A kg
800 3 GS1 AP73 0.400
4 GS1 AP74 0.500
1250 3 GS1 AP83 0.300
4 GS1 AP84 0.400
Fuse cover locking devices (2)

A kg
50
63
14 x 51 and A1
T00C and A2-A3
3 or 4
3 or 4
(1)
GS1 AV1
–
0.010
4
100...160 22 x 58, T00 and A4 3 or 4 GS1 AV2 0.010
160 T0 3 GS1 AV33 0.050
4 GS1 AV34 0.050
B1-B2 3 GS1 AV43 0.150
4 GS1 AV44 0.180
250 T1 3 GS1 AV53 0.060
4 GS1 AV54 0.060
B1...B3 3 GS1 AV63 0.180
4 GS1 AV64 0.220
400 T2 and B1...B4 3 GS1 AV73 0.180
4 GS1 AV74 0.220
(1) Fitted as standard on these switch-disconnector-fuses.

(2) For switch-disconnector-fuses fitted with internal or external operators mounted on right-hand side.

4/57
Dimensions 4
GS1 DD (32 A)
Front-mounted internal operator
98
96
44 37,5 15
19 6 35
fix. 79,5
14
98
45
65 9 21,5 5,2
84 21,5 17
GS1 DD (32 A) Accessories

Front-mounted external operator GS1 AMp11
46,5 105 mini 37,5 15 Ø 65 64 18
4 130 (1) 155 (2)

35
O
14
90
I
(1) With 1 or 2 GS1 AM1pp
(2) With 3 or 4 GS1 AM1pp
External RH side-mounted operator GS1 AM1pp
mini 36 46,5 19 6 90 Ø 65
=
O
=
64
9 24 24 65
Door cut-out
For external front-mounted and LH side-mounted operator For external RH side-mounted operator
Fixing by 2 Ø 4 screws Fixing by M22 nut Fixing by 2 Ø 4 screws Fixing by M22 nut
90
2 Ø 4,5 3 2 Ø 4,5
Ø 31 Ø 22,5 Ø 31 Ø 22,5
O
50
50
O
12,7
12,7
3
90
General : Characteristics : References : Schemes :

4/58
GS1 F (50 A), G and GB (63 A) GS1 J or JB (100 A), K (125 A)

Side-mounted internal operator Side-mounted internal operator
134 106,5 (1) 18 36 36 38

c P P
53
26
=
=
120,5
144
106
144
162
127
141
=
=
24 J G J1
19
53
31 a
a c G J J1 P 31 38 36
GS1 F 3P 114 87 27 29 58 27
173 (2)
4P 141 87 54 29 58 27
GS1 G 3P 129 116.5 32 34 63 32
4P 161 116.5 64 34 63 32
GS1 GB 3P 129 92.5 32 34 63 32 (1) Terminal cover
4P 161 92.5 64 34 63 32 (2) 3P: 148, 4P: 184
Side-mounted external operator Side-mounted external operator 4
(1) 70
127
106
70,5 31
126,5 31 36 (1) 70
(1) GS1 F: min 60, max 68. GS1 G and GB: min 65, max 73.
Without shaft extension (1) Min 69, max 77, without shaft extension.
Front-mounted external operator Front-mounted external operator
70 (1) (2) 36,5 70 (1) 36 65,5 36,5

106
70,5
127
126,5
(1) GS1 F: min 94, max 165. GS1 G: min 124, max 165.
GS1 GB: min 100, max 165.
(2) GS1 F: 57.5 ; GS1 G and GB: 62.5. (1) Min 114, max 165.
GS1
External front and side-mounted operator
Door cut-out
50
50

4/59
GS1 KK (125 A), L, LL, LB and LLB (160 A) GS1 MMB (200 A), N or NB (250 A), PPB (315 A) and QQ (400 A)
Side-mounted internal operator Side-mounted internal operator
173 c P P
c (1) P P (1)
75
53
141
162
b1
b
53
19,5
75
19,5 J G J1
31 a
31 J G J1
a c G H J J1 P 173 a
GS1 L 3P 190 136.5 50 140 50 90 50
4P 240 136.5 100 140 50 90 50 a b b1 c G H J J1 P
GS1 KK, LL 3P 148 126.5 36 127 38 74 36 GS1 MMB, N, NB 3P 250 195 166 146 60 162 60 130 60
4 GS1 LB, LLB

4P
3P
184
190
126.5
123
72
50
127
140
38
50
112
90
36
50 GS1 QQ, PPB 3P
4P 310
271
195
205
166
174
146
149
120
60
162
172
60
66
130
139
60
66
4P 240 123 100 140 50 90 50 4P 337 205 174 149 132 172 66 139 66
(1) Terminal cover. (1) Terminal cover.
Side-mounted external operator Side-mounted external operator
GS1 KK/LL = 141
GS1 L = 174
GS1 QQ = 200
GS1 N =185
126,5 31 (1) 70
GS1 KK/LL = 189 126,5 31 (1) 70

GS1 L = 229
GS1 N = 251
GS1 QQ = 260
(1) GS1 KK or LL: min 69, max 77. GS1 L, LB, LLB, MB: min 83, max 91.
Without shaft extension (1) Min 124, max 132. Without shaft extension.
Front-mounted external operator Front-mounted external operator
70 (1) (2) 36,5 70 (2) (1) 36,5

126,5
126,5
(1) GS1 KK, LL: min 134, max 165. GS1 L: min 144, max 165.
GS1 LB, LLB: min 130, max 165. (1) GS1 MMB, N (3P): 90.5. GS1 MMB, N (4P): 114.5. GS1 PPB, QQ: 121.
(2) GS1 KK, L and LL: 66,5. GS1 LB, LLB: 80.5 . (2) Min 154, max 225.

4/60
GS1 S (630 A) and GS1 TB (800 A)

Side-mounted internal operator Side-mounted external operator
a1
279,5 J 250 76
190 50 (1)
85
M
150
250
260
b
b1
M
7 R 44,5 143 (2) 96 21

72 80 80 80
268 a
a a1 b b1 J M R (1) Terminal cover.

GS1 S 3P 421.5 345.5 300 85 19.5 20 45.5 (2) Without shaft extension. Minimum length with
shaft extension 143 + 27.
4P 501.5 425.5 300 85 99.5 20 34.5
GS1 TB 3P
4P
421.5
501.5
345.5
425.5
320
320
65
65
19.5
99.5
30
30
45.5
34.5 4
GS1 V (1250 A)
Side-mounted internal operator Side-mounted external operator
190 89,5 a1
106 16 G 76
7 250 (1)
74
183
363
250
72
9
187 43 120 120 120 62 143 (2) 96 21
330 a
a a1 G (1) Protective screen for connector plates.

GS1 V 3P 522 437 345 (2) Without shaft extension. Minimum length with
shaft extension: 143 + 27.
4P 641 557 465
GS1 S (630 A) and GS1 V (1250 A) GS1 V (1250 A)
Side-mounted external operator Connector plate
Door cut-out
50
25
50
25
= = (1)
(1) Upstream connector plate: 80,

downstream connector plate: 65.

4/61
GS1 S (630 A) and GS1 TB (800 A)

Front-mounted internal operator Front-mounted external operator
a1
J 250 76
268 (1) 50 38,5
M1
85
150
250
M
b
b1
M1
7 21 96 341…440 (2) R 156
72 276 (3) 80 80 80 R1
348 a
a a1 b b1 J M M1 R R1
GS1 S 3P 470 345.5 300 85 19.5 260 20 45.5 44.5
4P 550 425.5 300 85 99.5 260 20 34.5 44.5
4 GS1 TB 3P 470 345.5 320 65 19.5 267 26.5 – –
4P 550 425.5 320 65 99.5 267 26.5 – –
(1) Terminal cover
(2) Without shaft extension. Minimum length with shaft extension: add 27
(3) Shortened shaft
GS1 V (1250 A)
Front-mounted internal operator Front-mounted external operator
330 a1
106 16 G 76
7 250 38,5
74
183
363
250
190
72
(1) 9
187 21 96 416…481 (2)
43 120 120 120 62 181,5
433 a
a a1 G
GS1 V 3P 561 437 345
4P 681 557 465
(1) Protective screen, front-mounted (fitted as standard)
(2) Without shaft extension. Minimum length with shaft extension: add 27.
Note : For switch-disconnector-fuses GS1 S (630 A) and GS1 V (1250 A) with external operator, see page 4/61 for the door cut-out and connector plate.

4/62
Schemes 4
3-pole GS1
32 A 50 to 1250 A
1/L1
3/L2
5/L3
1/L1
3/L2
5/L3
2/T1
4/T2
6/T3
2/T1
4/T2
6/T3
4-pole GS1
32 A 50 to 1250 A
1/L1
3/L2
5/L3
7/L3
1/L1
3/L2
5/L3
7/L3
2/T1
4/T2
6/T3
8/T3
4
2/T1
4/T2
6/T3
8/T3
Auxiliary contacts
GS1 AM110 GS1 AM101 GS1 AM111 GS1 AM211
12
14
12
14
22
24
•3
•1
11
11
21
•4
•2
GS1 AF
1 C/O 1 N/C + 1 N/O
13
21
2
4
14
22
1

pages 4/42 and 4/43 pages 4/44 to 4/47 pages 4/48 to 4/57 pages 4/58 to 4/62
4/63
References 4
0
Switch-disconnector-fuses
for the North American market
conforming to UL and CSA standards, 30 to 800 A
All GS1 switch-disconnector-fuses for the North American market are certified UL98
and CSA 22.2 N° 4.
Compact switch-disconnector-fuse bodies

105847
Switch Fuse Number Reference Weight

rating size of poles
A kg
30 CC 3 GS1 DDU3 0.510
J 3 GS1 DU3 0.610
Handles for front-mounted external operators, padlockable, IP 65

Switch Colour of Reference Weight
GS1 DDU3 rating handle/front plate
A kg
30 Black/Black (1) GS1 AH101 0.160
Red/Yellow (1) GS1 AH102 0.160
Black/Black (2) GS1 AH110 0.320
Red/Yellow (2) GS1 AH120 0.320
Handles for front-mounted external operators, padlockable,

with TEST facility, IP 65
4 rating handle/front plate
A kg
30 Black/Black (2) GS1 AHT110 0.320
Red/Yellow (2) GS1 AHT120 0.320
Shaft extensions for front-mounted external operators

Switch Length Shaft cross Reference Weight
rating section
A mm mm kg
30 320 5x5 GS1 AE7 0.170
400 5x5 GS1 AE71 0.240
320 5x5 GS1 AE8 0.170
400 5x5 GS1 AE81 0.240
(1) For use in conjunction with shaft extension GS1 AE7 or GS1 AE71, to be ordered separately.
(2) For use in conjunction with shaft extension GS1 AE8 or GS1 AE81, to be ordered separately.
4/64
0
Switch-disconnector-fuses
for the North American market
conforming to UL and CSA standards, 30 to 800 A
Switch-disconnector-fuse bodies
Switch Fuse Number Reference Weight
rating size of poles
A kg
30 CC 3 GS1 EEU3 1.200
J 3 GS1 EU3 2.000
60 J 3 GS1 GU3 1.400
100 J 3 GS1 JU3 2.000
200 J 3 GS1 MU3 3.800
400 J 3 GS1 QU3 4.500
For front-mounted internal and external operators

600 J 3 GS1 SU3 16.000
800 L 3 GS1 TU3 16.000
Handles for front-mounted external operators, padlockable, IP 65

rating handle/front plate
A kg
30…60 Black/Black GS1 AH110 0.320
100…400 Black/Black GS1 AH130 0.350
Red/Yellow GS1 AH140 0.350 4
600 and 800 Black/Black GS1 AH150 0.700
Handles for front-mounted external operators, padlockable,

with TEST facility, IP 65
rating handle/front plate
A kg
30…60 Black/Black GS1 AHT110 0.320
100…400 Black/Black GS1 AHT130 0.350
600 and 800 Black/Black GS1 AHT150 0.700
Shaft extensions for front-mounted external operators

Switch Length Shaft cross Reference Weight
rating section
A mm mm kg
30…400 320 10 x 10 GS1 AE2 0.200
400 10 x 10 GS1 AE21 0.250
600 and 800 200 15 x 15 GS1 AE6 0.450
400 15 x 15 GS1 AE61 0.900
4/65
References 4
Cartridge fuses type aM

For protection of equipment with current peaks
Fuse type Maximum Rating Sold in Fuses without striker Fuses with striker
rated lots of Unit Weight Unit Weight
voltage reference reference
V A kg kg
Cylindrical a 400 1 10 DF2 BA0100 0.010 – –
812889
8.5 x 31.5 2 10 DF2 BA0200 0.010 – –

4 10 DF2 BA0400 0.010 – –
DF2 CAppp 6 10 DF2 BA0600 0.010 – –
8 10 DF2 BA0800 0.010 – –
10 10 DF2 BA1000 0.010 – –
Cylindrical a 500 0.16 10 DF2 CA001 0.010 – –

10 x 38 0.25 10 DF2 CA002 0.010 – –
0.50 10 DF2 CA005 0.010 – –
1 10 DF2 CA01 0.010 – –
2 10 DF2 CA02 0.010 – –
4 10 DF2 CA04 0.010 – –
812888
6 10 DF2 CA06 0.010 – –

8 10 DF2 CA08 0.010 – –
10 10 DF2 CA10 0.010 – –
DF2 EA ppp
12 10 DF2 CA12 0.010 – –
16 10 DF2 CA16 0.010 – –
4 a 400 20
25
10
10
DF2 CA20
DF2 CA25
0.010
0.010
–
–
–
–
32 10 DF2 CA32 0.010 – –
Cylindrical a 690 0.25 10 DF2 EA002 0.020 – –

14 x 51 0.50 10 DF2 EA005 0.020 – –
812890
a 500 1 10 DF2 EA01 0.020 – –

2 10 DF2 EA02 0.020 DF3 EA02 0.020
4 10 DF2 EA04 0.020 DF3 EA04 0.020
DF3 EA pp
6 10 DF2 EA06 0.020 DF3 EA06 0.020
8 10 DF2 EA08 0.020 DF3 EA08 0.020
10 10 DF2 EA10 0.020 DF3 EA10 0.020
12 10 DF2 EA12 0.020 DF3 EA12 0.020
16 10 DF2 EA16 0.020 DF3 EA16 0.020
20 10 DF2 EA20 0.020 DF3 EA20 0.020
25 10 DF2 EA25 0.020 DF3 EA25 0.020
32 10 DF2 EA32 0.020 DF3 EA32 0.020
40 10 DF2 EA40 0.020 DF3 EA40 0.020
812887
a 400 50 10 DF2 EA50 0.020 DF3 EA50 0.020
Cylindrical a 690 4 10 DF2 FA04 0.045 DF3 FA04 0.045

22 x 58 6 10 DF2 FA06 0.045 DF3 FA06 0.045
DF2 FApp
8 10 DF2 FA08 0.045 DF3 FA08 0.045
10 10 DF2 FA10 0.045 DF3 FA10 0.045
16 10 DF2 FA16 0.045 DF3 FA16 0.045
20 10 DF2 FA20 0.045 DF3 FA20 0.045
25 10 DF2 FA25 0.045 DF3 FA25 0.045
32 10 DF2 FA32 0.045 DF3 FA32 0.045
40 10 DF2 FA40 0.045 DF3 FA40 0.045
50 10 DF2 FA50 0.045 DF3 FA50 0.045
812891
a 500 63 10 DF2 FA63 0.045 DF3 FA63 0.045

80 10 DF2 FA80 0.045 DF3 FA80 0.045
100 10 DF2 FA100 0.045 DF3 FA100 0.045
DF3 FApp a 400 125 10 DF2 FA125 0.045 DF3 FA125 0.045
4/66
Cartridge fuses type aM

For protection of equipment with current peaks
V A kg kg
Blade a 500 16 3 DF2 FGA16 0.160 – –
533330
size 00 20 3 DF2 FGA20 0.160 – –

25 3 DF2 FGA25 0.160 – –
32 3 DF2 FGA32 0.160 – –
40 3 DF2 FGA40 0.160 – –
50 3 DF2 FGA50 0.160 – –
DF2 GApppp 63 3 DF2 FGA63 0.160 – –
80 3 DF2 FGA80 0.160 – –
100 3 DF2 FGA100 0.160 – –
a 400 125 3 DF2 FGA125 0.160 – –
Blade a 500 50 3 DF2 GA1051 0.230 – –

size 0 63 3 DF2 GA1061 0.230 – –
80 3 DF2 GA1081 0.230 – –
100 3 DF2 GA1101 0.230 – –
533331
125 3 DF2 GA1121 0.230 DF4 GA1121 0.230

160 3 DF2 GA1161 0.230 DF4 GA1161 0.230
200 3 DF2 GA1201 0.230 DF4 GA1201 0.230
Blade a 500 160 3 DF2 HA1161 0.400 – – 4

size 1 200 3 DF2 HA1201 0.400 DF4 HA1201 0.400
DF4 GApppp
250 3 DF2 HA1251 0.400 DF4 HA1251 0.400
315 3 DF2 HA1311 0.400 DF4 HA1311 0.400
Blade a 500 250 3 DF2 JA1251 0.560 – –

size 2 315 3 DF2 JA1311 0.560 DF4 JA1311 0.560
400 3 DF2 JA1401 0.560 DF4 JA1401 0.560
500 3 DF2 JA1501 0.560 DF4 JA1501 0.560
Blade a 500 400 3 DF2 KA1401 0.850 – –

size 3 500 3 DF2 KA1501 0.850 DF4 KA1501 0.850
533332
630 3 DF2 KA1631 0.850 DF4 KA1631 0.850
Blade a 500 630 1 DF2 LA1631 1.900 DF4 LA1631 1.900

size 4 800 1 DF2 LA1801 1.900 DF4 LA1801 1.900
1000 1 DF2 LA1101 1.900 DF4 LA1101 1.900
DF2 JApppp a 400 1250 1 DF2 LA1251 1.900 DF4 LA1251 1.900
4/67
References 4
Cartridge fuses type gG

For protection of circuits without significant current peaks
V A kg kg
Cylindrical a 400 1 10 DF2 BN0100 0.010 – –
812897
8.5 x 31.5 2 10 DF2 BN0200 0.010 – –

4 10 DF2 BN0400 0.010 – –
DF2 CNpp
6 10 DF2 BN0600 0.010 – –
8 10 DF2 BN0800 0.010 – –
10 10 DF2 BN1000 0.010 – –
12 10 DF2 BN1200 0.010 – –
16 10 DF2 BN1600 0.010 – –
812896
20 10 DF2 BN2000 0.010 – –
Cylindrical a 500 2 10 DF2 CN02 0.010 – –

10 x 38 4 10 DF2 CN04 0.010 – –
DF2 ENpp
6 10 DF2 CN06 0.010 – –
8 10 DF2 CN08 0.010 – –
10 10 DF2 CN10 0.010 – –
12 10 DF2 CN12 0.010 – –
16 10 DF2 CN16 0.010 – –
812898
20 10 DF2 CN20 0.010 – –
4 DF3 ENpp
a 400 25
32
10
10
DF2 CN25
DF2 CN32
0.010
0.010
–
–
–
–
Cylindrical a 500 4 10 DF2 EN04 0.020 DF3 EN04 0.020

14 x 51 6 10 DF2 EN06 0.020 DF3 EN06 0.020
10 10 DF2 EN10 0.020 DF3 EN10 0.020
16 10 DF2 EN16 0.020 DF3 EN16 0.020
812895
20 10 DF2 EN20 0.020 DF3 EN20 0.020

25 10 DF2 EN25 0.020 DF3 EN25 0.020
32 10 DF2 EN32 0.020 DF3 EN32 0.020
40 10 DF2 EN40 0.020 DF3 EN40 0.020
DF2 FNpp 50 10 DF2 EN50 0.020 – –
Cylindrical a 690 10 10 DF2 FN10 0.045 DF3 FN10 0.045

22 x 58 20 10 DF2 FN20 0.045 DF3 FN20 0.045
25 10 DF2 FN25 0.045 DF3 FN25 0.045
32 10 DF2 FN32 0.045 DF3 FN32 0.045
40 10 DF2 FN40 0.045 DF3 FN40 0.045
812899
50 10 DF2 FN50 0.045 DF3 FN50 0.045
a 500 63 10 DF2 FN63 0.045 DF3 FN63 0.045

80 10 DF2 FN80 0.045 DF3 FN80 0.045
100 10 DF2 FN100 0.045 DF3 FN100 0.045
DF3 FNpp
4/68
Cartridge fuses type gG

For protection of circuits without significant current peaks
V A kg kg
Blade a 500 10 10 DF2 FGN10 0.160 – –
533333
size 00 16 10 DF2 FGN16 0.160 – –

20 10 DF2 FGN20 0.160 – –
25 10 DF2 FGN25 0.160 – –
32 10 DF2 FGN32 0.160 – –
40 10 DF2 FGN40 0.160 – –
DF2 GNpppp
50 10 DF2 FGN50 0.160 – –
63 10 DF2 FGN63 0.160 – –
80 10 DF2 FGN80 0.160 – –
100 10 DF2 FGN100 0.160 – –
125 10 DF2 FGN125 0.160 –
160 10 DF2 FGN160 0.160 – –
Blade a 500 50 3 DF2 GN1051 0.230 – –

533334
size 0 63 3 DF2 GN1061 0.230 – –

80 3 DF2 GN1081 0.230 – –
100 3 DF2 GN1101 0.230 – –
125 3 DF2 GN1121 0.230 DF4 GN1121 0.230
160 3 DF2 GN1161 0.230 DF4 GN1161 0.230
DF4 GNpppp
Blade a 500 160 3 DF2 HN1161 0.400 – –
4
size 1 200 3 DF2 HN1201 0.400 DF4 HN1201 0.400
250 3 DF2 HN1251 0.400 DF4 HN1251 0.400
Blade a500 250 3 DF2 JN1251 0.560 – –

size 2 315 3 DF2 JN1311 0.560 DF4 JN1311 0.560
400 3 DF2 JN1401 0.560 DF4 JN1401 0.560
533335
Blade a 500 500 3 DF2 KN1501 0.850 DF4 KN1501 0.850

size 3 630 3 DF2 KN1631 0.850 DF4 KN1631 0.850
Blade a 500 800 1 DF2 LN1801 1.900 DF4 LN1801 1.900

size 4 1000 1 DF2 LN1101 1.900 DF4 LN1101 1.900
1250 1 DF2 LN1251 1.900 DF4 LN1251 1.900
DF2 JNpppp
4/69
?
Contents 0
5 - Contactors
Selection guides . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .page 5/2
b General, selection of TeSys contactors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . pages 5/156
TeSys k contactors and reversing contactors

b Contactors
v 6 to 16 A in category AC-3 and 6 to 12 A in category AC-4 . . . . . . . . page 5/10
v 6 to 12 A in categories AC-3 and AC-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5/11
v 20 A in category AC-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5/12
b reversing contactors
v 6 to 16 A in category AC-3 and 6 to 12 A in category AC-4 . . . . . . . . page 5/14
v 6 to 12 A in categories AC-3 and AC-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5/15
v 20 A in category AC-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5/16
b Auxiliary contact blocks, suppressor modules and accessories . . . . . . . page 5/19
Mini-contactors types LC1 SK and LP1 SK

b For motor in categories AC-3 and AC-1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5/30
b Instantaneous auxiliary contact blocks and coil suppressor modules . . page 5/31
Mini-contactors type LC1 SKGC

b For use in modular panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5/38
b Suppressor modules. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5/39
5
TeSys d contactors and reversing contactors
Selection guides . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .page 5/42
b Contactors for motor control

v Up to 75 kW at 400 V, in category AC-3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5/58
v Up to 15 kW at 400 V, in category AC-3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5/59
v From 25 to 200 A, in category AC-1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5/60
b Reversing contactors for motor control

v Up to 75 kW at 400 V, in category AC-3, . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5/62
v Up to 15 kW at 400 V, in category AC-3, . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5/63
v From 20 to 200 A, in category AC-1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5/64
b Component parts for assembling reversing contactors . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5/66

b Instantaneous auxiliary contact blocks and suppressor modules. . . . . . page 5/69
b Coils for TeSys d contactors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5/76
TeSys contactors for switching 3-phase capacitor

banks
b Contactors used for power factor correction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5/90
TeSys LCp F contactors and reversing contactors

b Contactors
v 115 to 800 A, in category AC-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5/102
v 200 to 1600 A, in category AC-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5/103
5/0
b Reversing contactors
v 115 to 265 A in category AC-3, costumer assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5/104
v 200 to 350 A in category AC-1, customer assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5/105
v Components for assembling reversing contactors. . . . . pages 5/106 and 5/116
v Instantaneous contact blocks and accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5/111
b Coils for contactors TeSys LCp F . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5/118
High power changeover contactor pairs for distribution

b For customer assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5/138
Capacitive delayed opening devices

b For contactors TeSys LC1 D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5/142
b For contactors TeSys LC1 F . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5/143
TeSys LC1 B contactors

b 750 to 1800 A, in category AC-3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5/146
b 800 to 2750 A in category AC-1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . pages 5/146 and 5/147
b Accessories and spare parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5/148
b Replacement coils and accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5/150
Contactors for the North American market

b 20 to 200 A, conforming to standards UL and CSA. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5/192
5
b 200 to 1350 A, conforming to standards UL and CSA. . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5/193
Variable composition standard and high

performance contactors
b Type CV1 B from 80 to 1000 A and CV3 B from 80 to 500 A . . . . . . . page 5/196
3-pole vacuum contactors and reversing contactors

b Types LC1 V and CV2 V . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5/200
Magnetic latching contactors CR1 F and CR1 B

b General and selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5/208
b Contactors and accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5/218
b Components for assembling reversing contactors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5/220
b Coils . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5/222
b Accessories and replacement parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5/226
Modular equipment
b Standard contactors, type GC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5/238

b Impulse relays, type GF 16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5/250
b “Dual tariff” contactors, type GY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5/256
5/1
Selection guide 5
TeSys contactors 5
Applications Equipment based on standard contactors Equipment requiring

low consumption
contactors which can
be switched directly
from solid state
outputs
Rated operational current AC-3 6A 6...16 A 9…150 A 115…800 A 750…1800 A 6...12 A 9…25 A
AC-1 12 A 20 A 25…200 A 200…1600 A 800…2750 A 20 A 20…40 A
Rated operational voltage 690 V 690 V 690 V 1000 V 1000 V 690 V 690 V
5 Number of poles 2 or 3 3 or 4 3 or 4 2, 3 or 4 1…4 3 or 4 3
Contactor type references LC1 SK LC1 K LC1 D LC1 F LC1 B LP4 K LC1 D
LP1 SK LC7 K
LP1 K
Pages 5/4 and 5/5 5/42 5/92 and 5/93 5/11 5/44
and and
5/43 5/45
5/2
5
5
Equipment requiring Motors, resistive circuits, Induction heating, heating of Applications conforming to Protection of reversing
magnetic latching rotor short-circuiting metal or of a metal part in a “NATO” specifications and variable speed controllers
contactors devices, electro lifting channel or crucible furnace references. for d.c. motors.
magnets, hoisting, mines, by induction of a.c. currents. Shockproof contactors Fast acting contactors.
c motors, high operating Contactors for induction
rates. heating applications
Variable composition bar
mounted contactors.
150…1800 A 80...1800 A – 12…630 A –
250…2750 A 80…2750 A 80…16 300 A 25…850 A –
1000 V a 1000 V 3000 V 690 V or 1000 V a 1000 V

c 440 or 1500 V c 1050 V
1…4 1…6 1…8 3 or 4 2 or 4

5
CR1 F CVp CEp LC1 DpG CR3 pB
CR1 B CSp LP1 DpG
CGp LC1 FGppp
5/218 to 5/227 5/194 and 5/195 Please consult your Regional Sales Office
5/3
Selection guide 5
TeSys contactors 5
From 6 to 16 A
Applications Simple automation systems
Rated operational current Ie max AC-3 (Ue y 440 V) 6A 6A
Ie AC-1 (θ y 40 °C) 12 A –
Rated operational voltage 690 V
Number of poles 2 or 3 3
Rated operational power 220/240 V 1.1 kW 1.5 kW

in category AC-3
380/400 V 2.2 kW 2.2 kW
415/440 V 2.2 kW 2.2/3 kW
500 V – 3 kW
660/690 V – 3 kW
5 1000 V – –
Add-on auxiliary Front Up to 2 N/C or N/O Up to 4 N/C or N/O

contact blocks
Side – –
Front time delay – 1 N/C
Front dust and damp protected – –
Associated manual-auto Class 10 A – 0.11…16 A

thermal overload relays
Class 20 A – –
Suppressor modules Varistor or diode Varistor, diode + Zener diode or RC circuit
Contactor type references a LC1 SK LC1 or LC7 K06
c LP1 SK LP1 K06
Reversing contactor with a – LC2 or LC8 K06

mechanical interlock
type references c – LP2 K06
Pages Contactors 5/30 and 5/31 5/10 to 5/13
Reversing contactors – 5/14 to 5/17
5/4
5
5
9A 12 A 16 A
20 A – –
3 or 4
2.2 kW 3 kW 3 kW
4 kW 5.5 kW 7.5 kW
4 kW 5.5 kW 7.5 kW
4 kW 4 kW 5.5 kW
4 kW 4 kW 4 kW
– – –
5
LC1 or LC7 K09 LC1 or LC7 K12 LC1 K16
LP1 K09 LP1 K12 –
LC2 or LC8 K09 LC2 or LC8 K12 LC2 K16
LP2 K09 LP2 K12 –
5/5
Characteristics 5
TeSys contactors 5
Environment characteristics
Conforming to standards IEC 60947, NF C 63-110, VDE 0660, BS 5424
Product certifications LCp and LPp K06 to K12 UL, CSA
Operating positions Vertical axis Horizontal axis
90
90
90
˚
˚
180˚
˚
90
Without derating Without derating Possible positions for LCp K only.
Contactor pull-in voltage: 0.85 Uc
Connection Min. Max. Max. to IEC 60947
Screw clamp Solid conductor mm2 1 x 1.5 2x4 1 x 4 + 1 x 2.5
terminals Flexible conductor mm2 1 x 0.75 2x4 2 x 2.5
without cable end
Flexible conductor mm2 1 x 0.34 1 x 1.5 + 1 x 2.5 1 x 1.5 + 1 x 2.5
with cable end
Spring terminals Solid conductor mm2 1 x 0.75 1 x 1.5 2 x 1.5
Flexible conductor mm2 1 x 0.75 1 x 1.5 2 x 1.5
without cable end
Faston connectors Clip mm 2 x 2.8 or 1 x 6.35
Solder pins for With locating device between 4 mm x 35 microns

printed circuit board power and control circuits
Tightening torque Philips head n° 2 and Ø 6 N.m 0.8…1.3
Terminal referencing Conforming to standards Up to 5 contacts, depending on model

EN 50005 and EN 50012
5 Rated insulation voltage
(Ui)
Conforming to IEC 60947 V 690
Conforming to VDE 0110 gr C V 750
Conforming to BS 5424, V 690
NF C 20-040
Conforming to CSA 22-2 n° 14, V 600
UL 508
Rated impulse withstand voltage (Uimp) kV 8
Protective treatment Conforming to IEC 60068 “TC” (Klimafest, Climateproof)

(DIN 50016)
Degree of protection Conforming to VDE 0106 Protection against direct finger contact


5 ... 300 Hz Contactor closed 4 gn
Flame resistance Conforming to UL 94 Self-extinguishing materials V1

Conforming to NF F 16-101 Conforming to requirement 2
and 16-102
Shock resistance Contactor open On X axis: 6 gn
(1/2 sine wave, 11 ms) On Y and Z axes: 10 gn
Contactor closed On X axis: 10 gn
On Y and Z axes: 15 gn
Safe separation of circuits Conforming to VDE 0106 SELV (Safety Extra Low Voltage), up to 400 V
and IEC 60536

5/6
TeSys contactors 5
Type LCp or LPp K06 K09 K12 K16
Conventional thermal For ambient temperature A 20
current (Ith) y 50 °C
Rated operational frequency Hz 50/60
Frequency limits of the operational current Hz Up to 400
Rated making capacity I rms conforming to A 110 110 144 160
NF C 63 110 and IEC 60947
Rated breaking capacity I rms conforming 220/230 V A 110 110 – –
to NF C 63 110 380/400 V A 110 110 – –
and IEC 60947
415 V A 110 110 – –
440 V A 110 110 110 110
500 V A 80 80 80 80
660/690 V A 70 70 70 70
Permissible short In free air for a 1s A 90 90 115 115

time rating time “t” from cold 5 s A 85 85 105 105
state (θ y 50 °C)
10 s A 80 80 100 100
30 s A 60 60 75 75
1 min A 45 45 55 55
3 min A 40 40 50 50
u 15 min A 20 20 25 25
Short-circuit protection gG fuse U y 440 V A 25

(aM fuse, see page 22009/2)
Average impedance per pole At Ith and 50 Hz mΩ 3
Use in category AC-1 Maximum rated operational A 20
resistive circuits, heating, current for a temperature y 50 °C
lighting (Ue y 440 V) Maximum rated operational A 16 for Ue only
current for a temperature y 70 °C
Rated operational current limits On-load factor 90 % 60 % 30 % 5
in relation to the on-load factor A 300 operating cycles/hour 13 15 18
and operating frequency
A 120 operating cycles/hour 15 18 19
A 30 operating cycles/hour 19 20 20
Increase in rated operational Apply the following coefficients to the above currents; these coefficients take into
current by paralleling of poles account an often unbalanced distribution of current between the poles
2 poles in parallel: K = 1.60
Use in category AC-3 Operational 115 V single-ph. kW 0.37 0.55 – –

squirrel cage motors power according 220 V single-ph. kW 0.75 1.1 – –
to the voltage.
220/230 V 3-ph. kW 1.5 2.2 3 4
Voltage 50 or
60 Hz 380/415 V 3-ph. kW 2.2 4 5.5 7.5
440/480 V 3-ph. kW 3 4 5.5/4 (480) 5.5/4 (480)
500/600 V 3-ph. kW 3 4 4 4
660/690 V 3-ph. kW 3 4 4 4
Maximum operating rate Op. cycles/h 600 900 1200

(in operating cycles/hour in Power 100 % 75 % 50 %
relation to % of rated power)

5/7
TeSys contactors 5

Type LC1 LC2 LC7 LC8 LP1 LP2 LP4 LP5
Rated control circuit voltage (Uc) V a 12…690 (1) a 24…240 (1) c 12…250 (1) c 12…120
Control voltage limits (y 50 °C) Operation 0.8…1.15 Uc (2) 0.85…1.1 Uc 0.8…1.15 Uc 0.7…1.30 Uc
single voltage coil
Drop-out u 0.20 Uc u 0.10 Uc u 0.10 Uc u 0.10 Uc
Average consumption Inrush 30 VA 3 VA 3W 1.8 W

at 20 °C and at Uc
Sealed 4.5 VA 3 VA 3W 1.8 W
Heat dissipation W 1.3 3 3 1.8
Operating time at 20 °C and at Uc

Between coil energisation and: - opening of the N/C contacts ms 5…15 25…35 25…35 25…35
- closing of the N/O contacts ms 10…20 30…40 30…40 30…40
Between coil de-energisation and: - opening of the N/O contacts ms 10…20 30 10 10…20
- closing of the N/C contacts ms 15…25 40 15 15…25
Maximum immunity to microbreaks ms 2 2 2 2
Maximum operating rate In operating cycles per hour 3600 3600 3600 3600
Mechanical durability at Uc 50/60 Hz coil 10 5 10 5 – – – –
In millions of operating cycles
c coil – – – – 10 5 – –
Wide range coil, – – – – – – 30 5

Low consumption
(1) For mains supplies with a high level of interference (voltage surge > 800 V), use a suppressor
module LA4 KE1FC (50…129 V) or LA4 KE1UG (130…250 V), see page 5/20.
(2) LC1 K16: 0.85…1.15 Uc.

5/8
TeSys contactors 5
Auxiliary contact characteristics of contactors and instantaneous contact blocks

Number of auxiliary contacts On LCp K or LPp K 3-pole 1
On LA1 K 2 or 4
Rated operational voltage (Ue) Up to V 690
Rated insulation voltage (Ui) Conforming to BS 5424 V 690

Conforming to VDE 0110 group C V 750
Conforming to CSA C 22-2 n° 14 V 600
Conventional For ambient temperature A 10

thermal current (Ith) y 50 °C
Frequency of the Hz Up to 400
operational current
Minimum switching U min (DIN 19 240) V 17
capacity I min mA 5
Short-circuit protection Conforming to IEC 60947 A 10

and VDE 0660, gG fuse
Rated making capacity Conforming to I rms A 110
IEC 60947
500 ms A 90
100 ms A 110
Insulation resistance MΩ > 10
Non-overlap distance LA1 K: linked contacts mm 0.5 (see schemes pages 5/23 and 5/25)
conforming to INRS, BIA
and CNA specifications
Operational power of contacts a.c. supply, category AC-15 d.c. supply, category DC-13
conforming to IEC 60947 Electrical durability (valid for up to 3600 operating
cycles/hour) on an inductive load such as the coil of an
Electrical durability (valid for up to 1200 operating
cycles/hour) on an inductive load such as the coil of an 5
electromagnet: making current (cos ϕ 0.7) = 10 times the electromagnet, without economy resistor, the time constant
power broken (cos ϕ 0.4). increasing with the load.
110/ 220/ 380/ 600/

V 24 48 127 230 400 440 690 V 24 48 110 220 440 600
1 million operating cycles VA 48 96 240 440 800 880 1200 W 120 80 60 52 51 50
Occasional making capacity VA 1000 2050 5000 10 000 14 000 13 000 9000 W 720 600 400 300 230 200
Power broken in VA Power broken in W
1 Breaking limit of contacts valid 16 000

for:
10 000 1000
- maximum of 50 operating 4
8000
cycles at 10 s intervals 6000 700
(power broken = making 5000 500
4000 1
current x cos ϕ 0.7). 3
3000 300
2 Electrical durability of contacts 2000 250 200
for:
- 1 million operating cycles (2a) 1000 4 200 100
- 3 million operating cycles (2b) 800 80 2a
- 10 million operating cycles (2c). 600500
60
140 50
3 Breaking limit of contacts valid 400 40 2b
for: 300 100 30
2a
- maximum of 20 operating 200 20
cycles at 10 s intervals with current 2c
passing for 0.5 s per operating 100 50 10
2b
cycle.
80 2c 8
60 6
4 Thermal limit. 40
20
24 48 110 220 380 500 12 24 48 110 220 440 600 V
120 440 690 V

page 5/19 pages 5/22 and 5/24 pages 5/23 and 5/25
5/9
References 5
TeSys contactors 5
Contactors for motor control,

6 to 16 A in category AC-3 and 6 to 12 A
in category AC-4
Control circuit: a.c.
Contactor selection according to utilisation category, see pages 5/160 to 5/163 and 5/166 to 5/169.
Mounting on 35 mm 7 rail or Ø 4 screw fixing.
106151_1
Screws in the open "ready-to-tighten" position.

Add-on auxiliary contact blocks and accessories, see pages 5/18 to 5/21.
3-pole contactors for standard applications
Standard power ratings of Rated operational Instan- Basic reference, Weight
3-phase motors 50-60 Hz current in taneous to be completed by
in category AC-3 category AC-3 auxiliary adding the voltage code
440 V contacts (1) (2)
220 V 380 V 440/500 V up to
230 V 415 V 660/690 V
LC1 K0910pp kW kW kW A kg
Screw clamp connections
1.5 2.2 3 6 1 – LC1 K0610pp 0.180
– 1 LC1 K0601pp 0.180
2.2 4 4 9 1 – LC1 K0910pp 0.180
106153_1
– 1 LC1 K0901pp 0.180

3 5.5 4 (> 440) 12 1 – LC1 K1210pp 0.180
5.5 (440) – 1 LC1 K1201pp 0.180
4 7.5 4 (> 440) 16 1 – LC1 K1610pp 0.180
5.5 (440) – 1 LC1 K1601pp 0.180
Spring terminal connections
For 6 to 12 A ratings only, in the references selected above, insert a figure 3 before the voltage code.
Example: LC1 K0610pp becomes LC1 K06103pp.
LC1 K09103pp Faston connectors, 1 x 6.35 or 2 x 2.8

For 6 to 16 A ratings, in the references selected above, insert a figure 7 before the voltage code.
106158_1
Solder pins for printed circuit boards

5 Example: LC1 K0610pp becomes LC1 K06105pp.
3-pole silent contactors

Recommended for use in areas sensitive to noise, high interference mains supplies, etc.
Coil with rectifier incorporated, suppressor fitted as standard.

LC1 K09107pp 1.5 2.2 3 6 1 – LC7 K0610pp 0.225
– 1 LC7 K0601pp 0.225
2.2 4 4 9 1 – LC7 K0910pp 0.225
– 1 LC7 K0901pp 0.225
106152_1
3 5.5 4 (> 440) 12 1 – LC7 K1210pp 0.225

5.5 (440) – 1 LC7 K1201pp 0.225
Faston connectors, 1 x 6.35 or 2 x 2.8
In the references selected above, insert a figure 7 before the voltage code.

LC1 K09105 pp (1) Standard control circuit voltages (for other voltages, please consult your Regional Sales Office):
a.c. supply
Contactors LC1 K (0.8…1.15 Uc) (0.85…1.1 Uc)
Volts 12 20 24 (2) 36 42 48 110 115 120 127 200/208 220/230 230 230/240
106162_1
50/60 Hz J7 Z7 B7 C7 D7 E7 F7 FE7 G7 FC7 L7 M7 P7 U7

Volts 256 277 380/400 400 400/415 440 480 500 575 600 660/690
50/60 Hz W7 UE7 Q7 – V7 N7 R7 T7 S7 SC7 X7 Y7 – –
Up to and including 240 V, coil with integral suppression device available: add 2 to the code required. Example: J72.
Contactors LC7 K (0.85…1.1 Uc)

Volts 24 42 48 110 115 220 230/240
50/60 Hz B7 D7 E7 F7 FE7 M7 U7
(2) For mains supplies with a high level of interference (voltage surge > 800 V), use a suppressor module LA4 KE1FC (50…129 V)
or LA4 KE1UG (130…250 V), see page 5/20.
LC7 K0910pp

pages 5/160 and 5/169 pages 5/6 to 5/9 page 5/22 page 5/23
5/10
References 5
TeSys contactors 5
Contactors for motor control,

6 to 12 A in categories AC-3 and AC-4
Control circuit: d.c. or low consumption
Contactor selection according to utilisation category, see pages 5/160 to 5/163 and 5/166 to 5/169.
106155_1

3-pole contactors, d.c. supply
Standard power ratings of Rated operational Instan- Basic reference, Weight
3-phase motors 50-60 Hz current in taneous to be completed by
in category AC-3 category AC-3 auxiliary adding the voltage code
440 V contacts (1) (2)
220 V 380 V 440/500 V up to
230 V 415 V 660/690 V
LP1 K0910pp
kW kW kW A kg
1.5 2.2 3 6 1 – LP1 K0610pp 0.225
– 1 LP1 K0601pp 0.225
2.2 4 4 9 1 – LP1 K0910pp 0.225
106157_1
– 1 LP1 K0901pp 0.225

3 5.5 4 (> 440) 12 1 – LP1 K1210pp 0.225
5.5 (440) – 1 LP1 K1201pp 0.225
Example: LP1 K0610pp becomes LP1 K06103pp.

LP1 K09103pp Example: LP1 K0610pp becomes LP1 K06107pp.

106156_1
3-pole low consumption contactors

Compatible with programmable controller outputs.
5
LED indicator incorporated (except models LP4 KppppFW3 and LP4 KppppGW3).
Wide range coil (0.7…1.30 Uc), suppressor fitted as standard, consumption 1.8 W.

1.5 2.2 3 6 1 – LP4 K0610pp 0.235
LP1 K09107pp – 1 LP4 K0601pp 0.235
2.2 4 4 9 1 – LP4 K0910pp 0.235
– 1 LP4 K0901pp 0.235
3 5.5 4 (> 440) 12 1 – LP4 K1210pp 0.235
106159_1
5.5 (440) – 1 LP4 K1201pp 0.235



LP1 K09105pp
d.c. supply (contactors LP1 K: 0.8…1.15 Uc)
Volts 12 20 24 (2) 36 48 60 72 100 110 125 155 174 200 220 230 240 250
106160_1
Code JD ZD BD CD ED ND SD KD FD GD PD QD LD MD MPD MUD UD

Coil with integral suppression device available: add 3 to the code required. Example: JD3
Low consumption (contactors LP4 K: 0.7…130 Uc)

Volts 12 20 24 48 72 110 120
Code JW3 ZW3 BW3 EW3 SW3 FW3 GW3
(2) For LP1 K only, when connecting an electronic sensor or timer in series with the contactor coil, select a 20 V coil (a control
circuit voltage code Z7, c control circuit voltage code ZD) so as to compensate for the incurred voltage drop.
LP4 K0910pp

5/11
References 5
TeSys contactors 5
Contactors for control in category AC-1, 20 A

Contactor selection according to utilisation category, see pages 5/164 and 5/161.
106150_1
3 or 4-pole contactors for standard applications (1)

Non-inductive loads Number Instantaneous Basic reference, Weight
Category AC-1 of poles auxiliary contacts to be completed by adding
Maximum current the voltage code (2) (3)
at θ y 50 °C
A kg
20 3 – 1 – LC1 K0910pp 0.180
LC1 K09004pp or LC1 K1210pp 0.180
3 – – 1 LC1 K0901pp 0.180
or LC1 K1201pp 0.180
4 – – – LC1 K09004pp 0.180
or LC1 K12004pp 0.180
106153_1
2 2 – – LC1 K09008pp 0.180



LC1 K09103pp
5 3 or 4-pole silent contactors (1)

106158_1

20 3 – 1 – LC7 K0910pp 0.225
or LC7 K1210pp 0.225
3 – – 1 LC7 K0901pp 0.225
or LC7 K1201pp 0.225
4 – – – LC7 K09004pp 0.225
or LC7 K12004pp 0.225
LC1 K09107pp
2 2 – – LC7 K09008pp 0.225
106163_1

(1) Selection between 9 and 12 A ratings according to number of operating cycles, see AC-1 curve on page 5/164.
a.c. supply
Contactors LC1 K (0.8…1.15 Uc) (0.85…1.1 Uc)
Volts 12 20 24 (3) 36 42 48 110 115 120 127 200/208 220/230 230 230/240
LC1 K09004pp
Volts 256 277 380/400 400 400/415 440 480 500 575 600 660/690
50/60 Hz W7 UE7 Q7 V7 N7 R7 T7 S7 SC7 X7 Y7
Contactors LC7 K (0.8…1.1 Uc)

Volts 24 42 48 110 115 220 230/240
50/60 Hz B7 D7 E7 F7 FE7 M7 U7

5/12
References 5
TeSys contactors 5
Contactors for control in category AC-1, 20 A

Contactor selection according to utilisation category, see pages 5/164 and 5/165.
106154_1
3 and 4-pole contactors, d.c. supply (1)

Category AC-1 of poles auxiliary contacts to be completed by adding
Maximum current at the voltage code (2) (3)
θ y 50 °C
A kg
20 3 – 1 – LP1 K0910pp 0.225
LC1 K09004 pp or LP1 K1210pp 0.225
3 – – 1 LP1 K0901pp 0.225
or LP1 K1201pp 0.225
4 – – – LP1 K09004pp 0.225
or LP1 K12004pp 0.225
106157_1
2 2 – – LP1 K09008pp 0.225



LC1 K09103 pp In the references selected above, insert a figure 5 before the voltage code.
3 or 4-pole low consumption contactors (1) 5

106156_1


20 3 – 1 – LP4 K0910ppp 0.235
or LP4 K1210ppp 0.235
3 – – 1 LP4 K0901ppp 0.235
or LP4 K1201ppp 0.235
4 – – – LP4 K09004ppp 0.235
LC1 K09105pp
or LP4 K12004ppp 0.235
2 2 – – LP4 K09008ppp 0.235
106151_1


LC1 K09004pp
d.c. supply (contactors LP1 K: 0.8…1.15 Uc)
Volts c 12 20 24 (3) 36 48 60 72 100 110 125 155 174 200 220 230 240 250
Coil with integral suppression device available: add 3 to the code required. Example: JD3.
Low consumption (contactors LP4 K: 0.7…130 Uc)

Volts c 12 20 24 48 72 110 120

5/13
References 5
TeSys contactors 5
Reversing contactors for motor control, 6 to 16 A

in category AC-3 and 6 to 12 A in category AC-4
Reversing contactor selection according to utilisation category, see pages 5/160 to 5/163 and 5/166 to 5/169.
Integral mechanical interlock.
It is essential to link the contacts of the electrical interlock.
Pre-wired power circuit connections as standard on screw clamp versions.
Mounting on 35 mm 7 rail or Ø 4 screw fixing. Screws in the open "ready-to-tighten" position.
3-pole reversing contactors for standard applications
Standard power ratings Rated Instan- Basic reference, Weight
of 3-phase motors 50/60 Hz operational taneous to be completed by adding
565010
in category AC-3 current in auxiliary the voltage code (1) (2)

category AC-3 contacts
220 V 380 V 440/500 V 440V
230 V 415 V 660/690 V up to
kW kW kW A kg
1.5 2.2 3 6 1 – LC2 K0610pp 0.390
LC2 K0910pp – 1 LC2 K0601pp 0.390
2.2 4 4 9 1 – LC2 K0910pp 0.390
– 1 LC2 K0901pp 0.390
3 5.5 4 (> 440) 12 1 – LC2 K1210pp 0.390
5.5 (440) – 1 LC2 K1201pp 0.390
4 7.5 4 (> 440) 16 1 – LC2 K1610pp 0.390
5.5 (440) – 1 LC2 K1601pp 0.390
565011

For 6 to 12 A ratings only, in the references selected above, insert a figure 3 before the voltage code.

LC2 K09105pp
5 Solder pins for printed circuit boards
3-pole silent reversing contactors

1.5 2.2 3 6 1 – LC8 K0610pp 0.480
– 1 LC8 K0601pp 0.480
2.2 4 4 9 1 – LC8 K0910pp 0.480
– 1 LC8 K0901pp 0.480
3 5.5 4 (> 440) 12 1 – LC8 K1210pp 0.480
5.5 (440) – 1 LC8 K1201pp 0.480

a.c. supply
Reversing contactors LC2 K (0.8…1.15 Uc) (0.85…1.1 Uc)
Volts 12 20 24 (2) 36 42 48 110 115 120 127 200/208 220/230 230 230/240
Volts 256 277 380/400 400 400/415 440 480 500 575 600 660/690
Up to and including 240 V, coil with integral suppression device available: add 2 to the code required. Example: J72
Reversing contactors LC8 K (0.8…1.1 Uc)

Volts 24 42 48 110 115 220 230/240
50/60 Hz B7 D7 E7 F7 FE7 M7 U7

pages 5/160 to 5/169 pages 5/6 to 5/9 page 5/24 page 5/25
5/14
References 5
TeSys contactors 5
Reversing contactors for motor control, 6 to 12 A

in categories AC-3 and AC-4
Reversing contactor selection according to utilisation category, see pages 5/160 to 5/163 and 5/166 to 5/169.
Pre-wired power circuit connections as standard on screw clamp versions.
3-pole reversing contactors, d.c. supply
of 3-phase motors 50-60 Hz operational taneous to be completed by adding
in category AC-3 current in auxiliary the voltage code (1) (2)
category AC-3 contacts
220 V 380 V 440/500 V 440V
up to
230 V 415 V 660/690 V
kW kW kW A kg
1.5 2.2 3 6 1 – LP2 K0610pp 0.480
– 1 LP2 K0601pp 0.480
2.2 4 4 9 1 – LP2 K0910pp 0.480
– 1 LP2 K0901pp 0.480
3 5.5 4 (> 440) 12 1 – LP2 K1210pp 0.480
5.5 (440) – 1 LP2 K1201pp 0.480


Example: LC2 K0610pp becomes LC2 K06105pp. 5
3-pole low consumption reversing contactors
LED indicator incorporated (except models LP5-KppppFW3 and LP5-KppppGW3).

1.5 2.2 3 6 1 – LP5 K0610pp 0.490
– 1 LP5 K0601pp 0.490
2.2 4 4 9 1 – LP5 K0910pp 0.490
– 1 LP5 K0901pp 0.490
3 5.5 4 (> 440) 12 1 – LP5 K1210pp 0.490
5.5 (440) – 1 LP5 K1201pp 0.490


d.c. supply
Reversing contactors LP2 K (0.8…1.15 Uc)
Volts 12 20 24 (3) 36 48 60 72 100 110 125 155 174 200 220 230 240 250
Low consumption
Reversing contactors LP5 K (0.7…1.30 Uc)
Volts 12 20 24 48 72 110 120

pages 5/160 to 5/169 pages 5/6 to 5/9 page 5/24 page 5/25
5/15
References 5
TeSys contactors 5
Reversing contactors for control in

category AC-1, 20 A
Warning: reversing contactors LC2 K0910pp and LC2 K0901pp are pre-wired for reverse motor operation as standard.
Reversing contactor selection according to utilisation category, see pages 5/164 and 5/165.
565012

3 or 4-pole reversing contactors for standard applications (1)
Category AC-1 of poles auxiliary to be completed by adding
Maximum current contacts the voltage code (2) (3)
at θ y 50 °C
LC2 K0910pp
A kg
20 3 – 1 – LC2 K0910pp 0.390
or LC2 K1210pp 0.390
3 – – 1 LC2 K0901pp 0.390
or LC2 K1201pp 0.390
4 – – – LC2 K09004pp 0.380
or LC2 K12004pp 0.380
565013


LC2 K09105pp
5 Example: LC2 K0910pp becomes LC2 K09105pp.
3 or 4-pole silent reversing contactors (1)

565014
20 3 – 1 – LC8 K0910pp 0.480

or LC8 K1210pp 0.480
3 – – 1 LC8 K0901pp 0.480
or LC8 K1201pp 0.480
4 – – – LC8 K09004pp 0.470
or LC8 K12004pp 0.470
LC2 K09004pp In the references selected above, insert a figure 7 before the voltage code.

a.c. supply
Reversing contactors LC2 K (0.8…1.15 Uc) (0.85…1.1 Uc)
Volts 12 20 24 (3) 36 42 48 110 115 120 127 200/208 220/230 230 230/240
Volts 256 277 380/400 400 400/415 440 480 500 575 600 660/690
Reversing contactors LC8 K (0.8…1.1 Uc)

Volts 24 42 48 110 115 220 230/240
50/60 Hz B7 D7 E7 F7 FE7 M7 U7

5/16
References 5
TeSys contactors 5
Reversing contactors for control in

category AC-1, 20 A
Warning: reversing contactors LP2 K0910pp and LP2 K0901pp are pre-wired for reverse motor operation as standard.
Reversing contactor selection according to utilisation category, see pages 5/164 and 5/165.
3 or 4-pole reversing contactors, d.c. supply (1)
Category AC-1 of poles auxiliary to be completed by adding
Maximum current contacts the voltage code (2) (3)
at θ y 50 °C
A kg
20 3 – 1 – LP2 K0910pp 0.480
or LP2 K1210pp 0.480
3 – – 1 LP2 K0901pp 0.480
or LP2 K1201pp 0.480
4 – – – LP2 K09004pp 0.480
or LP2 K12004pp 0.480


Example: LP2 K0910pp becomes LP2 K09105pp. 5
3 or 4-pole low consumption reversing contactors (1)

20 3 – 1 – LP5 K0910ppp 0.490
or LP5 K1210ppp 0.490
3 – – 1 LP5 K0901ppp 0.490
or LP5 K1201ppp 0.490
4 – – – LP5 K09004ppp 0.490
or LP5 K12004ppp 0.490


d.c. supply (reversing contactors LP2 K: 0.8…1.15 Uc)
Volts c 12 20 24 (3) 36 48 60 72 100 110 125 155 174 200 220 230 240 250
Low consumption (reversing contactors LP5 K: 0.7…130 Uc)

Volts c 12 20 24 48 72 110 120

5/17
Presentation 5
TeSys contactors 5

LC1, LC7, LP1 K LP4
5 LC1, LC7, LP1 K LP4
LC1, LP1 K
LP4
LC1, LC7, LP1 K
5/18
References 5
TeSys contactors 5

Instantaneous auxiliary contact blocks

Recommended for standard applications. Clip-on front mounting, 1 block per contactor
Connection For use on contactors Composition Reference Weight
kg
Screw clamp terminals All products with screw clamp terminals 2 – LA1 KN20 0.045
– 2 LA1 KN02 0.045
1 1 LA1 KN11 0.045
All products with screw clamp terminals 4 – LA1 KN40 0.045
except low consumption 3 1 LA1 KN31 0.045
2 2 LA1 KN22 0.045
1 3 LA1 KN13 0.045
– 4 LA1 KN04 0.045
Spring terminals All products with spring terminals 2 – LA1 KN203 0.045
– 2 LA1 KN023 0.045
1 1 LA1 KN113 0.045
All products with spring terminals 4 – LA1 KN403 0.045
2 2 LA1 KN223 0.045
1 3 LA1 KN133 0.045
– 4 LA1 KN043 0.045
Faston connectors, All products with Faston connectors 2 – LA1 KN207 0.045
1 x 6.35 or 2 x 2.8 – 2 LA1 KN027 0.045
1 1 LA1 KN117 0.045
All products with Faston connectors 4 – LA1 KN407 0.045
2 2 LA1 KN227 0.045
1 3 LA1 KN137 0.045
– 4 LA1 KN047 0.045
5
With terminal referencing to standard EN 50012. Clip-on front mounting, 1 block per contactor
Screw clamp terminals All 3-pole + N/O products with screw – 2 LA1 KN02M 0.045
with referencing clamp terminals 1 1 LA1 KN11M 0.045
conforming to except LP4 and LP5 K12
standard EN 50012
All 3-pole + N/O products with screw 3 1 LA1 KN31M 0.045
clamp terminals except 2 2 LA1 KN22M 0.045
LP4 or LP5 K06, K09 and K12
1 3 LA1 KN13M 0.045
All 4-pole products with screw clamp 1 1 LA1 KN11P 0.045

terminals except LP4 or LP5 K12
All 4-pole products with screw clamp 2 2 LA1 KN22P 0.045

terminals except LP4
or LP5 K09 and K12
Electronic time delay auxiliary contact blocks

Relay output with common point changeover contact, a or c 240 V, 2 A maximum.
Control voltage 0.85…1.1 Uc.
Maximum switching capacity 250 VA or 150 W.
Operating temperature -10…+ 60 °C.
Reset time: 1.5 s during the time delay period, 0.5 s after the time delay period.
Clip-on front mounting, 1 block per contactor

Voltage Type Timing range Composition Reference Weight
V s kg
a or c 24…48 On-delay 1…30 1 LA2 KT2E 0.040
a 110…240 On-delay 1…30 1 LA2 KT2U 0.040

5/19
References 5
TeSys contactors 5

Suppressor modules incorporating LED indicator
References
Mounting Type For voltages Sold in Unit Weight
and connection lots of reference
565018
kg
Clip-on fixing on the front Varistor (1) a and c 12…24 V 5 LA4 KE1B 0.010
of contactors LC1 and LP1,
with locating device.
No tools required. a and c 32…48 V 5 LA4 KE1E 0.010
a and c 50…129 V 5 LA4 KE1FC 0.010
a and c 130…250 V 5 LA4 KE1UG 0.010
Diode + Zener diode (2) c 12…24 V 5 LA4 KC1B 0.010

LA4 Kppp
c 32…48 V 5 LA4 KC1E 0.010
RC (3) a 110…250 V 5 LA4 KA1U 0.010
(1) Protection provided by limiting the transient voltage to 2 Uc max.

Maximum reduction of transient voltage peaks.
Slight increase in drop-out time (1.1 to 1.5 times the normal time).
(2) No overvoltage or oscillating frequency.
Polarised component.
(3) Protection by limiting the transient voltage to 3 Uc max. and limitation of the oscillating frequency.

5/20
References 5
TeSys contactors 5

Accessories
565019
Mounting and marking accessories

lots of reference
kg
Mounting plates (1) For fixing on 1 4 rail Clip-on 1 LA9 D973 0.025
For fixing on 2 4 rails 110/120 mm 10 DX1 AP25 0.065

fixing centres
Marker holder Clip-on Onto front of contactor 100 LA9 D90 0.001
Clip-in markers 4 maximum Strips of 10 identical 25 AB1 Pp (2) 0.002

per contactor numbers 0…9
Strips of 10 identical 25 AB1 Gp (2) 0.002

letters A…Z
DX1 AP25
565020

lots of preference
kg
Paralleling links For 2 poles With screw clamps 4 LA9 E01 0.010
For 4 poles With screw clamps 2 LA9 E02 0.015
Set of 6 For 3-pole For contactors with 100 LA9 K0969 0.010
power connections reversing contactors screw clamp terminals
for motor control
5
Set of 4 For 4-pole changeover For contactors with 100 LA9 K0970 0.010
power connections contactor pairs screw clamp terminals
LA9 E01
(1) Order 1 mounting plate for fixing a contactor and 2 mounting plates for fixing a reversing contactor.
(2) Complete the reference by replacing the dot with the required character.

5/21
Dimensions, TeSys contactors 5
mounting 5
TeSys k contactors
Contactors
LC1 K, LC7 K, LP1 K, LP4 K
On panel On mounting rail AM1 DP200 or AM1 DE200 (7 35 mm)
LA1 K 4xØ4
=
58
58
50
35 57 = 35 = 57 45
=
45
LA9 D973 DX1 AP25

On one asymmetrical rail DZ5 MB with clip-on mounting plates
DZ5 ME5
5
120
110
50
57 21 = 35 =
5
45
5 On printed circuit board

57 27 45
8,65 = = = A1
58
50
53
10xØ1,6 45 A2
Electronic time delay contact blocks

LA2 KT
On contactor
LA2 KT
58
27
38 38
38 57
Suppressor modules
LA4 Kp
On contactor LC1 K or LP1 K
25
58
22 6
22 57

5/22
Schemes 5
TeSys contactors 5
TeSys k reversing contactors
3-pole contactors With integral suppression device

LC7 K LP4 K
3 P + N/O 3 P + N/C
+A1
A1
3/L2
5/L3
1/L1
3/L2
5/L3
7/L4
1/L1
21/NC
A1
A1
A2
22
A2
T3/6
T1/2
T2/4
T3/6
T4/8
T1/2
T2/4
A2
–A2
4-pole contactors With integral suppression device
LC7 K LP4 K
4P 2 P N/O + 2 P N/C
+A1
A1
3/L2
5/L3
7/L4
1/L1
R1
R3
1
3
A1
A1
A2
A2
T3/6
T4/8
T1/2
T2/4
4
R2
R4
2
A2
–A2
Instantaneous auxiliary contacts LA1 K
LA1 KN20, KN207, KN203 LA1 KN02, KN027, KN023 LA1 KN11, KN117, KN113
2 N/O 2 N/C 1 N/O + 1 N/C
53/NO
63/NO
51/NC
61/NC
53/NO
61/NC
52
62
54
64
62
54
LA1 KN40, KN407, KN403

4 N/O
LA1 KN31, KN317, KN313
3 N/O + 1 N/C
LA1 KN22, KN227, KN223
2 N/O + 2 N/C
LA1 KN13, KN137, KN133
1 N/O + 3 N/C
LA1 KN04, KN047, KN043
4 N/C
5
53/NO
63/NO
73/NO
83/NO
53/NO
73/NO
83/NO
53/NO
83/NO
53/NO
51/NC
61/NC
71/NC
81/NC
61/NC
61/NC
71/NC
61/NC
71/NC
81/NC
54
64
74
84
52
62
72
82
54
62
74
84
54
62
72
84
54
62
72
82
Terminal referencing conforming to standard EN 50012

LA1 KN02M LA1 KN11M LA1 KN31M LA1 KN22M LA1 KN13M
2 N/C 1 N/O + 1 N/C 3 N/O + 1 N/C 2 N/O + 2 N/C 1 N/O + 3 N/C
33/NO
33/NO
43/NO
53/NO
43/NO
53/NO
53/NO
21/NC
21/NC
21/NC
31/NC
21/NC
31/NC
41/NC
21/NC
31/NC
22
34
22
34
44
54
22
32
44
54
22
32
42
54
22
32
LA1 KN11P LA1 KN22P

1 N/O + 1 N/C 2 N/O + 2 N/C
13/NO
13/NO
43/NO
21/NC
21/NC
31/NC
22
14
14
22
32
44
Electronic time delay contact blocks Suppressor modules

LA2 KT LA4 KC LA4 KE
1 C/O
A1
16
18
15
A2
+ –

5/23
mounting 5
Reversing contactors
LC2 K, LC8 K, LP2 K, LP5 K
LA1 K 8xØ4
=
58
58
50
35 57 = 80 = 57 90
90 =
2 x LA9 D973 2 x DX1 AP25

On one asymmetrical mounting rail DZ5 MB with 2 clip-on mounting plates LA9 D973 or on 2 mounting plates DX1 AP25.
DZ5 ME5
5
110
120
50
57 21 = 35 =
5
90
5 57 27 90
On printed circuit board for reversing contactors or 2 contactors mounted side by side
8,65 === === 8,65
A1 A1
58
50
53
A2 A2
45 45 20xØ1,6

LA2 KT
On reversing contactors
LA2 KT
27
58
38 38
38 57
Suppressor modules
LA4 Kp
On reversing contactors LC2 K or LP2 K
25
58
22 6
22 57

5/24
Schemes 5
TeSys contactors 5
3-pole reversing contactors With integral suppression

device
With screw clamp connections LC8 K LP5 K
3 P + N/O 3 P + N/C
+A1
A1
5/L3
5/L3
3/L2
3/L2
3/L2
3/L2
5/L3
5/L3
1/L1
1/L1
1/L1
1/L1
13/NO
13/NO
21/NC
21/NC
A1
A1
A1
A1
A2
A2
A2
A2
14
22
14
22
T3/6
T3/6
T3/6
T3/6
T1/2
T2/4
T1/2
T2/4
T1/2
T2/4
T1/2
T2/4
–A2
A2
With Faston connectors or solder pins (printed circuit board)
3 P + N/O 3 P + N/C
5/L3
5/L3
3/L2
3/L2
3/L2
3/L2
5/L3
5/L3
1/L1
1/L1
1/L1
1/L1
13/NO
13/NO
21/NC
21/NC
A1
A1
A1
A1
A2
A2
A2
A2
14
22
14
22
T3/6
T3/6
T3/6
T3/6
T1/2
T2/4
T1/2
T2/4
T1/2
T2/4
T1/2
T2/4
4-pole reversing contactors Integral suppression device
With screw clamp connections With Faston connectors or solder pins (printed LC8 K LP5 K
circuit board)
4P 4P
1/L1
1/L2
1/L3
1N
2/L1
2/L2
2/L3
2N
+A1
A1
5
5
7
3
7
1
1
5
7
3
5
1
A1
A1
A1
A1
A2
A2
A2
A2
6
8
2
8
2
A2
–A2
L1
L2
L3
Instantaneous auxiliary contacts LA1 K

Terminal referencing conforming to standard EN 50012
LA1 KN20, KN207, KN203 LA1 KN02, KN027, KN023 LA1 KN11, KN117, KN113 LA KN02M LA1 KN11M LA1 KN11P
2 N/O 2 N/C 1 N/O + 1 N/C 2 N/C 1 N/O + 1 N/C 1 N/O + 1 N/C
53/NO
63/NO
13/NO
51/NC
61/NC
21/NC
33/NO
53/NO
21/NC
31/NC
21/NC
61/NC
52
62
22
54
64
14
22
32
22
62
34
54
LA1 KN40, KN407, KN403 LA1 KN31, KN317, KN313 LA1 KN22, KN227, KN223 LA KN13, KN137, KN133 LA1 KN04, KN047, KN043
4 N/O 3 N/O + 1 N/C 2 N/O + 2 N/C 1 N/O + 3 N/C 4 N/C
53/NO
63/NO
73/NO
83/NO
53/NO
73/NO
83/NO
53/NO
83/NO
53/NO
51/NC
61/NC
71/NC
81/NC
61/NC
61/NC
71/NC
61/NC
71/NC
81/NC
54
64
74
84
52
62
72
82
54
62
74
84
54
62
72
84
54
62
72
82
Electronic time delay contact blocks Suppressor modules

LA2 KT LA4 KC LA4 KE
1 C/O
A1
16
18
15
A2
+ –

5/25
Characteristics 5
Contactors 5
Environment
Rated insulation voltage Conforming to 60947, V 690
(Ui) VDE 0110 gr C,BS 5424,
CSA 22-2 n° 14, UL 508
Approvals UL, CSA

(DIN 50015)

around the device
Operation °C - 20…+ 50
Operating position Vertical axis Horizontal axis
Without derating Without derating
Cabling, Min Max

5 screw clamp terminals
Solid conductor mm2 1 x 1.5 or 2 x 1.5 1 x 6 or 2 x 4
Flexible cable without cable end mm2 1 x 0.5 or 2 x 0.35 1 x 6 or 2 x 2.5
Flexible cable with cable end mm2 1 x 0.35 or 2 x 0.35 1 x 6 or 2 x 1.5
Tightening torque Pozidriv n° 1 head N.m 0.8
Terminal referencing Conforming to standards En 50005
References: Dimensions: Schemes:

5/26
Contactors 5
Conventional thermal current For ambient temperature A 12
(Ith) y 55 °C
Frequency limits of the Hz Up to 400

operational current
Rated making capacity I rms conforming to A 66

NF C 63-110 and IEC 60947
Rated breaking capacity Conforming to NF C 63-110 and A 52

(for Ue y 400 V) IEC 60947 (I rms)
Short time rating In free air for a time “t” A 50

from cold state (θ y 55 °C)
Short-circuit protection gl fuse U y 440 V A 16

Average impedance per pole At Ith and 50 Hz mΩ 4
Maximum rated operational current

For a temperature AC-3 (1) A 6
y 55 °C (Ue y 400 V)
AC-1 A 12
Utilisation in category AC-1 Increase in operational current A 20

resistive circuits, heating, by paralleling of poles
lighting
(Ue y 440 V)
Auxiliary contact characteristics of add-on blocks
Rated operational voltage
(Ue)
Up to V 690
5
Rated insulation voltage Conforming to IEC 60947, V 690
(Ui) BS 5424,
VDE 0110 group C,
CSA C 22-2 n° 14
Conventional thermal current For ambiant temperature A 10

(Ith) y 55 °C
Frequency of operational Hz Up to 400

current
Short-circuit protection Conforming to IEC 60947 and A 10

VDE 0660, gl fuse
Operational power of contacts conforming to IEC 60947

a.c. supply, category AC-15 d.c. supply, category DC-13
Electrical durability (valid up to 3600 operating Electrical durability (valid up to 1200
cycles per hour) on an inductive load such as the operating cycles per hour) on an inductive
coil of an electromagnet: making current load such as the coil of an electromagnet,
(cos ϕ 0.7) = 10 times the breaking current without economy resistor, the time
(cos ϕ 0.4). constant increasing with the load.
110/ 220/ 380/
V 24 48 127 230 400 440 V 24 48 110 220 440
1 million operating cycles VA 48 96 240 440 800 880 W 120 80 60 52 51
Occasional making capacity VA 1000 2050 5000 10000 14000 13000 W 720 600 400 300 230
(1) For LC1 contactors.

5/27
Contactors 5

Type LC1 SK06 LP1 SK06
Rated control circuit voltage (Uc) V a 24…400 c 12…72
Control voltage limits For operation 0.85…1.1 Uc 0.85…1.1 Uc

(θ y 55 °C)
For drop-out u 0.20 Uc u 0.10 Uc
Average coil consumption Inrush 16 VA 2.2 W

at 20 °C and at Uc
Sealed 4.2 VA 2.2 W
Heat dissipation W 1.4 2.2

Between coil opening of the N/C contacts ms 8…16 10…18
energisation and
closing of the N/O contacts ms 7…14 8…12
Between coil de- opening of the N/O contacts ms 6…8 4…6

energisation and
closing of the N/C contacts ms 8…10 6…8
Maximum operating rate In operating cycles per hour 1200 1200
Mechanical durability at Uc 50/60 Hz coil 10 –

In millions of operating cycles
c coil – 10

5/28
Contactor selection guide Contactors 5
according to required Mini-contactors types LC1 SK and LP1 SK

electrical durability 5
Use in category AC-3 (Ue y 440 V)

Control of 3-phase asynchronous squirrel cage motors
with breaking whilst running. 10

9
The current broken (Ic) in category AC-3 is equal to the 8
rated operational current (Ie) of the motor. 7
6
5
4
1,5
1,2
1
0,9
0,8
0,7
0,6
0,5
0,4
0,3
2 2,5 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A
220/380/415 V
2 2,5 3 4 5 6 7 A
500 V
0,55 0,75 1,1 1,5 2,2 kW
220/230 V
1,1 1,5 2,2 3 4 kW
380/400 V
1,1 1,5 2,2 3 4 kW
415 V
Current broken in A
only up to 415 V

5
Control of resistive circuits (cos ϕ u 0.95).
The current broken (Ic) in category AC-1 is equal to the 10
current (Ie) normally drawn by the load. 8

7
6
5
4
3
2
1,5
1
0,8
0,7
0,6
0,5
0,4
0,3
0,2
0,15
0,1
2 2,5 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 12 15 20 30 40
Current broken in A
References: Dimensions: Schemes :

5/29
References 5
Contactors 5
b Width of contactor 27 mm.

b Mounting on 35 mm 7 rail.
b Screw clamp terminals.
812717
Mini-contactors for motor in category AC-3

Standard power ratings of Rated operational Number of poles Instantaneous Basic reference. Weight
3-phase motors 50/60 Hz in voltage in AC-3 auxiliary contacts Complete with
category AC-3 (1) up to 400 V code indicating
220 V 380 V 660 V control circuit
230 V 415 V 690 V voltage (2)
kW kW kW A kg
1.1 2.2 2.2 6 2 – – LC1 SK0600pp 0.132
LC1 SK06 Mini-contactors for motor in category AC-1

Non inductive loads Control circuit Number of poles Instantaneous Basic reference. Weight
maximum current supply auxiliary contacts Complete with
(θ y 55 °C) code indicating
utilisation category AC-1 control circuit
voltage (2)
A kg
12 a.c. 2 – – LC1 SK0600pp 0.132
d.c. 2 – – LP1 SK0600pp 0.132
812716
Add-on block with 1 power pole (for 3-phase circuits)

For use on contactor Number of poles Instantaneous Reference Weight
auxiliary contacts kg
5
LA1 SK10 LC1 SK06 1 1 – LA1 SK10 0.022
clip-on front mounting
1 – 1 LA1 SK01 0.022
Nota : Auxiliary contact blocks and coil suppressor module, see next page.
(1) For use in AC-3 category and 3-phase circuits, an LA1 SKpp auxiliary contact block should be ordered separately for mounting
on the contactor.
(2) Standard control circuit voltages (variable delivery times, please consult your Regional Sales Office):
Mini-contactors LC1 SK
Volts a 24 48 110 120 220 230 240 380 400
50/60 Hz
Code B7 E7 F7 G7 M7 P7 U7 Q7 V7
Mini-contactors LP1 SK
Volts c 12 24 36 48 72
Code JD BD CD ED SD
Characteristics: Dimensions: Schemes:

5/30
References 5
Contactors 5

Instantaneous auxiliary contacts and coil suppressor
modules

812720
Clip-on front mounting

For use on Maximum Composition Reference Weight
contactor number of
blocks per
contactor
kg
LC1 SK06 1 2 – LA1 SK20 0.022
LA1 SK11
– 2 LA1 SK02 0.022
1 1 LA1 SK11 0.022
Coil suppressor modules

Clip-on fixing and electrical connection on right-hand side, without use
812721
of tools
For use on Type For voltages Sold in lots of Unit reference Weight
contactors
kg
LC1 SK06 and Varistor (1) a and c 10 LA4 SKE1E 0.003
LP1 SK06 24 V…48 V
LA4 SKp1p
a and c 10 LA4 SKE1U 0.003
110 V…250 V
Diode (2) c 10 LA4 SKC1U 0.003
24 V…250 V
(1) Protection provided by limiting the transient voltage to 2 Uc max. Maximum reduction of
transient voltage peaks. Slight increase in drop-out time (1.1 to 1.5 times the normal time).

5/31
Dimensions, mounting 5
Contactors 5
Dimensions
Mini-contactors
LC1 and LP1 SK06
5 84,5
55,5 27
56
LA1 SK (1) LA4 SK 3,5
(1) Only on LC1 SK06.
Mounting
Mini-contactors
LC1 and LP1 SK06
On mounting rail AM1 DP200 or AM1 DE200 (7 35 mm)
55,5 27
56
Characteristics: References: Schemes:

5/32
Schemes 5
Contactors 5
Schemes
2-pole mini-contactors
LC1 and LP1 SK06
1/L1
3/L2
A1
A2
T1/2
T2/4
Add-on power pole block

1 pole + 1 “N/O” aux. 1 pole + 1 “N/C” aux.
LA1 SK10 LA1 SK01
13/NO
21/NC
5/L3
5/L3
14
22
T3/6
T3/6

2 “N/O” 2 “N/C” 1 “N/O” + 1 “N/C”
LA1 SK20 LA1 SK02 LA1 SK11
33/NO
43/NO
33/NO
41/NC
31/NC
41/NC
5
34
44
34
42
32
42
Characteristics: References : Dimensions:

5/33
Characteristics 5
Contactors 5
Mini-contactors type LC1 SKGC,

for use in modular panels
Environment
Rated insulation Conforming to IEC 60947, V 690
voltage (Ui) VDE 0110 gr C, BS 5424,
CSA 22-2 n° 14, UL 508

(DIN 50015)
Ambient air temperature around the device

Storage °C - 50…+ 70
Cabling, connectors Min. Max.

Solid conductor mm2 1 x 1.5 or 2 x 1.5 1 x 6 or 2 x 4
5 Flexible cable with cable end mm2 1 x 0.35 or 2 x 0.35 1 x 6 or 2 x 1.5
Terminal referencing Conforming to standards En 50005

5/34
Contactors 5

Mini-contactor type LC1 SKGC2 LC1 SKGC3 and LC1 SKGC4
Conventional For ambient temperature y 55 °C A 20 20
Frequency limit of the operational current Hz up to 400

(Ue)
Rated making capacity I rms conforming to A 50 85
NF C 63-110 and IEC 60947
Rated breaking capacity Conforming to A 40 68
(for Ue y 400 V) NF C 63-110 and IEC 60947
(I rms)
Permissible In free air for a time “t” A 40 60
short time rating from cold state (θ y 55 °C)
Short-circuit protection gl fuse U y 440 V A 20 20
Average impedance At Ith and 50 Hz mΩ 4 4

per pole
Maximum rated For temperature AC-3 A 5 9
operational current y 55 °C (Ue y 400 V)
AC-1 A 20 20
Use in category AC-1 Increase in rated operational A 32 32

resistive circuits, heating, current by paralleling of 2 poles
lighting (Ue y 440 V)
Auxiliary contact characteristics of mini-contactors
Rated operational voltage Up to V 690
(Ue)
Rated insulation Conforming to IEC 60947, V 690
voltage (Ui) BS 5424, VDE 0110 group C,
CSA C 22-2 n° 14
5
Conventional For ambient temperature y 55 °C A 10
Frequency of the operational current Hz Up to 400
Short-circuit protection Conforming to IEC 60947 and A 10

VDE 0660, gl fuse
Operational power of contacts a.c. supply, category AC-15 d.c. supply, category DC-13
conforming to IEC 60947 Electrical durability (valid for up to 3600 operating Electrical durability (valid for up to 1200 operating
cycles/hour) on an inductive load such as the coil of an cycles/hour) on an inductive load such as the coil of
electromagnet: making current (cos ϕ 0.7) = 10 times an electromagnet, without economy resistor, the time
the power broken (cos ϕ 0.4). constant increasing with the load.
V 24 48 110/ 220/ 380/ 440 V 24 48 110 220 440

127 230 400
Occasional making capacity VA 1000 2050 5000 10000 14000 13000 W 720 600 400 300 230

5/35
Contactors 5


Mini-contactor type LC1 SKGC2 LC1 SKGC3 and LC1 SKGC4
Rated control circuit voltage V a 24…400
(Uc)
Control voltage limits
(θ y 55 °C) Operation 0.85…1.1 Uc
For drop-out ≥ 0.20 Uc
Average coil consumption at 20 °C and at Uc

Inrush VA 16 23
Sealed VA 4.2 4.9
Heat dissipation W 1.4 1.5

Between coil opening of the N/C contacts ms 8…16
energisation and closing of the N/O contacts ms 7…14
Between coil opening of the N/O contacts ms 6…8

de-energisation and closing of the N/C contacts ms 8…10
Maximum operating rate In operating cycles per hour 1200
Mechanical durability at Uc 50/60 Hz coil 10


5/36
Contactor selection Contactors 5
according to required Mini-contactors type LC1 SKGC,

electrical durability 5

Control of 3-phase asynchronous 10
9
squirrel cage motors with 8
breaking whilst running. 7
6
The current broken (Ic) in category AC-3 is equal
5
to the rated operational current of the motor.
4
3
1 2
2
1,5
1,2
1
0,9
0,8
0,7
0,6
0,5
0,4
0,3
2 2,5 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A
220/380/415 V
2 2,5 3 4 5 6 7 A
500 V
0,55 0,75 1,1 1,5 2,2 kW
220/230 V
1,1 1,5 2,2 3 4 kW
380/400 V
1,1 1,5 2,2 3 4 kW
415 V
Current broken in A
1 LC1 SKGC2
2 LC1 SKGC3 and SKGC4 5
- - - - - only up to 415 V
Control of resistive circuits (cos ϕ u 0.95). 10

8
The current broken (Ic) in category AC-1 is equal 7
to the current (Ie) normally drawn by the load. 6
5
4
3
2
1,5
1
0,8
0,7
0,6
0,5
0,4
0,3
0,2
0,15
0,1
2 2,5 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 12 15 20 30 40
Current broken in A

5/37
References 5
Contactors 5

b Mounting on 35 mm 7 rail or fixing by four Ø 4 screws, except for LC1 SKGC200.

b Connection by connectors.
b Mini-contactor fitted with transparent, sealable protective cover to prevent front face access.
812737
Mini-contactors, width 27 mm
Standard power ratings Rated Non inductive No. of poles Basic reference, Weight
of 3-phase motors operational loads to be completed
50/60 Hz in category AC-3 current category AC-1 by adding the
220 V 380 V 660 V in AC-3 maximum voltage code (1)
230 V 415 V 690 V up to current
400 V θ y 50 °C
kW kW kW A A kg
– – – 5 20 2 – – LC1 SKGC200pp 0.132
LC1 SKGC200
530081
Mini-contactors, width 45 mm
Standard power ratings Rated Non inductive No. of poles Basic reference, Weight
of 3-phase motors operational loads to be completed
50/60 Hz in category AC-3 current category AC-1 by adding the
220 V 380 V 660 V in AC-3 maximum voltage code (1)
230 V 415 V 690 V up to current
400 V θ y 50 °C
kW kW kW A A kg
1.1 4 4 9 20 3 1 – LC1 SKGC310pp 0.175
LC1 SKGC400
3 – 1 LC1 SKGC301pp 0.175
5 4 – – LC1 SKGC400pp 0.175
(1) Standard control circuit voltages (for other voltages, please consult your Regional Sales Office)
Volts a 24 48 110 120 220 230 240 380 400
50/60 Hz

5/38
References 5
Contactors 5

Suppressor modules
Suppressor modules
812739
Connection without need for tools by clipping onto right-hand side of contactor
For use on contactors Type For voltages Sold in Unit Weight
LC1 SKGC Varistor a and c 24…48 V 10 LA4 SKE1E 0.003
LA4 SK p1p (1)
a and c 110…250 V 10 LA4 SKE1U 0.003
Diode c 24…250 V 10 LA4 SKC1U 0.003

(2)


5/39
Dimensions, Contactors 5
mounting 5
Dimensions Mounting
Mini-contactors LC1 SKGC2 On mounting rail AM1 DP200 or AM1 DE200 (7 35 mm)
55,5 27 55,5 27
56
56
LA4 SK 3,5
Dimensions Mounting
Mini-contactors LC1 SKGC3 and SKGC4 On panel On mounting rail AM1 DP200 or AM1 DE200 (7 35 mm)
56 45 56 45
48-50
58
58
LA4 SK 4 34-35

5/40
Schemes 5
Contactors 5

LC1 SKGC2
1/L1
3/L2
A1
A2
T1/2
T2/4
LC1 SKGC310 LC1 SKGC301
1/L1
3/L2
5/L3
1/L1
3/L2
5/L3
13/NO
21/NC
A1
A1
A2
A2
14
22
T1/2
T2/4
T3/6
T1/2
T2/4
T3/6
LC1 SKGC400
1/L1
3/L2
5/L3
7/L4
A1
5
A2
T1/2
T2/4
T3/6
T4/8

5/41
Selection guide 5
TeSys contactors 5
TeSys d
Applications All types of automation system
Rated operational current

le max. AC-3 (Ue y 440 V) 9A 12 A 18 A 25 A 32 A 38 A
le AC-1 (θ y 60 °C) 20/25 A 25/32 A 25/40 A 50 A
Number of poles 3 or 4 3 or 4 3 or 4 3 or 4 3
Rated operational power

in AC-3 220/240 V 2.2 kW 3 kW 4 kW 5.5 kW 7.5 kW 9 kW
380/400 V 4 kW 5.5 kW 7.5 kW 11 kW 15 kW 18.5 kW
415/440 V 4 kW 5.5 kW 9 kW 11 kW 15 kW 18.5 kW
500 V 5.5 kW 7.5 kW 10 kW 15 kW 18.5 kW 18.5 kW
5 660/690
1000 V
V 5.5 kW
–
7.5 kW
–
10 kW
–
15 kW
–
18.5 kW
–
18.5 kW
–
Auxiliary contacts 1 N/C and 1 N/O instantaneous contacts incorporated in the contactors, with add-on blocks
common to the whole range, comprising up to 4 N/C or N/O instantaneous, up to 1 N/O + 1 N/
C time delay and up to 2 N/O or 2 N/C protected contacts and 2 screen continuity terminals
Thermal overload relays

manual-auto compatible Class 10 A 0.10…10 A 0.10…13 A 0.10…18 A 0.10…32 A 0.10…38 A 0.10…38 A
Class 20 2.5…10 A 2.5…13 A 2.5…18 A 2.5…32 A
Suppressor modules
(c and low consumption Varistor p p p p p p
contactors have built-in Diode – – – – – –
suppression as standard)
RC circuit p p p p p p
Bidirectional peak limiting p p p p p p
diode
Interfaces Relay p p p p p p
Relay + override function p p p p p p
Solid state p p p p p p
Contactor type references a or c 3-pole LC1 D09 LC1 D12 LC1 D18 LC1 D25 LC1 D32 LC1 D38
a 4-pole LC1 DT20/ LC1 DT25/ LC1 DT32/ LC1 DT40/ – –
c 4-pole LC1 D098 LC1 D128 LC1 D188 LC1 D258 – –
Reversing contactor a 3-pole LC2 D09 LC2 D12 LC2 D18 LC2 D25 LC2 D32 LC2 D38
type references
c 3-pole LC2 D09 LC2 D12 LC2 D18 LC2 D25 LC2 D32 LC2 D38
a 4-pole LC2 DT20 LC2 DT25 LC2 DT32 LC2 DT40 – –
c 4-pole LC2 DT20 LC2 DT25 LC2 DT32 LC2 DT40 – –
Pages Contactors 5/58 to 5/61

Reversing contactors 5/62 to 5/65
5/42
5
40 A 50 A 65 A 80 A 95 A 115 A 150 A
60 A 80 A 125 A 200 A
1000 V on a supply, 690 V on c supply
3 4 3 3 4 3 4 3 3 4 3
11 kW 15 kW 18.5 kW 22 kW 25 kW 30 kW 40 kW
18.5 kW 22 kW 30 kW 37 kW 45 kW 55 kW 75 kW
22 kW 25/30 kW 37 kW 45 kW 45 kW 59 kW 80 kW
22 kW 30 kW 37 kW 55 kW 55 kW 75 kW 90 kW
30 kW
22 kW
33 kW
30 kW
37 kW
37 kW
45
45
kW
kW
45
45
kW
kW
80
75
kW
kW
100 kW
90 kW
5
1 N/C and 1 N/O instantaneous contacts incorporated in the contactors, with add-on blocks common to the whole range, comprising up to 4 N/C or N/O
instantaneous, up to 1 N/O + 1 N/C time delay and up to 2 N/O or 2 N/C protected contacts and 2 screen continuity terminals
17…50 A 17…70 A 17…80 A 17…104 A 17…104 A 60…150 A 60…150 A

17…40 A 17…65 A 17…70 A 17…80 A 60…150 A 60…150 A
p p p p p p p p p p –
p p p p p p p p – – –
p p p p p p p p p p p
p p p p p p p p – – –
p p p p p p p p p p –
LC1 D40 LC1 D50 LC1 D65 LC1 D80 LC1 D95 LC1 D115 LC1 D150
LC1 D40 – LC1 D65 LC1 D80 – LC1 D115 –
LP1 D40 – LP1 D65 LP1 D80 – LC1 D115 –
LC2 D40 LC2 D50 LC2 D65 LC2 D80 LC2 D95 LC2 D115 LC2 D150
– – – – – – –
LC2 D40 – LC2 D65 LC2 D80 – LC2 D115 –
– – – – – – –
5/43
Selection guide 5
TeSys contactors 5
TeSys d, low consumption
Applications Automation systems
Rated operational current

le max. AC-3 (Ue y 440 V) 9A 12 A 18 A
le AC-1 (θ y 60 °C) 20/25 A 20/25 A 25/32 A
Number of poles 3 or 4 3 or 4 3 or 4
Rated operational power

in AC-3 220/240 V 2.2 kW 3 kW 4 kW
380/400 V 4 kW 5.5 kW 7.5 kW
415/440 V 4 kW 5.5 kW 9 kW
5 500 V 5.5 kW 7.5 kW 10 kW
660/690 V 5.5 kW 7.5 kW 10 kW
Coil consumption 2.4 W (100 mA - 24 V)

Operating ranges 0.7…1.25 Uc
Operating time
at 20 °C and at Uc Closing 70 ms
Opening 25 ms
Auxiliary contact blocks 1 N/C and 1 N/O instantaneous contacts incorporated in the contactors, with add-on blocks
common to the whole range, comprising up to 2 N/C or 2 N/O instantaneous standard contacts
Interference suppression Built-in suppression as standard, by bi-directional peak limiting diode
Contactor type
3-pole LC1 D09 LC1 D12 LC1D18
4-pole LC1 DT20/D098 LC1 DT25/D128 LC1 DT32/D188
Reversing contactor type

3-pole LC2 D09 LC2 D12 LC2 D18
4-pole LC2 DT20 LC2 DT25 LC2 DT32
Pages Contactors 5/58 to 5/61

Reversing contactors 5/62 to 5/65
5/44
5
25 A 32 A 38 A
25/40 A 50 A 50 A
3 or 4 3 3
5.5 kW 7.5 kW 9 kW
11 kW 15 kW 18.5 kW
11 kW 15 kW 18.5 kW
15 kW 18.5 kW 18.5 kW 5
15 kW 18.5 kW 18.5 kW
2.4 W (100 mA - 24 V)
0.7…1.25 Uc
70 ms
25 ms
1 N/C and 1 N/O instantaneous contacts incorporated in the contactors, with add-on blocks common to the whole range, comprising up to 2 N/C or 2 N/O
instantaneous standard contacts
Built-in suppression as standard, by bi-directional peak limiting diode
LC1 D25 LC1 D32 LC1 D38

LC1 DT40/D258
LC2 D25 LC2 D32 LC2 D38

LC2 DT40
5/45
Characteristics 5
TeSys contactors 5
TeSys d
Contactor type LC1 D09…D18 D25…D38 D40 D50…D95 D115 and D150
DT20 and DT25 DT32 and DT40
Environment
Rated insulation voltage (Ui) Conforming to IEC 60947-4-1, V 690 1000
overvoltage category III,
degree of pollution: 3
Rated impulse Conforming to IEC 60947 kV 6 8

Conforming to standards IEC 60947-1, 60947-4-1, NFC 63-110, VDE 0660, BS 5424, JEM 1038.
EN 60947-1, EN 60947-4-1.
GL, DNV, PTB, RINA
Complies with SNCF, Sichere Trennung recommendations
Separation insulation Conforming to VDE 0106 V 400

part 101 and A1 (draft 2/89)
Degree of protection (1) Conforming to VDE 0106

(front face only) and IEC 60529
Power connection Protection against direct finger contact IP 2X
Coil connection Protection against direct finger contact IP 2X
Protective treatment Conforming to IEC 60068 “TH”

around the device
Permissible °C - 40…+ 70, for operation at Uc

5
Operating positions Without derating in the
(2) following positions a/c a c
30 °
180 °
180 °
°
30
90
°
°
90
Positions that are For c contactors LC1 D09 to D38

not permissible

Conforming to IEC 60695-2-1 °C 960
Shock resistance (3) Contactor open 10 gn 8 gn 8 gn 8 gn 6 gn

1/2 sine wave = 11 ms Contactor closed 15 gn 15 gn 10 gn 10 gn 15 gn
Vibration resistance (3) Contactor open 2 gn

5…300 Hz Contactor closed 4 gn 4 gn 4 gn 3 gn 4 gn
(1) Protection provided for the cabling c.s.a.'s indicated on the next page and for connection by
cable.
(2) For other operating positions, please consult your Regional Sales Office.
(3) Without change of contact states, in the most unfavourable direction (coil energised at Ue).

5/46
TeSys contactors 5
TeSys d
Contactor type LC1 D09 and D12 D18 D25 D32 D38 D18 and D25 D40 D50 and D80 and D115 and D150
DT20 and (3P) (3P) (4P) D65 D95
DT25 DT32 and
DT40
Power circuit connections
Connection by cable
Tightening torque Screw clamp terminals Connector Screw Connector Connector
2 inputs clamp 1 input 2 inputs
terminals
Flexible cable 1 conductor mm 2 1…4 1.5…6 1.5…10 2.5…10 2.5…10 2.5…25 2.5…25 4…50 10…120
without cable end 2 conductors mm 2 1…4 1.5…6 1.5…6 2.5…10 2.5…10 2.5…16 2.5…16 4…25 10…120 + 10…50
Flexible cable 1 conductor mm 2 1…4 1…6 1…6 1…10 2.5…10 2.5…25 2.5…25 4…50 10…120
with cable end 2 conductors mm 2 1…2.5 1…4 1…4 1.5…6 2.5…10 2.5…10 2.5…10 4…16 10…120 + 10…50
Solid cable 1 conductor mm 2 1…4 1.5…6 1.5…6 1.5…10 2.5…16 2.5…25 2.5…25 4…50 10…120
without cable end 2 conductors mm 2 1…4 1.5…6 1.5…6 2.5…10 2.5…16 2.5…16 2.5…16 4…25 10…120 + 10…50
Screwdriver Philips N° 2 N° 2 N° 2 N° 2 N° 2 – – – –
Flat screwdriver Ø Ø6 Ø6 Ø6 Ø6 Ø6 Ø 6…Ø 8 Ø 6…Ø 8 Ø 6…Ø 8 –
Key for hexagonal headed screw – – – – – – – 4 4
Tightening torque N.m 1.7 1.7 2.5 2.5 1.8 5 5 9 12
Spring terminal connections (1)

Flexible cable 1 conductor mm 2 2.5 4 4 4 – 10 – – –
without cable end (4: DT25)
2 conductors mm 2 2.5 4 4 4 – – – – –
(except
DT25)
Connection by bars or lugs
Bar cross-section – – – – – – – 3 x 16 5 x 25
Lug external Ø mm 8 8 10 10 8 (2) 13 16 17 25
Ø of screw mm M3.5 M3.5 M4 M4 M3.5 M5 M6 M6 M8
Screwdriver Philips N° 2 N° 2 N° 2 N° 2 N° 2 N° 2 N° 3 – –
Flat screwdriver Ø Ø6 Ø6 Ø6 Ø6 Ø6 Ø8 Ø8 Ø8 – 5
Key for hexagonal headed screw – – – – – – – 10 13
Tightening torque N.m 1.7 1.7 2.5 2.5 1.8 5 5 9 12
Control circuit connections

Connection via cable (tightening via screw clamps)
Flexible cable 1 conductor mm 2 1…4 1…4 1…4 1…4 1…4 1…4 1…4 1…4 1…2.5
without cable end 2 conductors mm 2 1…4 1…4 1…4 1…4 1…4 1…4 1…4 1…4 1…2.5
Flexible cable 1 conductor mm 2 1…4 1…4 1…4 1…4 1…4 1…2.5 1…2.5 1…2.5 1…2.5
with cable end 2 conductors mm 2 1…2.5 1…2.5 1…2.5 1…2.5 1…2.5 1…2.5 1…2.5 1…2.5 1…2.5
Solid cable 1 conductor mm 2 1…4 1…4 1…4 1…4 1…4 1…4 1…4 1…4 1…2.5
without cable end 2 conductors mm 2 1…4 1…4 1…4 1…4 1…4 1…4 1…4 1…4 1…2.5
Screwdriver Philips N° 2 N° 2 N° 2 N° 2 N° 2 N° 2 N° 2 N° 2 N° 2
Flat screwdriver Ø Ø6 Ø6 Ø6 Ø6 Ø6 Ø6 Ø6 Ø6 Ø6
Tightening torque N.m 1.7 1.7 1.7 1.7 1.7 1.2 1.2 1.2 1.2
Spring terminal connections (1)

Flexible cable 1 conductor mm 2 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 – 2.5 – – – –
without cable end
2 conductors mm 2 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 – 2.5 – – – –
Connection by bars or lugs

Lug external Ø mm 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8
Ø of screw mm M3.5 M3.5 M3.5 M3.5 M3.5 M3.5 M3.5 M3.5 M3.5
Screwdriver Philips N° 2 N° 2 N° 2 N° 2 N° 2 N° 2 N° 2 N° 2 N° 2
Flat screwdriver Ø Ø6 Ø6 Ø6 Ø6 Ø6 Ø6 Ø6 Ø6 Ø6
Tightening torque N.m 1.7 1.7 1.7 1.7 1.7 1.2 1.2 1.2 1.2
(1) If cable ends are used, choose the next size down (example: for 2.5 mm2, use 1.5 mm2 ) and square crimp the cable
ends using a special tool.
(2) To connect cables with a c.s.a. > 4mm2 and up to 10 mm2, it is essential to use special connectors, sold in bags of
100 (reference: LAD 96180).

5/47
TeSys contactors 5
TeSys d
Contactor type LC1 D09 DT20 D12 DT25 D18 DT32 D25 DT40
(3P) D098 (3P) D128 (3P) D188 (3P) D258
Rated operational current (Ie) In AC-3, θ y 60 °C A 9 12 18 25
(Ue y 440 V) In AC-1, θ y 60 °C A 25 (1) 20 25 (1) 25 32 (1) 32 40 (1) 40
Rated operational voltage (Ue) Up to V 690 690 690 690
Frequency limits Of the operating current Hz 25…400 25…400 25…400 25…400

Conventional thermal current θ y 60 °C A 25 (1) 20 25 (1) 25 32 (1) 32 40 (1) 40
(Ith)
Rated making capacity Conforming to IEC 60947 250 250 300 450
(440 V)
Rated breaking capacity Conforming to IEC 60947 250 250 300 450
(440 V)
Permissible short time rating For 1 s A 210 210 240 380
No current flowing for preceding For 10 s A 105 105 145 240
15 minutes with θ y 40 °C
For 1 min A 61 61 84 120
For 10 min A 30 30 40 50
Protection by fuses Without thermal type 1 A 25 40 50 63
against short-circuits overload relay, gG fuse type 2 A 20 25 35 40
(U y 690 V)
With thermal overload relay A See pages 6/16 and 6/17, for aM or gG fuse ratings corresponding to the associated
thermal overload relay
Average impedance per pole At Ith and 50 Hz mΩ 2.5 2.5 2.5 2
Power dissipation per pole for AC-3 W 0.20 0.36 0.8 1.25
the above operational currents AC-1 W 1.56 1.56 2.5 3.2
Control circuit characteristics, a.c. supply

Rated control circuit voltage 50/60 Hz V 12…690
(Uc)
Control voltage limits
5 50 or 60 Hz coils Operational
Drop-out
–
–
50/60 Hz coils Operational 0.8…1.1 Uc on 50 Hz and
0.85…1.1 Uc on 60 Hz at 60 °C
Drop-out 0.3…0.6 Uc at 60 °C
Average a 50 Hz Inrush 50 Hz coil VA –
consumption Cos ϕ 0.75
at 20 °C and at Uc
50/60 Hz coil VA 70
Sealed 50 Hz coil VA –
Cos ϕ 0.3
50/60 Hz coil VA 7
a 60 Hz Inrush 60 Hz coil VA –
Cos ϕ 0.75
50/60 Hz coil VA 70
Sealed 60 Hz coil VA –
Cos ϕ 0.3
50/60 Hz coil VA 7.5
Heat dissipation 50/60 Hz W 2…3
Operating time Closing "C" ms 12…22
(2) Opening "O" ms 4…19
Mechanical durability 50 or 60 Hz coil –
in millions of operating cycles 50/60 Hz coil on 50 Hz 15

at ambient temperature y 60 °C
(1) Versions with spring terminal connections:
16 A for LC1 D093 and LC1 D123 (20 A possible with 2 x 2.5 mm 2 cables in parallel),
25 A for LC1 D183 to LC1 D323 (32 A possible for LC1 D183 connected with 2 x 4 mm2
cables in parallel; 40 A possible for LC1 D253 and LC1 D323 connected with 2 x 4 mm2
cables in parallel).

5/48
5
5
D32 D38 D40 D50 D65 D80 D95 D115 D150
32 38 40 50 65 80 95 115 150
50 (1) 50 60 80 80 125 125 200 200
690 690 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000
25…400 25…400 25…400 25…400 25…400 25…400 25…400 25…400 25…400

50 50 60 80 80 125 125 200 200
550 550 800 900 1000 1100 1100 1260 1660
550 550 800 900 1000 1100 1100 1100 1400
430 430 720 810 900 990 1100 1100 1400

260 310 320 400 520 640 800 950 1200
138 150 165 208 260 320 400 550 580
60 60 72 84 110 135 135 250 250
63 63 80 100 160 200 200 250 315
63 63 80 100 125 160 160 200 250
See pages 24514/2 and 24514/3, for aM or gG fuse ratings corresponding to the associated thermal overload relay
2 2 1.5 1.5 1 0.8 0.8 0.6 0.6

2 3 2.4 3.7 4.2 5.1 7.2 7.9 13.5
5 5 5.4 9.6 6.4 12.5 12.5 24 24
12…690 24…660 24…500
–
–
0.85…1.1 Uc at 55 °C
0.3…0.6 Uc at 55 °C
0.85…1.1 Uc at 55 °C
0.3…0.5 Uc at 55 °C 5
0.8…1.1 Uc on 50 Hz and 0.8…1.1 Uc on 50 Hz and 0.8…1.15 Uc on 50/60 Hz
0.85…1.1 Uc on 60 Hz at 60 °C 0.85…1.1 Uc on 60 Hz at 55 °C at 55 °C
0.3…0.6 Uc at 60 °C 0.3…0.6 Uc at 55 °C 0.3…0.5 Uc at 55 °C
– 200 300 –
0.75 0.75 0.8 0.9
70 245 280…350 280…350
– 20 22 –
0.3 0.3 0.3 0.9
7 26 2…18 2…18
– 220 300 –
0.75 0.75 0.8 0.9
70 245 280…350 280…350
– 22 22 –
0.3 0.3 0.3 0.9
7.5 26 2…18 2…18
2…3 6…10 3…8 3…4.5
12…22 20…26 20…26 20…26 20…35 20…35 20…50 20…35
4…19 8…12 8…12 8…12 6…20 6…20 6…20 40…75
– 16 16 16 10 10 8 –
15 6 6 6 4 4 8 8
3600 3600 3600 3600 3600 3600 2400 1200
5/49
TeSys contactors 5
TeSys d
Contactor type LC1 D09…D38 LC1 or LP1 LC1 or LP1 D80 LC1 D115 and
LC1 DT20…DT40 D40…D65 LC1 D95 LC1 D150
d.c. control circuit characteristics
Rated control c V 12…440 12…440 24…440
circuit voltage (Uc)
Control voltage limits Operational Standard 0.7…1.25 Uc 0.85…1.1 Uc 0.75…1.2 Uc
coil at 60 °C at 55 °C at 55 °C
Wide range – 0.75…1.2 Uc at 55 °C –
coil
Drop-out 0.1…0.25 Uc at 60 °C 0.1…0.3 Uc at 55 °C 0.15…0.4 Uc at 55 °C
Average consumption c Inrush W 5.4 22 22 270 to 365
at 20 °C and at Uc Sealed W 5.4 22 22 2.4…5.1
Average operating Closing "C" ms 63 ± 15 % 85…110 95…130 20…35

time at Uc (1) Opening "O" ms 20 ± 20 % 20…35 20…35 40…75
Nota : The arcing time depends on the circuit switched by the poles. For all normal 3-phase
applications, the arcing time is less than 10 ms. The load is isolated from the supply after a time
equal to the sum of the opening time and the arcing time.
Time constant L/R (L/R) ms 28 65 75 25
Mechanical durability at Uc In millions of operating cycles 30 20 20 8

Maximum operating rate In operating cycles per hour 3600 3600 3600 1200
Low consumption control circuit characteristics
Rated insulation voltage Conforming to IEC 60947-1 V 690 –
Conforming to UL, CSA V 600 –
Maximum voltage Of the control circuit on c 250 –
Average consumption Wide range coil Inrush W 2.4 –

5 d.c. at 20 °C and at Uc
Operating time (1)
(0.7…1.25 Uc)
Closing
Sealed
"C"
W
ms
2.4
77 ± 15 %
–
–
at Uc and at 20 °C Opening "O" ms 25 ± 20% –
Voltage limits (θ y 60 °C) Operational 0.7 to 1.25 Uc –

of the control circuit Drop-out 0.1…0.3 Uc –
Time constant L/R (L/R) ms 40 –
Mechanical durability In millions of operating cycles 30 –

Maximum operating rate At ambient temperature y 60 °C ops/h 3600 –
(1) The operating times depend on the type of contactor electromagnet and its control mode.
The closing time "C" is measured from the moment the coil supply is switched on to initial

5/50
TeSys contactors 5
TeSys d
Characteristics of auxiliary contacts incorporated in the contactor

Mechanically linked contacts Conforming to Each contactor has 2 N/O and N/C contacts mechanically linked on the same movable
IEC60947-5-1 contact holder
Mirror contact Conforming to The N/C contact on each contactor represents the state of the power contacts and can
IEC60947-4-1 be connected to a PREVENTA safety module
Conventional For ambient temperature A 10
Frequency of the Hz 25…400
operational current
Minimum switching capacity U min V 17
λ = 10–8 I min mA 5
Short-circuit protection Conforming to gG fuse: 10 A
IEC 60947-5-1
Rated making capacity Conforming to IEC 60947-5-1, A a: 140, c: 250
I rms
500 ms A 120
100 ms A 140
Non-overlap time Guaranteed between ms 1.5 on energisation and on de-energisation

Operational power a.c. supply, categories AC-14 and AC-15 d.c. supply, category DC-13
of contacts Electrical durability (valid for up to 3600 operating cycles/hour) Electrical durability (valid for up to 1200 operating cycles/hour)
conforming to IEC 60947-5-1 on an inductive load such as the coil of an electromagnet: on an inductive load such as the coil of an electromagnet,
making current (cos ϕ 0.7) = 10 times the power broken without economy resistor, the time constant increasing with the
(cos ϕ 0.4). load.
V 24 48 115 230 400 440 600 V 24 48 125 250 440
1 million operating cycles VA 60 120 280 560 960 1050 1440 W 96 76 76 76 44
3 million operating cycles VA 16 32 80 160 280 300 420 W 48 38 38 32 – 5
10 million operating cycles VA 4 8 20 40 70 80 100 W 14 12 12 – –
AC-15 DC-13
10 10
8 8
7 7 24 V
6 6
5 5 48 V
4 4 125 V
3 3
2 2
250 V
1 1 440 V
0,8 0,8
0,7 0,7
0,6 0,6
0,5 0,5
0,4 0,4
0,3 0,3
0,2 0,2
0,1 0,1
0,1 0,2 0,3 0,4 0,6 0,8 1 2 3 4 6 8 10 0,1 0,2 0,3 0,4 0,6 0,8 1 2 3 4 6 8 10
0,5 0,7 0,9 5 7 9 0,5 0,7 0,9 5 7 9

5/51
Characteristics 5
TeSys contactors 5
Auxiliary contact blocks without

dust and damp protected contacts
for TeSys d contactors
Contact block type LAD N or LAD C LAD T and LAD S LAD R LAD 8
Environment
Conforming to standards IEC 60947-5-1, NF C 63-140, VDE 0660, BS 4794, EN 60947-5-1
Degree of protection Conforming to VDE 0106 Protection against direct finger contact IP 2X

Permissible for operation at Uc °C - 40…+ 70
Connection by cable Phillips N° 2 and Ø 6 mm mm2 Min: 1 x 1, max: 2 x 2.5

Flexible or solid cable
with or without cable end
Spring terminal connections Flexible or solid cable mm2 Max. 2 x 2.5
without cable end
Instantaneous and time delay contact characteristics

Number of contacts 1, 2 or 4 2 2 2
Rated operational voltage Up to V 690
(Ue)
Rated insulation voltage (Ui) Conforming to IEC 60947-5-1 V 690
Conventional thermal For ambient temperature y 60 °C A 10
current (Ith)
Frequency of the Hz 25…400
operational current
5 Minimum switching capacity U min

I min
V
mA
17
5
Short-circuit protection Conforming to IEC 60947-5-1 A 10
and VDE 0660. gG fuse
Rated making capacity Conforming to I rms A a: 140 ; c: 250
IEC 60947-5-1
500 ms A 120
100 ms A 140
Non-overlap time Guaranteed between ms 1.5 (on energisation and on de-energisation)

Overlap time Guaranteed between N/C and ms 1.5 – – –
N/O contacts on LAD C22
Time delay Ambient air temperature for °C – - 40…+ 70 - 40…+ 70 –
(LAD T, R and S contact blocks) operation
Accuracy only valid for setting Repeat accuracy – ± 2 % ± 2 % –
range indicated on the front face
Drift up to 0.5 million – + 15 % + 15 % –
operating cycles
Drift depending on – 0.25 % per °C 0.25 % per °C –
ambient air temperature
Mechanical durability In millions of operating cycles 30 5 5 30
Operational power of contacts See page 5/54

5/52
TeSys contactors 5
Auxiliary contact blocks with

Contact block type LA1 DX LA1 DZ LA1 DY

Protected Non protected
Environment
Conforming to standards IEC 60947-5-1, VDE 0660
Ambient air temperature Storage and operation °C - 25…+ 70

Connection Phillips N° 2 and Ø 6 mm mm 2 Min: 1 x 1, max: 2 x 2.5
Flexible or solid cable with or
without cable end
Number of contacts 2 2 2 2
Contact characteristics
Rated operational voltage Up to V 50 50 690 24
(Ue)
Rated insulation voltage (Ui) Conforming to IEC 60947-5-1 V 250 250 690 250
Conforming to UL, CSA V – – 600 –
Conventional thermal For ambient temperature A – – 10 –
current (Ith) y 40 °C
Maximum operational current mA 500 500 – 50
(Ie)
Frequency of the Hz – – 25…400 –
operational current
Minimum switching capacity U min V 17 17 17 3
I min mA 4 4 5 0.3
Short-circuit protection Conforming to IEC 609475-1 A – – 10 –

gG fuse
Conforming to IEC 60947 5-1, A – – a: 140; c: 250 –
5
I rms
Short-time rating Permissible for 1s A – – 100 –
500 ms A – – 120 –
100 ms A – – 140 –
Insulation resistance MΩ > 10 > 10 > 10 > 10
Mechanical durability In millions of operating cycles 5 5 30 5

Materials and technology Silver - Single break Silver - Single break – Gold - Single break
used for dust and damp with crossed bars
protected contacts

5/53
TeSys contactors 5
Auxiliary contact blocks with

Rated operational power of contacts (conforming to IEC 60947-5-1)

a.c. supply, categories AC-14 and AC-15
Electrical durability (valid for up to 3600 operating cycles/hour) on an inductive load such as the coil of an electromagnet: making current (cos ϕ 0.7) = 10 times the
power broken (cos ϕ 0.4).
V 24 48 115 230 400 440 600

1 million operating cycles VA 60 120 280 560 960 1050 1440
10
8
7
6
5
4
3
1
0,8
0,7
0,6
0,5
0,4
0,3
0,2
0,1
0,1 0,2 0,3 0,4 0,6 0,8 1 2 3 4 6 8 10
0,5 0,7 0,9 5 7 9
5 Current broken in A
d.c. supply, category DC 13

Electrical durability (valid for up to 1200 operating cycles/hour) on an inductive load such as the coil of an electromagnet, without economy resistor, the time constant
increasing with the load.
V 24 48 125 250 440

1 million operating cycles W 120 90 75 68 61
10
8
7 24 V
6
5 48 V
4 125 V
3
2 250 V
1 440 V
0,8
0,7
0,6
0,5
0,4
0,3
0,2
0,1
0,1 0,2 0,3 0,4 0,6 0,8 1 2 3 4 6 8 10
0,5 0,7 0,9 5 7 9
Current broken in A

5/54
Characteristics 5
TeSys contactors 5
Control modules, coil suppressor modules and

mechanical latch blocks for TeSys d contactors
Environment
Conforming to standards IEC 60947-5-1
Ambient air temperature Storage °C – 40…+ 80

around the device Operation °C – 25…+ 55
Permissible for operation at Uc °C – 25…+ 70

Recommendation The Auto - Man selector switch must only be operated with the Start - Stop (“O” “I”)
switch in position “O”
Rated insulation voltage Conforming to IEC 60947-5-1 V 250
Rated operational voltage Conforming to IEC 60947-5-1 V 250
Protection Against electric shocks kV 2
Built-in protection Contactor coil suppression By varistor
Indication By integral LED Illuminates when the contactor coil is energised

Electrical durability In operating cycles 20 000
Suppressor modules
Module type LA4 DA, LAD 4RC LA4 DB, LAD 4T LA4 DC LA4 DE, LAD 4V
Type of protection RC circuit Bidirectional peak Diode Varistor
limiting diode
Rated control circuit voltage (Uc) V a 24…415 a or c 24…72 c 12…250 a or c 24…250 5
Maximum peak voltage 3 Uc 2 Uc Uc 2 Uc
Natural RC frequency 24/48 V Hz 400 – – –

50/127 V Hz 200 – – –
110/240 V Hz 100 – – –
380/415 V Hz 150 – – –
Mechanical latch blocks (1)

Mechanical latch block type LA6 DK10 LAD 6K10 LA6 DK20
For mounting on contactor LC1 D40…D65, LP1 D65 LC1 D09…D38, LC1 D80…D150
DT20…DT40 LP1 D80 and LC1 D115
Product certifications UL, CSA UL, CSA
Rated insulation voltage Conforming to IEC 60947-5-1 V 690 690
Rated control circuit voltage a 50/60 Hz and c V 24…415 24…415

Power required For unlatching a VA 25 25
c W 30 30
Maximum operating rate In operating cycles/ hour 1200 1200
On-load factor 10 % 10 %
Mechanical durability at Uc In millions of operating cycles 0.5 0.5
(1) Unlatching can be manually operated or electrically controlled (pulsed).

The LA6 DK or LAD 6K latch coil and the LC1 D operating coil must not be energised
simultaneously. The duration of the LA6 DK or LAD 6K and LC1 D control signals must be
u 100 ms.

pages 5/70 à 5/73 pages 5/82 and 5/83 pages 5/86 and 5/87
5/55
Characteristics 5
TeSys contactors 5
Electronic serial timer module

Module type LA4 DT (On-delay)

Environment

For operation at Uc °C – 25…+ 70
Cabling Phillips n° 2 and Ø 6 mm mm2 Min: 1 x 1, max: 2 x 2.5
Flexible or solid conductor

Built-in protection On input By varistor
Contactor coil suppression By varistor
Rated control circuit voltage V a or c 24…250
(Uc)
Permissible variation 0.8…1.1 Uc
Type of control By mechanical contact only
Timing characteristics
Timing ranges s 0.1…2; 1.5…30; 25…500
Repeat accuracy 0…40 °C ± 3 % (10 ms minimum)

5 Reset time During time delay period ms 150
After time delay period ms 50
Immunity to microbreaks During time delay period ms 10
After time delay period ms 2
Minimum control ms –
pulse duration
Indication of time delay By LED Illuminates during time delay period
Switching characteristics (solid state type)

Maximum power dissipated W 2
Leakage current mA <5
Residual voltage V 3.3
Overvoltage protection 3 kV; 0.5 joule

Electrical durability In millions of operating cycles 30
Function diagram
LA4 DT “On-delay” electronic timers
U supply A1-A2 1
0
Time delay output
1
Contactor coil
0
t
Red LED

5/56
Characteristics 5
TeSys contactors 5
Interface modules for TeSys d contactors
Environment

Permissible for operation at Uc °C – 25…+ 70
Module type LA4 DFBQ LA4 DFB LA4 DFE LA4 DLB LA4 DLE LA4 DWB
With relay With relay With relay With relay + override Solid state
Rated insulation voltage Conforming to V 5 250
IEC 60947-5-1
Rated operational voltage Conforming to V 415 250
IEC 60947-5-1
Indication of input state By integral LED which illuminates when the contactor coil is energised
Input signals Control voltage (E1-E2) V c 24 c 24 c 48 c 24 c 48 c 24
Permissible variation V 17…30 17…30 33…60 17…30 33…60 5…30
Current consumption at 20 °C mA 25 25 15 25 15 8.5 for 5 V
15 for 24 V
State “0” guaranteed for U V < 2.4 < 2.4 < 4.8 < 2.4 < 4.8 < 2.4
I mA <2 <2 < 1.3 <2 < 1.3 <2
State “1” guaranteed for U V 17 17 33 17 33 5
Built-in protection Against reverse polarity By diode
Of the input By diode
Electrical durability In millions of operating cycles 3 10 10 3 3 20
at 220 A/240 V
Maximum immunity ms 4 4 4 4 4 1 5
to microbreaks
Power dissipated At 20 °C W 0.6 0.6 0.6 0.6 0.6 0.4
Direct mounting With coil a24…250 V – LC1 D40…D150 –

without contactor a 100…250 V – – LC1 D40…D115
a 380…415 V LC1 D40…D150 – –
Mounting with With coil a24…250 V – LC1 D09…D38, DT20…DT40 LC1 D09…D38,
cabling adapter LAD 4BB DT20…DT40
a 380…415 V LC1 D09…D38, – –
DT20…DT40
Total operating time at Uc The operating times depend on the type of contactor electromagnet and its control mode. The
(of the contactor) closing time "C" is measured from the moment the coil supply is switched on to initial contact of
the main poles. The opening time "O" is measured from the moment the coil supply is switched
off to the moment the main poles separate.
LC1 D09…D38, LC1 D40…D65 LC1 D80 and D95
DT20…DT40
With LA4 DF, LA4 DL “C” ms 20…30 28…34 28…43
"O" ms 16…24 20…24 18…32
Cabling Phillips N° 2 and Ø 6 mm mm 2 Min: 1 x 1; max: 2 x 2.5
Flexible or solid cable

5/57
References 5
TeSys contactors 5
For motor control up to 75 kW at 400 V,

in category AC-3
Control circuit: a.c., d.c. or low consumption
3-pole contactors for connection by screw clamp terminals or connectors

810356

of 3-phase motors opera- taneous to be completed by adding (3)
50-60 Hz in category AC-3 tional auxiliary the voltage code (2)
(θ y 60 °C) current contacts
in AC-3 Fixing (1)
440 V
220 V 380 V 660 V
up to
230 V 400 V 415 V 440 V 500 V 690 V 1000 V
LC1 D09pp kW kW kW kW kW kW A kg
2.2 4 4 4 5.5 5.5 – 9 1 1 LC1 D09pp 0.320
3 5.5 5.5 5.5 7.5 7.5 – 12 1 1 LC1 D12pp 0.325
4 7.5 9 9 10 10 – 18 1 1 LC1 D18pp 0.330
5.5 11 11 11 15 15 – 25 1 1 LC1 D25pp 0.370
810353
7.5 15 15 15 18.5 18.5 – 32 1 1 LC1 D32pp 0.375

9 18.5 18.5 18.5 18.5 18.5 – 38 1 1 LC1 D38pp 0.380
11 18.5 22 22 22 30 22 40 1 1 LC1 D40pp 1.400
15 22 25 30 30 33 30 50 1 1 LC1 D50pp 1.400
18.5 30 37 37 37 37 37 65 1 1 LC1 D65pp 1.400
22 37 45 45 55 45 45 80 1 1 LC1 D80pp 1.590
25 45 45 45 55 45 45 95 1 1 LC1 D95pp 1.610
30 55 59 59 75 80 65 115 1 1 LC1 D115pp 2.500
40 75 80 80 90 100 75 150 1 1 LC1 D150pp 2.500
LC1 D25pp 3-pole contactors for connection by lugs or bars
Example: LC1 D09pp becomes LC1 D096pp.
Accessories
810352
Auxiliary contact blocks and add-on modules: see pages 5/68 to 5/75.
5 (1) LC1 D09 to D38: clip-on mounting on 35 mm 5 rail AM1 DP or screw fixing.
LC1 D40 to D95 a : clip-on mounting on 35 mm 5 rail AM1 DP or 75 mm 5 rail AM1 DL or screw fixing.
LC1 D40 to D95 c: clip-on mounting on 75 mm 5 rail AM1 DL or screw fixing.
LC1 D115 and D150: clip-on mounting on 2 x 35 mm 5 rails AM1 DP or screw fixing.
a.c. supply
Volts 24 42 48 110 115 220 230 240 380 400 415 440 500
LC1 D09…D150 (D115 and D150 coils with integral suppression device fitted as standard))
50/60 Hz B7 D7 E7 F7 FE7 M7 P7 U7 Q7 V7 N7 R7 –
LC1 D95pp LC1 D40…D115
50 Hz B5 D5 E5 F5 FE5 M5 P5 U5 Q5 V5 N5 R5 S5
60 Hz B6 – E6 F6 – M6 – U6 Q6 – – R6 –
d.c. supply
Volts 12 24 36 48 60 72 110 125 220 250 440
105517
LC1 D09…D38 (coils with integral suppression device fitted as standard)

U 0.7…1.25 Uc JD BD CD ED ND SD FD GD MD UD RD
LC1 D40…D95
U 0.75…1.2 Uc JW BW CW EW – SW FW – MW – –
LC1 D115 and D150 (coils with integral suppression device fitted as standard)
U 0.75…1.2 Uc – BD – ED ND SD FD GD MD UD RD
Low consumption
Volts c 5 12 20 24 48 110 220 250
LC1 D09...D38 (coils with integral suppression device fitted as standard)
U 0.7…1.25 Uc AL JL ZL BL EL FL ML UL
LC1 D115pp (3) The weights indicated are for contactors with a.c. control circuit. For d.c. or low consumption control circuit, add 0.160 kg for
contactors LC1 D09 to D38, 0.785 kg for contactors LC1 D40 to D65 and 1 kg for contactors LC1 D80 and D95.

5/58
References 5
TeSys contactors 5
For motor control up to 15 kW at 400 V,

in category AC-3
3-pole contactors for connection by spring terminals

810358

of 3-phase motors opera- taneous to be completed by adding (3)
50/60 Hz in category AC-3 tional auxiliary the voltage code (2)
(θ y 60 °C) current contacts Fixing (1)
in AC-3
220 V 380 V 660 V
440 V
230 V 400 V 415 V 440 V 500 V 690 V up to
2.2 4 4 4 5.5 5.5 9 1 1 LC1 D093pp 0.320
3 5.5 5.5 5.5 7.5 7.5 12 1 1 LC1 D123pp 0.325
4 7.5 9 9 10 10 18 1 1 LC1 D183pp 0.330
5.5 11 11 11 15 15 25 1 1 LC1 D253pp 0.370
7.5 15 15 15 18.5 18.5 32 (4) 1 1 LC1 D323pp 0.375
LC1 D123pp
3-pole contactors for connection by Faston connectors
These contactors are fitted with Faston connectors: 2 x 6.35 mm on the power poles and 1 x 6.35 mm on the coil and auxiliary
terminals. It is possible to make 2 x 6.35 mm connections to the coil terminals by using a double Faston connector, reference:
LA9 6180, to be ordered separately (sold in lots of 100).
For contactors LC1 D09 and LC1 D12 only, in the references selected above, replace the figure 3 before the voltage code with a
figure 9. Example: LC1 D093pp becomes LC1 D099pp.
Accessories
(1) LC1 D09 to D32: clip-on mounting on 35 mm 5 rail AM1 DP or screw fixing.
a.c. supply
Volts 24 42 48 110 115 220 230 240 380 400 415 440
LC1 D09…D32
d.c. supply
Volts 12 24 36 48 60 72 110 125 220 250 440
5
Low consumption
Volts c 5 12 20 24 48 110 220 250
(3) The weights indicated are for contactors with a.c. control circuit. For d.c. or low consumption control circuit, add 0.160 kg for
contactors LC1 D09 to D32.
(4) Must be wired with 2 x 4 mm2 cables in parallel on the upstream side. On the downstream side, outgoing terminal block
LAD 331 may be used (Quickfit technology, see page 1/219).

5/59
References 5
TeSys contactors 5
For control in category AC-1, 25 to 200 A


810366
Non inductive loads Number Instantaneous Basic reference, Weight

maximum current of poles auxiliary to be completed by adding (3)
(θ y 60 °C) contacts the voltage code (1)
utilisation category AC-1 Fixing (2)
A kg
25 3 1 1 LC1 D09pp 0.320
or LC1 D12pp 0.325
32 3 1 1 LC1 D18pp 0.330
40 3 1 1 LC1 D25pp 0.370
LC1 D12pp
50 3 1 1 LC1 D32pp 0.375
or LC1 D38pp 0.380
60 3 1 1 LC1 D40pp 1.400
80 3 1 1 LC1 D50pp 1.400
or LC1 D65pp (4) 1.400
125 3 1 1 LC1 D80pp 1.590
or LC1 D95pp (4) 1.610
200 3 1 1 LC1 D115pp 2.500
or LC1 D150pp (5) 2.500
3-pole contactors for connection by lugs or bars
3-pole contactors for connection by Faston connectors

These contactors are fitted with Faston connectors: 2 x 6.35 mm on the power poles and 1 x 6.35 mm on the coil terminals. It is
810367
possible to make 2 x 6.35 mm connections to the coil terminals by using a double Faston connector, reference: LAD 99635, to be
ordered separately (sold in lots of 100).
5 For contactors LC1 D09 and LC1 D12 only, in the references selected above, insert a figure 9 before the voltage code.

16 3 1 1 LC1 D093pp (6) 0.320
or LC1 D123pp (6) 0.325
25 3 1 1 LC1 D183pp (5) 0.335
or LC1 D253pp (7) 0.325
or LC1 D323pp (7) 0.325
LC1 D123pp Accessories

(1) See note (1) page 5/61.

(2) LC1 D09 to D38 and LC1 DT20 to DT40: clip-on mounting on 35 mm 5 rail AM1 DP or screw fixing.
LC1 D40 to D95 a : clip-on mounting on 35 mm 5 rail AM1 DP or 75 mm 5 rail AM1 DL or screw fixing.
LC1 or LP1 D40 to D95 c: clip-on mounting on 75 mm 5 rail AM1 DL or screw fixing.
(3) The weights indicated are for contactors with a.c. control circuit. For d.c. or low consumption control circuit, add 0.160 kg for
contactors LC1 D09 to D38, 0.785 kg for contactors LC1 D40 to D65 and 1 kg for contactors LC1 D80 and D95.
(4) Selection according to the number of operating cycles, see AC-1 curve, page 5/164.
(5) 32 A with 2 x 4 mm 2 cables connected in parallel.
(6) 20 A with 2 x 2.5 mm2 cables connected in parallel.
(7) 40 A with 2 x 4 mm 2 cables connected in parallel.

5/60
References 5
TeSys contactors 5
For control in category AC-1, 20 to 200 A


Non inductive loads Number Instantaneous Basic reference, Weight
565131
maximum current of poles auxiliary to be completed by adding (3)

(θ y 60 °C) contacts the voltage code (1)
utilisation category AC-1 Fixing (2)
A kg
20 4 – 1 1 LC1 DT20pp 0.365
2 2 1 1 LC1 D098pp 0.365
25 4 – 1 1 LC1 DT25pp 0.365
2 2 1 1 LC1 D128pp 0.365
32 4 – 1 1 LC1 DT32pp 0.425
LC1 DT20pp
2 2 1 1 LC1 D188pp 0.425
40 4 – 1 1 LC1 DT40pp 0.425
2 2 1 1 LC1 D258pp 0.425
60 4 – – – LC1 D40004pp 1.440
or LP1 D40004pp 2.210
2 2 – – LC1 D40008pp 1.440
or LP1 D40008pp 2.210
80 4 – – – LC1 D65004pp 1.440
or LP1 D65004pp 2.210
2 2 – – LC1 D65008pp 1.450
or LP1 D65008pp 2.220
125 4 – – – LC1 D80004pp 1.760
or LP1 D80004pp 2.685
2 2 – – LC1 D80008pp 1.840
or LP1 D80008pp 2.910
200 4 – – – LC1 D115004pp 2.860
4-pole contactors for connection by lugs or bars
In the references selected above, insert a figure 6 before the voltage code (except LC1 D65ppp and LP1 D65ppp).
5
Example: LC1 DT20pp becomes LC1 DT206pp.
20 4 – 1 1 LC1 DT203 0.380
2 2 1 1 LC1 D0983 0.380
25 4 – 1 1 LC1 DT253 0.380
2 2 1 1 LC1 D1283 0.380
32 4 – 1 1 LC1 DT323 0.425
2 2 1 1 LC1 D1883 0.425
40 4 – 1 1 LC1 DT403 0.425
2 2 1 1 LC1 D2583 0.425
Accessories
a.c. supply
Volts 24 42 48 110 115 220 230 240 380 400 415 440 500
LC1 D09...D150 and LC1 DT20...DT40 (coils with integral suppression device fitted as standard)
LC1 D40...D115
60 Hz B6 – E6 F6 – M6 – U6 Q6 – – R6 –
d.c. supply
Volts 12 24 36 48 60 72 110 125 220 250 440
LC1 or LP1 D40...D80
LC1 D115 (coils with integral suppression device fitted as standard)
Low consumption
Volts c 5 12 20 24 48 110 220 250
(2) See note (2) page 5/60
(3) The weights indicated are for contactors with a.c. control circuit. For d.c. or low consumption control circuit, add 0.165 kg and
for contactors LC1 D80, 1 kg.
5/61
References 5
TeSys contactors 5
Reversing contactors for motor control

up to 75 kW at 400 V, in category AC-3
Horizontally mounted, pre-assembled
3-pole reversing contactors for connection by screw clamp terminals or connectors

810369
Pre-wired power connections

Standard power ratings Opera- Instantaneous Contactors supplied with coils Weight
of 3-phase motors tional auxiliary Basic reference, to be completed (3)
50/60 Hz in category AC-3 current contacts per by adding the voltage code (2)
in AC-3 contactor Fixing (1)
(θ y 60 °C)
440 V
LC2 D12pp 220 V 380 V 660 V up to
230 V 400 V 415 V 440 V 500 V 690 V 1000 V
kW kW kW kW kW kW kW A kg
With mechanical interlock, without electrical interlocking
2.2 4 4 4 5.5 5.5 – 9 1 1 LC2 D09pp (4) 0.687
3 5.5 5.5 5.5 7.5 7.5 – 12 1 1 LC2 D12pp (4) 0.697
4 7.5 9 9 10 10 – 18 1 1 LC2 D18pp (4) 0.707
5.5 11 11 11 15 15 – 25 1 1 LC2 D25pp (4) 0.787
7.5 15 15 15 18.5 18.5 – 32 1 1 LC2 D32pp (4) 0.797
9 18.5 18.5 18.5 18.5 18.5 – 38 1 1 LC2 D38pp (4) 0.807
565132
11 18.5 22 22 22 30 – 40 1 1 LC2 D40pp 2.400

15 22 25 30 30 33 – 50 1 1 LC2 D50pp 2.400
18.5 30 37 37 37 37 – 65 1 1 LC2 D65pp 2.400
22 37 45 45 55 45 – 80 1 1 LC2 D80pp 3.200
25 45 45 45 55 45 – 95 1 1 LC2 D95pp 3.200
With mechanical interlock and electrical interlocking
30 55 59 59 75 80 65 115 1 1 LC2 D115pp 6.350
40 75 80 80 90 100 75 150 1 1 LC2 D150pp 6.400
LC2 D50pp 3-pole reversing contactors for connection by lugs or bars
For reversing contactors LC2 D09 to LC2 D38, LC2 D115 and LC2 D150, in the references selected above, insert a figure 6 before
the voltage code. Example: LC2 D09pp becomes LC2 D096pp.
5 Accessories
LC2 D40 to D95: clip-on mounting on 35 mm 5 rail AM1 DP or 75 mm 5 rail AM1 DL or screw fixing.
a.c. supply
Volts 24 42 48 110 115 220 230 240 380 400 415 440 500
LC2 D09…D150 (D115 and D150 coils with integral suppression device fitted as standard))
LC2-D40…D115
60 Hz B6 – E6 F6 – M6 – U6 Q6 – – R6 –
d.c. supply
Volts 12 24 36 48 60 72 110 125 220 250 440
Low consumption
Volts c 5 12 20 24 48 110 220 250
(3) The weights indicated are for contactors with a.c. control circuit. For d.c. or low consumption control circuit, add 0.330 kg
(LC2 D09…D38).
(4) For reversing contactors with electrical interlocking pre-wired at the factory, add suffix V to the references selected above.
Example: LC2 D09P7 becomes LC2 D09P7V.
Selection : Characteristics : Dimensions, schemes :

5/62
References 5
TeSys contactors 5

up to 15 kW at 400 V, in category AC-3
Horizontally mounted, pre-assembled
3-pole reversing contactors for connection by spring terminals

565133

Mechanical interlock, without electrical interlocking.
Standard power ratings Opera- Instantaneous Contactors supplied with coils Weight
of 3-phase motors tional auxiliary Basic reference, to be completed by (3)
50/60 Hz in category AC-3 current contacts per adding the voltage code (2)
in AC-3 contactor
(θ y 60 °C) Fixing (1)
440 V
220 V 380 V 660 V
up to
230 V 400 V 415 V 440 V 500 V 690 V
LC2 D123pp
2.2 4 4 4 5.5 5.5 9 1 1 LC2 D093pp 0.687
3 5.5 5.5 5.5 7.5 7.5 12 1 1 LC2 D123pp 0.697
4 7.5 9 9 10 10 18 1 1 LC2 D183pp 0.707
5.5 11 11 11 15 15 25 1 1 LC2 D253pp 0.787
7.5 15 15 15 18.5 18.5 32 1 1 LC2 D323pp 0.797
3-pole reversing contactors for connection by Faston connectors
All power connections are to be made by the customer.
These contactors are fitted with Faston connectors: 2 x 6.35 mm on the power poles and 1 x 6.35 mm on the coil terminals. It is
possible to make 2 x 6.35 mm connections to the coil terminals by using a double Faston connector, reference: LAD 99635, to
be ordered separately (sold in lots of 100).
For contactors LC2 D09 and LC2 D12 only, replace the digit 3 with a 9 in the references selected above.
Accessories
a.c. supply 5
Volts 24 42 48 110 115 220 230 240 380 400 415 440
LC2 D09…D32
d.c. supply
Volts 12 24 36 48 60 72 110 125 220 250 440
Low consumption
Volts c 5 12 20 24 48 110 220 250
(3) The weights indicated are for reversing contactors with a.c. control circuit. For d.c. or low consumption control circuit, add
0.330 kg.

5/63
References 5
TeSys contactors 5
Changeover contactor pairs

for control in category AC-1, 20 to 200 A,
horizontally mounted, pre-assembled
4-pole changeover contactor pairs for connection by screw clamp terminals or

connectors
510441
LC2 DT20 to LC2 DT40: mechanical interlock without electrical interlocking.

LC2 D40 to LC2 D80: order separately 2 auxiliary contact blocks LAD Np1 to obtain electrical interlocking
between the 2 contactors (see page 5/69). For electrical interlocking incorporated in the mechanical interlock,
please consult your Regional Sales Office.
LC2 D115: mechanical interlock with integral, pre-wired electrical interlocking.
Utilisation category AC-1 Instantaneous auxiliary Contactors supplied with coil Weight
Non inductive loads contacts per contactor Basic reference,
Maximum rated to be completed by adding the voltage code (1)
LC2 DT20pp operational current
Fixing (2)
(θ y 60 °C)
A kg
20 1 1 LC2 DT20pp 0.730
25 1 1 LC2 DT25pp 0.730
32 1 1 LC2 DT32pp 0.850
40 1 1 LC2 DT40pp 0.850
60 – – LC2 D40004pp 3.200
80 – – LC2 D65004pp 3.200
125 – – LC2 D80004pp 3.200
200 – – LC2 D115004pp 7.400

5
4-pole changeover contactor pairs for connection by lugs or bars
20 1 1 LC2 DT206pp 0.730
25 1 1 LC2 DT256pp 0.730
32 1 1 LC2 DT326pp 0.850
40 1 1 LC2 DT406pp 0.850
60 – – LC2 D400046 2.400
80 – – LC2 D650046pp 3.200
125 – – LC2 D800046pp 3.200
200 – – LC2 D1150046pp 7.400
Accessories
Auxiliary contact blocks and add-on modules, see pages 5/68 to 5/75.
(1) See note (1) on next page.
(2) LC2 DT20 to DT40: clip-on mounting on 35 mm 5 rail AM1 DP or screw fixing.
LC2 D65 and D80: clip-on mounting on 35 mm 5 rail AM1 DP or 75 mm 5 rail AM1 DL or screw fixing.
LC2 D115: clip-on mounting on 2 x 35 mm 5 rails AM1 DP or screw fixing.

5/64
References 5
TeSys contactors 5

for control in category AC-1, 20 A,
horizontally mounted, pre-assembled
4-pole changeover contactor pairs for connection by spring terminals

Utilisation category AC-1 Instantaneous auxiliary Contactors supplied with coil Weight
Non inductive loads contacts per contactor Basic reference,
Maximum rated to be completed by adding the voltage code (1)
operational current
Fixing (2)
(θ y 60 °C)
A kg
20 1 1 LC2 DT203pp 0.760
Accessories
Auxiliary contact blocks and add-on modules, see pages 5/68 to 5/75.
a.c. supply
Volts 24 42 48 110 115 220 230 240 380 400 415 440 500
LC2 DT20…DT40
LC2 D65…D115
60 Hz B6 – E6 F6 – M6 – U6 Q6 – – R6 –
d.c. supply
Volts 12 24 36 48 60 72 110 125 220 250 440
LC2 DT20…DT40 (coils with integral suppression device fitted as standard)
Low consumption
Volts c 5 12 20 24 48 110 220
LC2 DT20...DT40 (coils with integral suppression device fitted as standard)
250
5
(2) Clip-on mounting on 35 mm 5 rail AM1 DP or screw fixing.

5/65
References 5
TeSys contactors 5
Component parts for assembling

reversing contactors for motor control
or low speed - high speed starters
For 3-pole reversing contactors for motor control

Contactors with screw clamp terminals or connectors
565135
Horizontally mounted, assembled by customer
Using 2 identical Set of power connections Mechanical interlock

contactors (1) Reference Weight Kit reference Weight
kg kg
Including mechanical interlock and an electrical interlocking kit for the contactors
LC1 D09…D38 LAD 9R1V (2) 0.045 – –
LA9 D4002 Including mechanical interlock with integral electrical interlocking

LC1 D40…D65 LA9 D6569 0.290 LA9 D4002 0.170
810374
LC1 D80 and D95 (a) LA9 D8069 0.290 LA9 D4002 0.170
LC1 D80 and D95 (c) LA9 D8069 0.490 LA9 D8002 0.170
LC1 D115 and D150 LA9 D11569 1.450 LA9 D11502 0.290
LA9 D6569 Including mechanical interlock without electrical interlocking

LC1 D09…D38 LAD 9R1 (2) 0.045 – –
with screw clamp terminals
810375
or connectors
LC1 D09…D32 (3) – – –
with spring terminal
connections
LC1 D40…D65 LA9 D6569 0.290 LA9 D50978 0.170
LC1 D80 and D95 (a) LA9 D8069 0.490 LA9 D50978 0.170
5 LC1 D80 and D95 (c) LA9 D8069 0.490 LA9 D80978 0.170
LA9 D8069
For low speed - high speed starter

Description For contactors with connections Reference Weight
810373
kg
Connection kit enabling Screw clamps or connectors LAD 9PVGV 0.016
reversing of low and high
speed directions, using a Power connection module LAD 3PVGV 0.034
reversing contactor and a with spring terminal connections
2N/O + 2N/C main pole
Outgoing terminal block LAD 3PVGV10 0.034
contactor
with spring terminal connections
(1) To order the 2 contactors: see pages 5/58 and 5/59.

565134
(2) Including mechanical interlock.

(3) To build a reversing contactor with spring terminal connections, the following components must be ordered:
- 1 mechanical interlock LAD 9V2,
- 1 upstream power connection kit and 1 downstream power connection kit.
Upstream power connection kit LAD 9V10: installed in the Quickfit system with power connection module LAD 34.
(If module LAD 34 is not used, replace LAD 9V10 with LAD 9V12).
LAD 9R1
Downstream power connection kit LAD 9V11: installed in the Quickfit system with outgoing terminal block LAD 331.
(If module LAD 331 is not used, replace LAD 9V11 with LAD 9V13).

5/66
References 5
TeSys contactors 5
Component parts for assembling

changeover contactor pairs for distribution
For 4-pole changeover contactor pairs (3-phase distribution + neutral)

565137
Contactors with screw clamp terminals or connectors

Horizontally mounted, assembled by customer
Using 2 identical Set of power connections Mechanical interlock

contactors (1) Reference Weight Kit reference Weight
kg kg
Including mechanical interlock and an electrical interlocking kit for the contactors
LC1 DT20…DT40 LAD T9R1V (2) 0.040 – –
LA9 D4002 Including mechanical interlock with integral electrical interlocking

LC1 D65004 LA9 D6570 0.150 LA9 D4002 0.170
LC1 D80004 LA9 D8070 0.280 LA9 D4002 0.170
LP1 D80004 LA9 D8070 0.280 LA9 D8002 0.170

565136
LC1 D115004 LA9 D11570 1.100 LA9 D11502 0.280
Including mechanical interlock without electrical interlocking

LC1 DT20…DT40 LAD-T9R1 (2) 0.035 – –
with screw clamp terminals
or connectors
LC1 DT203…DT403 (3) – – –
with spring terminal
LA9 D50978 connections
LC1 or LP1 D65004 LA9 D6570 (4) 0.150 LA9 D50978 0.155
LC1 D80004 LA9 D8070 (4) 0.280 LA9 D50978 0.155

5
810379
LP1 D80004 LA9 D8070 (4) 0.280 LA9 D80978 0.180
LA9 D6570 For 3-pole changeover contactor pairs

Including mechanical interlock with integral electrical interlocking
LC1 D115 and D150 LA9 D11571 0.960 LA9 D11502 0.280
810380
(1) To order the 2 contactors: see pages 5/61 and 5/62.

(2) Including mechanical interlock.
(3) To build a changeover contactor pair with spring terminal connections, the following components must be ordered in
addition to the 2 contactors:
- 1 mechanical interlock LAD 9V2,
- 1 downstream power connection kit LAD 9V9.
LA9 D8070 (4) Order 2 contact blocks LAD Np1 to build the electrical interlock, see page 5/69.

5/67
Presentation 5
TeSys contactors 5

510385
See page opposite for mounting possibilities

according to the contactor type and rating.
5/68
References 5
TeSys contactors 5

Instantaneous auxiliary contact blocks for connection by screw clamp terminals

For use in normal operating environments
In order to mount an LAD 8N on an LC1 D40 to D95, a set of shims must be ordered separately, see page 5/75
Clip-on mounting (1) Number of Composition Reference Weight
contacts per block
kg
Front 1 – – – 1 – LAD N10 0.020
– – – – 1 LAD N01 0.020
2 – – – 1 1 LAD N11 0.030
– – – 2 – LAD N20 0.030
– – – – 2 LAD N02 0.030
4 – – – 2 2 LAD N22 0.050
– – – 1 3 LAD N13 0.050
– – – 4 – LAD N40 0.050
– – – – 4 LAD N04 0.050
– – – 3 1 LAD N31 0.050
4 incl. 1 N/O & 1 N/C – – – 2 2 LAD C22 0.050
make before break
Side 2 – – – 1 1 LAD 8N11 0.030
– – – 2 – LAD 8N20 0.030
– – – – 2 LAD 8N02 0.030
For terminal referencing conforming to EN 50012
Front, on 3P contactors and 2 – – – 1 1 LAD N11G 0.030
4P contactors 20 to 60A 4 – – – 2 2 LAD N22G 0.050
Front, on 4P contactors 2 – – – 1 1 LAD N11P 0.030
80 to 200A 4 – – – 2 2 LAD N22P 0.050
With dust and damp protected contacts, for use in particularly harsh industrial environments
Front 2 – 2 – – – LA1 DX20 0.040
1
2
1
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
LA1 DX11
LA1 DX02
0.040
0.040
5
– 2 2 – – LA1 DY20 (2) 0.040
4 – 2 – 2 – LA1 DZ40 0.050
– 2 – 1 1 LA1 DZ31 0.060
Instantaneous auxiliary contact blocks for connection by lugs
This type of connection is not possible for blocks with 1 contact or blocks with dust and damp protected contacts. For all
other instantaneous auxiliary contact blocks, add the figure 6 to the end of the references selected above. Example:
LAD N11 becomes LAD N116.
Instantaneous auxiliary contact blocks for connection by spring terminals
This type of connection is not possible for LAD 8, LAD N with 1 contact or blocks with dust and damp protected contacts. For
all other contact blocks, add the figure 3 to the end of the references selected above. Example: LAD N11 becomes LAD N113.
Instantaneous auxiliary contact blocks for connection by Faston connectors
This type of connection is not possible for LAD 8, LAD N with 1 contact or blocks with dust and damp protected contacts.
For all other contact blocks, add the figure 9 to the end of the references selected above. Example: LAD N11 becomes
LAD N119.
(1) Maximum number of auxiliary contacts that can be fitted
Contactors Instantaneous auxiliary contacts Time delay
Type Number of poles and size Side mounted Front mounted Front
mounted
1 contact 2 contacts 4 contacts
a 3P LC1 D09…D38 1 on LH side and – 1 or 1 or 1
LC1 D40…D95 (50/60 Hz) 1 on each side or 2 and 1 or 1 or 1
LC1 D40…D95 (50 or 60 Hz) 1 on each side and 2 and 1 or 1 or 1
LC1 D115 and D150 1 on LH side and – 1 or 1 or 1
4P LC1 DT20…DT40 1 on LH side and – 1 or 1 or 1
LC1 D40…D80 1 on each side or 1 or 1 or 1 or 1
LC1 D115 1 on each side and 1 or 1 or 1 or 1
c 3P LC1 D09…D38 – – 1 or 1 or 1
LC1 D40…D95 – 2 and 1 or 1 or 1
LC1 D115 and D150 1 on LH side and – 1 or 1 or 1
4P LC1 DT20…DT40 – – 1 or 1 or 1
LC1 D40…D80 – 2 and 1 or 1 or 1
LC1 D115 1 on each side – and 1 or 1 or 1
LC (3) 3P LC1 D09…D38 – – 1 – –
4P LC1 DT20…DT40 – – 1 – –
(2) Device fitted with 4 earth screen continuity terminals.
(3) LC: low consumption.

5/69
References 5
TeSys contactors 5

Time delay auxiliary contact blocks
Mechanical latch blocks
Time delay auxiliary contact blocks for connection by screw clamp terminals
Maximum number of auxiliary contact blocks that can be fitted per contactor, see page 5/69.
Sealing cover to be ordered separately, see page 5/75.
LAD T0 and LAD R0: with extended scale from 0.1 to 0.6 s.
LAD S2: with switching time of 40 ms ± 15 ms between opening of the N/C contact and closing of the N/O contact.
Clip-on mounting Number of Time delay Reference Weight
810438
contacts Type Setting range

per block kg
Front 1 N/O + 1 N/C On-delay 0.1…3 s LAD T0 0.060
0.1…30 s LAD T2 0.060
10…180 s LAD T4 0.060
1…30 s LAD S2 0.060
Off-delay 0.1…3 s LAD R0 0.060

LAD T
0.1…30 s LAD R2 0.060
810439
10…180 s LAD R4 0.060
Time delay auxiliary contact blocks for connection by lugs

Add the figure 6 to the end of the references selected above. Example: LAD T0 becomes LAD T06.
Time delay auxiliary contact blocks for connection by spring terminals

LA6 DK
Time delay auxiliary contact blocks for connection by Faston connectors
5
810441
Mechanical latch blocks (1)

Clip-on mounting Unlatching For use on contactor Basic reference, Weight
control to be completed
by adding the
voltage code (2) kg
Front Manual or electric LC1 D40…D65 (3 P a or c) LA6 DK10p 0.070
LC1 D40 and D65 (4 P a)
LP1 D40 and D65 (4 P c)
LC1 D80…D150 (3 P a) LA6 DK20p 0.090

LAD T p3 LC1 D80 and D115 (3 P c)
LC1 D80 (4 P a)
LC1 D80 & D115 (4 P a)
LP1 D80 & LC1 D115 (4 P c)
810440
LC1 D09…D38 (a or c) LAD 6K10p 0.070

LC1 DT20…DT40 (a or c)
(1) The mechanical latch block must not be powered up at the same time as the contactor. The duration of the control
signal for the mechanical latch block and the contactor should be:
u 100 ms for a contactor operating on an a.c. supply
u 250 ms for a contactor operating on a d.c. supply
Volts 50/60 Hz, c 24 32/36 42/48 60/72 100 110/127 220/240 256/277 380/415
Code B C E EN K F M U Q
LA6 DK

5/70
References 5
TeSys contactors 5

Suppressor modules
RC circuits (Resistor-Capacitor)
b Effective protection for circuits highly sensitive to "high frequency" interference. For use only in cases where the
voltage is virtually sinusoidal, i.e. less than 5% total harmonic distortion.
b Voltage limited to 3 Uc max. and oscillating frequency limited to 400 Hz max.
b Slight increase in drop-out time (1.2 to 2 times the normal time).
Mounting For use with contactor (1) Reference Weight
510384
Rating Type
Va Vc kg
Clip-on (3) D09…D38 (3P) 24…48 – LAD 4RCE 0.012
DT20…DT40 50…127 – LAD 4RCG 0.012
110…240 – LAD 4RCU 0.012
Screw mounting (4) D40…D150 (3P) and 24…48 – LA4 DA2E 0.018
D40…D115 (4P) 50…127 – LA4 DA2G 0.018
110…240 – LA4 DA2U 0.018
LAD 4pp
380…415 – LA4 DA2N 0.018
Varistors (peak limiting)
b Protection provided by limiting the transient voltage to 2 Uc max.
b Maximum reduction of transient voltage peaks.
b Slight increase in drop-out time (1.1 to 1.5 times the normal time).
Clip-on (3) D09…D38 (3P) (2) 24…48 – LAD 4VE 0.012
DT20…DT40 50…127 – LAD 4VG 0.012
810443
110…250 – LAD 4VU 0.012
Screw mounting (4) D40…D115 (3P) and 24…48 – LA4 DE2E 0.018
D40…D115 (4P) 50…127 – LA4 DE2G 0.018
110…250 – LA4 DE2U 0.018
D40…D95 (3P) and – 24…48 LA4 DE3E 0.018

D40…D80 (4P) – 50…127 LA4 DE3G 0.018
Flywheel diodes
– 110…250 LA4 DE3U 0.018
5
b No overvoltage or oscillating frequency.
b Increase in drop-out time (6 to 10 times the normal time).
b Polarised component.
LA4 Dpp Clip-on (5) D09…D38 (3P) – 24…250 LAD 4DDL 0.012
DT20…DT40
Screw mounting (4) D40…D95 (3P) – 24…250 LA4 DC3U 0.018
D40…D80 (4P)
Bidirectional peak limiting diode

510726

Clip-on (3) (5) D09…D38 (3P) (2) 24 – LAD 4TB 0.012
DT20…DT40 – 24 LAD 4TBDL 0.012
72 – LAD 4TS 0.012
– 72 LAD 4TSDL 0.012
– 125 LAD 4TGDL 0.012
– 250 LAD 4TUDL 0.012
– 600 LAD 4TXDL 0.012
Screw mounting (4) D40…D95 (3P) 24 – LA4 DB2B 0.018

LAD 4DDL or LAD 4TpDL D40…D80 (4P) 72 – LA4 DB2S 0.018
– 24 LA4 DB3B 0.018
– 72 LA4 DB3S 0.018
(1) For satisfactory protection, a suppressor module must be fitted across the coil of each contactor.
(2) From LC1 D09 to D38 and from LC1 DT20 to DT40, d.c. and low consumption 3-pole contactors are fitted with a
built-in bidirectional peak limiting diode suppressor as standard. On contactors produced after 15th July 2004, this
bidirectional peak limiting diode is removable and can therefore be replaced by the user. (See reference above).
If a d.c. or low consumption contactor is used without suppression, the standard suppressor should be replaced with
a blanking plug (reference LAD 9DL)
(3) Clipping-on makes the electrical connection. The overall size of the contactor remains unchanged.
(4) Mounting at the top of the contactor on coil terminals A1 and A2.
(5) In order to install these accessories, the existing suppression device must first be removed.

5/71
Presentation 5
TeSys contactors 5
510386
LA4 DT
LA4 DW
LA4 DF LA4 DL LA4 DM
LAD 4BB
LC1 D09…D38
See page opposite for mounting possibilities

according to contactor type and rating.
5/72
References 5
TeSys contactors 5

Accessories
Electronic serial timer modules (1)

b 3-pole contactors LC1 D09 to D38 and 4-pole contactors LC1 DT20 to DT40: mounted using adapter LAD 4BB, to
be ordered separately, see page 5/75.
b 3-pole contactors LC1 D40 to D150 and 4-pole contactors LC1 D40 to D115: mounted directly across terminals A1
and A2 of contactor.
On-delay type
Operational voltage a Time delay Reference Weight
24…250 V 100…250 V kg
LC1 D09…D38 (3P) LC1 D40…D150 (3P) 0.1…2 s LA4 DT0U 0.040
and DT20…DT40 (4P) 1.5…30 s LA4 DT2U 0.040
25…500 s LA4 DT4U 0.040
Interface modules
Relay interface
Operational voltage a Supply voltage Reference Weight
24…250 V 380…415 V E1-E2 (c)
kg
– LC1 D09…D150 (3P) 24 V LA4 DFBQ 0.055
and DT20…DT40 (4P)
LC1 D09…D150 (3P) – 24 V LA4 DFB 0.050

and DT20…DT40 (4P) 48 V LA4 DFE 0.050
Relay interface with "AUTO-I" manual override switch (output forced “ON”)
Operational voltage a Supply voltage Reference Weight
24…250 V 100…250 V E1-E2 (c)
kg
LC1 D09…D150 (3P) – 24 V LA4 DLB 0.045
and DT20…DT40 (4P) 48 V LA4 DLE 0.045 5
Solid state interface
LC1 D09…D38 (3P) LC1 D40…D115 (3P) 24 V LA4 DWB 0.045

For local override operation tests with 2-position “Auto-Man” switch and “O-I” switch
Operational voltage a Reference Weight
24…100 V 100…250 V kg
LC1 D09…D150 (3P) – LA4 DMK 0.040
– LC1 D40…D150 (3P) LA4 DMU 0.040
(1) For 24 V operation, the contactor must be fitted with a 21 V coil (code Z). See pages 5/76 to 5/81

5/73
References 5
TeSys contactors 5

Accessories
Accessories for main pole and control connections

810445
Description For use with contactors LC1 Sold in Unit reference Weight
a c lots of kg
Connectors for 4-pole 10 mm2 DT20, DT25 DT20, DT25 1 LA D92560 0.030
cable, size
(1 connector) 3-pole 25 mm2 D09…D38 D09…D38 1 LA9 D3260 0.040
LA9 D3260 Connectors for 3-pole 120 mm2 D115, D150 D115, D150 1 LA9 D115603 0.560
cable, size
(2 connectors) 4-pole 120 mm2 D115 D115 1 LA9 D115604 0.740
Connectors for 3-pole D115, D150 D115, D150 1 LA9 D115503 0.300
810446
lug type terminals

(2 connectors) 4-pole D115 D115 1 LA9 D115504 0.360
Protective 3-pole (1) D115, D150 D115, D150 1 LA9 D115703 0.250
covers for
connectors for 4-pole (1) D115, D150 D115, D150 1 LA9 D115704 0.300
lug type terminals
Links 2 poles D09…D38 D09…D38 10 LA9 D2561 0.060
LA9 D11550p for parallel
connection of DT20, DT25 (4P) DT20, DT25 (4P) 10 LA9 D1261 0.012
810447
DT32, DT40 (4P) DT32, DT40 (4P) 10 LA D96061 0.060
D40…D65 D40…D65 2 LA9 D40961 0.021
D80, D95 D80 2 LA9 D80961 0.060
3 poles D09…D38 D09…D38 10 LAD 9P3 (2) 0.005

(star connection)
D80, D95 D80, D95 1 LA9 D80962 0.080
5 4 poles DT20, DT25 DT20, DT25 2 LA9 D1263 0.024
D40…D65 D40…D65 2 LA9 D40963 0.070

LA9 D11560p
D80, D95 D80 2 LA9 D80963 0.100
810450
Staggered coil connection – D40…D80 10 LA9 D09966 0.006
Control circuit take-off D40…D65 D40…D65 10 LA9 D6567 0.010

from main pole
D80, D95 D80, D95 10 LA9 D8067 0.010
Spreaders D115, D150 D115, D150 3 GV7 AC03 0.180

for increasing the pole pitch to 45 mm
(1) For 3-pole contactors: 1 set of 6 covers, for 4-pole contactors: 1 set of 8 covers.
LA9 D11570p (2) Separate connecting bar for connecting 2 poles in parallel.
810448
LA9 D80962
810449
LA9 D6567
5/74
References 5
TeSys contactors 5

Accessories
Sets of contacts and arc chambers

Description For contactor Reference Weight
810452
kg
Sets of contacts 3-pole LC1 D115 LA5 D1158031 0.260
LC1 D150 LA5 D150803 0.260
4-pole LC1 D115004 LA5 D115804 0.330
Arc chambers 3-pole LC1 D115 LA5 D11550 0.395
LC1 D150 LA5 D15050 0.395
GV2 G245 4-pole LC1 D115004 LA5 D115450 0.470
810453
For adapting existing wiring LC1 D09…D38 Without coil suppression LAD 4BB 0.019
to a new product LC1 DT20…DT25 With coil a24…48 V LAD 4BBVE 0.014
suppression a 50…127 V LAD 4BBVG 0.014
a 110…250 V LAD 4BBVU 0.014
Set of 63 A busbars 2 contactors LC1 D09…D18 or D25…D38 GV2 G245 0.036
for parallelling of contactors 4 contactors LC1 D09…D18 or D25…D38 GV2 G445 0.077
Terminal block For supply to one or more GV2 G busbar sets GV1 G09 0.040
GV1 G09 Protection accessories

Description Application Sold in Reference Weight
lots of kg
810451
Miniature circuit-breaker 5 x 20 with 4 A-250 V fuse 1 LA9 D941 0.025

Sealing cover For LAD T, LAD R 1 LA9 D901 0.005
Safety cover LC1 D09…D38 and DT20…DT40 1 LAD 9ET1 0.026
preventing access to LC1 D40…D65 1 LAD 9ET2 0.012
the moving contact carrier
LC1 D80 and D95 1 LAD 9ET3 0.004
LC1 D115 and D150 1 LAD 9ET4 0.004
LA9 D941 Marking accessories

5
810454
Sheet of 64 blank legends, Contactors (except 4P), 10 LAD 21 0.020

self-adhesive, 8 x 33 mm (1) LC1 D40…D115),
LAD N (4 contacts), LA6 DK
Sheet of 112 blank legends, LAD N (2 contacts), LAD T, LAD R, 10 LAD 22 0.020
LAD 9ETp self-adhesive, 8 x 12mm (1) LRD
Sheet of 64 blank legends Contactors (except 4P), 10 LAD 23 0.050
for marking using plotter LC1 D40…D115),
or 8 x 33 mm engraver LAD (4 contacts), LA6 DK
563527
Sheet of 440 blank legends All products 35 LAD 24 0.200

for marking using plotter
or 8 x 12 mm engraver
Marker holder, 4-pole contactors, 100 LA9 D92 0.001
snap-in 8 x 22 mm LC1 D40...D80, LA6 DK
Marker holder, LC1 D09...38, 100 LAD 90 0.001
abel
SIS-L
lling
are ion d'étiq
Labe iel de ngss crear
Logic hriftu
Besc areare
Softw
Softw
para la creaz
per
uette
ione
s
créat oftware etiquetasdi etich

softw ette
snap-in 8 x 18 mm LC1 DT20...40,
LAD N (4 contacts),
LAD T, LAD R
Gerin
Merlin n
Modico D canique
Square
Teleme
Bag of 300 blank legends On holder LA9 D92 1 LA9 D93 0.001
XBY 2U self-adhesive, 7 x 21 mm
“SIS Label” Multi-language version: 1 XBY 2U 0.100
labelling software English, French, German, Italian,
supplied on CD-Rom Spanish
Mounting plate For replacement of LC1 F115 or 1 LA9 D730 0.360
F150 by LC1 D115 or D150
Set of shims For fitting side mounting blocks 1 LA9 D511 0.020
LAD 8N on LC1 D40 to D95
(1) These legends are for sticking onto the safety cover of the contactors or add-on block, if fitted.
5/75
References 5
TeSys contactors 5
a.c. coils
for 3 or 4-pole contactors LC1 D
For contactors a LC1 D09...D38 and LC1 DT20…DT40

Specifications
Average consumption at 20 °C:
- inrush (cos ϕ = 0.75) 70 VA,
- sealed (cos ϕ = 0.3) 50 Hz: 7 VA, 60 Hz: 7.5 VA
Operating range (θ y 60 °C): 50 Hz: 0.8…1.1 Uc, 60 Hz: 0.85…1.1 Uc.
Control circuit voltage Average resistance Inductance of Reference (1) Weight

Uc at 20 °C ± 10 % closed circuit
V Ω H kg
50/60 Hz
12 6.3 0.26 LXD 1J7 0.070
810391
21 (2) 5.6 0.24 LXD 1Z7 0.070
24 6.19 0.26 LXD 1B7 0.070
32 12.3 0.48 LXD 1C7 0.070
36 – – LXD 1CC7 0.070

LXD 1pp
42 19.15 0.77 LXD 1D7 0.070
48 25 1 LXD 1E7 0.070
60 – – LXD 1EE7 0.070
100 – – LXD 1K7 0.070
110 130 5.5 LXD 1F7 0.070
115 – – LXD 1FE7 0.070

5 120 159 6.7 LXD 1G7 0.070
127 192.5 7.5 LXD 1FC7 0.070
200 – – LXD 1L7 0.070
208 417 16 LXD 1LE7 0.070
220 539 22 LXD 1M7 0.070
230 595 21 LXD 1P7 0.070
240 645 25 LXD 1U7 0.070
277 781 30 LXD 1W7 0.070
380 1580 60 LXD 1Q7 0.070
400 1810 64 LXD 1V7 0.070
415 1938 74 LXD 1N7 0.070
440 2242 79 LXD 1R7 0.070
480 2300 85 LXD 1T7 0.070
500 2499 – LXD 1S7 0.070
575 3432 119 LXD 1SC7 0.070
600 3600 135 LXD 1X7 0.070
690 5600 190 LXD 1Y7 0.070
(1) The last 2 digits in the reference represent the voltage code.
(2) Voltage for special coils fitted in contactors with serial timer modules. with 24 V supply.
5/76
TeSys contactors 5
a.c. coils
For 3 or 4-pole contactors LC1 D40, D50, D65, D80, D95

Specifications
- inrush (cos ϕ = 0.75) 50 Hz: 200 VA, 60 Hz: 220 VA,
- sealed (cos ϕ = 0.3) 50 Hz: 20 VA, 60 Hz: 22 VA
Operating range (θ y 55 °C): 0.85…1.1 Uc.
Control Average Inductance Reference (1) Average Inductance Reference (1) Weight
circuit resistance of closed resistance of closed
voltage at 20 °C circuit at 20 °C circuit
Uc ± 10 % ± 10 %
V Ω H Ω H kg
50 Hz 60 Hz
810394
24 1.4 0.09 LX1 D6B5 1.05 0.06 LX1 D6B6 0.280

32 2.6 0.16 LX1 D6C5 – – – 0.280
42 4.4 0.27 LX1 D6D5 – – – 0.280
48 5.5 0.35 LX1 D6E5 4.2 0.23 LX1 D6E6 0.280
110 31 1.9 LX1 D6F5 22 1.2 LX1 D6F6 0.280
115 31 1.9 LX1 D6FE5 – – – 0.280
120 – – – 28 1.5 LX1 D6G6 0.280
127 41 2.4 LX1 D6G5 – – – 0.280
208 – – – 86 4.3 LX1 D6L6 0.280
220 – – – 98 4.8 LX1 D6M6 0.280
220/230 127 7.5 LX1 D6M5 – – – 0.280
LX1 D6pp
230 133 8.1 LX1 D6P5 – – – 0.280
240 152 8.7 LX1 D6U5 120 5.7 LX1 D6U6 0.280
256 166 10 LX1 D6W5 – – – 0.280
277 – – – 157 8 LX1 D6W6 0.280
380 – – – 300 14 LX1 D6Q6 0.280
380/400 381 22 LX1 D6Q5 – – – 0.280
400
415
411
463
25
26
LX1 D6V5
LX1 D6N5
–
–
–
–
–
–
0.280
0.280 5
440 513 30 LX1 D6R5 392 19 LX1 D6R6 0.280
480 – – – 480 23 LX1 D6T6 0.280
500 668 38 LX1 D6S5 – – – 0.280
575 – – – 675 33 LX1 D6S6 0.280
600 – – – 775 36 LX1 D6X6 0.280
660 1220 67 LX1 D6Y5 – – – 0.280
Specifications
- inrush (cos ϕ = 0.75) 50/60 Hz: 245 VA at 50 Hz,
- sealed (cos ϕ = 0.3) 50/60 Hz: 26 VA at 50 Hz,
Operating range (θ ≤ 55 °C): 0.85…1.1 Uc.
50/60 Hz
24 – – – 1.22 0.08 LX1 D6B7 0.280
42 – – – 3.5 0.25 LX1 D6D7 0.280
48 – – – 5 0.32 LX1 D6E7 0.280
110 – – – 26 1.7 LX1 D6F7 0.280
115 – – – – – LX1 D6FE7 0.280
120 – – – 32 2 LX1 D6G7 0.280
220/230 (2) – – – 102 6.7 LX1 D6M7 0.280
230 – – – 115 7.7 LX1 D6P7 0.280
230/240 (3) – – – 131 8.3 LX1 D6U7 0.280
380/400 (4) – – – 310 20 LX1 D6Q7 0.280
400 – – – 349 23 LX1 D6V7 0.280
415 – – – 390 24 LX1 D6N7 0.280
440 – – – 410 27 LX1 D6R7 0.280
(2) For use on 230 V 50 Hz, apply a coefficient of 0.6 to the mechanical durability of the contactor, see pages 5/48 and 5/49.
This coil can be used on 240 V at 60 Hz.
(3) This coil can be used on 220/240 V at 50 Hz and on 240 V only at 60 Hz.
(4) For use on 400 V 50 Hz, apply a coefficient of 0.6 to the mechanical durability of the contactor, see pages 5/48 and 5/49.
5/77
TeSys contactors 5
a.c. coils
For 3 or 4-pole contactors LC1 D115

Specifications
- inrush (cos ϕ = 0.8) 50 or 60 Hz: 300 VA,
- sealed (cos ϕ = 0.3) 50 or 60 Hz: 22 VA
Uc ± 10 % ± 10 %
V Ω H Ω H kg
50 Hz 60 Hz
565140
24 1.24 0.09 LX1 D8B5 0.87 0.07 LX1 D8B6 0.260

32 2.14 0.17 LX1 D8C5 – – – 0.260
42 3.91 0.28 LX1 D8D5 – – – 0.260
48 4.51 0.36 LX1 D8E5 3.91 0.28 LX1 D8E6 0.260
110 26.53 2.00 LX1 D8F5 19.97 1.45 LX1 D8F6 0.260
115 26.53 2.00 LX1 D8FE5 – – – 0.260
120 – – – 24.02 1.70 LX1 D8G6 0.260
127 32.75 2.44 LX1 D8FC5 – – – 0.260
208 – – – 67.92 5.06 LX1 D8L6 0.260
220 104.77 7.65 LX1 D8M5 79.61 5.69 LX1 D8M6 0.260
230 104.77 8.29 LX1 D8P5 – – – 0.260
240 125.25 8.89 LX1 D8U5 97.04 6.75 LX1 D8U6 0.260
277 – – – 125.75 8.89 LX1 D8W6 0.260
380 338.51 22.26 LX1 D8Q5 243.07 17.04 LX1 D8Q6 0.260
400 368.43 25.55 LX1 D8V5 – – – 0.260
415 368.43 27.65 LX1 D8N5 – – – 0.260
440 441.56 30.34 LX1 D8R5 338.51 22.26 LX1 D8R6 0.260
LX1 D8pp
5 480
500
–
566.62
–
38.12
–
LX1 D8S5
368.43
–
25.55
–
LX1 D8T6
–
0.260
0.260
For 3 or 4-pole contactors LC1 D115, LC1 D150

Specifications
- inrush cos ϕ = 0.9 - 280 to 350 VA,
- sealed cos ϕ = 0.9 - 2 to 18 VA.
Coils with integral suppression device fitted as standard, class B.
Uc ± 10 % ± 10 %
V Ω H Ω H kg
50/60 Hz
24 – – – 147 3.03 LX1 D8B7 0.290
32 – – – 301 8.28 LX1 D8C7 0.290
42 – – – 498 13.32 LX1 D8D7 0.290
48 – – – 1061 24.19 LX1 D8E7 0.290
110 – – – 4377 109.69 LX1 D8F7 0.290
115 – – – 4377 109.69 LX1 D8FE7 0.290
120 – – – 4377 109.69 LX1 D8G7 0.290
127 – – – 6586 152.65 LX1 D8FC7 0.290
208 – – – 10 895 260.15 LX1 D8LE7 0.290
220 – – – 9895 210.72 LX1 D8M7 0.290
230 – – – 9895 210.72 LX1 D8P7 0.290
240 – – – 9895 210.72 LX1 D8U7 0.290
277 – – – 21 988 533.17 LX1 D8UE7 0.290
380 – – – 21 011 482.42 LX1 D8Q7 0.290
400 – – – 21 011 482.42 LX1 D8V7 0.290
415 – – – 21 011 482.42 LX1 D8N7 0.290
440 – – – 21 501 507.47 LX1 D8R7 0.290
480 – – – 32 249 938.41 LX1 D8T7 0.290
500 – – – 32 249 938.41 LX1 D8S7 0.290
5/78
References 5
TeSys contactors 5
d.c. coils
for 3 or 4-pole contactors
For 3-pole contactors LC1 D40…D65 or 4-pole contactors LP1 D40…D65

Specifications
Average consumption: 22 W.
Operating range: 0.85…1.1 Uc.

V Ω H kg
565142
12 7.1 0.44 LX4 D6JD 0.415
24 26.8 1.69 LX4 D6BD 0.415
36 58 3.55 LX4 D6CD 0.415
48 109 6.86 LX4 D6ED 0.415
60 173 10.9 LX4 D6ND 0.415
72 234 14.7 LX4 D6SD 0.415

LX4 D6pD
110 560 35.28 LX4 D6FD 0.415
125 717 45.2 LX4 D6GD 0.415
220 2255 142 LX4 D6MD 0.415
250 2940 185 LX4 D6UD 0.415
440 9080 572 LX4 D6RD 0.415
For 3-pole contactors LC1 D80 or 4-pole contactors LP1 D80

Specifications
Average consumption: 22 W. 5

V Ω H kg
12 6.6 0.46 LX4 D7JD 0.680
565142
24 27 1.89 LX4 D7BD 0.680
36 57 4 LX4 D7CD 0.680
48 107 7.5 LX4 D7ED 0.680
60 170 11.9 LX4 D7ND 0.680
72 230 16.1 LX4 D7SD 0.680

LX4 D7pD
110 564 39.5 LX4 D7FD 0.680
125 718 50.3 LX4 D7GD 0.680
220 2215 155 LX4 D7MD 0.680
250 2850 200 LX4 D7UD 0.680
440 9195 640 LX4 D7RD 0.680
5/79
References 5
TeSys contactors 5
d.c. coils
For contactors LC1 D115, D150

Specifications
Consumption: inrush 270 to 365 W, sealed 2.4 to 5.1 W.
Coils with integral suppression device fitted as standard, class B.

V Ω H kg
565142
24 147 3.03 LX4 D8BD 0.300
48 1061 24.19 LX4 D8ED 0.300
60 1673 38.44 LX4 D8ND 0.300
72 2500 56.27 LX4 D8SD 0.300
110 4377 109.69 LX4 D8FD 0.300
125 6586 152.65 LX4 D8GD 0.300
220 9895 210.72 LX4 D8MD 0.300

LX4 D8pD
250 18 022 345.40 LX4 D8UD 0.300
5 440 21 501 684.66 LX4 D8RD 0.300
5/80
References 5
TeSys contactors 5
Wide range d.c. coils

(for specific applications)
for 3 or 4-pole contactors
For 3-pole contactors LC1 D40…D65 or 4-pole contactors LP1 D40…D65

Specifications
Coils with "TH" treatment as standard.

V Ω H kg
565143
12 6.8 0.45 LX4 D6JW 0.415
24 30 1.9 LX4 D6BW 0.415
36 53 3.5 LX4 D6CW 0.415
48 110 7.2 LX4 D6EW 0.415
72 215 14.2 LX4 D6SW 0.415
110 580 38.3 LX4 D6FW 0.415

LX4 D6pW
220 2120 140 LX4 D6MW 0.415
For 3-pole contactors LC1 D80 or 4-pole contactors LP1 D80

Specifications
Operating range: 0.75 to 1.2 Uc
Coils with "TH" treatment as standard.

V Ω H kg
12 6.2 0.49 LX4 D7JW 0.680 5
24 23.5 1.75 LX4 D7BW 0.680
36 51.9 4.18 LX4 D7CW 0.680
48 94.2 7 LX4 D7EW 0.680
72 204 15.7 LX4 D7SW 0.680
110 483 36 LX4 D7FW 0.680
220 1922 144 LX4 D7MW 0.680
5/81
Dimensions 5
TeSys contactors 5
TeSys d contactors
LC1 D09…D18 (3-pole) LC1 D25…D38 (3-pole), LC1 DT20…DT40 (4-pole)

44 44
Minimum electrical Minimum electrical
clearance clearance LA4
LA4
b1
b1
b
b
10 c 12,5 45 12,5 10 c 12,5 45 12,5

c1 (LAD 8) (LAD 8) (1) c1 (LAD 8) (LAD 8) (1)
c2 c2
c3 c3
LC1 D09…D18 D093… D099… D25… D183… DT20 & DT203 & DT32 & DT323 &
D123 D129 D38 D323 DT25 DT253 DT40 DT403
b without add-on blocks 77 99 80 85 99 85 99 91 105
b1 with LAD 4BB 94 107 95.5 98 107 98 – – –
with LA4 Dp2 110 (1) 123 (1) 111.5 (1) 114 (1) 123 (1) 114 – – –
with LA4 DF, DT 119 (1) 132 (1) 120.5 (1) 123 (1) 132 (1) 129 – – –
with LA4 DW, DL 126 (1) 139 (1) 127.5 (1) 130 (1) 139 (1) 190 – – –
c without cover or add-on blocks 84 84 84 90 90 90 90 97 97
with cover, without add-on blocks 86 86 86 92 92 92 92 99 99
c1 with LAD N or C (2 or 4 contacts) 117 117 117 123 123 123 123 131 131
c2 with LA6 DK10, LAD 6K10 129 129 129 135 135 135 135 143 143
c3 with LAD T, R, S 137 137 137 143 143 143 143 151 151
with LAD T, R, S and sealing cover 141 141 141 147 147 147 147 155 155
(1) Including LAD 4BB
LC1 D40…D65 (3-pole), LC1 D65004, D40008 & D65008 (4-pole) LC1 D80 & D95 (3-pole), LC1 D80004 & D80008 (4-pole)
32 44 32 44
Minimum electrical
5 clearance LA4
Minimum electrical
clearance LA4
b1
b1
127
127
12 c 12,5 a 12,5 12 c 12,5 a 12,5

c1 (LAD 8) (LAD 8) c1 (LAD 8) (LAD 8)
c2 c2
c3 c3
LC1 D40…D65 D40008 D80, D65004 D95, D65008 D80004 D80008

a 75 85 85 85 96 96
b1 with LA4 Dp2 135 135 135 135 135 135
with LA4 DB3 – – 135 – – –
with LA4 DF, DT 142 142 142 142 142 142
with LA4 DM, DW, DL 150 150 150 150 150 150
c without cover or add-on blocks 114 125 125 125 125 140
with cover, without add-on blocks 119 – 130 130 – –
c1 with LAD N (1 contact) 139 139 150 150 150 150
with LAD N or C (2 or 4 contacts) 147 147 158 158 158 158
c2 with LA6 DK 159 159 170 170 170 170
c3 with LAD T, R, S 167 167 178 178 178 178
with LAD T, R, S and sealing cover 171 171 182 182 182 182
LC1 D115 and D150 (3-pole), LC1 D115004 (4-pole)
LC1 D115, D150 D115004 D115006 D150006 D1150046 Minimum electrical LAD 8
a 120 150 120 120 155 clearance LA4
b1 with LA4 DA2 174 174 174 174 174
with LA4 DF, DT 185 185 185 185 185 10
b1
with LA4 DM, DL 188 188 188 188 188

158
with LA4 DW 188 188 188 – 188

c without cover or add-on blocks 132 132 115 115 115
with cover, without add-on blocks 136 – – – –
c1 with LAD N or C (2 or 4 contacts) 150 150 150 150 150 c a
c2 with LA6 DK20 155 155 155 155 155 c1
c3 with LAD T, R, S 168 168 168 168 168 c2
with LAD T, R, S and sealing cover 172 172 172 172 172 c3

5/82
Dimensions 5
TeSys contactors 5
TeSys d contactors
LC1 D09…D18 (3-pole) LC1 D25…D38 (3-pole)

clearance clearance
b
b
10 c 45
10 c 45
c1
c1
c2
c2
c3
c3
LC1 D09…D18 D093…D123 D099…D129 D25…D38 D183…D323

b 77 99 80 85 99
c without cover or add-on blocks 93 93 93 99 99
with cover, without add-on blocks 95 95 95 101 101
c1 with LAD N or C (2 or 4 contacts) 126 126 126 132 132
c2 with LA6 DK10 138 138 138 144 144
c3 with LAD T, R, S 146 146 146 152 152
with LAD T, R, S and sealing cover 150 150 150 156 156
LC1 DT20 to DT40 (4-pole)
Minimum electrical
clearance
b
10 c 45
c1
c2
5
c3
LC1 DT20 & DT25 DT203 & DT253 DT32 & DT40 DT323 & DT403
D098 & D128 D0983 & D1283 D188…D258 D1883 & D2583
b 85 99 91 105
c with cover 99 99 107 107
c1 with LAD N or C (2 or 4 contacts) 123 123 131 131
c2 with LA6 DK10 135 135 143 143
c3 with LAD T, R, S 143 143 151 151
with LAD T, R, S and sealing cover 147 147 155 155
LC1 D40…D65 (3-pole) LC1 D80 & D95 (3-pole)
LC1 D65004, LP1 D40008…D65008 (4-pole) LP1 D80004, LP1 D80008 (4-pole)

clearance clearance
127
127
12 c 85 12 c 96
c1 c1
c2 c2
c3 c3
LC1 LP1 D65004 LP1 D40008 LC1 LP1 D80004 LP1 D80008
D40…D65 & D65008 D80 & D95
c without cover or add-on blocks 171 171 182 181 181 196
with cover, without add-on blocks 176 – – 186 – –
c1 with LAD N (1 contact) 196 196 196 204 204 204
with LAD N or C (2 or 4 contacts) 202 202 202 210 210 210
c2 with LA6 DK10 213 213 213 221 221 221
c3 with LAD T, R, S 221 221 221 229 229 229
with LAD T, R, S and sealing cover 225 225 225 233 233 233
LC1 D115ppp and LC1 D150ppp with c coil: see page 5/82

5/83
Mounting 5
TeSys contactors 5
TeSys d contactors
LC1 D09…D38, DT20…DT40 LC1 D40…D95, LP1 D40…D80

On mounting rail AM1 DP200, DR200 or AM1 DE200 (width 35 mm) On mounting rail AM1 DL200 or DL201 (width 75 mm)
On mounting rail AM1 EDppp or AM1 DE200 (width 35 mm)
=
=
127
b
b
=
=
c c

LC1 D09…D18 D25…D38 DT2 DT32 LC1 D40…D65 D80 & D95
& DT25 & DT40
b 77 85 85 100 c (AM1 DL200) (1) 136 147
c (AM1 DP200 or DR200) (1)88 94 94 109 c (AM1 DL201) (1) 126 137
c (AM1 DE200) (1) 96 102 102 117 c (AM1 EDppp or DE200) (1) 126 137
Control circuit: d.c. Control circuit: d.c.

b 77 85 94 109 LC1 D40…D65 D80 & D95
c (AM1 DP200 or DR200) (1)97 103 103 118 c (AM1 DL200) (1) 193 203
c (AM1 DE200) (1) 105 110 111 1236 c (AM1 DL201) (1) 183 203
LP1 D40 D65 D80

c (AM1 DL200) 188 188 198
c (AM1 DL201) 178 178 198
5 (1) with safety cover. (1) with safety cover.
LC1 D115, D150

On 2 mounting rails DZ5 MB on 120 mm centres
=
100
158
Control circuit: a.c. or d.c.

LC1 D115 & D150 D1156 & D1506
c (AM1 DP200 or DR200) 134.5 117.5
c (AM1 DE200 or EDppp) 142.5 125.5
=
LC1 D40…D95, LP1 D40…D80

On 2 mounting rails DZ5 MB on 120 mm centres
DZ5 ME5
LC1 D40…D65 D80 & D95
c with cover 119 130
Control circuit: d.c.

120
110
LC1 D40…D65 D80 & D95

c with cover 176 186
LP1 D40 & D65 D80

c 171 181
c 15 40

5/84
Mounting (continued) 5
TeSys contactors 5
TeSys d contactors
LC1 D09…D38 and LC1 DT20…DT40

On 2 mounting rails DZ5 MB
Control circuit: a.c. d.c.
LC1 D09…D18 D25…D38 D09…D18 D25…D38
DZ5 ME8
c with cover 86 92 95 101
G 35 35 35 35
H 60 60 70 70
H1 70 70 70 70
H1
H
4-pole contactors
LC1 DT20 DT32 DT20 DT32
& DT25 & DT40 & DT25 & DT40
c 15 G c 92 100 101 109
G 35 35 35 35
H 60 60 70 70
H1 70 70 70 70
LC1 D09…D38 and LC1 DT20…DT40 LC1 D40…D95, LP1 D40…D80
On pre-slotted mounting plate AM1 PA, PB, PC On pre-slotted mounting plate AM1 PA, PB, PC
110
H
c AF1 EA4 G
c 40 AF1 EA6
Control circuit: a.c. d.c. Control circuit: a.c. d.c.

LC1 D09…D18 D25…D38 D09…D18 D25…D38 LC1 D40…D65 D80 & D95 D40…D65 D80 & D95
c with cover 86 92 95 101 c with cover 119 130 176 186
G 35 35 35 35 LP1 – – D40 & D65 D80 5
H 60/70 60/70 70 70 c without cover – – 171 181
LC1 DT20 DT32 DT20 DT32
& DT25 & DT40 & DT25 & DT40
c with cover 80 93 118 132
G 35 35 35 35
H 60 60 60 60
LC1 D09…D38 LC1 D40…D95, LP1 D40 D80
Panel mounted AC DC Panel mounted
2xM4 2xM4 2xØ4,5
=
=
100/110
60/70
50
=
=
=
c = 35 = = 35 =
c = 40 = 3xØ6,5
Control circuit: a.c. d.c. Control circuit: a.c. d.c.

LC1 D09…D18 D25…D38 D09…D18 D25…D38 LC1 D40…D65 D80 & D95 D4…D65 D80 & D95
c with cover 86 92 95 101 c with cover 119 130 176 186
4-pole contactors
LC1 DT20 DT32 DT20 DT32 LP1 – – D40 & D65 D80
& DT25 & DT40 & DT25 & DT40
c with cover 90 98 90 98 c without cover – – 171 181
LC1 D115, D150
Panel mounted
=
130
158
LC1 D115 D1156 D150 D1506

c 132 115 132 115
=
G (3-pole) 96/110 96/110 96/110 96/110

c = G = G (4-pole) 130/144 130/144 – –

5/85
Schemes 5
TeSys contactors 5
TeSys d contactors
Contactors
3-pole contactors (References: pages 5/58 to 5/61)
LC1 D09 to D150
3/L2
5/L3
1/L1
13/NO
21/NC
A1
A2
22
14
T3/6
T1/2
T2/4
4-pole contactors (References: pages 5/60 and 5/61)

LC1 DT20 to DT40 LC1 D115004 LC1 D098 to D258 LC1 and LP1 D40008 to D80008
3/L2
5/L3
7/L4
1/L1
3/L2
5/L3
7/L4
1/L1
21/NC
21/NC
13/NO
13/NO
R1
R1
R3
R3
3
3
1
1
A1
A1
A1
A1
A2
A2
A2
A2
22
14
22
14
T4/8
T1/2
T2/4
T3/6
T3/6
T4/8
R4
R4
R2
T1/2
T2/4
R2
2
Instantaneous auxiliary contacts (References: page 5/69)
1 N/O LAD N10 (1) 1 N/C LAD N01 (1) 1 N/O + 1 N/C LAD N11 2 N/O LAD N20
63/NO
61/NC
43 NO
43/NO
53/NO
53/NO
41/NC
(92)
(94)
62
64
42
(91)
44
(93)
54
54
5
2 N/C LAD N02 2 N/O + 2 N/C LAD N22 1 N/O + 3 N/C LAD N13 4 N/O LAD N40
53/NO
51/NC
61/NC
81/NC
61/NC
53/NO
83/NO
53/NO
63/NO
73/NO
83/NO
71/NC
61/NC
71/NC
52
62
82
62
72
54
62
72
54
84
54
64
74
84
4 N/C LAD N04 2 N/O + 2 N/C including 1 N/O + 1 N/C make before break LAD C22 3 N/O + 1 N/C LAD N31
53/NO
87/NO
61/NC
75/NC
71/NC
51/NC
81/NC
61/NC
53/NO
73/NO
83/NO
61/NC
54
62
76
88
72
52
82
62
62
54
74
84
Instantaneous auxiliary contacts conforming to standard EN 50012 (References: page 5/69)

1 N/O + 1 N/C LAD N11G 1 N/O + 1 N/C LAD N11P 2 N/O + 2 N/C LAD N22G 2 N/O + 2 N/C LAD N22P
21/NC
53/NO
63/NO
13/NO
43/NO
31/NC
43/NO
31/NC
41/NC
31/NC
13/NO
21/NC
22
32
32
42
54
64
14
44
32
44
22
14
3 N/O + 1 N/C LAD N31G 3 N/O + 1 N/C LADN31P 1 N/O + 3 N/C LAD N13G 1 N/O + 3 N/C LAD N13P
21/NC
13/NO
33/NO
43/NO
31/NC
21/NC
41/NC
43/NO
53/NO
63/NO
13/NO
31/NC
31/NC
51/NC
63/NO
41/NC
22
32
22
42
14
34
44
32
32
52
44
54
64
14
42
64
(1) Items in brackets are for blocks mounted on right-hand side of contactor.

5/86
TeSys contactors 5
TeSys d contactors

Dust and damp protected instantaneous auxiliary contacts (References: page 5/69)
2 N/O (24-50 V) 2 N/C (24-50 V) 2 N/O (5-24 V) 2 N/O protected (24-50 V) 2 N/O protected (24-50 V)
LA1 DX20 LA1 DX02 LA1 DY20 2 N/O standard LA1 DZ40 + 1 N/O + 1 N/C standard LA1 DZ31
53/NO
63/NO
53/NO
63/NO
53/NO
83/NO
53/NO
83/NO
51/NC
61/NC
63/NO
73/NO
73/NO
61/NC
62
64
74
74
52
62
54
64
54
64
54
84
54
84
Time delay auxiliary contacts (References: page 5/70)
On-delay 1 N/O + 1 N/C LAD T Off-delay 1 N/O + 1 N/C LAD R On-delay 1 N/C + 1 N/O break before make LAD S
67/NO
57/NO
67/NO
55/NC
65/NC
55/NC
56
56
68
58
68
66
Mechanical latch blocks (References: page 5/70)

LAD 6K10 and LA6 DK20
E1
A1
A2
E2

Instantaneous auxiliary contacts (References: page 5/69)
1 N/O + 1 N/C LAD 8N11 (1) 2 N/O LAD 8N20 (1) 2 N/C LAD 8N02 (1)
261/NC
251/NC
153/NO
153/NO
163/NO
161/NC
5
(272)
(282)
(172)
(184)
(184)
(174)
262
(271)
252
(281)
154
(183)
164
(173)
162
(171)
154
(183)
(1) Items in brackets are for blocks mounted on right-hand side of contactor.
Electronic serial timer modules Auto-Man-Stop control modules
On-delay LA4 DTpU LA4 DMp
A1
A2
A1
A2
(1)
B1
0 t
Auto
/man
I/O
A1
A2
A1
A2
K K
(1) PLC.
Interface modules
Relay interface Relay with manual override Solid state
LA4 DFp LA4 DFBQ LA4 DLp LA4 DWBp
E2 —
E2 —
E2 —
E2 —
E1 +
E1 +
E1 +
E1 +
A2
A1
A2
A1
A2
A1
A1
A2
K K K K
References: page 5/73.

5/87
Dimensions 5
TeSys contactors 5
TeSys d reversing contactors
LC2 D09 to D38 LC2DT20 to DT40

2 x LC1 D09 to D38 2 x LC1 DT20 to DT40
2xM4 2xM4
e1
=
60/70
60/70
b
b
c = G c = G
=
=
= =
e2
e2
a a
LC1 or 2 x LC1 a b c (1) e1 e2 G LC2 or 2 x LC1 a b c G

D09 to D18 a 90 77 86 4 1.5 80 DT20 and DT25 90 85 90 80
D093 to D123 a 90 99 86 – – 80 DT32 and DT40 90 91 98 80
D09 to D18 c 90 77 95 4 1.5 80 c, e: including cabling.
D093 to D123 c 90 99 95 – – 80
D25 to D38 a 90 85 92 9 5 80
D183 to D383 a 90 99 92 – – 80
D25 to D32 c 90 85 101 9 5 80
D183 to D383 c 90 99 101 – – 80
e1 and e2: including cabling.
(1) With safety cover, without add-on block.
LC2 D40 to D95
2 x LC1 D40 to D95 a 2 x LC1 D40 to D95 a
6xØ6,5 6xØ6,5
e1
e1
= G1 = = G1 =
8
8
5
100/110
100/110
b
13
13
= 40 G 40 = = 40 G 40 =
e2
c c
e2
a a
LC2 or 2 x LC1 a b c e1 e2 G G1 2 x LC1 a b c e1 e2 G G1

D40 to D65 a 165 127 142 5 – 50 90 D40 to D65 182 127 190 5 11 57 97
D65004 a 182 127 133 – 11 57 97 D80 and D95 207 127 215 13 20 96 111
D80 and D95 a 182 127 158 13 – 57 96 c, e1 and e2: including cabling.
D80004 a 207 127 158 – 20 71 111
c, e1 and e2: including cabling.
LC2 D115 and D150
2 x LC1 D115 and D150
e1
=
158
130
=
= G =
e2
c a
LC2 or 2 x LC1 a c e1 e2 G
D115 and D150 266 148 56 18 242/256
D115004 334 148 – 60 310/324
c, e1 and e2: including cabling.

5/88
Schemes 5
TeSys contactors 5
TeSys d reversing contactors

LC2 D09…D150 LAD 9R1V
Horizontally mounted With integral electrical interlocking
L1
L2
L3
L1
L2
L3
13/NO
13/NO
13/NO
13/NO
21/NC
21/NC
21/NC
21/NC
3
3
5
5
1
3
5
5
1
1
A1
A1
A1
A1
A2
A2
A2
A2
22
22
6
14
14
2
22
22
6
14
14
2
4
W
U
W
U
V
LC2 DT20…DT40 LAD T9R1V
Horizontally mounted With integral electrical interlocking
1/L1
1/L2
1/L3
1N
2/L1
2/L2
2/L3
2N
1/L1
1/L2
1/L3
1N
2/L1
2/L2
2/L3
2N
13/NO
13/NO
13/NO
13/NO
21/NC
21/NC
21/NC
21/NC
3
3
5
7
1
1
3
3
5
7
1
A1
A1
A1
A1
A2
A2
A2
A2
22
22
22
22
6
8
14
14
4
14
14
6
8
2
5
L1
L2
L3
L1
L2
L3
N
Electrical interlocking of reversing contactors fitted with:
Mechanical interlock with integral electrical contacts Mechanical interlock without integral electrical contacts
LA9 Dppp02 LA9 Dppp78, LAD 9R1
02
02
A1
A2
A1
A2
01
– KM2 – KM1
01
01
01
– KM1 – KM2
02
A1
A1
A1
A1
– KM1 – KM2
02
– KM1 – KM2
A2
A2
A2
A2
A2
A2
Low speed-High speed cabling kit, screw clamp terminals Low speed-High speed cabling kit, spring terminals
L1
L2
L3
L1
L2
L3
13/NO
13/NO
13/NO
13/NO
21/NC
21/NC
21/NC
21/NC
3
5
5
1
1
3
3
5
5
1
A1
A1
A1
A1
A2
A2
A2
A2
22
22
6
14
14
2
4
22
22
6
14
14
2
W
W
V
U
LAD 9PV/GV LAD 3PV/GV

13
21
R1
R3
13
21
R1
R3
3
A1
1
3
A1
A2
A2
R2
R4
2
4
R2
R4
2
22
14
22
14
W1
W2
U1
V1
U2
V2
LAD 3PV/GV10
PV GV PV GV

5/89
References 5
TeSys contactors 5
For switching 3-phase capacitor banks,

used for power factor correction,
Direct connection without choke inductors
Special contactors
Special contactors LC1 DpK are designed for switching 3-phase, single or multiple-step capacitor banks; they
conform to standards IEC 60070 and 60831, NFC 54-100, VDE 0560, UL and CSA.
Contactor applications
Specification
Contactors fitted with a block of early make poles and damping resistors, limiting the value of the current on
closing to 60 In max.
This current limitation increases the life of all the components of the installation, in particular that of the fuses
and capacitors.
The patented design of the add-on block (n° 90 119-20) ensures safety and long life of the installation.
There is no need to use choke inductors for either single or multiple-step capacitor banks.
Short-circuit protection must be provided by gI type fuses rated at 1.7…2 In.
Maximum operational power

811966
The power values given in the selection table below are for the following operating conditions:
Prospective peak current at switch-on LC1 DpK 200 In

Maximum operating rate LC1 DFK, DGK, DLK, DMK, DPK 240 operating cycles/hour
LC1 DTK, DWK 100 operating cycles/hour
Electrical durability at nominal load All contactor ratings 400 V 300 000 operating cycles
690 V 200 000 operating cycles
Operational power at 50/60 Hz (1) Instantaneous Tightening Basic reference, Weight

θ y 55 °C (2) auxiliary torque on to be completed by adding
contacts cable end the voltage code (3)
5 220 V
240 V
400 V
440 V
660 V
690 V
kVAR kVAR kVAR N/O N/C N.m kg
6.7 12.5 18 1 1 1.2 LC1 DFK11pp 0.430
LC1 DFK11pp – 2 1.2 LC1 DFK02pp 0.430
8.5 16.7 24 1 1 1.7 LC1 DGK11pp 0.450

– 2 1.7 LC1 DGK02pp 0.450
10 20 30 1 1 1.9 LC1 DLK11pp 0.600

– 2 1.9 LC1 DLK02pp 0.600
811967
15 25 36 1 1 2.5 LC1 DMK11pp 0.630

– 2 2.5 LC1 DMK02pp 0.630
20 33.3 48 1 2 5 LC1 DPK12pp 1.300
25 40 58 1 2 5 LC1 DTK12pp 1.300
40 60 92 1 2 9 LC1 DWK12pp 1.650
Switching of multiple-step capacitor banks (with equal or different power ratings)

The correct contactor for each step is selected from the above table, according to the power rating of the step to be switched.
Example: 50 kVAR 3-step capacitor bank. Temperature: 50 °C and U = 400 V or 440 V.
One 25 kVAR step: contactor LC1 DMK, one 15 kVAR step: contactor LC1 DGK, and one 10 kVAR step: contactor LC1 DFK.
(1) Operational power of the contactor according to the scheme on the page opposite.
(2) The average temperature over a 24-hour period, in accordance with standards IEC 60070 and 60831 is 45 °C.
Volts 24 42 48 110 115 220 230 240 380 400 415 440
For other voltages between 24 and 440 V, please consult your Regional Sales Office
LC1 DPK12pp
Dimensions, schemes :
page 5/91
5/90
schemes 5
For switching 3-phase capacitor banks,
used for power factor correction
Dimensions
LC1 DFK, DGK LC1 DPK, DTK
130
74
180
127
c 45
150 75
LC1 c Type of fixing LC1 Type of fixing

DFK 117 LC1 D12 See pages 5/84 and 5/85 DPK LC1 D40 See pages 5/84 and 5/85
DGK 122 LC1 D18 See pages 5/84 and 5/85 DTK LC1 D50 See pages 5/84 and 5/85
LC1 DLK, DMK LC1 DWK
5
140
84
200
127
c 56
157 85
LC1 c Type of fixing LC1 Type of fixing

DLK 117 LC1 D25 See pages 5/84 and 5/85 DWK LC1 D80 See pages 5/84 and 5/85
DMK 122 LC1 D32 See pages 5/84 and 5/85
Schemes
LC1 DpK
–R
1/L1
5/L3
3/L2
A1
A2
6/T3
2/T1
4/T2
–R
R = Pre-wired resistor connections.
Cabling (maximum permissible c.s.a.)

Contactor type LC1 DFK DGK DLK DMK DPK, DTK DWK
Number of conductors 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2
Flexible cable with cable end (mm2) 2.5 1.5 4 2.5 4 4 6 4 16 6 50 25
Solid cable with cable end (mm2) 4 4 6 6 10 6 16 10 25 16 50 35
References :
page 5/90
5/91
Selection guide 5
TeSys contactors 5
From 115 to 2750 A
Applications Control of all types of motor for standard or severe duty applications
Control of resistive, inductive and capacitive circuits:
heating, lighting, cos ϕ rectification, transformers, normal-standby
Rated operational current Ie max AC-3 (Ue y 440 V) 115 A 150 A 185 A 225 A 265 A 330 A
Ie max AC-1 (θ y 40 °C) 200 A 250 A 275 A 315 A 350 A 400 A
Rated operational voltage 1000 V 1000 V 1000 V 1000 V 1000 V 1000 V
Number of poles 3 or 4 3 or 4 3 or 4 3 or 4 3 or 4 3 or 4
Rated operational power 220/240 V 30 kW 40 kW 55 kW 63 kW 75 kW 100 kW

in category AC-3
380/400 V 55 kW 75 kW 90 kW 110 kW 132 kW 160 kW
415 V 59 kW 80 kW 100 kW 110 kW 140 kW 180 kW
5 440 V 59 kW 80 kW 100 kW 110 kW 140 kW 200 kW
500 V 75 kW 90 kW 110 kW 129 kW 160 kW 200 kW
660/690 V 80 kW 100 kW 110 kW 129 kW 160 kW 220 kW
1000 V 65 kW 65 kW 100 kW 100 kW 147 kW 160 kW
Add-on auxiliary contact blocks Front mounting, identical to those used on LC1 D contactors (contacts: instantaneous
LA1 DNpp, time delay LA2 DT or LA3 DR, dust and damp protected LA1 DX or DY or DZ)
Associated Manual-auto LR9 F

thermal overload relays
Electronic LT6
Interfaces Specific LA4 FWB
Universal With or without, depending on the control circuit
Contactor type LC1 F115 LC1 F150 LC1 F185 LC1 F225 LC1 F265 LC1 F330
Reversing contactor type LC2 F115 LC2 F150 LC2 F185 LC2 F225 LC2 F265 For customer
assembly
Pages Contactors 5/102 and 5/103 5/102

and 5/103
Reversing contactors 5/104 and 5/105 5/106
to 5/109
5/92
5
5
400 A 500 A 630 A 780 A 800 A 750 A 1000 A 1500 A 1800 A
500 A 700 A 1000 A 1600 A 1000 A 800 A 1250 A 2000 A 2750 A
1000 V 1000 V 1000 V 1000 V 1000 V 1000 V 1000 V 1000 V 1000 V
2, 3 or 4 2, 3 or 4 2, 3 or 4 3 or 4 3 1 to 4 1 to 4 1 to 4 1 to 4
110 kW 147 kW 200 KW 220 kW 250 kW 220 kW 280 kW 425 kW 500 kW
200 kW 250 kW 335 kW 400 kW 450 kW 400 kW 500 kW 750 kW 900 kW
250 kW 295 kW 400 kW 425 kW 450 kW 450 kW 560 kW 800 kW 900 kW 5

4 instantaneous contact compositions:

2 N/C + 2 N/O, 3 N/O + 1 N/C, 1 N/O + 3 N/C or 4 N/O
LR9 F
LT6
LC1 F400 LC1 F500 LC1 F630 LC1 F780 LC1 F800 LC1 BL LC1 BM LC1 BP LC1 BR
For customer assembly
5/146 and 5/147
5/148
5/93
Characteristics 5
TeSys contactors 5
TeSys LC1 F (115 to 800 A)

Environment
Contactor type LC1 F115 LC1 F150 LC1 F185
Rated insulation voltage (Ui) Conforming to IEC 60947-4-1 V 1000 1000 1000
Conforming to VDE 0110 gr C V 1500 1500 1500
Rated impulse Coil not connected to the kV 8 8 8

withstand voltage (Uimp) power circuit
Conforming to standards EN 60947-1, EN 60947-4-1, IEC 60947-1, IEC 60947-4-1, JEM 1038
Product certifications CSA, UL, BV, GL, DNV, RINA, RMROS, LROS, CCC
Degree of protection Conforming to IEC 60529 IP 2X front face with shrouds LA9 F
Conforming to VDE 0106 Front face protected against direct finger contact with shrouds LA9 F
Protective treatment Standard version “TH”

Permissible at Uc (1) °C - 40…+ 70
Operating positions Without derating
5
(not to be used for LC1 F780)
With derating
Apply the following derating coefficients: 0.75 on the pull-in

voltage, 0.9 on the drop-out voltage and 0.8 on the operational
current in AC-1.
Apply the following derating coefficients: 1.15 on the pull-in

voltage, 1.1 on the drop-out voltage and 0.8 on the operational
current in AC-1.
In either case: neither the making and breaking capacities nor the electrical and
mechanical durabilities can be assured.
Not to be used
Shock resistance (2) Contactor open 9 gn 9 gn 7 gn

1/2 sine wave = 11 ms
Contactor closed 15 gn 15 gn 15 gn
Vibration resistance (2) Contactor open 2 gn 2 gn 2 gn

5…300 Hz
Contactor closed 6 gn 6 gn 5 gn
(1) In these conditions, it is recommended that LX9 F coils be used for contactor sizes F115 to
F225.
(2) In the least favourable direction, without change of contact state (coil at Uc). Where higher
resistance to mechanical shock is required, select shock-proof contactors. Please consult
your Regional Sales Office.

pages 5/160 to 5/183 pages 5/102 and 5/103 pages 5/128 and 5/129 page 5/133
5/94
5
LC1 F225 LC1 F265 LC1 F330 LC1 F400 LC1 F500 LC1 F630 LC1 F780 LC1 F800
1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000
1500 1500 1500 1500 1500 1500 1500 1500
8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8
EN 60947-1, EN 60947-4-1, IEC 60947-1, IEC 60947-4-1, JEM 1038
CSA, UL, BV, GL, DNV, RINA, RMROS, LROS, CCC UL, CSA, GL,
LROS
IP 2X front face with shrouds LA9 F
Front face protected against direct finger contact with shrouds LA9 F
“TH”
- 60…+ 80 - 60…+ 80
- 5…+ 55 - 5…+ 55
- 40…+ 70 - 5…+ 55
3000
5
(not to be used for LC1 F780)
Apply the following derating coefficients: 0.75 on the pull-in voltage, 0.9 on the drop-out voltage and 0.8 on the operational current in AC-1.
Apply the following derating coefficients: 1.15 on the pull-in voltage, 1.1 on the drop-out voltage and 0.8 on the operational current in AC-1.
In either case: neither the making and breaking capacities nor the electrical and mechanical durabilities can be assured.
7 gn 6 gn 6 gn 6 gn 9 gn 6 gn 5 gn 6 gn
15 gn 15 gn 15 gn 15 gn 15 gn 15 gn 15 gn 15 gn
2 gn 2 gn 2 gn 1.5 gn 2 gn 2 gn 2.5 gn 2 gn
5 gn 5 gn 5 gn 5 gn 4 gn 4 gn 5.5 gn 4 gn
(1) In these conditions, it is recommended that LX9 F coils be used for contactor sizes F115 to F225.
(2) In the least favourable direction, without change of contact state (coil at Uc). Where higher resistance to mechanical shock is required, select shock-proof
contactors. Please consult your Regional Sales Office.
5/95
TeSys contactors 5

Rated operational current (le) In AC-3, θ y 55 °C A 115 150 185

(Ue y 440 V) In AC-1, θ y 40 °C A 200 250 275
Rated operational voltage Up to V 1000 1000 1000

(Ue)
Frequency limits Of the operational current (1) Hz 162/3…200 162/3 …200 162/3 …200
Conventional thermal current θ y 40 °C A 200 250 275
Rated making capacity I rms conforming to IEC 60947-4-1 A Making current: 10 x I in AC-3 or 12 x I in AC-4
Rated breaking capacity I rms conforming to IEC 60947-4-1 A Making and breaking current: 8 x I in AC-3 or 10 x I in AC-4
Maximum permissible current For 10 s A 1100 1200 1500

No current flowing for preceding For 30 s A 640 700 920
For 1 min A 520 600 740
For 3 min A 400 450 500
For 10 min A 320 350 400
Short-circuit protection Motor circuit (type aM) A 125 160 200

by fuses With thermal overload relay A 200 200 315
U y 440 V (type gG)
gG fuses A 200 250 315
Average impedance per pole At lth and 50 Hz mΩ 0.37 0.35 0.33
Power dissipation per pole AC-3 W 5 8 12

for the above
5 operational currents
AC-1 W 15 22 25
Connection Maximum c.s.a.

Bar Number of bars 2 2 2
Bar mm 20 x 3 25 x 3 25 x 3
Cable with lug mm2 95 120 150
Cable with connector mm2 95 120 150
Bolt diameter mm Ø6 Ø8 Ø8
Tightening torque Power circuit connections N.m 10 18 18
(1) Sine wave without interference. Above these values, please consult your Regional Sales
Office.

5/96
5
3 or 4 3 or 4 3 or 4 2, 3 or 4 2, 3 or 4 2, 3 or 4 3 or 4 3
225 265 330 400 500 630 780 800

315 350 400 500 700 1000 1250 1600 1000
1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000
162/3…200 162/3 …200 16 2/3…200 162/3…200 162/3 …200 16 2/3…200 162/3…200 162/3 …200
315 350 400 500 700 1000 1250 1600 1000
Making current: 10 x I in AC-3 or 12 x I in AC-4
Making and breaking current: 8 x I in AC-3 or 10 x I in AC-4
1800 2200 2650 3600 4200 5050 6250 5500

1000 1230 1800 2400 3200 4400 5600 4600
850 950 1300 1700 2400 3400 4600 3600
560 620 900 1200 1500 2200 3000 2600
440 480 750 1000 1200 1600 2200 1700
250 315 400 400 500 630 800 800

315 500 500 630 800 800 1000 1000
315 400 500 500 800 1000 2 x 800 (2) 1000
0.32 0.3 0.28 0.26 0.18 0.12 0.10 0.12
16 21 31 42 45 48 60 77
32 37 44 65 88 120 250 120
5
2 2 2 2 2 2 3 2 2
32 x 4 32 x 4 30 x 5 30 x 5 40 x 5 60 x 5 60 x 5 100 x 5 60 x 5
185 240 240 2 x 150 2 x 240 – – –
185 240 – – – – – –
∅ 10 ∅ 10 ∅ 10 ∅ 10 ∅ 10 ∅ 12 2 x ∅ 12 ∅ 12
35 35 35 35 35 58 58 58
(2) Paralleling of poles must be carried out only in accordance with the fuse manufacturer's recommendations.
5/97
Characteristics 5
TeSys contactors 5

Control circuit: a.c. supply
Control circuit characteristics with LX1 or LX9 coil

Rated control circuit voltage (Uc) 50 or 60 Hz V 24…1000
Control voltage limits (θ y 55 °C)

50 or 60 Hz coils Operation 0.85…1.1 Uc
Drop-out 0.35…0.55 Uc
40…400 Hz coils Operation –

Drop-out –
Average consumption at 20 °C and at Uc

a 50 Hz Inrush 50 Hz coil VA 550 550 805
40…400 Hz coil VA – – –
Cos ϕ 0.3 0.3 0.3
Sealed 50 Hz coil VA 45 45 55
40…400 Hz coil VA – – –
Cos ϕ 0.3 0.3 0.3
a 60 Hz Inrush 60 Hz coil VA 660 660 970

40…400 Hz coil VA – – –
Cos ϕ 0.3 0.3 0.3
Sealed 60 Hz coil VA 55 55 66
40…400 Hz coil VA – – –
Cos ϕ 0.3 0.3 0.3
Heat dissipation W 12…16 12…16 18…24
Operating time Closing "C" ms 23…35 23…35 20…35

5 (1) Opening "O" ms 5…15 5…15 7…15
Mechanical durability at Uc In millions of operating cycles 10 10 10
Maximum operating rate In operating cycles per hour 2400 2400 2400
Connection Min/max c.s.a.
Flexible conductor 1 or 2 conductors mm2 1/4 1/4 1/4
without cable end
Flexible conductor 1 conductor mm2 1/4 1/4 1/4
with cable end 2 conductors mm2 1/2.5 1/2.5 1/2.5
Solid cable without 1 or 2 conductors mm2 1/4 1/4 1/4

cable end
Tightening torque N.m 1.2 1.2 1.2
Mechanical latching Mechanical latch blocks LA6 DK must not be fitted on LC1 F contactors.
For similar type of operation, use magnetic latching contactors CR1 F.
See pages 5/208 to 5/235.

5/98
5
5
24…1000 48…1000 48…1000 110…500 110…400
0.85…1.1 Uc –
0.35…0.55 Uc –
– 0.85…1.1 Uc 0.85…1.1 Uc 0.85…1.1 Uc 0.85…1.1 Uc 0.85…1.1 Uc

– 0.35…0.55 Uc 0.3…0.5 Uc 0.25…0.5 Uc 0.2…0.4 Uc 0.3…0.5 Uc
805 – – – – – – –
– 650 650 1075 1100 1650 2100 1700
0.3 0.9 0.9 0.9 0.9 0.9 0.9 0.9
55 – – – – – – –
– 10 10 15 18 22 50 12
0.3 0.9 0.9 0.9 0.9 0.9 0.9 –
970 – – – – – – –
– 650 650 1075 1100 1650 2100 1700
0.3 0.9 0.9 0.9 0.9 0.9 0.9 0.9
66 – – – – – – –
– 10 10 15 18 22 50 12
0.3 0.9 0.9 0.9 0.9 0.9 0.9 –
18…24 8 8 14 18 20 2 x 22 25
20…35 40…65 40…65 40…75 40…75 40…80 40…80 60…80

7…15 100…170 100…170 100…170 100…170 100…200 130…230 150…180 5
10 10 10 10 10 5 5 5
2400 2400 2400 2400 2400 1200 600 600
Min/max c.s.a.
1/4 1/4 1/4 1/4 1/4 1/4 1/4 1/4
1/4 1/4 1/4 1/4 1/4 1/4 1/4 1/4

1/2.5 1/2.5 1/2.5 1/2.5 1/2.5 1/2.5 1/2.5 1/2.5
1/4 1/4 1/4 1/4 1/4 1/4 1/4 1/4
1.2 1.2 1.2 1.2 1.2 1.2 1.2 1.2
Mechanical latch blocks LA6 DK must not be fitted on LC1 F contactors.

5/99
Characteristics 5
TeSys contactors 5

Control circuit: d.c. supply
Control circuit characteristics with LX4 coil

Rated control circuit voltage c V 24…460 24…460 24…460
(Uc)
Control voltage limits Operation 0.85…1.1 Uc 0.85…1.1 Uc 0.85…1.1 Uc
(θ y 55 °C)
Drop-out 0.15…0.2 Uc 0.15…0.2 Uc 0.15…0.2 Uc
Average consumption c Inrush W 560 560 800

at 20 °C and at Uc
Sealed W 4,5 4,5 5
Average operating time at Uc Closing "C" ms 30…40 30…40 30…40

(1)
Opening "O" ms 30…50 30…50 30…50
Note : The arcing time depends on the circuit switched by the poles. For all normal 3-phase
equal to the sum of the opening time and the arcing time.
Mechanical durability at Uc In millions of operating cycles 10 10 10
Maximum operating rate at In operating cycles per hour 2400 2400 2400
ambient temperaturey 55 °C
Connection Min/max c.s.a.
Flexible 1 conductor mm2 1/4 1/4 1/4
conductor
without 2 conductors mm2 1/4 1/4 1/4
cable end
Flexible 1 conductor mm2 1/4 1/4 1/4
conductor
with 2 conductors mm2 1/2.5 1/2.5 1/2.5
cable end
5 Solid cable
without
1 conductor mm2 1/4 1/4 1/4
cable end 2 conductors mm2 1/4 1/4 1/4
Mechanical latching Mechanical latch blocks LA6 DK must not be fitted on LC1 F contactors.
(1) The operating times depend on the type of contactor electromagnet and its control mode. The
closing time "C" is measured from the moment the coil supply is switched on to initial contact
of the main poles. The opening time "O" is measured from the moment the coil supply is
switched off to the moment the main poles separate.

5/100
5
5
24…460 24…460 24…460 48…440 48…440 48…440 110…440 110…400
0.85…1.1 Uc 0.85…1.1 Uc 0.85…1.1 Uc 0.85…1.1 Uc 0.85…1.1 Uc 0.85…1.1 Uc 0.85…1.1 Uc 0.85…1.1 Uc
0.15…0.2 Uc 0.15…0.2 Uc 0.15…0.2 Uc 0.2…0.35 Uc 0.2…0.35 Uc 0.2…0.35 Uc 0.2…0.4 Uc 0.3…0.5 Uc
800 750 750 1000 1100 1600 2 x 1000 1900
5 5 5 6 6 9 2 x 21 12
30…40 40…50 40…50 50…60 50…60 60…70 70…80 60…80
30…50 40…65 40…65 45…60 45…60 40…50 100…130 40…50
Nota : The arcing time depends on the circuit switched by the poles. For all normal 3-phase applications, the arcing time is less than 10 ms. The load is isolated
from the supply after a time equal to the sum of the opening time and the arcing time.
10 10 10 10 10 5 5 5
2400 2400 2400 2400 2400 1200 600 600
Min/max c.s.a.
1/4 1/4 1/4 1/4 1/4 1/4 1/4 1/4
1/4 1/4 1/4 1/4 1/4 1/4 1/4 1/4
1/4 1/4 1/4 1/4 1/4 1/4 1/4 1/4
1/2.5 1/2.5 1/2.5 1/2.5 1/2.5 1/2.5 1/2.5 1/2.5
1/4 1/4 1/4 1/4 1/4 1/4 1/4 1/4

5
1/4 1/4 1/4 1/4 1/4 1/4 1/4 1/4
1.2 1.2 1.2 1.2 1.2 1.2 1.2 1.2
Mechanical latch blocks LA6 DK must not be fitted on LC1 F contactors.

(1) The operating times depend on the type of contactor electromagnet and its control mode. The closing time "C" is measured from the moment the coil supply is
switched on to initial contact of the main poles. The opening time "O" is measured from the moment the coil supply is switched off to the moment the main poles
separate.
5/101
References 5
TeSys contactors 5
For motor control in utilisation category AC-3

(115 to 800 A)
3-pole contactors
813080
Standard power ratings Rated Basic reference, Weight

of 3-phase motors operational to be completed by
50/60 Hz in category AC-3 current in adding the voltage code
cat. AC-3 (2)
220 V 380 V 660 V 440 V Screw fixing,
230 V 400 V 415 V 440 V 500 V 690 V 1000 V up to cabling (1)
30 55 59 59 75 80 65 115 LC1 F115pp 3.430
LC1 F225 40 75 80 80 90 100 65 150 LC1 F150pp 3.430
55 90 100 100 110 110 100 185 LC1 F185pp 4.650
63 110 110 110 129 129 100 225 LC1 F225pp 4.750
813079
75 132 140 140 160 160 147 265 LC1 F265pp 7.440
100 160 180 200 200 220 160 330 LC1 F330pp 8.600
110 200 220 250 257 280 185 400 LC1 F400pp 9.100
147 250 280 295 355 335 335 500 LC1 F500pp 11.350
200 335 375 400 400 450 450 630 LC1 F630pp 18.600
LC1 F630 220 400 425 425 450 475 450 780 LC1 F780pp 39.500
250 450 450 450 450 475 450 800 LC1 F800pp 18.750
Nota : auxiliary contact blocks, modules and accessories: see pages 5/110 to 5/115.
5 (1) Power terminals can be protected against direct finger contact by the addition of shrouds, to
be ordered separately, except on contactors LC1 F780 (see page 5/114).
(2) Standard control circuit voltages (for other voltages, please consult your Regional Sales
Office):
Volts a 24 48 110 115 120 208 220 230 240 380 400 415 440
LC1 F115…F225
50 Hz (coil LX1) B5 E5 F5 FE5 – – M5 P5 U5 Q5 V5 N5 –
60 Hz (coil LX1) – E6 F6 – G6 L6 M6 – U6 Q6 – – R6
40…400 Hz (coil LX9) – E7 F7 FE7 G7 L7 M7 P7 U7 Q7 V7 N7 R7
LC1 F265…F330
40…400 Hz (coil LX1) B7 E7 F7 FE7 G7 L7 M7 P7 U7 Q7 V7 N7 R7
LC1 F400…F630
40…400 Hz (coil LX1) – E7 F7 FE7 G7(3) L7 M7 P7 U7 Q7 V7 N7 R7
LC1 F780
40…400 Hz (coil LX1) – – F7 FE7 F7 L7 M7 P7 U7 Q7 V7 N7 R7
LC1 F800
40…400 Hz (coil LX4) (4) – – FW FW FW – MW MW MW QW QW QW –
Volts c 24 48 110 125 220 230 250 400 440
LC1 F115…F330
(coil LX4 F) BD ED FD GD MD MD UD – RD
LC1 F400…F630
(coil LX4 F) – ED FD GD MD – UD – RD
LC1 F780
(coil LX4 F) – – FD GD MD – UD – RD
LC1 F800
(coil LX4 F) – – FW FW MW MW – QW –
(3) F7 for LC1 F630.
(4) Coil LX4 F8pp + rectifier DR5STEpp.

pages 5/160 to 5/183 pages 5/94 to 5/101 pages 5/128 and 5/129 page 5/133
5/102
TeSys contactors 5
For control in utilisation category AC-1

(200 to 1600 A)
2, 3 or 4-pole contactors
Maximum Number Basic reference, Weight
813082
current of poles to be completed by

in AC-1 adding the voltage code
(θ y 40 °C) (2)
Screw fixing,
cabling (1)
A kg
200 3 LC1 F115pp 3.430
LC1 F1854 4 LC1 F1154pp 3.830
250 3 LC1 F150pp 3.430
4 LC1 F1504pp 3.830
275 3 LC1 F185pp 4.650
4 LC1 F1854pp 5.450
315 3 LC1 F225pp 4.750

813084
4 LC1 F2254pp 5.550
350 3 LC1 F265pp 7.440
4 LC1 F2654pp 8.540
400 3 LC1 F330pp 8.600
4 LC1 F3304pp 9.500
LC1 F4004
500 2 LC1 F4002pp 8.000
5
3 LC1 F400pp 9.100
4 LC1 F4004pp 10.200
700 2 LC1 F5002pp 9.750
3 LC1 F500pp 11.350
4 LC1 F5004pp 12.950

813083
1000 2 LC1 F6302pp 15.500
3 LC1 F630pp 18.600
4 LC1 F6304pp 21.500
1250 2 LC1 F6302ppS011 15.500
3 LC1 F630ppS011 18.600
LC1 F6304 4 LC1 F6304ppS011 21.500
1600 3 LC1 F780pp 39.500
4 LC1 F7804pp 48.000
Nota : auxiliary contact blocks, modules and accessories: see pages 5/110 to 5/115.
(1) Power terminals can be protected against direct finger contact by the addition of shrouds, to
be ordered separately (except on contactors LC1 F780), see page 5/114.
(2) Standard control circuit voltages, see previous page.

pages 5/160 to 5/183 pages 5/94 to 5/101 pages 5/128 and 5/129 page 5/133
5/103
References 5
Contactors 5

in utilisation category AC-3 (115 to 265 A),
pre-assembled
3-pole reversing contactors (horizontally mounted) (1)

813149
Standard power ratings Opera- Maximum Contactors Weight

of 3-phase motors tional opera- supplied
50/60 Hz in category AC-3 current tional without coil (2)
in AC-3 voltage Complete
reference
220 V 380 V 660 V 440 V Fixing, cabling
230 V 400 V 415 V 440 V 500 V 690 V 1000 V up to (3)
LC2 F115
kW kW kW kW kW kW kW A V kg
30 55 59 59 75 80 65 115 1000 LC2 F115 7.560
40 75 80 80 90 100 65 150 1000 LC2 F150 7.560
55 90 100 100 110 110 100 185 1000 LC2 F185 10.100
63 110 110 110 129 129 100 225 1000 LC2 F225 14.200
75 132 140 140 160 160 147 265 1000 LC2 F265 16.480

Description For reversing Quantity Reference Weight
contactors required kg
Power terminal LC2 F115 2 LA9 F701 0.250
protection shrouds
LC2 F150, F185 2 LA9 F702 0.250
5
LC2 F225, F265 2 LA9 F703 0.250
Auxiliary contact – – See pages 5/110

blocks and to 5/115
add-on modules
(1) Fitted with a mechanical interlock without electrical interlocking. Order separately 2 auxiliary
contact blocks LAD Np1 to obtain electrical interlocking between the 2 contactors, see page
5/111 For accessories, see pages 5/112 to 5/115
(2) Coils to be ordered separately:
- a.c. supply, see pages 5/118 and 5/119,
- d.c. supply, see page 5/121.
(3) Screw fixing.
Power terminals can be protected against direct finger contact by the addition of shrouds, to
be ordered separately, see above.
Selection : Dimensions : Schemes :

5/104
Contactors 5
Changeover contactor pairs for control

in utilisation category AC-1 (200 to 350 A),
pre-assembled
4-pole changeover contactor pairs (horizontally mounted) (1)

813150
Utilisation category AC-1 Maximum Contactors Weight

Non inductive loads operational supplied without
Maximum operational current voltage coil (2)
θ < 40 °C Complete
reference
Fixing, cabling (3)
LC2 F1854 A V kg
200 1000 LC2 F1154 8.860
250 1000 LC2 F1504 8.860
275 1000 LC2 F1854 12.100
315 1000 LC2 F2254 15.200
350 1000 LC2 F2654 19.480

Description For changeover Quantity Reference Weight
pairs required kg
Power terminal LC2 F1154 2 LA9 F706 0.250
protection shrouds
LC2 F1504, F1854 2 LA9 F707 0.250
LC2 F2254, F2654 2 LA9 F708 0.250

5
Auxiliary contact – – See pages 5/110
blocks and to 5/115
add-on modules
(1) Fitted with a mechanical interlock without electrical interlocking. Order separately 2 auxiliary
contact blocks LAD Np1 to obtain electrical interlocking between the 2 contactors, see page
5/111 For accessories, see pages 5/112 to 5/115
(2) Coils to be ordered separately:
- a.c. supply, see pages 5/118 and 5/119,
- d.c. supply, see page 5/121.
(3) Screw fixing.
Power terminals can be protected against direct finger contact by the addition of shrouds, to
be ordered separately, see above.

5/105
Combinations 5
Contactors 5
Reversing contactors and changeover contactor

pairs LC2 F
Components for assembling 3-pole reversing contactors
and changeover contactor pairs, for customer assembly
Horizontally mounted Mechanical interlocks Sets of power connections

Reversers assembled using Reversing contactors 3-pole changeover contactor
2 contactors of identical rating, pairs (1)
type : LA9 Fp970 (2) LA9 Fppp76 (2) LA9 Fppp82 (2)
LC1 F115
1 1/L3
3 1/L2
5 1/L1
1 2/L1
3 2/L2
5 2/L3
L1
L2
L3
LC1 F150
LC1 F185
3
5
5
1
1
A1
A1
A1
A1
LC1 F225
LC1 F265
A2
A2
A2
A2
6
6
2
4
2
4
2
4
2
4
6
LC1 F330
LC1 F400
L1
L2
L3
W
U
V
LC1 F500
LC1 F630
LC1 F800
Vertically mounted Mechanical interlocks

Reversers assembled using LA9 FF4F LA9 FH4H
2 contactors of identical rating, LA9 FG4G LA9 FJ4J
type : LA9 FK4K
LC1 F115 LA9 FL4L
LC1 F150
LC1 F185
LC1 F225
LC1 F265
LC1 F330
LC1 F400
LC1 F500
5 LC1 F630
LC1 F800
Reversers assembled using
2 contactors of different ratings,
see page 5/108
LC1 F780 LA9 FX970
(1) For 4-pole changeover contactor pairs, see pages 5/108 and 5/109.
(2) Complete references: see page 5/107.
5/106
References 5
Contactors 5
Reversing contactors and changeover pairs LC2 F

Components for assembling 3-pole reversing contactors
and changeover contactor pairs, for customer assembly
Reversers assembled using 2 contactors of identical rating

Contactor type Set of power connections Mechanical interlock
(1) Reference Weight Kit reference Weight
kg kg
For assembly of 3-pole reversing contactors for motor control
Horizontally mounted
LC1 F115 LA9 FF976 0.600 LA9 FF970 0.060
LC1 F150 LA9 F15076 0.600 LA9 FF970 0.060
LC1 F185 LA9 FG976 0.780 LA9 FG970 0.060
LC1 F225 LA9 F22576 1.500 LA9 FG970 0.060
LC1 F265 LA9 FH976 1.500 LA9 FJ970 0.140
LC1 F330 LA9 FJ976 2.100 LA9 FJ970 0.140
LC1 F400 LA9 FJ976 2.100 LA9 FJ970 0.140
LC1 F500 LA9 FK976 2.350 LA9 FJ970 0.140
LC1 F630 or F800 LA9 FL976 3.800 LA9 FL970 0.150
Vertically mounted
LC1 F115 or F150 (2) – LA9 FF4F 0.345
LC1 F185 (2) – LA9 FG4G 0.350
LC1 F225 (2) – LA9 FG4G 0.350
LC1 F265 or F330 (2) – LA9 FH4H 1.060
LC1 F400 (2) – LA9 FJ4J 1.200
LC1 F500 (2) – LA9 FK4K 1.200
LC1 F630 or F800 (2) – LA9 FL4L 1.220
LC1 F780 (3) – LA9 FX970 (3) 6.100
For assembly of 3-pole changeover contactor pairs (4)

LC1 F115 LA9 FF982 0.460 LA9 FF970 0.060
LC1 F150 LA9 F15082 0.460 LA9 FF970 0.060
LC1 F185 LA9 FG982 0.610 LA9 FG970 0.060 5
LC1 F225 LA9 F22582 1.200 LA9 FG970 0.060
LC1 F265 LA9 FH982 1.200 LA9 FJ970 0.140
LC1 F330 LA9 FJ982 1.800 LA9 FJ970 0.140
LC1 F400 LA9 FJ982 1.800 LA9 FJ970 0.140
LC1 F500 LA9 FK982 2.300 LA9 FJ970 0.140
LC1 F630 or F800 LA9 FL982 3.400 LA9 FL970 0.150
Vertically mounted
LC1 F115 or F150 (2) – LA9 FF4F 0.345
LC1 F185 (2) – LA9 FG4G 0.350
LC1 F225 (2) – LA9 FG4G 0.350
LC1 F265 or F330 (2) – LA9 FH4H 1.060
LC1 F400 (2) – LA9 FJ4J 1.200
LC1 F500 (2) – LA9 FK4K 1.200
LC1 F630 or F800 (2) – LA9 FL4L 1.220
LC1 F780 (3) – LA9 FX970 (3) 7.800
(1) To order the 2 contactors: see pages 5/102 and 5/103 For the 2 auxiliary contact blocks
LAD Np1 required to obtain electrical interlocking between the 2 contactors, see page 5/111
For accessories, see pages 5/112 to 5/115
(2) With the exception of contactors LC1 F780, all power connections are to be made by the
customer.
(3) Double mechanical interlock mechanism with 2 interlock connecting rods and 3 power
connecting links.
(4) For assembly of 4-pole changeover contactor pairs, see pages 5/108 and 5/109

5/107
Combinations 5
Contactors 5
Changeover contactor pairs LC2 F

Components for assembling 3 and 4-pole changeover
contactor pairs, for customer assembly
Horizontally mounted Mechanical interlocks Sets of power connections

Contactor pairs assembled using 4-pole changeover contactor pairs (1)
2 contactors of identical rating, LA9 Fp970 LA9 Fppp77
type :
1N
3 1/L3
5 1/L2
7 1/L1
1 2/L1
3 2/L2
5 2/L3
2N
LC1 F1154
LC1 F1504
LC1 F1854
7
1
A1
A1
LC1 F2254
LC1 F2654
A2
A2
LC1 F3304
6
8
8
2
4
2
4
6
LC1 F4004
LC1 F5004
L1
L2
L3
N
LC1 F6304
Vertically mounted Mechanical interlocks

Contactor pairs assembled using Assembly A Assembly B Assembly C
2 contactors of identical rating, LA9 FF4F LA9 FH4H LA9 FX971
type : LA9 FG4G LA9 FJ4J
LC1 F1154 LA9 FK4K
LC1 F1504 LA9 FL4L
LC1 F1854
LC1 F2254
LC1 F2654
LC1 F3304
LC1 F4004
LC1 F5004
LC1 F6304
5 Contactor pairs assembled using

2 contactors of different ratings,
Assembly A Assembly B Assembly C
LA9 FG4F LA9 FH4F, LA9 FH4G LA9 FJ4H
type : LA9 FJ4F, LA9 FJ4G LA9 FK4H, LA9 FK4J
LC1 F115 or F1154 LA9 FK4F, LA9 FK4G LA9 FL4H, LA9 FL4J and LA9 FL4K
LC1 F150 or F1504 LA9 FL4F, LA9 FL4G
LC1 F185 or F1854
LC1 F225 or F2254
LC1 F265 or F2654
LC1 F330 or F3304
LC1 F400 or F4004
LC1 F500 or F5004
LC1 F630 or F6304
LC1 F800
Contactor pairs assembled using LA9 Fp4p4p : see pages 5/116 and 5/117.
3 contactors of identical or
different ratings, type :
LC1 F115 or F1154
LC1 F150 or F1504
LC1 F185 or F1854
LC1 F225 or F2254
LC1 F265 or F2654
LC1 F330 or F3304
LC1 F400 or F4004
LC1 F500 or F5004
LC1 F630 or F6304
LC1 F800
Important: the contactor ratings must be in decreasing size from top to

bottom.
(1) For 3-pole changeover contactor pairs, see pages 5/106 and 5/107.
5/108
References 5
Contactors 5
Changeover contactor pairs LC2 F

Components for assembling 3 and 4-pole changeover
contactor pairs, for customer assembly
Contactor pairs assembled using 2 contactors of identical rating

For assembly of 4-pole changeover contactor pairs (1)
(2) Reference Weight Kit reference Weight
kg kg
LC1 F1154 LA9 FF977 0.460 LA9 FF970 0.060
LC1 F1504 LA9 F15077 0.460 LA9 FF970 0.060
LC1 F1854 LA9 FG977 0.610 LA9 FG970 0.060
LC1 F2254 LA9 F22577 1.200 LA9 FG970 0.060
LC1 F2654 LA9 FH977 1.200 LA9 FJ970 0.140
LC1 F3304 LA9 FJ977 1.800 LA9 FJ970 0.140
LC1 F4004 LA9 FJ977 1.800 LA9 FJ970 0.140
LC1 F5004 LA9 FK977 2.300 LA9 FJ970 0.140
LC1 F6304 LA9 FL977 3.400 LA9 FL970 0.150
Vertically mounted
LC1 F1154 or F1504 (3) – LA9 FF4F 0.345
LC1 F1854 (3) – LA9 FG4G 0.350
LC1 F2254 (3) – LA9 FG4G 0.350
LC1 F2654 or F3304 (3) – LA9 FH4H 1.060
LC1 F4004 (3) – LA9 FJ4J 1.200
LC1 F5004 (3) – LA9 FK4K 1.200
LC1 F6304 (3) – LA9 FL4L 1.220
LC1 F7804 (4) – LA9 FX971 (4) 7.800
Contactor pairs assembled using 2 contactors of different ratings

For assembly of 3 or 4-pole changeover contactor pairs
Contactor type(1) Mechanical interlock
At bottom At top Kit reference Weight
kg 5
Vertically mounted
LC1 F115 or F1154 LC1 F185 or F1854 LA9 FG4F 0.350
or LC1 F225 or F2254 LA9 FG4F 0.350
LC1 F150 or F1504
LC1 F265 or F2654 LA9 FH4F 0.870
LC1 F330 or F3304 LA9 FH4F 0.870
LC1 F400 or F4004 LA9 FJ4F 0.930
LC1 F500 or F5004 LA9 FK4F 0.940
LC1 F630, F6304 or F800 LA9 FL4F 0.940
LC1 F185 or F1854 LC1 F265 or F2654 LA9 FH4G 0.860
or LC1 F330 or F3304 LA9 FH4G 0.860
LC1 F225 or F2254
LC1 F400 or F4004 LA9 FJ4G 0.940
LC1 F500 or F5004 LA9 FK4G 0.940
LC1 F630, F6304 or F800 LA9 FL4G 0.950
LC1 F265 or F2654 LC1 F400 or F4004 LA9 FJ4H 1.130
or LC1 F500 or F5004 LA9 FK4H 1.130
LC1 F330 or F3304
LC1 F630, F6304 or F800 LA9 FL4H 1.140
LC1 F400 or F4004 LC1 F500 or F5004 LA9 FK4J 1.200
LC1 F630 or F6304 or F800 LA9 FL4J 1.210
LC1 F500 or F5004 LC1 F630 or F6304 or F800 LA9 FL4K 1.210
For assembly of reversers using 3 contactors, vertically mounted

See pages 5/116 and 5/117.
(1) For assembly of 3-pole changeover contactor pairs, see pages 5/106 and 5/108.
(2) To order the 2 contactors: see pages 5/102 and 5/103. For the 2 auxiliary contact blocks
LAD Np1 required to obtain electrical interlocking between the 2 contactors, see page 5/111.
For accessories, see pages 5/112 to 5/115
(3) All power connections are to be made by the customer.
connecting links.

5/109
Presentation 5
TeSys contactors 5
TeSys LC1 F
LAD N
LAD N, LAD C
LAD N10, N01 LC1 F
LAD T, LAD S
LAD R
LA1 DX, DY, DZ
5/110
References 5
TeSys contactors 5
TeSys LC1 F

For use in normal operating environments
Number Max. number of Composition Reference Weight
of blocks per contactor
contacts Clip-on mounting
kg
1 1 – – 1 – LAD N10 0.020
– – – 1 LAD N01 0.020
2 2 – – 1 1 LAD N11 0.030

– – 2 – LAD N20 0.030
– – – 2 LAD N02 0.030
4 2 – – 2 2 LAD N22 0.050

– – 1 3 LAD N13 0.050
– – 4 – LAD N40 0.050
– – – 4 LAD N04 0.050
– – 3 1 LAD N31 0.050
– – 2 2 (1) LAD C22 0.050
With terminal referencing conforming to EN 50012

2 2 – – 1 1 LAD N11P 0.030
– – 1 1 LAD N11G 0.030
4 2 – – 2 2 LAD N22P 0.050

– – 2 2 LAD N22G 0.050
Instantaneous auxiliary contact blocks for connection by lugs

This type of connection is not possible for blocks with 1 contact or blocks with dust and damp
protected contacts. For all other instantaneous auxiliary contact blocks, add the figure 6 to the
end of the references selected above. Example: LAD N11 becomes LAD N116. 5
Instantaneous auxiliary contact blocks with dust and damp
protected contacts
Recommended for use in particularly harsh industrial environments
Number Max. number of Composition Reference Weight
contacts Clip-on mounting
kg
2 2 2 – – – LA1 DX20 0.040
2 2 (2) – – LA1 DY20 0.040
4 2 2 – 2 – LA1 DZ40 0.050

2 – 1 1 LA1 DZ31 0.050
Time delay auxiliary contact blocks

Number Max. number of Time delay Reference Weight
contacts Clip-on mounting Type Range
s kg
1 N/O 2 On-delay 0.1…3 (3) LAD T0 0.060
+ 0.1…30 LAD T2 0.060
1 N/C
10…180 LAD T4 0.060
1…30 (4) LAD S2 0.060
Off-delay 0.1…3 (3) LAD R0 0.060

0.1…30 LAD R2 0.060
10…180 LAD R4 0.060
(1) Including 1 N/O + 1 N/C make before break.

(2) Device fitted with 4 earth screen continuity terminals.
(3) With extended scale from 0.1 to 0.6 s.
(4) With switching time of 40 ms ± 15 ms between opening of the N/C contact and closing of the
N/O contact.
Presentation : Schemes :
page 5/110 page 5/133
5/111
References 5
TeSys contactors 5
TeSys LC1 F
Accessories
Suppressor blocks
RC circuits (resistor-capacitor)
b Effective protection for circuits highly sensitive to “high frequency” interference. For use only
530416
in cases where the voltage is virtually sinusoidal, i.e. less than 5% total harmonic distortion.
b Voltage limited to 3 Uc max. and oscillating frequency limited to 400 Hz max.
b Slight increase in drop-out time (1.1 to 1.3 times the normal time).
Mounting Uc Reference Weight
kg
Clip-on mounting on all ratings a 24…48 V LA4 FRCE 0.040
and all a.c. coils. 50…110 V LA4 FRCF 0.040
127…240 V LA4 FRCP 0.040
265…415 V LA4 FRCV 0.040
LA4 Fppp
Varistors (peak limiting)
Clip-on mounting on all ratings a or c 24…48 V LA4 FVE 0.040
and all coils. 50…110 V LA4 FVF 0.040
127…240 V LA4 FVP 0.040
265…415 V LA4 FVV 0.040
813087
Diodes
b No overvoltage or oscillating frequency.
b Increase in drop-out time (3 to 4 times the normal time).
b Polarised component.
Clip-on mounting on all ratings c 24…48 V LA4 FDE 0.040
and all d.c. coils. 55…110 V LA4 FDF 0.040
125…250 V LA4 FDP 0.040
280…440 V LA4 FDV 0.040
Bidirectional peak limiting diodes (transil)

5 b Protection provided by limiting the transient voltage to between 2 and 2.5 times Uc max.
LA9 Fp602 Clip-on mounting on all ratings a or c 24…48 V LA4 FTE 0.040
and all coils. 50…110 V LA4 FTF 0.040
127…240 V LA4 FTP 0.040
265…415 V LA4 FTV 0.040
813088
Cabling accessories
For use on 4-pole contactors Set of 4 links Weight
Set reference kg
Links for parallel connection of poles (in pairs)
LC1 F1154 LA9 FF602 0.200
LA9 Fp601 LC1 F1504, F1854 LA9 FG602 0.350
LC1 F2254, F2654, F3304, F4004 LA9 FH602 1.000
LC1 F5004 LA9 FK602 1.750
LC1 F6304 LA9 FL602 3.000
Links for “star” connection of 3 poles

LC1 F115 LA9 FF601 0.035
LC1 F150, F185 LA9 FG601 0.050
LC1 F225, F265, F330, F400 LA9 FH601 0.120
LC1 F500 LA9 FK601 0.180
LC1 F630, F800 LA9 FL601 0.550
813090
Control circuit voltage take-off from power terminals

For use on contactors Mounted on Sold in Unit reference Weight
DZ3 FA3 bolt size lots of kg
LC1 F115 M6 10 DZ3 FA3 0.004
LC1 F150, F185 M8 10 DZ3 GA3 0.004
LC1 F225…F500 M10 10 DZ3 HA3 0.006
LC1 F630, F800 M12 10 DZ3 JA3 0.009
Dimensions :
pages 5/130 and 5/131
5/112
TeSys contactors 5
TeSys LC1 F
Accessories
Right-angled connectors
For contactors or thermal overload relays
For use on With connector plates Set of 3 connectors
813091
Contactors Thermal overload Set reference Weight

relays (1) Width Type kg
LC1 F115 LR9 F5p67, LR9 F67 15 mm Rear LA9 FF981 0.060
LA9 Fp981 Side LA9 FF979 0.240
Large LA9 FF980 0.150

surface area
LC1 F150, LR9 F5p69, F5p71, 20 mm Rear LA9 FG981 0.080
813093
F185 LR9 F69, F71

Side LA9 FG979 0.350
Large LA9 FG980 0.200

surface area
LC1 F225, LR9 F7p75, 25 mm Rear LA9 FJ981 0.430
F265, F330, LR9 F75
LA9 Fp979 F400 Side LA9 FJ979 0.750
Large LA9 FJ980 0.490

surface area
813092
LC1 F500 LR9 F7p79, F7p81, 30 mm Rear LA9 FK981 0.480

LR9 F79, F81
Side LA9 FK979 0.920
Large LA9 FK980 0.800

surface area
LC1 F630, LR9 F7p81, 40 mm Rear LA9 FL981 1.210
F800 LR9 F81
Side LA9 FL979 2.570
Large LA9 FL980 3.190

5
LA9 FL980 surface area
For reversing contactors or “star-delta” contactors combined with a thermal
overload relay
For use on Width of Set of 3 busbars
Contactors Thermal overload connector plate Set reference Weight
relays (1) kg
LC1 F115 LR9 F5p57, F5p63 15 mm LA7 F401 0.110
LR9 F5p67, F5p69
LR9 F69, F71
LC1 F150 LR9 F5p57, F5p63 20 mm LA7 F402 0.110
and F185
LC1 F185 LR9 F5p71, 25 mm LA7 F407 0.160

LR9 F71
LC1 F225 LR9 F5p71, 25 mm LA7 F403 0.160

and F265 LR9 F71
LR9 F7p75, F7p79 25 mm LA7 F404 0.160

LR9 F75, F79
LC1 F330 LR9 F7p75, F7p79 25 mm LA7 F404 0.160

and F400 LR9 F75, F79
LC1 F400 LR9 F7p81, 25 mm LA7 F404 0.160

LR9 F81
LC1 F500 LR9 F7p75, F7p79 30 mm LA7 F405 0.270

LR9 F7p81
LR9 F75, F79, F81
LC1 F630, LR9 F7p81, 40 mm LA7 F406 0.600
F800 LR9 F81
(1) For protection relays class 10, replace the p with a 3 and for class 20, replace thep with a 5.
Dimensions :
page 5/130
5/113
TeSys contactors 5
TeSys LC1 F
Accessories
Insulated terminal blocks

For use on Cabling Tightening Set of 2 blocks Weight
3-pole contactors tool
813094
Set reference kg
LC1 F115, F150, F185 1 x 16…150 mm2 4 mm LA9 F103 0.560
or hexagonal
2 x 16…95 mm2 socket key
Power terminal protection shrouds

LA9 F103 For use on Number of Set reference Weight
2, 3 and 4-pole contactors shrouds
per set kg
LC1 F115 6 LA9 F701 0.250
813095
LC1 F150, F185 6 LA9 F702 0.250
LC1 F225, F265, F330, F400 and F4002, 6 LA9 F703 0.250
F500 and F5002
LC1 F630, F6302 and F800 6 LA9 F704 0.250
LC1 F1154 8 LA9 F706 0.300

LA9 F701
LC1 F1504 and F1854 8 LA9 F707 0.300
LC1 F2254, F2654, F3304, F4004, F5004 8 LA9 F708 0.300
LC1 F6304 8 LA9 F709 0.300

5
5/114
References 5
TeSys contactors 5
TeSys LC1 F
Spare parts
Main contact sets

Per pole: 2 fixed contacts and 1 moving contact, 2 deflectors, 1 backplate, fixing screws and
813096
washers.
For contactor Type Replacement Reference Weight

for kg
2-pole LC1 F4002 2 poles LA5 F400802 1.350
LC1 F5002 2 poles LA5 F500802 1.950
LC1 F6302 2 poles LA5 F630802 4.700
LC1 F6302S011 2 poles LA5 F630802S011 4.800
3-pole LC1 F115, F150 3 poles LA5 FF431 0.270

LA5 FG431
LC1 F185, F225 3 poles LA5 FG431 0.350
LC1 F265 3 poles LA5 FH431 0.660
LC1 F330, F400 3 poles LA5 F400803 2.000
LC1 F500 3 poles LA5 F500803 2.950
LC1 F630 3 poles LA5 F630803 6.100
LC1 F780 1 pole LA5 F780801 (1) 4.700
813097
3 poles LA5 F780803 13.200

LC1 F800 3 poles LA5 F800803 6.100
LC1 F630S011 3 poles LA5 F630803S011 6.200
4-pole LC1 F1504, F1154 4 poles LA5 FF441 0.360

LC1 F1854, F2254 4 poles LA5 FG441 0.465
LC1 F2654 4 poles LA5 FH441 0.880
LC1 F3304, F4004 4 pôles LA5 F400804 2.700
LC1 F5004 4 poles LA5 F500804 3.900
LC1 F6304 4 poles LA5 F630804 8.150
LC1 F7804 1 pole LA5 F780801 (1) 4.700
4 poles LA5 F780804 17.300
LC1 F6304S011 4 poles LA5 F630804S011 8.400
5
Arc chambers
For contactor Type Replacement Reference Weight
LA5 F40050 for kg
LC1 F5002 2 poles LA5 F500250 1.250
LC1 F6302 2 poles LA5 F630250 2.100
LC1 F6302S011 2 poles LA5 F630250 2.100

LC1 F150 3 poles LA5 F15050 0.490
LC1 F185 3 poles LA5 F18550 0.670
LC1 F225 3 poles LA5 F22550 0.670
LC1 F265 3 pôles LA5 F26550 0.920
LC1 F330 3 poles LA5 F33050 1.300
LC1 F400 3 poles LA5 F40050 1.300
LC1 F500 3 poles LA5 F50050 1.850
LC1 F630 3 poles LA5 F63050 3.150
LC1 F780 1 pole LA5 F780150 (1) 2.100
LC1 F800 3 poles LA5 F80050 3.150
LC1 F630S011 3 poles LA5 F63050 3.150

LC1 F1504 4 poles LA5 F150450 0.660
LC1 F1854 4 poles LA5 F185450 0.910
LC1 F2254 4 poles LA5 F225450 1.000
LC1 F2654 4 poles LA5 F265450 1.220
LC1 F3304 4 poles LA5 F330450 1.740
LC1 F4004 4 poles LA5 F400450 (2) 1.740
LC1 F5004 4 poles LA5 F500450 (2) 2.500
LC1 F6304 4 poles LA5 F630450 (3) 4.200
LC1 F7804 1 pole LA5 F780150 (1) 2.100
LC1 F6304S011 4 poles LA5 F630450 4.200
(1) Comprising 2 identical items per pole.

(2) Comprising two 2-pole arc chambers.
(3) Comprising single-pole arc chambers.
5/115
References 5
TeSys contactors 5
TeSys LC1 F
Accessories for assembly of reversing contactors
and changeover contactor pairs using 3 contactors,
vertically mounted - for customer assembly
Closing of one of the 3 contactors prevents closing of the other 2.

Mechanical interlock kits
Contactor type (1) Mechanical interlock (2)
813215
Top Middle Bottom Kit reference (3) Weight

kg
LC1 F115, F150, LC1 F115, F150, LC1 F115, F150, LA9 FF4F4F 0.554
F1154 or F1504 F1154 or F1504 F1154 or F1504
LC1 F185, F225, LC1 F115, F150, LC1 F115, F150, LA9 FG4F4F 0.559
F1854 or F2254 F1154 or F1504 F1154 or F1504
LC1 F185, F225, LC1 F115, F150, LA9 FG4G4F 0.559
F1854 or F2254 F1154 or F1504
LC1 F185, F225, LA9 FG4G4G 0.562
F1854 or F2254
LC1 F265, F330, LC1 F115, F150, LC1 F115, F150, LA9 FH4F4F 1.350
F2654 or F3304 F1154 or F1504 F1154 or F1504
LC1 F185, F225, LC1 F115, F150, LA9 FH4G4F 1.375
F1854 or F2254 F1154 or F1504
LC1 F185, F225, LA9 FH4G4G 1.375
F1854 or F2254
LC1 F265, F330, LC1 F115, F150, LA9 FH4H4F 1.524
F2654 or F3304 F1154 or F1504
LA9 Fp4p4p LC1 F185, F225, LA9 FH4H4G 1.527
F1854 or F2254
LC1 F265, F330, LA9 FH4H4H 1.684
F2654 or F3304
LC1 F400, F4002 LC1 F115, F150, LC1 F115, F150, LA9 FJ4F4F 1.421
or F4004 F1154 or F1504 F1154 or F1504
LC1 F185, F225, LC1 F115, F150, LA9 FJ4G4F 1.424
F1854 or F2254 F1154 or F1504
LC1 F185, F225, LA9 FJ4G4G 1.428
F1854 or F2254
LC1 F265, F330, LC1 F115, F150, LA9 FJ4H4F 1.595
5 F2654 or F3304 F1154 or F1504
LC1 F185, F225, LA9 FJ4H4G 1.598
F1854 or F2254
LC1 F265, F330, LA9 FJ4H4H 1.755
F2654 or F3304
LC1 F400, F4002 LC1 F115, F150, LA9 FJ4J4F 1.666
or F4004 F1154 or F1504
LC1 F185, F225, LA9 FJ4J4G 1.669
F1854 or F2254
LC1 F265, F330, LA9 FJ4J4H 1.829
F2654 or F3304
LC1-F400, F4002 LA9 FJ4J4J 1.890
or F4004
LC1 F500, F5002 LC1 F115, F150, LC1 F115, F150, LA9 FK4F4F 1.421
or F5004 F1154 or F1504 F1154 or F1504
(continued on page LC1 F185, F225, LC1 F115, F150, LA9 FK4G4F 1.424
5/117) F1854 or F2254 F1154 or F1504
LC1 F185, F225, LA9 FK4G4G 1.428
F1854 or F2254
LC1 F265, F330, LC1 F115, F150, LA9 FK4H4F 1.595
F2654 or F3304 F1154 or F1504
LC1 F185, F225, LA9 FK4H4G 1.598
F1854 or F2254
LC1 F265, F330, LA9 FK4H4H 1.755
F2654 or F3304
LC1 F400, F4002 LC1 F115, F150, LA9 FK4J4F 1.666
or F4004 F1154 or F1504
LC1 F185, F225, LA9 FK4J4G 1.669
F2654 or F3304
LC1 F265, F330, LA9 FK4J4H 1.829
F2654 or F3304
LC1 F400, F4002 LA9 FK4J4J 1.896
or F4004
LC1 F500, F5002 LC1 F115, F150, LA9 FK4K4F 1.666
or F5004 F1154 or F1504
(1) To order the 3 contactors, see pages 5/102 and 5/103. For auxiliary contact blocks LAD N02
used for electrical locking, see page 5/111. For accessories, see pages 5/112 to 5/115
(2) Minimum distances between contactors, see page 5/117.
(3) The kit contains the lever arms, the 2 x Ø 8 mm rods and all parts required for assembly.
Selection :
pages 5/160 to 5/183
5/116
TeSys contactors 5
TeSys LC1 F
Accessories for assembly of reversing contactors
and changeover contactor pairs using 3 contactors,
vertically mounted - for customer assembly
Mechanical interlock kits (continued)

813216
Contactor type (1) Mechanical interlock (2)

Top Middle Bottom Kit reference (3) Weight
kg
LC1 F500, F5002 LC1 F500, F5002 LC1 F185, F225, LA9 FK4K4G 1.669
or F5004 or F5004 F1854 or F2254
(continued) LC1 F265, F330, LA9 FK4K4H 1.825
F2654 or F3304
LC1 F400, F4002 LA9 FK4K4J 1.896
or F4004
LC1-F500, F5002 LA9 FK4K4K 1.896
or F5004
LC1 F630, F800, LC1 F115, F150, LC1 F115, F150, LA9 FL4F4F 1.428
F6302 or F6304 F1154 or F1504 F1154 or F1504
LC1 F185, F225, LC1 F115, F150, LA9 FL4G4F 1.431
F1854 or F2254 F1154 or F1504
LC1 F185, F225, LA9 FL4G4G 1.436
F1854 or F2254
LC1 F265, F330, LC1 F115, F150, LA9 FL4H4F 1.602
F2654 or F3304 F1154 or F1504
LA9 Fp4p4p LC1 F185, F225, LA9 FL4H4G 1.606
F1854 or F2254
LC1 F265, F330, LA9 FL4H4H 1.751
F2654 or F3304
LC1 F400, F4002 LC1 F115, F150, LA9 FL4J4F 1.673
or F4004 F1154 or F1504
LC1 F185, F225, LA9 FL4J4G 1.676
F1854 or F2254
LC1 F265, F330, LA9 FL4J4H 1.832
F2654 or F3304
LC1 F400, F4002 LA9 FL4J4J 1.903
or F4004
LC1-F500, F5002 LC1 F115, F150,
or F5004 F1154 or F1504
LA9 FK4K4F 1.666
5
LC1 F185, F225, LA9 FK4K4G 1.669
F1854 or F2254
LC1 F265, F330, LA9 FK4K4H 1.825
F2654 or F3304
LC1 F400, F4002 LA9 FK4K4J 1.896
or F4004
LC1-F500, F5002 LA9 FK4K4K 1.896
or F5004
LC1 F630, F800, LC1 F115, F150, LA9 FL4L4F 1.680
F6302 or F6304 F1154 or F1504
LC1 F185, F225, LA9 FL4L4G 1.683
F1854 or F2254
LC1 F265, F330, LA9 FL4L4H 1.910
F2654 or F3304
LC1 F400, F4002 LA9 FL4L4J 1.896
or F4004
LC1 F500, F5002 LA9 FL4L4K 1.896
or F5004
LC1 F630, F800, LA9 FL4L4L 1.920
F6302, or F6304
(1) To order the 3 contactors, see pages 5/102 and 5/103. For auxiliary contact blocks LAD N02
used for electrical locking, see page 5/111. For accessories, see pages 5/112 to 5/115.
(2) Minimum distances between contactors.
This is the distance, in mm, between the centres of two adjacent contactors (between the top and
middle contactors or between the middle and bottom contactors).
Contactor
Bottom or top Middle
LC1 F115 LC1 F185 LC1 F265 LC1 F400 LC1 F500 LC1 F630
or F150 or F225 or F330 or F800
LC1 F115 or F150 200 210 240 250 270 320
LC1 F185 or F225 210 220 250 250 270 330
LC1 F265 or F330 240 250 250 260 280 350
LC1 F400 250 250 260 260 280 320
LC1 F500 270 270 280 280 300 340
LC1 F630 or F800 320 330 350 320 340 380
(3) The kit contains the lever arms, the 2 x Ø 8 mm rods and all parts required for assembly.
Selection :
pages 5/160 to 5/183
5/117
References 5
TeSys contactors 5
TeSys LC1 F
a.c. 50/60 Hz supply coils
References
Maximum ambient air temperature: 55 °C. Above this, use an LX9 F coil, see page 5/123.
Operating cycles/hour (θ y 55 °C): y 2400.
Control circuit voltage Average Inductance Voltage Reference Weight
Uc - 50 Hz Uc - 60 Hz resistance at of closed code
V V Ω H kg
813181
For contactors LC1 F115 and LC1 F150

24 – 0.27 0.04 B5 LX1 FF024 0.430
42 – 0.94 0.13 D5 LX1 FF042 0.430
– 48 0.78 0.11 E6 LX1 FF040 0.430
48 – 1.17 0.16 E5 LX1 FF048 0.430
– 110 4.55 0.59 F6 LX1 FF092 0.430
– 120 4.77 0.64 G6 LX1 FF095 0.430
110 – 6.38 0.86 F5 LX1 FF110 0.430
LX1 FFppp 115 – 6.38 0.86 FE5 LX1 FF110 0.430
127/132 – 9.14 1.15 G5 LX1 FF127 0.430
– 200/208 14.5 1.87 L6 LX1 FF162 0.430
– 220 18.4 2.38 M6 LX1 FF184 0.430
– 240 18.9 2.5 U6 LX1 FF187 0.430
220 265/277 28.1 3.44 M5 LX1 FF220 0.430
230 – 28.1 3.44 P5 LX1 FF220 0.430
240 – 31.1 4.1 U5 LX1 FF240 0.430
– 380 57.2 7.05 Q6 LX1 FF316 0.430
– 440 72.6 9.21 R6 LX1 FF360 0.430
380 460/480 86.9 10.3 Q5 LX1 FF380 0.430
400 – 86.9 10.3 V5 LX1 FF380 0.430
415 – 95.1 12 N5 LX1 FF415 0.430
500 – 141 17 S5 LX1 FF500 0.430
– 660 172 20.3 Y6 LX1 FF550 0.430
5 660/690 – 254 28.9 Y5 LX1 FF660 0.430
– 1000 414 48.9 – LX1 FF850 0.430
1000 – 610 68.5 – LX1 FF1000 0.430
Specifications
- inrush 50 Hz: 550 VA; 60 Hz: 660 VA,
- sealed 50 Hz: 45 VA; 60 Hz: 55 VA, cos ϕ = 0.3.
Heat dissipation: 12…16 W.
Operating time at Uc: closing = 23…35 ms, opening = 5…15 ms.
24 – 0.18 0.03 B5 LX1 FG024 0.550
813182
42 – 0.57 0.09 – LX1 FG042 0.550

– 48 0.47 0.08 E6 LX1 FG040 0.550
48 – 0.71 0.12 E5 LX1 FG048 0.550
– 110 2.74 0.44 F6 LX1 FG092 0.550
– 115/120 2.87 0.49 G6 LX1 FG095 0.550
110 – 4.18 0.65 F5 LX1 FG110 0.550
115 – 4.18 0.65 FE5 LX1 FG110 0.550
127/132 – 5.35 0.86 G5 LX1 FG127 0.550
LX1 FGppp – 200/208 8.8 1.41 L6 LX1 FG162 0.550
– 220 11.1 1.8 M6 LX1 FG184 0.550
– 240 11.4 1.87 U6 LX1 FG187 0.550
220 265/277 16.5 2.59 M5 LX1 FG220 0.550
230 – 16.5 2.59 P5 LX1 FG220 0.550
240 – 20.1 3.09 U5 LX1 FG240 0.550
– 380 34 5.32 Q6 LX1 FG316 0.550
– 440 43.5 6.94 R6 LX1 FG360 0.550
380 460/480 51.3 7.75 Q5 LX1 FG380 0.550
400 – 51.3 7.75 V5 LX1 FG380 0.550
415 – 62.3 9.06 N5 LX1 FG415 0.550
500 – 82.7 12.8 S5 LX1 FG500 0.550
– 660 103 15.3 Y6 LX1 FG550 0.550
660/690 – 154 21.8 Y5 LX1 FG660 0.550
– 1000 249 36.6 – LX1 FG850 0.550
1000 – 370 51.6 – LX1 FG1000 0.550
Specifications
- inrush 50 Hz: 805 VA; 60 Hz: 970 VA,
- sealed 50 Hz: 55 VA; 60 Hz: 66 VA, cos ϕ = 0.3.
Heat dissipation: 18…24 W.
5/118
References 5
TeSys contactors 5
TeSys LC1 F
a.c. 40 to 400 Hz supply coils
References
Low sealed consumption.
Operate on networks with harmonic numbers y 7.
Control Average resistance Inductance Voltage Reference Weight
circuit at 20 °C ± 10 % of closed code
voltage circuit
Inrush Sealed
Uc
V Ω Ω H kg
24 0.8 20 (1) B7 LX1 FH0242 0.750
813183
48 2.96 67 (1) E7 LX1 FH0482 0.750

110 18.7 440 (1) F7 LX1 FH1102 0.750
115 18.7 440 (1) FE7 LX1 FH1102 0.750
120/127 22.9 536 (1) G7 LX1 FH1272 0.750
200/208 58.4 1366 (1) L7 LX1 FH2002 0.750
220 70.6 1578 (1) M7 LX1 FH2202 0.750
230 70.6 1578 (1) P7 LX1 FH2202 0.750
240 87.94 1968 (1) U7 LX1 FH2402 0.750
LX1 FHppp2 277 113 2444 (1) W7 LX1 FH2772 0.750
380 217 4631 (1) Q7 LX1 FH3802 0.750
400 217 4631 (1) V7 LX1 FH3802 0.750
415 217 4631 (1) N7 LX1-FH3802 0.750
440 265 6731 (1) R7 LX1 FH4402 0.750
480/500 329 8543 (1) S7 LX1 FH5002 0.750
600/660 296 10 245 (1) X7 LX1 FH6002 0.750
1000 696 25 880 (1) – LX1 FH10002 0.750
Specifications
Average consumption at 20 °C for 50 or 60 Hz and cos ϕ = 0.9:
- inrush: 600…700 VA,
- sealed: 8…10 VA.
Heat dissipation: 8 W.
5
For contactor LC1 F400
48 1.6 29.5 0.18 E7 LX1 FJ048 1.000
813184
110/120 9.8 230 1.35 F7 LX1 FJ110 1.000

115 9.8 230 1.35 FE7 LX1 FJ110 1.000
120/127 12.8 280 1.75 G7 LX1 FJ127 1.000
200/208 30 815 4.1 L7 LX1 FJ200 1.000
220 37 1030 5.1 M7 LX1 FJ220 1.000
230 37 1030 5.1 P7 LX1 FJ220 1.000
240 47.5 1320 6.4 U7 LX1 FJ240 1.000
265/277 61 1700 8.1 W7 LX1 FJ280 1.000
LX1 FJppp 380 120 3310 15.8 Q7 LX1 FJ380 1.000
400 120 3310 15.8 V7 LX1 FJ380 1.000
415 145 4070 19.4 N7 LX1 FJ415 1.000
440 145 4070 19.4 R7 LX1 FJ415 1.000
500 190 4980 25.5 S7 LX1 FJ500 1.000
550/600 243 6310 27.4 X7 LX1 FJ600 1.000
1000 720 19 420 84.6 – LX1 FJ1000 1.000
Specifications
Average consumption at 20 °C for 50 or 60 Hz and cos ϕ = 0.9 :
- inrush: 1000…1150 VA,
5/119
TeSys contactors 5
TeSys LC1 F
References (continued)
voltage Inrush Sealed circuit
Uc
V Ω Ω H kg
48 1.9 33.5 0.19 E7 LX1 FK048 1.150
813186
110/120 9.55 260 1.25 F7 LX1 FK110 1.150

115 9.55 260 1.25 FE7 LX1 FK110 1.150
120/127 11.5 315 1.5 G7 LX1 FK127 1.150
200/208 29 735 3.75 L7 LX1 FK200 1.150
220 35.5 915 4.55 M7 LX1 FK220 1.150
230 35.5 915 4.55 P7 LX1 FK220 1.150
240 44.5 1160 5.75 U7 LX1 FK240 1.150
265/277 56.5 1490 7.3 W7 LX1 FK280 1.150
380 112 2980 14.7 Q7 LX1 FK380 1.150
LX1 FKppp 400 112 2980 14.7 V7 LX1 FK380 1.150
415 143 3730 18.4 N7 LX1 FK415 1.150
440 143 3730 18.4 R7 LX1 FK415 1.150
500 172 4590 22.8 S7 LX1 FK500 1.150
550/600 232 5660 23.9 X7 LX1 FK600 1.150
1000 679 16 960 72 – LX1 FK1000 1.150
Specifications
Average consumption at 20 °C for 50 or 60 Hz, and cos ϕ = 0.9:
- inrush: 1050…1150 VA,
5 Operating time at Uc: closing = 40…75 ms, opening = 100…170 ms.
48 1.1 17.1 0.09 E7 LX1 FL048 1.500
813187
110/120 6.45 165 1.85 F7 LX1 FL110 1.500

115 6.45 165 1.85 FE7 LX1 FL110 1.500
127 8.1 205 1.05 G7 LX1 FL127 1.500
200/208 20.5 605 2.65 L7 LX1 FL200 1.500
220 25.5 730 3.35 M7 LX1 FL220 1.500
230 25.5 730 3.35 P7 LX1 FL220 1.500
240 25.5 730 3.35 U7 LX1 FL220 1.500
265/277 31 900 4.1 W7 LX1 FL260 1.500
LX1 FLppp 380 78 2360 10.5 Q7 LX1 FL380 1.500
400 78 2360 10.5 V7 LX1 FL380 1.500
415 96 2960 13 N7 LX1 FL415 1.500
440 96 2960 13 R7 LX1 FL415 1.500
500 120 3660 16.5 S7 LX1 FL500 1.500
550/600 155 4560 19.5 X7 LX1 FL600 1.500
1000 474 12 880 56.2 – LX1 FL1000 1.500
Specifications
Average consumption at 20 °C for 50 or 60 Hz, cos ϕ = 0.9:
- inrush: 1500…1730 VA,
Operating cycles/hour (θ y 55 °C): 1200.
Schemes :
page 5/133
5/120
TeSys contactors 5
TeSys LC1 F
Uc
V Ω Ω H kg
110/120 4.95 (2) 230 (2) 0.21 F7 LX1 FX110 (1) 3.000
115 4.95 (2) 230 (2) 0.21 FE7 LX1 FX110 (1) 3.000
127 6.1 (2) 280 (2) 0.26 G7 LX1 FX127 (1) 3.000
200/208 15.5 (2) 750 (2) 0.66 L7 LX1 FX200 (1) 3.000
220 19.5 (2) 920 (2) 0.82 M7 LX1 FX220 (1) 3.000
230 19.5 (2) 920 (2) 0.82 P7 LX1 FX220 (1) 3.000
240 19.5 (2) 920 (2) 0.82 U7 LX1 FX220 (1) 3.000
265/277 29.8 (2) 1330 (2) 1.25 W7 LX1 FX280 (1) 3.000
380 60.9 (2) 2780 (2) 2.3 Q7 LX1 FX380 (1) 3.000
400 60.9 (2) 2780 (2) 2.3 V7 LX1 FX380 (1) 3.000
415/480 74.3 (2) 3340 (2) 2.8 N7 LX1 FX415 (1) 3.000
440 74.3 (2) 3340 (2) 2.8 R7 LX1 FX415 (1) 3.000
500 92 (2) 4180 (2) 3.5 S7 LX1 FX500 (1) 3.000
Specifications
- inrush: 1900…2300 VA,
Heat dissipation: 2 x 22 W.
Control circuit Voltage Rectifier Coil Weight
voltage
Uc
code Reference Reference
(3)
5
V kg
110/127 FE7 DR5 TE4U LX4 F8FW 1.650
220/240 P7 DR5 TE4U LX4 F8MW 1.650
380/440 V7 DR5 TE4S LX4 F8QW 1.650
Specifications
- inrush: 1700 VA,
- sealed: 12 VA.
(1) Reference of set of 2 identical coils, to be connected in series.
(2) Value for the 2 coils in series.
(3) Rectifier to be ordered separately: 0.100 kg.
Schemes :
page 5/133
5/121
References 5
TeSys contactors 5
TeSys LC1 F
for specific applications (1)
References
High tolerance to inrush voltage drops.
Immune to micro-breaks (mains supply or contact chain).
Uc
V Ω Ω H kg
48 3.03 80.2 0.3 E7 LX9 FF048 0.430
813188
110 14.8 579 2.08 F7 LX9 FF110 0.430

115 14.8 579 2.08 FE7 LX9 FF110 0.430
120/127 19 746 2.65 G7 LX9 FF127 0.430
208 45 1788 5.95 L7 LX9 FF200 0.430
220 59.4 2190 7.7 M7 LX9 FF220 0.430
230 59.4 2190 7.7 P7 LX9 FF220 0.430
240 73.5 2750 9.68 U7 LX9 FF240 0.430
380 173 6540 23 Q7 LX9 FF380 0.430
LX9 FFppp 400 173 6540 23 V7 LX9 FF380 0.430
415 218 8460 30 N7 LX9 FF415 0.430
440 218 8460 30 R7 LX9 FF415 0.430
500 262 10 300 36 S7 LX9 FF500 0.430
Specifications
Average consumption at 20 °C: inrush: 690…855 VA, sealed: 6.6…8.1 VA.
Heat dissipation: 5.9…7.2 W.
Operating cycles/hour (θ y 55 °C): < 2400.
Operating time at Uc: closing = 35 ms, opening = 130 ms.
48 2.2 60 0.23 E7 LX9 FG048 0.550
813189
5 110 10.4 411 1.46 F7 LX9 FG110 0.550

115 10.4 411 1.46 FE7 LX9 FG110 0.550
120/127 13 520 1.85 G7 LX9 FG127 0.550
208 33 1339 4.9 L7 LX9 FG200 0.550
220 42.1 1680 5.84 M7 LX9 FG220 0.550
230 42.1 1680 5.84 P7 LX9 FG220 0.550
240 50.6 2060 7.22 U7 LX9 FG240 0.550
380 128 4730 16.4 Q7 LX9 FG380 0.550
LX9 FGppp
400 128 4730 16.4 V7 LX9 FG380 0.550
415 157 5930 20.6 N7 LX9 FG415 0.550
440 157 5930 20.6 R7 LX9 FG415 0.550
500 194 7550 26.3 S7 LX9 FG500 0.550
Specifications
Average consumption at 20 °C: inrush: 950…1180 VA, sealed: 8.9…10.9 VA.
Heat dissipation: 8…9.8 W.
48 2.96 72 (2) – LX9 FH0482 0.750
110/115 18.7 415 (2) – LX9 FH1102 0.750
120/127 22.9 156 (2) – LX9 FH1272 0.750
220/230 71.6 1621 (2) – LX9 FH2202 0.750
240 88 1968 (2) – LX9 FH2402 0.750
380/415 222 5075 (2) – LX9 FH3802 0.750
500 345 7990 (2) – LX9 FH5002 0.750
Specifications
Average consumption at 20 °C: inrush: 560…660 VA, sealed: 8…10 VA.
(1) Application examples: hoisting (inching, high operating rates), Main-Standby (unstable mains
supplies). These coils are particularly suited for use at higher operating temperatures
(mounting in non-ventilated compartments, enclosures, etc.).
Schemes :
page 5/133
5/122
TeSys contactors 5
TeSys LC1 F
for specific applications
Coils with short operating times (at Uc) :
- closing: 60 ms,
- opening: 50 ms (a side); 20 ms (c side).
Coils for high operating rates (θ y 70 °C):

- 3600 operating cycles/hour,
- 1800 for LC1 F630.
Coils with low inrush consumption.

Control Average resistance Inductance Rectifier Coil Reference Weight
circuit at 20 °C ± 10 % of closed Reference
voltage Inrush Sealed circuit (1)
Uc
V Ω Ω H kg
813190

48 4.03 43 0.22 DR5 TF4V LX9 FJ917 0.970
110 25.7 246 1.3 DR5 TE4U LX9 FJ925 0.970
127 32.3 302 1.7 DR5 TE4U LX9 FJ926 0.970
220/230 99.5 919 5 DR5 TE4U LX9 FJ931 0.970
380/415 311 3011 15 DR5 TE4S LX9 FJ936 0.970
440 386 3690 19 DR5 TE4S LX9 FJ937 0.970
500 478 4380 23 DR5 TE4S LX9 FJ938 0.970
Specifications
LX9 FJppp
Average consumption:
- inrush: 500 VA,
- sealed: 23 VA.
813191
48 3.73 30.7 0.18 DR5 TF4V LX9 FK917 1.080

110 24 204 1.1 DR5 TE4U LX9 FK925 1.080
127 29.8 250 1.4 DR5 TE4U LX9 FK926 1.080
220/230 89.9 770 4 DR5 TE4U LX9 FK931 1.080 5
380/415 274 2075 12 DR5 TE4S LX9 FK936 1.080
440 361 3060 16 DR5 TE4S LX9 FK937 1.080
500 448 3750 19 DR5 TE4S LX9 FK938 1.080
Specifications
LX9 FKppp - inrush: 550 VA,
- sealed: 31 VA.
Heat dissipation: 15…18.3 W.
813191
48 2.81 20.8 0.17 DR5 TF4V LX9 FL917 1.450

110 13.5 114 0.77 DR5 TE4U LX9 FL924 1.450
127 20.8 167 1.2 DR5 TE4U LX9 FL926 1.450
220 52 425 2.9 DR5 TE4U LX9 FL930 1.450
220/240 64.5 518 3.6 DR5 TE4U LX9 FL931 1.450
380/400 163 1360 8.8 DR5 TE4S LX9 FL935 1.450
415/440 204 1670 11 DR5 TE4S LX9 FL936 1.450
500 312 2510 17 DR5 TE4S LX9 FL938 1.450
Specifications
LX9 FLppp Average consumption:
- inrush: 830 VA,
- sealed: 47 VA.
(1) Rectifier to be ordered separately, weight of rectifier: 0.100 kg.
Schemes :
page 5/133
5/123
References 5
TeSys contactors 5
TeSys LC1 F
d.c. supply coils
References
Uc
V Ω Ω H kg
24 1.12 177 11 BD LX4 FF024 0.430
813193
48 4.52 715 42.7 ED LX4 FF048 0.430

110 21.7 2940 179 FD LX4 FF110 0.430
125 26.8 3560 223 GD LX4 FF125 0.430
220/230 84 11 100 704 MD LX4 FF220 0.430
250 105 13 000 868 UD LX4 FF250 0.430
440/460 301 48 200 4000 RD LX4 FF440 0.430
Specifications
LX4 FFppp - inrush: 543…665 W,
- sealed: 3.94…4.83 W.
24 0.79 169 14.9 BD LX4 FG024 0.550
48 3.2 662 55.3 ED LX4 FG048 0.550
110 14.9 2810 241 FD LX4 FG110 0.550
125 19 3320 289 GD LX4 FG125 0.550
220/230 57.7 10 200 890 MD LX4 FG220 0.550
250 76 12 400 1140 UD LX4 FG250 0.550
440/460 223 39 700 4210 RD LX4 FG440 0.550
Specifications
5 Average consumption:
- inrush: 737…902 W,
- sealed: 4.13…5.07 W.
24 0.9 192 26.3 BD LX4 FH024 0.740
813192
48 3.49 707 92.9 ED LX4 FH048 0.740

110 16.8 3180 424 FD LX4 FH110 0.740
125 20.8 3840 530 GD LX4 FH125 0.740
220/230 65.7 11 500 1590 MD LX4 FH220 0.740
250 84 13 900 1910 UD LX4 FH250 0.740
440/460 255 44 000 7570 RD LX4 FH440 0.740
Specifications
LX4 FHppp - inrush: 655…803 W.
- sealed: 3.68…4.53 W.
48 2.5 558 56 ED LX4 FJ048 0.970
110 12.7 2660 270 FD LX4 FJ110 0.970
125 15.8 3130 330 GD LX4 FJ125 0.970
220 47 8820 910 MD LX4 FJ220 0.970
250 61 10 500 1200 UD LX4 FJ250 0.970
440 236 33 750 4435 RD LX4 FJ440 0.970
Specifications
- inrush: 920…1140 W,
- sealed: 4…7.5 W.
Schemes :
page 5/133
5/124
TeSys contactors 5
TeSys LC1 F
d.c. supply coils
Uc
V Ω Ω H kg
813194
48 2.35 515 67 ED LX4 FK048 1.080

110 11.5 2450 280 FD LX4 FK110 1.080
125 15 2930 400 GD LX4 FK125 1.080
220 44 8150 1080 MD LX4 FK220 1.080
250 56 9650 1350 UD LX4 FK250 1.080
440 225 31 300 5270 RD LX4 FK440 1.080
Specifications
LX4 FKppp - inrush: 990…1220 W,
- sealed: 4.54…8 W,
48 1.7 353 40.5 ED LX4 FL048 1.450
110 8.1 1680 180 FD LX4 FL110 1.450
125 10 2110 230 GD LX4 FL125 1.450
220 31 5160 650 MD LX4 FL220 1.450
250 38 6080 815 UD LX4 FL250 1.450
440 152 23 120 2910 RD LX4 FL440 1.450
Specifications
- inrush: 1420…1920 W,
- sealed: 6.5…12.5 W.
5
110 6.1 (2) 280 (2) 0.26 FD LX4 FX110 (1) 3.000
125 7.7 (2) 410 (2) 0.33 GD LX4 FX125 (1) 3.000
220 24.6 (2) 1100 (2) 1 MD LX4 FX220 (1) 3.000
250 29.8 (2) 1330 (2) 1.25 UD LX4 FX250 (1) 3.000
440 92 (2) 4180 (2) 3.5 RD LX4 FX440 (1) 3.000
Specifications
- inrush: 1960…2420 W,
- sealed: 42…52 W.
110/120 – – – FW LX4 F8FW 1.650
220/240 – – – MW LX4 F8MW 1.650
380/400 – – – QW LX4 F8QW 1.650
Specifications
(1) Reference of set of 2 identical coils, to be connected in series.
(2) Value for the 2 coils in series.
Schemes :
page 5/133
5/125
References 5
TeSys contactors 5
TeSys LC1 F
d.c. supply coils
References
Coils with short operating times (at Uc):
- closing: 60 ms,
- opening: 20 ms.
Coils for high operating rates (θ y 70 °C):

- 3600 operating cycles/hour,
- 1800 for LC1 F630.
Coils with low inrush consumption.

Control Average resistance Induc- Resistor (1) Coil
circuit at 20 °C ± 10 % tance of Qty Reference Reference Weight
voltage closed required
Inrush Sealed
Uc circuit
V Ω Ω H kg
813194
48 5.11 99 0.27 1 DR2 SC0047 LX9 FJ918 0.970

110 32.3 632 1.7 1 DR2 SC0330 LX9 FJ926 0.970
125 39.4 760 2 1 DR2 SC0390 LX9 FJ927 0.970
220 123 2320 6.1 1 DR2 SC1200 LX9 FJ932 0.970
440/460 478 9080 23 1 DR2 SC4700 LX9 FJ938 0.970
Specifications
- inrush: 430 W,
- sealed: 22 W.
LX9 FJppp
813196
48 4.67 76.7 0.22 1 DR2 SC0039 LX9 FK918 1.080

110 29.8 470 1.4 1 DR2 SC0220 LX9 FK926 1.080
125 37.4 637 1.7 1 DR2 SC0330 LX9 FK927 1.080
220 115 1935 5.1 1 DR2 SC1000 LX9 FK932 1.080
440/460 448 7050 19 1 DR2 SC3300 LX9 FK938 1.080
5 Specifications
- inrush: 470 W,
- sealed: 29 W.
LX9 FKppp
813195
48 3.43 52.9 0.20 2 DR2 SC0047 LX9 FL918 1.450

110 17.2 272 0.98 2 DR2 SC0270 LX9 FL925 1.450
125 20.8 333 1.2 2 DR2 SC0330 LX9 FL926 1.450
220 64.5 1018 3.6 2 DR2 SC1000 LX9 FL931 1.450
440/460 260 4010 14 2 DR2 SC3900 LX9 FL937 1.450
Specifications
- inrush: 733 W,
- sealed: 48 W.
LX9 FLppp
(1) Resistor to be ordered separately, weight of resistor: 0.030 kg.
Schemes :
page 5/133
5/126
TeSys contactors 5
TeSys LC1 F
Wide range d.c. supply coils
Wide range coils: 0.7…1.25 Uc.
Operating cycles/hour: y 60 (1).
Ambient temperature (operation): - 55 to + 70 °C.
Control circuit Average resistance Inductance Reference Weight
voltage at 20 °C ± 10 % of closed
Uc Inrush Sealed circuit
V Ω Ω H kg
813198
24 0.71 120 7.4 LX4 FF020 0.430

48 2.86 392 27 LX4 FF040 0.430
72 7.05 1055 66 LX4 FF060 0.430
110 13.2 1970 121 LX4 FF090 0.430
125 16.9 2340 149 LX4 FF100 0.430
Specifications
LX4 FFppp - inrush: 415…1300 W,
- sealed: 3…9 W.
24 0.52 112 9.3 LX4 FG020 0.550
48 2 359 34.4 LX4 FG040 0.550
72 5.07 984 85 LX4 FG060 0.550
110 9.66 1840 157 LX4 FG090 0.550
125 12 2230 196 LX4 FG100 0.550
Specifications
- inrush: 580…1820 W,
- sealed: 3.1…9.5 W.
813197
24 0.58 129 17.3 LX4 FH020 0.740

48
72
2.19
5.58
400
1110
59.5
149
LX4 FH040
LX4 FH060
0.740
0.740
5
110 11 2120 287 LX4 FH090 0.740
125 13.8 2520 353 LX4 FH100 0.740
Specifications
- inrush: 515…1600 W,
LX4 FHppp - sealed: 2.7…8.5 W.
Opera- Average Induc- Coil Reduction of Reference Weight
tional resistance tance consumption of the
voltage at 20 °C of Resistors in parallel assembly (2)
± 10 % closed Reference No. Ω Reference
circuit
V Ω H kg
24 1.05 0.049 LX2 FJW11 3 56 DR2 SC0056 LX5 FJW11 0.970
48 4.8 0.22 LX2 FJW18 3 220 DR2 SC0220 LX5 FJW18 0.970
72 9.6 0.44 LX2 FJW21 3 470 DR2 SC0470 LX5 FJW21 0.970
Specifications
- inrush: 290…860 W,
- sealed: 16…47 W.
(1) The mechanical durability of the contactor is limited to 1 million operating cycles.
(2) The set comprises: 1 coil LX2 FJ and 3 resistors DR2 SC.
Schemes :
page 5/133
5/127
Dimensions 5
TeSys contactors 5
TeSys LC1 F
LC1 F115 to F330
F115 M6x25
S S1 F150 M8x25
(1) F185 M8x25
F225 M10x35
F265 M10x35
=
F330 M10x35
X1
=
b2
b1
J1
M
b
J
X1 (mm) = Minimum electrical clearance according
to operating voltage and breaking capacity
X1
=
LC1 200…500 V 600…1000 V
= G1 = F115, F150 10 15
=
Z G Y F185 10 15
F225, F265 10 15
L Q P P Q1 F330 10 15
c a f (1) Power terminal protection shroud (see page
5/114).
LC1 a b b1 b2 c f G G1 J J1 L M P Q Q1 S S1 Y Z
F115 3P 163.5 162 137 265 171 131 106 80 106 120 107 147 37 29.5 60 20 26 44 13.5
4P 200.5 162 137 265 171 131 143 80 106 120 107 147 37 29.5 60 20 26 44 13.5
F150 3P 163.5 170 137 301 171 131 106 80 106 120 107 150 40 26 57.5 20 34 44 13.5
4P 200.5 170 137 301 171 131 143 80 106 120 107 150 40 26 55.5 20 34 44 13.5
F185 3P 168.5 174 137 305 181 130 111 80 106 120 113.5 154 40 29 59.5 20 34 44 13.5
4P 208.5 174 137 305 181 130 151 80 106 120 113.5 154 40 29 59.5 20 34 44 13.5
5 F225 3P
4P
168.5 197
208.5 197
137
137
364
364
181
181
130
130
111
151
80
80
106
106
120
120
113.5
113.5
172
172
48
48
21
17
51.5
47.5
25
25
44.5
44.5
44
44
13.5
13.5
F265 3P 201.5 203 145 375 213 147 142 96 106 120 141 178 48 39 66.5 25 44.5 38 21.5
4P 244.5 203 145 375 213 147 190 96 106 120 141 178 48 34 66.5 25 44.5 38 21.5
F330 3P 213 206 145 375 219 147 154.5 96 106 120 145 181 48 43 74 25 44.5 38 20.5
4P 261 206 145 375 219 147 202.5 96 106 120 145 181 48 43 74 25 44.5 38 20.5
f = minimum distance required for coil removal.
LC1 F400 and F500
56 S 44,5
(1) 6xM10x35
=
X1
=
=
209
120
180
b2
M
b
X1 (mm) = Minimum electrical clearance

=
X1
according to operating voltage and breaking

G
capacity.
=
23,5 G1 J LC1 200…500 V 600…1000 V

L Q P P Q1 F400 15 20
c a f F500 15 20
(1) Power terminal protection shroud (see page
5/114).
LC1 a b b2 c f G supplied G min. G max. G1 supplied G1 min G1 max. J L M P Q Q1 S

F400 2P 213 206 375 219 146 80 66 102 170 156 192 19.5 145 181 48 69 96 25
3P 213 206 375 219 146 80 66 102 170 156 192 19.5 145 181 48 43 74 25
4P 261 206 375 219 146 80 66 150 170 156 240 67.5 145 181 48 43 74 25
F500 2P 233 238 400 232 150 80 66 120 170 156 210 39.5 146 208 55 76 102 30
3P 233 238 400 232 150 80 66 120 170 156 210 39.5 146 208 55 46 77 30
4P 288 238 400 232 150 140 66 175 230 156 265 34.5 146 208 55 46 77 30
f = minimum distance required for coil removal.

5/128
TeSys contactors 5
TeSys LC1 F
LC1 F630 and F800
72 40 64
6xM12x45
(1)
=
X1
=
280
304
464
264
180
X1
=
60,5 G J1
=
155 Q 80 80 Q1 181 (2)

197 a
255
X1 (mm) = Minimum electrical clearance according to operating

voltage and breaking capacity.
LC1 a G supplied G min. G max. J1 Q Q1 Voltage 200…500 V 690…1000 V 200…690 V 1000 V
F630 2P 309 180 100 195 68.5 102 127 LC1 F630 20 30 – –
F630. F800 3P 309 180 100 195 68.5 60 89 LC1 F800 – – 10 20
F630 4P 389 240 150 275 68.5 60 89 (1) Power terminal protection shroud (see page 5/114).
(2) Minimum distance required for coil removal.
LC1 F780
60 12xM12x45 = 26 =
5
26
=
X1
22
348
400
280
434
X1
165 191 160 160 191

255 183 (1) 3P=702, 4P=862 183 (1)
X1 (mm) = Minimum electrical clearance according to operating
Voltage 200…500 V 690…1000 V
(1) Minimum distance required for removal of each coil. X1 (mm) 30 35
Fixing centres of LC1 F7804 Fixing centres of LC1 F780
127
127
180
180
127
127
90 240 190 240 102 90 240 240 132

5/129
Dimensions 5
TeSys contactors 5
TeSys LC1 F
Accessories
Right-angled connectors LA9 Fp981 (set of 3) for rear connection
H
b1
b
LA9 FF981 FG981 FJ981 FK981 FL981
a a 15 20 25 30 40
b 18 23 29 35 48
b1 3 3 4 5 8
c 42 45 55 52 86
c
G 24 26 32.5 26 45
G
H 10.5 13 16.5 20 28
Ø 6.5 9 11 11 13
Right-angled connectors LA9 Fp979 (set of 3) for side connection

b1
H
b
a LA9 FF979 FG979 FJ979 FK979 FL979

a 15 20 25 30 40
b 54 58 63.5 68 117
b1 5 5 6 6 10
G
c 80 92 120 120 130

c
G 24 28 37 37 37.5
G
G1 20 22 29 29 35
5 H 36 39 41 42 76
G1
Ø 6.5 9 11 11 13
Right-angled connectors LA9 Fp980, with large surface area (set of 3)
c a LA9 FF980 FG980 FJ980 FK980 FL980

c1 = G = a 35 40 50 60 100
b 70.5 82.5 98.5 114 154
H1
b1 40 45 55 65 85
c 29 29 33 33 43
b1
H
c1 3 3 5 5 10
H2
G 18 20 25 29 53
b
(1) H 18 20 22 26 40
H1 10 12 14 17 20
H2 60.5 72.5 84.5 97 132
Ø 6.5 9 11 11 13
(1) Ø 7 x 10 Ø 9 x 12 Ø 11 x 14 Ø 12.5 x 15 Ø 12.5 x 15
References :
page 5/113
5/130
TeSys contactors 5
TeSys LC1 F
Accessories
Paralleling links (set of 4)

LA9 FF602, FG602, FH602
a
c = =
H1
b1
H
b
LA9 FF602 FG602 FH602 FK602 FL602

LA9 FK602, FL602 a 25 30 40 50 60
b 45 55 60 85 100
a
b1 30 35 40 55 65
c = G =
c 4 5 8 10 10
G – – – 22 26
H2 H1
H 37.5 45 52.5 70 85
b1
H1 12.5 15 15 14 17
H
b
H2 – – – 22 26
Ø1 6.5 9 11 11 13
Ø2 11 11 13 11 14
Links for “star” connection of 3 poles

LA9 Fp601
LA9 FF601 FG601 FH601 FK601 FL601
c a a 69 100 121 140 200
b 15 20 20 30 40
5
= =
c 3 3 5 5 8
b
Ø 6.5 x 8.5 8.5 x 10.5 10.5 x 13 11 13
References :
page 5/112
5/131
Mounting 5
TeSys contactors 5
TeSys LC1 F
LC1 F115 to F330

On panel On pre-slotted mounting plate AM1 PA, PB, PC On rails DZ5 MB on 120 mm centres
(1)
G DZ5 MF5
110
120
110
110
=
AF1 EA6 G
= =
J G J1
c c c 15
LC1 F115 F185 F265 F330 LC1 F115 F185 F265 F330 LC1 F115 F185 F265 F330
F150 F225 F150 F225 F150 F225
c (2) 3P 171 181 213 219 c (2) 3P 171 181 213 219 c (2) 3P 171 181 213 219
4P 171 181 213 219 4P 171 181 213 219 4P 171 181 213 219
G 3P 80 80 96 96 G 3P 80 80 96 96 G 3P 80 80 96 96
4P 80 80 96 96 4P 80 80 96 96 4P 80 80 96 96
J 3P 26.5 29 44.5 44.5
4P 45 49 68.5 68.5
J1 3P 57 59.5 61.5 61.5
4P 75.5 79.5 85.5 85.5
(1) Power terminal protection shroud (see page 5/114).
(2) See X1 (minimum electrical clearance) pages 5/128 and 5/129.
5 LC1 F LC1 F115 to F330 LC1 F400 to F800
On 2 notched rails AM1 ECppp
AM1 EC200 AF1 CD081 + AF1 VC820 (2)

AF1 CD101+
AF1 VC10
(1) AF1 CD061+ AF1 CD061 AF1 VA618 AF1 CD081+
AF1 VA618 M6 AF1 VC820
AF1 VA618
M6 LA9 F100
M6
110
180
120
= =
35
G G G1
c 25
AM1 EC200 AM1 EC200 G2
G3
LC1 F115, F150 F185, F225 F265 F330 F400 F500 F630 F780 F800
c 3P 165 (3) 176 207 213 219 232 255 255 255
4P 165 (3) 176 207 213 219 232 255 255 –
G (M6) 3P 80 80 96 96 – – – – –
4P 80 80 96 96 – – – – –
G1 (∅ 8.5) 3P – – – – 80 80 – – –
4P – – – – 80 140 – – –
G2 (∅ 10.5) 3P – – – – – – 180 See page 180
4P – – – – – – 240 5/129 –
(1) AF1 CDppp and AF1 VA ppp.
(2) This AM1 EC200 upright is required when G2 or G3 is greater than 700 mm (please consult your Regional Sales Office).
(3) + 6 mm with time-delay block on LC1 F.

5/132
Schemes 5
TeSys contactors 5
TeSys LC1 F
2, 3 and 4-pole contactors

LC1 F115 to F630 (coil LX1 F a) LC1 F115 to F630 (coil LX4 F c) LC1 F780 a or c
LC1 F115 to F265 (coil LX9 F a)
LC1 F800 (coil LX8 F a/ c)
3/L2
3/L2
3/L2
5/L3
7/L4
5/L3
7/L4
5/L3
7/L4
1/L1
1/L1
1/L1
A2
A2
A2
03
A1
A1
04
T3/6
T4/8
T3/6
T4/8
T3/6
T4/8
T1/2
T2/4
T1/2
T2/4
T1/2
T2/4
A1
1 N/O LAD N10 (1) 1 N/C LAD N10 (1) 1 N/O + 1 N/C LAD N11 2 N/O LAD N20 2 N/C LAD N02 2 N/O + 2 N/C LAD N22
53/NO
53/NO
83/NO
53/NO
63/NO
43/NO
61/NC
51/NC
61/NC
51/NC
71/NC
41/NC
(92)
(93) (94)
(91)
54
84
54
64
62
52
62
62
72
54
44
42
1 N/O + 3 N/C LAD N13 4 N/O LAD N40 4 N/C LAD N04 2 N/O + 2 N/C (2) LAD C22 3 N/O + 1 N/C LAD N31
53/NO
83/NO
53/NO
53/NO
73/NO
53/NO
63/NO
73/NO
83/NO
87/NO
61/NC
75/NC
61/NC
71/NC
81/NC
51/NC
61/NC
71/NC
81/NC
61/NC
54
54
54
74
54
64
74
84
62
76
88
62
72
82
52
62
72
82
62
84
(1) Items in brackets: see "TeSys d contactors". (2) 1 N/O + 1 N/C make before break.
Instantaneous auxiliary contacts with terminal referencing conforming to standard EN 50012 (References: pages 5/110 and 5/111)
1 N/O + 1 N/C 1 N/O + 1 N/C 2 N/O + 2 N/C 2 N/O + 2 N/C
LAD N11P LAD N11G LAD N22P LAD N22G
13/NO
43/NO
13/NO
43/NO
53/NO
63/NO
21/NC
31/NC
21/NC
31/NC
31/NC
41/NC
5
14
22
32
44
14
22
32
44
32
42
54
64
Dust and damp protected instantaneous auxiliary contacts

2 N/O (24-50 V) 2 N/O (5-24 V) 2 N/O protected (24-50 V) + 2 N/O standard 2 N/O protected (24-50 V) + 1 N/O + 1 N/C standard
LA1 DX20 LA1 DY20 LA1 DZ40 LA1 DZ31
53/NO
63/NO
53/NO
63/NO
53/NO
83/NO
53/NO
83/NO
63/NO
73/NO
73/NO
61/NC
62
64
74
74
54
64
54
64
54
84
54
84
Time delay auxiliary contacts

On-delay 1 N/O + 1 N/C LAD Tp Off-delay 1 N/O + 1 N/C LAD Rp On-delay 1 N/C + 1 N/O break before make LAD Sp
57/NO
67/NO
67/NO
65/NC
55/NC
55/N
56
58
68
68
66
Standard a coils Standard c coils

LX1 FF, FG, FJ…FL LX1 FH0202…FH0362 LX1 FX LX4 FF, FG, FH, FJ, FK, FL, FX (1), LX4 F8p
LX1 FH0422…FH3802 LX1 FH4402…FH10002 Rectifier supplied and fixed on the contactor
LX1 F8p
03 A1 A2 A1 A2 A1 A2
+ –
A1 A2 A1 A2 A1 A2 A1 A2 A1 A2
(1) 2 coils in series.

Special a coils
LX9 FF, FG LX9 FHppp2 LX9 FJ, FK, FL LX4 F8p
A1 A2 A1 B1 A2/B2 (1)
+
– +
(2) (1) Breaking on a side
A1
A1 A2 A1 A2
A2
01
Drop-out time 50 ms.

(2) Breaking on c side
Drop-out time 20 ms.

5/133
Dimensions 5
TeSys contactors 5
Reversing contactors and changeover

contactor pairs LC2 F
Pre-assembled
LC2 F115 to F265 (reverser supplied on 2 bars which can be used for fixing the device)
S
X1
=
110/120
120
b1
M
b
=
X1
L Q1 P P P1 P P Q1 = = = =
c f a f J1 G1 J G1 J1
a2
f - Minimum distance required for coil removal. Bar fixing centres

Vertical: 120 mm
Horizontal: a2 see table
X1 (mm) = Minimum electrical clearance according to operating voltage and breaking capacity.
LC1 200…500 V 660…1000 V
F115, F150 10 15
F185 10 15
F225, F265 10 15
LC2 a a2 b b1 c G1 J J1 L M P P1 Q1 S f Ø
F115 3P 345 317 162 137 171 80 71 57 107 147 37 77 60 20 131 M6
5 F150
4P
3P
419
345
378
317
162
170
137
137
171
171
80
80
108
71
75.5
57
107
107
147
150
37
40
77
71
60
57
20
20
131
131
M6
M8
4P 422 381 170 137 171 80 111 75.5 107 150 40 71 55.5 20 131 M8
F185 3P 357 326 174 137 181 80 78 59.5 113.5 154 40 78 59.5 20 130 M8
4P 437 390 174 137 181 80 118 79.5 113.5 154 40 78 59.5 20 130 M8
F225 3P 357 326 197 137 181 80 78 59.5 113.5 172 48 62 51.5 25 130 M10
4P 437 390 197 137 181 80 118 79.5 113.5 172 48 54 47.5 25 130 M10
F265 3P 425 386 203 145 213 96 109 61.5 141 178 48 100 66.5 25 147 M10
4P 521 464 203 145 213 96 157 85.5 141 178 48 100 66.5 25 147 M10
Selection : References : Schemes :

5/134
TeSys contactors 5

For customer assembly, fixing recommended on AM1 EC uprights, please consult your Regional Sales Office.
2 x LC1 F115 to F330 2 x LC1 F400, F500, F630, F800
P1 (1) P1 (1)
X1
=
=
=
110/120
120 (2)
180
b1
b
b
b
=
=
X1
=
L = = = = J1 G J G J1
c J1 G1 J G1 J1 J3 G1 J2 G1 J3
a a
X1 (mm) = Minimum electrical clearance according to operating voltage and breaking capacity.
LC1 200…500 V 660…1000 V 200…690 V 1000 V
F115, F150 10 15 – –
F185 10 15 – –
F225, F265 10 15 – –
F330 10 15 – –
F400 15 20 – –
F500 15 20 – –
F630 20 30 – –
F800 – – 10 20
2 x LC1
F115 3P
a
345
b
162
b1
137
c
171
G
–
G1
80
J
71
J1
57
J2
–
J3
–
L
107
P1
77
5
4P 419 162 137 171 – 80 108 75.5 – – 107 77
F150 3P 345 170 137 171 – 80 71 57 – – 107 71
4P 422 170 137 171 – 80 111 75.5 – – 107 71
F185 3P 357 174 137 181 – 80 78 59.5 – – 113.5 78
4P 437 174 137 181 – 80 118 79.5 – – 113.5 78
F225 3P 357 197 137 181 – 80 78 59.5 – – 113.5 62
4P 437 197 137 181 – 80 118 79.5 – – 113.5 54
F265 3P 425 203 145 213 – 96 109 61.5 – – 141 100
4P 521 203 145 213 – 96 157 85.5 – – 141 100
F330 3P 447 206 145 219 – 96 124 65.5 – – 145 107
4P 543 206 145 219 – 96 172 89.5 – – 145 107
F400 3P 446 206 209 219 80 170 157 64.5 67 19.5 145 107
4P 542 206 209 219 80 170 157 112.5 67 67.5 145 107
F500 3P 485 238 209 232 80 170 156 84.5 66 39.5 146 112
4P 595 238 209 232 140 230 156 79.5 66 34.5 146 112
F630 3P 636 304 280 255 180 – 139 68.5 – – 155 137
4P 796 304 280 255 240 – 139 88.5 – – 155 137
F800 3P 636 304 280 255 180 – 139 68.5 – – 155 137
(1) Except LC1 F630 and F800 : 4 x Ø 10.5.

(2) Except LC1 F630 and F800.
For other dimensions: see pages 5/128 and 5/129.

5/135
Dimensions 5
TeSys contactors 5

Vertically mounted
For customer assembly, with mechanical interlock (MI) LA9 F, fixing recommended on AM1 EC uprights (please consult your Regional Sales Office).
2 x LC1 identical or different ratings (LC1 F115 to F630 and F800). See pages 5/106 to 5/109
J3 80 12,5 G5 G1 12,5 G5 G1
(5) (5)
(1) (1) (1)
F265 120
F500 180
F330 } 120
F500 180
(3) (6) (6)
120
F330 }
= =
F400
F630
F800
F265
F400
F630
F800
= =
(4)
H
H
H
9
G3 J1
H1
(2) G3(2) J1 G3(2) J1
H1
H1
F330 } 120
F500 180
(1) (3) (6)
(1) (3) (1)
120
120
= = = = = =
F265
F400
F630
F800
(5)
(4)
9
J4 80 J4 80
12,5 G4 G2
J2 J2
J2
(1) Mechanical interlock shaft. (4) 4 x Ø6.5 for LC1 F265. (6) 4 x Ø8.5 for LC1 F400, F500 or
(2) For assembly of contactors of different ratings only. (5) Mechanical interlock guide bracket. 4 x Ø10.5 for LC1 F630 and F800.
(3) 4 x Ø6.5 for LC1 F115 to F225.
Assembly A (7) - Mechanical interlock reference Assembly B (7) - Mechanical interlock reference
G3 3P G3 4P H min. H max. H1 min.H1 max.J1 3P J1 4P G1 3P G1 4P G3 3P G3 4P G5 3P G5 4P H min. H max.
LA9 FF4F 0 0 200 310 80 190 137 155.5 LA9 FH4F 96 96 21 27 60 83 240 380
LA9 FG4F 3 4 210 300 90 180 139.5 159.5 LA9 FJ4F 80 80 45 26 83 83 250 380
LA9 FG4G 0 0 220 310 100 190 139.5 159.5 LA9 FK4F 80 140 45 26 83 83 270 380
5 J2 3P J2 4P J3 3P J3 4P J4 3P J4 4P LA9 FL4F 180 240 35 17 74 74 310 380
LA9 FF4F 137 155.5 48.5 67 48.5 67 LA9 FH4G 96 96 19 23 60 83 250 380
LA9 FG4F 137 155.5 53 73 54 69 LA9 FJ4G 80 80 42 22 83 83 250 380
LA9 FG4G 139.5 159.5 53 73 53 73 LA9 FK4G 80 140 42 22 83 83 270 380
For customer assembly, fixing recommended on AM1 EC uprights, LA9 FL4G 180 240 33 13 74 74 310 380
please consult your Regional Sales Office H1 min.H1 max.J1 3P J1 4P J2 3P J2 4P J4 3P J4 4P
2 x LC1 F780
LA9 FH4F 110 250 157.5 181.5 137 155.5 48.5 67
LA9 FJ4F 80 210 144.5 192.5 137 155.5 48.5 67
LA9 FK4F 100 210 164.5 219.5 137 155.5 48.5 67
X1
LA9 FL4F 140 210 248.5 328.5 137 155.5 48.5 67

LA9 FH4G 120 250 157.5 181.5 139.5 159.5 53 73
180
LA9 FJ4G 90 220 144.5 192.5 139.5 159.5 53 73

LA9 FK4G 110 220 164.5 219.5 139.5 159.5 53 73
LA9 FL4G 150 220 248.5 328.5 139.5 159.5 53 73
Assembly C (7)
G1 3P G1 4P G2 3P G2 4P G3 3P G3 4P G4 3P G4 4P G5 3PG5 4P
LA9 FH4H 96 96 96 96 0 0 60 83 60 83
1034
420
LA9 FJ4H 80 80 96 96 23 0 60 83 83 83
LA9 FK4H 80 140 96 96 23 0 60 83 83 83
LA9 FL4H 180 240 96 96 14 9 (8) 60 83 74 74
LA9 FJ4J 80 80 80 80 0 0 83 83 83 83
LA9 FK4J 80 140 80 80 0 0 83 83 83 83
LA9 FL4J 180 240 80 80 9 (8) 9 (8) 83 83 74 74
180
LA9 FK4K 80 140 80 140 0 0 83 83 83 83

LA9 FL4K 180 240 80 140 9 (8) 9 (8) 83 83 74 74
X1
LA9 FL4L 180 240 180 240 0 0 74 74 74 74

=
H min. H max. H1 min.H1 max.J1 3P J1 4P J2 3P J2 4P

250 191 160 160 191 LA9 FH4H 250 380 130 260 157.5 181.5 157.5 181.5
702(LC1 F780), 862(LC1 F7804) LA9 FJ4H 260 380 110 230 144.5 192.5 157.5 181.5
LA9 FK4H 280 380 130 230 164.5 219.5 157.5 181.5
LA9 FL4H 330 380 170 220 248.5 328.5 157.5 181.5
LA9 FJ4J 260 380 60 200 144.5 192.5 144.5 192.5
LA9 FK4J 280 380 100 200 164.5 219.5 144.5 192.5
LA9 FL4J 325 380 140 195 248.5 329.5 144.5 192.5
X1 and fixings, see page 5/129. LA9 FK4K 300 380 120 200 164.5 329.5 164.5 219.5
(7) Only 3P for F800. LA9 FL4K 345 380 160 195 248.5 328.5 164.5 219.5
(8) In this case, G4 is greater than G5. LA9 FL4L 380 380 200 200 248.5 328.5 248.5 328.5

5/136
Schemes 5
TeSys contactors 5

Reversing contactors for motor control LC2 F

2 x LC1 F 2 x LC1 F
Horizontally mounted Vertically mounted
L1
L2
L3
1/L1
1/L2
1/L3
3
5
1
A1
A2
3
3
5
5
1
1
A1
A1
6
2
4
L3
L2
A2
A2
6
L1
2
5
1
A1
A2
6
2
4
W
U
2/L1
2/L2
Changeover contactor pairs for distribution LC2 F 2/L3

2 x LC1 F 2 x LC1 F
Horizontally mounted Vertically mounted
1/L1
1/L2
1/L3
1N
1N
1/L3
1/L2
1/L1
2/L1
2/L2
2/L3
2N
7
1
A1
3
3
5
7
1
1
A1
A1
A2
8
2
N
A2
A2
L3
5
6
8
2
L2
L1
3
7
1
A1
A2
8
2
4
L1
L2
L3
2/L1
2/L2
2/L3
2N
Electrical interlocking of reversers fitted with mechanical interlock without integral electrical contacts
LA9 F
– KM2 – KM1
A1
A1
– KM1 – KM2
A2
A2

5/137
General 5
TeSys contactors 5
High power changeover contactor pairs

for distribution
General
A changeover contactor pair ensures continuity of operation of an installation and

energy management.
It switches between:
b a power supply source M (main) which normally supplies the installation,
b and a power supply source S (standby) which may be an incoming line from an
additional network or a generating set.
The supply sources may be 3-phase or 3-phase + neutral.
Supply - 3-phase
Main Standby
1/2L1
1/1L1
5/2L3
5/1L3
3/2L2
3/1L2
– KM1 – KM2
6
6
2
W/L3
U/L1
V/L2
Application
5 Supply 3-phase + neutral
Main Standby
1/2L1
1/1L1
3/2L2
7/2N
7/1N
5/2L3
3/1L2
5/1L3
– KM1 – KM2
6
8
2
W/L3
U/L1
V/L2
Application
The 2 contactors must be mechanically and electrically interlocked to prevent any

paralleling, even transitory, of the two supplies.
pages 5/140 and 5/141 page 5/141
5/138
References 5
TeSys contactors 5

for distribution
Changeover contactor pairs for customer assembly: 3-phase

Vertically mounted.
Maximum operational voltage: 1000 V
Utilisation category: AC-1
Maximum temperature in the vicinity of the devices: 40 °C
813221
Maximum operational current Contactors (1) Mechanical

Main Standby Main Standby interlock (2)
3-phase 3-phase Reference Reference Reference
1600 A 1000 A LC1 F780 LC1 F6309 LA9 FX970
1600 A 1600 A LC1 F780 LC1 F780 LA9 FX970
Changeover contactor pairs for customer assembly:

3-phase + neutral
Vertically mounted.
Maximum operational voltage: 1000 V
LA9 FX970 Utilisation category: AC-1
Maximum temperature in the vicinity of the devices: 40 °C
Maximum operational current Contactors (1) Mechanical

Main Standby Main Standby interlock (2)
3-phase + N 3-phase + N Reference Reference Reference
813222
1600 A + 1000 A 1000 A + 1000 A LC1 F78041 LC1 F63049 LA9 FX970 (3)
1600 A + 1000 A 1600 A + 1000 A LC1 F78041 LC1 F78040 LA9 FX970 (3) 5
1600 A + 1600 A 1000 A + 1000 A LC1 F7804 LC1 F63049 LA9 FX971
1600 A + 1600 A 1600 A + 1600 A LC1 F7804 LC1 F7804 LA9 FX971
(1) Coils to be ordered separately, see pages 5/121 to 5/124.

LA9 FX971 connecting links. To order the the 2 auxiliary contact blocks LAD Np1 required to obtain
electrical interlocking between the 2 contactors: see page 5/111.
(3) Neutral connecting link not supplied (to be ordered separately).
pages 5/140 and 5/141 page 5/141
5/139
Dimensions 5
TeSys contactors 5

for distribution
Dimensions
Contactors used to assemble high power changeover contactor pairs LC1 F780: see page 5/129
LC1 F6309 LC1 F63049
Common side view
40 40
180/190
306
306
280
348
202
165 204 160 160 178 204 160 160 160 178
250 183 702 183 183 862 183
(1) (1) (1) (1)
LC1 F78040 LC1 F78041
Common side view
60 60
40 40
180/190
280
434
202
264
264
165 191 160 160 173 178 178 173 160 160 191
250 183 862 183 183 862 183
5 (1) (1) (1) (1)
(1) Minimum distance required for removal of each coil.
3-phase changeover contactor pairs

LC1 F780 + LC1 F780 + LA9 FX970: see page 5/136
LC1 F780 + LC1 F6309 + LA9 FX970
180
969
420
180
250 702
References :
page 5/139
5/140
Dimensions (continued), TeSys contactors 5
schemes 5
for distribution
Dimensions (continued)
3-phase + neutral changeover contactor pairs
LC1 F78041 + LC1 F63049 + LA9 FX970 LC1 F78041 + LC1 F78040 + LA9 FX970
180
180
1034
969
420
420
180
180
250 862
250 862
LC1 F7804 + LC1 F63049 + LA9 FX971 LC1 F7804 + LC1 F7804 + LA9 FX971
5
180
180
1034
969
420
420
180
180
250 862
250 862
Schemes
3-phase changeover contactor pairs 3-phase + neutral changeover contactor pairs
1 1/L1
3 1/L2
5 1/L3
1 1/L1
3 1/L2
5 1/L3
1N
7
A1
A1
A1
A1
A2
A2
A2
A2
6
2
8
2
L3 N
L2 L3
L1 L2
L1
3
5
1
A1
A1
7
1
A1
A1
A2
A2
6
2
A2
A2
2/L3 6
8
2/L1 2
2/L2 4
2/L1
2/L2
2/L3
2N
References :
page 5/139
5/141
References, TeSys contactors 5
dimensions 5
For contactors TeSys LC1 D
References
These devices prevent inadvertent opening of a contactor in the event of a brief volt
drop or momentary supply failure.
Control circuit : d.c. supply

For use with contactor Corresponding delayed opening device
Type (1) Contactor Supply voltage Non- Reference Weight
reference 50/60 Hz adjustable
to be delay time (Tr)
completed
(2)
V s kg
LC1 D09, LC1 DppPD 110…115 1.5…5 LAZ R90F 0.215
LC1 D12, LC1 DppQD 120…127 2.5…5 LAZ R90F 0.215
LC1 D18,
LC1 DppTD 220 4…8 LAZ R90M 0.215
LC1 D25,
LC1 D32 LC1 DppVD 240 5…10 LAZ R90M 0.215
or LC1 DppWD 380 4…8 LAZ R90Q 0.215
LC1 D38 LC1 DppXD 415…440 5.5…13 LAZ R90Q 0.215
LC1 D40, LC1 DppPD 110…115 0.5…1 LAZ R90F 0.215

LC1 D50 LC1 DppQD 120…127 0.5…1.5 LAZ R90F 0.215
LAZ R90F or
LC1 DppTD 220…240 1…2.5 LAZ R90M 0.215
LC1 D65
LC1 DppWD 380 1…2.5 LAZ R90Q 0.215
LC1 DppXD 415…440 1…3 LAZ R90Q 0.215
LC1 D80 LC1 DppPD 110…120 0.4…1 LAZ R90F 0.215

LC1 DppQD 120…127 0.5…1 LAZ R90F 0.215
LC1 DppTD 220 0.5…2 LAZ R90M 0.215
5 LC1 DppVD 240 1…2.5 LAZ R90M 0.215
LC1 DppWD 380 1…2 LAZ R90Q 0.215
LC1 DppXD 415…440 1…2.5 LAZ R90Q 0.215
Add-on blocks for delayed opening devices

Application For use with Operational Non- Reference Weight
delayed voltage adjustable
LAZ R91F opening delay time
device
V s kg
To LAZ R90F 110…127 Tr x 2 LAZ R91F 0.165
double
the delay LAZ R90M 220…240 Tr x 2 LAZ R91M 0.165
time
LAZ R90Q 380…440 Tr x 2 LAZ R91Q 0.165
(1) These contactors can be supplied as standard for this application or can be adapted by
replacing the coil (except for contactors LC1 D09 pppp to LC1 D38pppp on which the coil is
not replaceable).
(2) Reference to be completed : see page 5/58.
Dimensions Schemes
LAZ R9pp LAZ R9pp + LC1 D LAZ R9pp + LC1 F
D+ L+
(LAZ R) (LAZ R)
3
F1 F1
77
3
0 1 0 1
55
A1
A1
108
114
A2
A2
L– L–
(LAZ R) (LAZ R)
Other versions Delayed opening devices for use with other types of contactor.
5/142
References 5
TeSys contactors 5

For contactors TeSys LC1 F
References
These devices prevent inadvertent opening of a contactor in the event of a brief volt
drop or momentary supply failure.
Control circuit : d.c. supply (1)

For use with contactor Corresponding delayed opening device
Type With coil Supply Non- Reference Weight
voltage adjustable
50/60 Hz delay time (Tr)
V s kg
LC1 F115 LX4 FF110 110 2…5 LAZ R90F 0.215
or LX4 FF125 127 2…5 LAZ R90F 0.215
LC1 F150
LX4 FF220 220 2…5 LAZ R90M 0.215
LX4 FF250 240 2…5 LAZ R90M 0.215
LX4 FF375 380…415 2…5 LAZ R90Q 0.215
LX4 FF440 440 2…5 LAZ R90Q 0.215
LC1 F185 LX4 FG110 110 2…5 LAZ R90F 0.215

or LX4 FG125 127 2…5 LAZ R90F 0.215
LC1 F225
LX4 FG220 220 2…5 LAZ R90M 0.215
LX4 FG250 240 2…5 LAZ R90M 0.215
LX4 FG375 380…415 2…5 LAZ R90Q 0.215
LX4 FG440 440 2…5 LAZ R90Q 0.215
LC1 F265 LX4 FH110 110 2…5 LAZ R90F 0.215

or LX4 FH125 127 2…5 LAZ R90F 0.215
LC1 F330
LX4 FH220 220 2…5 LAZ R90M 0.215
LX4 FH250 240 2…5 LAZ R90M 0.215
LX4 FH375 380…415 2…5 LAZ R90Q 0.215
LX4 FH440 440 2…5 LAZ R90Q 0.215 5
LC1 F400 LX4 FJ110 110 1…2 LAZ R90F 0.215
LX4 FJ125 127 1…2 LAZ R90F 0.215
LX4 FJ220 220 1…2 LAZ R90M 0.215
LX4 FJ250 240 1…2 LAZ R90M 0.215
LX4 FJ375 380 1…2 LAZ R90Q 0.215
LX4 FJ400 415 1…2 LAZ R90Q 0.215
LX4 FJ440 440 1…2 LAZ R90Q 0.215
LC1 F500 LX4 FK110 110 1…2 LAZ R90F 0.215

LX4 FK125 127 1…2 LAZ R90F 0.215
LX4 FK220 220 1…2 LAZ R90M 0.215
LX4 FK250 240 1…2 LAZ R90M 0.215
LX4 FK375 380 1…2 LAZ R90Q 0.215
LX4 FK400 415 1…2 LAZ R90Q 0.215
LX4 FK440 440 1…2 LAZ R90Q 0.215
LC1 F630 LX4 FL110 110 1…2 LAZ R90F 0.215

LX4 FL125 127 1…2 LAZ R90F 0.215
LX4 FL220 220 1…2 LAZ R90M 0.215
LX4 FL250 240 1…2 LAZ R90M 0.215
LX4 FL375 380 1…2 LAZ R90Q 0.215
LX4 FL400 415 1…2 LAZ R90Q 0.215
LX4 FL440 440 1…2 LAZ R90Q 0.215
Add-on blocks for delayed opening devices (1)

Application For use with Operational Non- Reference Weight
delayed voltage adjustable
opening device delay time
V s kg
To LAZ R90F 110…127 Tr x 2 LAZ R91F 0.165
double
the delay LAZ R90M 220…240 Tr x 2 LAZ R91M 0.165
time
LAZ R90Q 380…440 Tr x 2 LAZ R91Q 0.165
(1) Dimensions and schemes: see page 5/142.

Other versions Delayed opening devices for use with other types of contactor.
5/143
Characteristics 5
TeSys contactors 5
Contactors TeSys LC1 B
Environment
Contactor type LC1 BL LC1 BM LC1 BP LC1 BR
Rated insulation voltage (Ui) Conforming to V 1000 1000 1000 1000
IEC 60158-1/IEC 60947-4
Conforming to VDE 0110 gr C V 1500 1500 1500 1500
Conforming to standards IEC 60158-1, IEC 60947-4, NF C 63-110,VDE 0660, BS 5424
Product certifications CSA, BV, RINA
Protective treatment Standard version “TC”

Special version “TH”

(for operation at Uc)
Permissible °C - 50…+ 60
Operating positions Without derating ± 30° occasional, in relation to normal vertical mounting plane
Number of poles 1, 2, 3 or 4 1, 2, 3 or 4 1, 2, 3 or 4 1, 2, 3 or 4
Rated operational current (Ie) In AC-3, θ y 55 °C A 750 1000 1500 1800

(Ue y 440 V) In AC-1, θ y 40 °C A 800 1250 2000 2750

Frequency limits Without derating Hz 50/60
(sine wave) Derating coefficient 100 Hz: 0.9 - 150 Hz: 0.8 - 250 Hz: 0.7 - 400 Hz: 0.5
5 Maximum thermal current (Ith) θ y 40 °C

Rated making capacity I rms conforming to
A
A
800
10 000
1250
10 000
2000
15 000
2750
18 000
IEC 60158-1 and 60947-4
Rated breaking capacity I rms up to 440 V A 10 000 10 000 15 000 18 000
conforming to 500 V A 9000 9000 12 000 15 000
IEC 60158-1
660-690 V A 8000 8000 9000 11 000
and 60947-4
1000 V A 4000 4000 5000 6000
Permissible short time rating For 1 s A 9600 9600 12 000 15 000

From cold state, with no current For 5 s A 9600 9600 12 000 15 000
flowing for previous 60 minutes
For 10 s A 7000 8000 9600 12 000
at θ y 40 °C
For 30 s A 4800 5200 6400 8000
For 1 min. A 3500 3800 5200 6300
For 3 min. A 2100 2400 3600 4400
For 10 min. A 1200 1800 2800 3600
Short-circuit protection Motor circuit (type aM) A 800 1200 2 x 800 (1) 2 x 1000 (1)
by fuses With thermal overload relay A 1000 1500 2 x 1000 (1) 2 x 1200 (1)
U y 440 V (type gl)
gl fuses A 800 1200 2 x 1000 (1) 2 x 1200 (1)
Average impedance per pole At Ith and 50 Hz mΩ 0.18 0.18 0.13 0.09
Power dissipated per pole AC-3 W 88 180 290 360

AC-1 W 115 280 520 680
Connection Number of bars 2 2 3 4

Bar mm 50 x 5 80 x 5 100 x5 100 x 5
Bolt diameter mm 4xØ8 4 x Ø 10 4 x Ø 10 4 x Ø 10
Tightening torque Power circuit connections N.m 21 35 35 35

(1) Fuses must not be connected in parallel unless specified by the manufacturer.
Selection : References : Dimensions and schemes :

5/144
Contactors 5

Rated control voltage 50/60 Hz V 110…500 110…500 110…500 110…500
c 1,2 or 3-pole contactors V 48…500 48…500 48…500 48…500
c 4-pole contactors V 48…500 48…500 48…500 60…500
Voltage limits Operation V 0.85…1.1 Uc 0.85…1.1 Uc 0.85…1.1 Uc 0.85…1.1 Ucw

Drop-out V 0.30…0.50 Uc 0.30…0.50 Uc 0.35…0.50 Uc 0.40…0.50 Uc
Maximum consumption a Number of VA Inrush: 620 - sealed: 10

(coil + economy resistor) poles: 1
Number of VA Inrush: 1000 - sealed: 20
poles: 2
poles: 3
poles: 4
c (1) Number of W Inrush: 520 - sealed: 10

poles: 1
Number of W Inrush: 800 - sealed: 20
poles: 2
poles: 3
poles: 4
Operating time (2) "C" ms 100…150 100…150 100…150 100…150

average at Uc “O” breaking on a side ms 50…100 50…100 50…100 50…100
(in milliseconds)
“O” breaking on c side ms 20…40 20…40 20…40 20…40
Note: The arcing time depends on the circuit switched by the poles. For all normal 3-phase
equal to the sum of the opening time and the arcing time. 5
Mechanical durability (at Uc) In millions of operating cycles 1.2 1.2 1.2 1.2
Maximum operating rate in Ambient temperature y 55 °C Op. 120 120 120 120
mechanical operating cycles cycs/h
Characteristics of instantaneous auxiliary contacts ZC4 GMp

Rated thermal current A 20

Conforming to VDE, group C V 750
Short-circuit protection Conforming to A 20

gl type cartridge fuses IEC 60947-1 and VDE 0660
Operational power a supply c supply

V 110/127 220 380 415/440 500 110 220 440 500
1 million operating cycles VA/W 2000 4000 4000 4000 3500 250 250 230 200
Making and breaking capacity VA/W 14 000 23 000 35 000 45 000 35 000 1600 800 400 360
Cabling With cable end mm 2 1 or 2 x 4 mm2 conductors

Without cable end mm 2 1 or 2 x 6 mm2 conductors
(1) The inrush and sealed power values of d.c. electromagnets often require the use of an
intermediate relay for control.

5/145
References 5
Contactors 5
Contactors for motor control in category AC-3, from 750 to 1800 A (a or c )

3-pole contactors
Standard power ratings Rated Instantan. Basic reference, Weight
of 3-phase motors opera- auxiliary to be completed by
50/60 Hz in category AC-3 tional contacts adding the voltage code
current (1)
in AC-3
440V
up to
220 V 380 V 660 V
230 V 400 V 415 V 440 V 500 V 690 V 1000 V
522612
220 400 425 450 500 560 530 750 2 2 LC1 BL33p22 58.00
3 1 LC1 BL33p31 58.00
1 3 LC1 BL33p13 58.00
4 – LC1 BL33p40 58.00
LC1 BP33 280 500 530 560 600 670 530 1000 2 2 LC1 BM33p22 57.00
3 1 LC1 BM33p31 57.00
1 3 LC1 BM33p13 57.00
4 – LC1 BM33p40 57.00
425 750 800 800 700 750 670 1500 2 2 LC1 BP33p22 94.00
3 1 LC1 BP33p31 94.00
1 3 LC1 BP33p13 94.00
4 – LC1 BP33p40 94.00
500 900 900 900 900 900 750 1800 2 2 LC1 BR33p22 129.00
3 1 LC1 BR33p31 129.00
1 3 LC1 BR33p13 129.00
4 – LC1 BR33p40 129.00
5 Contactors for control in category AC-1, from 800 to 2750 A (a or c )
Single, 2, 3 or 4-pole contactors
Maximum Number of poles Instantaneous Basic reference, Weight
operational auxiliary contacts to be completed by
current in AC-1 adding the voltage code
(θ y 40 °C) (1)
A kg
800 1 2 2 LC1 BL31p22 32.00
3 1 LC1 BL31p31 32.00
1 3 LC1 BL31p13 32.00
4 – LC1 BL31p40 32.00
2 2 2 LC1 BL32p22 45.00
3 1 LC1 BL32p31 45.00
1 3 LC1 BL32p13 45.00
4 – LC1 BL32p40 45.00
3 2 2 LC1 BL33p22 58.00
3 1 LC1 BL33p31 58.00
1 3 LC1 BL33p13 58.00
4 – LC1 BL33p40 58.00
4 2 2 LC1 BL34p22 72.00
3 1 LC1 BL34p31 72.00
1 3 LC1 BL34p13 72.00
4 – LC1 BL34p40 72.00
Volts 48 110 125 127 220 230 240 380 400 415 440 500
a 50…400 Hz – F – G M P U Q V N R S
c ED FD GD – MD – – – – – RD –
For voltages other than those indicated above, clearly note down the operational voltage (3 figures) and the type of current
(2 letters: AC or DC). Example: 82 V d.c., the reference becomes LC1 BP33082DC22. For coil characteristics, see pages 5/150
to 5/153.
Selection : Characteristics : Dimensions and schemes :

5/146
Contactors 5
Contactors for control in category AC-1, from 800 to 2750 A (a or c ) (continued)

Single, 2, 3 or 4-pole contactors
Maximum Number of poles Instantaneous Basic reference, Weight
operational auxiliary contacts to be completed by
current in AC-1 adding the voltage code
(θ y 40 °C) (1)
522612
A kg
1250 1 2 2 LC1 BM31p22 31.00
3 1 LC1 BM31p31 31.00
1 3 LC1 BM31p13 31.00
4 – LC1 BM31p40 31.00
2 2 2 LC1 BM32p22 44.00
LC1 BP33 3 1 LC1 BM32p31 44.00
1 3 LC1 BM32p13 44.00
4 – LC1 BM32p40 44.00
3 2 2 LC1 BM33p22 57.00
3 1 LC1 BM33p31 57.00
1 3 LC1 BM33p13 57.00
4 – LC1 BM33p40 57.00
4 2 2 LC1 BM34p22 71.00
3 1 LC1 BM34p31 71.00
1 3 LC1 BM34p13 71.00
4 – LC1 BM34p40 71.00
2000 1 2 2 LC1 BP31p22 41.00

3 1 LC1 BP31p31 41.00
1 3 LC1 BP31p13 41.00
4 – LC1 BP31p40 41.00
2 2
3
2
1
LC1 BP32p22
LC1 BP32p31
65.00
65.00
5
1 3 LC1 BP32p13 65.00
4 – LC1 BP32p40 65.00
3 2 2 LC1 BP33p22 94.00
3 1 LC1 BP33p31 94.00
1 3 LC1 BP33p13 94.00
4 – LC1 BP33p40 94.00
4 2 2 LC1 BP34p22 120.00
3 1 LC1 BP34p31 120.00
1 3 LC1 BP34p13 120.00
4 – LC1 BP34p40 120.00
2750 1 2 2 LC1 BR31p22 52.00

3 1 LC1 BR31p31 52.00
1 3 LC1 BR31p13 52.00
4 – LC1 BR31p40 52.00
2 2 2 LC1 BR32p22 85.00
3 1 LC1 BR32p31 85.00
1 3 LC1 BR32p13 85.00
4 – LC1 BR32p40 85.00
3 2 2 LC1 BR33p22 129.00
3 1 LC1 BR33p31 129.00
1 3 LC1 BR33p13 129.00
4 – LC1 BR33p40 129.00
4 2 2 LC1 BR34p22 160.00
3 1 LC1 BR34p31 160.00
1 3 LC1 BR34p13 160.00
4 – LC1 BR34p40 160.00
(1) See previous page.

5/147
References 5
TeSys contactors 5

813307
Spare parts
Description For contactor Composition Reference Weight
kg
Instantaneous LC1 B 1 N/O ZC4 GM1 0.030
auxiliary contact
blocks 1 N/C ZC4 GM2 0.030
ZC4 GM1 Description For contactor Number of sets Set reference Weight
required per
contactor pole kg
813308
Set of contacts LC1 BL 1 PA1 LB80 0.420

813309
(1 moving contact,
1 fixed contact) LC1 BM 1 PA1 LB80 0.420
LC1 BP 2 PA1 LB80 0.420
LC1 BR 3 PA1 LB80 0.420

PA1 LB80 PA1 LB89
(PA1 LB76 + PA1 LB75) Description For contactor Reference Weight
kg
Moving contact LC1 B PA1 LB75 0.220
813306
only (for 1 finger)

Fixed contact only LC1 B PA1 LB76 0.200
(for 1 finger)
Blow-out horn only LC1 B PA1 LB89 0.120
(for 1 finger)
Arc chamber LC1 BL PA1 LB50 3.700
(for 1 contactor pole)
LC1 BM PA1 LB50 3.700
LC1 BP PA1 PB50 6.200
5 LC1 BR PA1 RB50 8.500
PA1 LB50 Description For contactor Sold in Unit Weight
lots of reference
kg
Bar support LC1 BL to BR 2 LA9 B103 1.620
bracket
for mounting on 120
or 150 mm centres
Assembly of two vertically mounted contactors by the customer

813305

kg
Mechanical LC1 B EZ2 LB0601 1.280
interlock and
locking device
components
Specifications
- Positive mechanical interlock between two vertically mounted contactors of the same or
different ratings.
- Connecting rod with cranks mounted on the right-hand, pole side.
- Vertical fixing centres of the two contactors: 600 mm.
Description Specification Height Sold in Unit Weight

lots of reference
mm kg
Notched 2 mm steel, 1650 4 AM1 EC165 2.460
mounting rails with zinc chromate
used as uprights treatment 1850 4 AM1 EC185 2.760
and as equipment
support
2000 4 AM1 EC200 2.980
1/4 turn sliding M8 – 10 AF1 CD081 0.020

clip nut and
corresponding M8 x 18 – 10 AF1 VC820 0.024
EZ2 LB0601 screw for
assembly of rails
AM1 EC

5/148
Adjustment TeSys contactors 5
characteristics 5
Electromagnet
Electromagnet EB5 KB50 Adjustment of pick-up travel and pull-in travel
Moving E
circuit
e
Coil
Moving
circuit
Return
spring
Poles
Complete pole N/O pole
Fixed
contact
Moving contact
Opening gap adjustment

5
Adjustment of
Pole application force
spring
c or a supply adjustment characteristics with economy resistor (and rectifier on a)

Electromagnet EB5 KB50 EB5 KB50 EB5 KB50 EB5 KB50
Pick-up travel (E) mm 30 30 30 30
Pull-in travel (e) mm 10 10 10 10
Coil WB1 KBppp WB1 KBppp WB1 KBppp WB1 KBppp

Pull-in voltage V 0.75 Uc 0.75 Uc 0.75 Uc 0.75 Uc
Drop-out voltage V 0.3…0.5 Uc 0.3…0.5 Uc 0.3…0.5 Uc 0.3…0.5 Uc
N/O pole 1-pole daN 30 30 30 (1) 30 (2)

Adjustment of
application force (F) 2-pole daN 30 30 30 (1) 30 (2)
on the contact per pole
according to contactor
3-pole daN 30 30 30 (1) 30 (2)
composition
4-pole daN 30 30 30 (1) 30 (2)
(1) Each pole has 2 contacts; the force must be applied evenly to each of these contacts.
(2) Each pole has 3 contacts; the force must be applied evenly to each of these contacts.

5/149
References 5
TeSys contactors 5

Replacement coils and accessories
for single-pole contactors
References
The same coils are used for c or a contactor control supply.
b For d.c. operation, the following must be associated with the coil:
- 1 economy resistor arrangement (resistors + 1 or 2 auxiliary contact(s) or 1 contactor).
b For 50 to 400 Hz a.c. operation, the following must be associated with the coil:
- 1 individual rectifier (to be wired),
- 1 economy resistor arrangement (resistors + auxiliary contact(s) or 1 contactor) wired into the rectified current
side.
Operating range Coil Economy resistor Rectifier Coil (2) Weight

min-max (1) (for a only)
d.c. a.c. Resis- I Economy Contact Reference Reference
tance inrush resistor
at ± 10 % Unit Total Qty Reference
20 °C at Un reference resis-
± 10 % max tance
V V Ω A Ω kg
47-51 – 4.96 10.3 DR2 SC0270 270 1 ZC4 GM2 – WB1 KB155 1.120
522634
52-56 – 5.86 9.5 DR2 SC0330 330 1 ZC4 GM2 – WB1 KB132 1.120
57-64 – 7.2 8.9 DR2 SC0390 390 1 ZC4 GM2 – WB1 KB123 1.120
65-68 – 9.6 7.1 DR2 SC0560 560 1 ZC4 GM2 – WB1 KB133 1.120
69-79 – 11.4 6.9 DR2 SC0680 680 1 ZC4 GM2 – WB1 KB121 1.120
80-87 – 16.3 5.3 DR2 SC0820 820 1 ZC4 GM2 – WB1 KB130 1.120
88-94 – 19.7 4.7 DR2 SC1000 1000 1 ZC4 GM2 – WB1 KB140 1.120
95-108 110-125 25.2 4.3 DR2 SC1200 1200 1 ZC4 GM2 DR5 TE1U WB1 KB134 1.120
WB1 KBppp
109-136 126-155 32.5 4.2 DR2 SC1800 1800 1 ZC4 GM2 DR5 TE1U WB1 KB124 1.120
137-151 156-173 49.7 3 DR2 SC2700 2700 2 ZC4 GM2 DR5 TE1U WB1 KB122 1.120
152-166 174-191 61 2.7 DR2 SC3300 3300 2 ZC4 GM2 DR5 TE1U WB1 KB135 1.120
5 167-189
190-221
192-216
217-256
77.2
94
2.4
2.3
DR2
DR2
SC3900
SC4700
3900
4700
2
2
ZC4 GM2
ZC4 GM2
DR5 TE1U
DR5 TE1U
WB1 KB136
WB1 KB139
1.120
1.120
222-243 257-280 128 1.9 DR2 SC6800 6800 1 LP1 D12004LD DR5 TE1S WB1 KB125 1.120
244-267 281-307 160 1.7 DR2 SC8200 8200 1 LP1 D12004UD DR5 TE1S WB1 KB137 1.120
268-318 308-365 197 1.6 DR2 SC1001 10 000 1 LP1 D12004UD DR5 TE1S WB1 KB126 1.120
319-405 366-463 257 1.6 DR2 SC1201 12 000 1 LP1 D12004TD DR5 TE1S WB1 KB138 1.120
406-446 464-500 408 1.1 (3) DR2 SC1001 20 000 1 LP1 D12004VD DR5 TE1S WB1 KB127 1.120
447-500 – 507 1 (4) DR2 SC1201 24 000 1 LP1 D12004RD – WB1 KB128 1.120
Specifications
b Average coil consumption (low sealed consumption):
- d.c.: inrush 380…520 W, sealed 0.15…0.20 W
- a.c. (with rectifier): inrush 450…620 VA, sealed 0.15…0.20 VA
b Time constant when sealed 25 ms
b Economy resistor consumption: 7…10 W
b Operating cycles/hour at θ y 55 °C: y 120
b Mechanical durability at Uc: 1.2 million operating cycles
b With a.c. operation: good resistance to voltage drop on inrush, non susceptibility to micro-breaks, mains harmonics:
level y 7.
(1) For supply voltages of less than 110 V, beware of voltage drops caused by the inrush current.
(2) Standard coils: “TC” treatment. For hot and humid atmospheres “TH” treatment is available;
add the suffix TH to the coil reference: Example: WB1 KB135 becomes WB1 KB135TH.
(3) 2 resistors in series 2 x 10 000 Ω.
(4) 2 resistors in series: 2 x 12 000 Ω.
5/150
References 5
TeSys contactors 5

for 2-pole contactors
References
side.

d.c. a.c. Resis- I Resistors (2 in series) Contact Reference Reference
tance inrush Unit Total Qty Reference
at ± 10 % reference resis-
20 °C at Un tance
± 10 % max
V V Ω A Ω kg
48-51 – 3.22 15.8 DR2 SC0068 2x68 1 ZC4 GM2 – WB1 KB141 1.120
522634
52-56 – 4.04 13.8 DR2 SC0082 82 + 1 ZC4 GM2 – WB1 KB142 1.120
DR2 SC0100 100
57-62 – 4.96 12.5 DR2 SC0100 100 + 1 ZC4 GM2 – WB1 KB155 1.120
DR2 SC0120 120
63-68 – 5.86 11.6 DR2 SC0120 2x120 1 ZC4 GM2 – WB1 KB132 1.120
69-79 – 7.2 11 DR2 SC0150 2x150 1 ZC4 GM2 – WB1 KB123 1.120
80-85 – 9.6 8.8 DR2 SC0180 180 + 1 ZC4 GM2 – WB1 KB133 1.120
WB1 KBppp
DR2 SC0220 220
86-98 99-113 11.4 8.6 DR2 SC0220 220 + 1 ZC4 GM2 – WB1 KB121 1.120
DR2 SC0270 270
99-108
109-119
114-125
126-136
16.3
19.7
6.6
6
DR2
DR2
SC0330
SC0390
2x330
2x390
1
1
ZC4
ZC4
GM2
GM2
DR5
DR5
TE1U
TE1U
WB1 KB130
WB1 KB140
1.120
1.120 5
120-136 137-156 25.2 5.4 DR2 SC0470 2x470 2 ZC4 GM2 DR5 TE1U WB1 KB134 1.120
192-210 217-238 61 3.4 DR2 SC1200 2x1200 2 ZC4 GM2 DR5 TE1U WB1 KB135 1.120
211-238 239-272 77.2 3 DR2 SC1500 1500 + 2 ZC4 GM2 DR5 TE1U WB1 KB136 1.120
DR2 SC1800 1800
239-279 273-318 94 3 DR2 SC1800 1800 + 1 LP1 D12004UD DR5 TE1S WB1 KB139 1.120
DR2 SC2200 2200
280-310 319-359 128 2.4 DR2 SC2700 2x2700 1 LP1 D12004UD DR5 TE1S WB1 KB125 1.120
311-341 360-387 160 2.1 DR2 SC3300 2x3300 1 LP1 D12004TD DR5 TE1S WB1 KB137 1.120
342-399 388-452 197 2 DR2 SC3900 2x3900 1 LP1 D12004VD DR5 TE1S WB1 KB126 1.120
400-500 453-500 257 1.9 DR2 SC4700 4700 + 1 LP1 D12004VD DR5 TE1S WB1 KB138 1.120
DR2 SC5600 5600
Specifications
b Economy resistor consumption: 15…20 W.
level y 7.
5/151
References 5
TeSys contactors 5

References
side.

d.c. a.c. Resis- I Resistors Contact Reference Reference
tance inrush (2 in parallel or in series)
at ± 10 % Unit Total Qty Reference
20 °C at Un reference resis-
± 10 % max tance
V V Ω A Ω kg
47-50 – 1.85 27 DR2 SC0150 2x150// 1 ZC4 GM2 – WB1 KB154 1.120
522634
51-55 – 2.35 23.5 DR2 SC0180 2x180// 1 ZC4 GM2 – WB1 KB153 1.120
56-60 – 3.22 18.5 DR2 SC0220 2x220// 1 ZC4 GM2 – WB1 KB141 1.120
61-66 – 4.04 16 DR2 SC0270 2X270// 1 ZC4 GM2 – WB1 KB142 1.120
67-72 – 4.96 14.5 DR2 SC0330 2x330// 1 ZC4 GM2 – WB1 KB155 1.120
73-79 – 5.86 13.5 DR2 SC0100 2x100 1 ZC4 GM2 – WB1 KB132 1.120
80-92 – 7.2 12.8 DR2 SC0120 2x120 1 ZC4 GM2 – WB1 KB123 1.120
93-98 108-113 9.6 10.2 DR2 SC0150 150 + 1 ZC4 GM2 DR5 TE1U WB1 KB133 1.120
WB1 KBppp
DR2 SC0180 180
99-114 114-132 11.4 10 DR2 SC0180 180 + 1 ZC4 GM2 DR5 TE1U WB1 KB121 1.120
DR2 SC0220 220
5 115-126
127-139
133-145
146-160
16.3
11.7
7.7
7
DR2 SC0270 2x270
DR2 SC0330 2x330
2
2
ZC4 GM2
ZC4 GM2
DR5 TE1U
DR5 TE1U
WB1 KB130
WB1 KB140
1.120
1.120
140-159 161-181 25.2 6.3 DR2 SC0390 390 + 2 ZC4 GM2 DR5 TE1U WB1 KB134 1.120
DR2 SC0470 470
223-246 256-282 61 4 DR2 SC1000 2x1000 1 LP1 D12004LD DR5 TE1S WB1 KB135 1.120
247-277 283-316 77.2 3.6 DR2 SC1200 2x1200 1 LP1 D12004UD DR5 TE1S WB1 KB136 1.120
361-399 409-452 160 2.5 DR2 SC2700 2x2700 1 LP1 D12004VD DR5 TE1S WB1 KB137 1.120
470-500 – 257 1.9 DR2 SC3900 2x3900 1 LP1 D12004RD – WB1 KB138 1.120
Specifications
- d.c.: inrush 900…1100 W, sealed 0.7…1 W
- a.c. (with rectifier): inrush 1100…1300 VA, sealed 0.7…1 VA
level y 7.
5/152
References 5
TeSys contactors 5

References
side.

d.c. a.c. Resis- I Resistors (3 in series) Contact Reference Reference
tance inrush Unit Total Qty Reference
at ± 10 % reference resis-
20 °C at Un tance
± 10 % max
V V Ω A Ω kg
57-61 – 2.35 26 DR2 SC0027 3x27 1 ZC4 GM2 – WB1 KB153 1.120
522634
62-67 – 3.22 21 DR2 SC0033 3x33 1 ZC4 GM2 – WB1 KB141 1.120
68-73 – 4.04 18 DR2 SC0039 3x39 1 ZC4 GM2 – WB1 KB142 1.120
74-81 – 4.96 16.3 DR2 SC0047 3x47 1 ZC4 GM2 – WB1 KB155 1.120
82-89 – 5.86 15 DR2 SC0056 3x56 1 ZC4 GM2 – WB1 KB132 1.120
90-102 105-119 7.2 14 DR2 SC0068 3x68 1 ZC4 GM2 DR5 TE1U WB1 KB123 1.120
WB1 KBppp
144-157 164-179 19.7 8 DR2 SC0180 3x180 2 ZC4 GM2 DR5 TE1U WB1 KB140 1.120
181-226
227-251
205-259
260-288
32.5
49.7
6.9
5
DR2
DR2
SC0330
SC0470
3x330
3x470
2
1
ZC4 GM2
LP1 D12004LD
DR5 TE1U
DR5 TE1S
WB1 KB124
WB1 KB122
1.120
1.120 5
279-313 318-356 77.2 4 DR2 SC0680 3x680 1 LP1 D12004UD DR5 TE1S WB1 KB136 1.120
449-500 – 197 2.5 DR2 SC1800 3x1800 1 LP1 D12004RD – WB1 KB126 1.120
Specifications
level y 7.
5/153
Dimensions 5
TeSys contactors 5
Single, 2, 3 or 4-pole contactors LC1 B Single, 2 or 3-pole contactors 4-pole contactors LC1 Bp34
Common side view LC1 Bp31, Bp32 or Bp33
185 290
330
R
330
15 15 15
365
44 P P Q1
260
P 51 P Q1
30 M 30 30 M1 M2 30
c 85 b c
15 L
L
N
T
S T
LC1 BL LC1 BM LC1 BP LC1 BR

Number of poles 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
a 50 50 50 50 63 63 63 63 100 100 100 100 125 125 125 125
b 59 59 59 59 55 55 55 55 55 55 55 55 50 50 50 50
c 16 16 16 16 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 25 25 25 25
L 345 445 540 760 345 445 540 760 385 540 760 1065 445 635 885 1065
M 285 385 480 – 285 385 480 – 325 480 700 – 385 575 825 –
M1 – – – 308 – – – 308 – – – 455 – – – 455
M2 – – – 392 – – – 392 – – – 550 – – – 550
N 121 121 121 121 125 125 125 125 125 125 125 125 130 130 130 130
P 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 150 150 150 150 195 195 195 195
5 Q1 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 110 110 110 110 130 130 130 130
R 122 122 122 122 157 157 157 157 173 173 173 173 173 173 173 173
S 10 10 10 10 17 17 17 17 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20
T 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 60
Ø 9 9 9 9 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11
Electrical safety clearance
Values X1 and X2 are given for a breaking capacity of 10 In (a 3-phase supply).
a 3-phase voltage LC1 BL LC1 BM LC1 BP LC1 BR
380/440 V X1 100 100 150 200
X2
X2 150 150 200 250
500 V X1 100 100 150 200

X2 150 150 220 250
660/690 V X1 150 150 200 200

X2 200 200 250 250
1000 V X1 200 200 200 250

X2 250 250 250 300
X1
Mechanical interlock for assembling vertically mounted reversing contactors

EZ2 LB0601
A = (E–112) 488
E = 600

5/154
Schemes 5
TeSys contactors 5
Contactors type LC1 B

type LC1 Bp31p22 LC1 Bp31p31 LC1 Bp31p13 LC1 Bp31p40
A1
A1
A1
A1
A2
A2
A2
A2
A1
A1
A1
A1
A2
A2
A2
A2
A1
A1
A1
A1
A2
A2
A2
A2
A1
A1
A1
A1
A2
A2
A2
A2
a.c. control circuit
– S3 – S1
– KM – S2 5
2-wire 3-wire
– KM –R control control
+ –
– KM
Dotted lines show optional wiring and external items required.
d.c. control circuit

+ +
– S3 – S1 – S3 – S1
– KA
– KM – S2 – KM – S2
2-wire 3-wire 2-wire 3-wire

– KM – R control control – KM – R control control
– KM – KM – KA
– –
Nota : It is essential to check that the control circuit contacts have ratings compatible with the voltage and power consumption of the operating coil of the contactor.
If not, an intermediate “KA” relay must be fitted and wired as shown.
Dotted lines show optional wiring and external items required.
Selection : References : Dimensions :

5/155
General 5
Technical information 5
Tests according to standard utilisation categories

conforming to IEC 60947-4-1 and 5-1
based on rated operational current Ie
and rated operational voltage Ue
Contactors
Electrical durability: Occasional duty:
making and breaking conditions making and breaking conditions
a.c. supply
Typical Utilisation Making Breaking Making Breaking
applications category I U cos ϕ I U cos ϕ I U cos ϕ I U cos ϕ
Resistors, AC-1 Ie Ue 0.95 Ie Ue 0.95 1.5 Ie 1.05 Ue 0.8 1.5 Ie 1.05 Ue 0.8
non inductive
or slightly inductive loads
Motors
Slip ring motors: AC-2 2.5 Ie Ue 0.65 2.5 Ie Ue 0.65 4 Ie 1.05 Ue 0.65 4 Ie 1.05 Ue 0.65
starting, breaking.
Squirrel cage motors: AC-3

starting, breaking whilst Ie y (1) 6 Ie Ue 0.65 1 Ie 0.17 Ue 0.65 10 Ie 1.05 Ue 0.45 8 Ie 1.05 Ue 0.45
motor running.
Ie > (2) 6 Ie Ue 0.35 1 Ie 0.17 Ue 0.35 10 Ie 1.05 Ue 0.35 8 Ie 1.05 Ue 0.35
Squirrel cage motors: AC-4

starting, Ie y (1) 6 Ie Ue 0.65 6 Ie Ue 0.65 12 Ie 1.05 Ue 0.45 10 Ie 1.05 Ue 0.45
reversing,
Ie > (2) 6 Ie Ue 0.35 6 Ie Ue 0.35 12 Ie 1.05 Ue 0.35 10 Ie 1.05 Ue 0.35
inching
d.c. supply
applications category I U L/R (ms) I U L/R (ms) I U L/R (ms) I U L/R (ms)
Resistors, DC-1 Ie Ue 1 Ie Ue 1 1.5 Ie 1.05 Ue 1 1.5 Ie 1.05 Ue 1
non inductive
or slightly inductive loads
Shunt wound motors: DC-3 2.5 Ie Ue 2 2.5 Ie Ue 2 4 Ie 1.05 Ue 2.5 4 Ie 1.05 Ue 2.5
starting,
5 reversing,
inching
Series wound motors: DC-5 2.5 Ie Ue 7.5 2.5 Ie Ue 7.5 4 Ie 1.05 Ue 15 4 Ie 1.05 Ue 15
starting,
reversing,
inching
Control relays and auxiliary contacts

Electrical durability: Occasional duty:
making and breaking conditions making and breaking conditions
a.c. supply
applications category I U cos ϕ I U cos ϕ I U cos ϕ I U cos ϕ
Electromagnets
y 72 VA AC-14 – – – – – – 6 Ie 1.1 Ue 0.7 6 Ie 1.1 Ue 0.7
> 72 VA AC-15 10 Ie Ue 0.7 Ie Ue 0.4 10 Ie 1.1 Ue 0.3 10 Ie 1.1 Ue 0.3
d.c. supply
applications category I U L/R (ms) I U L/R (ms) I U L/R (ms) I U L/R (ms)
Electromagnets DC-13 Ie Ue 6 P (3) Ie Ue 6 P (3) 1.1 Ie 1.1 Ue 6 P (3) 1.1 Ie 1.1 Ue 6 P (3)
(1) Ie y 17 A for electrical durability, Ie y 100 A for occasional duty.

(2) Ie > 17 A for electrical durability, Ie > 100 A for occasional duty.
(3) The value 6 P (in watts) is based on practical observations and is considered to represent the majority of d.c. magnetic loads up to the maximum limit of P = 50
W i.e. 6 P = 300 ms = L/R.
Above this, the loads are made up of smaller loads in parallel. The value 300 ms is therefore a maximum limit whatever the value of current drawn.
5/156
General 5
Technical information 5
Current of asynchronous squirrel cage motors

at nominal load
3-phase 4-pole motors

Current values for power in kW Current values for power in hp
Rated Indicative rated operational current Rated Indicative rated operational current values at:
operational values at: operational
power (1) 230 V 400 V 500 V 690 V power (2) 110 - 200 V 208 V 220 - 380 - 440 - 550 -
120 V 240 V 415 V 480 V 600 V
kW A A A A hp A A A A A A A
0.06 0.35 0.2 0.16 0.12 1/2 4.4 2.5 2.4 2.2 1.3 1.1 0.9
0.09 0.52 0.3 0.24 0.17 3/4 6.4 3.7 3.5 3.2 1.8 1.6 1.3
0.12 0.7 0.44 0.32 0.23 1 8.4 4.8 4.6 4.2 2.3 2.1 1.7
0.18 1 0.6 0.48 0.35 1 1/2 12 6.9 6.6 6 3.3 3 2.4
0.25 1.5 0.85 0.68 0.49 2 13.6 7.8 7.5 6.8 4.3 3.4 2.7
0.37 1.9 1.1 0.88 0.64 3 19.2 11 10.6 9.6 6.1 4.8 3.9
0.55 2.6 1.5 1.2 0.87 5 30.4 17.5 16.7 15.2 9.7 7.6 6.1
0.75 3.3 1.9 1.5 1.1 7 1/2 44 25.3 24.2 22 14 11 9
1.1 4.7 2.7 2.2 1.6 10 56 32.2 30.8 28 18 14 11
1.5 6.3 3.6 2.9 2.1 15 84 48.3 46.2 42 27 21 17
2.2 8.5 4.9 3.9 2.8 20 108 62.1 59.4 54 34 27 22
3 11.3 6.5 5.2 3.8 25 136 78.2 74.8 68 44 34 27
4 15 8.5 6.8 4.9 30 160 92 88 80 51 40 32
5.5 20 11.5 9.2 6.7 40 208 120 114 104 66 52 41
7.5 27 15.5 12.4 8.9 50 260 150 143 130 83 65 52
11 38 22 17.6 12.8 60 – 177 169 154 103 77 62
15 51 29 23 17 75 – 221 211 192 128 96 77
18.5 61 35 28 21 100 – 285 273 248 165 124 99
22 72 41 33 24 125 – 359 343 312 208 156 125
30 96 55 44 32 150 – 414 396 360 240 180 144
37 115 66 53 39 200 – 552 528 480 320 240 192
45 140 80 64 47 250 – – – 604 403 302 242
55
75
169
230
97
132
78
106
57
77
300
350
–
–
–
–
–
–
722
828
482
560
361
414
289
336 5
90 278 160 128 93 400 – – – 954 636 477 382
110 340 195 156 113 450 – – – 1030 – 515 412
132 400 230 184 134 500 – – – 1180 786 590 472
160 487 280 224 162
200 609 350 280 203
250 748 430 344 250
315 940 540 432 313
355 1061 610 488 354
400 1200 690 552 400
500 1478 850 680 493
560 1652 950 760 551
630 1844 1060 848 615
710 2070 1190 952 690
800 2340 1346 1076 780
900 2640 1518 1214 880
1000 2910 1673 1339 970
(1) Values conforming to standard IEC 60072-1 (at 50 Hz).
(2) Values conforming to standard UL 508 (at 60 Hz).
Nota : These values are given as a guide. They may vary depending on the type of motor, its polarity and the manufacturer.
5/157
Definitions and comments 5
Contactors 5
Altitude The rarefied atmosphere at high altitude reduces the dielectric strength of the air and hence the
rated operational voltage of the contactor. It also reduces the cooling effect of the air and hence
the rated operational current of the contactor (unless the temperature drops at the same time).
No derating is necessary up to 3000 m.
Derating factors to be applied above this altitude for main pole operational voltage and current
(a.c. supply) are as follows.
Altitude 3500 m 4000 m 4500 m 5000 m
Rated operetional voltage 0,90 0,80 0,70 0,60
Rated operational current 0,92 0,90 0,88 0,86
Ambient air temperature The temperature of the air surrounding the device, measured near to the device.
The operating characteristics are given :
- with no restriction for temperatures between - 5 and + 55 °C,
- with restrictions, if necessary, for temperatures between - 50 and + 70 °C.
Rated operational current (Ie) This is defined taking into account the rated operational voltage, operating rate and duty,
utilisation category and ambient temperature around the device.
Rated conventional thermal current (Ith) (1) The current which a closed contactor can sustain for a minimum of 8 hours without its
temperature rise exceeding the limits given in the standards.
Permissible short time rating The current which a closed contactor can sustain for a short time after a period of no load, without
dangerous overheating.
Rated operational voltage (Ue) This is the voltage value which, in conjunction with the rated operational current, determines the
use of the contactor or starter, and on which the corresponding tests and the utilisation category
are based. For 3-phase circuits it is expressed as the voltage between phases.
Apart from exceptional cases such as rotor short-circuiting, the rated operational voltage Ue is
less than or equal to the rated insulation voltage Ui.
Rated control circuit voltage (Uc) The rated value of the control circuit voltage, on which the operating characteristics are based.
5 For a.c. applications, the values are given for a near sinusoidal wave form (less than 5% total
harmonic distortion).
Rated insulation voltage (Ui) This is the voltage value used to define the insulation characteristics of a device and referred to
in dielectric tests determining leakage paths and creepage distances. As the specifications are
not identical for all standards, the rated value given for each of them is not necessarily the same.
Rated impulse withstand voltage (Uimp) The peak value of a voltage surge which the device is able to withstand without breaking down.
Rated operational power (expressed in kW) The rated power of the standard motor which can be switched by the contactor, at the stated
operational voltage.
Rated breaking capacity (2) This is the current value which the contactor can break in accordance with the breaking
conditions specified in the IEC standard.
Rated making capacity (2) This is the current value which the contactor can make in accordance with the making conditions
specified in the IEC standard.
On-load factor (m) This is the ratio between the time the current flows (t) and the duration of the cycle (T)
t
m=
T
Cycle duration: duration of current flow + time at zero current
Pole impedance The impedance of one pole is the sum of the impedance of all the circuit components between
the input terminal and the output terminal.
The impedance comprises a resistive component (R) and an inductive component (X = Lω).
The total impedance therefore depends on the frequency and is normally given for 50 Hz.
This average value is given for the pole at its rated operational current.
Electrical durability This is the average number of on-load operating cycles which the main pole contacts can
perform without maintenance. The electrical durability depends on the utilisation category, the
rated operational current and the rated operational voltage.
Mechanical durability This is the average number of no-load operating cycles (i.e. with zero current flow through the
main poles) which the contactor can perform without mechanical failure.
(1) Conventional thermal current, in free air, conforming to IEC standards.

(2) For a.c. applications, the breaking and making capacities are expressed by the rms value of
the symmetrical component of the short-circuit current. Taking into account the maximum
asymmetry which may exist in the circuit, the contacts therefore have to withstand a peak
asymmetrical current which may be twice the rms symmetrical component.
Note : these definitions are extracted from standard IEC 60947-1.
5/158
Definitions and comments 5
Contactors 5
Contactor utilisation categories conforming to IEC 60947-4

The standard utilisation categories define the current values which the contactor must be able to
make or break.
These values depend on:

- the type of load being switched : squirrel cage or slip ring motor, resistors,
- the conditions under which making or breaking takes place: motor stalled, starting or running,
reversing, plugging.
a.c. applications
Category AC-1 This category applies to all types of a.c. load with a power factor equal to or greater than 0.95
(cos ϕ u 0.95).
Category AC-2 This category applies to starting, plugging and inching of slip ring motors.
On closing, the contactor makes the starting current, which is about 2.5 times the rated current
of the motor.
On opening, it must break the starting current, at a voltage less than or equal to the mains supply
voltage.
Category AC-3 This category applies to squirrel cage motors with breaking during normal running of the motor.
On closing, the contactor makes the starting current, which is about 5 to 7 times the rated current
of the motor.
On opening, it breaks the rated current drawn by the motor; at this point, the voltage at the
contactor terminals is about 20% of the mains supply voltage. Breaking is light.
Application examples: all standard squirrel cage motors: lifts, escalators, conveyor belts, bucket
elevators, compressors, pumps, mixers, air conditioning units, etc... .
Category AC-4 This category covers applications with plugging and inching of squirrel cage and slip ring motors.
The contactor closes at a current peak which may be as high as 5 or 7 times the rated motor
current. On opening it breaks this same current at a voltage which is higher, the lower the motor
speed. This voltage can be the same as the mains
voltage. Breaking is severe
Application examples: printing machines, wire drawing machines, cranes and hoists, metallurgy
industry. 5
d.c. applications
Category DC-1 This category applies to all types of d.c. load with a time constant (L/R) of less than or equal
to 1 ms.
Category DC-3 This category applies to starting, counter-current braking and inching of shunt motors.
Time constant y 2 ms.
On closing, the contactor makes the starting current, which is about 2.5 times the rated motor
current.
On opening, the contactor must be able to break 2.5 times the starting current at a voltage which
is less than or equal to the mains voltage. The slower the motor speed, and therefore the lower
its back e.m.f., the higher this voltage.
Breaking is difficult.
Category DC-5 This category applies to starting, counter-current braking and inching of series wound motors.
Time constant y 7.5 ms.
On closing, the contactor makes a starting current peak which may be as high as 2.5 times the
rated motor current. On opening, the contactor breaks this same current at a voltage which is
higher, the lower the motor speed. This voltage can be the same as the mains voltage.
Breaking is severe.
Utilisation categories for auxiliary contacts & control relays conforming to IEC 60947-5
a.c. applications
Category AC-14 (1) This category applies to the switching of electromagnetic loads whose power drawn with the
electromagnet closed is less than 72 VA.
Application example: switching the operating coil of contactors and relays.
Category AC-15 (1) This category applies to the switching of electromagnetic loads whose power drawn with the
electromagnet closed is more 72 VA.
Application example: switching the operating coil of contactors.
d.c. applications
Category DC-13 (2) This category applies to the switching of electromagnetic loads for which the time taken to reach
95% of the steady state current (T = 0.95) is equal to 6 times the power P drawn by the load (with
P y 50 W).
Application example: switching the operating coil of contactors without economy resistor.
(1) Replaces category AC-11.

(2) Replaces category DC-13.
5/159
Selection 5
TeSys contactors 5
For utilisation category AC-3
Operational current and power conforming to IEC (θ y 60 °C)

Contactor size LC1/ LC1/ LC1 LC1 LC1 LC1 LC1 LC1 LC1 LC1 LC1
LP1 LP1 K12 K16 D09 D12 D18 D25 D32 D38 D40
K06 K09
Maximum operational current y 440 V A 6 9 12 16 9 12 18 25 32 38 40
in AC-3
Rated operational power P 220/240 V kW 1.5 2.2 3 3 2.2 3 4 5.5 7.5 9 11
(standard motor power ratings)
380/400 V kW 2.2 4 5.5 7.5 4 5.5 7.5 11 15 18.5 18.5
415 V kW 2.2 4 5.5 7.5 4 5.5 9 11 15 18.5 22
440 V kW 3 4 5.5 7.5 4 5.5 9 11 15 18.5 22
500 V kW 3 4 4 5.5 5.5 7.5 10 15 18.5 18.5 22
660/690 V kW 3 4 4 4 5.5 7.5 10 15 18.5 18.5 30
1000 V kW – – – – – – – – – – 22
Maximum operating rate in operating cycles/hour (1)

On-load factor Operational LC1 LC1 LC1 LC1 LC1 LC1 LC1
power D09 D12 D18 D25 D32 D38 D40
y 85 % P – – – – 1200 1200 1200 1200 1000 1000 1000
0.5 P – – – – 3000 3000 2500 2500 2500 2500 2500
y 25 % P – – – – 1800 1800 1800 1800 1200 1200 1200
Operational current and power conforming to UL, CSA (θ y 60 °C)

5 Contactor size LC1/
LP1
LC1/
LP1
LC1/
LP1
LC1
D09
LC1
D12
LC1
D18
LC1
D25
LC1
D32
LC1
D38
LC1
D40
K06 K09 K12
Maximum operational current y 440 V A 6 9 12 9 12 18 25 32 – 40
in AC-3
Rated operational power P 200/208 V HP 1.5 2 3 2 3 5 7.5 10 – 10
(standard motor power ratings
60 Hz) 230/240 V HP 1.5 3 3 2 3 5 7.5 10 – 10
460/480 V HP 3 5 7.5 5 7.5 10 15 20 – 30
575/600 V HP 3 5 10 7.5 10 15 20 25 – 30
(1) Depending on the operational power and the on-load factor (θ y 60 °C).
Characteristics : References : Dimensions, schemes :

5/160
5
5
LC1 LC1 LC1 LC1 LC1 LC1 LC1 LC1 LC1 LC1 LC1 LC1 LC1 LC1 LC1 LC1 LC1 LC1 LC1
D50 D65 D80 D95 D115 D150 F185 F225 F265 F330 F400 F500 F630 F780 F800 BL BM BP BR
50 65 80 95 115 150 185 225 265 330 400 500 630 780 800 750 1000 1500 1800
15 18.5 22 25 30 40 55 63 75 100 110 147 200 220 250 220 280 425 500
22 30 37 45 55 75 90 110 132 160 200 250 335 400 450 400 500 750 900
25 37 45 45 59 80 100 110 140 180 220 280 375 425 450 425 530 800 900
30 37 45 45 59 80 100 110 140 200 250 295 400 425 450 450 560 800 900
30 37 55 55 75 90 110 129 160 200 257 355 400 450 450 500 600 750 900
33 37 45 45 80 100 110 129 160 220 280 335 450 475 475 560 670 750 900
30 37 45 45 65 75 100 100 147 160 185 335 450 450 450 530 530 670 750
1000 1000 750 750 750 750 750 750 750 750 500 500 500 500 500 120 120 120 120
2500 2500 2000 2000 2000 1200 2000 2000 2000 2000 1200 1200 1200 1200 600 120 120 120 120
1200 1200 1200 1200 1200 1200 1200 1200 1200 1200 1200 1200 1200 600 600 120 120 120 120
LC1
D50
LC1
D65
LC1
D80
LC1
D95
LC1
D115
LC1
D150
LC1
F185
LC1
F225
LC1
F265
LC1
F330
LC1
F400
LC1
F500
LC1
F630
LC1
F780
LC1
F800
5
50 65 80 95 115 150 185 225 265 330 400 500 630 780 800
15 20 30 30 30 40 50 60 60 75 100 150 250 – 350
15 20 30 30 40 50 60 75 75 100 125 200 300 450 400
40 50 60 60 75 100 125 150 150 200 250 400 600 900 900
40 50 60 60 100 125 150 150 200 250 300 500 800 – 900
5/161
Selection (continued) 5
TeSys contactors 5
Selection according to required electrical durability, in category AC-3 (Ue y 440 V)

Control of 3-phase asynchronous squirrel cage motors with breaking whilst running.
The current broken (Ic) in category AC-3 is equal to the rated operational current (Ie) of the motor.
LC1, LP1, LP4 K06
LC1, LP1, LP4 K09
LC1, LP1, LP4 K12
LC1 D115
LC1 D150
LC1-D09
LC1 D12
LC1 D18
LC1 D25
LC1 D32
LC1 D38
LC1 D40
LC1 D50
LC1 D65
LC1 D80
LC1 D95
LC1 K16
10
8
6
2
1,5
1
0,8
0,6
0,5
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 12 16 20 25 30 37 50 65 80 95 115 150 200
18 32 40 Current broken in A
0,75
18,5
0,55
2,2
5,5
7,5
1,5
11
15
25
30
22
3
230 V kW
0,75
18,5
7,5
1,5
2,2
5,5
37
22
30
15
55
11
45
75
4
400 V kW
18,5
5
2,2
5,5
7,5
1,5
11
15
37
30
45
55
75
22
4
440 V kW
Operational power in kW-50 Hz.

Example :
Asynchronous motor with P = 5.5 kW - Ue = 400 V - Ie = 11 A - Ic = Ie = 11 A
or asynchronous motor with P = 5.5 kW - Ue = 415 V - Ie = 11 A - Ic = Ie = 11 A
3 million operating cycles required.
The above selection curves show the contactor rating needed: LC1 D18.
Selection according to required electrical durability, in category AC-3 (Ue = 660/690 V) (1)
LC1 D115
LC1 D150
LC1 D32,
LC1 D09
LC1 D12
LC1 D18
LC1 D25
LC1 D38
LC1 D40
LC1 D50
LC1 D65
LC1 D80
LC1 D95
10
8
6
4
3
2
1,5
1
0,8
0,6
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 10 15 20 33 40 50 60 80 90 100 200
6,6 9 11 17 22 35 42 48 Current broken in A
(1) For Ue = 1000 V use the 660/690 V curves, but do not exceed the operational current at the operational power indicated for 1000 V.

5/162
TeSys contactors 5

LC1 BL, BM
LC1 F185
LC1 F225
LC1 F265
LC1 F330
LC1 F400
LC1 F500
LC1 F780
LC1 F630
LC1 F800
LC1 BR
LC1 BP
10
8
6
2
1,5
(1)
1
0,8
0,6
0,4
20 30 40 50 60 80 100 200 400 600 800 1000 2000
90 Current broken in A
18,5
147
200
220
110
7,5
5,5
15
25
45
75
22
11
40
55
30
220 V kW
230 V
18,5
132
200
400
500
750
900
250
110
335
160
11
22
15
45
75
30
37
55
90
380 V kW
400 V
18,5
200
132
285
22
11
15
30
45
75
37
90
55
440 V kW
Operational power in kW-50 Hz.

Example : 5
Asynchronous motor with P = 132 kW - Ue = 380 V - Ie = 245 A - Ic = Ie = 245 A
or asynchronous motor with P = 132 kW - Ue = 415 V - Ie = 240 A - Ic = Ie = 240 A
1.5 million operating cycles required.
The above selection curves show the contactor rating needed: LC1 F330.
(1) The dotted lines are only applicable to LC1 BL contactors.

Selection according to required electrical durability, in category AC-3 (Ue = 660/690 V)
LC1 BL, BM
LC1 F185
LC1 F265
LC1 F330
LC1 F400
LC1 F500
LC1 F630
LC1 F780
LC1 F800
LC1 F225
LC1 BR
LC1 BP
10
8
6
2
1,5
(1)
1
0,8
0,6
0,4
20 30 40 50 60 80 90 100 118 170 200 400 600 800 1000 2000
129 220 305 355 485 Current broken in A
475
560
129
220
670
750
900
160
335
355
110
660 V kW
690 V
Example :
Asynchronous motor with P = 132 kW - Ue = 660 V - Ie = 140 A - Ic = Ie = 140 A
1.5 million operating cycles required.
The above selection curves show the contactor rating needed: LC1 F330.
(1) The dotted lines are only applicable to LC1 BL contactors.

5/163
Selection 5
TeSys contactors 5
Maximum operational current (open-mounted device)

Contactor size LC1/ LC1/ LC1 LC1 LC1 LC1 LC1 LC1 LC1 LC1
LP1 LP1 D09 DT20 D12 D18 D25 D32 D38 D40
K09 K12 DT25 DT32 DT40
Maximum operating rate 600 600 600 600 600 600 600 600 600 600
in operating cycles/hour
Connection Cable c.s.a. mm2 4 4 4 4 4 6 6 10 10 16
Bar c.s.a. mm – – – – – – – – – –
Operational current in AC-1 in A, y 40 °C A 20 20 25 20 25 32 40 50 50 60

according to the y 60 °C A 20 20 25 20 25 32 40 50 50 60
ambient temperature
y 70 °C A (at UC) (1) (1) 17 (1) 17 22 28 35 35 42
Maximum operational 220/230 V kW 8 8 9 8 9 11 14 18 18 21

power y 60 °C 240 V kW 8 8 9 8 9 12 15 19 19 23
380/400 V kW 14 14 15 14 15 20 25 31 31 37
415 V kW 14 14 17 14 17 21 27 34 34 41
440 V kW 15 15 18 15 18 23 29 36 36 43
500 V kW 17 17 20 17 20 23 33 41 41 49
660/690 V kW 22 22 27 22 27 34 43 54 54 65
1000 V kW – – – – – – – – – 70
Increase in operational current by parallel connection of poles

Apply the following coefficients to the currents or power values given above; these coefficients take into account an often unbalanced current
distribution between the poles:
b 2 poles in parallel: K = 1.6
5
LC1, LP1, LP4 K09
LC1, LP1, LP4 K12
LC1 D32, LC1 D38

LC1, LP1 D12
LC1, LP1 D25
LC1, LP1 D40
LC1, LP1 D65

LC1, LP1 D80
LC1 D115
LC1 D150
LC1 D09
LC1 D18
LC1 D50
LC1 D95
10
8
6
2
1,5
1
0,8
0,6
0,4
0,2
0,1
1 2 3 4 6 8 10 20 25 32 40 50 60 80 100 125 200 250 400
Current broken in A
Control of resistive circuits (cos ϕ u 0.95).

The current broken (Ic) in category AC-1 is equal to the current (Ie) normally drawn by the load.
Example:
b Ue = 220 V - Ie = 50 A - θ y 40 °C - Ic = Ie = 50 A.
b 2 million operating cycles required.
b The above selection curves show the contactor rating needed: either LC1 or LP1 D50.

5/164
5
5
LC1 LC1/ LC1/ LC1 LC1 LC1 LC1 LC1 LC1 LC1 LC1 LC1 LC1 LC1 LC1 LC1 LC1 LC1 LC1
D50 LP1 LP1 D95 D115 D150 F185 F225 F265 F330 F400 F500 F630 F780 F800 BL BM BP BR
D65 D80
600 600 600 600 600 600 600 600 600 600 600 600 600 600 600 120 120 120 120
25 25 50 50 120 120 150 185 185 240 – – – – – – – – –
– – – – – – – – – – 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
30 x 5 40 x 5 60 x 5 100 x 5 60 x 5 50 x 5 80 x 5 100 x 5 100 x 10
80 80 125 125 250 250 275 315 350 400 500 700 1000 1600 1000 800 1250 2000 2750
80 80 125 125 200 200 275 280 300 360 430 580 850 1350 850 700 1100 1750 2400
56 56 80 80 160 160 180 200 250 290 340 500 700 1100 700 600 900 1500 2000
29 29 45 45 80 80 90 100 120 145 170 240 350 550 350 300 425 700 1000
31 31 49 49 83 83 100 110 125 160 180 255 370 570 370 330 450 800 1100
50 50 78 78 135 135 165 175 210 250 300 430 600 950 600 500 800 1200 1600
54 54 85 85 140 140 170 185 220 260 310 445 630 1000 630 525 825 1250 1700
58 58 90 90 150 150 180 200 230 290 330 470 670 1050 670 550 850 1400 2000
65 65 102 102 170 170 200 220 270 320 380 660 750 1200 750 600 900 1500 2100
86 86 135 135 235 235 280 300 370 400 530 740 1000 1650 1000 800 1100 1900 2700
85 100 120 120 345 345 410 450 540 640 760 950 1500 2400 1500 1100 1700 3000 4200
5
LC1 BL, BM
LC1 F330
LC1 F400
LC1 F500
LC1 F630
LC1 F800
LC1 F185
LC1 F225
LC1 F265
LC1 F780
LC1 BR
LC1 BP
10
8
6
1
0,8
0,6
(1)
0,4
0,2
0,1
20 40 50 60 80 100 200 300 350 600 800 1000 1600 2000 4000
275 315 400 500 700 Current broken in A
Example:
b Ue = 220 V - Ie = 500 A - θ y 40 °C - Ic = Ie = 500 A.
b 2 million operating cycles required.
b The above selection curves show the contactor rating needed: LC1 F780.
(1) The dotted lines are only applicable to LC1 F225 contactors.
5/165
Selection 5
TeSys contactors 5
For utilisation categories AC-2 or AC-4
Maximum breaking current

Category AC-2: slip ring motors - breaking the starting current
Category AC-4: squirrel cage motors - breaking the starting current.
Contactor size LC1/ LC1/ LC1/ LC1 LC1 LC1 LC1 LC1 LC1 LC1
LP1 LP1 LP1 D09 D12 D18 D25 D32 D38 D40
K06 K09 K12
In category AC-4 (le max) Ue y 440 V A 36 54 54 54 72 108 150 192 192 240
le max broken =
6 x l motor
440 V < Ue y 690 V A 26 40 40 40 50 70 90 105 105 150
le max broken =
6 x l motor
Depending on the maximum operating rate (1) and the on-load factor, θ y 60 °C (2)
From 150 and 15 % to 300 and 10 % A 20 30 30 30 40 45 75 80 80 110
From 150 and 20 % to 600 and 10 % A 18 27 27 27 36 40 67 70 70 96
From 150 and 30 % to 1200 and 10 % A 16 24 24 24 30 35 56 60 60 80
From 150 and 55 % to 2400 and 10 % A 13 19 19 19 24 30 45 50 50 62
From 150 and 85 % to 3600 and 10 % A 10 16 16 16 21 25 40 45 45 53
(1) Do not exceed the maximum number of mechanical operating cycles.

(2) For temperatures higher than 60 °C, use a maximum operating rate value equal to 80% of the actual value when selecting from the tables.
Plugging
The current varies from the maximum plug-braking current to the rated motor current.
The making current must be compatible with the rated making and breaking capacities of the contactor.
As breaking normally takes place at a current value at or near the locked rotor current, the contactor can be selected using the criteria for
5 categories AC-2 and AC-4.
Permissible AC-4 power rating for 200 000 operating cycles

Operational voltage LCp/ LCp/ LCp LCp LCp LCp LCp LCp LCp LCp
LPp LPp LPp D09 D12 D18 D25 D32 D38 D4
K06 K09 K12
220/230 V kW 0.75 1.1 1.1 1.5 1.5 2.2 3 4 4 4
380/400 V kW 1.5 2.2 2.2 2.2 3.7 4 5.5 7.5 7.5 9
415 V kW 1.5 2.2 2.2 2.2 3 3.7 5.5 7.5 7.5 9
440 V kW 1.5 2.2 2.2 2.2 3 3.7 5.5 7.5 7.5 11
500 V kW 2.2 3 3 3 4 5.5 7.5 9 9 11
660/690 V kW 3 4 4 4 5.5 7.5 10 11 11 15

5/166
5
5
300 390 480 570 630 830 1020 1230 1470 1800 2220 2760 3360 4260 3690 4320 5000 7500 9000
170 210 250 250 540 640 708 810 1020 1410 1830 2130 2760 2910 2910 4000 4800 5400 6600
140 160 200 200 280 310 380 420 560 670 780 1100 1400 1600 1600 2250 3000 4500 5400
120 148 170 170 250 280 350 400 500 600 700 950 1250 1400 1400 2000 2400 3750 5000
100 132 145 145 215 240 300 330 400 500 600 750 950 1100 1100 1500 2000 3000 3600
80 110 120 120 150 170 240 270 320 390 450 600 720 820 820 1000 1500 2000 2500
70 90 100 100 125 145 170 190 230 290 350 500 660 710 710 750 1000 1500 1800
5
LCp LCp LCp LCp LC1 LC1 LC1 LC1 LC1 LC1 LC1 LC1 LC1 LC1 LC1 LC1 LC1 LC1 LC1
5.5 7.5 7.5 9 9 11 18.5 22 28 33 40 45 55 63 63 90 110 150 200
11 11 15 15 18.5 22 33 40 51 59 75 80 100 110 110 160 160 220 250
11 11 15 15 18.5 22 37 45 55 63 80 90 100 110 110 160 160 250 280
11 15 15 15 18.5 22 37 45 59 63 80 100 110 132 132 160 200 250 315
15 18.5 22 22 30 37 45 55 63 75 90 110 132 150 150 180 200 250 355
18.5 22 25 25 30 45 63 75 90 110 129 140 160 185 185 200 250 315 450
5/167
TeSys contactors 5
Selection according to required electrical durability, use in categories AC-2 or AC-4 (Ue y 440 V)
Control of 3-phase asynchronous squirrel cage motors (AC-4) or slip ring motors (AC-2) with breaking whilst motor stalled.
The current broken (Ic) in AC-2 is equal to 2.5 x Ie.
The current broken (Ic) in AC-4 is equal to 6 x Ie. (Ie = rated operational current of the motor).
LC1, LP1, LP4 K06
LC1 D32 et D38

LP4 K09,K12
LC1 D115
LC1 D150
LC1, LP1,
LC1 D09
LC1 D12
LC1 D18
LC1 D25
LC1 D40
LC1 D50
LC1 D65
LC1 D80
LC1 D95
1
0,8
0,6
0,4
0,2
0,1
0,08
0,06
0,05
0,04
0,03
0,02 (1)
0,01
5 6 7 8 9 10 20 30 36 40 50 54 72 80 108 150 192 240 300 390 480 570 630 828 1000
5 Example:
Current broken in A
b Asynchronous motor with P = 5.5 kW - Ue = 400 V - Ie = 11 A. Ic = 6 x Ie = 66 A

or asynchronous motor with P = 5.5 kW - Ue = 415 V - Ie = 11 A. Ic = 6 x Ie = 66 A.
b 200 000 operating cycles required.
b The above selection curves show the contactor rating needed: LC1 D25.
(1) The dotted lines are only applicable to LC1, LP1 K12 contactors.
Selection according to required electrical durability, use in category AC-4 (440 V < Ue y 690 V)
Control of 3-phase asynchronous squirrel cage motors with breaking whilst motor stalled.
The current broken (Ic) in AC-2 is equal to 2.5 x Ie.
The current broken (Ic) in AC-4 is equal to 6 x Ie. (Ie = rated operational current of the motor).
LC1 D32, D38
LC1 D115
LC1 D150
LC1 D09
LC1 D12
LC1 D18
LC1 D25
LC1 D40
LC1 D50
LC1 D65
LC1 D80
LC1 D95
1
0,8
0,6
0,4
0,2
0,1
0,08
0,07
0,06
0,05
0,04
0,03
0,02
0,01
5 6 7 8 9 10 20 30 40 50 70 90 105 150 170 210 250 300 400 500 540 640 800 1000
Current broken in A

5/168
TeSys contactors 5
Selection according to required electrical durability, use in categories AC-2 or AC-4 (Ue y 440 V)
Control of 3-phase asynchronous squirrel cage motors (AC-4) or slip ring motors (AC-2) with breaking whilst motor stalled.
The current broken (Ic) in AC-4 is equal to 6 x Ie.
(Ie = rated operational current of the motor).
LC1 BL, BM
LC1 F185
LC1 F225
LC1 F265
LC1 F330
LC1 F400
LC1 F500
LC1 F630
LC1 F800
LC1 F780
LC1 BR
LC1 BP
1
0,8
0,6
0,4
0,2
0,1
0,08
0,06
0,04
0,02
0,01
100 200 400 600 800 1020 1470 2220 3360 4260 5000 8000 20 000
1230 1800 2760 3690 6000 10 000
Current broken in A
Example:
b Asynchronous motor with P = 90 kW - Ue = 380 V - Ie = 170 A. Ic = 6 x Ie = 1020 A
5
or asynchronous motor with P = 90 kW - Ue = 415 V - Ie = 165 A. Ic = 6 x Ie = 990 A.
b 60 000 operating cycles required.
b The above selection curves show the contactor rating needed: LC1 F265.
Selection according to required electrical durability, use in category AC-4 (440 V < Ue y 690 V)
Control of 3-phase asynchronous squirrel cage motors with breaking whilst motor stalled.
The current broken (Ic) in AC-4 is equal to 6 x Ie.
(Ie = rated operational current of the motor).
LC1 F780, F800
LC1 BL, BM
LC1 F185
LC1 F225
LC1 F265
LC1 F330
LC1 F400
LC1 F500
LC1 F630
LC1 BR
LC1 BP
1
0,8
0,6
0,4
0,2
0,1
0,08
0,06
0,04
0,02
0,01
100 200 400 600 800 1000 2000 4000 8000 10 000 20 000
Current broken in A

5/169
Selection 5
TeSys contactors 5
For utilisation categories DC-1 to DC-5
Rated operational current (Ie) in Amperes, in utilisation category DC-1,

L y 1 ms, ambient temperature y 60 °C (1)
resistive loads: time constant ---
-
R
Rated No. of Contactor rating (1)
opera- poles LC1 LC1 LC1 LC1 LC1 LC1 LC1 LC1 LC1/
tional connec- D09 DT20 D12 D18 D25 DT60 D32 D38 LP1
voltage ted in DT25 DT32 DT40 D40
Ue series
V
24 1 20 20 20 25 32 40 40 40 50
2 20 20 20 25 32 40 40 40 50
3 20 20 20 20 32 40 40 40 50
4 – 20 20 – 32 40 – – 50
48/75 1 20 20 20 25 32 40 40 40 50
2 20 20 20 25 32 40 40 40 50
3 20 20 20 25 32 40 40 40 50
– + 4 – 20 20 – 32 40 – – 50
– + 125 1 4 4 4 4 7 7 7 7 7
2 20 20 20 25 32 40 40 40 50
3 20 20 20 25 32 40 40 40 50
4 – 20 20 – 32 40 – – 50
225 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
2 4 4 4 4 7 7 7 7 7
3 20 20 20 25 32 40 40 40 50
4 – 20 20 – 32 40 – – 50
300 3 – – – – – – – – –
4 – 20 20 – 32 40 – – 50
460 1 – – – – – – – – –
4 – – – – – – – – –
900 2 – – – – – – – – –
5 1200 3 – – – – – – – – –
1500 4 – – – – – – – – –
Rated operational current (Ie) in Amperes, in utilisation category DC-2 to
L y 15 ms, ambient temperature y 60 °C (2)
DC-5, resistive loads: time constant ---
-
R
Rated No. of Contactor rating (1)

opera- poles LC1 LC1 LC1 LC1 LC1 LC1 LC1 LC1 LC1
tional connec- D09 DT20 D12 D18 D25 DT60 D32 D38 D40
voltage ted in DT25 DT32 DT40
Ue series
V
24 1 20 20 20 25 32 40 40 40 50
2 20 20 20 25 32 40 40 40 50
3 20 20 20 25 32 40 40 40 50
4 – 20 20 – 32 40 – – 50
48/75 1 8 8 8 8 32 40 40 40 50
2 20 20 20 25 32 40 40 40 50
3 20 20 20 25 32 40 40 40 50
– + 4 – 20 20 – 32 40 – – 50
– + 125 1 2 2 2 2 3 3 3 3 4
2 15 15 15 15 32 40 40 40 50
3 20 20 20 25 32 40 40 40 50
4 – 20 20 – 32 40 – – 50
225 1 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 1 1 1 1 1
2 2 2 2 2 3 3 3 3 4
3 8 8 8 8 32 40 40 40 50
4 – 20 20 – 32 40 – – 50
300 3 – – – – – – – – –
4 – 8 8 – 32 40 – – 50
460 1 – – – – – – – – –
4 – – – – – – – – –
900 2 – – – – – – – – –
1200 3 – – – – – – – – –
1500 4 – – – – – – – – –
(1) For rated operational currents of contactors LC1 and LP1 K: please consult your Regional
Sales Office.

5/170
5
5
LC1 LC1/ LC1/ LC1 LC1 LC1 LC1 LC1 LC1 LC1 LC1 LC1 LC1 LC1 LC1 LC1 LC1 LC1 LC1
D65 D80
65 65 100 100 200 200 240 260 300 360 430 580 850 1300 850 700 1100 1750 2400
65 65 100 100 200 200 240 260 300 360 430 580 850 1300 850 700 1100 1750 2400
65 65 100 100 200 200 240 260 300 360 430 580 850 1300 850 700 1100 1750 2400
– 65 100 – 200 – 240 260 300 360 430 580 850 1300 850 700 1100 1750 2400
65 65 100 100 200 200 240 260 300 360 430 580 850 1300 850 700 1100 1750 2400
65 65 100 100 200 200 240 260 300 360 430 580 850 1300 850 700 1100 1750 2400
65 65 100 100 200 200 240 260 300 360 430 580 850 1300 850 700 1100 1750 2400
– 65 100 – 200 – 240 260 300 360 430 580 850 1300 850 700 1100 1750 2400
7 7 12 12 200 200 210 230 270 320 380 520 760 1180 760 700 1100 1750 2400
65 65 100 100 200 200 210 230 270 320 380 520 760 1180 760 700 1100 1750 2400
65 65 100 100 200 200 240 260 300 360 430 580 850 1300 850 700 1100 1750 2400
– 65 100 – 200 – 240 260 300 360 430 580 850 1300 850 700 1100 1750 2400
1 1.5 1.5 1.5 10 10 – – – – – – – – – 700 1100 1750 2400
7 7 12 12 200 200 190 200 250 280 350 450 700 1000 700 700 1100 1750 2400
65 65 100 100 200 200 240 260 300 360 430 580 850 1300 850 700 1100 1750 2400
– 65 100 – 200 – 240 260 300 360 430 580 850 1300 850 700 1100 1750 2400
– – – – 200 200 190 200 250 280 350 450 700 1000 700 700 1100 1750 2400
– 65 100 – 200 – 240 260 300 360 430 580 850 1000 850 700 1100 1750 2400
– – – – – – – – – – – – – – – 700 1100 1750 2400
– – – – 200 – 190 200 250 280 350 450 700 1000 700 700 1100 1750 2400
– – – – – – – – – – – – – – – 700 1100 1750 2400
– – – – – – – – – – – – – – – 700 1100 1750 2400 5
– – – – – – – – – – – – – – – 700 1100 1750 2400
D65 D80
65 65 100 100 200 200 240 260 300 360 430 580 850 1300 850 700 1100 1750 2400
65 65 100 100 200 200 240 260 300 360 430 580 850 1300 850 700 1100 1750 2400
65 65 100 100 200 200 240 260 300 360 430 580 850 1300 850 700 1100 1750 2400
– 65 100 – 200 – 240 260 300 360 430 580 850 1300 850 700 1100 1750 2400
65 65 100 100 200 200 240 260 300 360 430 580 850 1300 850 700 1100 1750 2400
65 65 100 100 200 200 240 260 300 360 430 580 850 1300 850 – – – –
65 65 100 100 200 200 240 260 300 360 430 580 850 1300 850 700 1100 1750 2400
– 65 100 – 200 – 240 260 300 360 430 580 850 1300 850 700 1100 1750 2400
4 4 5 5 200 200 – – – – – – – – – 700 1100 1750 2400
65 65 40 40 200 200 160 180 250 300 350 500 700 1000 700 700 1100 1750 2400
65 65 60 60 200 200 240 240 280 310 350 550 850 1000 850 700 1100 1750 2400
– 65 72 – 200 – 240 240 280 310 350 550 850 1000 850 700 1100 1750 2400
1 1.5 2 2 3 3 – – – – – – – – – 700 1100 1750 2400
4 4 5 5 200 200 140 160 220 280 310 480 680 900 680 700 1100 1750 2400
65 65 100 100 200 200 160 180 250 300 350 500 700 1000 700 700 1100 1750 2400
– 65 100 – 200 – 240 260 300 360 430 580 850 1300 850 700 1100 1750 2400
– – – – 200 200 140 160 220 280 310 480 680 900 680 700 1100 1750 2400
– 65 100 – 200 – 240 260 300 360 430 580 850 1300 850 700 1100 1750 2400
– – – – – – – – – – – – – – – 700 1100 1750 2400
– – – – 200 – 140 160 220 280 310 480 680 800 680 700 1100 1750 2400
– – – – – – – – – – – – – – – 700 1100 1750 2400
– – – – – – – – – – – – – – – 700 1100 1750 2400
– – – – – – – – – – – – – – – 700 1100 1750 2400
(2) Contactors LC1 F and LC1 B operating at an ambient temperature of 40 °C, have higher operational currents: please consult your Regional Sales Office.

5/171
Selection 5
TeSys contactors 5
Selection according to required electrical durability, use in categories DC-1 to DC-5

The criteria for contactor selection are:
b the rated operational current Ie,
b the rated operational voltage (Ue),
b the utilisation category and the time constant L/R,
b the required electrical durability.
Maximum operating rate (operating cycles)

The following operating rate must not be exceeded: 120 operating cycles/hour at rated operational current Ie.
LC1 D115, D150

LC1, LP1 D12
LC1, LP1 D25
LC1, LP1 D40
LC1, LP1 D65

LC1, LP1 D80
LC1 D32,
LC1 D09
LC1 D18
LC1 D38
LC1 D50
LC1 D95
10
8
6
4
1
0,8
0,6
0,4
0,2
5 0,1
0,08
0,06
0,04
0,02
0,01
0,2 0,3 0,4 0,5 0,6 0,8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 9 14 20 30 40 50 60 70 90 100

0,7 0,9 8 10 16 24 32 36 80
Power broken per pole in kW
Example
Series wound motor - P = 1.5 kW - Ue = 200 V - Ie = 7.5 A. Utilisation: reversing, inching.
b Utilisation category = DC-5.
b Select contactor LC1 D25 or LP1 D25 with 3 poles in series.
b The power broken is: Pc total = 2.5 x 200 x 7.5 = 3.75 kW.
b The power broken per pole is: 1.25 kW.
b The electrical durability read from the curve is u 106 operating cycles.
Use of poles in parallel

Electrical durability can be increased by using poles connected in parallel.
With N poles connected in parallel, the electrical durability becomes: electrical

durability read from the curves x N x 0.7.
Nota : 1
When the poles are connected in parallel, the maximum operational currents
indicated on pages 5/170 and 5/171 must not be exceeded.
Nota : 2
Ensure that the connections are made in such a way as to equalise the currents in
each pole.

5/172
TeSys contactors 5
Selection according to required electrical durability, use in categories DC-1 to DC-5

Determining the electrical durability
The electrical durability can be read directly from the curves below, having previously calculated the power broken as follows:
P broken = U broken x l broken.
The tables below give the values of Uc and Ic for the various utilisation categories.
Power broken
Utilisation categories: U broken I broken P broken
DC-1 Non inductive or slightly inductive loads Ue Ie Ue x Ie
DC-2 Shunt wound motors, breaking whilst motor running 0.1 Ue Ie 0.1 Ue x Ie
DC-3 Shunt wound motors, reversing, inching Ue 2.5 Ie Ue x 2.5 Ie
DC-4 Series wound motors, breaking whilst motor running 0.3 Ue Ie 0.3 Ue x Ie
DC-5 Series wound motors, reversing, inching Ue 2.5 Ie Ue x 2.5 Ie

LC1 F185, F225
LC1 F630, F800
LC1 BL, BM
LC1 F330
LC1 F500
LC1 F780
LC1 F265
LC1 F400
LC1 BR
LC1 BP
10
8
6
4
1
5
0,8
0,6
0,4
0,2
0,1
0,08
0,06
0,04
0,02
0,01
2 3 4 5 6 7 9 20 30 40 50 60 70 90 200 300 400 600 800 1000 4000

10 100 500 700 900 2000 3000 5000
Power broken per pole in kW
Example
Series wound motor: P = 40 kW - Ue = 200 V - Ie = 200 A. Utilisation: reversing, inching.
Utilisation category = DC-5.
b Select contactor LC1 F265 with 2 poles in series.
b The power broken is: Pc total = 2.5 x 200 x 200 = 100 kW.
b The power broken per pole is 50 kW.
b The electrical durability read from the curve is 400 0000 operating cycles.

5/173
Selection 5
TeSys contactors 5
For lighting circuits
General
The operating conditions of lighting circuits have the following characteristics:
b continuous duty: the switching device can remain closed for several days or even months,
b a dispersion factor of 1: all luminaires in the same group are switched on or off
simultaneously,
b a relatively high temperature around the device due to the enclosure, the presence of fuses,
or an unventilated control panel location.
This is why the operational current for lighting is lower than the value given for AC-1 duty.
Protection
The continuous duty current drawn by a lighting circuit is constant.
In fact:
b it is unlikely that the number of luminaires of an existing circuit will be modified,
b this type of circuit cannot create an overload of long duration.
It is therefore only necessary to provide short-circuit protection.
This can be provided by:
b gG type fuses, or
b modular circuit-breakers.
Nevertheless, it is always possible and sometimes more economical (smaller cable size) to
protect the circuit by a thermal overload relay and associated aM type fuses.
Distribution system
Single-phase circuit, 220/240 V
The tables on pages 5/175 to 5/179 are based on a single-phase 220/240 V circuit and can
therefore be applied directly in this case.
3-phase circuit, 380/415 V (with neutral)

The total number of lamps (N) to be switched simultaneously is divided into three equal groups,
each connected between one phase and neutral. The contactor can then be selected from the
220/240 V single-phase tables for a number of lamps equal to N ---- lamps.
3
3-phase circuit, 220/240 V

5 The total number of lamps (N) to be switched simultaneously is divided into three equal groups,
each connected between 2 phases (L1-L2), (L2-L3), (L3-L1). The contactor can then be selected
N- lamps.
from the 220/240 V single-phase table for a number of lamps equal to ------
3
Contactor selection tables

For the different types of lamps, the tables on pages 5/175 to 5/179 give the maximum number
of lamps of unit power P (in Watts), which can be switched simultaneously for each size of
contactor.
They are based on:
b a 220/240 V single-phase circuit,
b an ambient temperature of 55 °C (1), taking into account the operating conditions (see
General paragraph).
b an electrical life of more than 10 years (200 days' operation per year).
They take into account:
b the total current drawn (including ballast),
b transient phenomena which occur at switch-on,
b the starting currents and their duration,
b the circulation of any harmonics which may be present.
Lamps with compensating capacitor C (µF) connected in parallel

Parallel connected compensating capacitors C cause a current peak at the moment of switch-
on. To ensure that the value of this current peak remains compatible with the making
characteristics of the contactors, the unit value of the capacitance must not exceed the following:
Switching contactor LC1 LP1 LC1 LC1 LC1 LC1 LC1 LC1 LC1 LC1 LC1 LC1
rating K09 K09 D09 D12 D18 D25 D32 D38 D40 D50 D65 D80
Maximum unit value C (µF)
of parallel connected 7 3 18 18 25 60 96 96 120 120 240 240
compensating capacitor
Switching contactor LC1 LC1 LC1 LC1 LC1 LC1 LC1 LC1 LC1 LC1 LC1
rating D95 D115 D150 F185 F225 F265 F330 F400 F500 F630 F800
Maximum unit value C (µF)
of parallel connected 240 300 360 800 1200 1700 2500 4000 6000 9000 10 800
compensating capacitor
This value is independent of the number of lamps switched by the contactor.
(1) For an ambient temperature of 40 °C, multiply the number by 1.2.

5/174
TeSys contactors 5
Usual values
The tables show the following values:
b IB: value of current drawn by each lamp at its rated voltage,
b C: unit capacitance for each lamp,
corresponding to the values normally quoted by lamp manufacturers.
These values are given for an ambient temperature of 55 °C (for 40 °C, multiply the number by
1.2).
Incandescent and halogen lamps

P (W) 60 75 100 150 200 300 500 750 1000
IB (A) 0.27 0.34 0.45 0.68 0.91 1.40 2.30 3.40 4.60 LC1
Max. no. 35 28 21 14 10 6 4 2 2 K09
of lamps 59 47 35 23 17 11 7 4 3 D09, D12
according
77 61 46 30 23 15 9 6 4 D18
to P (W)
92 73 55 36 27 18 11 7 5 D25
129 103 77 51 38 25 15 10 7 D32, D38
163 129 97 64 48 31 19 13 9 D40
207 164 124 82 62 40 24 16 12 D50, D65
296 235 177 117 88 57 34 23 17 D80, D95
430 340 256 170 126 82 50 34 24 D115
466 370 280 184 138 90 54 36 26 D150
710 564 426 282 210 136 82 56 40 F185
770 610 462 304 228 148 90 60 44 F225
888 704 532 352 262 170 104 70 52 F265
1006 800 604 400 298 194 118 80 58 F330
1274 1010 764 504 378 244 148 100 74 F400
1718 1364 1030 682 508 330 200 136 100 F500
2328 1850 1396 924 690 448 272 184 136 F630
2776 2204 1666 1102 824 534 326 220 162 F800
Mixed lighting lamps

5
P (W) 100 160 250 500 1000
IB (A) 0.45 0.72 1.10 2.30 4.50 LC1
Max. no. 21 13 8 4 2 K09
of lamps 35 22 14 7 3 D09, D12
according
46 29 18 9 4 D18
to P (W)
55 36 23 11 5 D25
77 48 30 15 7 D32, D38
97 61 38 19 9 D40
124 77 49 24 12 D50, D65
177 111 70 34 17 D80, D95
256 160 104 50 26 D115
280 174 114 54 28 D150
426 266 174 82 42 F185
462 288 188 90 46 F225
532 332 218 104 52 F265
604 378 246 118 60 F330
764 478 312 150 76 F400
1030 644 422 202 102 F500
1398 874 572 272 140 F630
1666 1040 680 326 166 F800

5/175
TeSys contactors 5
Usual values
These values are given for an ambient temperature of 55 °C (for 40 °C, multiply the number by 1.2).
Fluorescent lamps with starter. Single fitting

Non corrected With parallel correction
P (W) 20 40 65 80 110 20 40 65 80 110
IB (A) 0.39 0.45 0.70 0.80 1.2 0.17 0.26 0.42 0.52 0.72
C (µF) – – – – – 5 5 7 7 16 LC1
Max. no. 24 21 13 12 8 56 36 22 18 – K09
of lamps 41 35 22 20 13 94 61 38 30 22 D09, D12
according
53 46 30 26 17 123 80 50 40 29 D18
to P (W)
66 57 37 32 21 152 100 61 50 36 D25
89 77 50 43 29 205 134 83 67 48 D32, D38
112 97 62 55 36 258 169 104 84 61 D40
143 124 80 70 46 329 215 133 107 77 D50, D65
205 177 114 100 66 470 367 190 153 111 D80, D95
410 354 228 200 132 940 614 380 306 222 D115, D150
492 426 274 240 160 1128 738 456 368 266 F185
532 462 296 260 172 1224 800 490 400 288 F225
614 532 342 300 200 1412 922 570 462 332 F265
696 604 388 340 226 1600 1046 648 522 378 F330
882 764 490 430 286 2024 1322 818 662 478 F400
1190 1030 662 580 386 2728 1724 1104 892 644 F500
1612 1398 698 786 524 3700 2418 1498 1210 874 F630, F800
5 Fluorescent lamps with starter. Twin fitting

Non corrected With series correction
P (W) 2x20 2x40 2x65 2x80 2x110 2x20 2x40 2x65 2x80 2x110
IB (A) 2x0.22 2x0.41 2x0.67 2x0.82 2x1.1 2x0.13 2x0.24 2x0.39 2x0.48 2x0.65 LC1
Max. no. 2x21 2x11 2x7 2x5 2x4 2x36 2x20 2x12 2x10 2x7 K09
of lamps 2x36 2x18 2x10 2x8 2x6 2x60 2x32 2x20 2x16 2x12 D09, D12
according
2x46 2x24 2x14 2x12 2x8 2x80 2x42 2x26 2x20 2x16 D18
to P (W)
2x58 2x30 2x18 2x14 2x10 2x100 2x54 2x32 2x26 2x20 D25
2x78 2x42 2x26 2x20 2x14 2x134 2x72 2x44 2x36 2x26 D32, D38
2x100 2x52 2x32 2x26 2x18 2x168 2x90 2x56 2x44 2x32 D40
2x126 2x68 2x40 2x34 2x24 2x214 2x116 2x70 2x58 2x42 D50, D65
2x180 2x96 2x58 2x48 2x36 2x306 2x166 2x102 2x82 2x60 D80, D95
2x360 2x194 2x118 2x96 2x72 2x614 2x332 2x204 2x166 2x122 D115, D150
2x436 2x234 2x142 2x116 2x86 2x738 2x400 2x246 2x200 2x148 F185
2x472 2x254 2x154 2x126 2x94 2x800 2x432 2x266 2x216 2x160 F225
2x544 2x292 2x178 2x146 2x108 2x922 2x500 2x308 2x250 2x184 F265
2x618 2x332 2x202 2x166 2x124 2x1046 2x566 2x348 2x282 2x208 F330
2x782 2x420 2x256 2x210 2x156 2x1322 2x716 2x440 2x358 2x264 F400
2x1054 2x566 2x346 2x282 2x210 2x1784 2x966 2x594 2x482 2x356 F500
2x1430 2x766 2x468 2x384 2x286 2x2418 2x1310 2x806 2x654 2x484 F630, F800

5/176
TeSys contactors 5
Usual values
Fluorescent lamps without starter. Single fitting

P (W) 20 40 65 80 110 20 40 65 80 110
IB (A) 0.43 0.55 0.80 0.95 1.4 0.19 0.29 0.46 0.57 0.79
C (µF) – – – – – 5 5 7 7 16 LC1
Max. no. 22 17 12 10 6 50 33 20 16 – K09
of lamps 37 29 20 16 11 84 55 34 28 20 D09, D12
according
48 38 26 22 15 110 72 45 36 26 D18
to P (W)
60 47 32 27 18 136 89 56 45 32 D25
97 63 43 36 25 184 101 76 61 44 D32, D38
102 80 55 46 31 231 151 95 77 55 D40
130 101 70 58 40 294 193 121 98 70 D50, D65
186 145 100 84 57 421 275 173 140 101 D80, D95
372 290 200 168 114 842 550 346 280 202 D115, D150
446 348 240 202 136 1010 662 416 336 242 F185
484 378 260 218 148 1094 716 452 364 262 F225
558 436 300 252 170 1262 828 522 420 304 F265
632 494 340 286 194 1432 938 590 476 344 F330
800 624 430 362 246 1810 1186 748 604 434 F400
1078 844 580 488 330 2442 1600 1008 814 586 F500
1462 1144 786 662 448 3310 2168 1366 1104 796 F630, F800
Fluorescent lamps without starter. Twin fitting 5

Non corrected With series correction
P (W) 2x20 2x40 2x65 2x80 2x110 2x20 2x40 2x65 2x80 2x110
IB (A) 2x0.25 2x0.47 2x0.76 2x0.93 2x1.3 2x0.14 2x0.26 2x0.43 2x0.53 2x0.72 LC1
Max. no. 2x19 2x10 2x6 2x5 2x3 2x34 2x18 2x11 2x9 2x6 K09
of lamps 2x32 2x16 2x10 2x8 2x6 2x56 2x30 2x18 2x14 2x10 D09, D12
according
2x42 2x22 2x12 2x10 2x8 2x74 2x40 2x24 2x18 2x14 D18
to P (W)
2x52 2x26 2x16 2x12 2x10 2x92 2x50 2x30 2x24 2x18 D25
2x70 2x36 2x22 2x18 2x12 2x124 2x66 2x40 2x32 2x24 D32, D38
2x88 2x46 2x28 2x22 2x16 2x156 2x84 2x50 2x40 2x30 D40
2x112 2x58 2x36 2x30 2x20 2x200 2x106 2x64 2x52 2x38 D50, D65
2x160 2x84 2x52 2x42 2x30 2x234 2x152 2x92 2x74 2x54 D80, D95
2x320 2x170 2x104 2x86 2x60 2x570 2x306 2x186 2x150 2x110 D115, D150
2x384 2x204 2x126 2x102 2x74 2x686 2x368 2x222 2x180 2x132 F185
2x416 2x220 2x136 2x112 2x80 2x742 2x400 2x242 2x196 2x144 F225
2x480 2x254 2x158 2x128 2x92 2x856 2x462 2x278 2x226 2x166 F265
2x544 2x288 2x178 2x146 2x104 2x970 2x522 2x316 2x256 2x188 F330
2x688 2x366 2x226 2x184 2x132 2x1228 2x662 2x400 2x324 2x238 F400
2x928 2x494 2x304 2x248 2x178 2x1656 2x892 2x540 2x438 2x322 F500
2x1258 2x668 2x414 2x338 2x242 2x2246 2x1210 2x730 2x592 2x436 F630, F800

5/177
TeSys contactors 5
Usual values
Low pressure sodium vapour lamps

P (W) 35 55 90 135 150 180 200 35 55 90 135 150 180 200
IB (A) 1.2 1.6 2.4 3.1 3.2 3.3 3.4 0.3 0.4 0.6 0.9 1 1.2 1.3
C (µF) – – – – – – – 17 17 25 36 36 36 36 LC1
Max. no. 6 5 3 2 2 2 2 – – – – – – – K09
of lamps 10 7 5 3 3 3 3 40 30 – – – – – D09, D12
according
12 9 6 4 4 4 4 50 37 25 – – – – D18
to P (W)
15 11 7 6 5 5 5 63 47 31 21 19 15 14 D25
21 16 10 8 8 7 7 86 65 43 28 26 21 20 D32, D38
27 20 13 10 10 10 9 110 82 55 36 33 27 25 D40
35 26 17 13 13 12 12 140 105 70 46 42 35 32 D50, D65
50 37 25 19 18 18 17 200 150 100 66 60 50 46 D80, D95
100 75 50 38 36 36 34 400 300 200 132 120 100 92 D115, D150
140 104 70 54 52 50 48 560 420 280 186 168 140 128 F185
152 114 76 58 56 54 54 606 454 302 202 182 152 140 F225
174 130 88 68 66 64 62 700 524 350 232 210 174 162 F265
198 148 98 76 74 72 70 792 594 396 264 238 198 182 F330
250 188 124 96 94 90 88 1002 752 502 334 300 250 252 F400
338 254 168 130 126 122 118 1352 1014 676 450 406 338 312 F500
496 372 248 192 186 180 174 1982 1488 992 660 594 496 458 F630, F800
5 High pressure sodium vapour lamps

P (W) 150 250 400 700 1000 150 250 400 700 1000
IB (A) 1.9 3.2 5 8.8 12.4 0.84 1.4 2.2 3.9 5.5
C (µF) – – – – – 20 32 48 96 120 LC1
Max. no. 4 2 1 – – – – – – – K09
of lamps 6 3 2 1 – – – – – – D09, D12
according
7 4 3 1 1 17 – – – – D18
to P (W)
10 5 3 2 1 22 13 8 – – D25
13 8 5 2 2 30 18 11 6 – D32, D38
17 10 6 3 2 39 23 15 8 6 D40
22 13 8 4 3 50 30 19 10 7 D50, D65
31 18 12 6 4 71 42 27 15 10 D80, D95
62 36 24 12 8 142 84 54 30 20 D115, D150
88 52 34 18 14 200 120 76 42 30 F185
96 56 36 20 16 216 130 82 46 32 F225
110 66 42 24 18 250 150 94 54 38 F265
124 74 48 26 20 282 170 108 60 42 F330
158 94 60 34 24 358 214 136 76 54 F400
214 126 80 46 32 482 290 184 104 74 F500
312 186 118 68 48 708 424 270 152 108 F630, F800

5/178
TeSys contactors 5
Usual values
High pressure mercury vapour lamps

P (W) 50 80 125 250 400 700 1000 50 80 125 250 400 700 1000
IB (A) 0.54 0.81 1.20 2.30 4.10 6.80 9.90 0.3 0.45 0.67 1.3 2.3 3.8 5.5
C (µF) – – – – – – – 10 10 10 18 25 40 60 LC1
Max. no. 14 9 6 3 1 – – – – – – – – – K09
of lamps 22 14 9 5 2 1 1 40 26 17 9 – – – D09, D12
according
27 18 12 6 3 2 1 50 33 22 11 6 – – D18
to P (W)
35 23 15 8 4 2 1 63 42 28 14 8 5 3 D25
48 32 21 11 6 3 2 86 57 38 20 11 6 4 D32, D38
61 40 27 14 8 4 3 110 73 49 25 14 8 6 D40
77 51 34 17 10 6 4 140 93 62 32 18 11 7 D50, D65
111 74 49 26 14 8 6 200 133 89 46 26 15 10 D80, D95
222 148 100 52 28 16 12 400 266 178 92 52 30 20 D115, D150
310 206 140 72 40 24 17 560 372 250 128 72 44 30 F185
336 224 152 78 44 26 18 606 404 272 140 78 48 32 F225
388 258 174 90 50 30 20 700 466 312 162 90 54 38 F265
440 294 198 102 58 34 24 792 528 354 182 102 62 42 F330
556 372 250 130 72 44 30 1002 668 448 232 130 78 54 F400
752 500 338 176 98 60 40 1352 902 606 312 176 106 74 F500
1102 734 496 258 144 88 60 1982 1322 888 458 258 156 108 F630, F800
Metal iodine vapour lamps 5

P (W) 250 400 1000 2000 250 400 1000 2000
IB (A) 2.5 3.6 9.5 20 1.4 2 5.3 11.2
C (µF) – – – – 32 32 64 140 LC1
Max. no. 3 2 – – – – – – K09
of lamps 4 3 1 – – – – – D09, D12
according
6 4 1 – – – – – D18
to P (W)
7 5 2 – 13 9 – – D25
10 7 2 1 18 13 4 – D32, D38
13 9 3 1 23 16 6 – D40
16 11 4 2 30 21 7 – D50, D65
24 16 6 3 42 30 11 5 D80, D95
48 32 12 6 84 60 22 10 D115, D150
66 46 18 8 120 84 32 14 F185
72 50 20 10 130 90 34 16 F225
84 58 22 12 150 104 40 18 F265
94 66 24 14 170 118 44 20 F330
120 84 32 16 214 150 56 26 F400
162 112 42 20 290 202 76 36 F500
238 164 62 30 424 298 112 52 F630, F800

5/179
Selection 5
TeSys contactors 5
For heating circuits
Selection
General
A heating circuit is a power switching circuit supplying one or more resistive heating elements
switched by a contactor.
The same general rules apply as for motor circuits, except that heating circuits are not normally
subjected to overload currents. It is therefore only necessary to provide short-circuit protection.
Characteristics of heating elements

The examples below are based on resistive heating elements used for industrial furnaces or for
the heating of buildings (infra-red or resistive radiant type, convector heaters, closed loop
heating circuits, etc.).
The variation in resistance values between hot and cold states causes a current peak at switch-
on which never exceeds 2 to 3 times the rated operational current (In). This initial peak does not
recur during normal operation where subsequent switching is thermostatically controlled.
The rated power and current of a heater are given for the normal operating temperature.
Protection
The steady state current drawn by a heating circuit is constant when the voltage is stable.
In fact:
b It is unlikely that the number of loads in an existing circuit will be modified;
b This type of circuit cannot create overloads. It is therefore only necessary to provide short-
circuit protection.
This can be provided by:
b gG type fuses, or
b modular circuit-breakers.
Nevertheless, it is always possible and sometimes more economical (smaller cable size) to
protect the circuit by a thermal overload relay and associated aM type fuses.
Switching, control, protection

A heating element or group of heating elements of a given power may be either single-phase or
3-phase and may be supplied from a 220/127 V or a 400/230 V distribution system.
Excluding a single-phase 127 V system (which is no longer commonly used), the following 3
types of circuit arrangement are possible:
b Single-phase, 2-pole switching
5 b Single-phase, 4-pole switching
b 3-phase switching
Component selection according to the power switched

The combinations suggested below are based on an ambient temperature of 55 °C and for
powers at the nominal voltage, but they also ensure switching in the event of prolonged
overloads up to 1.05 Ue.
Single-phase, 2-pole switching

Maximum power (kW) Contactor rating
220/240 V 380/415 V 660/690 V 1000 V
U 3.5 6.5 11 – LC1, LP1 K09
4.5 8 14 – LC1 D12
6 10.5 18.5 – LC1 D18
7 13 22.5 – LC1 D25
10 18 30.5 – LC1 D32, LC1 D38
– KM1
13 22.5 39.5 48 LC1 D40
16.5 28.5 43.5 68 LC1, LP1 D65
24 42 73 82.5 LC1, LP1 D80
44 76 118 157 LC1 D115, LC1 D150
Circuit controlled by 2 poles of the contactor. 48 83 130 170 LC1 F185
52 90 145 185 LC1 F225
60 104 160 210 LC1 F265
75 130 200 250 LC1 F330
86 145 230 300 LC1 F4002
116 200 310 400 LC1 F5002
170 290 450 695 LC1 F6302, LC1 F800
270 460 715 945 LC1 F780
140 242 370 490 LC1 BL32
220 380 580 770 LC1 BM32
350 605 925 1225 LC1 BP32
480 830 1270 1680 LC1 BR32

5/180
TeSys contactors 5
For heating circuits
Component selection according to the power switched

(continued)
220/240 V 380/415 V 660/690 V 1000 V
U 4.5 8 13.5 – LC1, LP1 K09004
7 13 22.5 – LC1 DT25
12 21 36.5 – LC1 DT40
26 45.5 79.5 109 LC1, LP1 D65004
38 66 117.5 132 LC1, LP1 D80004
– KM1 70 121 190 251 LC1 D115004
76 132 202 270 LC1 F1854
80 142 230 295 LC1 F2254
96 166 253 335 LC1 F2654
120 205 320 400 LC1 F3304
Circuit controlled by a 4-pole contactor with the poles
parallel connected in pairs using appropriate connecting 137 236 363 480 LC1 F4004
links. This solution enables the control of power values 185 320 490 650 LC1 F5004
approximately equivalent to those controlled by the
same contactor on 3-phase.
272 470 718 950 LC1 F6304
425 735 1140 1520 LC1 F7804
224 387 590 785 LC1 BL34
352 608 930 1230 LC1 BM34
560 968 1478 1960 LC1 BP34
768 1328 2025 2685 LC1 BR34
3-phase switching
220/240 V 380/415 V 660/690 V 1000 V
U 4.5 8 13.5 – LC1, LP1 K09
U U
7 13 22.5 – LC1 D12
10
13
18
22.5
30.5
39.5
–
–
LC1 D18
LC1 D25
5
18 31 52.5 – LC1 D32, LC1 D38
– KM1
22.5 38 68 78 LC1 D40
28.5 49 86 112.5 LC1, LP1 D65
40.5 70.5 126 135.5 LC1, LP1 D80
76 131 206 275 LC1 D115, LC1 D150
82 143 220 295 LC1 F185
90 155 250 320 LC1 F225
103 179 275 370 LC1 F265
Circuit controlled by 3 poles of the contactor.
130 225 345 432 LC1 F330
149 256 395 525 LC1 F400
200 346 530 710 LC1 F500
294 509 780 1030 LC1 F630, LC1 F800
463 800 1235 1650 LC1 F780
242 419 640 850 LC1 BL33
380 658 1005 1350 LC1 BM33
606 1047 1600 2150 LC1 BP33
830 1437 2200 2950 LC1 BR33
Application example For a 220 V, 50 Hz, single-phase circuit supplying a total heating
load of 12.5 kW.
Select: a 3-pole contactor LC1 D65 or LP1 D65.
(1) See complete contactor references on pages 5/58 to 5/61 or consult your Regional Sales
Office.

5/181
Selection 5
TeSys contactors 5
For switching the primaries

of 3-phase LV/LV transformers
Maximum ambient temperature: 55 °C.
When a transformer is switched on, there is generally an initial current surge which reaches its
peak value almost instantaneously and then decreases in a largely exponential manner to
quickly reach its steady state value.
The value of this current depends on:

b the characteristics of the magnetic circuit and of the windings (cross sectional area of the
core, rated inductance, number of turns, layout and size of the windings, ...)
b the performance of the magnetic laminations used,
b the magnetic state of the circuit and the instantaneous value of the a.c. mains voltage at the
moment of switch-on.
The inrush current at the moment of switch-on can reach 20 to 40 times the rated current for the
various kVA power ratings in the tables below. This value is independent of the "no-load" or "on-
load" state of the transformer.
Contactor selection
The peak magnetising current of the transformer must be lower than the values given in the
tables below.
Maximum operating rate: 120 operating cycles/hour.
Contactor rating LC1/ LC1/ LC1 LC1 LC1 LC1 LC1 LC1 LC1 LC1 LC1 LC1 LC1 LC1 LC1
LP1 LP1 D09 D12 D18 D25 D32 D38 D40 D50 D65 D80 D95 D115 D150
K06 K09
Maximum permissible A 160 225 350 350 420 630 770 770 1100 1250 1400 1550 1650 1800 2000
current peak at switch-on
Maximum operational power (1) 220 V kVA 2 2.5 4 4 5 7 8.5 8.5 14 16 18 19.5 19.5 25 25
240 V
380 V kVA 3.5 5 7 7 8 12.5 15 15 24 27 31 34 34 50 50
400 V
415 V kVA 4 5.5 8 8 9 14 17 17 28 32 36 39 39 55 55
440 V
5 500 V kVA 5 7 9 9 11 16.5 20 20 32 36 40 45 45 65 65
660 V kVA 6 8.5 12 12 14 21.5 26.5 26.5 42 48 53 59 59 80 80

690 V
1000 V kVA – – – – – – – – 60 70 80 85 95 100 100
Contactor rating LC1 LC1 LC1 LC1 LP1 LC1 LC1 LC1 LC1 LC1 LC1 LC1 LC1
F185 F225 F265 F330 F400 F500 F630 F780 F800 BL BM BP BR
Maximum permissible A 2900 3300 3800 5000 6300 7700 9000 12 000 11 000 18 000 18 000 24 000 30 000
Maximum operational power (1) 220 V kVA 40 45 50 65 75 100 120 175 145 230 230 300 380
240 V
380 V kVA 75 80 90 120 130 170 200 280 245 400 400 530 660
400 V
415 V kVA 80 90 100 130 140 190 220 310 270 450 450 560 700
440 V
500 V kVA 95 100 110 140 170 225 260 350 315 480 480 600 750
660 V kVA 120 130 140 170 200 270 350 400 425 600 600 800 950
690 V
1000 V kVA 150 170 200 225 250 375 470 650 550 700 700 1000 1200
(1) Maximum operational power corresponding to a current peak at switch-on of 30 In.

5/182
Selection 5
TeSys contactors 5
For switching 3-phase

capacitor banks used for
power factor correction
Standard contactors
Capacitors, together with the circuits to which they are connected, form oscillatory circuits which
can, at the moment of switch-on, give rise to high transient currents (> 180 In) at high frequencies
(1 to 15 kHz).
As a general rule, the peak current on energisation is lower when:
b the mains inductances are high,
b the line transformer ratings are low,
b the transformer short-circuit voltage is high,
b the ratio between the sum of the ratings of the capacitors already switched into the circuit and
that of the capacitor to be switched in is small (for multiple step capacitor banks).
In accordance with standards IEC 60070, NF C 54-100, VDE 0560, the switching contactor must
be able to withstand a continuous current of 1.43 times the rated current of the capacitor bank
step being switched.
The rated operational powers given in the tables below take this overload into account.
Short-circuit protection is normally provided by gI type HPC fuses rated at 1.7 to 2 In.
Contactor applications
Capacitors are directly switched. The values of peak current at switch-on must not exceed
the values indicated opposite.
An inductor may be inserted in each of the three phases supplying the capacitors to reduce the
peak current, if necessary.
Inductance values are determined according to the selected operating temperature.
Power factor correction by a single-step capacitor bank

The use of a choke inductor is unnecessary: the inductance of the mains supply is adequate to
limit the peak to a value compatible with the contactor characteristics.
Power factor correction by a multiple-step capacitor bank

Select a special contactor as defined on page 5/90.
If a standard contactor is used, it is essential to insert a choke inductor in each of the
three phases of each step.
Maximum operational power of contactors 5

Standard contactors
Maximum operating rate: 120 operating cycles/hour.
Electrical durability at maxiumum load: 100 000 operating cycles.
With choke inductors connected, where necessary.
Operational power at 50/60 Hz Max. Contactor

θ y 40 °C (1) θ y 55 °C (1) peak rating
current
220/240 V 400/440 V 600/690 V 220/240 V 400/440 V 600/690 V
kvAR kvAR kvAR kvAR kvAR kvAR A
6 11 15 6 11 15 560 LC1 D09, D12
9 15 20 9 15 20 850 LC1 D18
11 20 25 11 20 25 1600 LC1 D25
14 25 30 14 25 30 1900 LC1 D32, D38
17 30 37 17 30 37 2160 LC1 D40
22 40 50 22 40 50 2160 LC1 D50
22 40 50 22 40 50 3040 LC1 D65
35 60 75 35 60 75 3040 LC1 D80, D95
50 90 125 38 75 80 3100 LC1 D115
60 110 135 40 85 90 3300 LC1 D150
70 125 160 50 100 100 3500 LC1 F185
80 140 190 60 110 110 4000 LC1 F225
90 160 225 75 125 125 5000 LC1 F265
100 190 275 85 140 165 6500 LC1 F330
125 220 300 100 160 200 8000 LC1 F400
180 300 400 125 220 300 10 000 LC1 F500
250 400 600 190 350 500 12 000 LC1 F630
250 400 600 190 350 500 14 200 LC1 F800
200 350 500 180 350 500 25 000 LC1 BL
300 550 650 250 500 600 25 000 LC1 BM
500 850 950 400 750 750 25 000 LC1 BP
600 1100 1300 500 1000 1000 25 000 LC1 BR
(1) Upper limit of temperature category conforming to IEC 60070.

5/183
Recommended TeSys contactors 5
wiring scheme, For auto-transformer starting

operation,
curves 5
Applications
Auto-transformer starting is suitable for starting all types of squirrel cage motors: with 3, 6 or even 9 terminals according to North American
technology.
Starting is performed at reduced voltage and produces maximum torque at minimum line current.
It allows the starting torque (C = f(U)2) to be adapted to the resistive torque of the driven machine by means of the 2 or 3 intermediate voltage
take-off connections on the auto-transformer (0.65 and 0.8 Un or 0.5, 0.65 and 0.8 Un). In general, only one take-off connection is used.
This type of starting is used for high power and/or high inertia machines.
The motor is never disconnected from its power supply during starting (closed transition) and transient phenomena are eliminated.
Recommended wiring scheme

1/L1
3/L2
5/L3
– F3 – F2
96 95 96 95 14 13 2 1
– Q1/2
– Q1 – Q1 – F1
21
1 2
3 4
5 6
– S1
13 22
– F2
2
– S2
55 14
1
– KM3 – KM2
13
13
13
U1 2
V1 4
W1 6
2
– KA1 – KM1 – KM3 – KM2
14
14
14
56
– T1
51
61
61
13
U3 – KM3 – KM1 – KA1 – KM3
V3
A1 52
A1 62
A1 62
A1 14
W3
– T3
1
2 U2
6 W2
4 V2
U
5 M
A2
A2
A2
A2
– KM1
6
3
– Q1/6
1
– KM1 – KM3 – KM2 – KA1 – F3
Operation
Starting is performed in 3 stages:
b star connection of the auto-transformer is made by KM1, then contactor KM2 closes and the motor starts under reduced voltage;
b the neutral point is opened by KM1; part of the auto-transformer winding is switched into each phase for a short moment, constituting a stator
starting inductance;
b KM3 switches the motor to full mains voltage and causes the auto-transformer to be shunted out of circuit by KM2.
The auto-transformer used generally has an air gap (adjusted or not) in order to obtain, during the second phase of starting, a series inductance
whose value is compatible with correct starting.
Operating curves
XIN XCN
Current
Torque
7 2,5
ID 6
2
5
1
1,5
4
1
I2 3 CN 1
2
2
2
0,5
IN 1 3
0 0
0 0,25 0,50 0,75 1 0 0,25 0,50 0,75 1
Speed Speed
1 Direct switching current 1 Direct motor torque

2 Current with auto-transformer 2 Torque with auto-transformer
3 Resistive torque of the machine
5/184
Combination starters TeSys contactors 5

For auto-transformer starting
Auto-transformer starters from 59 to 900 kW up to 440 V (type 1 coordination)

The components recommended in the table below have been determined according to the following characteristics:
b auto-transformer: on 0.65 Un connection with non adjusted air gap,
b 3 starts per hour, of which 2 consecutive,
b Motor starting current: Id/In = 6,
b Iq = 70 kA,
b Transient current on closing of KM3 y 7 √2 In,
b Maximum starting time: 30 seconds,
b Ambient temperature θ y 40 °C.
Switch-disconnector-fuses: operators and accessories, please consult your Regional Sales Office.
Contactors: 3-pole.
LC1 D: see pages 5/58 and 5/59,
LC1 F: please consult your Regional Sales Office,
LC1 B: please consult your Regional Sales Office.
Auxiliary contact blocks:

b for contactors LC1 D: one LAD N11 (1 N/O + 1 N/C) on KM1,
b for contactors LC1 F: one LAD N22 (2 N/O + 2 N/C) on KM1, KM2 and KM3.
Thermal overload relays:

b LR: see pages 6/16 to 6/19,
b LR9 D: see pages 6/17 to 6/19,
b LR9 F: please consult your Regional Sales Office.
Standard power ratings Switch- aM fuses Contactors Overload relays

of 3-phase motors disconnector- Size Rating KM3 KM2 KM1 Reference Setting
50/60 Hz in category AC-3 fuse (1) range
LC1 LC1 LC1
Reference
220/ 380/ 415 V 440 V In
230 V 400 V max
kW kW kW kW A A A 5
30 55 59 59 105 GS1 K 22 x 58 125 D115 D115 D3210 LR9 D5369 90…150
LRD 4367 95…120
40 75 80 80 138 GS1 L T0 160 D150 D115 D5011 LR9 D5369 90…150
LRD 4369 110…140
51 90 90 100 170 GS1 N T1 200 F185 D115 D5011 LR9 F5371 132…220
63 110 110 110 205 GS1 N T1 250 F225 D150 D8011 LR9 F5371 132…220
75 132 132 150 245 GS1 N T1 250 F265 F185 D115 LR9 F5375 200…330
90 160 160 185 300 GS1 QQ T2 315 F330 F265 D115 LR9 F5375 200…330
110 200 200 220 370 GS1 QQ T2 400 F400 F330 D115 LR9 F5379 300…500
140 250 257 280 460 GS1 S T3 500 F500 F400 D115 LR9 F5379 300…500
180 315 355 375 584 GS1 S T3 630 F630 F400 D185 LR9 F5381 380…630
200 355 375 400 635 GS1 V T4 800 F800 F500 F185 TC800/1 + 505…800
LRD 05
220 400 425 450 710 GS1 V T4 800 F800 F500 F265 TC800/1 + 505…800
LRD 05
250 450 475 500 800 GS1 V T4 800 F800 F500 F265 TC1000/1 + 630…1000
LRD 05
280 500 530 560 900 GS1 V T4 1000 BM33p22 F630 F330 TC1000/1 630…1000
LRD 05
315 560 600 630 1000 GS1 V T4 1000 BM33p22 F630 F400 TC1250/1 790…1250
LRD 05
335 630 670 710 1100 GS1 V T4 1250 BP33p22 F630 F400 TC1250/1 790…1250
LRD 05
400 710 750 800 1260 On base T4 2 x 800 BP33p22 F780 F400 TC1500/1 945…1500
(2) LRD 05
450 800 800 800 1450 On base T4 2 x 800 BP33p22 F780 F400 TC1750/1 100…1750
(2) LRD 05
500 900 900 900 1600 On base T4 2 x 800 BR33p22 F780 F500 TC2000/1 260…2000
(2) LRD 05
(1) For power ratings greater than or equal to 400 kW at 415 V, use one LRD-05 on the current transformer.
(2) Check with the motor manufacturer whether the fuses should be fitted in parallel.
5/185
Operation 5
TeSys contactors 5
For rotor circuits of slip-ring motors
Applications
These contactors are used to eliminate starting resistance in the rotor circuit of slip-
ring motors.
The most common application is for starters without inching and without rotor speed
adjustment: pumps, fans, conveyors, compressors, ...
In the case of control by means of a manually operated master controller, the use of
contactors with magnetic blow-out is recommended. Please consult your Regional
Sales Office.
For hoisting applications, contactor selection must take into account the type of
motor duty, the operating rate, the rotor voltage and current, the type of connection,
the ambient temperature, etc.
Operation
The rotor circuit contactors are interlocked with the stator contactor and therefore do
not open until after the stator contactor has opened, when the rotor voltage has
disappeared, or virtually disappeared.
They make the current corresponding to the normal starting peak (1.5 to 2.5 times
the rated rotor current) and open the circuit under no-load. Making and breaking are
easy.
Different types of rotor connection

Star connection Delta connection
’V’ connection ’W’ connection
5/186
Selection 5
TeSys contactors 5
For rotor circuits of slip-ring motors
Contactor selection according to the type of connection

Rotor current and voltage coefficients
Coefficients to be applied to the operational current values shown in the table below.
Type of connection Rotor I coefficient 3-phase rotor Ue (1)

Maximum With counter-current
Operational I LC1 F LC1 B LC1 F LC1 B
Star 1 2000 V 2000 V 1000 V 1000 V
Delta 1.4 1700 V 1700 V 850 V 850 V
In V 1 1700 V 1700 V 850 V 850 V
In W 1.6 1700 V 1700 V 850 V 850 V
Selection according to the operational current

The selection examples below take into account:
b a ratio of 2 between the maximum operational rotor voltage (Uer) and the rated stator operational voltage (Ues). This ratio is given in standard
IEC 60947-4,
b a guarantee of occasional duty (making and breaking capacities) specified in the above standards.
Time current flowing Contactor rating

LC1 LC1 LC1 LC1 LC1 LC1 LC1 LC1 LC1 LC1 LC1
D150 F185 F265 F400 F500 F630 F780 BL BM BP BR
Intermediate contactor: with number of operating cycles y 30/h
10 s 450 A 550 A 800 A 1100 A 1500 A 2000 A 2500 A 2000 A 2400 A 3750 A 5000 A
30 s 280 A 400 A 550 A 730 A 1000 A 1500 A 2000 A 1200 A 1800 A 2600 A 3600 A
60 s 220 A 300 A 400 A 550 A 750 A 1200 A 1500 A 1000 A 1500 A 2200 A 3000 A
5
Intermediate contactor: with number of operating cycles y 60/h
5s 450 A 550 A 800 A 1100 A 1500 A 2000 A 2500 A 2000 A 2400 A 3750 A 5000 A
10 s 330 A 450 A 620 A 860 A 1250 A 1800 A 2300 A 1600 A 2200 A 3400 A 4500 A
30 s 220 A 300 A 400 A 550 A 750 A 1200 A 1500 A 1000 A 1500 A 2200 A 3000 A
Intermediate contactor: with number of operating cycles y 150/h for LC1 F and 120/h for LC1 B
5s 300 A 420 A 580 A 820 A 1150 A 1650 A 2200 A 1500 A 2100 A 3200 A 4200 A
10 s 250 A 350 A 430 A 600 A 850 A 1300 A 1600 A 1100 A 1600 A 2300 A 3200 A
Rotor short-circuit contactor and intermediate contactor:

with number of operating cycles > 150/h for LC1 F and 120/h for LC1 B
– 200 A 270 A 350 A 500 A 700 A 1000 A 1600 A 800 A 1250 A 2000 A 2750 A
For automatic starting, the electrical durability is in the region of 1 million operating cycles.
(1) For use up to 3000 V, please consult your Regional Sales Office.
5/187
General 5
TeSys contactors 5
Long distance remote control
Voltage drop caused by the inrush current

When the operating coil of a contactor is energised, the inrush current produces a
voltage drop in the control circuit cable caused by the resistance of the conductors,
which can adversely affect closing of the contactor.
An excessive voltage drop in the control circuit cables (both a.c. and d.c.) can lead
to non closure of the contactor poles or even destruction of the coil due to
overheating.
This phenomenon is aggravated by:
b a long line,
b a low control circuit voltage,
b a cable with a small c.s.a.,
b a high inrush power drawn by the coil.
The maximum length of cable, depending on the control voltage, the inrush power
and the conductor c.s.a. is indicated in the graphs below.
Remedial action
To reduce the voltage drop at switch-on:
b increase the conductor c.s.a.,
b use a higher control circuit voltage,
b use an intermediate control relay.
Selection of conductor c.s.a.
These graphs are for a maximum line voltage drop of 5%. They give a direct
indication of the copper conductor c.s.a. to be used for the control cable, depending
on its length, the inrush power drawn by the contactor coil and the control circuit
voltage (see example page 5/189).
Total resistance of the 2 conductors Total resistance of the 2 conductors

in the control cable in Ω (1) in the control cable in Ω (1)
1000 1000
5 100
5
4
100
10 10 A
3X B C
Y
DE
1 2 1
F
1
0,1 0,1
1 10 100 500 2000 10 100 500 5000
5 50 200 1000 50 150 1000 10 000
Inrush power drawn in VA Length of control cable in m (2)
C.s.a. of copper cables

1 a 24 V 3 a 115 V 5 a 400 V A 0.75 mm2 C 1.5 mm2 E 4 mm2
2 a 48 V 4 a 230 V 6 a 690 V B 1 mm2 D 2.5 mm2 F 6 mm2
Total resistance of the 2 conductors Total resistance of the 2 conductors

in the control cable in Ω (1) in the control cable in Ω (1)
1000 1000
100 100
10
10 10 A
9
BC
DE
1 8 1
F
7
0,1 0,1
1 10 100 500 2000 10 100 1000 10 000
5 50 200 1000 50 500 5000
Inrush power drawn in W Length of control cable in m (2)
C.s.a. of copper cables

7 c 24 V 9 c 125 V A 0.75 mm2 C 1.5 mm2 E 4 mm2
8 c 48 V 10 c 250 V B 1 mm2 D 2.5 mm2 F 6 mm2
(1) For 3-wire control, the current only flows in 2 of the conductors.
(2) This is the length of the cable comprising 2 or 3 conductors. (Distance between the contactor
and the control device).
5/188
TeSys contactors 5
Voltage drop caused by the inrush current (continued)

What cable c.s.a. is required for the control circuit of an LC1 D40, 115 V contactor,
operated from a distance of 150 metres?
b Contactor LC1 D40, voltage 115 V, 50 Hz: inrush power: 200 VA.
On the left-hand graph on the page opposite, point X is at the intersection of the
vertical line corresponding to 200 VA and the a 115 V voltage curve.
On the right-hand graph on the page opposite, point Y is at the intersection of the
vertical line corresponding to 150 m and the horizontal line passing through point X.
Use the conductor c.s.a. indicated by the curve which passes through point Y,
i.e.: 1.5 mm 2.
If point Y lies between two c.s.a. curves, choose the larger of the c.s.a. values.
Calculating the maximum cable length

The maximum permissible length for acceptable line voltage drop is calculated by the
formula:
U2
L = ___ .s.K
SA
where:
L : distance between the contactor and the control device in m, (length of the cable),
U : supply voltage in V,
SA : apparent inrush power drawn by the coil in VA,
s : conductor c.s.a. in mm2,
K : factor given in the table below.
a.c. supply SA in VA 20 40 100 150 200

5
K 1.38 1.5 1.8 2 2.15
d.c. supply Irrespective of the apparent inrush power SA, expressed in W

K = 1.38
5/189
TeSys contactors 5
Residual current in the coil due to cable capacitance

When the control contact of a contactor is opened the control cable capacitance is
effectively in series with the coil of the electromagnet. This capacitance can cause a
residual current to be maintained in the coil, with the risk that the contactor will remain
closed.
This only applies to contactors operating on an a.c. supply.
This phenomenon is aggravated by:

b a long line length between the coil control contact and the contactor, or between
the coil control contact and the power supply,
b a high control circuit voltage,
b a low coil consumption, sealed,
b a low value of contactor drop-out voltage.
The maximum control cable length, according to the contactor coil supply voltage, is
indicated in the graph on the page opposite.
Remedial action
Various solutions can be adopted to avoid the risk of the contactor remaining closed
due to cable capacitance:
b use a d.c. control voltage, or,
b add a rectifier, connected as shown in the scheme below, but retaining an a.c.
operating coil: in this way, rectified a.c. current flows in the control cable.
When calculating the maximum cable length, take the resistance of the conductors
into account.
5
Supply 50/60 Hz
– +
A1
L
A2
b Connect a resistor in parallel with the contactor coil (1).
Value of the resistance:
1
R Ω = ___ (C capacitance of the control cable)
10–3 C (µF)
Power to be dissipated:
U2
PW = ___
R
(1) To avoid increasing the voltage drop due to inrush current, this resistor must be brought into
operation after the contactor has closed by using an N/O contact.
5/190
TeSys contactors 5
Residual current in the coil due to cable capacitance (continued)

These graphs are for a capacitance, between 2 conductors, of 0.2 µF/km. They make
it possible to determine whether there is a risk of the contactor remaining closed due
to the power drawn by the coil when sealed, as well as the control circuit voltage,
according to the length of the control cable.
Cable capacitance in µF Cable capacitance in µF

100 100
10 1 10
2
1 1 7
3
8
0,1 A 4 0,1
5 B
0,01 6 0,01
1 5 7 10 50 100 100 300 500 1000 5000 10 000
Power drawn, sealed in VA Length of control cable in m
1 a 24 V 3 a 115 V 5 a 400 V 7 3-wire control

2 a 48 V 4 a 230 V 6 a 690 V 8 2-wire control
In the zones below the straight lines for 3-wire and 2-wire control respectively, there
is a risk of the contactor remaining closed.
Examples
What is the maximum length for the control cable of an LC1 D12 contactor, operating
on 230 V, with 2-wire control? 5
b Contactor LC1 D12, voltage 230 V, 50 Hz: power sealed 7 VA.
On the left-hand graph, point A is at the intersection of the vertical line for 7 VA with
the a 230 V voltage curve.
On the right-hand graph, point B is at the intersection of the horizontal line with the
2-wire control curve.
The maximum cable length is therefore 300 m.
In the same example, with a 600 m cable, the point lies in the risk zone. A resistor
must therefore be connected in parallel with the contactor coil.
Value of this resistance:

1 1
R = ___ = ___ = 8.3 Ω
10 –3 . C 10–3 . 0.12
Power to be dissipated:
U2 (220)2
P = ___ = ___ = 6 W
R 8300
Alternative solution: use a d.c. control supply.
Calculating the cable length

The maximum permitted length of control cable to avoid the effects of capacitance is
calculated using the formula:
S
L = 455 . ___
U2.Co
L : distance between the contactor and the control device in km (length of the cable),
S : apparent power, sealed, in VA,
U : control voltage in V,
Co : cable capacitance in µF/km.
5/191
Selection 5
TeSys contactors 5
For the North American market

Conforming to standards UL and CSA, 20 to 200 A
Selection
534278
Standard power ratings Size Associated Continuous Type of contactor required

of motors 50/60 Hz cable current Basic reference,
Single-phase 3-phase type to be completed (1)
1Ø 3Ø 75 °C-Cu
115 V 230 V 200 V 230 V 460 V 575 V Fixing, cabling (2)
240 V 208 V 240 V 480 V 600 V
HP HP HP HP HP HP A
LC1 D09pp 0.5 1 2 2 5 7.5 00 AWG10 20 LC1 D09pp
1 2 3 3 7.5 10 0 AWG10 25 LC1 D12pp

534279
1 3 5 5 10 15 0 AWG8 32 LC1 D18pp
2 3 5 7.5 15 20 1 AWG6 40 LC1 D25pp
2 5 7.5 10 20 30 1 AWG6 50 LC1 D32pp
3 5 10 10 30 30 2 AWG3 60 LC1 D40pp

LC1 D25pp
7.5 7.5 15 15 40 40 2 AWG3 70 LC1 D50pp
7.5 10 20 20 50 50 2 AWG3 80 LC1 D65pp

534280
7.5 15 20 25 60 60 2 AWG2 110 LC1 D80pp

5
7.5 15 20 25 60 60 2 AWG2 110 LC1 D95pp
– – 30 40 75 100 3 AWG2/0 175 LC1 D115pp
– – 40 50 100 125 4 AWG3/0 200 LC1 D150pp
LC1 D95pp
Application example
For a 15 HP-230 V motor Select a contactor type LC1 D50.
Information: the contactor rating selected corresponds to
size 2, the associated cable is type AWG3 75 °C-Cu.
(1) Standard control circuit voltages (for other voltages, please consult your Regional Sales Office) :
a.c. supply
Volts 24 42 48 110 115 220 230 240 380 400 415 440 500
LC1 D09…D150 (D115 and D150 coils with integral suppression device fitted as standard)
LC1 D40…D115
60 Hz B6 – E6 F6 – M6 – U6 Q6 – – R6 –
d.c. supply
Volts 12 24 36 48 60 72 110 125 220 250 440
LC1 D40…D95
LC1 D115 and D150 (coils with integral suppression device fitted as standard)
Low consumption
Volts c 5 12 20 24 48 110 220 250
LC1 D40 to D80 and LC1 D95: clip-on mounting on 35 or 75 mm 6 rail AM1 DL or screw fixing.
5/192
Selection 5
TeSys contactors 5
For the North American market

Conforming to standards UL and CSA, 200 to 1350 A
Selection
534281
(continued)
Standard power ratings Size Associated Continuous Type of contactor required
of motors 50/60 Hz cable current Basic reference, to be
Phases type 75 °C-Cu at 600 V max. completed by adding the
3Ø at I continuous voltage code
(1), (2)
200 V 230 V 460 V 575 V
208 V 240 V 480 V 600 V
HP HP HP HP A
50 60 125 150 4 AWG 3/0 200 LC1 F185pp
LC1 F225pp
60 75 150 150 4 300 MCM 250 LC1 F225pp
60 75 150 200 4 300 MCM 285 LC1 F265pp
75 100 200 250 5 600 MCM 370 LC1 F330pp

534282
100 125 250 300 5 600 MCM 420 LC1 F400pp
150 200 400 500 6 2 x 600 MCM 700 LC1 F500pp
250 300 600 800 7 3 x 600 MCM 1000 LC1 F630pp
– 400 900 – 8 3 x 600 MCM 1000 LC1 F800pp
LC1 F630pp
– 450 900 – 8 2 x 3 x 600 MCM 1350 LC1 F780pp
5
Application example
For a 60 HP-230 V motor Select a contactor TeSys LC1 F185.
Information: the contactor rating selected corresponds to
size 4, the associated cable is type AWG 3/0 75 °C-Cu.
(1) Auxiliary contact blocks, modules and accessories: see pages 5/110 to 5/115
Power terminals can be protected by the addition of shrouds, to be ordered separately. See page 5/114.
Volts a 24 48 110 120 208 220 240 380 415 440
LC1 F185 and F225
50 Hz (coil LX1) B5 E5 F5 – – M5 U5 Q5 N5 –
60 Hz (coil LX1) – E6 F6 G6 L6 M6 U6 Q6 – R6
40…400 Hz (coil LX9) – E7 F7 G7 L7 M7 U7 Q7 N7 R7
Volts a 48 110 120 208 220 240 380 415

LC1 F265…F780
40…400 Hz (coil LX1) E7 (3) F7 G7 (4) L7 M7 U7 Q7 N7
Volts c 24 48 110 125 220 250 440

LC1 F185…F780 BD (5) ED (6) FD GD MD UD RD
(3) LC1 F265 to F630 only.
(4) F7 for LC1 F630 and F780.
(5) LC1 F185 to F330 only.
(6) LC1 F265 to F630 only.
5/193
Selection guide 5
0
TeSys contactors 5
Variable composition standard and high

performance contactors
Applications b Motor switching in categories AC-3

b Resistive load switching : heating, etc.
b Distribution circuit switching : line contactor
b Supply changeover switching : circuit coupling etc
b Transformer, capacitor, lighting switching
Type Standard contactors
Rated operational current AC-3 80 A 200 A 250 A 350 A 460 A 700 A
5 AC-4/DC-5 – – – – – –
AC-1 80 A 200 A 300 A 470 A 630 A 1000 A
Rated operational voltage 690 V a 690 V a 690 V a 690 V a 690 V a 690 V a
Control circuit Standard applications

a.c. supply a d.c. supply c
A1
A1
A2
A1
A2
A2
Number of poles (P or R) 1 to 6
Contacteurs Type CV1
Calibre F G H J K L
Pages 5/196 to 5/199
5/194
5
0
5
b Motor switching in categories AC-4, DC-5

b Inductive circuit switching
b High voltage d.c. switching : crane electromagnets, railway locomotives
b Load switching at high operating rates
High performance contactors
80 A 170 A 250 A 300 A 460 A 750 A 1000 A 1500 A 1800 A
80/80 A 170/170 A 205/250 A 250/320 A 380/500 A 720/800 A 830/1000 A 1250/1800 A 1500/2500 A 5

80A 170 A 250A 320 A 500 A 800 A 1250 A 2000 A 2750 A
1000 V a 1000 V a 1000 V a 1000 V a 1000 V a 1000 V a 1000 V a 1000 V a 1000 V a
Low consumption applications

a.c. supply via economy resistor d.c. supply via economy resistor
– KM –R – KM –R
A1
A1
– KM – KM
A2
A2
1 to 4
CV3 CV3
F G H J K L M P R
5/195
References 5
TeSys contactors 5
Variable composition contactors TeSys

CV1 B (80 to 1000 A) and CV3 B (80 to 500 A)
Completed reference (see examples on page 5/197)

Type of contactor related to application
a 690 V, c 220 V/pole CV1 B
a 1000 V, c 440 V/pole CV3 B
Contactor rating
CV1 : 80 A CV3 : 80 A F
CV1 : 200 A CV3 : 170 A G
CV1 : 300 A CV3 : 250 A H
CV1 : 470 A CV3 : 320 A J
CV1 : 630 A CV3 : 500 A K
CV1 : 1000 A L
Number of poles (PN1 poles for CV1, PA3 poles for CV3)
N/O poles 1 N/O 1
2 N/O 2
3 N/O 3
4 N/O 4
5 N/O 5
N/C poles 1 N/C 1
2 N/C 2
3 N/C 3
No main poles 0 Z 0 Z
Operational current
11 A E E
20 A N N
40 A P P
80 A F F
125 A R R
170 A W W
200 A G G
250 A S S
5 300 A
320 A
H
T
H
T
400 A U U
470 A J J
500 A V V
630 A K K
1000 A L L
Control circuit voltage
24 V B
48 V E
110 V F
120 V K
208 V L
220 V M
230 V P
240 V U
380 V Q
400 V V
415 V N
440 V R
480 V T
500 V S
600 V X
Operating frequency
50 Hz 5
60 Hz 6
50/60 Hz 7
c D
c + economy resistor R
Auxiliary contacts
N/O instantaneous 1 N/O 1
2 N/O 2
3 N/O 3
4 N/O 4
N/C instantaneous 1 N/C 1
2 N/C 2
3 N/C 3
4 N/C 4
No instantaneous auxiliary contacts 0 0
On-delay 1 C/O J
Off-delay 1 C/O N
5/196
Selection 5
TeSys contactors 5

Guide to selection of code combinations

CV1 contactors: maximum number of power poles
Contactor CV1 BF CV1 BG CV1 BH CV1 BJ CV1 BK CV1 BL
type
Pole type PN PR PN PR PN PR PN PR PN PR PN PR
Number 5 0 5 0 5 0 4 0 4 0 2 0
of poles (1) (4)
0 2 0 2 0 2 0 2 0 2 4 0
(3)
1 2 1 2 2 1 – – 2 0 1
3 1 3 1 – – 2 1 – 1 2 1
(3)
CV3 contactors: maximum number of power poles

Contactor CV3 BF CV3 BG CV3 BH CV3 BJ CV3 BK
type
Pole type PA3 PR3 PA3 PR3 PA3 PR3 PA3 PR3 PA3 PR3
Number 5 0 5 0 4 0 3 0 3 0
of poles (1) (3)
(4)
0 2 0 2 0 2 – – – –
1 2 1 2 2 1 – – – –
3 1 3 1 – – – – – –
(2)
5
Selection restrictions, according to coil type:
(1) 4 PN, 0PR, with c electromagnet, direct.
(2) 2 PN, 1PR, with c electromagnet, direct.
(3) With a or c electromagnet + economy resistor.
(4) With c electromagnet.
Examples:
b Switching single-phase capacitor: 400 V - 80 A - 1 N/O main pole - 220 V / 50 Hz
control circuit voltage, 1 N/O and 1 N/C instantaneous auxiliary contacts.
Reference: CV1 BF1F0ZM511.
b Switching d.c. heating circuits: 800 V - 150 A - 2 N/O main poles - 48 V c control
circuit voltage, 1 N/O instantaneous.+ 1 C/O on-delay auxilairy contacts.
Reference: CV3 BG2W0ZED10J.
Other versions:
See page 5/199, order form CF452.
5/197
TeSys contactors 5

Selection restrictions (using the symbol combination table)

Contactor rating F G H J K L
Rated 11 A E – – – – –
operational
current 13 A M – – – – –
20 A N – – – – –
40 A P – – – – –
50 A Q Q – – – –
80 A F – – – – –
125 A – R R – – –
170 A – W – – – –
200 A – G G – – –
250 A – – – S – –
300 A – – H – – –
320 A – – – T – –
400 A – – – – U –
470 A – – – J – –
500 A – – – – V –
5 630 A – – – – K K
1000 A – – – – – L
0 Z Z Z Z Z Z
Without
arc chamber
5/198
Order form 5
TeSys contactors 5
Variable composition contactors,

TeSys CV1 and CV3
Date of order Editor Order n° Required delivery (1) Job n°

/ / | | / /
Company Customer Order N°
Number of identical contactors Type and rating
Power circuit
Operational voltage (Ue) .....................V
Number of N/O main poles .............. Operational current (Ie) ......... A a c P
Number of N/C main poles .............. Operational current (Ie) ......... A a c PR
Control circuit
a.c. voltage (a) ............. V Frequency .............. Hz

Electromagnet .....................................................................
d.c. voltage (c) ............. V Coil.......................................................................................
Coil maintaining contact.......................................................
Rectifier
Economy resistor: Yes No Economy resistor
Series or parallel
Customer marking Economy resistor contact
Auxiliary contacts
Number of instantaneous contacts: ZC4 GM1 (N/O) ............................. ZC4 GM2 (N/C) .............................
5
ZC1 GP5 (N/C+N/O)......................... ZC1 GP6 (N/O+N/O) ..........................
Number of time delay contacts: ZC2 GG1 (On-delay) ........................ ZC2 GG1 (Off-delay) ........................
(Maximum number: 1)
Note: a ZC1-GP4 contact (N/C) is mounted as standard for reversing contactor pairs.
Mounting
Contactors
Dimensions in catalogue: Yes No Dimensions not in catalogue
L = ............... mm
C = ............... mm
Vertically mounted reversers: Mechanical interlock: Yes No CM :
Contactor size: Upper position contactor:
Lower position contactor:
Comments and specifications (auxiliary contact layout, price, etc…)
(1) Standard delivery time: 15 days. For faster delivery, please consult your Regional Sales Office.
For use by Schneider Electric.
5/199
Selection, TeSys contactors 5
characteristics 5
3-pole vacuum contactors
and reversing contactors
Selection
Contactor size LC1 V160 LC1 V320 LC1 V610
Maximum operational A 160 320 610
current in AC-3
Rated operational 230 V kW 45 90 160
power P 400 V kW 75 160 300
(standard power ratings
525 V kW 110 220 400
of motors)
690 V kW 150 280 560
1000 V kW 200 400 800
1500 V kW 280 600 930
For 3-phase motors conforming to CSA standards
Rated operational 200 V hp 50 100 150
power P 240 V hp 60 125 200
(standard power ratings
380 V hp 100 200 300
of 3-phase CSA motors)
480 V hp 125 250 400
600 V hp 150 300 500
800 V hp 200 400 700
1000 V hp 250 500 1000
1500 V hp 400 800 1300
For switching 3-phase capacitors
Rated operational 240 V kVAR 47 94 176
power P 480 V kVAR 95 190 356
600 V kVAR 100 200 400
1500 V kVAR 250 500 1000
For switching the primaries of 3-phase transformers (LV/LV)
Rated operational 208 V kVA 20 41 81
power P 240 V kVA 23 47 94
480 V kVA 47 94 188
5 600 V kVA 59 117 234
Contactor type LC1 V160 LC1 V320 LC1 V610
Shock resistance Contacts closed 10 gn 10 gn 10 gn
(1/2 sine wave = 11 ms) Contacts open 10 gn 10 gn 10 gn
Vibration resistance 10…500 Hz 2 gn 2 gn 2 gn
Operating altitude Above sea level Maximum m 3600 3600 3600

Below sea level Minimum m 2500 4500 4500
Ambient air temperature Storage °C - 40…+ 80 - 40…+ 80 - 40…+ 80

around the device Operation °C - 5…+ 55 - 5…+ 55 - 5…+ 55
0.8… 1.1 Uc
Permissible for °C - 10…+ 75 - 10…+ 75 - 10…+ 75
operation at Uc
Degree of protection Conforming to IEC 60529 IP 00 IP 00 IP 00
Operating position Any Any Any
Cabling Cable c.s.a. mm 2 70 185 2 x 185

Key for hex. screws mm Allen 4 20 20
Rated insulation voltage (Ui) To earth V 2000 2000 2000
Consumption Inrush VA 300 600 1700

Sealed VA 30 20 28
Permissible control circuit voltage 0.8…1.1 Uc 0.8…1.1 Uc 0.8…1.1 Uc
Closing time (1) ms 18...22 24...32 24...32
Opening time (1) ms 95...115 95...115 95...115

contact of the main poles. The opening time "O" is measured from the moment the coil supply is
switched off to the moment the main poles separate.

page 5/202 page 5/204 page 5/204
5/200
TeSys contactors 5

Contactor type LC1 V160 LC1 V320 LC1 V610

Main pole characteristics
Rated insulation voltage (Ui) V 1500 1500 1500
Rated impulse withstand voltage (Uimp) kV 8 8 8
Conforming to standards EN 60947-4-1 - IEC 60947-4-1
Approvals CSA
Conventional rated thermal current (Ith) A 160 320 630
Rated operational current (Ie) θ y 40 °C AC-1 A 160 320 630

θ y 55 °C AC-3 A 160 320 610
θ y 55 °C AC-4 A 130 270 540
Electrical durability AC-1 1.2 1 1

in millions of operating cycles AC-3 1.6 1.5 1.5
(400 V at I max)
AC-4 0.18 0.15 0.12
Mechanical durability In millions of operating cycles 5 2.5 2
Maximum operating rate Mechanical 1200 1200 1200

in operating cycles AC-1 900 900 900
per hour
AC-3 900 900 900
AC-4 450 450 450
Maximum making capacity Ue = 1500 V To IEC 60947 A 1900 3800 7300

(lrms)
Maximum breaking capacity

(lrms)
Ue = 1500 V To IEC 60947 A 1600 3200 6100 5
Maximum For 1 s A 2400 4500 9000
permissible current For 2 s A 2000 3750 7580
For 10 s A 1600 3200 6100
For 30 s A 960 1920 3600
Short-circuit protection aM fuse A 160 400 630

at Ie in cat. AC-3 max.
Conventional rated thermal current (Ith) A 10
Rated operational current (Ie) AC-15, 230 V A 0.78

AC-15, 400 V A 0.45
AC-15, 500 V A 0.35
DC-13, 24 V A 1.1
DC-13, 110 V A 0.24
DC-13, 220 V A 0.12
Cabling Cable c.s.a. mm 2 2.5
Short-circuit protection gG fuse A 10
Operating time (1) "C" ms ±5

(at 100 % of Uc) "O" ms ±5
(1) Operating time in relation to the main contacts.

5/201
References 5
TeSys contactors 5

Power and control circuits
a.c. supply
Vacuum contactors
105194
Standard power ratings Rated Instan- Control Basic Weight

50/60 Hz operational taneous circuit reference (1)
in category AC-3 current auxiliary voltage
Ie contacts (50/60 Hz)
230 V 400 V 525 V 690 V 1000 V AC-3 AC-1

45 75 110 150 200 160 160 2 1 (1) LC1 V160pp 3.800
LC1 V320 90 160 220 280 400 320 320 1 1 (1) LC1 V320pp 10.500
160 300 400 560 800 610 630 1 1 (1) LC1 V610pp 13.000
Reversing vacuum contactors

L3
L2
L1
The reversing contactor range comprises :
b for 160 A rating, a kit with set of power connections allowing assembly of the
starter,
b for 320 and 610 A ratings, a complete starter, ready for use.
5 L3
3 L2
1 L1
5 L3
LC1V6
10 KM2
3 L2
1 L1
KM1
I
gf ON /
Standard power ratings Rated Instan- Control Basic Weight

/0
10 OFF
LC1V6 6 T3
4 T2
I
ON /
OFF
/0
6 T3
2 T1
50/60 Hz operational taneous circuit reference (1)

4 T2
2 T1
in category AC-3 current auxiliary voltage
Ie contacts (50/60 Hz)
230 V 400 V 525 V 690 V 1000 V AC-3 AC-1

LC2 V610 45 75 110 150 200 160 160 2 1 – LA9 V974 (2) 1.200
90 160 220 280 400 320 320 1 1 110-120 V LC2 V320FE7 30

5 220-240 V LC2 V320P7 30
380-415 V LC2 V320V7 30
160 300 400 560 800 610 630 1 1 110-120 V LC2 V610FE7 36
220-240 V LC2 V610P7 36
LA9 V974
(1) Basic reference; add code indicating control circuit voltage.

Standard control circuit voltages :
Volts 50/60 Hz 110…120 220…240 380…415 440…480 550…600
Item FE7 P7 V7 R7 X7
(2) Kit containing a mechanical interlock, a set of power connections and a fixing plate. To build
a complete reversing contactor, order contactors LC1 V160pp separately.

5/202
TeSys contactors 5

Power and control circuits
a.c. supply
Instantaneous auxiliary contact blocks (1)

Number of contacts Maximum number of Auxiliary Reference Weight
500308
blocks per contactor contacts
kg
2 4 1 1 LA1 VN11 0.030
LA1 VN11 – 2 LA1 VN02 0.030
2 – LA1 VN20 0.030
1 1 LA1 VN11X (2) 0.030
50/60 Hz coils
Rated voltage Voltage code Reference Weight
V kg
For contactors LC1 V160
110…120 FE7 LX1 V160FE7 0.400
220…240 P7 LX1 V160P7 0.400
380…415 V7 LX1 V160V7 0.400
440…480 R7 LX1 V160R7 0.400

500310
550…600 X7 LX1 V160X7 0.400

110…120 FE7 LX1 V320FE7 0.800
LX1 V320pp
220…240 P7 LX1 V320P7 0.800 5
380…415 V7 LX1 V320V7 0.800
440…480 R7 LX1 V320R7 0.800
550…600 X7 LX1 V320X7 0.800

110…120 FE7 LX1 V610FE7 0.800
220…240 P7 LX1 V610P7 0.800
380…415 V7 LX1 V610V7 0.800
440…480 R7 LX1 V610R7 0.800
550…600 X7 LX1 V610X7 0.800
(1) LC1 V160 : auxiliary contact blocks mounted at the top of the contactor, with no change to the
overall dimensions.
LC1 V320 or LC1 V610 : 2 auxiliary contact blocks mounted on the RH and LH side of the
contactor, with no change to the overall dimensions.
(2) For LC1 V160 : 1 N/C contact for the coil + 1 N/O contact.
Selection : Characteristics : References :

5/203
mounting, 3-pole vacuum contactors

schemes 5
LC1 V160
48
24 Ø7
9
500311
152
168
Ø7
151 36,5 36,5 24

123 48
LC1 V320
156 50 70
133 35 2xØ10,5
3,5
500312
2xØ8,5x19
2xØ8
222
185
203
191
2xØ8,5
130 37 63,5 63,5 38

9,5
159 201 48 76
5 170 15
LC1 V610
178
127 68 68
500313
2xØ8,5x19
222
203
356
328
2xØ8,5
172 15
9,5
95 32,5 68 68
201
Schemes
LC1 V160 LC1 V320, V610
1/L1
3/L2
5/L3
13/NO
21/NC
A1
1/L1
3/L2
5/L3
03/NO
13/NO
21/NC
A1
2/T1
4/T2
6/T3
2/T1
4/T2
6/T3
A2
14
22
A2
04
14
22

LA1 VN11 1 N/O & 1 N/C LA1 VN02 2 N/C LA1 VN20 2 N/O LA1 VN11X 1 N/O
NC
03/NO
51/NC
61/NC
33/NO
43/NO
21/NC
13/NO
coil
34
44
04
52
62
22
14
5/204
Dimensions, TeSys reversing contactors 5
mounting 5
3-pole reversing vacuum contactors
LA9 V974 + 2 x LC1V160
11,18
88,9
562320
53
152,4
151 254 215 48 81,8 48
177,8
LC2 V320
559
168 107 63 96 41
536047
16
54
=
22
446
463
356
5
63
104
54
=
241 108 63 48
418
616
LC2 V610
559
112
69 69 41
165
16
562322
L1 L2 L3
117
105
=
432
463
356
T1 T2 T3
=
199 68 68
112
616

5/205
Schemes 5
TeSys reversing contactors 5
LA9 V974 + 2 x LC1V160

1/L1
3/L2
5/L3
1
3
5
1
3
5
A1
A1
KM1 KM2
A2
A2
2
4
6
2
4
6
U
V
W
LC2 V320
1/L1
3/L2
5/L3
– F1
Stop
(1)
1
3
5
1
3
5
A1
A1
3
KM1 KM2
A2
A2
2
4
6
2
4
6
Start - KM1 - KM1 Start - KM2 - KM2
5
7
4
8
5
U
V
W
- KM2 - KM1
A1
A2
- KM1 - KM2
A2
A1
9
(1) Dotted line indicates wiring to be installed by the customer.

5/206
TeSys reversing contactors 5
LC2 V610
1/L1
3/L2
5/L3
– F1
Stop
1
3
5
1
3
5
A1
A1
(1)
KM1 KM2
3
A2
A2
2
4
6
2
4
6
Start Start
- KM1 - KM1 - KM2 - KM2
4
U
V
W
5
- KM2 - KM1
- KM1 - KM2
A1
A2
- KM1 - KM2
A2
A1
9
(1) Dotted line indicates wiring to be installed by the customer.

5

5/207
General 5
Contactors 5
Magnetic latching contactors

Magnetic latching contactors of both block and bar mounted types are fitted with a
special electromagnet which enables them to remain in the "On" position when the
coil is no longer energised.
Applications
The special properties of magnetic latching contactors make them suitable for a large
number of applications.
Properties Applications
b Retention of the sequence memory in b Refineries, power stations, excitation
automatic control equipment in the circuits.
event of loss of control voltage.
b Energy saving, since the source of b Contactors remaining in the closed
supply to the coil does not need to state for long periods.
supply current when the contactor is Examples: refineries, power supplies,
latched in the closed state. low voltage distribution
b Change of state from "Closed" to b Selective opening control.
"Open" by current signal through the
coil.
b Unaffected by mains interference. b No unwanted opening and closing of
the main power poles.
b Utilisation of contactors beyond their b Current carrying at voltages up to
breaking capacity, as operations are 1000 Volts.
performed off-load.
b Contactors are silent in the latched
position.
Operation of the electromagnet
CR1 F block contactors
CR1 F magnetic latching contactors are fitted with a double coil with 3 terminals
5 comprising a latching winding and an unlatching winding. The 2 windings have a
common point which can necessitate special wiring precautions when the latching
supply is separate from the unlatching supply.
The power supplies may be a.c. or d.c. For d.c. operation, the polarities indicated
must be complied with.
Operating precautions:
v the 2 windings must not be supplied simultaneously,
v a winding must not be supplied continuously,
v supply to the coils must be via pulsed contacts.
Manual opening:
if the control voltage is not present, the contactor can be unlatched manually.
CR1 B bar mounted contactors

CR1 B magnetic latching contactors are fitted with a single coil, supplied with d.c. or
with a.c. through a rectifier.
Latching is obtained by direct supply of the coil in one direction of current flow.
Unlatching is obtained by a reverse current, adjusted by resistors.

Mechanical latching contactors
LC1 D block contactors
For applications using smaller contactor sizes than those described on page 5/209 ,
it is possible to obtain the same function by the addition of a mechanical latch block
type LA6 DK, which can be mounted on LC1 D contactors (see page 5/70).
Selection : Characteristics : References : Dimensions, schemes :

5/208
Selection 5
Contactors 5

Selection guide for direct on-line starting
Continuous or intermittent duty up to 30 operating cycles/hour

Motor (1) 3-pole 3-pole differential 3 fuses
220 V 380 V 415 V 440 V contactor thermal overload relay Type
230 V 400 V
(2) Reference Setting aM BS-88
range
P In P In P In P In Reference Rating
kW HP A kW HP A kW HP A kW HP A A A A
25 35 85 – – – – – – – – – CR1 F150 LR9 F5367 60…100 100 125
30 40 103 51 70 98 55 75 100 59 80 97 CR1 F150 LR9 F5369 90…150 100 160
33 45 113 55 75 105 – – –
– – – 59 80 112 59 80 105 63 85 109 CR1 F150 LR9 F5369 90…150 125 160
– – – 63 85 117 63 85 115 – – –
37 50 126 75 100 138 75 100 135 75 100 125 CR1 F150 LR9 F5369 90…150 160 200
40 54 134 – – – – – – 80 110 131
45 60 150 80 110 147 80 110 138 90 125 146 CR1 F185 LR9 F5369 90…150 160 200
51 70 170 90 125 170 90 125 165 100 136 162 CR1 F185 LR9 F5371 132…220 200 250
55 75 182 – – – 100 136 182 – – –
59 80 195 100 138 188 110 150 200 110 150 178 CR1 F265 LR9 F5371 132…220 250 315
63 85 203 110 150 205 – – – 129 175 209
75 100 240 129 175 242 129 175 230 132 180 215 CR1 F265 LR9 F7375 200…330 250 315
– – – 132 180 245 132 180 240 – – –
– – – – – – 140 190 250 140 190 227 CR1 F265 LR9 F7375 200…330 315 400
80 110 260 140 190 260 147 200 260 147 200 236 CR1 F400 LR9 F7375 200…330 315 400
– – – 147 200 273 150 205 270 150 205 246
– – – 150 205 280 160 220 280 160 220 256
90 125 295 160 220 300 – – – 180 245 289 CR1 F400 LR9 F7375 200…330 315 400
– – – – – – 185 250 295
100 136 325 180 245 333 180 245 320 200 270 321 CR1 F400 LR9 F7379 300…500 400 500
110 150 356 185 250 342 185 250 325 220 300 353
– – – 200 270 370 200 270 340 250 340 401 CR1 F400 LR9 F7379 300…500 400 500
220 300 385 – – –
129
132
175
180
420
425
220 300 408
250 340 460
–
250
–
340
–
425
257
280
350
380
412
450
CR1 F500
CR1 F500
LR9 F7379
LR9 F7381
300…500
380…630
500
500
630
630
5
140 190 450 – – – 257 350 450 – – –
147 200 472 – – – – – – 295 400 473 CR1 F500 LR9 F7381 380…630 500 630
– – – 257 350 475 280 380 475 300 410 481 CR1 F630 LR9 F7381 380…630 500 630
– – – 295 400 500 – – –
150 205 483 280 380 510 300 410 510 315 430 505 CR1 F630 LR9 F7381 380…630 630 800
160 220 520 295 400 546 315 430 535 335 450 518
180 245 578 300 410 565 335 450 550 355 480 549 CR1 F630 LR9 F7381 380…630 630 800
185 250 595 315 430 584 355 480 580 375 500 575
200 270 626 335 450 620 375 500 610 400 454 611 CR1 F630 LR9 F7381 380…630 800 1000
220 g 700 355 g 635 400 g 650 425 g 650 CR1 BL33 LR2 F8383 500…800 800 1000
375 g 670 425 g 690 445 g 680
400 g 710 445 g 730 450 g 690
– – 450 g 740 475 g 730
250 g 800 425 g 760 475 g 780 500 g 780 CR1 BM33 LR2 F8383 500…800 800 1000
257 g 826 445 g 790 500 g 820 530 g 825 CR1 BM33 LR2 F8383 630…1000 1000 1250
280 g 900 450 g 800 530 g 870 560 g 870
295 g 948 475 g 850 560 g 920 600 g 920
300 g 980 500 g 900 600 g 978 630 g 965
315 g 990 530 g 950
(1) The ratings are for standard 220/230 V, 380/400 V, 415 or 440 V motors. The overload relays should preferably be set to the motor full-load current shown on
the motor rating plate. For other power ratings, select the overload relay with the appropriate range; the associated contactor and fuses must have ratings equal
to or immediately greater than In.
(2) Reference to be completed, see page 5/218.

5/209
Selection 5
Contactors 5

Selection guide for utilisation category AC-3
Contactor size CR1 CR1 CR1 CR1 CR1 CR1 CR1 CR1 CR1 CR1
F150 F185 F265 F400 F500 F630 BL BM BP BR
Rated operational current in AC-3 (θ y 55 °C)
440 V A 150 185 265 400 500 630 750 1000 1500 1800
500 V A 135 175 245 385 500 540 750 900 1200 1500
660/690 V A 130 140 230 365 435 470 700 800 900 1100
1000 V A 47 73 95 135 270 330 400 400 500 600
Rated operational power (standard motor power ratings)

220…240 V kW 40 55 75 110 147 200 220 280 425 500
HP 54 75 100 150 200 270 300 380 580 680
380…400 V kW 75 90 132 200 250 335 400 500 750 900
HP 100 185 180 270 340 450 545 680 1000 1220
415 V kW 80 100 140 220 280 375 425 530 800 900
HP 110 136 180 300 380 500 580 720 1100 1220
440 V kW 80 100 140 250 295 400 450 560 800 900
HP 110 136 190 340 400 545 610 760 1100 1220
500 V kW 90 110 160 257 355 400 500 600 750 900
HP 125 150 220 350 480 545 680 810 1000 1220
5 660/690 V kW 100 110 160 280 335 450 560 670 750 900
HP – – – – – 610 760 910 1000 1220
1000 V kW 65 100 147 185 335 450 530 530 670 750
HP – 136 200 250 – 610 720 720 910 1000
Maximum operating rate in operating cycles/hour, at rated operational power with an

on-load factor = 85%: 750 for CR1 F150 to F265, 500 for CR1 F400 to F630 and
120 for CR1 B.

5/210
Selection 5
Contactors 5

Selection according to required electrical durability
Use in category AC-3 (Ue y 440 V) (1) (θ y 55 °C)

The current (Ic) in AC-3 is equal to the rated operational current (Ie) drawn by the motor.
CR1 BL, BM
CR1 F150
CR1 F185
CR1 F265
CR1 F400
CR1 F500
CR1 F630
CR1 BR
CR1 BP
Millions of
operating
cycles
1
0,8
0,6
0,4
0,2
0,1
0,08
0,06
0,04
0,02
0,01
0,008
0,006
0,004
Current
breaking
0,002 limits
In categories AC-3 AC-2

0,001 AC–4
0,008
20 30 40 50 60 70 8090 150 200 300 400 600 800 1000 1500 2000 3000 4000 6000 8000 10 000
100 500 Current broken in A 5
Example:
Asynchronous motor with P = 50 kW, Ue = 380 V, Ie = 100 A, Ic = Ie = 100 A, or asynchronous motor with P = 55 kW, Ue = 415 V, Ie = 100 A,
Ic = Ie = 100 A
600 000 operating cycles required.
The above selection curves show the contactor rating needed, CR1 F185.
(1) For 660 V, multiply the number of operating cycles by 0.8.

5/211
Selection 5
Contactors 5

Selection guide for utilisation category AC-1
and according to required electrical durability
Maximum operational current (on-load factor u 0.95)

Maximum operating rate: 120 operating cycles/hour
F150 F185 F265 F400 F500 F630 BL BM BP BR
Cable c.s.a. mm2 120 150 185 – – – – – – –
Number of bars – – – 2 2 2 2 2 3 4
Bar c.s.a. mm – – – 30 x 5 40 x 5 60 x 5 50 x 5 80 x 5 100 x 5 100 x 5
Operational current y 40 °C A 250 275 350 500 700 1000 800 1250 2000 2750
in category AC-1 y 55 °C A 250 275 300 430 580 850 700 1100 1750 2400
at ambient temperature
y 70 °C A 170 180 250 340 500 700 600 900 1500 2000
Increase in operational current by parallel connection of poles
Apply the following coefficients to the above currents; these coefficients take into account an often unbalanced distribution of current between
the poles:
v 2 poles in parallel: K = 1.6

Electrical durability (Ue y 440 V) (1)

CR1 BL, BM
CR1 F150
CR1 F185
CR1 F265
CR1 F400
CR1 F500
CR1 F630
CR1 BR
Millions of
CR1 BP
operating
cycles
1
0,8
0,6
5 0,4
0,2
0,1
0,08
0,06
0,04
0,02
0,01
60 80 100 250 400 600 800 1000 2000 4000

275 350 500 700 1250 2750
Current broken in A
Example:
Ue = 220 V - Ie = 200 A - θ = 40 °C - Ic = Ie = 200 A
600 000 operating cycles required.
The above selection curves show the contactor rating needed, CR1 F400.
(1) For 660 V, multiply the number of operating cycles by 0.8.

5/212
Selection 5
Contactors 5

Selection guide for switching the primaries
of 3-phase transformers
Maximum ambient temperature: 55 °C
Maximum operational voltage: 1000 V, 50…60 Hz
When a transformer is switched on, there is generally an initial current surge which
reaches its peak value almost instantaneously and then decreases in a largely
exponential manner to quickly reach its steady state value.
The value of this current depends on:

v the characteristics of the magnetic circuit and of the windings (cross sectional area
of the core, rated inductance, number of turns, size of the windings, ...)
v the performance of the magnetic laminations used (residual induction and
saturation inductance),
v the magnetic state of the circuit and the instantaneous value of the a.c. mains
voltage at the moment of switch-on.
The peak current at the moment of switch-on can reach 20 to 40 times the rated
current for the various kVA power ratings in the tables below. This value is
independent of the "no-load" or "on-load" state of the transformer.
The peak magnetising current of the transformer must be lower than the values given
in the tables below.
Contactor selection
Maximum operating rate: 120 operating cycles/hour
F150 F185 F265 F400 F500 F630 BL BM BP BR
Maximum permissible A 1700 2800 3500 5500 6800 9000 18 000 18 000 24 000 30 000
Maximum 220…230 V kVA 25 40 50 75 100 140 230 230 300 380
operational power (1)
380…400 V kVA 50 75 90 130 170 225 400 400 530 660
5
415…440 V kVA 55 80 100 140 190 250 450 450 560 700
500 V kVA 65 95 110 170 225 280 480 480 600 750
660 V kVA 80 120 140 200 270 315 600 600 800 950
1000 V kVA 100 150 200 250 375 470 700 700 1000 1200
(1) Maximum operational power corresponding to a current peak at switch-on of 30 In.

5/213
Characteristics 5
TeSys contactors 5
Contactor type CR1 F150 CR1 F185 CR1 F265

Environment
Rated insulation voltage (Ui) Conforming to IEC 60158-1, V 1000 1000 1000
BS 775, 60947-4
Conforming to VDE 0110 grC V 1500 1500 1500

Special version –

around the device For operation at Uc °C - 15…+ 70
Operating positions Without derating ±5°
Rated operational current (Ie) In AC-3, θ y 40 °C A 150 185 265

(Ue y 440 V) In AC-1, θ y 40 °C A 250 275 350
In AC-4, θ y 40 °C A 138 170 245
Rated operational voltage (Ue) Up to V 1000 1000 1000
Frequency limits Of the opeational current Hz 25…200 25…200 25…200

(sine wave)
Rated making capacity I rms A 1700 2100 2940
Rated breaking capacity I rms 220…440 V A 1500 1800 2450

500 V A 1200 1600 2200
660/690 V A 1100 1200 1700
5 Permissible short time rating For 1 s
1000 V A
A
450
1200
600
1500
800
2200
from cold state, with no current For 5 s A 1200 1500 2200
flowing for previous 60 minutes
For 10 s A 1200 1500 2200
at θ y 40 °C
For 30 s A 700 920 1230
For 1 min A 600 740 950
For 3 min A 450 500 620
For 10 min A 350 400 480
Short-circuit protection by fuses Motor circuit AC-3 (type aM) A 160 200 315
θ y 440 V AC-1 circuit (type gG, BS 88) A 250 315 400
Average impedance per pole At lth and 50 Hz mΩ 0.45 0.36 0.32
Power dissipated per pole AC-3 W 6 12 22

for the above operational currents AC-1 W 18 26 39
Connection Number of conductors 1 1 1

Cable with lugs mm2 120 150 240
Cable with connector mm2 120 150 240
Number of bars 2 2 2
Bar c.s.a. mm 25 x 3 25 x 3 32 x 4
Bolt diameter Ø8 Ø8 Ø 10

5/214
5
5
CR1 F400 CR1 F500 CR1 F630 CR1 BL CR1 BM CR1 BP CR1 BR
1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000
1500 1500 1500 1500 1500 1500 1500
“TH” “TC”
– “TH”
- 60…+ 80 - 60…+ 80
- 15…+ 70 - 15…+ 60
3000 3000
± 5 ° in relation to normal vertical mounting plane ± 5 ° in relation to normal vertical mounting plane
3 or 4 3 or 4 3 or 4 1, 2, 3 or 4 1, 2, 3 or 4 1, 2, 3 or 4 1, 2, 3 or 4
400 500 630 750 1000 1500 1800

500 700 1000 800 1250 2000 2750
370 460 560 700 800 1250 1500
1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000
25…200 25…200 25…200 50…60 50…60 50…60 50…60
4500 5000 6740 10 000 10 000 15 000 18 000
4000 5000 6300 10 000 10 000 15 000 18 000

3500 4500 5400 9000 9000 12 000 15 000
3000 3560 4600 8000 8000 9000 11 000
1200
3600
2500
4200
3200
5050
4000
9600
4000
9600
5000
12 000
6000
15 000
5
3600 4200 5050 9600 9600 12 000 15 000
3600 4200 5050 7000 8000 9600 12 000
2400 3200 4400 4800 5200 6400 8000
1700 2400 3400 3500 3800 5200 6300
1200 1500 2200 2100 2400 3600 4400
1000 1200 1600 1200 1800 2800 3600
400 500 630 800 1200 800 x 2 (1) 1000 x 2 (1)
500 800 1000 800 1200 1000 x 2 (1) 1200 x 2 (1)
0.28 0.18 0.12 0.18 0.18 0.13 0.09
45 45 48 88 180 290 360

70 88 120 115 280 520 680
2 2 – – – – –
150 240 – – – – –
– – – – – – –
2 2 2 2 2 3 4
30 x 5 40 x 5 60 x 5 50 x 5 80 x 5 100 x 5 100 x 10
Ø 10 Ø 10 Ø 12 4xØ8 4 x Ø 10 4 x Ø 10 4 x Ø 10
35 35 58 21 35 35 35
(1) Paralleling of poles must be carried out only in accordance with the fuse manufacturer's recommendations.

5/215
Characteristics 5
TeSys contactors 5
Contactor type CR1 F150 CR1 F185 CR1 F265

Rated control a 50 or 60 Hz V 48…415
circuit voltage (Uc) a 400 Hz V 48…220
c V 48…220
c low consumption V 48…220
Control voltage limits Latching 0.85…1.1 Uc
a and c Unlatching 0.85…1.1 Uc
Mechanical durability In millions of operating cycles 1
Average consumption Latching 1-pole VA – – –
50/60 Hz 2-pole VA – – –
3-pole VA 1100 1600 1650
4-pole VA 100 1600 1650
Unlatching 1-pole VA – – –
2-pole VA – – –
3-pole VA 7.3 8 9
4-pole VA 7.3 8 9
400 Hz and c Latching 1-pole VA – – –
3-pole VA 1260 1750 1800
4-pole VA 1260 1750 1800
Unlatching 1-pole VA – – –
3-pole VA 10 11 12
4-pole VA 10 11 12
c low Latching 3/4-pole W 500 500 500
consumption Unlatching 3/4-pole W 15 20 40
5 Average operating time

at Uc (1)
Latching
Unlatching
ms
ms
35…40
50…100
35…40
50…100
45…50
50…100
(1) The closing time is measured from the moment the closing coil is energised to initial contact of the main poles. The opening time is measured from the moment
the opening coil is energised to the moment the main poles separate.
Nota : the arcing time depends on the circuit switched by the main poles. For 3-phase applications the arcing time is usually less than 10 ms. The load is isolated
Type of contacts LAD N for contactors CR1 F
Conventional thermal current A 10
Rated insulation voltage Conforming to IEC 60947-5-1 V 690

(Ui)
Connection Flexible or solid conductor mm2 1 x 1 min; 2 x 2.5 max
Operational power of contacts a.c. supply d.c. supply
LAD N for contactors CR1 F Electrical durability (valid for up to 3600 Electrical durability (valid for up to 1200
operating cycles/hour) on an inductive load operating cycles/hour) on an inductive load
such as the coil of an electromagnet: making such as the coil of an electromagnet, without
current (cos ϕ 0.7) = 10 times the power economy resistor, the time constant
broken (cos ϕ 0.4). increasing with the load.
V 48 115 230 400 600 V 48 125 250 440
1 million operating cycles VA 120 280 560 960 1440 W 90 75 68 61

Occasional making capacity VA 2600 7000 13 000 15 000 9000 W 700 400 260 220

5/216
5
5
CR1 F400 CR1 F500 CR1 F630 CR1 BL CR1 BM CR1 BP CR1 BR
48…415 110…500
48…220 110…500
48…220 110…500
48…220 –
0.85…1.1 Uc 0.85…1.1 Uc
0.85…1.1 Uc 0.85…1.1 Uc
120 120
1 1
– – – 650 650 650 650

– – – 1100 1100 1100 1100
1450 1650 2100 1650 1650 1650 1650
1450 1650 2100 1850 1850 1850 1850
– – – 110 110 110 110
– – – 125 125 125 125
12 9.5 8 165 165 165 165
12 9.5 8 175 175 175 175
– – – 600 600 600 600
– – – 1000 1000 1000 1000
1600 1800 2300 1500 1500 1500 1500
1600 1800 2300 1700 1700 1700 1700
– – – 100 100 100 100
– – – 115 115 115 115
16 13 11 150 150 150 150
16 13 11 160 160 160 160
500 550 620 – – – –
70 60 45 – – – –
40…75 40…80 40…80 100…150 100…150 100…150 100…150 5
50…100 50…100 50…100 20…40 20…40 20…40 20…40
(1) The closing time is measured from the moment the closing coil is energised to initial contact of the main poles. The opening time is measured from the moment
the opening coil is energised to the moment the main poles separate.
Nota : the arcing time depends on the circuit switched by the main poles. For 3-phase applications the arcing time is usually less than 10 ms. The load is isolated
LAD N for contactors CR1 F ZC4 GM for contactors CR1 B
10 20
690 660
1 x 1 min; 2 x 2.5 max 2 min; 4 max
Operational power of contacts a.c. supply d.c. supply

ZC4 GM for contactors CR1 B Electrical durability (valid for up to 2400 Electrical durability (valid for up to 1200
V 110 220 380 415 500 V 110 120 440 500
127 440
1 million operating cycles VA 2000 4000 4000 4000 3500 W 250 250 230 200
Occasional making capacity VA 14 000 23 000 35 000 45 000 35 000 W 1600 800 400 360

5/217
References 5
TeSys contactors 5

Control circuit: a.c. or d.c. supply
Maximum thermal Rated Number Instantaneous Basic reference, Weight

current in category operational of poles auxiliary contacts to be completed by
AC-1 current in adding the voltage code
40 °C category AC-3 (1)
(440 V max)
A A kg
250 150 3 – – CR1 F150pp 3.500
501612_1
4 – – CR1 F1504pp 3.800

275 185 3 – – CR1 F185pp 4.600
4 – – CR1 F1854pp 5.400
350 265 3 – – CR1 F265pp 7.400
CR1 F1854 4 – – CR1 F2654pp 8.500
500 400 3 – – CR1 F400pp 9.100
4 – – CR1 F4004pp 10.200
700 500 3 – – CR1 F500pp 11.300
4 – – CR1 F5004pp 12.900
1000 630 3 – – CR1 F630pp 18.600
4 – – CR1 F6304pp 21.500
800 750 1 1 2 CR1 BL31p12 32.000
2 1 CR1 BL31p21 32.000
3 – CR1 BL31p30 32.000
2 1 2 CR1 BL32p12 45.000
2 1 CR1 BL32p21 45.000
3 – CR1 BL32p30 45.000
501613_1
3 1 2 CR1 BL33p12 58.000

2 1 CR1 BL33p21 58.000
3 – CR1 BL33p30 58.000
4 1 2 CR1 BL34p12 72.000
2 1 CR1 BL34p21 72.000
5 1250 1000 1
3
1
–
2
CR1 BL34p30
CR1 BM31p12
72.000
31.000
2 1 CR1 BM31p21 31.000
CR1 F500 3 – CR1 BM31p30 31.000
2 1 2 CR1 BM32p12 44.000
2 1 CR1 BM32p21 44.000
3 – CR1 BM32p30 44.000
3 1 2 CR1 BM33p12 57.000
2 1 CR1 BM33p21 57.000
3 – CR1 BM33p30 57.000
4 1 2 CR1 BM34p12 71.000
2 1 CR1 BM34p21 71.000
3 – CR1 BM34p30 71.000
2000 1500 1 1 2 CR1 BP31p12 41.000
2 1 CR1 BP31p21 41.000
3 – CR1 BP31p30 41.000
2 1 2 CR1 BP32p12 65.000
2 1 CR1 BP32p21 65.000
501614_1
3 – CR1 BP32p30 65.000

3 1 2 CR1 BP33p12 94.000
2 1 CR1 BP33p21 94.000
3 – CR1 BP33p30 94.000
4 1 2 CR1 BP34p12 120.000
2 1 CR1 BP34p21 120.000
CR1 BP33
3 – CR1 BP34p30 120.000
2750 1800 1 1 2 CR1 BR31p12 52.000
2 1 CR1 BR31p21 52.000
3 – CR1 BR31p30 52.000
2 1 2 CR1 BR32p12 85.000
2 1 CR1 BR32p21 85.000
3 – CR1 BR32p30 85.000
3 1 2 CR1 BR33p12 129.000
2 1 CR1 BR33p21 129.000
3 – CR1 BR33p30 129.000
4 1 2 CR1 BR34p12 160.000
2 1 CR1 BR34p21 160.000
3 – CR1 BR34p30 160.000
(1) Standard control circuit voltages: see page opposite.

5/218
References 5
TeSys contactors 5

Accessories
Accessories for contactors CR1 F

Description Number of For use on Reference Weight
contacts or
shrouds kg
501377_1
Instantaneous (1) CR1 F LAD N (1) 0.050

auxiliary contacts
Time delay (1) CR1 F LAD p (1) 0.060
auxiliary contacts
Contact blocks with Set of 2 blocks CR1 F150 and LA9 F103 0.300
protected terminals CR1 F185
(for mounting on contactors
with closed arc chamber)
Power terminal Set of 6 shrouds CR1 F150 and LA9 F702 0.250
protection shrouds for 3-pole CR1 F185
contactors CR1 F265 to LA9 F703 0.250
LAD N CR1 F500
CR1 F630 LA9 F704 0.250
501616_1
Set of 8 shrouds CR1 F1504 and LA9 F707 0.300

for 4-pole CR1 F1854
contactors CR1 F2654 to LA9 F708 0.300
CR1 F5004
CR1 F6304 LA9 F709 0.300
LA9 F103
Description Application Reference
501617_1
Mechanical interlock For assembly of See pages 5/220

and power connections reversing contactors and and 5/221
changeover contactor pairs
Accessories for contactors CR1 B

kg
5
Mechanical interlock For vertical assembly of EZ2 LB0601 1.560
with mounting reversing contactors and
accessories (3) changeover contactor pairs
LA9 F70p
Kit containing 2 For mounting on LA9 B103 1.620
bar mounting brackets 120 or 150 mm centres
501618_1
(1) For maximum number per contactor and complete reference, see page 5/111.
Office):
Volts 48 110 125 127 220 230 240 250 380 400 415 440 500
For contactors CR1 F
a 50/60 Hz E7 F7 – G7 M7 M7 U7 – Q7 Q7 N7 – –
a 400 Hz E7 F7 – G7 M7 M7 – – – – – – –
c E7 F7 – G7 M7 M7 – – – – – – –
c low EZ7 FZ7 – GZ7 MZ7 – – – – – – – –
consumption
For contactors CR1 B
a 50…400 Hz – F – G M M U – Q V N R S
c – FD GD – MD – UD UCD – – – RD SD
(3) Positive mechanical interlocking between 2 vertically mounted contactors of identical or
different ratings. Connecting rods and cranks assembled on right-hand sides, crank pins on
the pole side.
Vertical fixing centre distance between the two contactors: 600 mm.
EZ2 LB0601

5/219
Mounting 5
TeSys contactors 5

Components for assembling reversing contactors
and changeover contactor pairs CR1 F
Horizontally or vertically mounted
Mechanical interlocks Sets of power connections
Reversers assembled Reversing contactors 3 or 4-pole changeover contactor pairs
using 2 contactors of LA9 Fp970 LA9 Fp976 LA9 Fp977 or LA9 Fp982
identical rating, type:
L1
L3
L2
CR1 F150
3 1/L3
5 1/L2
7 1/L1
1 2/L1
3 2/L2
5 2/L3
1N
2N
CR1 F185
CR1 F265
3
5
5
1
7
1
A1
A1
A1
A1
CR1 F400
CR1 F500
A2
E1
A2
E1
A2
E1
A2
E1
CR1 F630
6
8
8
2
4
2
4
6
6
6
2
4
2
4
W
U
L1
L2
L3
V
N
Vertically mounted
Mechanical interlocks
Reversers assembled LA9 FF4F Assembly A LA9 FH4H Assembly C
using 2 contactors of LA9 FG4G LA9 FJ4J
identical rating, type: LA9 FK4K
CR1 F150 LA9 FL4L
CR1 F185
CR1 F265
CR1 F400
CR1 F500
CR1 F630
Reversers assembled LA9 FG4F Assembly A LA9 FH4F Assembly B LA9 FJ4H Assembly C
using 2 contactors of LA9 FJ4F LA9 FK4H
different ratings, type: LA9 FK4F LA9 FL4H
CR1 F150 LA9 FL4F LA9 FK4J
CR1 F185 LA9 FH4G LA9 FL4J
CR1 F265 LA9 FJ4G LA9 FK4K
CR1 F400 LA9 FK4G
CR1 F500 LA9 FL4G
CR1 F630
Reversers assembled LA9 Fp4p4p

using 3 contactors of
identical or different ratings
Warning: the contactor ratings

F150
must be in decreasing size from
F185
top to bottom.
CR1 F500 F265
A
F400
F500
F630
CR1 F265
B F150 F185 F265 F400 F500 F630
F150
F185
CR1 F185 F265
C
F400
F500
F630
5/220
References 5
TeSys contactors 5

Components for assembling reversing contactors
and changeover contactor pairs CR1 F
Reversers assembled using 2 contactors of identical rating

3-pole 4-pole Weight Kit reference Weight
Reference Reference kg kg
For assembly of 3-pole reversing contactors Horizontally mounted
for motor control (1) CR1 F150 LA9 FF976 – 0.600 LA9 FF970 0.060
CR1 F185 LA9 FG976 – 0.780 LA9 FG970 0.060
CR1 F265 LA9 FH976 – 1.500 LA9 FJ970 0.140
CR1 F400 LA9 FJ976 – 2.100 LA9 FJ970 0.140
CR1 F500 LA9 FK976 – 2.350 LA9 FJ970 0.140
CR1 F630 LA9 FL976 – 3.800 LA9 FL970 0.150
Vertically mounted
CR1 F150 (2) – – LA9 FF4F 0.345
CR1 F185 (2) – – LA9 FG4G 0.350
CR1 F265 (2) – – LA9 FH4H 1.060
CR1 F400 (2) – – LA9 FJ4J 1.200
CR1 F500 (2) – – LA9 FK4K 1.200
CR1 F630 (2) – – LA9 FL4L 1.220
For assembly of 4-pole changeover contactor pairs Horizontally mounted
CR1 F1504 LA9 FF982 LA9 FF977 0.460 LA9 FF970 0.060
CR1 F1854 LA9 FG982 LA9 FG977 0.610 LA9 FG970 0.060
CR1 F2654 LA9 FH982 LA9 FH977 1.200 LA9 FJ970 0.140
CR1 F4004 LA9 FJ982 LA9 FJ977 1.800 LA9 FJ970 0.140
CR1 F5004 LA9 FK982 LA9 FK977 2.300 LA9 FJ970 0.140
CR1 F6304 LA9 FL982 LA9 FL977 3.400 LA9 FL970 0.150
Vertically mounted
CR1 F1504 (2) – – LA9 FF4F 0.345
CR1 F1854 (2) – – LA9 FG4G 0.350
CR1 F2654 (2) – – LA9 FH4H 1.060
CR1
CR1
F4004
F5004
(2)
(2)
–
–
–
–
LA9
LA9
FJ4J
FK4K
1.200
1.200
5
CR1 F6304 (2) – – LA9 FL4L 1.220
Reversers assembled using 2 contactors of different ratings
Contactor type Mechanical interlock
At bottom At top Kit reference Weight
kg
For assembly of 3 or 4-pole changeover contactor pairs Vertically mounted (3)
CR1 F150 or F1504 CR1 F185 or F1854 LA9 FG4F 0.350
CR1 F265 or F2654 LA9 FH4F 0.870
CR1 F400 or F4004 LA9 FJ4F 0.930
CR1 F500 or F5004 LA9 FK4F 0.940
CR1 F630 or F6304 LA9 FL4F 0.940
CR1 F185 or F1854 CR1 F265 or F2654 LA9 FH4G 0.860
CR1 F400 or F4004 LA9 FJ4G 0.940
CR1 F500 or F5004 LA9 FK4G 0.940
CR1 F630 or F6304 LA9 FL4G 0.950
CR1 F265 or F2654 CR1 F400 or F4004 LA9 FJ4H 1.130
CR1 F500 or F5004 LA9 FK4H 1.130
CR1 F630 or F6304 LA9 FL4H 1.140
CR1 F400 or F4004 CR1 F500 or F5004 LA9 FK4J 1.200
CR1 F630 or F6304 LA9 FL4J 1.210
CR1 F500 or F5004 CR1 F630 or F6304 LA9 FL4K 1.210
For assembly of 3 or 4-pole reversing contactors Using 3 contactors (vertically mounted) Mechanical interlock
of identical or different ratings Kit reference (4)
The contactor ratings must be in decreasing size LA9 Fp4p4p
from top to bottom.
(1) A 3-pole reversing contactor for motor control can be converted into a 3-pole changeover
contactor pair by removing the upper connecting links.
(2) All power connections are to be made by the customer.
(3) With identical or different number of poles. Power connections to be made by the customer.
(4) Complete the reference by replacing the first dot with the code for the upper contactor, the
second dot with the code for the middle contactor and the third dot with the code for the bottom
contactor.
Contactors CR1 F150 CR1 F185 CR1 F265 CR1 F400 CR1 F500 CR1 F630
Code F G H J K L
Example: mechanical interlock for reversing contactor made up of 3 different contactors:
CR1 F500 top, CR1 F26 middle and CR1 F185 bottom: LA9 FK4H4G.

5/221
References 5
TeSys contactors 5

Coils for contactors CR1 F
Standard coils
Usual voltages Resistance of winding Reference Voltage Weight
at θ = 20 °C code
50…400 Hz 50 Hz, 60 Hz Latching Unlatching
or c
V V Ω Ω kg
For contactors CR1 F150
48 – 1.98 230.8 LX0 FF005 E7 0.440
501470_1
110 – 9.35 1453 LX0 FF006 F7 0.440

127 – 11.61 1788 LX0 FF007 G7 0.440
208 – 23.50 4098 LX0 FF020 L7 0.440
220/230 – 37.55 5139 LX0 FF008 M7 0.440
– 240 45.16 6544 LX0 FF009 U7 0.440
– 380/400 114.10 12 447 LX0 FF010 Q7 0.440
– 415 139.50 16 717 LX0 FF011 N7 0.440

LX0 FF009 48 – 1,42 220 LX0 FG005 E7 0,560
110 – 6.92 1339 LX0 FG006 F7 0.560
127 – 8.45 1676 LX0 FG007 G7 0.560
208 – 21.30 3169 LX0 FG020 L7 0.560
220/230 – 26.27 4729 LX0 FG008 M7 0.560
– 240 32.95 4729 LX0 FG009 U7 0.560
– 380/400 82.29 11 885 LX0 FG010 Q7 0.560
– 415 102.30 14 305 LX0 FG011 N7 0.560

48 – 1.34 183.4 LX0 FH005 E7 0.780
501471_1
110 – 6.90 1031 LX0 FH006 F7 0.780

127 – 8.56 1325 LX0 FH007 G7 0.780
5 208 – 20.20 2654 LX0 FH020 L7 0.780
220/230 – 25.77 4090 LX0 FH008 M7 0.780
– 240 33.03 5002 LX0 FH009 U7 0.780
– 380/400 78.39 11 803 LX0 FH010 Q7 0.780
– 415 102.9 15 006 LX0 FH011 N7 0.780

48 – 1.32 90.5 LX0 FJ005 E7 1.120
110 – 8.09 813 LX0 FJ006 F7 1.120
LX0 FH009
127 – 9.79 1027 LX0-FJ007 G7 1.120
208 – 24.40 2643 LX0 FJ020 L7 1.120
220/230 – 30.14 3309 LX0 FJ008 M7 1.120
– 240 37.02 4074 LX0 FJ009 U7 1.120
– 380/400 94.80 9380 LX0 FJ010 Q7 1.120
– 415 121.10 11 763 LX0 FJ011 N7 1.120

48 – 1.57 166 LX0 FK005 E7 1.220
110 – 7.53 916 LX0 FK006 F7 1.220
127 – 9.56 1159 LX0 FK007 G7 1.220
208 – 23.60 2981 LX0 FK020 L7 1.220
220/230 – 28.81 3733 LX0 FK008 M7 1.220
– 240 35.67 4595 LX0 FK009 U7 1.220
– 380/400 89.56 10 570 LX0 FK010 Q7 1.220
– 415 112.06 13 256 LX0 FK011 N7 1.220

48 – 0.87 204 LX0 FL005 E7 1.460
110 – 5.20 1423 LX0 FL006 F7 1.460
127 – 6.45 1830 LX0 FL007 G7 1.460
208 – 20.20 2961 LX0 FL020 L7 1.460
220/230 – 25.36 4603 LX0 FL008 M7 1.460
– 240 25.36 5658 LX0 FL009 U7 1.460
– 380/400 60.95 10 676 LX0 FL010 Q7 1.460
– 415 77.97 13 003 LX0 FL011 N7 1.460
5/222
TeSys contactors 5

Special coils
Coils with two windings with common point, allowing the use of two separate power
sources for latching and unlatching.
501472_1
Coil voltages at 50 Hz, Resistance of winding Reference Voltage Weight

60 Hz, 400 Hz or c at θ = 20 °C code
Latching Unlatching Latching Unlatching
V V Ω Ω kg
220 24 29.5 39.5 LX0 FF224 MB7 0.440

220 24 26.5 19 LX0 FG224 MB7 0.560

LX0 FF030 220 24 26 29.5 LX0 FH224 MB7 0.780

220 24 30 23 LX0 FJ224 MB7 1.120

220 24 29 26 LX0 FK224 MB7 1.220

220 24 26 41 LX0 FL224 MB7 1.460
Coils with low inrush consumption

Usual voltages Resistance of winding Reference Voltage Weight
c at θ = 20 °C code
Latching Unlatching
V Ω Ω kg
48 4.56 140.56 LX0 FF055 EZ7 0.440
5
110 22.37 706.44 LX0 FF056 FZ7 0.440
127 35.54 1086.36 LX0 FF057 GZ7 0.440
220 89.85 3342.51 LX0 FF058 MZ7 0.440

48 5.19 106.54 LX0 FG055 EZ7 0.570
110 25.50 536.26 LX0 FG056 FZ7 0.570
127 32.75 732.64 LX0 FG057 GZ7 0.570
220 102.44 2378.62 LX0 FG058 MZ7 0.570

48 5.19 74.26 LX0 FH055 EZ7 0.800
110 25 364.61 LX0 FH056 FZ7 0.800
127 30.98 458.45 LX0 FH057 GZ7 0.800
220 97.89 1344.46 LX0 FH058 MZ7 0.800

48 5.05 36.36 LX0 FJ055 EZ7 1.150
110 25.39 171.49 LX0 FJ056 FZ7 1.150
127 31.86 221.20 LX0 FJ057 GZ7 1.150
220 98.19 648.79 LX0 FJ058 MZ7 1.150

48 4.42 41 LX0 FK055 EZ7 1.270
110 22.74 193.36 LX0 FK056 FZ7 1.270
127 28.25 313.60 LX0 FK057 GZ7 1.270
220 85.12 918.68 LX0 FK058 MZ7 1.270

48 3.94 59.17 LX0 FL055 EZ7 1.500
110 19.36 365.33 LX0 FL056 FZ7 1.500
127 25.39 452.27 LX0 FL057 GZ7 1.500
220 74.44 1071.43 LX0 FL058 MZ7 1.500
5/223
References 5
TeSys contactors 5

Coils for contactors CR1 B
Coils with “TC” treatment (associated accessories, see page opposite)

Usual voltages Resistance Reference Weight
c a at θ = 20 °C
50…400 Hz
V V Ω kg
For contactors CR1 Bp31
– 110…120 19.7 WB1 KB140 1.120
501473_1
110…125 – 25.2 WB1 KB134 1.120

– 220…240 77.2 WB1 KB136 1.120
220 – 94 WB1 KB139 1.120
250 – 128 WB1 KB125 1.120
– 380…400 197 WB1 KB126 1.120
– 415…440 257 WB1 KB138 1.120

– 110 9.6 WB1 KB133 1.120
WB1 KBppp 110 120…127 11.4 WB1 KB121 1.120
125 – 19.7 WB1 KB140 1.120
– 220/230 32.5 WB1 KB124 1.120
220 240 49.7 WB1 KB122 1.120
250 – 77.2 WB1 KB136 1.120
– 380…400 128 WB1 KB125 1.120
– 415…440 160 WB1 KB137 1.120

– 110 7.2 WB1 KB123 1.120
110 120…127 9.6 WB1 KB133 1.120
125 – 11.4 WB1 KB121 1.120
220 240 32.5 WB1 KB124 1.120
5 250
–
–
380…415
61
94
WB1
WB1
KB135
KB139
1.120
1.120
– 440 128 WB1 KB125 1.120

– 110 5.8 WB1 KB132 1.120
110 120…127 7.2 WB1 KB123 1.120
125 – 11.4 WB1 KB121 1.120
– 220/230 25.2 WB1 KB134 1.120
– 240 32.5 WB1 KB124 1.120
250 – 49.7 WB1 KB122 1.120
– 380 77.2 WB1 KB136 1.120
– 400…440 94 WB1 KB139 1.120
Coils with “TH” treatment (associated accessories, see page opposite)

Add suffix TH to the references selected above. Example: WB1 KB140TH.
5/224
TeSys contactors 5

Coils for contactors CR1 B
Accessories for use with coils (1)

Coils Additional resistors (2) Automatic coil Rectifier
(“TC” or cut-out contact (4)
“TH”) (3)
R1 Reference R2 Reference Nb Reference Reference
Ω Ω
501474_1
WB1 KB140 68 DR2 SC0068 47 DR2 SC0047 2 ZC4 GM2 or DR5 TE1U
ZC4 GM8
WB1 KB134 68 DR2 SC0068 68 DR2 SC0068 2 ZC4 GM2 or –
ZC4 GM8
WB1 KB136 220 DR2 SC0220 180 DR2 SC0180 2 ZC4 GM2 or DR5 TE1U
ZC4 GM8
ZC4 GM8
DR2 SC0220 ZC4 GM8
WB1 KB126 470 DR2 SC0470 470 DR2 SC0470 3 ZC4 GM2 or DR5 TE1S
ZC4 GM8
WB1 KB138 1000 DR2 SC1000 470 DR2 SC0470 3 ZC4 GM2 or DR5 TE1S
501475_1
ZC4 GM8
WB1 KB133 10 DR2 SC0010 33 DR2 SC0033 1 PR4 FB0011 DR5 TE1U
WB1 KB140 100 DR2 SC0100 47 DR2 SC0047 1 PR4 FB0009 –
ZC4 GM2 WB1 KB124 120 DR2 SC0120 120 DR2 SC0120 1 PR4 FB0007 DR5 TE1U
WB1 KB136 330 DR2 SC0330 220 DR2 SC0220 1 PR4 FB0006 – 5
501476_1
WB1 KB125 470 DR2 SC0470 470 DR2 SC0470 1 PR4 FB0005 DR5 TE1S

WB1 KB124 180 DR2-SC0180 120 DR2 SC0120 1 PR4 FB0008 DR5 TE1U
WB1 KB125 680 DR2-SC0680 470 DR2 SC0470 1 PR4 FB0004 DR5 TE1S

PR4 FB0014 WB1 KB123 47 DR2 SC0047 33 DR2 SC0033 1 PR4 FB0012 DR5 TE1U
501477_1
WB1 KB124 180 DR2-SC0180 150 DR2 SC0150 1 PR4 FB0007 DR5 TE1U
DR5 TE1U
(1) For connections, see page 5/235.
(2) Weight of resistors DR2 SCpppp : 0.030 kg.
(3) Weight of automatic coil cut-out contacts: ZC4 GMp : 0.030 kg and PR4 FB00pp : 0.600 kg.
(4) Weight of rectifier DR5 TE1p : 0.100 kg. The rectifier is for use on a.c. only.
5/225
References 5
TeSys contactors 5

Accessories and replacement parts for contactors CR1 F
References
501478_1
kg
Complete sets 3-pole CR1 F150 LA5 FF431 0.270
of contacts
for 3 or 4 poles (1) CR1 F185 LA5 FG431 0.350
CR1 F265 LA5 FH431 0.660
CR1 F400 LA5 F400803 0.660
CR1 F500 LA5 F500803 0.660

LA5 FG431
CR1 F630 LA5 F630803 0.660
4-pole CR1 F1504 LA5 FF441 0.360
CR1 F1854 LA5 FG441 0.465
CR1 F2654 LA5 FH441 0.880
CR1 F4004 LA5 F400804 0.465
CR1 F5004 LA5 F500804 0.465
CR1 F6304 LA5 F630804 0.465
Arc chambers 3-pole CR1 F150 LA5 F15050 0.490

501479_1
CR1 F185 LA5 F18550 0.670
CR1 F265 LA5 F26550 0.920

5 CR1 F400 LA5 F40050 1.300
CR1 F500 LA5 F50050 1.850
CR1 F630 LA5 F63050 3.150
4-pole CR1 F1504 LA5 F150450 0.660
CR1 F1854 LA5 F185450 0.910
CR1 F2654 LA5 F265450 1.220
LA5 F40050 CR1 F4004 LA5 F400450 1.740
CR1 F5004 LA5 F500450 2.500
CR1 F6304 LA5 F630450 4.200
(1) Set containing the following (per pole): 2 fixed contacts, 1 moving contact , 2 deflectors,
1 back-plate, clamping screws and washers.
5/226
TeSys contactors 5

Accessories and replacement parts for contactors CR1 B
Description For Number of Unit Weight
contactors sets required reference kg
per pole of set
501480_1
Sets of contacts CR1 BL 1 PA1 LB80 0.420

(1 moving contact,
1 fixed contact)
CR1 BM 1 PA1 LB80 0.420
CR1 BP 2 PA1 LB80 0.420
CR1 BR 3 PA1 LB80 0.420

PA1 LB80
(PA1 LB76 + PA1 LB75)
Description For Composition Reference Weight
contactors kg
Moving contact only All ratings – PA1 LB75 0.220
(for one finger)
501481_1
Fixed contact only All ratings – PA1 LB76 0.200

501482_1
(for one finger)

Blow-out horn only All ratings – PA1 LB89 0.120
(for 1 finger)
Arc chambers CR1 BL – PA1 LB50 3.700
(for a single pole)
CR1 BM – PA1 LB50 3.700
ZC4 GM1 PA1 LB89

CR1 BP – PA1 PB50 6.200
CR1 BR – PA1 RB50 8.500
Auxiliary All ratings 1 N/O contact ZC4 GM1 0.030

contact blocks - normal
501483_1
All ratings 1 N/C contact ZC4 GM2 0.030
All ratings
- normal
1 N/O contact ZC4 GM9 0.030
5
- gold flashed
All ratings 1 N/C contact ZC4 GM8 0.030
- gold flashed
N/C pole All ratings – PR4 FB00pp (1) 0.600
for automatic cut-out coil
Set of moving and fixed All ratings – PV1 FA80 0.035
contacts for N/C pole
Arc chamber All ratings – PN1 FB50 0.220
for N/C pole
Electromagnet All ratings – ET1 KB50 10.600
Description For No. of Reference Weight

PA1 LB50 contactors parts required kg
Return springs CR1 B 1 DV1 RT292 0.050
for moving part (1 pole)
of electromagnet
501484_1
CR1 B 2 DV1 RT292 0.050

(2, 3 or 4 poles)
N/O pole springs CR1 BL, BM 1 per pole DV1 RC201 0.020
or BP
CR1 BR 1 per pole DV1 RC155 0.020
(1) Reference to be completed, see page 5/225.
PR4 FB004pp
5/227
Dimensions 5
TeSys contactors 5
Magnetic latching contactors CR1 F
CR1 F150 to F500

Common side view CR1 F150, F185, F265 CR1 F400, F500
S S1 S 44,5
(1) F150 M8x25 6xM10x35
F185 M8x25
8xØ8,5
=
F265 M10x35
3xØ6,5
=
=
X1
120
180
M
b2
b1
J1
M
b
=
=
X1
G
=
= G1 = 23,5 G1 J
Z G Y Q P P Q1
=
a f
L Q P P Q1
c a f
CR1 F150 F185 F265 CR1 F400 F500
3P 4P 3P 4P 3P 4P 3P 4P 3P 4P
a 163.5 201.5 168.5 208.5 201.5 244.5 a 213 261 233 288
b 170 170 174 174 203 203 G min. 66 66 66 66
b1 137 137 137 137 145 145 b 206 206 238 238
b2 301 301 305 305 370 370 b2 375 375 400 400
c 171 171 181 181 213 213 c 219 219 232 232
f 131 131 130 130 147 147 f 146 146 150 150
G 106 143 111 151 142 190 G supplied 80 80 80 140
G1 80 80 80 80 96 96 G max. 102 150 120 175
J 106 106 106 106 106 106 G1 supplied 170 170 170 230
5 J1 120 120 120 120 120 120 G1 min. 156 156 156 156
L 107 107 113.5 113.5 141 141 G1 max. 192 240 210 265
M 150 150 154 154 178 178 J 12 60 32 27
P 40 40 40 40 48 48 L 145 145 146 146
Q 26 26 29 29 39 34 M 181 181 208 208
Q1 57.5 55.5 59.5 59.5 66.5 66.5 P 48 48 55 55
S 20 20 20 20 25 25 Q 43 43 47 47
S1 27 27 34 34 38 38 Q1 74 74 77 77
Y 44 44 38.5 30.5 30.5 21.5 S 25 25 30 30
Z 13.5 13.5 13.5 13.5 15.5 15.5
f = minimum distance required for coil removal. f = minimum distance required for coil removal.
X1: Minimum electrical clearance according to operational voltage and breaking capacity. X1: Minimum electrical clearance according to operational
Voltage in V 200…500 660…1000 Voltage in V 200…500 660…1000
CR1 F150 10 15 CR1 F400 15 20
CR1 F185 10 15 CR1 F500 15 20
CR1 F265 10 15
(1) Power terminal protection shroud.
CR1 F630
72 40 64 CR1 F630 3P 4P
(1) 6xM12x45 a 309 389
G supplied 180 240
4xØ10,5
=
G min. 100 150

G max. 195 275
X1
J1 61 81
Q 60 60
Q1 89 89
180
280
304
464
264
X1: Min. electrical clearance according to

operational voltage and breaking capacity.
Voltage in V X1
200…500 20
=
X1
690…1000 30
60,5 G J1 (1) Power terminal protection shroud.
=
(2) Minimum distance required for coil

removal.
155 Q 80 80 Q1 181 (2)
197 a
255

5/228
Mounting 5
TeSys contactors 5
CR1 F150…F265
Panel mounted On pre-slotted mounting plate AM1 PA, PB, PC On rails DZ5 MB on 120 mm centres
(1) 3xØ6,5
G DZ5 MF5
=
110
110
120
110
=
AF1 EA6
G
= =
J G J1
c c c 15
CR1 F150 F185 F265 CR1 F150 F185 F265 CR1 F150 F185 F265
c 3P 171 181 213 c 3P 171 181 213 c 3P 171 181 213
4P 171 181 213 4P 171 181 213 4P 171 181 213
G 3P 80 80 96 G 3P 80 80 96 G 3P 80 80 96
4P 80 80 96 4P 80 80 96 4P 80 80 96
J 3P 26.5 29 44.5
4P 45 49 68.5
J1 3P 57 59.5 61.5
4P 75.5 79.5 85.5
(1) Power terminal protection shroud.
CR1 F150…F650
On 2 notched uprights AM1 ECppp
AM1 EC200 AF1 CD081 + AF1 VC820 (2)

5
AF1 CD101+
AF1 VC10
(1) AF1 CD061+ AF1 CD061 AF1 VA618 AF1 CD081+
AF1 VA618 M6 AF1 VC820
AF1 VA618
M6 LA9 F100
M6 Ø8,5
110
180
120
Ø10,5
= =
35
G G G1
c 25
AM1 EC200 AM1 EC200 G2
G3
CR1 F150 F185 F265 F400 F500 F630

c 3P 171 181 213 213 226 250
4P 171 181 213 213 226 250
G (M6) 3P 80 80 96 – – –
4P 80 80 96 – – –
G1 (Ø 8.5) 3P – – – 80 80 –
4P – – – 80 140 –
G2 (Ø 10.5) 3P – – – – – 180
4P – – – – – 240
(1) AF1 CDppp or AF1 VAppp.
(2) This AM1 EC200 upright is required when G2 or G3 is greater than 700 mm (please consult your Regional Sales Office).

5/229
TeSys contactors 5
Reversing contactors 2 x CR1 F150…F265 Reversing contactors 2 x CR1 F400…F630

3xØ6,5 P1 3xØ6,5 8xØ8,5 (1) P1 8xØ8,5 (1)
=
=
=
110/120
120 (2)
180
b
b
=
=
=
= = = = J1 G J G J1
J1 G1 J G1 J1 J3 G1 J2 G1 J3
a a
2 x CR1 F150 F185 F265 2 x CR1 F400 F500 F630

a 3P 345 357 425 a 3P 446 485 636
4P 422 437 521 4P 542 595 796
b 3P 170 174 203 b 3P 206 238 304
4P 170 174 203 4P 206 238 304
G1 3P 80 80 96 G 3P 80 80 180
4P 80 80 96 4P 80 140 240
J 3P 71 78 109 G1 3P 170 170 –
4P 111 118 157 4P 170 230 –
J1 3P 57 59.5 61.5 J 3P 157 156 139
4P 75.5 79.5 85.5 4P 157 156 139
P1 3P 71 78 100 J1 3P 64.5 84.5 68.5
5 4P 71 78 100 4P 112.5 79.5 68.5
J2 3P 67 66 –
4P 67 66 –
J3 3P 19.5 39.5 –
4P 67.5 34.5 –
P1 3P 107 112 137
4P 107 112 137
(1) Except F630: 4 x Ø 10.5.
(2) Except F630: 180.

5/230
TeSys contactors 5
Reversing contactors
Vertically mounted with mechanical interlock LA9 Fppp.
2 contactors CR1 F of identical or different ratings (CR1 F150…F630), see pages 5/220 and 5/221.
J3 80 12,5 G5 G1 12,5 G5 G1
(5) (5)
(1) (1) (1)
(6) (6)
F330 }120
F500 180
F330 }120
F500 180
(3)
120
}
}
= =
F265
F400
F630
F265
F400
F630
= =
(4)
H
H
H 9
G3 J1
H1
(2) G3(2) J1 G3(2) J1
H1
H1
(1) (3)
F330 }120
F500 180
(1) (3) (6)
(1)
120
180
= = = =
}
= =
F265
F400
F630
(5)
(4)
J4 80 J4 80 9
J2 J2 12,5 G4 G2
J2
(1) Mechanical interlock shaft.

(2) For assembly of contactors of different ratings only.
(3) 3 x Ø 6.5 mm for CR1 F150…F265.
(4) 3 x Ø 6.5 mm for CR1 F265.
(5) Mechanical interlock guide bracket.
(6) 4 x Ø 8.5 mm for CR1 F400, F500 or 4 x Ø 10.5 mm.
5
Assembly type A B C
LA9 F F4F G4F G4G H4F J4F K4F L4F H4G J4G K4G L4G H4H J4H K4H L4H J4J K4J L4J K4K L4K L4L
G1 3P – – – 96 80 80 180 96 80 80 180 96 80 80 180 80 80 180 80 180 180
4P – – – 96 80 140 240 96 80 140 240 96 80 140 240 80 140 240 140 240 240
G2 3P – – – – – – – – – – – 96 96 96 96 80 80 80 80 80 180
4P – – – – – – – – – – – 96 96 96 96 80 80 80 140 140 240
G3 3P 0 3 0 21 45 45 35 19 42 42 33 0 23 23 14 0 0 9 (7) 0 9 (7) 0
4P 0 4 0 27 26 26 17 23 22 22 13 0 0 0 9 (7) 0 0 9 (7) 0 9 (7) 0
G4 3P – – – – – – – – – – – 60 60 60 60 83 83 83 83 83 74
4P – – – – – – – – – – – 83 83 83 83 83 83 83 83 83 74
G5 3P – – – 60 83 83 74 60 83 83 74 60 83 83 74 83 83 74 83 74 74
4P – – – 83 83 83 74 83 83 83 74 83 83 83 74 83 83 74 83 74 74
H min. 200 210 220 240 250 270 310 250 250 270 310 250 260 280 330 260 280 325 300 345 380
max. 310 300 310 380 380 380 380 380 380 380 380 380 380 380 380 380 380 380 380 380 380
H1 min. 80 90 100 110 80 100 140 120 90 110 150 130 110 130 170 60 100 140 120 160 200
max. 190 180 190 250 210 210 210 250 220 220 220 260 230 230 220 200 200 195 200 195 200
J1 3P 133 134 134 149.5 137 157 241 149.5 137 157 241 149.5 137 157 24 137 157 241 157 244 241
4P 145 146 146 164.5 185 212 321 164.5 185 212 321 164.5 185 212 321 185 212 321 212 321 321
J2 3P 133 133 134 183 133 183 133 134 134 134 134 142.5 149.5 149.5 149.5 137 137 137 157 157 241
4P 145 145 146 145 145 145 145 146 146 146 146 164.5 164.5 164.5 164.5 185 185 185 212 212 312
J3 3P 48.5 53 53 – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –
4P 67 73 73 – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –
J4 3P 48.5 54 53 48.5 48.5 48.5 48.5 53 53 53 53 – – – – – – – – – –
4P 67 69 73 67 67 67 67 73 73 73 73 – – – – – – – – – –
(7) In this case, G4 is greater than G5.

pages 5/207 to 5/211 pages 5/214 to 5/217 page 5/221 pages 5/234 and 5/235
5/231
Dimensions 5
TeSys contactors 5
Magnetic latching contactors CR1 B
Contactors CR1 B Single-pole, 2-pole or 3-pole 4-pole

Common side view
185 290
R
350
350 15 15 15
365
260
c 85 b c
44 P P Q1 P 51 P Q1
30 M 30 30 M1 M2 30
N
15 L L
T
S T Ø
CR1 BL CR1 BM CR1 BP CR1 BR

1P 2P 3P 4P 1P 2P 3P 4P 1P 2P 3P 4P 1P 2P 3P 4P
a 50 50 50 50 63 63 63 63 100 100 100 100 125 125 125 125
b 59 59 59 59 55 55 55 55 55 55 55 55 50 50 50 50
c 16 16 16 16 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 25 25 25 25
L 345 445 540 760 345 445 540 760 385 540 760 1065 445 635 885 1065
M 285 385 480 – 285 385 480 – 325 480 700 – 385 575 825 –
M1 – – – 308 – – – 308 – – – 455 – – – 455
M2 – – – 392 – – – 392 – – – 550 – – – 550
N 121 121 121 121 125 125 125 125 125 125 125 125 130 130 130 130
5 P
Q1
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
150
110
150
110
150
110
150
110
195
123
195
123
195
123
195
123
R 122 122 122 122 157 157 157 157 173 173 173 173 173 173 173 173
S 10 10 10 10 17 17 17 17 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20
T 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 60
Ø 9 9 9 9 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11
Minimum electrical clearance
Values X1 and X2 are given for a breaking capacity of 10 In (3-phase a current).
3-phase a voltage CR1 BL CR1 BM CR1 BP CR1 BR
380-415-440 V X1 100 100 150 200
X2
X2 150 150 200 250

500 V X1 100 100 150 200
X2 150 150 220 250
600 V X1 150 150 200 200
X2 200 200 250 250
1000 V X1 200 200 200 250
X2 250 250 250 300
X1
Mechanical interlock for assembly of vertically mounted reversing contactors

EZ2 LB0601
A = (E–112) 488
E = 600

5/232
Adjustment TeSys contactors 5
characteristics 5
Magnetic latching contactors CR1 B
Complete pole
501391_1
Adjustment of pick-up travel and pull-in travel
1 E
e
1 Moving circuit
2 2 Coil
3 Moving circuit
3 4 Return spring
N/O pole adjustment
F 1 Fixed contact
2 Moving contact
3 Pull-in gap adjustment
3 4 Adjustment of application force
5 Pole spring
5
4
5
N/C automatic coil cut-out pole adjustment
F 1 Fixed contact
2 2 Moving contact
3 Opening gap adjustment
4 Adjustment of application force
5 Pole spring
3
a.c. or d.c. supply with economy resistor (and rectifier on a)

Contactor type CR1 BL CR1 BM CR1 BP CR1 BR
Electromagnet Pick-up travel (E) mm 30 30 30 30
(EB5 KB50) Pull-in travel (e) mm 10 10 10 10
Coil Pull-in voltage V 0.75 Uc 0.75 Uc 0.75 Uc –
(WB1 KB) Drop-out voltage V 0.3…0.5 Uc 0.3…0.5 Uc 0.3…0.5 Uc 0.3…0.5 Uc
N/O power pole Application force (F) to contact daN 30 30 30 (1) 30 (2)
(PA1) per pole
N/C automatic Application force (F) daN 0.9 0.9 0.9 0.9
coil cut-out pole Opening gap (b) with mm 3.5 ± 0.5 3.5 ± 0.5 3.5 ± 0.5 3.5 ± 0.5
(PR4) electromagnet closed
(1) Each pole has 2 contacts: the force must be applied evenly to each of these contacts.
(2) Each pole has 3 contacts: the force must be applied evenly to each of these contacts.

5/233
Schemes 5
TeSys contactors 5
Contactors CR1 F 3-pole 4-pole
3/L2
3/L2
5/L3
5/L3
7/L4
1/L1
1/L1
A1
A1
A2
E1
A2
E1
T3/6
T3/6
T4/8
T1/2
T2/4
T1/2
T2/4
Instantaneous auxiliary contacts (References : page 5/111)
1 N/O LAD N10 (1) 1 N/C LAD N01 (1) 1 N/O + 1 N/C LAD N11 2 N/O LAD N20 2 N/C LAD N02 2 N/O + 2 N/C LAD N22
61/NC
53/NO
83/NO
71/NC
63/NO
61/NC
43 NO
43/NO
53/NO
53/NO
51/NC
61/NC
41/NC
(92)
(94)
62
72
62
54
84
52
64
62
42
(91)
44
(93)
54
54
1 N/O + 3 N/C LAD N13 4 N/O LAD N40 4 N/C LAD N04 2 N/O + 2 N/C of which 1 N/O + 1 N/C make 3 N/O + 1 N/C LAD N31
before break LAD C22
53/NO
87/NO
53/NO
53/NO
73/NO
83/NO
81/NC
61/NC
53/NO
63/NO
73/NO
83/NO
61/NC
75/NC
71/NC
51/NC
61/NC
71/NC
81/NC
61/NC
54
62
76
88
82
62
54
54
72
52
62
72
82
74
84
62
54
64
74
84
(1) Items in brackets refer to blocks mounted on right-hand side of contactor.

Instantaneous auxiliary contacts conforming to standard EN 50012 (References: page 5/111)
1 N/O +1 N/C 1 N/O +1 N/C 2 N/O + 2 N/C 2 N/O + 2 N/C
LAD N11P LAD N11G LAD N22P LAD N22G
13/NO
43/NO
53/NO
63/NO
13/NO
43/NO
21/NC
31/NC
31/NC
41/NC
21/NC
31/NC
14
22
32
44
32
42
54
64
14
22
32
44
Front mounting add-on contact blocks - Dust and damp protected instantaneous auxiliary contacts (References : page 5/111)
2 N/O (24-50 V) 2 N/O (5-24 V) 2 N/O protected (24-50 V) 2 N/O standard 2 N/O protected (24-50 V) + 1 N/O + 1 N/C standard
5 LA1 DX20 LA1 DY20 LA1 DZ40 LA1 DZ31
53/NO
63/NO
53/NO
63/NO
53/NO
83/NO
53/NO
83/NO
63/NO
73/NO
73/NO
62 61/NC
64
74
74
54
64
54
64
54
84
54
84
Time delay auxiliary contacts (References : page 5/111)

On-delay 1 N/O + 1 N/C LAD Tp Off-delay 1 N/O + 1 N/C LAD Rp On-delay 1 N/C + 1 N/O break before make LAD Sp
67/NO
55/NC
67/NO
57/NO
55/NC
65/NC
56
68
56
68
58
66
3-pole reversing contactors 2 x CR1 F150…F630 4-pole reversing contactors 2 x CR1 F1504…F6304
1N
1/L3
1/L2
1/L1
2/L1
2/L2
2/L3
2N
L1
L2
L3
3
5
7
1
1
3
3
5
5
1
A1
A1
A1
A1
A2
E1
A2
E1
A2
E1
A2
E1
8
2
4
6
6
2
L1
L2
L3
W
N
U
Vertically mounted contactors using 2 contactors of identical or different ratings

1/L1
1/L2
1/L3
1/L1
1/L2
1/L3
1N
3
5
1
7
1
A1
A1
A2
E1
A2
E1
6
2
8
2
N
L3 L3
L2 L2
L1 L1
3
5
1
7
1
A1
A1
A2
E1
A2
E1
6
2
8
2
4
2/L1
2/L2
2/L3
2/L1
2/L2
2/L3
2N

5/234
TeSys contactors 5
Contactors CR1 B
CR1 Bp31p12 CR1 Bp31p21 CR1 Bp31p30
A1
A1
A1
A2
A2
A2
A1
A1
A1
A2
A2
A2
A1
A1
A1
A2
A2
A2

A1
A1
A1
A2
A2
A2
Wiring schemes
Contactors CR1 F and CR1 B Contactors CR1 F Connectors CR1 B
with thermal overload relay
1 L1
3 L2
5 L3
KM1:1
KM1:5
– KM1:5
– KM1
2
1
97
13
95
– KM1 (1) 5
1
– F1 – S2
95 2
96
98
14
21
97
– F1
– S2 – F1
A1 96
2
22
13
13
98
– S1 – KM1
13
14
14
R1
– KM1
W
U
14
13 A2
A1
E1
M – KM1
R2
3c – S1
A2
14
– KM1:1
(1) automatic coil cut-out contact ZC4 GM or PR4 FB00pp

S1: latching pushbutton
S2: unlatching pushbutton
Pushbutton control Scheme of internal circuit
Start
A1
Latching Ø A1
CR1 winding
A2
E1
Stop
a(–)/c a(+)/c
Ø A2
Switch control
Unlatching
A1
Start/Stop winding
CR1 Ø E1
A2
E1
CR1
a(–)/c a(+)/c
Warning: terminal A2 is common to both windings in all cases.

5/235
Selection guide 5
Modular equipment 5
Applications Control of lighting, heating, hot water systems, ventilation systems and small motors
Functions Contactors for standard applications “Dual tariff”contactors
Rating 16…63 A 16…63 A
Number of 17.5 mm modules 1…3 1…4

(variable, depending on size and number of poles)
Device type GC GY
5
Pages 5/246 5/260
5/236
5
5
Control of lighting, heating, hot Direct control of motors Fuse protection Motor control and protection
water systems, ventilation
systems and small motors
Impulse relays Rotary switch disconnectors Single, 2, 3 or 4-pole fuse carriers, Thermal-magnetic
with or without neutral motor circuit-breakers
16 A 25…80 A Up to 125 A 0,1…32 A
1 2.5 1…8 2.5
GF 16 VVD, VVE DF6, GK1 GV2 M

5
5/250 Please consult your Regional Sales 4/26 3/45
Office
5/237
Presentation, Modular equipment 5
standards 5
Standard contactors, type GC
Presentation
533704
GC contactors are designed for use in modular panels and enclosures.

These contactors feature:
b Easy installation
v quick clip-on fixing and locking onto 35 mm omega rail,
v easy connection by means of ready-to-tighten, captive, pozidrive screw terminals.
b Compact size
GC 25 All units have a common depth of 60 mm and width in modules of 17.5 mm (width of
one module: 17.5 mm).
b User safety
v use of materials conforming to strictest fire safety standards,
v live parts protected against direct finger contact,
v completely safe operation,
v state indication on front panel.
Standards
This range of modular contactors has been designed taking into account the
requirements of international standard IEC 61095.
This standard is specific to “Electromagnetic contactors for domestic and similar
use”.
It has very strict requirements, meeting the expectations of users, with regard to the
safety of equipment and persons in “premises and areas accessible to the public”.
Conformity with this standard makes it possible to obtain the following quality labels
without the need for additional tests: NF-USE, VDE, CEBEC, etc.
Applications
GC modular contactors are designed for switching all single-phase, 3-phase or
5 4-phase loads up to 100 A.
Power switching
These contactors have multiple applications in industrial, agricultural and
commercial premises, hospitals and the home, i.e. wherever switching of a specific
supply is required:
b lighting,
b heating,
b ventilation,
b motorised shutters or gates.

pages 5/240 to 5/243 pages 5/244 and 5/245 pages 5/246 and 5/247 pages 5/248 and 5/249
5/238
Setting-up Modular equipment 5
precautions 5
Setting-up precautions
The contactor controls must be bounce free. If not, connect a coil suppression block
1 (GAP 21, 22 or 23) across the coil terminals y 250 V.
When several contactors which operate at the same time are mounted side by side,
a GAC 5 ventilation 1/2 module 2 must be fitted every 2 contactors.
2 1
It is advisable to mount electronic units at the bottom of the modular panel and to
separate them from electromechanical units by a space 3 equal to one module, or by
2 ventilation 1/2 modules (GAC 5).
3 5
Derating of contactors mounted in a modular enclosure if the temperature within the
enclosure is > 40 °C
Contactor rating 40 °C 50 °C 60 °C (1)

16 A 16 A 14 A 13 A
25 A 25 A 22 A 20 A
40 A 40 A 36 A 32 A
63 A 63 A 57 A 50 A
100 A 100 A 87 A 80 A
(1) Ventilation 1/2 module must be fitted

5/239
Contactor selection for Modular equipment 5
lighting circuits 5
Modular contactors
Lighting (Maximum number of lamps depending on the power of each unit)

Presentation of installations according to type of supply
Single-phase circuit, 230 V
L1
230V
N
3-phase circuit, 230 V
L1 The maximum number of lamps
230V 230V
which can be operated per
230V
L2
phase is equal to the number of
L3 lamps in the “single phase
230 V” table divided by 3.
3-phase circuit, 400 V (with neutral)
L1 The maximum number of lamps

which can be operated per
L2
230V
phase is equal to the total

230V
L3 number of lamps in the “single-

230V
phase 230 V” table.

N
Contactor rating for a single-phase 230 V circuit (single-pole)

Fluorescent lamps with starter
Single Non corrected With parallel correction Contactor

fitting rating
5 P (W)
IB (A)
20 40 50 80 110
0.39 0.43 0.70 0.80 1.2
20 40 58 80 110
0.19 0.29 0.46 0.57 0.79
–
–
C (µF) – – – – – 5 5 7 7 16 –
Maximum 22 20 13 10 7 15 15 10 10 5 16 A
number 30 28 17 15 10 20 20 15 15 7 25 A
of lamps
70 60 35 30 20 40 40 30 30 14 40 A
100 90 56 48 32 60 60 43 43 20 63 A
Twin Non corrected With series correction Contactor

fitting rating
P (W) 2 x 18 2 x 36 2 x 58 2 x 80 2 x 140 2 x 18 2 x 36 2 x 58 2 x 80 2 x 140 –
IB (A) 0.44 0.82 1.34 1.64 2.2 0.26 0.48 0.78 0.96 1.3 –
C (µF) – – – – – 3.5 4.5 7 9 18 –
Maximum 20 11 7 5 4 30 17 10 9 6 16 A
number 30 16 10 8 6 46 25 16 13 10 25 A
of lamps
50 26 16 13 10 80 43 27 22 16 40 A
75 42 25 21 16 123 67 42 34 25 63 A
High pressure mercury vapour lamps
Non corrected With parallel correction Contactor

rating
P (W) 50 80 125 250 400 700 50 80 125 250 400 700 1000 –
IB (A) 0.6 0.8 1.15 2.15 3.25 5.4 0.35 0.50 0.7 1.5 2.4 4 5.7 –
C (µF) – – – – – – 7 8 10 18 25 40 60 –
Maximum 15 10 8 4 2 1 10 9 9 4 3 2 – 16 A
number 20 15 10 6 4 2 15 13 10 6 4 2 1 25 A
of lamps
34 27 20 10 6 4 28 25 20 11 8 5 3 40 A
53 40 28 15 10 6 43 38 30 17 12 7 5 63 A
IB : value of current drawn by each lamp at its rated voltage.
C : unit capacitance for each lamp.
IB and C correspond to values normally quoted by lamp manufacturers

5/240
lighting circuits (continued) 5

Modular contactors
Contactor rating for a single-phase 230 V circuit (single-pole) (continued)


rating
P (W) 18 35 55 90 135 180 18 35 55 90 135 180 –
IB (A) 0.35 1.4 1.4 2.1 3.1 3.1 0.35 0.6 0.6 0.9 0.9 0.9 –
C (µF) – – – – – – 5 20 20 26 45 40 –
Maximum 18 4 5 3 2 2 14 3 3 2 1 1 16 A
number 34 9 9 6 4 4 21 5 5 4 2 2 25 A
of lamps
57 14 14 9 6 6 40 10 10 8 4 5 40 A
91 24 24 19 10 10 60 15 15 11 6 7 63 A
High pressure sodium vapour lamps

rating
P (W) 70 150 250 400 1000 70 150 250 400 1000 –
IB (A) 1 1.8 3 4.4 10.3 0.6 0.7 1.5 2.5 6 –
C (µF) – – – – – 12 20 32 45 100 –
Maximum 8 4 2 1 – 6 6 2 2 1 16 A
number 12 7 4 3 1 9 9 3 4 2 25 A
of lamps
20 13 8 5 2 18 18 6 8 4 40 A
32 18 11 8 3 25 25 9 12 6 63 A
Metal iodine or halogen vapour lamps

5
rating
P (W) 35 70 150 250 400 1000 39 70 150 250 400 1000 2000 –
IB (A) 0.3 0.5 1 1.5 2.5 6 0.3 0.5 1 1.5 2.5 6 5.5 –
C (µF) – – – – – – 6 12 20 32 45 85 60 –
Maximum 27 16 8 5 3 1 12 6 4 3 2 – 1 16 A
number 40 24 12 8 5 2 18 9 6 4 3 1 2 25 A
of lamps
68 42 20 14 8 4 31 16 10 7 5 3 3 40 A
106 64 32 21 13 5 50 25 15 10 7 4 5 63 A
Incandescent and halogen lamps
Contactor
rating
P (W) 60 75 100 150 200 300 500 1000 –
IB (A) 0.26 0.32 0.44 0.65 0.87 1.3 2.17 4.4 –
Maximum 30 25 19 12 10 7 4 2 16 A
number 45 38 28 18 14 10 6 3 25 A
of lamps
85 70 50 35 26 18 10 6 40 A
125 100 73 50 37 25 15 8 63 A
Halogen lamps used with transformer
Contactor
rating
P (W) 60 80 105 150 –
IB (A) 0.26 0.35 0.45 0.65 –
Maximum 9 8 6 4 16 A
of lamps 14 12 9 6 25 A
27 23 18 13 40 A
40 35 27 19 63 A
IB : value of current drawn by each lamp at its rated voltage.
C : unit capacitance for each lamp.
IB and C correspond to values normally quoted by lamp manufacturers
5/241
heating circuits (continued) 5

Modular contactors
Heating (AC-7a)
U
3-phase switching
U
U
U
Heating by resistive elements or by infra-red radiators, convectors or radiators,

heating ducts, industrial furnaces. The current peak between the hot and cold states
must not exceed 2 to 3 In at the moment of switch-on.
Contactor selection according to power and required electrical life

Electrical durability Maximum power (kW) Contactor
(in operating cycles) 100 x 103 150 x 103 200 x 10 3 500 x 103 10 6 rating
Single-phase switching 3.5 3 2.2 1 0.8 16 A
5 230 V
(2-pole) 5.4 4.6 3.5 1.6 1.2 25 A
8.6 7.4 5.6 2.6 1.9 40 A
13.6 11.6 8.8 4 3 63 A
21.6 18.4 14 6.4 4.8 100 A
3-phase switching 10 9 6.5 3.2 2.2 16 A

400 V
(3-pole) 16 14 10 5 3.5 25 A
26 22 17 7.5 6 40 A
41 35 26.5 12 9 63 A
64.8 55.2 42 19.2 14.4 100 A

5/242
motor control 5
Modular contactors
Motor control (AC-7b)

Single-phase circuit, 230 V
U
L1
M
V
L2
3-phase circuit, 400 V
U
L1
V M
L2
W
L3
Contactor selection according to maximum power in kW

230 V single-phase 400 V 3-phase motor Contactor
capacitor motor rating
(2-pole) (Ith)
0.55 2.2 16 A
1.1 4 25 A
2.2 7.5 40 A
4 11 63 A
5

5/243
Characteristics 5
Modular equipment 5
Contactor type GC16 GC25 GC40 GC63 GC100

Environment
Rated insulation voltage Conforming to IEC 61095 V 500
(Ui) Conforming to VDE 0110 V 500
Rated impulse withstand voltage kV 4 in enclosure

(Uimp)
Conforming to standards IEC 61095, VDE 0637-3 and IEC 60947-5 for auxiliary contacts
Product certifications NF- USE, VDE, CEBEC, ÖVE
Degree of protection Conforming to VDE 0106 Protection against direct finger contact (IP 20 open, IP 40 in enclosure)

around the device Operation °C - 5…+ 50 (0.85…1.1 Uc)
Operating positions Without derating ± 30° in relation to normal vertical mounting plane

1/2 sine wave = 10 ms Contactor closed 15 gn

Flame resistance Conforming to IEC 61095
5 Number of poles 2, 3 or 4
Rated operational current (Ie) In AC-7a (heating) A 16 25 40 63 100

(Ue y 440 V) In AC-7b (motor control) A 5 8.5 15 25 –
Rated operational voltage Up to V 250 two-pole contactors, 415 three and four-pole contactors
(Ue)
Frequency limits Of the operating current Hz 400
Conventional thermal current θ y 50 °C A 16 25 40 63 100

(lth)
Rated breaking and making Conforming to IEC 61095 A 40 68 120 200 –
capacity (AC-7b)
I rms 400 V 3-phase
Permissible short time rating For 10 s A 128 200 320 504 800
no current flowing for preceding For 30 s A 40 62 100 157 250
Short-circuit protection gl fuse A 16 25 40 63 100
by fuse or circuit breaker Circuit-breaker I2t 230 V A2s 5000 10 000 16 000 18 000 –
U y 440 V (at 3 kA rms 400 V A2s 9000 14 000 17 500 20 000 –
prospective)
Average impedance per pole At lth and 50 Hz mΩ 2.5 2.5 2 2 1
Power dissipated per pole For the above W 0.65 1.6 3.2 8 10
operational currents
Maximum Flexible cable 1 conductor mm2 6 6 25 25 35
cabling c.s.a. without cable end 2 conductors mm2 4 4 16 16 –
Flexible cable 1 conductor mm2 6 6 16 16 35

with cable end 2 conductors mm2 1.5 1.5 4 4 –
Solid cable 1 conductor mm2 6 6 25 25 35

without cable end 2 conductors mm2 4 4 6 6 10
Tightening torque Power circuit connections N.m 1.4 1.4 3.5 3.5 5
Selection : References : Dimensions, schemes :

5/244
Modular equipment 5
Contactor type GC16, GC25 GC16, GC25 GC40, GC63 GC100

single or 2-pole 3 or 4-pole 3 or 4-pole 4-pole
GC40, GC63 GC100
2-pole 2-pole
Rated control circuit voltage (Uc) 50 or 60 Hz V 12…240 V, for other voltages, please consult your Regional Sales Office
Control voltage limits 50 Hz coils Operational 0.85…1.1 Uc
(θ y 50 °C) Drop-out 0.2…0.75 Uc
Average coil a 50 Hz Inrush VA 15 34 53 106

consumption Sealed VA 3.8 4.6 6.5 13
at 20 °C and at Uc
Maximum heat dissipation 50/60 Hz W 1.3 1.6 2.1 4.2
Operating time Closing "C" ms 10…30

Opening "O" ms 10…25
Mechanical durability In operating cycles 106

Maximum operating rate In operating cycles per 300
at ambient temperature y 50 °C hour
Maximum Flexible cable 1 or 2 conductors mm 2 2.5
cabling c.s.a. without cable
end
Flexible cable 1 conductor mm 2 2.5
with cable end 2 conductors mm 2 1.5
Solid cable 1 or 2 conductors mm 2 1.5

without
cable end
Instantaneous auxiliary contact characteristics

Rated operational voltage (Ue) Up to V 250 5
IEC 60947-5
Conforming to V 500
VDE 0110
Conventional thermal current (Ith) For ambient θ y 50 °C A 5
Mechanical durability Operating cycles 106
Maximum cabling c.s.a. Flexible or mm 2 2.5

solid conductor
Selection : References : Dimensions, schemes :

5/245
References 5
Modular equipment 5

533709
Maximum No. of poles Number of Sold in Basic reference, Weight

current 17.5 mm lots of to be completed by
rating modules adding the voltage code (1)
category
AC-7a
A kg
16 1 – 1 12 GC 1610pp 0.110
2 – 1 12 GC 1620pp 0.110
3 – 2 6 GC 1630pp 0.230
GC 2520 4 – 2 6 GC 1640pp 0.230
1 1 1 12 GC 1611pp 0.110
2 2 2 6 GC 1622pp 0.230
25 1 – 1 12 GC 2510pp 0.110
533710
2 – 1 12 GC 2520pp 0.110
3 – 2 6 GC 2530pp 0.230
4 – 2 6 GC 2540pp 0.230
1 1 1 12 GC 2511pp 0.110
2 2 2 6 GC 2522pp 0.230
– 2 1 12 GC 2502pp 0.110
– 4 2 6 GC 2504pp 0.230
40 2 – 2 6 GC 4020pp 0.230
3 – 3 4 GC 4030pp 0.350
4 – 3 4 GC 4040pp 0.390
GC 4040 1 1 2 6 GC 4011pp 0.230
2 2 3 4 GC 4022pp 0.390
5 –
–
2
4
2
3
6
4
GC 4002pp
GC 4004pp
0.230
0.390
63 2 – 2 6 GC 6320pp 0.340
3 – 3 4 GC 6330pp 0.390
4 – 3 4 GC 6340pp 0.390
1 1 2 6 GC 6311pp 0.340
2 2 3 4 GC 6322pp 0.390
– 2 2 6 GC 6302pp 0.340
– 4 3 4 GC 6304pp 0.390
100 2 – 3 4 GC 10020pp 0.680

4 – 6 2 GC 10040pp 0.780
Office):
GC 10020 Volts 12 24 48 110 220/240
50 Hz J5 B5 E5 F5 M5
60 Hz J6 B6 E6 F6 M6

5/246
Modular equipment 5

533715
Number No. of poles Reference Weight

of contacts
kg
2 1 1 – GAC 0521 0.016
– 2 – GAC 0531 0.016

GAC 05pp
– – 1 GAC 0511 0.016

533715
Accessories
Description For use on Number Operational Sold in Unit Weight
contactor of voltage lots of reference
modules
V kg
Coil – 1 12…48 1 GAP 21 0.090
suppression
blocks
GAP 2p comprising 48…127 1 GAP 22 0.090
2 RC circuits
220…240 1 GAP 23 0.090
Ventilation – 1/2 – 10 GAC 5 0.015

1/2 module
Clips onto
5 rail
5
Cover plates – 1/2 – 10 GA1 C7 0.001
GA1 Cp
GAC 5
1 – 10 GA1 C6 0.001
Set of sealable 16 or 25 A 2 – 1 GW 254 0.040

terminal covers 3 or 4
(10 top parts + contacts
10 bottom parts) 40 or 63 A 2 – 1 GW 632 0.040
2 contacts
GW 254
40 or 63 A 3 – 1 GW 634 0.050
3 or 4
contacts
GW 63p

5/247
Dimensions 5
Modular equipment 5
Dimensions
Contactors
Common side view GC 1610, 1611, 1620 GC 1622, 1640
GC 2502, 2510, 2511, 2520 GC 2504, 2522, 2530, 2540
1 module 2 modules
44,4
81
43,7 17,5 35
60
65
Common side view GC 4002, 4011, 4020 GC 4004, 4022, 4030, 4040
GC 6302, 6311, 6320 GC 6304, 6322, 6330, 6340
2 modules 3 modules
44,4
81
43,7 35 52,5
60
65
Common side view GC 10020 GC 10040

3 modules 6 modules
44,4
81
43,7 54 108
60
65

5/248
Dimensions (continued) Modular equipment 5
schemes 5
Dimensions
Auxiliary contacts Coil suppression blocks
GAC 0511, 0531 and 0521 GAP 21, 22 and 23
44,4
44,4
81
81
43,7 8,75 43,7 17,5
60 12,75 60
65 65
Clip-on ventilation 1/2 module Cover plates

GAC 5 GA1 C6 GA1 C7
44
54
54
65 8
6
67
11,5 18 11,5 9
6
5
Schemes
Contactors
GC pp10 GC pp20 GC pp30 GC pp40
A1
A1
A1
A1
1
7
2
8
2
A2
A2
A2
A2
GC pp11 GC pp22 GC pp02 GC pp04

R1
R1
R3
R1
R3
R1
R3
R5
R7
A1
A1
A1
A1
1
3
R2
R2
R4
R2
R4
R2
R4
R6
R8
2
4
A2
A2
A2
A2
Auxiliary contacts
GAC 0521 GAC 0531 GAC 0511
13/NO
13/NO
23/NO
21/NC
13/NO
14
22
14
24
14/NO
12

5/249
Presentation 5
Modular equipment 5
Impulse relays, type GF16
Presentation
534004
GF 16 impulse relays are designed for use in modular enclosures.

They feature:
b Easy installation
v easy connection by means of ready-to-tighten captive, pozidrive screw terminals.
b Compact size
Units have a common depth of 60 mm and width of 18 mm.
GF 16
b User safety
Standards
This range of modular impulse relays has been designed taking into account the
requirements of international standard IEC 60669-2.
This standard is specific to "Impulse relays".
Functions
Modular impulse relays are designed for opening and closing of circuits which are
remotely controlled by impulses. The position is mechanically maintained.
These impulse relays are used in lighting circuits when there are more than two
switching points.
5
Power switching
GF 16 impulse relays have multiple applications in industrial, agricultural and
commercial premises, hospitals and the home, i.e. wherever switching of a specific
lighting supply is required:

5/250
Selection for lighting Modular equipment 5
and heating circuits 5

Impulse relays, type GF 16
Lighting circuits
Fluorescent lamps with starter
Single fitting Non corrected With parallel correction
Power in W 18 36 58 18 36 58
Number of lamps 70 35 21 50 25 16
Twin fitting With series correction
Power in W 2 x 18 2 x 36 2 x 58
Number of lamps 56 28 17
Incandescent lamps: filament lamps

Power in W 40 60 75 100 200
Number of lamps 40 25 20 16 8
Incandescent lamps: halogen lamps

Power in W 300 500 1000 1500
Number of lamps 5 3 1 1
Incandescent lamps: very low voltage halogen lamps

Power in W 20 50 75 100
5
Non corrected
Power in W 55 90 135 180
High pressure sodium vapour lamps

Non corrected
Power in W 250 400 1000
Number of lamps 5 3 1
Heating circuits
Single-phase 230 V, 2-pole
Power in kW 3.6

5/251
Characteristics 5
Modular equipment 5
Environment
IEC 60947-1-5
Conforming to V 400
VDE 0110
Rated impulse withstand voltage (Uimp) kV 4 in enclosure
Conforming to standards IEC 60669-1 and 60669-2, NF C 61-112
Product certifications NF-USE, CEBEC, ASE, KEMA, N, S, D, FI, VDE
Degree of protection Conforming to Protection against direct finger contact IP 20 open, IP 40 in enclosure
VDE 0106

around the device
Shock resistance Impulse relay open Please consult your Regional Sales Office
1/2 sine wave = 10 ms
Impulse relay closed Please consult your Regional Sales Office
Vibration resistance Impulse relay open 4 gn

5…300 Hz
Impulse relay closed 4 gn
5 Pole characteristics
Number of poles 1 or 2
Rated operational current (Ie) In AC-7a (heating) A 16

(Ue y 250 V)
Conventional thermal current (lth) θ y 50 °C A 16
Permissible short time rating For 1 s A 320

no current flowing for preceding
15 minutes with θ y 40 °C For 10 s A 96
For 30 s A 48
Short-circuit protection gl fuse A 16

by fuse or circuit-breaker
Circuit-breaker I2t (at A2s 5000
3 kA rms prospective)
Average impedance per pole At lth and 50 Hz mΩ 4
Power dissipated per pole W 1
Maximum Min. Max.

cabling Flexible cable 1 conductor mm2 0.5 6
c.s.a. without cable end
2 conductors mm2 0.5 4
Flexible cable 1 conductor mm2 0.5 6

with cable end
Solid cable 1 conductor mm2 0.5 6

without cable end
Tightening torque Power circuit N.m 1.4

connections
Presentation : Selection : References : Dimensions, schemes :

5/252
Modular equipment 5

Rated control circuit voltage (Uc) V 12…240 V, for other voltages, please consult your Regional Sales Office
Control voltage limits Operating threshold, V 0.85…1.1 Uc

(θ < 50 °C) dual frequency 50/60 Hz
Average consumption Inrush at 50 Hz VA 19

at 20 °C and at Uc
Operating time Closing "C" ms 70
Opening "O" ms 70
Minimum impulse time ms 70
Mechanical durability 106 operating cycles
AC-21 200 000 operating cycles
AC-22 100 000 operating cycles
Maximum operating rate Operating cycles 900

per hour
Maximum
cabling c.s.a. 5
Flexible cable 1 or 2 conductors mm 2 2.5
without cable end

with cable end
2 conductors mm 2 1.5

without cable end
Presentation : Selection : References : Dimensions, schemes :

5/253
References 5
Modular equipment 5
Impulse relays type GF 16

534005
Maximum current rating Composition Coil voltages Sold in Unit Weight

category AC-1 a 50/60 Hz c lots of reference
A V V kg
16 1 – 12 6 12 GF 1610J7 0.110
24 12 12 GF 1610B7 0.110
GF 1610
48 24 12 GF 1610E7 0.110
110 48 12 GF 1610F7 0.110
220 – 12 GF 1610M7 0.110
230/240 110 12 GF 1610U7 0.110
2 – 12 6 12 GF 1620J7 0.110
24 12 12 GF 1620B7 0.110
48 24 12 GF 1620E7 0.110
110 48 12 GF 1620F7 0.110
220 – 12 GF 1620M7 0.110
230/240 110 12 GF 1620U7 0.110
5 1 1 12 6 12 GF 1611J7 0.110
24 12 12 GF 1611B7 0.110
48 24 12 GF 1611E7 0.110
110 48 12 GF 1611F7 0.110
220 – 12 GF 1611M7 0.110
230/240 110 12 GF 1611U7 0.110
Presentation : Selection : Characteristics : Dimensions, schemes :

5/254
Dimensions, Modular equipment 5
schemes 5
Dimensions
GF 1610, GF 1611, GF 1620
81
45
44 18
60 5,5
64
Schemes
GF 1610 GF 1611 GF 1620
A1
A1
R1
A1
1
3
1
4
2
A2
A2
R2
2
A2
Presentation : Selection : Characteristics : References :

5/255
Presentation Modular equipment 5
standards 5
“Dual tariff” contactors, type GY
Presentation
812020
GY "Dual tariff" contactors are designed for use in modular panels and enclosures.
These contactors feature:
b Easy installation
v easy connection by means of ready-to-tighten captive, pozidrive screw terminals.
b Compact size
GY 25 All units have a common depth of 60 mm and width in modules of 17.5 mm (width of
one module: 17.5 mm).
b User safety
v use of materials conforming to strictest fire safety standards,
“Dual tariff” contactors are designed for use with Electricity Supply Authority dual
tariffs.
They have a 4-position selector switch on the front panel:
“Stop” (O) For switching off the load, e.g. for prolonged periods of
absence.
“Off peak” The contactor switches automatically during “off peak” hours
Automatic start (A) as set by the Supply Authority remote control and thus
supplies the load, (washing machine, dishwasher, convector
heater, water heater) during this period, at an economy rate to
the user.
5 “Peak time” In this position, the contactor supplies the load to cater for
Manual start (I) additional requirements for hot water, heating, etc., but at
the standard rate. The contactor returns automatically to the
“off-peak” position at the start of the “off-peak” period.
“Peak time” Facility for setting the contactor to continuous manual

Manual override operation, ignoring the automation system and the Supply
with lock Authority control; setting and locking is achieved by means
of a tool, with manual return to the “AUTO” position.
Standards
This range of modular contactors has been designed taking into account the
requirements of international standard IEC 61095.
This standard is specific to “Electromagnetic contactors for domestic and similar
use”.
It has very strict requirements, meeting the expectations of users, with regard to the
safety of equipment and persons in “premises and areas accessible to the public”.
Applications
"Dual tariff" modular contactors are designed for switching all single-phase, 3-phase
or 4-phase loads up to 63 A.
Power switching
GY contactors have multiple applications in industrial, agricultural and commercial
premises, hospitals and the home, i.e. wherever switching of a specific supply is
required:
v lighting,
v heating, ventilation,
v motorised shutters or gates.
Selection : Characteristics : References : Dimensions and schemes :

5/256
Setting-up Modular equipment 5
precautions 5
Setting-up precautions
The contactor controls must be bounce free. If not, connect a coil suppression block
1 (GAP 21, 22 or 23) across the coil terminals y 250 V.
When several contactors which operate at the same time are mounted side by side,
a GAC 5 ventilation 1/2 module 2 must be fitted every 2 contactors.
2 1
It is advisable to mount electronic units at the bottom of the modular panel and to
separate them from electromechanical units by a space equal to one module 3 or by
2 ventilation 1/2 modules GAC 5
3
5
Derating of contactors mounted in a modular enclosure if the temperature within the
enclosure is > 40 °C
Contactor rating 40°C 50°C 60 °C (1)
16 A 16 A 14 A 13 A
25 A 25 A 22 A 20 A
40 A 40 A 36 A 32 A
63 A 63 A 57 A 50 A
(1) Ventilation 1/2 module must be fitted

5/257
Characteristics 5
Modular equipment 5
Environment
Type GY 16 GY 25 GY 40 GY 63
Rated insulation voltage (Ui) Conforming to IEC 61095 V 500
Conforming to VDE 0110 V 500
Rated impulse withstand voltage (Uimp) kV 4 in enclosure
Conforming to standards IEC 61095, VDE 0637-3 and IEC 60947-5 for auxiliary contacts
Product certifications NF-USE, VDE, CEBEC, ÖVE
Degree of protection Conforming to VDE 0106 Protection against direct finger contact IP 20 open, IP 40 in enclosure

around the device Operation °C - 5…+ 50 (0.85…1.1 Uc)

1/2 sine wave = 11 ms Contactor closed 15 gn

Flame resistance Conforming to IEC 61095
5 Number of poles 2, 3 or 4
Rated operational current (Ie) In AC-7a (heating) A 16 25 40 63

(Ue y 440 V) In AC-7b (motor control) A 5 8.5 15 25
Rated operational voltage (Ue) Up to V 250 - 2-pole contactors, 415 - 3 and 4-pole contactors
Frequency limits Of the operating current Hz 400
Conventional θ y 50 °C A 16 25 40 63
thermal current (lth)
Rated breaking Conforming to IEC 61095 A 40 68 120 200
and making capacity (AC-7b)
I rms 400 V 3-phase
Short time rating For 10 s A 128 200 320 504
with no current flow for the For 30 s A 40 62 100 157
previous previous 15 minutes
with θ y 40 °C
Short-circuit protection by fuse or circuit breaker
U y 440 V
gl fuse A 16 25 40 63
Circuit breaker I 2t 230V A2s 5000 10 000 16 000 18 000
(at 3 kA rms prospective) 400V A2s 9000 14 000 17 500 20 000
Average impedance per pole At lth and 50 Hz mΩ 2.5 2.5 2 2
Power dissipated per pole For the above operational W 0.65 1.6 3.2 8
currents
Maximum cabling c.s.a.
Flexible cable 1 conductor mm2 6 6 25 25
without cable end 2 conductors mm2 4 4 16 16
Flexible cable 1 conductor mm2 6 6 16 16

with cable end 2 conductors mm2 1.5 1.5 4 4
Solid cable 1 conductor mm2 6 6 25 25

without cable end 2 conductors mm2 4 4 6 6
Tightening torque Power circuit connections N.m 1.4 1.4 3.5 3.5

5/258
Modular equipment 5

Type GY 16, GY 25 GY 16, GY 25 GY 40, GY 63
single or 2-pole 3 or 4-pole 3 or 4-pole
GY 40, GY 63
2-pole
Rated control 50 or 60 Hz V 12…240 V, for other voltages, please consult your Regional Sales Office
circuit voltage (Uc)
Control voltage limits (θ y 50 °C)
50 Hz coils Operational 0.85…1.1 Uc
Drop-out 0.2…0.75 Uc
Average consumption at 20 °C and at Uc

a 50 Hz Inrush VA 15 34 53
Sealed VA 3.8 4.6 6,5
Heat dissipation 50/60 Hz W 1.3 1.6 2.1
Operating time Closing "C" ms 10 ... 30

Opening "O" ms 10 ... 25

Maximum cabling c.s.a.
Flexible cable 1 or 2 conductors mm 2 2.5
without cable end
with cable end
2 conductors mm 2 1.5

without cable end 5
Instantaneous auxiliary contact characteristics

Rated operational Up to V 250
voltage (Ue)
Conforming to VDE 0110 V 500
Conventional For ambient θ y 50 °C A 5

Maximum cabling c.s.a. Flexible or solid conductor mm 2 2.5

5/259
References 5
Modular equipment 5

Maximum No. of poles Number of Sold in Basic reference, Weight
current 17.5 mm lots of to be completed by
rating modules adding the voltage code (1)
category AC-7a
A kg
16 2 – 1 12 GY 1620pp 0.110
812024
4 – 2 6 GY 1640pp 0.230
1 1 1 12 GY 1611pp 0.110
25 2 – 1 12 GY 2520pp 0.110
3 – 2 6 GY 2530pp 0.230
GY 2520 4 – 2 6 GY 2540pp 0.230
1 1 1 12 GY 2511pp 0.110
812023
40 2 – 2 6 GY 4020pp 0.230
3 – 3 4 GY 4030pp 0.350
4 – 3 4 GY 4040pp 0.390
63 2 – 2 6 GY 6320pp 0.340
3 – 3 4 GY 6330pp 0.390
4 – 3 4 GY 6340pp 0.390
5 GY 6340
Volts 12 24 48 110 220/240
50 Hz J5 B5 E5 F5 M5
60 Hz J6 B6 E6 F6 M6

5/260
References 5
Modular equipment 5

812030
Number of contacts Number of poles Reference Weight
kg
2 1 1 – GAC 0521 0.016
– 2 – GAC 0531 0.016
GAP 2p – – 1 GAC 0511 0.016
Accessories
812029
812029
Description For use on Number Operational Sold in Unit Weight

contactor of modules voltage lots of reference
in V kg
Coil suppression blocks – 1 12…48 1 GAP 21 0.090
comprising 2 RC circuits
48…127 1 GAP 22 0.090
GAC 5 GA1 Cp 220…240 1 GAP 23 0.090

522643
Ventilation 1/2 module – 1/2 – 10 GAC 5 0.015

clips onto 5 rail
Cover plates – 1/2 – 10 GA1 C7 0.001
GW 254 1 – 10 GA1 C6 0.001

522644
Set of sealable 16 or 25 A 2 – 1 GW 254 0.040

terminal covers
(10 top parts
+ 10 bottom parts)
3 or 4 contacts
40 or 63 A 2 – 1 GW 632 0.040 5
2 contacts
40 or 63 A 3 – 1 GW 634 0.050
3 or 4 contacts
GW 63p

5/261
Dimensions 5
Modular equipment 5
“Dual tariff” contactors

GY 1611, 1620 GY 1640
GY 2511, 2520 GY 2530, 2540
Common side view 1 module 2 modules
44,4
81
43,7 17,5 35
64
69
GY 4020 GY 4030, 4040

GY 6320 GY 6330, 6340
Common side view 2 modules 3 modules
44,4
81
5
43,7 35 52,5
64
69

5/262
Dimensions (continued), Modular equipment 5
schemes 5
Dimensions
Auxiliary contacts Coil suppression block
GAC 0511, 0531 and 0521 GAP 21, 22 and 23
44,4
44,4
81
81
43,7 8,75 43,7 17,5
60 12,75 60
65 65
Clip-on ventilation 1/2 module Cover plates

GAC 5 GA1 C6 GA1 C7
44
54
54
65 8
6
67
11,5 18 11,5 9
6
5
Schemes
Contactors
GY pp20 GY pp30 GY pp40 GY pp11
A1
A1
A1
R1
A1
1
1
2
8
A2
A2
A2
R2
2
A2
Auxiliary contacts
GAC 0521 GAC 0531 GAC 0511
13/NO
13/NO
23/NO
21/NC
13/NO
14
22
14
24
14/NO
12

5/263
Contents 0
Relays
b Motor protection
v General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 6/4
k thermal overload relays

b Adjustable from 0,11 to 16 A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 6/8
3-pole thermal overload relays TeSys d

b Description, characteristics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 6/12
b Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 6/19
3-pole electronic thermal overload relays LR9 D

b Description, characteristics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 6/14
3-pole electronic thermal overload relays LR9 F

b Presentation, characteristics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 6/24
b Dimensions, schemes, setting-up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 6/32

6
Electronic over current relays LR97 D and LT47
b Presentation, description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 6/34
b Curves, characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 6/35
Multifunction protection relays LT6 P

b Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 6/40
b Characteristics, curves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 6/42
b Dimensions, mounting, application schemes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 6/50
Thermistor protection units for use with PTC

thermistor probes, LT3 S
b General, characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 6/60
b Dimensions, schemes, setting-up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 6/66
b Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 6/67
6/0
Single-pole magnetic over current relays RM1 XA
b References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 6/69
b Dimensions, schemes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 6/71
6/1
Selection guide 6
Relays
Applications Standard motor protection
Line protection
Protection Motor overload

Stalling
Phase failure
Communication –
Associated with contactor type LC1 K, LP1 K LC1 D LC1 F
Motor current (In) 0.11…16 A 0.1…150 A 30…630 A
6 Relay type references LR2 K LRp D LR9 F
Pages 6/10 6/18 and 6/19 6/28 and 6/29
6/2
6
6
Machine protection Standard motor protection Motor protection and

control
Specific motor protection Protection of slip ring Protection of resistors, Protection

motors and of circuits bearings, capacitors
without current peaks
Overtorque Overtorque Strong overcurrent Frequent starting Thermal overload

Mechanical shocks Mechanical shocks Stalling Harsh environments Phase imbalance and
Locked rotor phase failure
Phase failure Stalling
Reversal of phase rotation
Underload and protracted
starting time
Earth fault
Too low power factor, cos ϕ
– Yes
All contactors
0.3…38 A 0.3…60 A 0.7…630 A Unlimited 1…5 A
LR97 D LT47 RM1 XA LT3 S LT6

6
6/38 6/69 and 6/70 6/64 6/48 and 6/49
6/3
General 6
Motor protection
There are many possible causes of electric motor failure. One of the most common,
and which is often accidental, is the utilisation of motors beyond the operating limits
defined by the manufacturer or in abnormal ambient conditions.
A statistical survey carried out in Britain, covering 9000 incidents of motor failure,
gave the following results:
Overloads 30 %
Pollution (example: corrosive atmosphere) 19 %
Phase failure 14 %
Bearing failure 13 %
Ageing (example: ambient temperature too high) 10 %
Rotor faults 5%
Miscellaneous 9%
These faults are related to motors with a power rating of 37 kW or more.
An examination of the above results shows that, in more than 50 % of cases, the fault
is due to the effects of heating.
Leaving aside the replacement of wearing parts, such as bearings, slip rings,
brushes, etc., the life of a rotating machine is linked to that of its insulation. Provided
that the temperature rise limit is not exceeded, the life expectancy of insulating
materials is extremely long. It is decreased by approximately one half for an excess
temperature rise of 10 °C.
The operating temperature limit TL of an insulating material depends on the type of

material and is the sum of the ambient air temperature AT (cooling air), the
temperature rise limit TRL and an additional temperature rise value ATR considered
necessary because the measurement of winding resistance variation does not
6 determine the temperature of the hottest part of the motor winding, but only gives an
average value for temperature rise.
The diagram below defines the standardised limits for different classes of insulation.
In all cases, the normal ambient cooling air temperature is fixed at 40 °C.
180
ATR
165
155
140
130
125
120
115
TRL
100
TL
80
60
40
20
AT
0
E B F H
Insulation classes
6/4
Motor protection
The rated power of a motor corresponds to its temperature rise limit for an ambient
temperature of 40 °C. The standard temperature rise limits for the different parts of
a machine are given in the following table, which is an extract from publication
IEC 60034-1.
Temperature rise limit in °C

Insulation class
B F H
Insulated winding 80 100 125
(measurement by resistance)
Commutators and slip-rings 80 90 (1) 100 (1)
Bearings 60 60 (2) 60 (2)
When a motor is used at an ambient air temperature other than the normal value, its
temperature rise limit should be modified in order to maintain the same maximum
temperature limit. The result is that the motor operational power is no longer the
same as its rated power.
Also, the altitude of the installation, if this is above 1000 m, affects the cooling and
increases the temperature rise.
The following table gives the ratio between operational power and rated power,
according to the operating conditions, for a given ambient temperature. It
corresponds to insulation class B.
Operational power / Rated power in watts

Altitude Ambient temperature
m 30 °C 35 °C 40 °C 45 °C 50 °C 55 °C 60 °C
1000 1.07 1.04 1.00 0.96 0.92 0.87 0.82
1500 1.04 1.01 0.97 0.93 0.89 0.84 0.79
2000 1.01 0.98 0.94 0.90 0.86 0.82 0.77
2500 0.97 0.95 0.91 0.87 0.84 0.79 0.75
3000 0.93 0.91 0.87 0.84 0.80 0.76 0.71
3500 0.89 0.86 0.83 0.80 0.76 0.72 0.68

6
4000 0.83 0.81 0.78 0.75 0.72 0.68 0.64
The values shown in the above table are for guidance only. In effect, the derating of
a motor depends on its size, insulation class, method of construction (self-ventilated
or forced ventilation, degree of protection IP 23, IP 44, etc.), and varies according to
the manufacturer.
Also, in addition to the normal ambient conditions, the rated power of a motor is
defined by the manufacturer for continuous duty S1. This covers continuous
operation of sufficient duration to enable the motor to reach a steady temperature. It
is this value of rated power that is normally shown on the motor plate.
There are other standardised types of duty, such as temporary duty S2, or
intermittent periodic duty type S3, S4 and S5, for which the motor manufacturer
defines an operational power appropriate to each and different from the rated power.
(1) For temperature rise limits of 90 °C and 100 °C the brushes must be selected with the
agreement of the motor manufacturer.
(2) These limit values may be exceeded, depending on the quality of the grease used and the
applied loads.
6/5
General 6
Motor protection
Selection of thermal protection

To optimise the life of a motor, it is important to select the appropriate thermal
protection which will prevent operation under abnormal heating conditions, whilst
ensuring maximum continuity in the operation of the driven machine or associated
plant by avoiding unnecessary stoppages.
It is essential to know the real operating conditions:

b ambient temperature,
b operating altitude,
b type of standard duty,
in order to determine the operational values for the motor (power, current) and to be
able to select efficient thermal protection.
These operational values are given by the motor manufacturer.
Various types of thermal protection devices are available:

b thermal overload relays or thermal-magnetic motor circuit-breakers,
b thermistor protection relays, with PTC thermistor probes (1)
b multifunction relays.
Protection by thermal overload relay

A conventional thermal overload relay protects the motor in the following two cases:
b overload, by monitoring the current drawn by each phase,
b phase imbalance or failure, by its differential mechanism.
It therefore covers 44% of the cases of motor failure. This type of protection relay is
widely used, is extremely reliable and is a relatively low cost device. It is particularly
recommended if there is a risk of rotor locking.
Nevertheless, it has the disadvantage of not taking into account, with sufficient
accuracy, the thermal state of the motor.
The operating principle of this type of device is, in fact, based on the bending of
bimetal strips caused by the current drawn by the motor. As the thermal inertias of
the overload relay and motor are different, in some cases it may be possible to restart
the motor following an overload trip even though its temperature is still too high.
Protection by instantaneous electronic over current relays

6 LR97 D and LT47 electronic over current relays have been developed to satisfy
machine protection requirements.
By monitoring the current through the current transformers with which they are
equipped, they provide protection against:
b overtorque or mechanical shock,
b locked rotor (mechanical locking under steady state conditions),
b phase failure.
These relays are particularly recommended for providing mechanical protection on

machines with:
b high resistive torque,
b high inertia,
b and with strong probability of locking under steady state conditions.
They do not incorporate a thermal overload memory and can therefore be used to
provide motor protection in severe duty applications, such as:
b long starting times,
b frequent starting.
These relays have definite time characteristics: current threshold and time based
function
Because of their two separate time settings "D-Time" (starting time) and "O-Time"
(trip time during steady state), these over current relays can be combined with the
motor-starter function.
(1) PTC: Positive Temperature Coefficient
6/6
Resistance (Ω)
Motor protection
4000 Protection by PTC thermistor relay

Better monitoring of the internal motor temperature can be provided by PTC
thermistor probes, embedded in the motor windings during manufacture, associated
1330 with a thermistor protection relay (type LT3 S).
550 PTC probes are resistors with a positive temperature coefficient. Their resistance
value increases very rapidly when their temperature reaches the Nominal Operating
250
Temperature threshold, indicated by NOT on the curve opposite.
Their small size means that they have a low thermal inertia and can rapidly follow the
100 temperature variations of their surroundings.
50
This is the only solution for motor protection in applications involving severe starting/
NOT
NOT -20
NOT -5
NOT +5
NOT +15
-20 0
stopping (duties S3, S4, S5) and, likewise, for applications where the motor could be
inadvertently overcooled.
Temperature (°C)
Problems other than those due to thermal effect can also arise: earth fault, abnormal
Markings complied with by universal probes “Mark A”
overheating of bearings, etc.
(standard EC 60034-11-1A)
More comprehensive protection can be obtained:

b either by associating several types of protection device
(example: thermal overload relay + thermistor protection relay + earth fault relay),
b or by using a multifunction protection relay type LT6.
Protection relays
Relay type Thermal Over Over For use Multifunction
overload (1) current current with PTC LT6
LR2 K, LRD, LR97D LT47 probes
LR9 F LT3
Causes of overheating
Slight overload
Locked rotor
Underload
6
Supply phase failure
Ventilation fault With PTC

probes
Abnormal rise in With PTC

ambient temperature probes
Shaft bearing seizure With PTC
probes
Insulation fault
Protracted
starting time
Severe duty With PTC

probes
Ideally suited
Possible solution
Not suitable (no protection)
(1) Or motor circuit-breaker type GV2 ME, for example.
6/7
Characteristics 6
k thermal overload relays,

adjustable from 0.11 to 16 A
Environment

(DIN 50016)
Ambient air temperature Storage °C - 40...+ 70

around the device For normal operation (IEC 60947) °C - 20...+ 55 (without derating)
Operating limit °C - 30...+ 60 (with derating) (1)
Maximum operating Without derating m 2000

altitude
Without derating With derating (1)

Flame resistance Conforming to UL 94 Self-extinguishing material V1
and 16-102
Shock resistance, hot state Conforming to IEC 60068, 10 gn
(1/2 sine wave, 11 ms) N/C contact
Conforming to IEC 60068, 10 gn
N/O contact
Vibration resistance, Conforming to IEC 60068, 2 gn
hot state N/C contact
5 to 300 Hz Conforming to IEC 60068, 2 gn
N/O contact
Safe separation of Conforming to VDE 0106 VLSV (2), up to 400 V
circuits and IEC 60536
Cabling Minimum Maximum Maximum to IEC 60947
Screw clamp terminals Solid cable mm2 1 x 1.5 2x4 1 x 4 + 1 x 2.5
6 Flexible cable without cable end

Flexible cable with cable end
mm2
mm2
1 x 0.75
1 x 0.34
2x4
1 x 1.5 + 1 x 2.5
2 x 2.5
1 x 1.5 + 1 x 2.5
Tightening torque Philips head n° 2 - Ø 6 N.m 0.8
Mounting Directly under the contactor or reversing contactor
Connections Made automatically when mounted under the contactor, as follows :

b contactor terminal A2 connected to overload relay terminal 96 on all products,
b contactor terminal 14 connected to overload relay terminal 95 on products with
3 P + N/O.
When using 3 P + N/C, or 4 P contactors, or the N/O auxiliary contact marked 13-14,
at a voltage other than the coil voltage, break off the link marked 14.

Number of contacts 1 N/C + 1 N/O
Short-circuit protection Conforming to IEC 60947, A 6 max.

VDE 0660. gG fuse or
circuit-breaker GB2 CBpp
Maximum power a.c. V 24 48 110 220/230 400 415/440 600/690
of the controlled contactor coils VA 100 200 400 600 600 600 600
(sealed) (Occasional operating
d.c. V 24 48 110 220 250 – –
cycles of contact 95-96)
W 100 100 50 45 35 – –
Maximum operational a.c., category AC-15 V 690

voltage d.c., category DC-13 V 250

(2) Very low safety voltage.

6/8

Electrical characteristics of the power circuit

Rated operational Up to V 690
voltage (Ue)
Rated insulation Conforming to BS 4941 V 690
voltage (Ui) Conforming to IEC 60947 V 690
Rated impulse withstand kV 6

voltage (Uimp)
Frequency limits of the operational current Hz Up to 400
Power dissipated per pole W 2
Sensitivity to phase Conforming to IEC 60947 Yes
failure
Reset Manual or automatic Selected by means of a lockable and sealable switch on the front of the relay
Signalling On front of relay Trip indicator
Reset-Stop function Pressing the Reset-Stop button :

- actuates the N/C contact
- has no effect on the N/O contact
Test function By pushbutton Pressing the Test button enables :
- checking of the control circuit wiring
- simulation of overload tripping (actuation of both N/C and N/O contacts,
and of the trip indicator)
Short-circuit protection and coordination See pages 1/18 and 1/28
Tripping curves
Average operating time related to multiples of the current setting (Class 10 A)
Balanced 3-phase operation, from cold state Balanced operation with 2 phases only, from cold state
Time Time
2h 2h
1h 20 min 1h 20 min
1h 1h
40 min 40 min
20 min 20 min 6
10 min 10 min
6 min 6 min
4 min 4 min
2 min 2 min
1 min 1 min
40 s 40 s
20 s 20 s
10 s 10 s
6s 6s
4s 4s
1
2s 2 2s
1 Setting : at lower end of scale
1s 1s
1 1,2 1,5 2 3 4 5 6 8 10 15 1 1,2 1,5 2 3 4 5 6 8 10 15 2 Setting : at upper end of scale
X setting current (Ir) X setting current (Ir)

6/9
References 6

3-pole relays with screw clamp terminals

These overload relays are designed for the protection of motors. They are
compensated and phase failure sensitive. Resetting can either be manual or
automatic.
Direct mounting: under the contactor for versions with screw clamp terminals only;
pre-wired terminals, see pages 6/8 and 6/11.
Separate mounting: using terminal block LA7 K0064 (see below).
On the front face of the overload relay:
b selection of reset mode: Manual (marked H) or Automatic (marked A),
b red pushbutton: Trip Test function,
b blue pushbutton: Stop and manual Reset,
b yellow trip flag indicator: overload relay tripped.
Protection by magnetic circuit-breaker type GV2 LE, see pages 1/18 and 1/28.
Class 10 A (the standard specifies a tripping time of between 2 and 10 seconds at 7.2 In)
Relay setting Fuses to be used with selected relay Reference Weight
range Maximum rating
Type
aM gG BS88
A A A A kg
535738
0.11…0.16 0.25 0.5 – LR2 K0301 0.145
0.16…0.23 0.25 0.5 – LR2 K0302 0.145
0.23…0.36 0.5 1 – LR2 K0303 0.145
0.36…0.54 1 1.6 – LR2 K0304 0.145
0.54…0.8 1 2 – LR2 K0305 0.145
LR2 K031 0.8…1.2 2 4 6 LR2 K0306 0.145
1.2…1.8 2 6 6 LR2 K0307 0.145
1.8…2.6 4 8 10 LR2 K0308 0.145
2.6…3.7 4 10 16 LR2 K0310 0.145
6 3.7…5.5 6 16 16 LR2 K0312 0.145
5.5…8 8 20 20 LR2 K0314 0.145
8…11.5 10 25 20 LR2 K0316 0.145
10…14 16 32 25 LR2 K0321 0.145
12…16 20 40 32 LR2 K0322 0.145
Overload relays for unbalanced loads

535739
Class 10 A: To order, replace the prefix LR2 by LR7 in the references selected from
above (only applicable to overload relays LR2 K0305 to LR2 K0322).
Example: LR7 K0308.
Accessory
Description Type of connection Reference Weight
kg
Terminal block for separate Screw clamp LA7 K0064 0.100
clip-on mounting of the overload
LA7 K0064 relay on 35 mm 7 rail

6/10
mounting, k thermal overload relays,

schemes 6
LR2 K
Direct mounting beneath the contactor Separate mounting with terminal block LA7 K0064 on 35 mm 7 rail
(AM1 DP200 or AM1 DE200)
8 = 35 =
=
38
50
80
116
=
58
75 45
c
65 45
AM1 c
DP200 78.5
DE200 86
Schemes
LR2 K LR2 K + LCp K
Pre-wiring scheme
A 13
A1
13
1
H
– KM1
14
95
1
95
97
95
2
14
A2
O
96
98
96
96
2
A2
Test
96
97
95
98
– KM1
A1
Reset/stop
6
6
2
LR7 K Note : If pre-wiring is not required, break off the 2 links located on the thermal overload relay.
A
H
1
95
97
96
98
2
Test
Reset/stop
Characteristics: References:
6/11
Description, TeSys protection components 6
characteristics 6
3-pole thermal overload relays, model d
Description
Model d 3-pole thermal overload relays are designed to protect a.c. circuits and
1 motors against overloads, phase failure, long starting times and prolonged stalling of
6 the motor.
2, 5
RESET
4 1 Adjustment dial Ir.
3
3,5 0 1 2 Test button.
5 3 Operation of the Test button allows:
STOP
4 - checking of control circuit wiring,
7
- simulation of relay tripping (actuates both the N/O and N/C contacts).
LRD 01…35 3 Stop button. Actuates the N/C contact; does not affect the N/O contact.
4 Reset button.
5 Trip indicator.
1
6 Setting locked by sealing the cover.
7 Selector for manual or automatic reset. Relays LRD 01 to 35 are supplied with the
5
37 selector in the manual position, protected by a cover. Deliberate action is required
A
3 to move it to the automatic position.

41
50 R
A E
46
M
S 4
TEST E 2
T
6
NO NC
98 97 95 96
LRD 3322…4369, LR2 D
Environment
Conforming to standards IEC 60947-1, IEC 60947-4-1, NF C 63-650
VDE 0660, BS 4941
Product certifications CSA, UL, Sichere Trennung, PTB except LAD 4: UL, CSA.
around the device Normal operation, °C - 20…+ 60
without derating
(IEC 60947-4-1)
Minimum and maximum °C - 40…+ 70
operating temperatures
6 Operating positions
(with derating)
In relation to normal Any position
Shock resistance Permissible acceleration 15 gn - 11 ms
Vibration resistance Permissible acceleration 6 gn
Dielectric strength at 50 Hz Conforming to IEC 60255-5 kV 6
Surge withstand Conforming to IEC 60801-5 kV 6

Maximum sealed current a.c. supply V 24 48 110 220 380 600
consumption of the operating VA 100 200 400 600 600 600
coils of controlled contactors
d.c. supply V 24 48 110 220 440 –
(Occasional operating cycles
of contact 95-96) W 100 100 50 45 25 –
Short-circuit protection By gG, BS fuses. Maximum A 5
rating or by GB2 circuit-breaker
Connection to screw clamp terminals (Min/max c.s.a.)
Flexible cable 1 or 2 conductors mm2 1/2.5
without cable end
with cable end
Solid cable 1 or 2 conductors mm2 1/2.5
without cable end
Connection to spring terminals (Min/max c.s.a.)
without cable end
with cable end
References: Dimensions, mounting: Schemes:

6/12
Characteristics 6
Relay type LRD 01 LR D15pp LRD 21 LRD 3322 LR2 D35pp LRD 4365
…16, …35, …33696 …4369
LR3 D01 LR3 D21 LR3 D3322
…D16 …D35 …D33696
Electrical characteristics of power circuit
Tripping class Conforming to UL 508, 10 A 20 10 A 10 A 20 10 A
IEC 60947-4-1
Rated insulation voltage (Ui) Conforming to IEC 60947-4-1 V 690 690 1000 1000
Conforming to UL, CSA V 600 600 600 600 except
LRD 4369
Rated impulse withstand voltage kV 6 6 6 6
(Uimp)
Frequency limits Of the operating current Hz 0…400 0…400 0…400 0…400
Setting range Depending on model A 0.1…13 12…38 17…104 80…140
Connection to screw clamp terminals (Min/max c.s.a.)
Flexible cable 1 conductor mm 2 1.5/10 1.5/10 4/35 4/50
without cable end
Flexible cable 1 conductor mm 2 1/4 1/6 4/35 4/35
with cable end except LRD
21: 1/4
Solid cable 1 conductor mm 2 1/6 1.5/10 4/35 4/50
without cable end except LRD
21: 1/6
Tightening torque N.m 1.7 1.85 2.5 9 9
Connection to spring terminals (Min/max c.s.a.)
Flexible cable 1 conductor mm 2 1.5/4 – 1.5/4 – – –
without cable end
Solid cable 1 conductor mm 2 1.5/4 – 1.5/4 – – –
without cable end
Temperature compensation °C - 20…+ 60 - 30…+ 60 - 30…+ 60 - 20…+ 60
Tripping threshold Conforming to IEC 60947-4-1 A 1.14 ± 0.06 In
Sensitivity to phase failure Conforming to IEC 60947-4-1 Tripping current 30 % of In on one phase, the others at In
Tripping curves
Average operating times related to multiples of the setting current
Time Class 10 A Time Class 20 A

Hours
Hours
1
2
1
6
40 40
20 20
Minutes
Minutes
10 10
4 4
2 2
1 1
40 40
20 20
Seconds
Seconds
10 10
1
4 4 2
1 3
2 2 2
1
3
1
0,8 0,8
0,8 1 2 4 6 10 17 20 0,8 1 2 4 6 10 17 20
x the setting current (Ir) x the setting current (Ir)
1 Balanced operation, 3-phase, from cold state.

2 2-phase operation, from cold state.
3 Balanced operation, 3-phase, after a long period at the set current (hot state).

6/13
Description, TeSys protection components 6
characteristics 6
3-pole electronic thermal overload relays,
model LR9 D
Description
LR9 D electronic thermal overload relays are designed for use with contactors
1 LC1 D115 and D150.
2
In addition to the protection provided by model d thermal overload relays (see page
5 6/12) they offer the following special features:
107
Ir(A)
127
4 b protection against phase imbalance,
3 b choice of starting class,
b protection of unbalanced circuits,
90 150
NO NC
98 97 95 96
b protection of single-phase circuits,

b alarm function to avoid tripping by load shedding.
6
LR9 D5367…D5569
1 Adjustment dial Ir
7 2 Test button
8 3 Stop button
2 4 Reset button
5 5 Trip indicator
Class Load
6 Setting locked by sealing the cover
107 127
Ir(A) 20
4
10
7 Class 10/Class 20 selector switch
+ 24 V - / 103 104
3
90 150
Alarm NO
8 Selector for
98 97 NC
95 96
balanced load /unbalanced load
1
6
LR9 D67 and D69
Environment
Conforming to standards IEC 60947-4-1, 255-8, 255-17, VDE 0660 and EN 60947-4-1
Product certifications UL 508 , CSA 22-2
Degree of protection Conforming to IEC 60529 IP 20 on front panel with protective covers LA9 D11570p or D11560p
and VDE 0106
Protective treatment Standard version "TH”
around the device Normal operation °C - 20…+ 55 (1)
(conforming to IEC 60255-8)
6 Operating positions
without derating
In relation to normal
Any position

Vibration resistance Permissible acceleration 2 gn - 5 to 300 Hz
Surge withstand Conforming to IEC 61000-4-5 kV 6
Resistance to Conforming to IEC 61000-4-2 kV 8
Resistance to radio-frequency Conforming to IEC 61000-4-3 V/m 10
conducted disturbance and NF C 46-022
Resistance to fast Conforming to IEC 61000-4-4 kV 2

transient currents
Electromagnetic Draft EN 50081-1 and 2, Meet requirements
compatibility EN 50082-2
Electrical characteristics of auxiliary contacts
consumption of the operating VA 100 200 400 600 600 600
coils of controlled contactors
d.c. supply V 24 48 110 220 440 –
(Occasional operating cycles
of contact 95-96) W 100 100 50 45 25 –
Short-circuit protection By gG or BS fuses A 5
or by circuit-breaker GB2
Connection 1 or 2 conductors mm2 Minimum c.s.a.: 1
Flexible cable without cable end Maximum c.s.a.: 2.5
(1) For operating temperatures up to 70 °C, please consult your Regional Sales Office.

6/14

model LR9 D
Relay type LR9 D

Tripping class Conforming to UL 508, A 10 or 20
IEC 60947-4-1
Rated insulation voltage (Ui) Conforming to IEC 60947-4-1 V 1000
Rated impulse withstand voltage kV 8
(Uimp)
Frequency limits Of the operating current Hz 50…60. For other frequencies, please consult your Regional Sales Office (1)
Setting range Depending on model A 60…150
Power circuit connections Width of terminal lug mm 20
Clamping screw M8
Tripping thresholds Conforming to IEC 60947-4-1
Alarm A 1.05 ± 0.06 In
Tripping A 1.12 ± 0.06 In
Sensitivity to phase failure Conforming to IEC 60947-4-1 Tripping in 4 s ± 20 % in the event of phase failure
Alarm circuit characteristics
Rated supply voltage d.c. supply V 24
Supply voltage limits V 17…32
Current consumption No-load mA y5
Switching capacity mA 0…150
Protection Short-circuit and overload Self protected
Voltage drop Closed state V y 2.5
Cabling Flexible cable without cable end mm 2 0.5…1.5
(1) For applications involving the use of these overload relays with soft starters or variable speed
drives, please consult your Regional Sales Office.
LR9 D tripping curve
Tripping time in seconds Average operating times related to multiples of the setting current.
1000
100
1
2
10
1
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 Cold state curve
1,12 x times the setting current (Ir) 2 Hot state curve

6/15
References 6
Differential thermal overload relays for use with fuses

810464
b Compensated relays with manual or automatic reset,

b with relay trip indicator, b for a.c. or d.c.
Relay Fuses to be used with selected relay For use with Reference Weight
setting range (A) aM (A) gG (A) BS88 (A) contactor LC1 kg
Class 10 A (1) with connection by screw clamp terminals or connectors
0.10…0.16 0.25 2 – D09…D38 LRD 01 0.124
LRD 08pp
0.16…0.25 0.5 2 – D09…D38 LRD 02 0.124
0.25…0.40 1 2 – D09…D38 LRD 03 0.124
0.40…0.63 1 2 – D09…D38 LRD 04 0.124
0.63…1 2 4 – D09…D38 LRD 05 0.124
810465
1…1.6 2 4 6 D09…D38 LRD 06 0.124

1.6…2.5 4 6 10 D09…D38 LRD 07 0.124
2.5…4 6 10 16 D09…D38 LRD 08 0.124
4…6 8 16 16 D09…D38 LRD 10 0.124
5.5…8 12 20 20 D09…D38 LRD 12 0.124
7…10 12 20 20 D09…D38 LRD 14 0.124
LRD 21pp 9…13 16 25 25 D12…D38 LRD 16 0.124
12…18 20 35 32 D18…D38 LRD 21 0.124
16…24 25 50 50 D25…D38 LRD 22 0.124
23…32 40 63 63 D25…D38 LRD 32 0.124
30…38 40 80 80 D32 and D38 LRD 35 0.124
810466
17…25 25 50 50 D40…D95 LRD 3322 0.510

23…32 40 63 63 D40…D95 LRD 3353 0.510
30…40 40 100 80 D40…D95 LRD 3355 0.510
37…50 63 100 100 D40…D95 LRD 3357 0.510
48…65 63 100 100 D50…D95 LRD 3359 0.510
55…70 80 125 125 D50…D95 LRD 3361 0.510
63…80 80 125 125 D65…D95 LRD 3363 0.510
80…104 100 160 160 D80 and D95 LRD 3365 0.510
LRD 33pp
80…104 125 200 160 D115 and D150 LRD 4365 0.900
95…120 125 200 200 D115 and D150 LRD 4367 0.900
110…140 160 250 200 D150 LRD 4369 0.900
80…104 100 160 160 (2) LRD 33656 1.000
95…120 125 200 200 (2) LRD 33676 1.000
533573
110…140 160 250 200 (2) LRD 33696 1.000

6 Class 10 A (1) with spring terminal connections (only for direct mounting on the contactor)
0.10…0.16 0.25 2 – D09…D38 LRD 013 0.140
0.16…0.25 0.5 2 – D09…D38 LRD 023 0.140
0.25…0.40 1 2 – D09…D38 LRD 033 0.140
0.40…0.63 1 2 – D09…D38 LRD 043 0.140
0.63…1 2 4 – D09…D38 LRD 053 0.140
1…1.6 2 4 6 D09…D38 LRD 063 0.140
LRD 083pp 1.6…2.5 4 6 10 D09…D38 LRD 073 0.140
2.5…4 6 10 16 D09…D38 LRD 083 0.140
4…6 8 16 16 D09…D38 LRD 103 0.140
5.5…8 12 20 20 D09…D38 LRD 123 0.140
7…10 12 20 20 D09…D38 LRD 143 0.140
9…13 16 25 25 D12…D38 LRD 163 0.140
12…18 20 35 32 D18…D38 LRD 213 0.140
16…24 25 50 50 D25…D38 LRD 223 0.140
Class 10 A (1) with connection by lug-clamps
Select overload relay with screw clamp terminals or connectors from the table above and add one of the following suffixes:
b figure 6 for relays LRD 01 to LRD 35, b A66 for relays LRD 3322 to LRD 3365.
The remaining references are suitable, as standard, for use with lug-clamps.
Thermal overload relays for use with unbalanced loads
Class 10 A (1) with connection by screw clamp terminals
In the references selected above, change LRD (except LRD 4ppp) to LR3 D. Example: LRD 01 becomes LR3 D01.
Thermal overload relays for use on 1000 V supplies
Class 10 A (1) with connection by screw clamp terminals
For relays LRD 06 to LRD 35 only, for an operating voltage of 1000 V, and only for independent mounting, the
reference becomes LRD 33ppA66. Example: LRD 12 becomes LRD 3312A66.
Order an LA7 D3064 terminal block separately, see page 6/19.
(1) Standard IEC 60947-4-1 specifies a tripping time for 7.2 times the setting current I R :
class 10 A: between 2 and 10 seconds.
(2) Independent mounting
Characteristics: Dimensions, mounting: Schemes:

6/16
Differential thermal overload relays for use with fuses

810468
b Compensated relays with manual or automatic reset,

b with relay trip indicator,
b for a.c. or d.c.
Relay Fuses to be used with selected relay For use with Reference Weight
setting range (A) aM (A) gG (A) BS88 (A) contactor LC1
LRD 15pp
Class 20 (1) with connection by screw clamp terminals
2.5…4 6 10 16 D09…D32 LRD 1508 0.190
4…6 8 16 16 D09…D32 LRD 1510 0.190
5.5…8 12 20 20 D09…D32 LRD 1512 0.190
7…10 16 20 25 D09…D32 LRD 1514 0.190
9…13 16 25 25 D12…D32 LRD 1516 0.190
12…18 25 35 40 D18…D32 LRD 1521 0.190
810470
17…25 32 50 50 D25 and D32 LRD 1522 0.190

23…28 40 63 63 D25 and D32 LRD 1530 0.190
25…32 40 63 63 D25 and D32 LRD 1532 0.190
17…25 32 50 50 D40…D95 LR2 D3522 0.535
23…32 40 63 63 D40…D95 LR2 D3553 0.535
30…40 50 100 80 D40…D95 LR2 D3555 0.535
37…50 63 100 100 D50…D95 LR2 D3557 0.535
LR2 D35pp
48…65 80 125 100 D50…D95 LR2 D3559 0.535
55…70 100 125 125 D65…D95 LR2 D3561 0.535
63…80 100 160 125 D80 and D95 LR2 D3563 0.535
Electronic differential thermal overload relays for use with fuses
b Compensated relays, with relay trip indicator,
b for a.c.,
b for direct mounting on contactor or independent mounting (2).
Relay Fuses to be used with selected relay For direct mounting Reference Weight
setting range (A) aM (A) gG (A) beneath contactor
LC1
Class 10 or 10A (1) with connection using bars or connectors
60…100 100 160 D115 and D150 LR9 D5367 0.885
90…150 160 250 D115 and D150 LR9 D5369 0.885
Class 20 (3) with connection using bars or connectors
60…100 125 160 D115 and D150 LR9 D5567 0.885
90…150 200 250 D115 and D150 LR9 D5569 0.885
Electronic thermal overload relays for use with balanced or unbalanced loads 6
b Compensated relays,
b with separate outputs for alarm and tripping.
Relay Fuses to be used with selected relay For direct mounting Reference Weight
setting range (A) aM (A) gG (A) beneath contactor
LC1
Class 10 or 20 (1) selectable with connection using bars or connectors
60…100 100 160 D115 and D150 LR9 D67 0.900
90…150 160 250 D115 and D150 LR9 D69 0.900
(1) Standard IEC 60947-4-1 specifies a tripping time for 7.2 times the setting current IR :
class 10: between 4 and 10 seconds,
class 10 A: between 2 and 10 seconds,
class 20: between 6 and 20 seconds.
(2) Power terminals can be protected against direct finger contact by the addition of shrouds and/or insulated terminal blocks, to
be ordered separately (see page 5/74).
Other versions Thermal overload relays for resistive circuits in category AC-1.
Characteristics: Dimensions, mounting: Schemes:

6/17
References 6
6/18

Accessories

Description For use with Sold in Unit Weight
533574
Pre-wiring kit allowing direct connection LC1 D09…D18 10 LAD 7C1 (1) 0.002
of the N/C contact of relay LRD 01…35
or LR3 D01…D35 to the contactor LC1 D25…D38 10 LAD 7C2 (1) 0.003
Terminal block (2) for clip-on mounting LRD 01…35 and LR3 D01…D35 1 LAD 7B106 0.100
on 35 mm rail (AM1 DP200) LRD 1508…32 1 LAD 7B105 0.100
or screw fixing; for fixing centres,
LRD 3ppp, LR3 D3ppp, LR2 D35pp 1 LA7 D3064 (3) 0.370
see pages 6/20 to 6/22
Terminal block adapter LRD 3ppp, LR3 D3ppp, LRD 35pp 1 LA7 D3058 (3) 0.080
for mounting a relay beneath
an LC1 D115 or D150 contactor
Mounting plates (4) LRD 01…35, LR3 D01…D35, 10 DX1 AP25 0.065
for screw fixing on 110 mm centres LRD 1508…32
LRD 3ppp, LR3 D3ppp, LR2 D35pp 1 LA7 D902 0.130
Marker holder All relays except LRD 01…35 100 LA7 D903 0.001
snap-in and LR3 D01…D35 (5)
Bag of 400 labels – 1 LA9 D91 0.001
(blank, self-adhesive, 7 x 16 mm)
Stop button locking device All relays except LRD 01…35, 10 LA7 D901 0.005
LR3 D01…D35 and LR9 D
LAD 7Cp
Remote stop LRD 01…35 and LR3 D01…D35 1 LAD 703p (7) (8) 0.090
or electrical reset device (6)
Remote tripping All relays except LRD 01…35 1 LA7 D03p (7) 0.090
or electrical reset device (6) and LR3 D01…D35
Block of insulated terminals LR9 D 2 LA9 F103 0.560
533575
Remote control
“Reset” function
Description For use with Sold in Unit Weight
By flexible cable LRD 01…35 and LR3 D01…D35 1 LAD 7305 (8) 0.075
(length = 0.5 m)
All relays except LRD 01…35 and 1 LA7 D305 0.075
LR3 D01…D35
"Stop" and/or "Reset" functions

6
The terminal protection shroud must be removed and the following 3 products must be ordered separately:
LAD 7B106 Adapter All relays except LRD 01…35 and 1 LA7 D1020 0.005
for door mounting LR3 D01…D35
Operating heads Stop All relays 1 XB5 AL84101 0.027
for spring return pushbutton
Reset All relays 1 XB5 AA86102 0.027
(1) These pre-wiring kits cannot be used with reversing contactors.

(2) Terminal blocks are supplied with terminals protected against direct finger contact and screws in the open, "ready-to-tighten"
position.
(3) To order a terminal block for connection by lugs, the reference becomes LA7 D30646.
(4) Do not forget to order the terminal block corresponding to the type of relay.
(5) For LRD 01…35, see page 5/75.
(6) The time for which the coil of remote tripping or electrical resetting device LA7 D03 or LAD 703 can remain energised depends
on its rest time: 1 s pulse duration with 9 s rest time; 5 s pulse duration with 30 s rest time; 10 s pulse duration with 90 s rest
time; maximum pulse duration 20 s with a rest time of 300 s. Minimum pulse time: 200 ms.
(7) Reference to be completed by adding the code indicating control circuit voltage.
Standard control circuit voltages (for other voltages, please consult your Regional Sales Office):
Volts 12 24 48 96 110 220/230 380/400 415/440
50/60 Hz – B E – F M Q N
Consumption, inrush and sealed: < 100 VA
c J B E DD F M – –
Consumption, inrush and sealed: < 100 W.
(8) Not compatible with 3-pole relays fitted with spring terminals.
Illustrations: Dimensions, mounting:

page 6/18 pages 6/20 to 6/22
6/19
Dimensions 6
Thermal overload relays, model d
LRD 01…35 LRD 1508…32 LRD 013…353

Direct mounting beneath contactors Direct mounting beneath contactors Direct mounting beneath contactors
with screw clamp connections with screw clamp connections with spring terminal connections
c c
b
b
b
70 45 92 45
c
66 45
LC1 D09…D18 D25…D38 LC1 a D09 18 a D25 38 c D09 18 c D25 38 LC1 D03 D383
b 123 137 b 90 97 90 97 b 168
c See pages 5/82 and 5/83 c 97 96 107 106 c See pages 5/82 and 5/83
e 53 60 53 60
LRD 3ppp
Direct mounting beneath contactors LC1 D40…D95 and LP1 D40…D80
AM1 DL201 DL200

d 7 17
b c e g g
(3-pole) (4-pole)
LC1 D40 111 119 72.4 4.5 13
e
b
LC1 D50 111 119 72.4 4.5 –

LC1 D65 111 119 72.4 4.5 13
LC1 D80 115.5 124 76.9 9.5 22
54
LC1 D95 115.5 124 76.9 9.5 –

6 109 21
Control circuit: d.c.
LC1 D40, LP1 D40 111 119 72.4 4.5 13
4 c d 30 LC1 D50 111 176 72.4 4.5 –
70 g LC1 D65, LP1 D65 111 176 72.4 4.5 13
LC1 D80, D95, LPA D80 115.5 179.4 76.9 9.5 22
LRD 4ppp LR9 D

Direct mounting beneath contactors LC1 D115 and D150 Direct mounting beneath contactors LC1 D115 and D150
255
267
136
150
174
189
132 d 120
132 d 120
AM1 DL200 and DR200 DE200 and EDppp AM1 DP200 and DR200 DE200 and EDppp
d 2.5 10.5 d 2.5 10.5

6/20
Mounting 6
LRD 01…35 LRD 01…35

Independent mounting on 50 mm centres or on rail AM1 DP200 or DE200 Independent mounting on 110 mm centres
46
LAD 7B106 = =
LAD 7B106 35 10
=
15
110
125
85
50
37,5
80 2 45
6
=
90 DX1 AP25 2xØ6,5
Remote tripping or electrical reset
LAD 703 (1)
32
(1) Can only be mounted on RH side of relay LRD 01…35.
LRD 15pp
Independent mounting on 50 mm centres or on rail AM1 DP200 or DE200 Remote tripping or electrical reset
LAD 7B105 =
45
35 =
6
LA7 D03 (1)
50/65
4
82
41
96 34
100 d 2xØ4,5 8
17
AM1 DP200 DE200

d 2 9.5 (1) Can be mounted on RH or LH side of relay LR2 D15.

6/21
LRD 3ppp and LR2 D35pp LRD 3ppp, LR2 D35pp and LR9 D
Independent mounting on 50 mm centres or on rail AM1 DP200 or DE200 Remote tripping or electrical reset
75
LA7 D3064 = 50 =
LA7 D03 (1)

2
75/87
100
51,5
119 21
121 d 2xØ4,5 23,5
32
AM1 DP200 AM1 DE200

d 2 9.5 (1) Can be mounted on RH or LH side of relay LRD 3ppp, LR2 D35pp or LR9 D.
LRD 15 and LRD 3ppp
Adapter for door mounted operator
LA7 D1020 Stop Reset
c 10
LA7 D1020
c : adjustable from 17 to 120 mm

LRD, LRD 15 and LR9 D
“Reset” by flexible cable
LA7 D305 and LAD 7305
Mounting with cable straight Mounting with cable bent
6
e c
e M10x1
c : up to 550 mm
e : up to 20 mm e : up to 20 mm
Characteristics: References:
6/22
Schemes 6
LRD, LR2 D and LR3 D Pre-wiring kit LAD 7C1, LAD 7C2
A1
Auto _ KM
Reset
A2
Man.
1
97
95
98
96
Test
2
Stop 95 96
_ LRD
LR9 D5ppp
L1
L2
L3
1
_ KM1
2
6
1/L1
3/L2
5/L3
(3)
(4) (3)
(2)
Test
Stop
Man. reset 95
97
2/T1
4/T2
6/T3
96
98
_A
13
M
3 _M _ KM
14
(1) Tripped.
A1
(2) Overload.
_ KM (1) (3) Setting current.
A2
N (4) Specialised circuit.

6
LR9 D67 and LR9 D69
L1
L2
L3
+
0V
1
(5)
_ KM1
2
6
1/L1
3/L2
5/L3
103
104
(3)
+
(4) (3)
(5) (2)
Test
Stop
Man. reset 95
97
2/T1
4/T2
6/T3
96
98
_
A
13
M
3 _M _ KM
(1) Tripped.
14
(2) Overload.
A1
(3) Setting current.

_ KM (1) (4) Specialised circuit.
A2
N (5) Alarm.
Characteristics: References: Dimensions, mounting:

6/23
Presentation 6

model LR9 F
Presentation
LR9 F electronic protection relays are especially suited to the operating conditions of
motors.
They provide protection against:
b thermal overload of 3-phase or single-phase balanced or unbalanced circuits;
b phase failure and large phase unbalance,
b protracted starting times,
b prolonged stalled rotor condition.
LR9 F electronic protection relays are mounted directly below an LC1 F type
contactor. They cover a range from 30 to 630 A, in eight ratings.
The settings can be locked by sealing the transparent protective cover.
A reset button is mounted on the front of the relay.
Two versions are available:
b simplified version: class 10: LR9 Fp3pp, class 20: LR9 Fp5pp,
b complete version: class 10, 10 A or class 20, selectable, conforming to
EN 60947-4-1: LR9 Fpp.
This latter version includes an alarm function which makes it possible to forestall
tripping by load shedding.
Simplified version: class 10 or 20
2
5
107
Ir(A)
127
4
3
90 150
NO NC
98 97 95 96
Complete version: class 10, 10 A or class 20, selectable, and alarm circuit
6 7
8
Class Load
5
107 127
Ir(A) 20
10
4
+ 24 V - / 103 104
3
90 150
Alarm NO
98 97 NC
95 96
9
1
6
1 Ir adjustment dial
2 Test button
3 Stop button
4 Reset button
5 Trip indicator
6 Setting locked by sealing the cover
7 Class 10/class 20 selector switch
8 Selector switch for balanced load /unbalanced load
9 Alarm circuit

6/24
Characteristics 6

model LR9 F
Environment
Conforming to standards IEC 60947-4-1, IEC 60255-8, IEC 60255-17, EN 60947-4-1 and VDE 0660
Product certifications UL 508, CSA 22-2
Degree of protection Conforming to VDE 0106 IP 20
Conforming to IEC 60529 IP 20 on front of relay with accessories LA9 F103 or LA7 F70p, see page 6/31

around the device
(conforming to IEC 60255-8) Normal operation °C - 20…+ 55 (1)
Operating positions In relation to normal Any position


Vibration resistance Permissible acceleration 2 gn - 5 to 300 Hz

Surge withstand Conforming to IEC 61000-4-5 kV 4
Resistance to Conforming to IEC 61000-4-2 kV 8 (in air)

electrostatic discharge 6 (in indirect mode)
Resistance to radiated Conforming to IEC 61000-4-3 V/m 10

radio-frequency disturbance
Resistance to Conforming to IEC 61000-4-4 kV 2

fast transient currents
Electromagnetic EN 50081-1 and 2, EN 50082-2 Conforming
compatibility
(1) For operating temperatures up to 70 °C, please consult your Regional Sales Office. 6

page 6/24 pages 6/28 to 6/31 pages 6/32 and 6/33
6/25

model LR9 F

Relay type LR9 F5p57, F57 F5p63, F63 F5p71, F71 F7p75, F75 F7p81, F81
F5p67, F67 F7p79, F79
F5p69, F69
(Ui)
Rated operational voltage Conforming to VDE 0110 gr C V 1000
(Ue)
Rated operational current (Ie) A 30 to 630
Short-circuit protection and coordination See pages: 24540/2, 24540/3, 24544/2 and 24544/3
Frequency limits Of the operating current Hz 50…60. For other frequencies, please consult your Regional Sales Office (1)
Power circuit Width of terminal lug mm 20 25 25 30 LR9 F7p75 40

connections and LR9 F75
40 LR9 F7p79
and LR9 F79
Clamping screw M6 M8 M10 M10 M12
Tightening torque N.m 10 18 35 35 58
Auxiliary contact electrical characteristics

Short-circuit protection By gG or BS fuses or by A 5

circuit-breaker GB2 CD10
Control circuit Flexible cable Min. Max.
connections with cable end 1 conductor mm2 1 x 0.75 1 x 2.5
2 conductors mm2 2x1 2 x 1.5
Flexible cable 1 conductor mm2 1 x 0.75 1x4

without cable end 2 conductors mm2 2x1 2 x 2.5
Solid cable 1 conductor mm2 1 x 0.75 1 x 2.5

2 conductors mm2 2x1 –
6 Tightening torque N.m 1.2

consumption of the coils VA 100 200 400 600 600 600
of associated contactors
(occasional operating
d.c. supply V 24 48 110 220 440 –
cycles of contact 95-96)
W 100 100 50 45 25 –
(1) For applications involving the use of these overload relays with soft starters or variable speed
drives, please consult your Regional Sales Office.

6/26

model LR9 F
Tripping class Conforming to IEC 60947-4-1 10, 10 A and 20
Reset Manual on front of relay
Fault indication On front of relay
Test function On front of relay
Stop function Actuation of N/C contact, without affecting N/O contact
Tripping thresholds Conforming to Alarm A 1.05 ± 0.06 In

IEC 60947-4-1 Tripping A 1.12 ± 0.06 In
Sensitivity to Conforming to Tripping in 4 s ± 20 % in the event of phase failure

phase failure IEC 60947-4-1
Adjustment Setting dial on front of relay
(nominal motor current)
Security sealing Yes
Alarm circuit characteristics

Rated supply voltage d.c. supply V 24
Supply voltage limits V 17…32
Current consumption No-load mA y5
Switching current mA 0…150
Protection Short-circuit and overload Auto-protected
Voltage drop Closed state V y 2.5
Connection Flexible cable without cable end mm 2 0.5…1.5
LR9 F tripping curve

Average operating times depending on multiples of the setting current
6
Class 10 Class 20
Tripping time in seconds Tripping time in seconds

1000 1000
100 100
1
1
2 2
10 10
1 1
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
1,12 x times the setting current (Ir) 1,12 x times the setting current (Ir)
1 Cold state curve

2 Hot state curve

6/27
References 6

model LR9 F for motor protection
Compensated and differential overload relays

b compensated and differential,
b for a.c.,
b for direct mounting on contactor or independent mounting (1).
Relay Fuses to be used For direct mounting Reference Weight

setting range with selected relay beneath contactor
aM gG LC1
A A A kg
Class 10 (2)
30…50 50 80 F115…F185 LR9 F5357 0.885
819555
48…80 80 125 F115…F185 LR9 F5363 0.900
60…100 100 200 F115…F185 LR9 F5367 0.900
LR9 F53pp 90…150 160 250 F115…F185 LR9 F5369 0.885
132…220 250 315 F185…F400 LR9 F5371 0.950
200…330 400 500 F225…F500 LR9 F7375 2.320

819556
300…500 500 800 F225…F500 LR9 F7379 2.320
380…630 630 800 F400…F630 and LR9 F7381 4.160

F800
Class 20 (2)
30…50 50 80 F115…F185 LR9 F5557 0.885
48…80 80 125 F115…F185 LR9 F5563 0.900
60…100 100 200 F115…F185 LR9 F5567 0.900

LR9 F73pp
90…150 160 250 F115…F185 LR9 F5569 0.885
132…220 250 315 F185…F400 LR9 F5571 0.950
6 200…330 400 500 F225…F500 LR9 F7575 2.320
300…500 500 800 F225…F500 LR9 F7579 2.320
380…630 630 800 F400…F630 and LR9 F7581 4.160

F800
(1) When mounting overload relays up to size LR9 F5371 directly beneath the contactor, they
may be additionally supported by a mounting plate (see page 6/31). Above this size it is
always necessary to use the mounting plate.
Power terminals can be protected against direct finger contact by the addition of shrouds and/
or insulated terminal blocks, to be ordered separately (see page 6/31).
(2) Standard IEC 60947-4 specifies a tripping time for 7.2 times the setting current In:
- class 10: between 4 and 10 seconds,
- class 20: between 6 and 20 seconds.

6/28

model LR9 F for motor protection
Compensated overload relays, class 10 or 20 with alarm

b compensated,
b for a.c.,
b for direct mounting on contactor or independent mounting (1),
b class 10 or 20 by selector switch,
b protection of 3-phase or single-phase circuits by selector switch,
b with alarm function that enables tripping to be forestalled.
Relay Fuses to be used For direct mounting Reference Weight

setting range with selected relay beneath contactor
aM gG LC1
A A A kg
30…50 50 80 F115…F185 LR9 F57 0.885
819557
48…80 80 125 F115…F185 LR9 F63 0.900
60…100 100 200 F115…F185 LR9 F67 0.900
90…150 160 250 F115…F185 LR9 F69 0.885
LR9 F57 132…220 250 315 F185…F400 LR9 F71 0.950
200…330 400 500 F225…F500 LR9 F75 2.320
300…500 500 800 F225…F500 LR9 F79 2.320
380…630 630 800 F400…F630 and LR9 F81 4.160

F800
(1) When mounting overload relays up to size LR9 F71 directly beneath the contactor, they may
be additionally supported by a mounting plate (see page 6/31). Above this size it is always
necessary to use the mounting plate.
Power terminals can be protected against direct finger contact by the addition of shrouds and/
or insulated terminal blocks, to be ordered separately (see page 6/31).

6/29
References 6

model LR9 F
Control accessories
Remote electrical reset device (1) 1 LA7 D03p (2) 0.090
LA7 D03p
Remote Reset function control 1 LA7 D305 0.075
by flexible cable (length = 0.5 m)
Remote Stop and/or Adapter for door 1 LA7 D1020 0.005

Reset function control mounted operator
Rod (snap-off end 10 ZA2 BZ13 0.100

to obtain required
length, between
17 and 120 mm)
Operating head 1 ZA2 Bpppp (3) 0.012
for spring return
pushbutton
R For mounting an LR9 F5p71 thermal overload relay together with an
LC1 F185 contactor
kg
LA7 D305 Set of 3 busbars LA7 F407 0.160
For mounting a thermal overload relay beneath a reversing contactor or

star-delta contactors
Application Width of Set of 3 busbars Weight
For relay For contactor terminal lug Reference
mm kg
LR9 F5p57, F5p63, F5p67, LC1 F115 15 LA7 F401 0.110
F5p69, F69, F71
LR9 F5p57, F5p63 LC1 F150, F185 20 LA7 F402 0.110
LR9 F5p71, LC1 F185 25 LA7 F407 0.160

LR9 F71
6 LR9 F5p71,
LR9 F71
LC1 F225, F265 25 LA7 F403 0.160
LR9 F7p75, F7p79, LC1 F225...F400 25 LA7 F404 0.160

LR9 F75, F79
LR9 F7p81, LC1 F400 25 LA7 F404 0.160

LR9 F81
LR9 F7p75, F7p79, F7p81, LC1 F500 30 LA7 F405 0.270

LR9 F75, F79, F81
LR9 F7p81, LC1 F630, F800 40 LA7 F406 0.600

LR9 F81
(1) The time for which the coil of remote electrical reset device LA7 D03 can remain energised
depends on its rest time: 1 s pulse duration with 9 s rest time; 5 s pulse duration with 30 s rest
time; 10 s pulse duration with 90 s rest time. Maximum pulse duration of 20 s with rest time of
300 s. Minimum pulse time: 200 ms.
(2) Reference to be completed by adding the coil voltage code.
Standard control circuit voltages,
(for other voltages, please consult your Regional Sales Office) :
Volts 12 24 48 96 110 220/ 380/ 415/

230 400 440
a 50/60 Hz – B E – F M Q N
Consumption, inrush and sealed: < 100 VA
c J B E DD F M – –
Consumption, inrush and sealed: < 100 W.
(3) Stop: ZA2 BL432 and Reset: ZA2 BL639.

6/30

model LR9 F
Mounting plates for overload relay

For use with relays Reference Weight
kg
LR9 F5p57, F5p63, F5p67, F5p69, F5p71, LA7 F901 0.100
LR9 F57, F63, F67, F69, F71
LR9 F7p75, F7p79, F7p81, LA7 F902 0.100

LR9 F75, F79, F81
Sets of power terminal protection shrouds, single-pole

LA7 F90p
For use Number of Set Weight
with relays shrouds per set reference kg
LR9 F5p57, 6 LA9 F701 0.015
LR9 F57
LR9 F5p63, F5p67, F5p69, 6 LA9 F702 0.015

LR9 F63, F67, F69
LR9 F5p71, 6 LA9 F705 0.015

LR9 F71
LR9 F7p75, F7p79, F7p81, 6 LA9 F703 0.015

LR9 F75, F79, F81
LA9 F70p
Power terminal protection shrouds, 3-pole
For use Reference Weight
with relays kg
LR9 F5p57, F5p63, F5p67, F5p69, LA7 F701 0.030
LR9 F57, F63, F67, F69
LR9 F5p71, LA7 F702 0.030

LR9 F71
LR9 F7p75, F7p79, F7p81, LA7 F703 0.030

LR9 F75, F79, F81
LA7 F70p Insulated terminal blocks

For use Set of 2 blocks Weight
with relays Reference kg
LR9 F5p57, F5p63, F5p67, F5p69,
LR9 F57, F63, F67, F69
LA9 F103 0.560
6
Marking accessories
Clip-in marker holder 100 LA7 D903 0.001
LA9 F103 Bag of 400 blank 1 LA9 D91 0.001

self-adhesive legends
7 x 16 mm

6/31
Dimensions 6

model LR9 F
Common side view LR9 F5p71, F71 LR9 F5p57, F5p63, F5p67,
LR9 F5p69, F57, F63, F67, F69
123,5 48 48 120 50 50
(1) 3 56,8 25 50 50 (2) 40 40
5,5
5,5
44,8
101
96
60
71
76
60
71
76
115 20
3 46,8
115
(1) Terminal shroud LA9 F70p (2) 6.5 x 13.5 for LR9 F5p57 and F57. 8.5 x 13.5 for LR9 F5p63, F5 p67, F5p69, F63, F67, F69
Common side view LR9 F7p75, F7p79, F7p81, LR9 F7p81 (for mounting beneath LC1 F630 and F800),
LR9 F75, F79, F81 LR9 F81
127,6 P1 P2 200
22,1
(1) 42,2 30 80 80
14
20
40
62,1
6
108,8
136,8
44,8
70
82
228,8
188,8
25
6 51,5 51,5
66 66
40
(1) Terminal shroud 150
LA9 F70p
P1 P2 76,5 76,5
LR9 F7p75, F75 48 48 193
LR9 F7p79, F7p81, F79, F81 55 55
Direct mounting beneath contactor LC1 F Mounting beneath contactors: Mounting plate
reversing LC2 F or star-delta LC3 F for LR9 F
6
H2
H3
H3
G
b
H1
LA7 F4 (1) (2) (3)

H1
LA7 G
F901 145
H2
F902 190
H2
(1) (2) (3)
Contactors LC1 With LR9 relays b H1 H2 H3 Contactors LC1 With LR9 relays b H1 H2 H3
F115 F5p57, F5p63, F5p67, F5p69, 240 30 50 120 F115 F5p57, F5p63, F5p67, F5p69, 279 60 50 120
F57, F63, F67, F69 F57, F63, F67, F69
F150 F5p57, F5p63, F5p67, F5p69 246 30 50 120 F150 F5p57, F5p63, F5p67, F5p69 283 60 50 120
F57, F63, F67, F69 F57, F63, F67, F69
F185 F5p57, F5p63, F5p67, F5p69 250 30 50 120 F185 F5p57, F5p63, F5p67, F5p69 285 60 50 120
F57, F63, F67, F69 F57, F63, F67, F69
F225 F5p71, F71 273 40 50 120 F225 F5p71, F71
F7p75, F7p79, F75, F79 308 50 58 120 F7p75, F7p79, F75, F79 360 100 58 120
F265 F5p71, F71 279 40 50 120 F265 F5p71, F71 332 90 50 120
F7p75, F7p79, F75, F79 314 60 58 120 F7p75, F7p79, F75, F79 363 100 58 120
F330 F7p75, F7p79, F75, F79 317 60 58 120 F330 F7p75, F7p79, F75, F79 364 100 58 120
F400 F7p75, F7p79, F7p81, F75, F79, F81 317 60 58 180 F400 F7p75, F7p79, F7p81, F75, F79, F81 364 100 58 180
F500 F7p75, F7p79, F7p81, F75, F79, F81 346 70 58 180 F500 F7p75, F7p79, F7p81, F75, F79, F81 390 110 58 180
F630, F800 F7p81, F81 510 110 58 180 F630, F800 F7p81, F81 509 120 58 180
(1) Relay mounting plate LA7 F90p, see page 6/31 (3) DZ5 MB for LC1 F115 to F400
(2) AM1 EC or AM1 DF for LC1 F115 to F630 and LC1 F800
Presentation : Characteristics : References : Schemes :

page 6/24 pages 6/25 to 6/27 pages 6/28 to 6/31 page 6/33
6/32
Schemes, Protection components 6
setting-up 6
model LR9 F
Schemes
LR9 F5p57…F7p81 LR9 F57…F81 (with alarm)
L1
L2
L3
L1
L2
L3
+
0V
1
5
(2)
– KM1 – KM1
2
6
1/L1
3/L2
5/L3
1/L1
3/L2
5/L3
103
104
(3) (3)
+
(1) (2) (1)
(4) ≥ 112 %
(4)
Test Test
Stop Stop
Man. reset 95 Man. reset 95
97 97
2/T1
4/T2
6/T3
2/T1
4/T2
6/T3
96
96
98
98
–A –A
13
13
M M
3 –M – KM 3 –M – KM
14
14
A1
A1
– KM (1) – KM (1)
A2
A2
N N
(1) Tripped on thermal overload

(2) Overheating alarm
(3) Setting current
(4) Specialised circuit
Setting-up the special functions of LR9 F thermal overload relays
Setting the relay
b Lift the transparent cover 7 to gain access to the various settings.
b Adjustment is achieved by turning dial 1 which is graduated directly in Amperes.
b The setting can be locked by sealing the cover 7.
6
LR9 F5369
6
TRIPPED
STOP RESET
5
Ir(A) TEST
4
1 105 125
3
7 90 150 protection électronique moteur
ELECTRONIC MOTOR PROTECTION
98
NO
97 95
NC
96
2
“Stop” function 3 “Test” function 2

Stop Test Trip indicator
PED
ED
T TRIPP ED
RESE T TRIPP
STOP RESE
STOP RE
STOP
TEST
TEST
b The “Stop” function is obtained by pressing the red “STOP” button 3. b The “Test” function is obtained by pressing the red “TEST” button 2
b Pressing the Test button: with a screwdriver.
v actuates the N/C contact, b Operation of the “TEST” button simulates tripping of the relay and:
v has no effect on the N/O contact. v actuates both the N/O and N/C contacts,
b The “STOP” button can be locked by fitting a “U” clip v actuates the trip indicator 5.
(reference: LA7 D901).

page 6/24 pages 6/25 to 6/27 pages 6/28 to 6/31 page 6/32
6/33
Presentation, TeSys protection components 6
description 6
Electronic over current relays
Presentation
LR97 D and LT47 electronic over current relays have been developed to satisfy machine
protection requirements.
These relays have definite time characteristics: current threshold and time based function.
510429
They are particularly recommended for providing mechanical protection on machines with high
resistive torque, high inertia and with strong probability of jamming under steady state conditions.
They can be used for motor protection in the case of long starting times or frequent starting.
The LR97 D relay also incorporates two fixed time protection functions, one of 0.5 seconds
against locked rotor and one of 3 seconds against phase failure.
LR97 D and LT47 can be used to provide mechanical shock protection. In this case, setting the
O-Time knob to minimum will ensure tripping in 0.3 seconds.
Applications
LR97 D and LT47 relays are particularly suitable for the following machines:
b Monitoring function for excessively long starting time on machines with a risk of difficult
starting:
v Machines with high resistive torque, high inertia machines.
b Monitoring of machines during steady state operation: overtorque detection function
LR97 D v Machines with strong risk of jamming, machines with torque build-up over time,
v Mechanical failure monitoring,
v Faster detection of malfunctioning on machines where the motor is oversized in relation to its
thermal protection I²t.
b Motor protection for specific applications:
v Machines with long starting times,
510430
v Machines with high on-load factor: more than 30 to 50 starts/hour,

v Machine with fluctuating load from a steady state, where the thermal image of a thermal
overload relay (thermal memory) is unsuitable in relation to actual overheating of the motor.
Examples of machines:
v Conveyors, crushers and mixers,
v Fans, pumps and compressors,
v Centrifuges and spin-dryers,
v Presses, shearing machines, saws, broaching machines, sanders and lifting hoists.
Operation
Because of their two separate time settings, LR97 D and LT47 relays can be combined with the
motor-starter function:
D-Time: starting time, O-Time: trip time during steady state.
The D-Time function is only available during the motor starting phase. During this phase the
LT47 overload detection function is inhibited in order to allow starting. Under steady state conditions,
when the motor current is greater than the setting current due to an overload or single-phasing,
the red LED lights up and the internal relay switches its contact after a time preset by the O-Time
knob.
The red LED stays on, indicating that the relay has tripped.
6 The relays are simple to set, in 5 easy steps:

- Adjust the 3 knobs to maximum (Load, D-Time and O-Time),
- Adjust the D-Time knob to the value corresponding to the motor starting time.
- When the motor reaches steady state, adjust the Load knob (turn the knob counter-clockwise
until the red LED starts to flicker).
- Slowly turn the Load knob clockwise until the LED goes out.
- Set the required tripping time, using the O-Time knob.
Description
Description Status signalling
LR97 Dppppp LT47 ppppp LR97 Dppppp LT47 ppppp
To assist fast diagnostics, two LEDs (one green and one red) allow signalling of the operating
status:
3 3
4
9 4 LED signal LED signal
1 Status Condition
Green LED Red LED Green LED Red LED
RESET
8 2
2 TEST
Voltage On Off
Voltage On Off
TEST/STOP
RESET 1
Starting Starting
A1 A2 98 95 96
Steady Steady
2T1 4T2 6T3 state On Off state On Off
5 6 7 10 Overload Overload On
On
5 6 7 Over- Trip On
1 RESET knob 7 Adjustment of tripping Trip current Off On Off
2 TEST/STOP knob time Rotor
3 Ready/Run Indicator 8 Manual/Auto adjustment locked Off
4 Relay tripped indicator 9 Single-phase/3-phase Pha L1 Off
5 Current setting adjustment se
6 Adjustment of starting 10 Retractable fixing lugs fail- L2
Off
time ure
L3 Off
Curves : Characteristics : References : Dimensions, mounting : Schemes :

pages 6/35 and 6/36 pages 6/36 and 6/37 page 6/38 page 6/39 page 6/39
6/34
Curves 6
Curves
LR97 D
Overload protection
Protection against locked rotor and mechanical jamming under steady state conditions
U power supply A1-A2

Starting Locked rotor Mechanical jamming Overload
on starting during steady state
operation
Brief
overload
3 x I setting
Setting current
Normal steady state operation
t
Current
D-Time 0,5 s O-Time O-Time
Reset: Manual (1)
or electric (3)
Tripping due to locked rotor or 96
mechanical jamming during 95
steady state operation 98
96
Tripping on overload 95
98
Reset: Manual (1)
automatic (2)
or electric (3)
Overload protection
Protection against phase failure during starting and during steady state operation

Starting Phase Overload
failure Missing
phase
Brief
overload
Setting current
Current
t
D-Time
<3s
<3s O-Time O-Time
Reset: Manual (1)
or electric (3)
6
Tripping due to 95 96
phase failure
98
96
Tripping on overload 95
98
Reset: Manual (1)
automatic (2)
or electric (3)
Mechanical shock protection

Starting Overload
Setting current
Current t
D-Time O-Time set to
Reset: Manual (1)
minimum (02-03 s) automatic (2)
or electric (3)
96
Tripping to due mechanical shock 95
98
(1) By Reset button.

(2) Fixed time of 120 s. Selectable by dip switch. Function not available in the event of tripping due to locked rotor/mechanical jamming (I> 3 x I setting) or phase failure.
(3) By brief interruption of power supply, minimum 0.1 s.
Presentation, description : Characteristics : References : Dimensions, mounting : Schemes :

page 6/34 pages 6/36 and 6/37 page 6/38 page 6/39 page 6/39
6/35
Curves (continued), TeSys protection components 6
characteristics 6
Curves (continued)
LT47
Overload protection

Starting Overload
Brief
overload
Setting current
t
Current
D-Time O-Time O-Time
Reset: Manual (1)
automatic (2)
or electric (3)
Trip 95 96
on overload 97 98
Mechanical shock protection

Starting Overload
Setting current
Current t
D-Time O-Time set to
Reset: Manual (1)
minimum (02-03 s) automatic (2)
or electric (3)
Tripping due to 95 96
mechanical shock 97 98
(1) By Reset button.

(2) Only available on version with automatic reset (LT47 ppppA). Time adjustable from 1 to 120 s with the R-Time knob.
(3) By brief interruption of power supply, minimum 0.1 s.
6
Characteristics
Environment
Relay type LR97 Dppppp LT47 ppppp
Conforming to standards IEC 60255-6, IEC 60947 IEC 60255-6, IEC 60947
Product certifications UL, CSA UL, CSA
Degree of protection Conforming to IEC 60529 IP 20 (front face) IP 20 (front face)
and VDE 0106
Protective treatment Conforming to IEC 60068 “TH” “TH”
around the device Normal operation without derating °C - 25…+ 60 - 25…+ 60
(IEC 60947-4-1)
Maximum operating altitude m 2000 2000
Operating positions In relation to normal Any position Any position
Shock resistance Permissible acceleration 15 gn - 11 ms 15 gn - 11 ms
Vibration resistance Permissible acceleration 4 gn 4 gn
Dielectric strength at 50 Hz Conforming to IEC 60255-5 kV 2 2
Surge withstand Conforming to IEC 61000-4-5 kV 6 6
Resistance to In open air kV 8 (level 3) 8 (level 3)
electrostatic discharge In direct mode kV 6 (level 3) 6 (level 3)
Immunity to radiated radio-frequency disturbance V/m 10 (level 3) 10 (level 3)
Immunity to fast transient currents kV 2 2
Conducted emissions Conforming to EN 55011 Class A Class A
Conducted HF disturbance Conforming to EN 61000-4-6 V 10 10
Presentation, description : References : Dimensions, mounting : Schemes :

6/36
Characteristics
Relay type LR97 Dppppp LT47 ppppp
Contact type 1 NO/NC 1 N/O + 1N/C
Conventional thermal current A 3 3
Maximum hold consumption V a 24 a 48 a 110 a 220 a 24 a 48 a 110 a 220
of controlled contactor coils Conforming to IEC 60947 VA 70 140 360 360 70 140 360 360
(occasional operating cycles
V c 24 c 48 c 110 c 220 c 24 c 48 c 110 c 220
of contact 95-96)
W 55 55 28 28 55 55 28 28
Short-circuit protection By gG, BS fuses. Maximum A 3 3
rating or GB2 circuit-breaker
Connection by cable or lug-clamps
Flexible cable 1 or 2 conductors Min. mm 2 1 x 0.75 1x1
without cable end Max. mm 2 2 x 2.5 2 x 2.5
Flexible cable 1 or 2 conductors Min. mm 2 1 x 0.34 1x1
with cable end Max. mm 2 1 x 1.5 + 1 x 2.5 2 x 2.5
External Ø of lugs mm 7 7
Ø of screw mm M3 M3.5
Tightening torque N.m 0.6…1.2 0.8...1.7

Relay type LR97 D015pp to LR97 D38pp LT47 ppppp
LR97 D25pp
Setting range Depending on model A 0.3…38 0.5…60
Tripping class Adjustable Adjustable
Rated insulation voltage (Ui) Conforming to IEC 60947-4-1 V 690 690
Conforming to UL, CSA V 600 600
Rated impulse kV 6 6
Frequency limits Of the operating current Hz 50…60 50…60
Connection by cable or lug-clamps
Flexible cable 1 conductor Min. mm 2 1.5 2.5 –
without cable end Max. 10 10 –
Flexible cable 1 conductor Min. mm 2 1 1 –
with cable end Max. 4 6 –
External Ø of lugs mm 10 12 –
Ø of screw mm M4 M4 –
Tightening torque N.m 2 2 – 6
Relay type LR97 Dppppp LT47 ppppS LT47 ppppA
Adjustment Current A "Load" knob "Load" knob "Load" knob
Time D-time s 0.5…30 0.5…30 –
knob
O-time s 0.2/0.3…10 0.2/0.3…10 0.2/0.3…30
knob
R-time s – – 1…120
knob
Reset Manual Reset button Reset button Reset button
Automatic 120 s fixed – R-time knob: 1-120 s
Electrical By interruption of power By interruption of power By interruption of power
supply (minimum 0.1 s) supply (minimum 0.1 s) supply (minimum 0.1 s)
Protection functions On starting Steady On starting Steady –
state state
Overload Imax > Isetting Tripping Inhibited After O-time Inhibited After O-time After O-time
during during
D-time D-time
Locked rotor, mechanical Tripping After D-time < 0.5 s Inhibited After O-time After O-time
jamming I > 3 x I setting during
D-time
Sensitivity to phase failure Tripping <3s <3s Inhibited After O-time After O-time
during
D-time
Status and fault signalling 2 LEDs 2 LEDs 2 LEDs
(see table page 6/34)
TEST/STOP function Test No load No load No load
Stop Under load Under load Under load
Sealing Yes Yes Yes
Presentation, description : Curves : References : Dimensions, mounting : Schemes :

page 6/34 pages 6/35 and 6/36 page 6/38 page 6/39 page 6/39
6/37
References 6

510429
LR97 D electronic over current relays

Relay Usable For use Relay Reference Weight
setting range with contactor supply (3)
range (1) (2) voltage
A A kg
0.3…1.5 0.3…1.3 LC1 D09…D38 a 200…240 V LR97 D015M7 0.172
a 100…120 V LR97 D015F7 0.172
c/a 24 V LR97 D015B 0.172
c/a 48 V LR97 D015E 0.172
1.2…7 1.2…6 LC1 D09…D38 a 200…240 V LR97 D07M7 0.172
a 100…120 V LR97 D07F7 0.172
c/a 24 V LR97 D07B 0.172
c/a 48 V LR97 D07E 0.172
LR97 D07pp 5…25 5…21 LC1 D09…D38 a 200…240 V LR97 D25M7 0.172
a 100…120 V LR97 D25F7 0.172
c/a 24 V LR97 D25B 0.172
c/a 48 V LR97 D25E 0.172
20…38 20…34 LC1 D25…D38 a 200…240 V LR97 D38M7 0.172
a 100…120 V LR97 D38F7 0.172
c/a 24 V LR97 D38B 0.172
c/a 48 V LR97 D38E 0.172
LT47 electronic over current relays

510430
Relay Usable Relay Reference Weight

setting range supply
range (1) voltage
A A kg
LT47 relay with manual/electric reset
0.5…6 0.5…5 a 200…240 V LT47 06M7S 0.192
a 100…120 V LT47 06F7S 0.192
c/a 24 V LT47 06BS 0.192
c/a 48 V LT47 06ES 0.192
3…30 3…25 a 200…240 V LT47 30M7S 0.192
a 100…120 V LT47 30F7S 0.192
c/a 24 V LT47 30BS 0.192
LT47 30ppp c/a 48 V LT47 30ES 0.192
5…60 5…50 a 200…240 V LT47 60M7S 0.192
6 a 100…120 V LT47 60F7S 0.192
c/a 24 V LT47 60BS 0.192
c/a 48 V LT47 60ES 0.192
LT47 relay with automatic reset
0.5…6 0.5…5 a 200…240 V LT47 06M7A 0,192
a 100…120 V LT47 06F7A 0.192
c/a 24 V LT47 06BA 0.192
c/a 48 V LT47 06EA 0.192
3…30 3…25 a 200…240 V LT47 30M7A 0.192
a 100…120 V LT47 30F7A 0.192
c/a 24 V LT47 30BA 0.192
c/a 48 V LT47 30EA 0.192
5…60 5…50 a 200…240 V LT47 60M7A 0.192
a 100…120 V LT47 60F7A 0.192
c/a 24 V LT47 60BA 0.192
c/a 48 V LT47 60EA 0.192
use with lots of reference
kg
Pre-wiring kits allowing LC1 D09…D18 10 LAD 7C1 0.002
connection of the LR97 D LC1 D25…D38 10 LAD 7C2 0.003
relay N/C contact directly to
the contactor
Terminal block for clip-on LR97 D 1 LAD 7B106 0.100
mounting on 35 mm rail
(AM1 DP200)
(1) To allow adjustment of the tripping sensitivity, see adjustment method (page 6/34).
(2) Please see pages 5/42 and 5/43.
(3) If a pre-wiring kit is used, it is no longer possible to electrically wire signalling of tripped status.
Presentation, description : Curves : Characteristics : Dimensions, mounting : Schemes :

page 6/34 pages 6/35 and 6/36 pages 6/36 and 6/37 page 6/39 page 6/39
6/38
mounting, Electronic over current relays

schemes 6
Dimensions
LR97 Dpppp LT47 pppp
62,2 63 Ø 12
13 10 51
19,5
51,5
20,4
70,3
50,8
67,5 45
77,2 56
71
Mounting
Direct mounting beneath the contactor
c
b
67,5 45
LC1 D09…D18 D25…D38 Note: Can be mounted on 5 rail.

6
b 123 137
c See pages 5/82 and 5/83
Schemes
L1
L2
L3
L1
L2
L3
MCBB MCBB
Stop
Stop
KM1
13
13
Start
Start KM1
KM1
L1
L2
L3
14
Test/Stop
14
LR 97D
Test/Stop
A1
Reset
Reset
KM1
A2
A1 A2 98 95 96
A1 A2 98 95 96
A1 A2 97 98 95 96
A1
KM1
T1
T2
T3
A2
LT47
a
M3 M3
Presentation, description : Curves : Characteristics : References :

page 6/34 pages 6/35 and 6/36 pages 6/36 and 6/37 page 6/38
6/39
Functions 6
The LT6 is a protection relay designed for motor control.

813347
Not using serial link communication

The LT6 protects against:
b thermal overloads, by monitoring the machine currents,
b machine overheating (using PTC probes),
b phase imbalance and phase failure,
b earth fault.
It provides:
b fault signalling via a relay output and a 7 segment display,
b the control of motors (reversing).
Using serial link communication
LT6 P0M005FM The LT6 protects against:
b thermal overloads, by monitoring the machine currents,
b machine overheating (using PTC probes),
b phase imbalance and phase failure,
b earth fault,
b no-load running,
b long starting time,
b overtorque and stalled rotor,
b reversal of phase rotation,
b a too low power factor (cos ϕ).
It provides:
b fault and alarm signalling, using a remote display,
b fault signalling via a relay output and a 7 segment display,
b load shedding by monitoring voltage between phases,
b signalling if short-circuit current is exceeded,
b thermal alarm,
b the control of motors (independent, reversing and 2-stage).
It communicates via a bus:

b for receiving configuration parameters for the LT6 (protection, motor control),
b for information exchange with the LT6:
v instantaneous values (voltage, current per phase, frequency, cos ϕ, thermal state),
v data log of 5 previous trip incidents (causes and remedies),
6 v maintenance statistics, cause of trip statistics,
v operating and alarm states.
It incorporates a communication watchdog function:

in the event of loss of communication, fallback mode parameters can be set.
Description
On the front panel of the relay:
b a 7 segment display for fault indication,
b a “Test” button which opens the control contacts and closes the fault signalling
contacts,
b a trip “Reset” button.
b a DIP switch for selection of:

v bus communication address,
v communication protocol (Uni-Telway or Jbus/Modbus),
v manual or automatic reset following a thermal fault,
v thermal overload parameter settings from the front panel or via serial link
communication (line adjust or local adjust).
b a serial interface (9-way SUB-D) enables RS 232 or RS 485 connection,

depending on the user's cabling method,
v using RS 232 connection, kit reference LA9 P620 enables communication
(parameters and indication) between the relay and a PC running under Microsoft
Windows 95, 98 or NT 4,
v using RS 485 connection, the relay is connected to a Uni-Telway or Jbus/Modbus
bus,
v using RS 232 connection enables the relay status to be read at a remote display
unit XBT H41101p.
Characteristics, curves : References : Dimensions, mounting : Application schemes :

pages 6/42 to 6/47 pages 6/48 and 6/49 pages 6/50 and 6/51 pages 6/52 to 6/57
6/40
LT6 configuration table

Functions Setting parameters
Description Factory Activated/ Description Initial values Adjustment range
activated deactivated accessible via
by serial serial link
link communication
Thermal overload: – Ir (% rating) 20 % 20…109 % (1)

thermal protection of motor by monitoring current consumption Class 5 5…30 (1)
Overload alarm 100 % 0…125 %
Overheating (PTC): – – –
thermal monitoring of motor using built-in PTC temperature probes
Phase imbalance and phase failure: Id (% of I rms average) 30 % of I average 10…30 %
monitors symmetry of rms current values (2) 0.7 s (starting) 0…10 s
Time before tripping 5 s (running) 0…10 s
Earth fault (DDR): IDR 30 A 0.3…30 A
monitors insulation faults using toroid sensor Time before tripping 5s 0…5 s
Long starting time: – IsD (% of Ir) 150 % Ir 100…500 % Ir

LT6 trips if both Is D and preset time exceeded Starting time 10 s 0…30 s
No-load running: – Iv (% of Ir) 30 % Ir 30…90 % Ir

LT6 trips if both Iv and preset time exceeded Time before tripping 10 s 0…30 s
Torque limitation: – IL c (% of Ir) 200 % Ir 150…800 % Ir

LT6 trips if both I Lc and preset time exceeded. Time before tripping 10 s 0…30 s
Function inactive during starting
Cos ϕ : – Cos ϕ 0.1 - 1…1
monitors phase shift between motor current and voltage Time before tripping 10 s 0…10 s
Monitoring of rotational direction of phases – – Forward running –
Load shedding: – Shedding 70 % Un 68…120 % Un

opens channels A and B of LT6 if voltage drops below preset value Time before shedding 10 000 s 0…100 000 s
Re-establishment 90 % Un 68…120 % Un
Time before re- 10 000 s 0…100 000 s
establishment
Short-circuit detection: – Isc 15 x lr peak –
signals short-circuit condition via the serial interface
Reset:
effective after programmable time or when the thermal state drops
– Time before reset 0s
θ °C (iron) before reset 100 % θn
0…1000 s
40…100 % θn 6
below a programmed value
Motor control – Control of outputs A Reversing Reversing,
and B independent 2-
stage
Self-cooled/Auto-cooled – – Self-cooled Self-cooled or auto-
cooled
Communication watchdog – Opening of outputs A – –

and B, in the event of
loss of communication
(1) These values can be activated and adjusted from the front panel of the relay when set to “Local adjust”.
(2) The average rms current is equal to the average current value of the 3 phases.
Factory activated functions or functions activated/deactivated by serial link communication.
Characteristics, curves : References : Dimensions, mounting : Application schemes :

pages 6/42 to 6/47 pages 6/48 and 6/49 pages 6/50 and 6/51 pages 6/52 to 6/57
6/41
Characteristics 6
Environment
Conforming to standards IEC 600947-4-1, IEC 60034-11, IEC 60755,
VDE 0106, VDE 0660
e marking Meets the essential requirements of European Low Voltage and EMC Directives
Product certifications UL 508, CSA, RINA, LROS
Degree of protection Conforming to IEC 60947-1 IP 20 (1)
Shock resistance Conforming to IEC 6068-2-27 15 gn, 11 ms
Vibration resistance Conforming to IEC 6068-2-6 2 gn from 3 to 100 Hz

around the device
Operating position In relation to normal

90
90
Resistance to Conforming to IEC 61000-4-2, kV 8

electrostatic discharge level 3
Resistance to radiated Conforming to IEC 61000-4-3, V/m 10
electromagnetic interference level 3
Resistance to Conforming to IEC 61000-4-4, kV 2
fast transient currents level 4
Resistance to conducted Conforming to IEC 61000-4-6, level 3
radio-frequency disturbance
Non-dissipating shock wave Conforming to IEC 60947-1 kV 6
(U imp)
Dissipated shock wave Conforming to IEC 61000-4-5, level 3
6
Supply harmonics Conforming to IEC 60947-2 appendix F
Resistance to micro-breaks Conforming to IEC 61000-4-11
(1) Only applicable when power cabling to relay exceeds the following sizes:
1.5 mm2 with cable end or 2.5 mm2 without cable end .
Functions : References : Dimensions, mounting : Application schemes :

pages 6/40 and 6/41 pages 6/48 and 6/49 pages 6/50 and 6/51 pages 6/52 to 6/57
6/42
Power circuit characteristics

Relay type LT6 P0M005FM LT6 P0M025FM
Rated insulation voltage Conforming to IEC 60947-1 V a 690 a 690
(Ui)
Operating frequency Hz 50/60 50/60
Rated operational current A 1 or 5 (1) 25
Input impedance Ω < 0.1 < 0.1
Connection
Solid cable 1 or 2 conductors mm 2 1.5…6
Flexible cable 1 or 2 conductors mm 2 1.5…6
without cable end
Flexible cable 1 or 2 conductors mm 2 1.5…4
with cable end
Associated protection
By circuit-breaker Operational current y 25 A y GV2 L05 (1 A relay rating) y GV2 L22
y GV2 L10 (5 A relay rating)
Operational current > 25 A Compact NSppppMA (Merlin Gerin)
(using a current transformer)
By fuses Operational current y 25 A A y 2 aM, 4 gG (1 A relay rating) y 25 (aM), y 50 (gG, gM)
y 6 aM, 16 gG (5 A relay rating)
Operational current > 25 A u 32 (aM), u 63 (gG, gM)

(using a current transformer)
Control circuit supply characteristics
Rated insulation voltage Conforming to IEC 60947-1 V a 380
(Ui)
Operating voltage V c or a 50/60 Hz: 90…276
Power consumption 50/60 Hz VA 15

c W 7
Cabling
Solid cable Plug-in connector mm 2 0.5…1
1 or 2 conductors
Flexible cable
without cable end
1 or 2 conductors mm 2 0.5…1 6
Flexible cable 1 conductor mm 2 0.5…1
with cable end 2 conductors mm 2 0.5…0.75
Discrete input characteristics

Rated insulation voltage Conforming to IEC 60947-1 V a 250
(Ui)
Operating voltage V c 90...150. a 90…276
Current consumption Minimum transient value mA u 1 (changing from state 0 to state 1 in t u 4 ms)
Power consumption W 0.5
Input impedance kΩ 56
(1) Using external current transformer for operating currents exceeding 25 A: see page 6/48.

6/43
Communication interface characteristics

Physical interface RS 232: connection to PC or XBT H
RS 485: connection to programmable controller
Connector on LT6 9-way SUB-D
Maximum transmission speed bit/s 9600
Minimum time between 2 requests m/s 100
Discrete output characteristics

Rated insulation voltage Conforming to V a 380
(Ui) IEC 60947-1
Output type Relay interface 1 N/O per channel
Associated fuse protection Conforming to A 6 (type gC)

IEC 60947-5
a.c. loads
Rated voltage V a 250
Permissible power VA 500 (Ie = 0.5 A, Ue = a 250 V, Ith = 5 A, cos ϕ = 0.4 for 100 000 operations)
for category AC-15
Associated with contactor LC1 K, LC2 K, LC7 K, LC8 K,
LC1 D09 to D150
d.c. loads
Rated voltage V c 30
Permissible power W 50 (Ie = 0.5 A, Ue = c 250 V, Ith = 5 A, L/R y 25 ms for 100 000 operations)
for category DC-15
Associated with contactor LP1 K, LP2 K, LP1 D09 and D12
LC1 D09 to D38 c
LC1 D40 to D95 (with LA4 DC3U)
Signalling output characteristics

Rated insulation voltage Conforming to V a 380
(Ui) IEC 60947-1
Output type Relay interface V 1 N/O per channel
Associated fuse protection Conforming to A 2 (type gC)

IEC 60947-5
Current limit At U = c 5 V mA 10
6 a.c. loads
Rated voltage V a 250
Permissible power VA 250 (Ie = 0.2 A, Ue = a 250 V, Ith = 2 A, 300 000 operations on a resistive load)
for category AC-15
Associated with contactor LC1 K, LC2 K, LC7 K, LC8 K with suppressor module LA4 KE
d.c. loads
Rated voltage V c 30
Permissible power W 50 (Ie = 0.2 A, Ue = c 30 V, Ith = 2 A, 300 000 operations on a resistive load)
for category DC-15
Associated with contactor LP1 K, LP2 K with suppressor module LA4 KC

6/44
LT6 CTpppp external current transformer characteristics

Conforming to standards IEC 60185, BS 7626
Precision Class 5P
Precision limit factor 15
Rated insulation voltage V 690

(Ui)
Maximum operating temperature °C 50
Transformer ratio A 100/1 200/1 400/1 800/1
Diameter of conductor passage hole mm 35 35 35 10
Maximum cabling c.s.a. mm 2 300 300 300 Incorporated (1)
XBT H41101p display module characteristics

Supply V c 24
Display Type LCD, 9 mm

Capacity 2 lines of 20 characters
Input keys 2
Pilot lights LED, communication
LED, acknowledgement of input key operation
Operating temperature °C 0…+ 50
Storage temperature °C - 20…+ 70
Humidity (without condensation) % 0…85
Protection Front panel IP 65 (IEC 60529, NF C 20-010, UL)

Rear panel IP 20
Resistance to IEC 61000-4-2 Level 3

Electromagnetic interference IEC 61000-4-3 V/m 10
Electrical interference IEC 61000-4-4 Level 3
Shock resistance IEC 60068-2-27 30 gn, 11 ms, 1/2 sine 6

Vibration resistance IEC 60068-2-6 0.075 mm from 2 to 57 Hz
1 gn from 57 to 150 Hz
Communication with the LT6 Serial link type using specific cable XBT Z9701 (see page 6/48)
Software Modbus protocol Loaded as standard and available in 3 languages
(1) Electrical connection to be made using M10 bolt.

6/45
Characteristics 6
Probe characteristics
Probe type DA1 TTppp
Conforming to standards IEC 60034-11 mark A
Resistance At 25 °C Ω 3 x 250 in series
Rated operational voltage Per probe V c 2.5 max

(Ue)
Rated insulation voltage kV 2.5
(Ui)
Insulation Reinforced
Length of connecting cables Between probes mm 250
Between probe and m 1

motor terminal plate
Guaranteed operating zones: example with 3 probes type DA1 TTppp (250 Ω at 25 °C) in series, conforming to standard EC 60034-11, mark A.
Resistance
(ohms)
10 000
4000
Trip zone
1650 Reset zone
1500
1000
750
1
100
20
Trip zone on probe short-circuit
10
6
NOT
NOT - 20 °C
NOT - 5 °C
NOT + 5 °C
NOT + 15 °C
-20 0 Temperature
(°C)
1 3 probes type DA1 TTppp (250 Ω to 25 °C) in series.
NOT: Nominal Operating Temperature
Protection unit tripped.
Protection unit reset.

6/46
Tripping curves 6
Cold state curves (1)

t (s)
10 000
1000
100
Class 30
Class 25
10 Class 20
Class 15
Class 10
Class 5 (10 A)
1 I/Ir
1 1,12 1,5 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Hot state curves (1)

t (s)
10 000
1000
100
10
Class 30
Class 25
Class 20
Class 15
Class 10
Class 5 (10 A)
1 I/Ir
1 1,12 1,5 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
(1) Tripping time accuracy: ± 8 % at 7.2 x I/Ir.

6/47
References 6
3-pole multifunction protection relays

813353
Operational current (1) Description Weight

A kg
0.2…1 LT6 P0M005FM 1.030
1…5
5…25 LT6 P0M025FM 1.030
Configuration software
Description Languages For Reference Weight
use with kg
Kit comprising: English, French, All relay LA9 P620 0.550
- two 3" 1/2 diskettes, German, Italian, ratings
(for Windows 2000 XP 95, 98, Spanish
NT 4),
LT6 P0M005FM - 2 m connection cable fitted at
each end with a 9-way SUB-D
connector (female-female)
Current transformers
Operational current Reference Weight
Primary Secondary
813354
A A kg
100 1 LT6 CT1001 0.550
200 1 LT6 CT2001 0.550
400 1 LT6 CT4001 0.550
800 1 LT6 CT8001 0.680
Display modules
Language Supply voltage Reference Weight
V kg
LT6 CT4001 French c 24 XBT H411011 0.620
English c 24 XBT H411013 0.620
Spanish c 24 XBT H411014 0.620

6 Connection cable
Function Reference Weight
kg
Ensures connection link between the LT6 relay XBT Z9701 0.200
and display modules XBT H/P/E/HM/PM.
Comprising a 9-way SUB-D female connector
and a 25-way SUB-D male connector
(length 2.2 m)
(1) For operational currents greater than 25 A, use an external current transformer with a 1 A or
5 A secondary.
Functions : Characteristics, curves: Dimensions, mounting : Application schemes :

pages 6/40 and 6/41 pages 6/42 to 6/47 pages 6/50 and 6/51 pages 6/52 to 6/57
6/48
Earth fault toroids

Products marketed under the Merlin Gerin brand
Sensitivity Internal Ø Reference Weight
of toroid
A mm kg
0.3…30 30 TA30 0.120
46 POA 1.300
50 PA50 0.200
80 IA80 0.420
110 GOA 3.200
120 MA120 0.530
200 SA200 1.320
300 GA300 2.230
813355
PTC thermistor probes (1)

Description Nominal Operating Sold in Unit Weight
Temperature (NOT) lots of reference
°C kg
Triple probes 90 10 DA1 TT090 0.010
110 10 DA1 TT110 0.010
120 10 DA1 TT120 0.010
130 10 DA1 TT130 0.010
140 10 DA1 TT140 0.010
150 10 DA1 TT150 0.010
160 10 DA1 TT160 0.010
170 10 DA1 TT170 0.010
Marking accessories (to be ordered separately)

Description Composition Sold in Unit Weight
lots of reference
kg
Clip-in markers Strips of 10 identical 25 AB1 Rp (2) 0.002
(maximum of numbers (0 to 9)
DA1 TT ppp 5 per relay)
Replacement part
capital letters (A to Z)
6
kg
Set of plug-in connectors (3) LA9 P600 0.150
(1) PTC: Positive Temperature Coefficient.

(2) When ordering, replace the p in the reference with the number or letter required.
(3) The set includes upstream, downstream and probe-entry connectors.
Functions : Characteristics, curves: Dimensions, mounting : Application schemes :

6/49
mounting 6
Protection relays LT6 P

LT6 P0MpppFM
On 35 mm 7 mounting rail On pre-slotted mounting plate AM1 PA
AF1 EA4
110
118
131 90
54
Current transformers Display modules

LT6 CT XBT H41101p
6,2
42
89,6
102
107
35
30
202
6,2
5 25 a 25 5
95
6 12,35 5,85
120 7
183,8
2,5
10 10
20
50
2,5
5 42,5 42,5 5
LT6 a Panel cut-out

CT1001 35
CT2001 35
CT4001 35
CT8001 10 (1) e
90
Support panel thickness e = 1.5…6 mm.

184 (1) R: 3.5 max / 2 min.
Functions : Characteristics, curves: References : Application schemes :

6/50
Earth fault toroids

TA30, PA50 IA80, MA120, SA200
c2 21
8 4
16
b1
b2
H
K
H
b
b1
29
c1
a
J G
c1 a1
Type b b1 Øc c1 c2 H Type a a1 Øb b1 b2 Øc c1 G H J K
TA30 83 53 30 60 31 50 IA80 26,5 44 122 80 55 80 150 35 65 126 40
PA50 109 66 50 87 45 60 MA120 26,5 44 164 80 55 120 190 35 65 166 40
SA200 29 46 256 120 90 196 274 37 104 254 60
GA300 POA, GOA

344
6
a
G
299 29
Type a Øb Øc G
GOA 72 148 46 57
POA 78 224 110 76
Functions : Characteristics, curves: References : Application schemes :

6/51
Application schemes 6
Motor control: D.O.L. starting (channels A and B set for reversing or independent control)
Control from front panel of relay Control via discrete inputs of relay
– KM1
Motor
Motor stop
start
95 95
D1
D2
D3
D4
D1
D2
D3
D4
Channel A – KM1 Channel A – KM1

Reserved Reserved 96
96
I8 Discrete input E I8 Discrete input E
I7 Discrete input D I7 Discrete input D

O1 O1
I6 Discrete input C Channel B I6 Discrete input C Channel B
O2 O2
I5 Stop channels A and B I5 Stop channels A and B
I4 Start channel B 97 I4 Start channel B 97

Signalling Signalling
I3 Start channel A 98 I3 Start channel A 98
Local or serial communication Local or serial communication
I2 I2
control of A and B control of A and B
93 93
I1 Reset Alarm I1 Reset Alarm
94 94
C1 Common 1 (–) C1 Common 1 (–)
C2 Common 2 (–) T1 C2 Common 2 (–) T1

PTC probes T2 PTC probes T2
A2 NC A2 NC
Control supply Control supply
H1
(1) Earth fault toroid H1 (1) Earth fault toroid H2
A1 H2 A1
400 V – KM1 400 V – KM1

L11 2T1 L11 2T1
M
L21 4T2 L21 4T2
3
L31 6T3 L31 6T3
Control via serial link communication (Uni-Telway or Jbus/Modbus)
95
D1
D2
D3
D4
Channel A – KM1
Reserved 96
6 I8 Discrete input E
I7 Discrete input D
O1
I6 Discrete input C Channel B
O2
I5 Stop channels A and B
I4 Start channel B 97
Signalling
I3 Start channel A 98
Local or serial communication
I2
control of A and B
93
I1 Reset Alarm
94
C1 Common 1 (–)
C2 Common 2 (–) T1
PTC probes T2
A2 NC
Control supply
H1
(1) Earth fault toroid
A1 H2
400 V – KM1
L11 2T1
M
L21 4T2
3
L31 6T3
(1) For d.c. supplies, inputs I1 to I8 must be connected to the positive line.
Functions : Characteristics, curves: References : Dimensions, mounting :

pages 6/40 and 6/41 pages 6/42 to 6/47 pages 6/48 and 6/49 pages 6/50 and 6/51
6/52
Application schemes Protection components 6
(continued) 6
Motor control: D.O.L. starting

Control via serial link communication with signalling, earth fault toroid, PTC probes, state of power components
Channels A and B set for reversing or independent control.
Possible to control the motor via discrete input (“local” position) or by serial link communication
95
D1
D2
D3
D4
– KM1
Channel A
Reserved
96
I8 Discrete input E
– Q1
I7 Discrete input D
O1
– KM1 Channel B
I6 Discrete input C
O2
I4 Start channel B 97
Signalling Tripped
I2 Local or serial communication

control of A and B 93
Line I1 Reset Alarm Overload
Local 94
C1 Common 1 (–)
PTC probes T2
A2 NC
Control supply
– Q1 Earth fault toroid H1
(1)
A1 H2
– KM1 U
L11 2T1
400 V V M
L21 4T2
3
W
L31 6T3
(1) For d.c. supplies inputs I1 to I8 must be connected to the positive line.

6/53
(continued) 6
Motor control: reverser starting

Control via serial link communication Control via discrete inputs of relay
Channels A and B set for reversing control. Channels A and B set for reversing control.
95 95
D1
D2
D3
D4
D1
D2
D3
D4
Channel A – KM1 Channel A – KM1
Reserved Reserved
96 96
– KM2 – KM2
I7 Discrete input D I7 Discrete input D

O1 O1
Discrete input C Channel B – KM2 – KM2
I6 I6 Discrete input C Channel B
O2 O2
I5 Stop channels A and B – KM1 I5 Stop channels A and B – KM1
I4 Start channel B 97 I4 Start channel B 97

Signalling Signalling
I3 Start channel A 98 I3 Start channel A 98
Local or serial communication Local or serial communication
I2 control of A and B I2
control of A and B
93 93
I1 Reset Alarm I1 Reset Alarm
94 94
C1 Common 1 (–) C1 Common 1 (–)
C2 Common 2 (–) T1 C2 Common 2 (–) T1

PTC probes
T2 PTC probes T2
A2 NC A2 NC
Control supply Control supply
(1) Earth fault toroid H1 (1)
H1
A1 H2 A1 Earth fault toroid H2
400 V – KM1 400 V – KM1

L11 2T1 L11 2T1
M
L21 4T2 L21 4T2
3
L31 6T3 L31 6T3
– KM2 – KM2
Control from front panel of relay

Channels A and B set for independent control.
95
D1
D2
D3
D4
Channel A
6 I8
Reserved
Discrete input E
96
Motor stop
I7 Discrete input D
O1 Forward – KM1 Reverse – KM2
Discrete input C start start
I6 Channel B
O2
I5 Stop channels A and B – KM2 – KM1
I4 Start channel B 97 – KM1 – KM2

Signalling
I2 control of A and B
93
I1 Reset Alarm
94
C1 Common 1 (–)
PTC probes T2
A2 NC
Control supply
H1
(1) Earth fault toroid
A1 H2
400 V – KM1
L11 2T1
M
L21 4T2
3
L31 6T3
– KM2

6/54
(continued) 6
Motor control: reverser starting with measurement of cos ϕ and voltage

Control via serial link communication
Channels A and B set for reversing control.
95
D1
D2
D3
D4
Channel A – KM2 – KM1
Reserved
96
230 V
From voltage measuring C2 Common 2 (–)
transformer 0 V I8 Discrete input E
O1
I7 Discrete input D
Channel B – KM1 – KM2
I6 Discrete input C
O2
I4 Start channel B
97
I3 Start channel A Signalling
Local or serial communication 98
I2
control of A and B
I1 Reset
93
C1 Common 1 (–)
Alarm
94
Control supply A2
(1) A1
Voltage and cos ϕ measuring T1
PTC probes T2
transformer
400 V 230 V NC
H1
To discrete input E Earth fault toroid H2
0V 0V (I8)
400 V – KM1
L11 2T1
M
L21 4T2
3
L31 6T3
– KM2
6

6/55
(continued) 6
Motor control: star-delta starting (channels A and B set for 2-stage control)
Control via discrete inputs of relay
95
D1
D2
D3
D4 Channel A – KM1 – KM3
Reserved
96
– KM3
I8 Discrete input E
– KM1 – KM2
I7 Discrete input D
Discrete input C O1
I6
Channel B – KM3
O2
I4 Start channel B – KM1
I3 Start channel A
97
I1 Reset Signalling
98
C1 Common 1 (–)
C2 Common 2 (–) 93
Alarm
Control supply A2 94
(1) A1 1 – KM1 2
T1
PTC probes
T2 3 4
NC
Earth fault toroid H1 5 6
H2
400 V 1 – KM2 2 U1 U2
L11 2T1
3 4 V1 M V2
L21 4T2 3
5 6 W1 W2
L31 6T3
1 – KM3 2
3 4
5 6
95
D1
D2
D3
D4
Channel A – KM1 – KM3

6 I8
Reserved
Discrete input E
96
– KM3
– KM1 – KM2
I7 Discrete input D
Discrete input C O1
I6
Channel B – KM3
O2
I4 Start channel B – KM1
I3 Start channel A
I2 control of A and B 97
I1 Reset Signalling
Common 1 (–) 98
C1
C2 Common 2 (–)
93
Control supply A2 Alarm
(1) 94
A1
1 – KM1 2
PTC probes T1
T2 3 4
NC
Earth fault toroid H1 5 6
H2
400 V 1 – KM2 2 U1 U2
L11 2T1
3 4 V1 M V2
L21 4T2 3
5 6 W1 W2
L31 6T3
1 – KM3 2
3 4
5 6

6/56
(continued) 6
Motor control: star-delta starting with adjustable time delay

Channels A and B set for 2-stage control.
95
D1
D2
D3
D4
Channel A – KM3 – KM1 – KM3
Reserved
96
230 V
From voltage measuring C2 Common 2 (–)
transformer 0 V Discrete input E
– KM1
I8
O1 – KM3
I7 Discrete input D
Channel B – KM1 – KM2
I6 Discrete input C
O2
I4 Start channel B
97
I3 Start channel A Signalling
Local or serial communication 98
I1 Reset
93
C1 Common 1 (–) Alarm
94
Control supply A2
(1) A1 1k 5 – KM1 6
Voltage measuring transformer PTC probes T1
400 V/230 V T2 3 4
230 V 400 V NC
Earth fault toroid H1
1 2
To input E (I8) H2
0V 0V
400 V 5 – KM2 6 W1 W2
L11 2T1
3 4 V1 M V2
L21 4T2 3
1 2 U1 U2
L31 6T3
5 – KM3 6
3 4
1 2
(1) For d.c. supplies the inputs I1 to I8 must be connected to the positive line.
LT6 P0M005FM connections with current transformers LT6 CTpppp LT6 P0M0p5FM connections with display module XBT H41101p
95 95
6
D1
D2
D3
D4
D1
D2
D3
D4
Channel A
Channel A
Reserved Reserved 96
96
C2 Common 2 (–)
Discrete input D O1 O1
I7 I7 Discrete input D
Channel B Channel B
I6 Discrete input C I6 Discrete input C
O2 O2
I5 Stop channels A and B I5 Stop channels A and B
I4 Start channel B I4 Start channel B
97 97
I3 Start channel A Signalling I3 Start channel A Signalling
Local or serial communication 98 Local or serial communication 98
I2 control of A and B I2 control of A and B
I1 Reset I1 Reset
93 93
Ph1
Ph2
Ph3
C1 Common 1 (–) Alarm C1 Common 1 (–)

Alarm
C2 Common 2 (–) 94 94
A2 A2
A1 T1 A1 T1
PTC probes PTC probes
T2 T2
NC NC
H1 Earth fault toroid H1
Earth fault toroid
P1 H2 H2
S1 XBT H41101
L11 2T1 L11 2T1
S2 P1 LT6 P0M005FM LT6 P0M0 5FM
P2 S1
L21 4T2 L21 4T2
P2 S2 P1
S1
L31 6T3 L31 6T3
P2 S2
XBT Z9701
M
3

6/57
Selection guide 6
Thermistor protection units

for use with PTC thermistor probes (1)
Applications General protection and protection of motors fitted with PTC thermistor probes (1)
Standards and approvals IEC 60034-11, UL, CSA
Reset method Automatic
Fault signalling –
Fault memory in the event of a supply failure –
Fault test –
6
Rated control circuit voltages Single voltage 115 V or 230 V
a 50/60 Hz
Rated control circuit voltages c Single voltage 24 V
Contact type 1 N/C
Protection unit type LT3 SE
Pages 6/64
6/58
6
IEC 60034-11, PTB, UL, CSA

Marine: BV, LROS, GL, DNV, RINA
Automatic Manual or automatic
On front panel of unit and remote
– Yes
– By pushbutton on front panel of unit
6
Dual voltage 115/230 V Single voltage 400 V
Multivoltage 24…230 V Dual voltage 24/48 V, 115/230 V
Multivoltage 24…230 V
Dual voltage 24/48 V Dual voltage 24/48 V

Multivoltage 24…230 V
Dual voltage 1 N/C + 1 N/O Single voltage or dual voltage 1 N/C + 1 N/O
Multivoltage 2 C/O Multivoltage 2 C/O
LT3 SA LT3 SM
6/64
6/59
General 6

Application
LT3 Sp thermistor protection units continuously monitor the temperature of the
machines to be protected (motors, generators, etc.) by means of PTC thermistor
probes embedded in the machine windings.
If the nominal operating temperature of the probes is reached, they convert the rapid
increase in resistance into a switching function which can be used to switch off the
machine or signal a fault (see paragraph relating to thermistor probes below).
Accidental breaks in the supply circuits of the thermistors are also detected.
Electromagnetic compatibility
Conforming to "Electromagnetic compatibility" directive.
Conforming to standard EN 61000-6-2.
Resistance to electrostatic discharge (conforming to IEC 61000-4-2) Level 3
Resistance to fast transients (conforming to IEC 61000-4-4) Level 3
Susceptibility to electromagnetic fields (conforming to IEC 61000-4-3) Level 3
Surge resistance 1.2/50 - 8/20 (conforming to IEC 61000-4.5) Level 4
Immunity to microbreaks and voltage drops (IEC 61000-4-11)
Suitable for use with variable speed controllers
Thermistor probes
Range of most commonly used PTC thermistor probes:
from 90 to 160 °C, in steps of 10 °C.
Curve R = f (θ), characteristic of a PTC thermistor probe, is defined by standard
IEC 60947-8.
The choice of PTC thermistor probe to be incorporated in the motor winding depends
on the insulation class, the type of motor and the most suitable location for the probe.
6 This choice is usually made by the motor manufacturer or the motor rewinder, who
have all the necessary information.
Application example
Insulation class of rotating NOT Temperature at which
machines conforming to Nominal operating rapid increase in
IEC 60034-11 temperature resistance occurs
(S1 duty) Probes used for
Alarm Fault
°C °C °C
A 100 100 100
B 110 110 120
E 120 120 130
F 140 140 150
H 160 160 170

pages 6/61 to 6/63 pages 6/64 and 6/65 page 6/66 pages 6/66 and 6/67
6/60
Characteristics 6

Protection unit type LT3 SE LT3 SA LT3 SM

Reset method Automatic Automatic Manual/Automatic
Fault indication – On front panel of unit and On front panel of unit and
remote remote
Fault test – – By pushbutton on front
panel of unit
Probe interchangeability Label “Mark A” Label “Mark A” Label “Mark A”
to IEC 60034-11 to IEC 60034-11 to IEC 60034-11
Environment
Conforming to standards IEC 60034-11 IEC 60034-11 IEC 60034-11
VDE 0660 VDE 0660 VDE 0660
Product certifications – LROS
Degree of protection IP 20 conforming to IEC 60529, VDE 0106
e marking LT3 Sp protection units have been designed to comply with the basic
recommendations of European directives relating to low voltage and EMC.
Therefore LT3 Sp products bear the European Community e mark.
around the device Conforming to IEC 60068-2-1
and 2-2
Maximum operating altitude Without derating 1500 m

With derating Up to 3000 m, the maximum permissible ambient air temperature for operation (60 °C)
must be reduced by 5 °C per additional 500 m above 1500 m
Vibration resistance Conforming to IEC 60068-2-6 2.5 gn (2…25 Hz)
1 gn (25…150 Hz)
Shock resistance Conforming to IEC 60068-2-27 5 gn (11 ms)
Operating positions In relation to normal Any position

Power supply circuit characteristics

Rated control circuit voltage a 50/60 Hz Single voltage V 115 or 230 – 400
(Uc) 0.85…1.1 Uc Dual voltage V – 115/230 115/230. 24/48
a 50/60 Hz Multivoltage V – 24…230 24…230
0.85…1.1 Uc
c
0.8…1.25 Uc
Single voltage
Dual voltage
V
V
24
–
–
24/48
–
24/48
6
0.85…1.1 Uc Multivoltage V – 24…230 24…230
Average consumption Sealed a VA < 2.5 < 2.5 < 2.5 except (400 V : 2.7)
c W <1 <1 <1

6/61


Protection unit type LT3 SE LT3 SA LT3 SM
Resistance Tripping Ω 2700…3100 2700…3100 2700…3100
Reset Ω 1500…1650 1500…1650 1500…1650
Maximum number of probes Probes y 250 Ω at 25° 6 6 6
fitted in series (2)
Voltage at terminals Normal operation V < 2.5 < 2.5 < 2.5
in the thermistor circuit (R = 1500 Ω)
Conforming to IEC 60034-11 V < 7.5 < 7.5 < 7.5
(R = 4000 Ω)
Thermistor probe Operating threshold Ω – < 20 < 20
short-circuit detection
Connection of probes Distance m 300 400 500 1000 (3)
to the LT3
Minimum c.s.a. of conductors mm2 0.75 1 1.5 2.5
Electrical characteristics of the output relay contacts

Contact type Single voltage or dual voltage 1 N/C 1 N/C + 1 N/O 1 N/C + 1 N/O
Multivoltage – 2 C/O 2 C/O
Rated insulation voltage V a 500
Maximum operational voltage V a 250 (a 400 V for LT3 SM00V)
Rated impulse Uimp kV 2.5

withstand voltage
Operational power At 220 V VA 100 for 0.5 million operating cycles
Breaking capacity In cat. AC-16 120 V A 6

250 V A 3
In DC-13 24 V A 2
Cabling (cage type connector) Without cable end mm2 2 x 1…1 x 2.5
for flexible or solid cable With cable end mm2 1 x 0.75…2 x 2.5
6 Thermistor probe characteristics

Probe type DA1 TTppp DA1 TSppp
Conforming to standards IEC 60034-11. Mark A
Resistance At 25 °C Ω 3 x 250 in series 250
Rated operational voltage Per probe V c 2.5 V max c 2.5 V max

(Ue)
Rated insulation voltage kV 2.5 1
(Ui)
Insulation Reinforced Reinforced
Length of connecting cables Between probes mm 250 –
Between probe and m 1 1

motor terminal plate
(2) Provided that the total resistance of the probe circuit is less than 1500 Ω at 20 °C.
(3) For distances greater than 500 m take cabling precautions (twisted shielded pairs).

6/62

LT3 S protection unit/thermistor probe combination

Guaranteed operating zones: examples with 3 probes type DA1 TTppp (250 Ω at
25 °C) in series, conforming to standard IEC 60034-11, Mark A.
LT3 SE, LT3 SA, LT3 SM protection units
Resistance
(ohms)
10 000
3100 Trip zone

2700
1650 Reset zone
1500
1000
750
100
20
Trip zone on probe short-circuit
10
Temperature
NOT
NOT + 15 °C
-20 0
NOT -20 °C
NOT -5 °C
NOT +5 °C
(°C)
1 3 probes type DA1 TTppp (250 Ω at 25 °C) in series.
NOT: Nominal Operating Temperature
Protection unit tripped.

6
Protection unit reset.

6/63
References 6

Protection units (without fault memory)

108694-24-M
Units with automatic reset with thermistor short-circuit detection

Connection Voltage Output Reference Weight
contact kg
Cage connectors a 50/60 Hz 115 V N/C LT3 SE00F 0.220
230 V N/C LT3 SE00M 0.220
c 24 V N/C LT3 SE00BD 0.220
Units with automatic reset with thermistor short-circuit detection

On front panel: fault and voltage signalling indicator.
LT3 SE00M Connection Voltage Output Reference Weight

contact kg
a 50/60 Hz
108698-24-M
Cage connectors 115/230 V N/C + N/O LT3 SA00M 0.220
c 24/48 V N/C + N/O LT3 SA00ED 0.220
a 50/60 Hz 24…230 V 2 C/O LT3 SA00MW 0.220

or c
Protection units (with fault memory)

Units with manual reset with thermistor short-circuit detection
On front panel:
- fault and voltage signalling indicator,
- Test and Reset button.
Connection Voltage Output Reference Weight

LT3 SA00M contact kg
Cage connectors a 50/60 Hz 400 V N/C + N/O LT3 SM00V 0.220
108696-24-M
24/48 V N/C + N/O LT3 SM00E 0.220
115/230 V N/C + N/O LT3 SM00M 0.220
6 c 24/48 V N/C + N/O LT3 SM00ED 0.220
a 50/60 Hz 24…230 V 2 C/O LT3 SM00MW 0.220

or c
LT3 SM00M

pages 6/61 to 6/63 page 6/66 pages 6/66 and 6/67
6/64

PTC thermistor probes (1)

813383
Description Nominal Operating Sold in Unit Weight

Temperature (NOT) lots of reference
°C kg
Integrated triple probes 90 10 DA1 TT090 0.010
110 10 DA1 TT110 0.010
120 10 DA1 TT120 0.010
130 10 DA1 TT130 0.010
140 10 DA1 TT140 0.010
150 10 DA1 TT150 0.010
160 10 DA1 TT160 0.010
170 10 DA1 TT170 0.010
Surface probes 60 10 DA1 TS060 0.005
DA1 TT ppp 70 10 DA1 TS070 0.005
80 10 DA1 TS080 0.005

813384
90 10 DA1 TS090 0.005
100 10 DA1 TS100 0.005

lots of reference
kg
Adapter For fixing on 4 rail 10 RHZ 66 0.005
DZ5 MB
Marking accessories
Clip-in markers Strips of 10 identical 25 AB1 Rp (2) 0.002
6
(maximum of 5 per unit) numbers (0 to 9)

capital letters (A to Z)
DA1 TSppp
(2) When ordering, replace the p in the reference with the number or letter required.

pages 6/61 to 6/63 page 6/66 pages 6/66 and 6/67
6/65
schemes, Thermistor protection units

setting-up 6
Dimensions
LT3 SE, SA, SM
Mounting on 5 rail AM1 DP200 Mounting on 1 4 rail
(with adapter RHZ 66)
100 115
50
98,4
100
50
RHZ 66
22,5
Schemes for “no fault” operation

LT3 SE LT3 SA dual voltage LT3 SA multivoltage
Without fault memory
A1
A1
A1
B1
or
96 95
T1 96 T1 T1
(1) Ue (1) 98 Ue (2) 05
08
T2 95 T2 97 T2
Fault Fault
06
95
98
A2
A2
A2
96
–A
–A –A
–M –K –M –K –H –M –K –H
–K –K –K
LT3 SM dual voltage and 400 V (without B1) LT3 SM multivoltage LT3 Sp dual voltage
Terminal A1 B1
A1
B1
Voltage 48 V 24 V
or
A1
96 95
T1 T1
6 Ue (1) 98 Ue (1) 05
08
230 V 115 V
T2 97 T2
Fault Fault 06
95
Y1 Test Y1 Test 98
– Rd Reset – Rd Reset
A2
A2
96
Y2 Y2
–A –A
–M –K –H –M –K –H
–K –K
Setting-up
Cabling
It is inadvisable to use the same multi-core cable for the thermistor probe circuit and the power circuit. This is especially important for long cable runs.
If it is impossible to comply with the above recommendation, a pair of twisted conductors must be used for the thermistor probe circuit.
Testing the insulation of the line connecting the thermistors to the LT3 S unit
Before carrying out this test, short-circuit all the terminals of the LT3 S protection unit.
Measure the insulation value between these terminals and earth using a megger or a flash tester, progressively increasing the voltage to the value defined by the
standards.
Checking the PTC thermistor probes for correct operation
With the machine stopped, in the cold state and after having taken all the necessary safety precautions:
b disconnect the line linking the thermistors to the LT3 S protection unit, at the terminals of the machine being protected: motor, etc.,
b using an ohmmeter with a voltage rating less than or equal to 2.5 V, measure the resistance of the probe circuit at the machine terminals,
b depending on the number and type of thermistors connected in series, check that their resistance value at 25 °C is correct.
Example: motor fitted with 3 PTC thermistor probes with a resistance y 250 Ω at 25 °C.
Any value higher than 250 x 3 = 750 Ω indicates a problem.

(2) Relay energised: the contacts are shown in the "operating" position.
.
6/66
Operation 6

LT3 SA protection units

Starting
L1
The LT3 SA is normally energised and its internal relay is in the pre-energised
L2 position.
or
A1
B1
96
L3
T1 The motor is started by operating pushbutton M automatically held in by K (3-wire
Ue 98
N control circuit).
T2 97
Fault
– Ko 95
Thermal fault
A2
–K
The strong increase in resistance of the PTC probes at the moment their temperature
–A reaches the nominal operating temperature (NOT) is detected by the LT3 SA unit
and causes the relay to drop out; indicator H comes on, as does the built-in indicator
–M –K –H
on unit LT3 SA.
–K Contactor K drops out and pressing button M has no effect.
Operating
temperature Reset
NOT, Tripping As the motor cools, it reaches the reset threshold, 2 to 3°C below the nominal
threshold
Reset threshold operating temperature.
The relay resets and the motor can be started by pressing button M.
Relay Ko
Fault indicator
Contactor K
Pushbutton M
LT3 SM protection units

Operation is very similar to that described above, except for the following:
L1
L2 Reset
or
A1
B1
96
L3
T1 After tripping on thermal fault and cooling to the reset threshold, the Test/RESET
Ue 98
N button on the unit (R1) or a remote reset button (Rd) must be pressed to energise the
T2 97 relay.
Fault
– Ko
– R1
95
The fault is therefore memorised, even though the temperature of the probes has 6
dropped to well below the reset threshold.
A2
–K
–A
– Rd –M –K –H
Signalling circuit
–K As the relay is fitted with 2 separate contacts, the signalling voltage may be different
from the contactor control voltage.
Operating
temperature
NOT, Tripping Test
threshold
Reset threshold Pressing the Test/RESET button simulates a fault and causes the relay to drop out:
the FAULT indicator comes on, as does the remote signalling indicator. The unit is
Test/Reset reset by pressing the Test/RESET button again.
button
Reset Rd
Relay Ko
Fault indicator
Contactor K
Pushbutton M
6/67
Presentation, Protection components 6
characteristics 6
Single-pole magnetic over current relays
Presentation
The RM1 XA electromagnetic relay detects over current peaks in excess of the
maximum permissible current value. It is designed for the protection of circuits which
are not subject to current peaks (starters, resistors) or for controlling starting peaks
on slip ring motors.
It trips instantaneously and is not suitable for frequent operation (12 operating cycles
per hour). It can withstand a continuous current equivalent to 1.25 times the minimum
setting current.
Conforming to standards Standard version NF C 63-650, VDE 0660
Approvals CSA
Protective treatment Standard version “TC”, special version “TH”
Ambient air temperature °C Storage: - 60…+ 70

around the device Operation: - 40…+ 60
Operating position ± 15° in relation to normal vertical mounting position

Maximum rated operational voltage V a or c 600
Frequency limits Hz 0…60

of the rated operational current
Electrical characteristics of auxiliary contacts
Occasional making and

breaking capacities a.c. supply Voltage V 48 110 220 380 600
Power (1) VA 4000 12 000 17 000 22 000 –
d.c. supply Voltage V 48 110 220 440 600
6 Power (2) W 240 200 190 180 180
(1) Circuit such as the electromagnet of a contactor - cos ϕ inrush: 0.7 and cos ϕ sealed: 0.4.
(2) Circuit such as an electromagnet without economy resistor ; time constant varying from 20
ms for 5 W to 200 ms for 100 W or more.
Operating times
Time in ms
Operating times: because of the numerous applications for RM1 XA over current
relays, it is not possible to give precise operating times. The curves shown are
therefore purely indicative.
100
90
80
70
60
50 Setting
points
40
4 2…5 In
30
3 1,6 In
20
2 In
10 1 0,8 In
8
0,9 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
current passing/set current

6/68
References 6
Non-latching
533558
With 1 C/O contact block, non-latching

Recommanded Setting range Maximum Reference Weight
operating range (trip current) continuous
(motor In) current
a or c
A A A kg
a or c 0.7…1.15 1.25…4 1.6 RM1 XA001 0.990
RM1 XA001 1.16…1.8 2…6.3 2.5 RM1 XA002 0.990
1.9…2.9 3.2…10 4 RM1 XA004 0.990
3…4.6 5…16 6.3 RM1 XA006 0.990
4.7…7.2 8…25 10 RM1 XA010 0.990
7.3…11.5 12.5…40 16 RM1 XA016 0.990
11.6…18 20…63 25 RM1 XA025 0.990
18.1…29 32…100 40 RM1 XA040 0.990
29.1…46 50…160 63 RM1 XA063 0.990
46.1…72 80…250 100 RM1 XA100 0.990
73…115 125…400 160 RM1 XA160 0.990
116…145 160…500 200 RM1 XA200 0.990
146…230 250…800 315 RM1 XA315 0.990
231…360 400 …1250 500 RM1 XA500 0.990
a 361…630 630…2200 1000 RM1 XA101 0.990
c 361…570 630…2000 1000 RM1 XA101 0.990
Accessory (to be ordered separately)

Description Reference Weight 6
kg
1 C/O contact block, non-latching RM1 ZG21 0.060

6/69
Latching with manual reset

533559
With 1 C/O contact block, latching with manual reset

Recommanded Setting range Maximum Reference Weight
operating range (trip current) continuous
(motor In) current
a or c
A A A kg
a or c 0.7…1.15 1.25…4 1.6 RM1 XA0011 0.990
RM1 XA0011 1.16…1.8 2…6.3 2.5 RM1 XA0021 0.990
1.9…2.9 3.2…10 4 RM1 XA0041 0.990
3…4.6 5…16 6.3 RM1 XA0061 0.990
4.7…7.2 8…25 10 RM1 XA0101 0.990
7.3…11.5 12.5…40 16 RM1 XA0161 0.990

533560
11.6…18 20…63 25 RM1 XA0251 0.990
18.1…29 32…100 40 RM1 XA0401 0.990
29.1…46 50…160 63 RM1 XA0631 0.990
46.1…72 80…250 100 RM1 XA1001 0.990
RM1 XA1001 73…115 125…400 160 RM1 XA1601 0.990

+
ER1 XA2p
116…145 160…500 200 RM1 XA2001 0.990
146…230 250…800 315 RM1 XA3151 0.990
231…360 400…1250 500 RM1 XA5001 0.990
a 361…630 630…2200 1000 RM1 XA1011 0.990

533561
c 361…570 630…2000 1000 RM1 XA1011 0.990

6 Description Reference Weight
kg
1 C/O contact block, latching RM1 ZH21 0.070
Electrical reset (1) ER1 XA2p 0.240

(consumption: inrush, sealed: 500 VA)
RM1 XA0011 (fitted to the relay together with a latching contact block)
+ Basic reference. Complete with code indicating control circuit
RM1 ZH21 voltage (2)
(1) The impulse duration must not exceed 2 seconds within 10 minute intervals.
(2) Standard coil voltages for electrical reset:
Volts 24 48 110 220 380
50 Hz B E F M Q

6/70
schemes 6
Dimensions
RM1 XAppp, RM1 XA001…XA040 RM1 XA063, XA100 RM1 XA160, XA200, RM1 XA101,
RM1 XAppp1 RM1 XA0011…XA0401 and XA315 and XA500 RM1 XA1011
RM1 XA0631, XA1001 RM1 XA1601, XA2001,
and XA3151 and XA5001
Common side view
L1
d1
M4/M5 M12
RM1 ZH2
=
25
25 25 25
M
110
M
124
2
=
L 27,5 27,5 S S 50
13 123 55 d d 63,5
RM1 XAppp1 with electrical reset ER1 XA2p RM1 d d1 M L L1 S Ø

XA 063 20.5 – 83 25 40 15 M6
48 XA 100 20.5 – 87 25 40 20 M8
XA 160 27.5 5.5 94 25 40 25 M8
XA 200 27.5 5.5 94 25 40 25 M8
XA 315 35.5 – 74 44 55 30 M10
XA 500 40.5 7 84 44 55 40 M10
XA 101 – – – 37 64 – –
155 27,5 27,5

55
Schemes 6
RM1 XAppp1 RM1 XAppp RM1 XA
Latching Non-latching 3-wire control (without 2-wire control (with 3-wire control
mechanical latching) mechanical latching) (with “trip” signal)
1
91
91
91
91
1
1
91
93
93
93
93
93
– RM1 – RM1 – RM1

92
94
92
94
94
92
94
92
92
94
2
2
2
2
11
11
– S1 – S1
12
12
13
13
13
13
13
1 2
– S2 – KM1 – S2 – KM1
14
A1 14
14
14
A1 14
X1
A1
– KM1 – KM1 – KM1 – H1

A2
A2
A2
X2
Characteristics: References :
6/71
7/0
Contents 0
7 - Control relays
Control relays
b k control relays
v For a.c or d.c control circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 7/4

v For d.c control circuit (low consumption) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 7/5
v Instantaneous and time delay auxiliary contact blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . page 7/6
v Mounting and marking accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 7/7
b Mini-control relays
v Mini-control relays CA2 SK and CA3 SK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 7/12

v Mini-control relay with alternating contacts CA2 SKE . . . . . . . . . . . . page 7/12
v Instantaneous auxiliary contacts and coil suppressor modules . . . . . page 7/13
b TeSys d control relays and add-on blocks
v Control circuit: a.c., d.c. or low consumption, . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 7/21

v Add-on blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 7/22
v Accessories and spare parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 7/23
Zelio Time: timing relays

Zelio Control: measurement and control relays

7/1
Characteristics 7
Control relays 7
k control relays
Environment
Without derating Without derating Possible positions for CA2

K only, with derating, please
consult your Regional Sales
Office.
Connection Min. Max. Max. to IEC 60947
Screw clamp connections Solid cable mm2 1 x 1.5 2x4 1 x 4 + 1 x 2.5
Flexible cable without cable end mm2 1 x 0.75 2x4 2 x 2.5
Flexible cable with cable end mm2 1 x 0.34 1 x 1.5 + 1 x 2.5 1 x 1.5 + 1 x 2.5
Spring terminals Solid cable mm2 1 x 0.75 1 x 1.5 2 x 1.5
Flexible cable without cable end mm2 1 x 0.75 1 x 1.5 2 x 1.5
Faston connectors Clip mm 2 x 2.8 or 1 x 6.35
Solder pins for With locating device between 4 mm x 35 microns
printed circuit board power and control circuits
Tightening torque Philips head n° 2 and Ø 6 N.m 0.8…1.3
Terminal referencing Conforming to standards Up to 8 contacts
EN 50005 and EN 50011
Protective treatment Conf. to IEC 60068 (DIN 50016) "TC” (Klimafest, Climateproof)
(devices with screw clamp terminals or pins for printed circuit board)
Ambient air temperature Storage °C - 50...+ 80
around the device Operation °C - 25...+ 50
Vibration resistance Control relay open 2 gn
5...300 Hz Control relay closed 4 gn
Flame resistance Conforming to UL 94 Self-extinguishing material V1
and 16-102
Shock resistance Control relay open 10 gn
(1/2 sine wave, 11 ms) Control relay closed 15 gn
Safety separation of circuits Conforming to VDE 0106 SELV (Safety Extra Low Voltage), up to 400 V
and IEC 60536
Control relay type CA2 K CA3 K CA4 K
7 Rated control circuit voltage (Uc)

Control voltage limits For operation
V a 12...690
0.8...1.15 Uc
c 12...250
0.8...1.15 Uc
c 12...120
0.7...1.3 Uc
(y 50 °C) single voltage coil For drop-out y 0.2 Uc y 0.1 Uc y 0.1 Uc
Mechanical durability at Uc 50/60 Hz coil 10 – –
In millions of operating cycles Standard c coil – 20 –
Wide range, – – 30
low consumption c coil
Maximum operating rate In operating cycles per hour 10 000 10 000 6000
Average consumption Inrush 30 VA 3W 1.8 W
at 20 °C and at Uc Sealed 4.5 VA 3W 1.8 W
Heat dissipation W 1.3 3 1.8
Operating time Between coil energisation and
at 20 °C and at Uc opening of the N/C contacts ms 5...15 25...35 25...35
closing of the N/O contacts ms 10...20 30...40 30...40
Between coil de-energisation and
opening of the N/O contacts ms 10...20 10 10...20
closing of the N/C contacts ms 15...25 15 15...25
Maximum immunity to microbreaks ms 2 2 2

7/2
Control relays 7
k control relays
Contact characteristics of control relays and instantaneous contact blocks

Number of auxiliary contacts On CAp K 4
On LA1 K 2 or 4 for CA2 K and CA3 K, 2 for CA4 K
Rated insulation voltage (Ui) Conforming to BS 5424 V 690
Conventional thermal current For ambient temperature y 50 °C A 10
(Ith)
Minimum switching capacity U min (DIN 19 240) V 17
I min mA 5
and VDE 0660, gG fuse
Rated making capacity Conforming to IEC 60947
I rms A 110
Short-time rating Permissible for
1s A 80
500 ms A 90
100 ms A 110
Non-overlap distance CAp K and LA1 K: linked mm 0.5 (see schemes page 7/9)
contacts conforming to INRS,
BIA and CNA specifications
Electrical durability (valid for up to 3600 Electrical durability (valid for up to
operating cycles/hour) on an inductive load 1200 operating cycles/hour) on an
such as the coil of an electromagnet: inductive load such as the coil of an
making current (cos ϕ 0.7) = 10 times the electromagnet, without economy
power broken (cos ϕ 0.4) resistor, the time constant increasing
with the load.
V 24 48
110/ 220/ 380/ 440 600/ V 24 48 110 220 440 600
127 230 400 690
Occasional making capacity VA 1000 2050 5000 10 000 14 000 13 000 9000 W 720 600 400 300 230 200
1 Breaking limit of contacts valid for: Power broken in VA Power broken in W
b maximum of 50 operating cycles at 10 s intervals 16 000

(power broken = making current x cos ϕ 0.7).
Time constant
10 000 1000 4
2 Electrical durability of contacts for:
8000
6000
5000 1
700
500
7
in ms
4000 3
b 1 million operating cycles (2a) 3000 300
b 3 million operating cycles (2b) 2000 250 200
b 10 million operating cycles (2c).
1000 4 200 100
800 80 2a
3 Breaking limit of contacts valid for: 600 60
b maximum of 20 operating cycles at 10 s intervals 500
400
140 50
40 2b
with current passing for 0.5 s per operating cycle. 300 100 30
200 2a 20
4 Thermal limit 2c
100 50 10
80
2b
2c 8
60 6
20
40
24 48 110 220 380 500 12 24 48 110 220 440 600 V
120 440 690 V

7/3
References 7
Control relays 7
k control relays
For a.c. or d.c. control circuit
Control relays for a.c. control circuit

b Mounting on 35 mm 7 rail or Ø 4 screw fixing.
b Screws in the open "ready-to-tighten" position.
816892
Control circuit Auxiliary Basic reference, Weight

Consumption contacts to be completed by adding
the voltage code (1)
kg
CA2 KN40pp 4.5 VA 4 – CA2 KN40pp 0.180
3 1 CA2 KN31pp 0.180
2 2 CA2 KN22pp 0.180

816891
4.5 VA 4 – CA2 KN403pp 0.180

3 1 CA2 KN313pp 0.180
2 2 CA2 KN223pp 0.180

4.5 VA 4 – CA2 KN407pp 0.180
3 1 CA2 KN317pp 0.180
2 2 CA2 KN227pp 0.180
CA2 KN403pp
4.5 VA 4 – CA2 KN405pp 0.210
3 1 CA2 KN315pp 0.210
2 2 CA2 KN225pp 0.210
Control relays for d.c. control circuit

819411

3W 4 – CA3 KN40pp 0.225
3 1 CA3 KN31pp 0.225
2 2 CA3 KN22pp 0.225

3W 4 – CA3 KN403pp 0.225
3 1 CA3 KN313pp 0.225
CA3 KN407pp 2 2 CA3 KN223pp 0.225
7 Faston connectors, 1 x 6.35 or 2 x 2.8

3W 4 – CA3 KN407pp 0.225
3 1 CA3 KN317pp 0.225
2 2 CA3 KN227pp 0.225

3W 4 – CA3 KN405pp 0.255
3 1 CA3 KN315pp 0.255
2 2 CA3 KN225pp 0.255
Control relays CA2 K (0.8...1.15 Uc) (0.85...1.1 Uc)
Volts a 12 20 24(2) 36 42 48 110 115 127 220/ 230 230/ 380/ 400 400/ 440 500 660/
50/60 Hz 230 240 400 415 690
Code J7 Z7 B7 C7 D7 E7 F7 FE7 FC7 M7 P7 U7 Q7 V7 N7 R7 S7 Y7
Up to and including 240 V, coil with integral suppression device available: add 2 to the code required. Example: J72
Control relays CA3 K (0.8...1.15 Uc)
Volts c 12 20 24(2) 36 48 60 72 100 110 125 200 220 230 240 250
Code JD ZD BD CD ED ND SD KD FD GD LD MD MPD MUD UD
(2) When connecting an electronic sensor or timer in series with the coil of the control relay, select a 20 V coil (a code Z7,
c code ZD) so as to compensate for the incurred voltage drop.

7/4
References 7
Control relays 7
k control relays
For d.c. control circuit
Low consumption control relays (d.c. control circuit)

Control circuit Auxiliary Basic reference, Weight

816895
Consumption contacts to be completed

by adding the
voltage code (1)
kg
1.8 W 4 – CA4 KN40pp 0.235
3 1 CA4 KN31pp 0.235
2 2 CA4 KN22pp 0.235
CA4 KN40ppp
1.8 W 4 – CA4 KN403pp 0.235
3 1 CA4 KN313pp 0.235
2 2 CA4 KN223pp 0.235

1.8 W 4 – CA4 KN407pp 0.235
3 1 CA4 KN317pp 0.235
2 2 CA4 KN227pp 0.235

1.8 W 4 – CA4 KN405pp 0.265
3 1 CA4 KN315pp 0.265
2 2 CA4 KN225pp 0.265
Control relays CA4 K (Wide range coil: 0.7...1.3 Uc)
Volts c 12 20 24 48 72 110 120

7/5
References 7
Control relays 7
k control relays
Instantaneous and time delay auxiliary contact blocks

Clip-on front mounting, 1 per control relay
816899
Connection Composition Reference Weight
kg
Screw clamp terminals 2 – LA1 KN20 0.045
LA1 KN20
– 2 LA1 KN02 0.045
1 1 LA1 KN11 0.045
4 – LA1 KN40 (1) 0.045
3 1 LA1 KN31 (1) 0.045
2 2 LA1 KN22 (1) 0.045
816900
1 3 LA1 KN13 (1) 0.045

– 4 LA1 KN04 (1) 0.045
Spring terminals 2 – LA1 KN203 0.045

– 2 LA1 KN023 0.045
1 1 LA1 KN113 0.045
LA1 KN40
4 – LA1 KN403 (1) 0.045
3 1 LA1 KN313 (1) 0.045
2 2 LA1 KN223 (1) 0.045
1 3 LA1 KN133 (1) 0.045
– 4 LA1 KN043 (1) 0.045
Faston connectors 2 – LA1 KN207 0.045

1 x 6.35 or 2 x 2.8 – 2 LA1 KN027 0.045
1 1 LA1 KN117 0.045
4 – LA1 KN407 (1) 0.045
3 1 LA1 KN317 (1) 0.045
2 2 LA1 KN227 (1) 0.045
1 3 LA1 KN137 (1) 0.045
– 4 LA1 KN047 (1) 0.045

b Relay output with common point changeover contact, a or c 240 V, 2 A maximum
b Control voltage 0.85...1.1 Uc
b Maximum switching capacity 250 VA or 150 W
b Operating temperature - 10...+ 60 °C
b Reset time: 1.5 s during the time delay period 0.5 s after the time delay period
Clip-on front mounting, 1 per control relay

816899
Voltage Type Timing Composition Reference Weight

range
7
V s kg
LA2 KT2p
a or c 24...48 On-delay 1...30 1 LA2 KT2E 0.040
a 110...240 On-delay 1...30 1 LA2 KT2U 0.040
Other versions Electronic timers type RE4.

(1) Block of 4 contacts for use on CA2 K and CA3 K.

7/6
References 7
Control relays 7
k control relays
Mounting and marking accessories
Suppressor modules incorporating LED indicator

Mounting Type For Sold in Unit Weight
and connection voltages lots of reference
kg
Clips onto front of relay Varistor (1) a and c 5 LA4 KE1B 0.010
with locating device. 12...24 V
No tools required.
a and c 5 LA4 KE1E 0.010
32...48 V
a and c 5 LA4 KE1FC 0.010

50...129 V
LA4 K ppp
a and c 5 LA4 KE1UG 0.010
130...250 V
Diode + Zener diode (2) c 5 LA4 KC1B 0.010

12...24 V
c 5 LA4 KC1E 0.010

32...48 V
RC (3) a 5 LA4 KA1U 0.010

220...250 V
lots of reference
kg
Mounting plates On 1 4 rail Clip-on 1 LA9 D973 0.025
On 2 4 rails 110/120 mm 10 DX1 AP25 0.065

fixing centres
Marking accessories
LA9 D973
lots of reference
kg
Marker holder Clip-on fixing on front face – 100 LA9 D90 0.001
Clip-in markers 4 maximum per relay Strips of 10 25 AB1 Rp (4) 0.002

identical
numbers 0 to 9
Strips of 10 25 AB1 Gp (4) 0.002

identical capital
letters A to Z
7
Polarised component.
(3) Protection by limiting the transient voltage to 3 Uc max. and limitation of the oscillating
frequency.
(4) Complete the reference by replacing the dot with the required character.
Dimensions :
page 7/8
7/7
Dimensions, Control relays 7
mounting 7
k control relays
Control relays
CA2 K, CA3 K, CA4 K
On panel On printed circuit board
LA1 K 8,65 = = = A1
=
58
58
50
53
50
35 57 = 35 = 45 A2
=
45

58
57 45
LA9 D973 DX1 AP25

On asymmetrical rail with clip-on mounting plates On asymmetrical rail with clip-on mounting plates
5
DZ5 ME5
50
120
110
57 21 = 35 =
5
45
57
57 27 45

LA2 KT
7 On control relay
LA2 KT
27
58
38 38
38 57
Suppressor modules
LA4 K
On control relay
LA4 K
25
22 6
58
22 57

7/8
Schemes 7
Control relays 7
k control relays
Control relays With integral suppression device

CA2 K, CA3 K, CA4 K CA3 K CA4 K
4 N/O 3 N/O + 1 N/C 2 N/O + 2 N/C
+A1
13/NO
23/NO
33/NO
43/NO
13/NO
43/NO
21/NC
31/NC
13/NO
33/NO
43/NO
21/NC
A1
A1
A1
A2
A2
A2
14
24
34
44
14
22
32
44
14
22
34
44
–A2
+ A1 _ A2
Instantaneous auxiliary contact blocks LA1 K

For CA2 K, CA3 K, CA4 K For CA2 K, CA3 K
2 N/O 2 N/C 1 N/O + 1 N/C 4 N/O 3 N/O + 1 N/C 2 N/O + 2 N/C
LA1 KN20, LA1 KN02, LA1 KN11, LA1 KN40, LA1 KN31, LA1 KN22,
LA1 KN207 LA1 KN027 LA1 KN117 LA1 KN407 LA1 KN317 LA1 KN227
51/NC
61/NC
53/NO
63/NO
53/NO
53/NO
63/NO
73/NO
83/NO
53/NO
73/NO
83/NO
53/NO
83/NO
61/NC
61/NC
61/NC
71/NC
52
62
62
54
64
54
54
64
74
84
54
62
74
84
54
62
72
84
1 N/O + 3 N/C 4 N/C
LA1 KN13, LA1 KN137 LA1 KN04, LA1 KN047
51/NC
61/NC
71/NC
81/NC
53/NO
61/NC
71/NC
81/NC
52
62
72
82
54
62
72
82
Electronic time delay contact blocks LA2 KT Suppressor modules

For CA2 K, CA3 K, CA4 K LA4 KC LA4 KE
1 C/O
LA2 KT2
A1
16
18
15
A2
+ _
Characteristics: References: Dimensions, mounting:

7/9
Characteristics 7
Control relays 7
Mini-control relays types CAp SK and CA2 SKE
Environment
Rated insulation voltage (Ui) Conforming to IEC 60947, V 690
VDE 0110 gr C, BS 5424,
CSA 22-2 n° 14, UL 508
(DIN 50015)
Connection by connectors Min. Max.

Solid cable mm2 1 x 1.5 or 2 x 1.5 1 x 6 or 2 x 4
Flexible cable with cable end mm2 1 x 0.35 or 2 x 0.35 1 x 6 or 2 x 1.5
Terminal referencing Conforming to standards Up to 4 contacts
EN 50005 and EN 50011
Control relay type CA2 SK CA2 SKE CA3 SK
Rated control circuit voltage (Uc) V a 24…400 c 12…72
Control voltage limits For operation 0.85…1.1 Uc 0.85…1.1 Uc
(y 50 °C) For drop-out u 0.20 Uc u 0.10 Uc
Average consumption Inrush 16 VA 23 VA 2.2 W
at 20 °C and at Uc Sealed 4.2 VA 4.9 VA 2.2 W
Heat dissipation W 1.4 1.5 2.2
Operating time Between coil energisation and
at 20 °C and at Uc opening of the N/C contacts ms 8…16 10…18
closing of the N/O contacts ms 7…14 8…12
Between coil de-energisation and
opening of the N/O contacts ms 6…8 4…6
7 Maximum operating rate

closing of the N/C contacts
In operating cycles per hour
ms 8…10
1200
6…8
1200
Mechanical durability at Uc 50/60 Hz coil 10 –
in millions of operating cycles Standard c coil – 10

7/10
Control relays 7
Auxiliary contact characteristics of mini-control relays and instantaneous contact blocks

Rated operational voltage V Up to 690
(Ue)
Rated insulation voltage (Ui) Conforming to IEC 96047, V 690
BS 5424, VDE 0110 group C,
CSA C 22-2 n° 14
Conventional rated For ambient temperature A 10

and VDE 0660, gl fuse

Electrical durability (valid for up to 3600 Electrical durability (valid for up to 1200
V 24 48 110/ 220/ 380/ 440 V 24 48 110 220 440

127 230 400
Occasional making capacity VA 1000 2050 5000 10000 14000 13 000 W 720 600 400 300 230

7/11
References 7
Control relays 7
Mini-control relays types CA2 SK and CA3 SK

Mini-control relay type CA2 SKE with alternating contacts
Mini-control relays
b Width of mini-control relays 27 mm.
533664
b Mounting on 35 mm 7 rail.
Control circuit supply Auxiliary contacts Basic reference, Weight

to be completed
by adding the
voltage code (1)
kg
CA2 SK20pp a.c. supply 2 – CA2 SK20pp 0.132
1 1 CA2 SK11pp 0.132
d.c. supply 2 – CA3 SK20pp 0.132
1 1 CA3 SK11pp 0.132
Mini-control relay with alternating contacts

This mini-control relay with alternating contacts (see function diagram page 7/15) makes it possible to
533665
automatically split the operating time between 2 circuits of a redundant system.

By regularly energising the "safety circuits", this device makes it possible to ensure that they are operating
correctly.
b Width of mini-control relay 45 mm.

b Fixing by Ø 4 screws.
b Cannot be fitted with front-mounted auxiliary contact block.
b Cannot be fitted with coil suppressor module.
CA2 SKE20pp Control circuit supply Auxiliary contacts Basic reference, Weight
to be completed
by adding the
voltage code (1)
kg
a.c. supply 2 – CA2 SKE20pp 0.175
Mini-control relays CA2 SK and CA2 SKE
Volts a 24 48 110 120 220 230 240 380 400
50/60 Hz
Mini-control relays CA3 SK
Volts c 12 24 36 48 72
7 Code JD BD CD ED SD

7/12
References 7
Control relays 7
Mini-control relays types CA2 SK and CA3 SK

Instantaneous auxiliary contacts and
coil suppressor modules

Clip-on front mounting
533666
For use on Maximum number Composition Reference Weight

control relays of blocks
per contactor
kg
CA2 SK20 1 2 – LA1 SK20 0.022
LA1 SK11 – 2 LA1 SK02 0.022
1 1 LA1 SK11 0.022
Suppressor modules
Connection without need for tools by clipping onto right-hand side of contactor
533667
For use on Type For Sold Unit Weight

control relays voltages in reference
lots of kg
CA2 SK and CA3 SK Varistor a and c 24 V…48 V 10 LA4 SKE1E 0.003
(1)
LA4 SKp1p
a and c 110 V…250 V 10 LA4 SKE1U 0.003
Diode c 24 V…250 V 10 LA4 SKC1U 0.003

(2)


7/13
Dimensions, mounting 7
Control relays 7
Dimensions
Mini-control relays
CA2 SK and CA3 SK
55,5 27 5 84,5
55,5 27
56
56
LA4 SK 3,5
LA1 SK (1) 3,5
(1) Only on CA2 SK20.

Mounting
Mini-control relays
CA2 SK and CA3 SK
55,5 27
56
Dimensions
CA2 SKE
68 45
58
7
4
Mounting
CA2 SKE
68 45
48-50
58
34-35

pages 7/10 and 7/11 pages 7/12 and 7/13 page 7/15
7/14
Schemes 7
Control relays 7
Schemes
CA2 SK20, CA3 SK20 CA2 SK11, CA3 SK11
2 N/O 1 N/O + 1 N/C
13/NO
23/NO
13/NO
21/NO
A1
A1
A2
14
24
A2
14
22
CA2 SKE CA2 SKE
2 N/O Function diagram
13/NO
23/NO
A1 A2 Energised
A1
De-energised
A2
14
24
13 14 Close
Open
23 24 Close
Open

2 N/O 2 N/C 1 N/O + 1 N/C
LA1 SK20 LA1 SK02 LA1 SK11
33/NO
43/NO
33/NO
41/NC
31/NC
41/NC
34
44
34
42
32
42
Characteristics : References : Dimensions, mounting :

pages 7/10 and 7/11 pages 7/12 and 7/13 page 7/14
7/15
Characteristics 7
TeSys control relays 7
TeSys d control relays
Control relay type CAD a CAD c CAD

low consumption
Environment
Rated insulation voltage (Ui) Conforming to IEC 60947-5-1 V 690 690 690
Overvoltage category III and
degree of pollution 3
Conforming to UL, CSA V 600 600 600
Rated impulse withstand Conforming to IEC 60947 kV 6 6 6

voltage (Uimp)
Separation of Conforming to IEC 60536 Reinforced insulation up to 400 V
electrical circuits and VDE 0106
Conforming to standards IEC 60947-5-1, N-F C 63-140, VDE 0660, BS 4794,
EN 60947-5
Degree of protection Conforming to VDE 0106 Front face protected against direct finger contact IP 2X Protection against direct
finger contact
Ambient air temperature Storage °C - 60…+ 80 - 60…+ 80 - 60…+ 80
around the device Operation, conforming to °C - 5…+ 60 - 5…+ 60 - 5…+ 60
IEC 60255 (0.8…1.1 UC)
For operation at Uc °C - 40…+ 70 - 40…+ 70 - 40…+ 70
Maximum operating altitude Without derating m 3000 3000 3000
Operating positions Without derating

in the following positions
30 °
1 80 °
180 °
180 °
°
30
90
°
°
9
° °
90
0
9
Shock resistance (1) Control relay open 10 gn 10 gn 10 gn

half sine wave for 11ms Control relay closed 15 gn 15 gn 15 gn
Vibration resistance (1) Control relay open 2 gn 2 gn 2 gn

5…300 Hz Control relay closed 4 gn 4 gn 4 gn
Screw clamp connections Flexible 1 conductor mm2 1…4 1…4 1…4

conductor 2 conductors mm2 1…4 1…4 1…4
without cable
end
7 Flexible
conductor with 2
1 conductor mm2 1…4 1…4 1…4
conductors mm2 1…2.5 1…2.5 1…2.5
cable end
Solid conductor 1 conductor mm2 1…4 1…4 1…4
without cable 2 conductors mm2 1…4 1…4 1…4
end
Spring terminal connections 1 or 2 flexible or rigid conductors mm2 1…2.5 1…2.5 1…2.5
without cable end
(1) In the least favourable direction, without change of contact state, with coil supplied at Uc.

pag

Solid Insulation - Electric Machines

Transféré par

Informations du document

Copyright

Formats disponibles

Partager ce document

Partager ou intégrer le document

Options de partage

Avez-vous trouvé ce document utile ?

Ce contenu est-il inapproprié ?

Droits d'auteur :

Formats disponibles

Solid Insulation - Electric Machines

Transféré par

Droits d'auteur :

Formats disponibles

Bataille

Catalogue : Motor starters solutions-Control protection components 06/07

Date de Parution : 04-06

Date : 31/08/2006 / Heure : 09:40

Chapitre 1 - Démarreurs et équipements nus - Projet 1

Chapitre 2 - Démarreurs et équipements en coffret - Projet 1

Chapitre 3 - Disjoncteurs moteurs - Projet 1

Chapitre 4 - Interrupteurs-sectionneurs - Projet

Chapitre 5 - Contacteurs - Projet 1

Chapitre 6 - Relais de protection - Projet 1

Chapitre 7 - Fonctions additionnelles d'automatisme - Projet 1

Chapitre 8 - Services - Projet 1

b Levels of services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/2

Selection guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .page 1/4

b D.O.L. starters, type 2 coordination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/10

Combination starters for customer assembly

v With circuit-breaker and overload protection built into the circuit-

D.O.L. starters, plate mounted, for motor control

Star-delta starters for motor control

v Without isolating device, pre-assembled . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/45

v Presentation and application examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/54

b PowerSuite software workshop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/72

v Control bases and control units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/76

b Modbus communication modules and pre-wired coil connection

integral 18, 32 and 63 contactor breakers

b Equipment selection for starters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/122

b Contactor breakers and reversing contactor breakers integral 18 . . . . . . page 1/126

b Contactor breakers and reversing contactor breakers integral 32 . . . . . . page 1/144

b Contactor breakers and reversing contactor breakers integral 63 . . . . . . page 1/166

Adaptators for use with busbar system

TeSys Quickfit installation system for motor starter

b Power circuit pre-wiring components. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/219

b Control-command pre-wiring components. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/221

Pre-assembled panel busbar system AK5

b Component mounting plates, extension plates, control terminal

b Variable speed drives for asynchronous motors

Selection guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/238

Type 1 and type 2 coordination according to the standard

Type 2 coordination increases reliability of operation.

(1) SCPD: short-circuit protection device.

No coordination Considerable risks to both persons and

Type 1 coordination The most frequently used solution.

Example: air conditioning in commercial premises.

Type 2 coordination This solution ensures reliability of operation.

Total coordination With this solution, no damage or misadjustment is

Examples: smoke extraction, fire-fighting pumps.

Applications Pre-assembled starters

Level of service Type 1 coordination Type 2 coordination – –

Power at 400 V Up to 5.5 kW Up to 37 kW Up to 37 kW Up to 132 kW

Starters for customer assembly

Small machines starting under full load: D.O.L. starters

Total coordination Type 1 and type 2 coordination – –

Up to 30 kW Up to 110 kW Up to 315 kW Up to 355 kW

Contactor-breaker Thermal magnetic Thermal-magnetic Fuse carrier Switch-disconnector-fuse

Combination automatic motor starters

D.O.L. starters, non-reversing, from 0.37 to 5.5 kW at 400/415 V, type 1 coordination

1 This pre-assembled combination comprises:

Combination automatic motor starters

D.O.L. starters, reversing, from 0.37 to 5.5 kW at 400/415 V, type 1 coordination

This pre-assembled combination comprises:

3 – 4 6…10 138 GV2 ME14 LC2 K09 GV2 ME14K2pp 0.460

Combination automatic motor starters

D.O.L. starters, non-reversing, from 0.06 to 37 kW at 400/415 V, type 1 coordination

1 This pre-assembled combination comprises: